GE Vernova

Multilin
8 Series 869

Technical Manual
Motor Protection System

Hardware Version: C
Firmware Version: 4.10
Publication Reference: 1601-0450-C410-1
Copyright statement
Copyright © 2023 GE Vernova. All rights reserved.
EnerVista, EnerVista Launchpad, and EnerVista D&I Setup software are registered trademarks of GE Vernova.
The contents of this manual are the property of GE Vernova. This documentation is furnished on license and may
not be reproduced in whole or in part without the permission of GE Vernova. The content of this manual is for
informational use only and is subject to change without notice.

Disclaimer
It is the responsibility of the user to verify and validate the suitability of all GE Grid Automation products. This
equipment must be used within its design limits. The proper application including the configuration and setting of
this product to suit the power system assets is the responsibility of the user, who is also required to ensure that all
local or regional safety guidelines are adhered to. Incorrect application of this product could risk damage to
property/the environment, personal injuries or fatalities and shall be the sole responsibility of the person/entity
applying and qualifying the product for use.
The content of this document has been developed to provide guidance to properly install, configure and maintain
this product for its intended applications. This guidance is not intended to cover every possible contingency that
may arise during commissioning, operation, service, or maintenance activities. Should you encounter any
circumstances not clearly addressed in this document, please contact your local GE service site.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
It is the sole responsibility of the user to secure their network and associated devices against cybersecurity
intrusions or attacks. GE Vernova and its affiliates are not liable for any damages or losses arising from or
related to such security intrusion or attacks.
Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction 1
1.1 Chapter Overview 3
1.2 Foreword 4
1.2.1 Target Audience 4
1.2.2 Typographical conventions 4
1.2.3 Nomenclature 5
1.3 Product overview 6
1.4 General description of the 8 Series 7
1.5 Functions and features 9
1.6 Security Overview 12
1.7 Order Codes 14
1.8 Cautions, warnings and notes 18
1.8.1 Safety words and definitions 18
1.8.2 General Cautions and Warnings 18
1.9 Must-read Information 21
1.9.1 Storage 21
1.10 For Further Assistance 22
1.10.1 Repairs 22

Chapter 2 Installation 23
2.1 Chapter Overview 25
2.2 Product Identification 26
2.3 Dimensions 27
2.4 Mounting 28
2.4.1 Standard Panel Mount 28
2.5 Draw-out Unit Withdrawal and Insertion 33
2.6 Removable Power Supply 35
2.7 Removable Magnetic Module 36
2.8 Remote Module I/O (RMIO) 39
2.9 IP20 Back Cover 41
2.10 Arc Flash Sensor 42
2.11 Physical considerations of wiring 45
2.11.1 Terminal Strip Types 46
2.11.2 Wire Size 47
2.12 Terminal connections 48
2.12.1 General connections 49
2.13 Terminal Identification 51
2.14 RMIO Module Installation 54
2.15 Phase Sequence and Transformer Polarity 56
2.16 Ground and Sensitive Ground CT Inputs 57
2.17 Zero-Sequence CT Installation 59
2.18 Voltage Inputs 60
2.19 Control Power 61
2.20 Contact Inputs 62
2.21 Output Relays 64
2.22 Serial Communications 67
2.23 IRIG-B 69
2.24 Typical Wiring Diagram 70
Contents

Chapter 3 Interfaces 77
3.1 Chapter Overview 79
3.2 First access 80
3.3 Front panel options 81
3.3.1 Graphical Display Pages 82
3.3.1.1 Menu hierarchy 83
3.3.1.2 Working with Graphical Display Pages 84
3.3.1.3 Single Line Diagram 87
3.3.2 Three-pushbutton front panel LEDs 89
3.3.3 Ten-pushbutton front panel LEDs 91
3.3.4 Home screen icons 94
3.3.5 Relay Messages 95
3.3.5.1 Target Messages 95
3.3.5.2 Self-test errors 95
3.3.5.3 Out of Service 100
3.3.5.4 Flash Messages 100
3.3.6 Label Removal 100
3.4 Software Interface 102
3.4.1 EnerVista D&I Setup software 102
3.4.1.1 Hardware & Software Requirements 102
3.4.1.2 Installing EnerVista D&I Setup software 102
3.4.1.3 Upgrading EnerVista D&I Setup software 103
3.4.2 Connecting EnerVista D&I Setup software to the relay 103
3.4.2.1 Using the Quick Connect Feature 103
3.4.2.2 Configuring Ethernet Communications 103
3.4.2.3 Connecting to the Relay 104
3.4.2.4 Configuring USB Address 104
3.4.3 Working with Setpoints 106
3.4.3.1 Entering Setpoints 106
3.4.3.2 Using Setpoint Files 108
3.4.3.3 Downloading and saving Setpoint files 109
3.4.3.4 Adding Setpoint files to the environment 109
3.4.3.5 Creating a new Setpoints file 109
3.4.3.6 Upgrading Setpoint files to a new revision 110
3.4.3.7 Printing Setpoints 110
3.4.3.8 Printing values from a connected device 111
3.4.3.9 Loading Setpoints from a File 111
3.4.3.10 Uninstalling files and clearing data 111
3.4.4 Quick Setup 111
3.4.5 Upgrading relay firmware 112
3.4.5.1 Loading new relay firmware 112
3.4.6 SLD Configurator 113
3.4.6.1 Control Objects 115
3.4.6.2 Status Objects 117
3.4.6.3 Metering Objects 118
3.4.6.4 Device Status Object 118
3.4.6.5 Static Objects 118
3.4.6.6 Front Panel Interaction 118
3.4.7 FlexCurve Editor 121
3.4.8 Transient Recorder (Waveform Capture) 122
3.4.9 Protection Summary 125
3.4.10 FlexLogic Favourites 126
3.4.11 Offline Settings File Conversion 126

ii 1601-0450
 Contents

3.4.11.1 Converting legacy files 126

3.4.11.2 Conversion Summary Report 127
3.4.11.3 Results Window 127

Chapter 4 About Setpoints 129

4.1 Chapter Overview 131
4.2 About Setpoints 132
4.3 Setpoints Entry Methods 133
4.4 Common Setpoints 134
4.5 Logic Diagrams 137

Chapter 5 Device Setpoints 139

5.1 Chapter Overview 141
5.2 Device menu hierarchy 142
5.3 Custom Configuration 143
5.4 Real-time Clock 146
5.4.1 PTP Configuration 146
5.4.2 Clock 148
5.4.3 SNTP Protocol 150
5.5 Security 151
5.5.1 Basic Security 154
5.5.2 CyberSentry 156
5.6 Communications 164
5.6.1 General communications setup 164
5.6.2 Modbus Protocol 164
5.6.3 Modbus configurable parameters 165
5.6.4 RS485 167
5.6.5 USB 167
5.6.6 Ethernet Ports 167
5.6.6.1 Network Settings Menu 168
5.6.7 Routing 169
5.6.8 DNP Protocol settings 172
5.6.9 IEC60870-5-104 177
5.6.10 IEC60870-5-103 179
5.6.11 IEC 61850 179
5.6.11.1 IEC61850 Configurator 180
5.7 Transient Recorder 183
5.8 Data Logger 185
5.9 Fault Reports 188
5.10 Event Data 190
5.11 Flex states 191
5.12 Front Panel 192
5.12.1 Programmable LEDs 192
5.12.1.1 LED allocation tables 193
5.12.2 Programmable Pushbuttons 195
5.12.3 Tab Pushbuttons 201
5.12.4 Annunciator 205
5.12.5 Display Properties 208
5.12.5.1 Support for Cyrillic languages 210
5.12.6 Scratchpad 210
5.12.7 Default Screens 210

1601-0450 iii
Contents

5.12.8 Home Screens 211

5.12.9 FlexScreens 212
5.13 Resetting 214
5.14 Installation 215
5.15 Self-test errors 218
5.16 Clear Records 223

Chapter 6 System Setpoints 225

6.1 Chapter Overview 227
6.2 System menu hierarchy 228
6.3 Current Sensing 229
6.4 Voltage sensing 233
6.5 Power Sensing 235
6.6 Power System 236
6.7 Preset Values 240
6.8 Motor setup 241
6.8.1 Variable fequency drives 247
6.9 Switching device 254
6.10 Breakers 255
6.11 Switches 261
6.12 FlexCurves 265

Chapter 7 Input and Output Setpoints 269

7.1 Chapter Overview 271
7.2 Inputs 272
7.2.1 Contact Inputs 272
7.2.2 Virtual Inputs 274
7.2.3 Remote Inputs 275
7.3 Outputs 277
7.3.1 Output Relays 277
7.3.1.1 Relay selected for breaker Trip 278
7.3.1.2 Relay selected for breaker close 281
7.3.1.3 Auxiliary Output Relays 282
7.3.2 Virtual Outputs 285
7.3.3 Analog Outputs 286

Chapter 8 Protection 291

8.1 Chapter Overview 293
8.2 Protection 294
8.2.1 Motor elements overview 294
8.2.1.1 Percent Differential 295
8.2.1.2 Thermal Model (49) 302
8.2.1.3 Current Unbalance (46) 332
8.2.1.4 Mechanical Jam (50LR) 339
8.2.1.5 Undercurrent (37) 341
8.2.1.6 Loss of Excitation (40) 344
8.2.1.7 Overload Alarm 349
8.2.1.8 Short Circuit 350
8.2.1.9 Motor Ground Fault (50SG) 353
8.2.1.10 Acceleration Time 358

iv 1601-0450
 Contents

8.2.1.11 Underpower (37P) 361

8.2.1.12 Squirrel Cage Speed-Dependent Thermal Protection 363
8.2.1.13 SM Field Undercurrent (37F) 372
8.2.1.14 SM Field Overcurrent (76F) 375
8.2.1.15 SM Field Undervoltage (27F) 378
8.2.1.16 SM Field Overvoltage (59F) 380
8.2.2 2-speed motor elements overview 382
8.2.2.1 2-Speed Thermal Model 382
8.2.2.2 2-Speed Acceleration 384
8.2.2.3 2-Speed Undercurrent 386
8.2.3 Current elements overview 388
8.2.3.1 Inverse Time Overcurrent Curves 389
8.2.3.2 Phase Time Overcurrent Protection (51P) 403
8.2.3.3 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection (50P) 408
8.2.3.4 Phase Directional Overcurrent Protection (67P) 410
8.2.3.5 Neutral Time Overcurrent Protection (51N) 413
8.2.3.6 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection (50N) 417
8.2.3.7 Neutral Directional Overcurrent Protection (67N) 420
8.2.3.8 Ground Time Overcurrent Protection (51G) 426
8.2.3.9 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection (50G) 429
8.2.3.10 Sensitive Ground Time Overcurrent Protection (51SG) 431
8.2.3.11 Sensitive Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection (50SG) 435
8.2.3.12 Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection (50_2) 438
8.2.4 Voltage elements overview 441
8.2.4.1 Undervoltage Curves 442
8.2.4.2 Phase Reversal (47) 443
8.2.4.3 Phase Undervoltage Protection (27P) 445
8.2.4.4 Auxiliary Undervoltage (27X) 449
8.2.4.5 Phase Overvoltage Protection (59P) 451
8.2.4.6 Auxiliary Overvoltage Protection (59X) 456
8.2.4.7 Neutral Overvoltage Protection (59N) 459
8.2.4.8 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Protection (59_2) 462
8.2.4.9 Volts per Hertz (24) 465
8.2.5 Admittance elements 472
8.2.5.1 Neutral Admittance (21YN) 472
8.2.6 Impedance elements 480
8.2.6.1 Out-of-step (78) 480
8.2.7 Power elements 486
8.2.7.1 Directional Power (32) 486
8.2.7.2 Reactive Power (40Q) 491
8.2.8 Frequency elements 496
8.2.8.1 Frequency Protection Common Setup 496
8.2.8.2 Underfrequency (81U) 496
8.2.8.3 Overfrequency (81O) 500
8.2.8.4 Frequency Rate of Change (81R) 504
8.2.8.5 Fast Underfrequency 510

Chapter 9 Monitoring 515

9.1 Chapter Overview 517
9.2 Monitoring Overview 518
9.3 Motor Monitoring 519
9.3.1 Broken Rotor Bar 519
9.3.2 Electrical Signature Analysis (ESA) 525

1601-0450 v
Contents

9.3.2.1 ESA procedure 526

9.3.2.2 ESA applications 532
9.3.2.3 ESA settings 536
9.3.3 Stator Inter-turn Fault 542
9.3.4 Sync. Motor Field Overtemperature (26F) 546
9.3.5 Power Factor 549
9.3.6 Speed 557
9.3.7 Overtorque 562
9.4 Breaker monitoring 565
9.4.1 Trip and Close Circuit Monitoring 565
9.4.2 Breaker Arcing Current 571
9.4.3 Breaker Health 574
9.5 Power Quality/Voltage Disturbance 579
9.6 Functions 583
9.6.1 Demand 583
9.6.1.1 Current Demand 584
9.6.1.2 Real Power Demand 586
9.6.1.3 Reactive Power 588
9.6.1.4 Apparent Power Demand 590
9.6.2 Pulsed Outputs 592
9.6.3 Digital Counters 596
9.7 Harmonic Detection 600
9.8 Transient Ground Fault Detection 603
9.8.1 Transient Ground Fault Detection settings 608
9.8.2 Transient Ground Fault Detection logic 611
9.9 Resistance Temperature Detector Functions 616
9.9.1 RTD Temperature 616
9.9.2 RTD Trouble 621
9.10 Loss of Communications 622

Chapter 10 Control 625

10.1 Chapter Overview 627
10.2 Control Overview 628
10.3 Setpoint Group 629
10.4 Motor control 632
10.4.1 Start Supervision 632
10.4.1.1 Thermal Inhibit 632
10.4.1.2 Maximum Starting Rate 635
10.4.1.3 Maximum Hot/Cold Starting Rate 637
10.4.1.4 Time Between Starts 642
10.4.1.5 Restart Delay 643
10.4.2 Synchronous Motor Start Sequence Control (56) 644
10.4.3 Reduced Voltage Starting 654
10.4.4 Synchronous Motor Power Factor Regulation (90F) 659
10.4.5 Contactor Control 663
10.4.6 Field Switching Device Control 667
10.5 Local Control Mode (Breaker and Switches) 670
10.6 Breaker Control 680
10.7 Switch Control (89) 684
10.8 Virtual Input Control 687
10.9 Trip Bus 688
10.10 Breaker Failure (50BF) 691

vi 1601-0450
 Contents

10.10.1 Breaker Failure Setup 692

10.10.2 Initiate 695
10.11 Arc Flash Protection 698
10.12 VT Fuse Failure (VTFF) 701
10.12.1 VT Fuse Failure settings 701
10.13 Digital Elements 704

Chapter 11 Flexlogic 707

11.1 Chapter Overview 709
11.2 FlexLogic 710
11.2.1 Timers 713
11.2.2 Non-volatile Latches 714
11.2.3 FlexLogic Equation 715
11.2.4 Viewing FlexLogic Graphics 717
11.2.5 FlexElements 718
11.2.5.1 FlexElement settings 719
11.2.5.2 FlexElements - Examples 724

Chapter 12 Testing 729

12.1 Chapter Overview 731
12.2 Testing display hierarchy 732
12.3 Simulation 733
12.3.1 Simulation Setup 733
12.3.2 Simulation Pre-Fault 734
12.3.3 Simulation Fault 735
12.3.4 Simulation Post-Fault 736
12.4 Test LEDs 737
12.5 Contact Inputs 738
12.6 Output Relays 739

Chapter 13 Status 741

13.1 Chapter Overview 743
13.2 Summary 744
13.3 Motor status 747
13.4 Breaker status 754
13.5 Information 755
13.6 Communications status 758
13.6.1 GOOSE 758
13.6.2 Communications Status settings 758
13.7 Other status settings 763

Chapter 14 Metering 769

14.1 Chapter Overview 771
14.2 Metering Overview 772
14.3 Metering Summary 776
14.4 Motor functions 778
14.4.1 Percent Differential Current 778
14.4.2 Motor Load 778
14.4.3 Synchronous Motor Field Winding 779

1601-0450 vii
Contents

14.4.4 Speed 780

14.4.5 Torque 780
14.4.6 Broken Rotor Bar 780
14.4.7 Stator Inter-Turn Fault 781
14.4.8 Bearing, Mechanical and Stator Fault 782
14.4.9 Short Circuit 783
14.5 Impedance/admittance 784
14.5.1 Neutral Admittance 784
14.5.2 Positive Sequence impedance 784
14.6 Currents 786
14.7 Neutral IOC 788
14.8 Voltages 789
14.9 Frequency 792
14.9.1 High-speed frequency 793
14.9.2 Fast Underfrequency 793
14.10 Harmonics 794
14.10.1 Harmonic Detection 794
14.11 Power functions 795
14.11.1 Power 795
14.11.2 Power Factor 798
14.11.3 Directional Power 798
14.12 Energy 799
14.12.1 Energy (X) 799
14.12.2 Energy Log 799
14.13 Demand 802
14.13.1 Current Demand 802
14.13.1.1 Current Demand 1(X) 802
14.14 Power Demand 803
14.15 Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure 805
14.16 Arc Flash 806
14.17 Resistance Temperature Detectors 807
14.18 Analog Inputs 808
14.19 FlexElements 809

Chapter 15 Records 811

15.1 Chapter Overview 813
15.2 Motor records 814
15.2.1 Motor Start Records 814
15.2.2 Motor Start Statistics 815
15.2.3 Learned Data 815
15.3 Events 821
15.3.1 Event Viewer 821
15.4 Transient Records 825
15.5 Fault Reports 826
15.6 Data Logger 828
15.7 Breakers 829
15.7.1 Breaker Arcing Current 829
15.7.2 Breaker Health 829
15.8 Power Quality 831
15.9 Digital Counters 833
15.10 Remote Modbus Device 834

viii 1601-0450
 Contents

15.11 Clear Records 837

Chapter 16 Maintenance 839

16.1 Chapter Overview 841
16.2 Environmental Health Report 842
16.3 General Maintenance 844
16.3.1 In-service Maintenance 844
16.3.2 Out-of-service Maintenance 844
16.3.3 Unscheduled Maintenance (System Interruption) 844

Chapter 17 Specifications 845

17.1 Device 847
17.1.1 Annunciator panel 847
17.1.2 Custom configurations 847
17.2 Protection elements 848
17.2.1 Synchronous motor field overcurrent 848
17.2.2 Synchronous motor field undercurrent 848
17.2.3 Synchronous motor field overvoltage 848
17.2.4 Synchronous motor field undervoltage 849
17.2.5 Synchronous motor speed-dependent thermal protection 849
17.2.6 Percent differential 849
17.2.7 Thermal model (49) 850
17.2.8 Acceleration time 850
17.2.9 Current unbalance (46) 851
17.2.10 Mechanical jam 851
17.2.11 Loss of excitation (40) 851
17.2.12 Out-of-step (78) 852
17.2.13 Overload alarm 852
17.2.14 Phase reversal (47) 852
17.2.15 Ground fault 853
17.2.16 Short circuit protection 853
17.2.17 Neutral admittance (21YN) 853
17.2.18 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (50P) 854
17.2.19 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent (50N) 854
17.2.20 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (50G) 855
17.2.21 Phase time overcurrent (51P/V) 855
17.2.22 Neutral/ground time overcurrent (51N/G) 855
17.2.23 Phase directional overcurrent (67P) 856
17.2.24 Neutral directional overcurrent (67N) 856
17.2.25 Negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent 858
17.2.26 Undercurrent 858
17.2.27 Phase overvoltage (59P) 858
17.2.28 Neutral overvoltage (59N) 859
17.2.29 Auxiliary overvoltage (59X) 859
17.2.30 Negative sequence overvoltage (59_2) 860
17.2.31 Phase undervoltage (27P) 860
17.2.32 Voltage Interruption 860
17.2.33 Volts per Herz (24) 861
17.2.34 Overfrequency (81O) 861
17.2.35 Underfrequency (81U) 862

1601-0450 ix
Contents

17.2.36 Fast underfrequency 862

17.2.37 Rate of change of frequency (81R) 862
17.2.38 Directional power 863
17.2.39 Reactive power (40Q) 863
17.2.40 Underpower (37P) 863
17.2.41 RTD protection 864
17.2.42 Arc flash HS phase/ground instantaneous overcurrent (50P/50G) 864
17.3 Synchronous motor DC field control 865
17.3.1 Power factor regulation 865
17.3.2 Start sequence control 865
17.3.3 Incomplete sequence function 865
17.4 Control 866
17.4.1 Thermal inhibit 866
17.4.2 Maximum hot or cold start rate 866
17.4.3 Maximum starting rate 866
17.4.4 Restart delay 866
17.4.5 Reduced voltage start 866
17.4.6 Time between starts 866
17.4.7 Breaker control 867
17.4.8 Local control mode 867
17.4.9 Switch control 867
17.4.10 Trip bus 867
17.4.11 Digital Elements 867
17.5 Monitoring 868
17.5.1 Synchronous motor field overtemperature 868
17.5.2 Broken rotor bar 868
17.5.3 Electrical signature analysis (ESA) 868
17.5.4 Power factor (55) 869
17.5.5 Speed protection 869
17.5.6 Breaker arcing current 869
17.5.7 Breaker failure 869
17.5.8 Breaker health 870
17.5.9 Trip circuit monitoring 870
17.5.10 Close circuit monitoring 870
17.5.11 Demand 870
17.5.12 Harmonic detection 871
17.5.13 Voltage disturbance 871
17.5.14 Voltage Swell 871
17.5.15 Voltage sag 871
17.5.16 Time of day timer 871
17.5.17 Overtorque 872
17.6 Recording 873
17.6.1 Event data 873
17.6.2 Motor start statistics 873
17.6.3 Motor start records 873
17.6.4 Motor learned data 873
17.6.5 Transient recorder 874
17.6.6 Data logger 874
17.6.7 Event recorder 874
17.6.8 Last trip data 874
17.6.9 Fault reports 875
17.7 User-programmable elements 876

x 1601-0450
 Contents

17.7.1 FlexLogic 876

17.7.2 FlexElements 876
17.7.3 FlexStates 876
17.7.4 FlexCurves 876
17.7.5 Non-volatile latches 877
17.7.6 User-programmable LEDs 877
17.7.7 Tab pushbuttons 877
17.7.8 User-programmable pushbuttons 877
17.8 Metering 878
17.8.1 Motor metering values 878
17.8.2 Synchronous motor metered values 878
17.8.3 RMS parameters 879
17.8.4 Phasors 880
17.8.5 Frequency 881
17.8.6 Current and voltage harmonics 881
17.9 Inputs 882
17.9.1 Synchronous motor AC field voltage input 882
17.9.2 Synchronous motor DC Exciter voltage input 882
17.9.3 Synchronous motor DC Field current input 882
17.9.4 AC currents 883
17.9.5 AC voltages 883
17.9.6 Analog inputs 883
17.9.7 Frequency 884
17.9.8 Arc flash sensor/fiber 884
17.9.9 Contact Inputs 884
17.9.10 IRIG-B input 885
17.9.11 RTD inputs 885
17.10 Outputs 886
17.10.1 VDC output, VPF 886
17.10.2 Analog outputs 886
17.10.3 Form C output relays 886
17.10.4 Form A voltage monitor 887
17.10.5 Solid state relays 887
17.10.6 Pulsed outputs 888
17.10.7 Coil actuator outputs 888
17.11 Power supply 889
17.11.1 Voltage supplies 889
17.11.2 Power consumption 889
17.11.3 Voltage loss ride-through 889
17.12 Communications 890
17.12.1 Ethernet 890
17.12.2 USB 890
17.12.3 Serial 890
17.12.4 WiFi 891
17.12.5 Remote Modbus 891
17.12.6 Controller Area Network 891
17.13 Certifications and approvals 892
17.13.1 Approvals 892
17.13.2 Testing and Certification 892
17.14 Environmental 894
17.15 Long-term storage 895

1601-0450 xi
Contents

Appendix A Appendix A 897

1 Warranty 899

xii 1601-0450
 CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION
Chapter 1 - Introduction

2 1601-0450
 Chapter 1 - Introduction

1.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter provides some general information about the technical manual and an introduction to the device(s)
described in this technical manual.
This chapter contains the following sections:
Chapter Overview 3
Foreword 4
Product overview 6
General description of the 8 Series 7
Functions and features 9
Security Overview 12
Order Codes 14
Cautions, warnings and notes 18
Must-read Information 21
For Further Assistance 22

1601-0450 3
Chapter 1 - Introduction

1.2 FOREWORD
This technical manual provides a functional and technical description of the relay, as well as a comprehensive set of
instructions for using it. The level at which this manual is written assumes that you are already familiar with
protection engineering and have experience in this discipline. The description of principles and theory is limited to
that which is necessary to understand the product. For further details on general protection engineering theory, we
refer you to the publication, Protection and Automation Application Guide, which is available online.
We have attempted to make this manual as accurate, comprehensive and user-friendly as possible. However we
cannot guarantee that it is free from errors. Nor can we state that it cannot be improved. We would therefore be
very pleased to hear from you if you discover any errors, or have any suggestions for improvement. Our policy is to
provide the information necessary to help you safely specify, engineer, install, commission, maintain, and eventually
dispose of this product. We consider that this manual provides the necessary information, but if you consider that
more details are needed, please contact us.

1.2.1 TARGET AUDIENCE

This manual is aimed towards all professionals charged with installing, commissioning, maintaining,
troubleshooting, or operating any of the products within the specified product range. This includes installation and
commissioning personnel as well as engineers who will be responsible for operating the product.
The level at which this manual is written assumes that installation and commissioning engineers have knowledge of
handling electronic equipment. Also, system and protection engineers have a thorough knowledge of protection
systems and associated equipment.

1.2.2 TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS

The following typographical conventions are used throughout this manual.
● Description of software menu items, buttons, labels or hardware keys and buttons written in bold type and
colored dark blue.
For example: Select Save from the file menu
● The names for special keys, appear in in upper case bold type and colored dark blue.
For example: ENTER
● Filenames, paths, code, and text that appears on a command line interface use the courier font
For example: Example\File.text
● Special terminology is written with leading capitals
For example: Line Differential Relay
● If reference is made to the relay's internal settings database on the relay's LCD screen, the menu items are
written in bold italics
For example: SECURITY (on the relay's LCD screen), or Security (in the EnerVista D&I Setup software
software)
● Menu paths are shown with > separators. this applies to both software menu paths and relay menu paths
For example: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > AC INPUTS (for relay path), or File > Save (for software
path)

4 1601-0450
 Chapter 1 - Introduction

● Setting values are written with the courier font and are italicized
For example: Enabled
● Multilin products, use Flexlogic operands. Flexlogic operands are written in light blue uppercase courier font
For example: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
● Notes are written in italic and are surrounded by a by a blue border.
For example:

Note:
This is a note

1.2.3 NOMENCLATURE
Due to the technical nature of this manual, many special terms, abbreviations and acronyms are used throughout
the manual. Some of these terms are well-known industry-specific terms while others may be special product-
specific terms used by GE Vernova. The first instance of any acronym or term used in a particular chapter is
explained. In addition, a separate glossary is available on the GE Vernova website.
We would like to highlight the following changes of nomenclature however:
● The word relay and IED (Intelligent Electronic Device) are both used to describe the protection device. The
term IED is associated with the IEC61850 standard, whereas the term relay is the long-used traditional term.
It may also be referred to simply as the device' or the product.
● American English and spelling is used throughout this manual.
● The term 'Earth' and American term 'Ground' are equivalent. You may find either used in the manual.

1601-0450 5
Chapter 1 - Introduction

1.3 PRODUCT OVERVIEW

The Multilin 869 is a microprocessor-based device intended for the management and primary protection of medium
and large sized induction and synchronous motors. Base relay models provide thermal overload and overcurrent
protection plus a number of current and voltage based backup functions.

6 1601-0450
 Chapter 1 - Introduction

1.4 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE 8 SERIES

Each relay provides protection, control, and monitoring functions with both local and remote human interfaces. They
also display the present trip/alarm conditions, and most of the more than 35 measured system parameters.
Recording of past trip, alarm or control events, maximum demand levels, and energy consumption is also
performed.
To meet diverse utility standards and industry requirements, you can program these relays to meet specific
requirements. This flexibility will naturally make a piece of equipment difficult to learn. To aid new users in getting
basic protection operating quickly, setpoints are set to typical default values and advanced features are disabled.
You can reprogram these settings any time.
It is possible for you to program these relays using the front panel keys and display. However, due to the numerous
settings, this manual method can be laborious. To simplify programming and provide a more intuitive interface, you
can enter setpoints with a PC running the EnerVista D&I Setup software. Even with minimal computer knowledge,
this menu-driven software provides easy access to all front panel functions. Actual values and setpoints can be
displayed, altered, stored, and printed. If settings are stored in a setpoint file, they can be downloaded at any time to
the front panel program port of the relay via a computer cable connected to the USB port of any personal computer.

CPU
Relay functions are controlled by two processors: a Freescale MPC5125 32-bit microprocessor that measures all
analog signals and digital inputs and controls all output relays, and a Freescale MPC8358 32-bit microprocessor
that controls all the advanced Ethernet communication protocols.

Analog Input and Waveform Capture

Magnetic transformers are used to scale-down the incoming analog signals from the source instrument
transformers. The analog signals are then passed through a 11.5 kHz low pass analog anti-aliasing filter. All signals
are then simultaneously captured by sample and hold buffers to ensure there are no phase shifts. The signals are
converted to digital values by a 16-bit A/D converter before finally being passed on to the CPU for analysis.
The raw samples are scaled in software, then placed into the waveform capture buffer, thus emulating a fault
recorder. The waveforms can be retrieved from the relay via the software for display and diagnostics.

Frequency
Frequency measurement is accomplished by measuring the time between zero crossings of the composite signal of
three-phase bus voltages, line voltage or three-phase currents. The signals are passed through a low pass filter to
prevent false zero crossings. Frequency tracking utilizes the measured frequency to set the sampling rate for
current and voltage which results in better accuracy for the Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) algorithm for off-
nominal frequencies.
The main frequency tracking source uses three-phase bus voltages. The frequency tracking is switched
automatically by an algorithm to the alternative reference source, i.e., three-phase currents signal or line voltage for
the configuration of tie-breaker, if the frequency detected from the three-phase voltage inputs is declared invalid.
The switching will not be performed if the frequency from the alternative reference signal is detected invalid. Upon
detecting valid frequency on the main source, the tracking will be switched back to the main source. If a stable
frequency signal is not available from all sources, then the tracking frequency defaults to the nominal system
frequency.

1601-0450 7
Chapter 1 - Introduction

Phasors, Transients, and Harmonics

All waveforms are processed eight times every cycle with a DC decaying removal filter and a DFT. The resulting
phasors have fault current transients and all harmonics removed. This results in an overcurrent relay that is
extremely secure and reliable and one that will not overreach.

Processing of AC Current Inputs

The DC Decaying Removal Filter is a short window digital filter, which removes the DC decaying component from
the asymmetrical current present at the moment a fault occurs. This is done for all current signals used for
overcurrent protection; voltage signals use the same DC Decaying Removal Filter. This filter ensures no overreach
of the overcurrent protection.
The DFT uses exactly one cycle of samples to calculate a phasor quantity which represents the signal at the
fundamental frequency; all harmonic components are removed. All subsequent calculations (e.g. power, etc.) are
based upon the current and voltage phasors, such that the resulting values have no harmonic components. RMS
(root mean square) values are calculated from one cycle of samples prior to filtering.

Protection Elements
All voltage, current and frequency protection elements are processed eight times every cycle to determine if a
pickup has occurred or a timer has expired. The voltage and current protection elements use RMS current/voltage,
or the magnitude of the phasor.

8 1601-0450
 Chapter 1 - Introduction

1.5 FUNCTIONS AND FEATURES

%

"#


#R
%) *) 

 ! ( (    '    

F

&

  $%  $ $' F $  && & + ( +  @EBCD @ABCD & ($ ($P  Q

+

#)G<HI 
@ABCNB @EBCNB


JKK)H=J > G) % > HL )LH= JKK)H=J >

LG) 
M > HL 
+
+



   & 

 <SS>T
( (  &

+ (
THLU "G=G) G=G) GH=)G>
HI )G=L=JGH
<=) > 
H=)H > <OO =JGH )LH= JKK)H=J >
+

,-. /0102 3201451607 89:14;

 

Figure 1: Single Line Diagram

ANSI Device Numbers and Functions

ANSI Description ANSI Description
Device Device
12/14 Over Speed Protection/ Under Speed Protection 51G Ground Time Overcurrent
21YN Neutral Admittance 51SG Sensitive Ground Time Overcurrent
24 Volts per Hertz 51N Neutral Time Overcurrent
26F Sync. Motor Field Overtemperature 51P Phase Time Overcurrent
27F Sync. Motor Field Undervoltage 52 AC Circuit Breaker
27P Phase Undervoltage 55 Power Factor
27X Auxiliary Undervoltage 56 Sync. Motor Start Sequence Control
32 Directional Power 59F Sync. Motor Field Overvoltage
37 Undercurrent 59N Neutral Overvoltage
37F Sync. Motor Field Undercurrent 59P Phase Overvoltage
37P Underpower 59X Auxiliary Overvoltage
38 Bearing RTD Temperature 59_2 Negative Sequence Overvoltage
40 Loss of Excitation 66 Maximum Starting Rate
40Q Reactive Power 67N Neutral Directional Element

1601-0450 9
Chapter 1 - Introduction

ANSI Description ANSI Description

Device Device
41 DC Field Breaker/Contactor 67P Phase Directional Element
46 Current Unbalance 76F Sync. Motor Field Overcurrent
47 Phase Reversal 78 Out-of-Step Protection
48 Incomplete Sequence 81O Overfrequency
49 Thermal Model 81U Underfrequency
49S Stator RTD Temperature 81R Frequency Rate of Change
50BF Breaker Failure 86 Start Inhibit
50G Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 87S Stator Differential
50SG Sensitive Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 90F Sync. Motor Power Factor Regulation
50SG/G Ground Fault 95 Reluctance Torque Sync/Resync.
50LR Mechanical Jam 96 Autoloading Relay
50N Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent AFP Arc Flash Protection
50P Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent VTFF Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure
50_2 Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent n/a PseudoVoltage

Other Device Functions

Description Description Description
Acceleration Time FlexLogic Equations Reduced Voltage Starting
Analog Input Flex States RTD Temperature
Analog Output IEC 61850 Communications Setpoint Groups (6)
Breaker Arcing Current (I2t) Mechanical Jam Short Circuit
Broken Rotor Bar Metering: current, voltage, power, PF, Stator Inter-Turn Fault
energy, frequency, harmonics, THD
Switching Device Control Modbus User Map Time of Day Timer
Breaker Control Motor Health Report Trip Bus (6)
Breaker Health Motor Learned Data Transient Recorder (Oscillography)
Data Logger Motor Start Records Trip and Close Coil Monitoring
Demand Motor Start Statistics User-programmable LEDs
Digital Counters Non-volatile Latches User-programmable Pushbuttons
Event Recorder OPC-UA Communications Virtual Inputs (32)
Fault Report Output Relays Virtual Outputs (32)
Fast underfrequency Overload Alarm Voltage Disturbance
FlexElements Power Quality

10 1601-0450
 Chapter 1 - Introduction

7!89

!" —0››&$4
:*,*$
#$%&'%$(

 
—¬6,-‘%(
§&(, –$6/ ˜&,&  
$- 3&(‘ 
)*+,&-, .+/0,( 
10,/0, 2%3&4(
  
56$,0&3 .+/0,(
  
56$,0&3 10,/0,(

3%¦ —,&,%(
œžžŸ ¡¢£¤¡ ¥   
.+š*$›&,6*+ ”  
˜%™6-% —,&,0(
)3*-'
•–• —,&,0(

;

89 ¨ZddGFb <
=8> ?@ABCD

ªYCYF
EFGBDHABCD
©dkA^GB]A
XZFFABCD VGCG jYWWAF
_Y[CGWAD IJKJL MKNLK OPQJLRS
`FAaZAB]b lmnmo pnqon pnqnrsnrts
­®¯° ±²³´µ¶µ´·¸´²¹º
‚ƒ„ ‚† ‡ƒˆƒ
cGFdYBH]D
eNLfJghQ iPKPQKhJg `GZ[C \AkYFCD
Y€AF TFAGUAFD
?BAFWb VHW XYZBCAFD
Y€AF `G]CYF
X[AGF \A]YF^D
uvwwxyz {x|}y~
»¼½¾¾¿ÀÁÂÃÄÅ
Y€AF VAdGB^
{‰wxŠz‰‹y}Œ ‹Žxw
’F] `[GD“
\EVD
\EV ªG«HdZdD
’BG[YW ©BkZCD
`[A«?[AdABCD
Figure 2: Main Menu Hierarchy

1601-0450 11
Chapter 1 - Introduction

1.6 SECURITY OVERVIEW

The following security features are available:

BASIC SECURITY
The basic security feature is present in the default offering of the relay. The relay introduces the notion of roles for
different levels of authority. Roles are used as login names with associated passwords stored on the device. The
following roles are available at present: Administrator, Engineer, Operator, Factory and Viewer, with a fixed
permission structure for each one. Note that the Factory role is not available for users, but strictly used in the
manufacturing process.
The relay can still use the SETPOINT ACCESS switch feature, but enabling the feature can be done only by an
Administrator. Setpoint access is controlled by a keyed switch to offer some minimal notion of security.

CYBERSENTRY
The CyberSentry Embedded Security feature is a software option that provides advanced security services. When
the software option is purchased, the Basic Security is automatically disabled.
CyberSentry provides security through the following features:
● An Authentication, Authorization, Accounting (AAA) Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS)
client that is centrally managed, enables user attribution, and uses secure standards based strong
cryptography for authentication and credential protection.
● A Role-Based Access Control (RBAC) system that provides a permission model that allows access to device
operations and configurations based on specific roles and individual user accounts configured on the AAA
server. At present the defined roles are: Administrator, Engineer, Operator and Viewer.
● Strong encryption of all access and configuration network messages between the EnerVista software and
devices using the Secure Shell (SSH) protocol, the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES), and 128-bit keys in
Galois Counter Mode (GCM) as specified in the U.S. National Security Agency Suite B extension for SSH
and approved by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) FIPS-140-2 standards for
cryptographic systems.
● Security event reporting through the Syslog protocol for supporting Security Information Event Management
(SIEM) systems for centralized cyber security monitoring.
There are two types of authentication supported by CyberSentry that can be used to access the device:
● Device Authentication – in which case the authentication is performed on the device itself, using the
predefined roles as users (No RADIUS involvement).
○ Device authentication using local roles may be done either from the front panel or through EnerVista.
● Server Authentication - in which case the authentication is done on a RADIUS server, using individual user
accounts defined on the server. When the user accounts are created, they are assigned to one of the
predefined roles recognized by the relay.
○ Device authentication using RADIUS server may be done only through EnerVista.

Note:
USB does not currently support CyberSentry security.
EnerVista Viewpoint Monitor does not currently support CyberSentry security.
With the CyberSentry security option, many communication settings cannot be changed remotely. All communication settings
can still be changed through the relay front panel.

12 1601-0450
 Chapter 1 - Introduction

When both device and server authentication are enabled, the relay automatically directs authentication requests to
the device or the respective RADIUS server, based on user names. If the user ID credential does not match one of
the device local accounts, the relay automatically forwards the request to a RADIUS server when one is provided. If
a RADIUS server is provided, but is unreachable over the network, server authentication requests are denied. In
this situation, use local device accounts to gain access to the system.

USER ROLES
User Access Levels are used to grant varying permissions to specific user roles. User roles are used by both Basic
Security and CyberSentry.
The following user roles are supported:
● Administrator: The Administrator role has complete read and write access to all settings and commands.
The role does not allow concurrent access. The Administrator role also has an operand to indicate when it is
logged on.
● Engineer: This role has similar rights to the Administrator role, except that some commands, the security
settings modification and firmware upload are not allowed.
● Operator: The Operator role is present to facilitate operational actions that may be programmed and
assigned to buttons on the front panel. The Operator has read/write access to all settings under the
command menu/section. The Operator can also use the Virtual Input command under the control menu/
section. The Operator can view settings from EnerVista or the front panel but does not have the ability to
change any settings. This role is not a concurrent role.
● Viewer: The Viewer role has read-only access to all 8 Series 869 settings. This role allows concurrent
access. The Viewer is the default role if no authentication has been done to the device. This role can
download settings files and records from the device.
● Factory: This is an internal non-user accessible role used for manufacturing diagnostics. The ability to enable
or disable this role is a security setting that the Administrator controls.

GENERAL RULES FOR USER ROLES WITH CYBERSENTRY

1. The only concurrent role is Observer. If the user is logged in through serial, front panel, or over the network,
that counts as the role being logged in for concurrency reasons.
2. Both EnerVista and the front panel provide a one-step logoff. For the front panel, the root menu has a logoff
command. From EnerVista right-clicking on a device and providing a logoff function from the context menu is
sufficient.
3. The EnerVista Login Screen has User Name: and Password: fields for the default remote (Radius)
authentication, but when a Local Authentication checkbox is selected the User Name: field changes to a
drop down menu where the user can select one of the predefined roles.

1601-0450 13
Chapter 1 - Introduction

1.7 ORDER CODES

Support of some of the features are order code dependent. Each relay is ordered with a number of required and
optional modules. Each of these modules can be supplied in a number of configurations specified at the time of
ordering. The information to specify a relay model is provided in the following Order Code table:

869 Order codes

ORDER CODE FOR 869 MOTOR

869 R P1 P1 P1 H N N A N N M S S B B SE N N B N 869 Motor Protection System

APPLICATION:

E Standard

PHASE CURRENTS - SLOT J:

P1 1A three-phase current inputs (J1)

P5 5A three-phase current inputs (J1)

NN PHASE CURRENTS - SLOT K:

P1 No phase current inputs (Slot K)

P5 1A three-phase current inputs (K1)

C1 5A three-phase current inputs (K1)

C5 1A three-phase current inputs (K1), SM Field Inputs (K2) with DcmA Field Current Input

D1 5A three phase current inputs (K1), SM Field Inputs (K2) with DcmA Field Current Input

1A three phase current inputs (K1), SM Field Inputs (K2) with VDC Field Current Input

D5 5A three phase current inputs (K1), SM Field Inputs (K2) with VDC Field Current Input

GROUND CURRENTS:

G1 1A ground input (1 per phase current bank)

G5 5A ground input (1 per phase current bank)

S1 1A ground input (J1), 1A sensitive ground input (K1)

B1 1A ground input (J1), 50:0.025A ground input (K1)

B5 5A ground input (J1), 50:0.025A ground input (K1)

0B 50:0.025A ground input (J1)

5B 50:0.025A ground input (J1), 5A ground input (K1)

POWER SUPPLY:

H 110 to 250 V DC/110 to 230 V AC

R 110 to 250 V DC/110 to 230 V AC - Extended Ride-through

L 24 to 48 VDC

SLOT B:

N None

R 6 X RTDs (Pt100, Ni100, Ni120)

S 6 X RTDs (Pt100, Ni100, Ni120, Cu10)

C 15 Digital Inputs (24 V DC, Ext Supply)

SLOT C:

N None

R 6 X RTDs (Pt100, Ni100, Ni120)

14 1601-0450
 Chapter 1 - Introduction

ORDER CODE FOR 869 MOTOR

S 6 X RTDs (Pt100, Ni100, Ni120, Cu10)

C 15 Digital Inputs (24 V DC, Ext Supply)

SLOT F:

A 2 Form A (Vmon) Relays, 2 Form C Relays, 1 Critical Failure Relay, 7 Digital Inputs (Int/Ext
Supply)
M 4 SSR (High-Speed, High-Break), 1 Critical Failure Relay, 7 Digital Inputs (Int/Ext Supply)

SLOT G:

N None

A 2 Form A Relays, 3 Form C Relays, 7 Digital Inputs (Int/Ext Supply)

B 9 Form A Relays, 10 Digital Inputs

D 8 Double Pole Outputs

K 5 Form A Relays, 1 Form C Relay, 10 Digital Inputs

L 7 DcmA O/P, 4 DcmA I/P, 1 RTD

M 4 SSR (High-Speed, High-Break), 1 Form C Relay, 7 Digital Inputs (Int/Ext Supply)

P 8 Double Pole Outputs - C

SLOT H:

N None

A 2 Form A Relays, 3 Form C Relays, 7 Digital Inputs (Int/Ext Supply)

B 9 Form A Relays, 10 Digital Inputs

D 8 Double Pole Outputs

F 10 Digital Inputs, 4 Arc Flash Inputs

K 5 Form A Relays, 1 Form C Relay, 10 Digital Inputs

M 4 SSR (High-Speed, High-Break), 1 Form C Relay, 7 Digital Inputs (Int/Ext Supply)

P 8 Double Pole Outputs - C

FACEPLATE:

M Basic: Membrane Keypad with 3 Pushbuttons

A Advanced: Membrane Keypad with 10 Pushbuttons

CURRENT PROTECTION:

S Basic: 12/14, 19, 37, 38, 46, 47, 49, 50P, 50N, 50G, 50SG, 50_2, 50LR (Mechanical Jam),
51P, 51N, 51G, 51SG, 66, 86, 37F*,50F*
M Standard: Basic, 67P, 67N, 87S (2nd CT Bank required for 87S)

VOLTAGE MONITORING AND PROTECTION:

S Standard: 27P, 27X, 47, 59P, 59N, 59X, 81O, 81U, VTFF, 26F*, 27F*, 49F*, 59F*

P Advanced: Standard, 32, 40, 40Q, 55, 59_2, 78, Fast U/F, Neutral Admittance

CONTROL

B Basic = Breaker / Contactor Control, Digital Elements

F Standard: Breaker/Contactor Control, Digital Elements, Virtual Inputs, FlexLogic, 50BF, Trip
Bus, Field Breaker/Contactor Control*, 56* (including Rel. Torque Sync and Autoloading, INC
Seq.), PF Regulation*
T Advanced HMI: Standard, Tab Pushbuttons, Annunciator Panel, Configurable SLDs with Bay
Control
MONITORING

B Basic: Motor Health Report, Motor Start Report, Motor Learned Data, Data Logger, Breaker
Coil Monitoring, Breaker Arcing, Harmonics, THD, Demand
C Standard: Basic, Breaker Health Report, Broken Rotor Bar**

1601-0450 15
Chapter 1 - Introduction

ORDER CODE FOR 869 MOTOR

A Advanced: Standard, Harmonic Detection, Stator Inter-Turn Fault

E Extended: Advanced, ESA Functions

COMMUNICATIONS:

S E Standard: Front USB, 1x Rear RS485 (Modbus RTU/TCP, DNP 3.0, IEC 60870-5-103), 1x
Ethernet RJ45 port (Modbus TCP, DNP).
1 E Advanced: Standard + IEC 60870-5-104, 1588, SNTP, OPC-UA

1 P Advanced + PRP + HSR

2 A Advanced + Basic IEC 61850

2 E Advanced + PRP + HSR + Basic IEC 61850

3 A Advanced + IEC 61850

3 E Advanced + PRP + HSR + IEC 61850

4 E Advanced + 1x additional RS485 Port + HSR + PRP + IEC 61850

ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTOR:

N None, no additional communication ports. RJ45 Port 1 Enabled, RJ45 Port 2 disabled

S ST, Multi-mode 1310nm - With 1E to 3E, the user gets 2x Fiber ST Ports with Redundancy,
RJ45 ports 1 and 2 are disabled. With 4E user gets 2x Fiber ST ports and 2xRJ45 Ports with
Redundancy selectable on 2 ports
C RJ45, Copper 10/100M - With 1E to 3E, the user gets 2x RJ45 ports with Redundancy, RJ45
ports 1 and 2 are disabled. With 4E user gets 4x RJ45 Ports with Redundancy selectable on 2
ports.
T 1x additional RS485 Port and 1x additional RJ45 Copper 10/100M port, Redundancy not
available with Communications option SE.
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION:

N None

W WiFi 802.11

SECURITY

B Basic

A Advanced: CyberSentry Level 1

FW OPTION

N FW version 3.xx or earlier

4 FW version 4.xx

● Harsh Environment Coating is a standard feature on all relays.

● Advanced security is only available with advanced communications (1E, 1P, 3A, 3E). When you select the
advanced communications option, the Ethernet port on the main CPU is disabled.
● Retrofit order codes must be configured using the GE Multilin Online Store (OLS) based on the existing relay
order code and additional requirements. Refer to the GE website and search for the Buy Retrofit Kit for
further information.

Remote Module I/O (RMIO)

The Remote RTD module provides additional protection.

16 1601-0450
 Chapter 1 - Introduction

RMIO1 – * G G * *
Power Supply L | | | | 24 - 48 V DC
H | | | | 110 - 250 V DC / 110 - 230 V AC
I/O Module 1 G | | | Remote Module I/O (3 - 100 Ohm Platinum RTDs)
I/O Module 2 G | | Remote Module I/O (3 - 100 Ohm Platinum RTDs)
I/O Module 32 G | Remote Module I/O (3 - 100 Ohm Platinum RTDs)
X | None
I/O Module 4 G Remote Module I/O (3 - 100 Ohm Platinum RTDs)
X None
1. RMIO requires firmware version 2.00 and later and hardware version B. Check the hardware
version under Status > Information > Main CPU. If RMIO support is required for relays with earlier
hardware versions, contact the factory.
2. RMIO comes standard with 6 RTDs (Modules 1 and 2).
892800RMIO-A1.fm

Other Accessories
● 18J0-0030 8 Series Depth Reducing Collar - 1 3/8”
● 18J0-0029 8 Series Depth Reducing Collar - 3”
● 8 Series Retrofit Kit, 750/760 to 850
● 8 Series Retrofit Kit, 735 to 850

1601-0450 17
Chapter 1 - Introduction

1.8 CAUTIONS, WARNINGS AND NOTES

Before attempting to install or use the device, review all safety indicators in this document to help prevent injury,
equipment damage, or downtime.

1.8.1 SAFETY WORDS AND DEFINITIONS

The following symbols and formatting are used in this document indicate certain types of information:

Caution:
Refer to equipment documentation. Failure to do so could result in damage to the
equipment

Warning:
Risk of electric shock

Warning:
Risk of damage to eyesight

Note:
Indicates practices not related to personal injury.

1.8.2 GENERAL CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS

The following general safety precautions and warnings apply.

Caution:
Before attempting to use the equipment, it is important that all danger and caution
indicators are reviewed.
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer or functions
abnormally, proceed with caution. Otherwise, the protection provided by the
equipment may be impaired and can result in impaired operation and injury.

Warning:
Hazardous voltages can cause shock, burns or death.

Caution:
Installation/service personnel must be familiar with general device test practices,
electrical awareness and safety precautions must be followed.
Before performing visual inspections, tests, or periodic maintenance on this device
or associated circuits, isolate or disconnect all hazardous live circuits and sources
of electric power.

18 1601-0450
 Chapter 1 - Introduction

Warning:
Failure to shut equipment off prior to removing the power connections could
expose you to dangerous voltages causing injury or death.
Ensure that all connections to the product are correct so as to avoid accidental risk
of shock and/or fire, for example from high voltage connected to low voltage
terminals.

Caution:
Follow the requirements of this manual, including adequate wiring size and type,
terminal torque settings, voltage, current magnitudes applied, and adequate
isolation/clearance in external wiring from high to low voltage circuits.
Use the device only for its intended purpose and application.
Ensure that all ground paths are un-compromised for safety purposes during
device operation and service.
All recommended equipment that should be grounded and must have a reliable and
un-compromised grounding path for safety purposes, protection against
electromagnetic interference and proper device operation.
Equipment grounds should be bonded together and connected to the facility’s
main ground system for primary power.
Keep all ground leads as short as possible.
In addition to the safety precautions mentioned all electrical connections made
must respect the applicable local jurisdiction electrical code.
It is recommended that a field external switch, circuit breaker be connected near
the equipment as a means of power disconnect. The external switch or circuit
breaker is selected in accordance with the power rating.
This product itself is not Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). However, it can be
used in the computation of site specific Arc Flash analysis when the arc flash
option is ordered. If a new appropriate Hazard Reduction Category code for the
installation is determined, user should follow the cautions mentioned in the arc
flash installation section.
The critical failure relay must be connected to annunciate the status of the device
for all applications and in particular when the arc flash option is ordered.
Ensure that the control power applied to the device, the AC current, and voltage
input match the ratings specified on the relay nameplate. Do not apply current or
voltage in excess of the specified limits.
Only qualified personnel are to operate the device. Such personnel must be
thoroughly familiar with all safety cautions and warnings in this manual and with
applicable country, regional, utility, and plant safety regulations.

Warning:
Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the device connection to
current transformers, voltage transformers, control, and test circuit terminals. Make
sure all sources of such voltages are isolated prior to attempting work on the
device.
Hazardous voltages can exist when opening the secondary circuits of live current
transformers. Make sure that current transformer secondary circuits are shorted
out before making or removing any connection to the current transformer (CT)
input terminals of the device.

1601-0450 19
Chapter 1 - Introduction

Caution:
For tests with secondary test equipment, ensure that no other sources of voltages
or currents are connected to such equipment and that trip and close commands to
the circuit breakers or other switching apparatus are isolated, unless this is
required by the test procedure and is specified by appropriate utility/plant
procedure.
When the device is used to control primary equipment, such as circuit breakers,
isolators, and other switching apparatus, all control circuits from the device to the
primary equipment must be isolated while personnel are working on or around this
primary equipment to prevent any inadvertent command from this device.
Use an external disconnect to isolate the mains voltage supply.

Warning:
LED transmitters are classified as IEC 60825-1 Accessible Emission Limit (AEL)
Class 1M. Class 1M devices are considered safe to the unaided eye. Do not view
directly with optical instruments.

Caution:
VDN (Voltage Divider Network module) APPLICATION NOTE: The VDN module must
be installed in an electrical enclosure which is not accessible under normal
working conditions.
The VDN outer mounting frame must not be bonded to any grounded enclosure.
Means of isolation (i.e nylon screws/washers/spacers) shall be used during
installation to avoid any direct bonding to earth ground.

Note:
To ensure the settings file inside the relay is updated, wait 30 seconds after a setpoint change before cycling power.
This product is rated to Class A emissions levels and is to be used in Utility, Substation Industrial environments. Not
to be used near electronic devices rated for Class B levels.

20 1601-0450
 Chapter 1 - Introduction

1.9 MUST-READ INFORMATION

The following general statements apply and are repeated in the relevant sections of the manual.
● Before upgrading firmware, it is very important to save the current settings to a file on your PC. After the
firmware has been upgraded, it is necessary to load this file back into the device.
● The SNTP and IRIG-B settings take effect after rebooting the relay.
● Commands may be issued freely through other protocols than Modbus (i.e., DNP, IEC 104, and, IEC 61850)
without user authentication or encryption of data taking place, even if the relay has the advanced security
feature enabled.
● Note that the factory role password may not be changed.
● Both DNP and IEC104 protocols can work at the same time, but consider that there is only one point map.
So, both protocols use the same configured points.
● The 52b contact is closed when the breaker is open and open when the breaker is closed.
● The Phase Directional element responds to the forward load current. In the case of a following reverse fault,
the element needs some time – in the order of 8 ms – to change the directional signal. Some protection
elements such as Instantaneous Overcurrent may respond to reverse faults before the directional signal has
changed. A coordination time of at least 10 ms must therefore be added to all the instantaneous protection
elements under the supervision of the Phase Directional element. If current reversal is a concern, a longer
delay – in the order of 20 ms – is needed.
● The same curves used for the time overcurrent elements are used for Neutral Displacement. When using the
curve to determine the operating time of the Neutral Displacement element, substitute the ratio of neutral
voltage to Pickup level for the current ratio shown on the horizontal axis of the curve plot.
● The relay is not approved as, or intended to be, a revenue metering instrument. If used in a peak load control
system, consider the accuracy rating and method of measurement employed, and the source VTs and CTs, in
comparison with the electrical utility revenue metering system.
● In bulk oil circuit breakers, the interrupting time for currents is less than 25% of the interrupting rating and can
be significantly longer than the normal interrupting time.
● For future reference, make a printout of the conversion report immediately after the conversion in case
conversion reports are removed or settings modified from the 8 Series Setup Software.
● If the 3-phase VT uses a delta connection and FREQUENCY INPUT is set to J2-3VT, the positive sequence
voltage is used as the supervision voltage. In such conditions, the true supervision level is internally changed
to 1/Ö3 of the user setting since the base of VT here is the phase-phase voltage. (869, 889 only)
● To monitor the trip coil circuit integrity, use the relay terminals “FA_1 NO” and “FA_1 COM” to connect the Trip
coil, and provide a jumper between terminals “FA_1 COM” and “FA_1 OPT/V” voltage monitor).
● WiFi and USB do not currently support CyberSentry security. For this reason WiFi is disabled by default if the
CyberSentry option is purchased. WiFi can be enabled, but be aware that doing so violates the security and
compliance model that CyberSentry is supposed to provide.
● In Power factor monitoring, SWITCH-IN and SWITCH-OUT are mutually exclusive settings. (845, 850)

1.9.1 STORAGE
Store the unit indoors in a cool, dry place. If possible, store in the original packaging. Follow the storage
temperature range outlined in the Specifications.
If applicable, use the factory-provided dust caps on all Arc Flash sensor fiber and connectors when not in use, to
avoid dust contamination in the transceiver and sensor plugs.

1601-0450 21
Chapter 1 - Introduction

1.10 FOR FURTHER ASSISTANCE

For current manuals and software go to:
Website: www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/ProductListing.htm
For product support, contact the information and call center as follows:
GE Grid Solutions
650 Markland Street
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6C 0M1
Worldwide telephone: +1 905 927 7070
Europe/Middle East/Africa telephone: +34 94 485 88 54
North America toll-free: 1 800 547 8629
Fax: +1 905 927 5098
Worldwide e-mail: [email protected]
Europe e-mail: [email protected]
Website: http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin

1.10.1 REPAIRS
The firmware and software can be upgraded without return of the device to the factory.
For issues not solved by troubleshooting, the process to return the device to the factory for repair is as follows:
●Contact a GE Grid Solutions Technical Support Center. Contact information is found in the first chapter.
●Obtain a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) number from the Technical Support Center.
●Verify that the RMA and Commercial Invoice received have the correct information.
●Tightly pack the unit in a box with bubble wrap, foam material, or styrofoam inserts or packaging peanuts to
cushion the item(s). You may also use double boxing whereby you place the box in a larger box that contains
at least 5 cm of cushioning material.
● Ship the unit by courier or freight forwarder, along with the Commercial Invoice and RMA, to the factory.
● Customers are responsible for shipping costs to the factory, regardless of whether the unit is under warranty.
● Fax a copy of the shipping information to the GE Grid Solutions service department.
Use the detailed return procedure outlined at
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/support/ret_proc.htm
The current warranty and return information are outlined at
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/warranty.htm

22 1601-0450
 CHAPTER 2

INSTALLATION
Chapter 2 - Installation

24 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation

2.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter describes the mechanical and electrical installation of the relay.
This chapter contains the following sections:
Chapter Overview 25
Product Identification 26
Dimensions 27
Mounting 28
Draw-out Unit Withdrawal and Insertion 33
Removable Power Supply 35
Removable Magnetic Module 36
Remote Module I/O (RMIO) 39
IP20 Back Cover 41
Arc Flash Sensor 42
Physical considerations of wiring 45
Terminal connections 48
Terminal Identification 51
RMIO Module Installation 54
Phase Sequence and Transformer Polarity 56
Ground and Sensitive Ground CT Inputs 57
Zero-Sequence CT Installation 59
Voltage Inputs 60
Control Power 61
Contact Inputs 62
Output Relays 64
Serial Communications 67
IRIG-B 69
Typical Wiring Diagram 70

1601-0450 25
Chapter 2 - Installation

2.2 PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION

The product identification label is located on the side panel of the relay. This label indicates the product model,
serial number, and date of manufacture. The following figure shows an example of such a label.

Note:
This example label is specific to a particular order code of the 850 and may not represent your model.

Figure 3: Product label example

26 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation

2.3 DIMENSIONS
The relay dimensions are shown below. Additional dimensions for mounting, and panel cutouts, are shown in the
following sections.

 
    
 
 

  

    
  
 

Figure 4: Relay Dimensions

1601-0450 27
Chapter 2 - Installation

2.4 MOUNTING
The relay can be mounted two ways: standard panel mount or optional tab mounting, if required.
● Standard panel mounting: From the front of the panel, slide the empty case into the cutout. From the rear of
the panel, screw the case into the panel at the 8 screw positions.
● Optional tab mounting: The V tabs are located on the sides of the case and appear as shown in the
following figure. Use needle nose pliers to bend the retaining V tabs outward to about 90°. Use caution and
do not bend and distort the wall of the enclosure adjacent to the tabs. The relay can now be inserted and can
be panel wired.

Figure 5: V Tabs Located on Case Side

2.4.1 STANDARD PANEL MOUNT

The standard panel mount and cutout dimensions are illustrated below.

Caution:
To avoid the potential for personal injury due to fire hazards, ensure the unit is
mounted in a safe location and/or within an appropriate enclosure.

28 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation

Figure 6: Standard panel mount

Figure 7: Panel cutout dimensions

1601-0450 29
Chapter 2 - Installation

Depth reducing collar

Three different sizes of optional depth reducing collar are available for mounting relays in narrow-depth service
panels, or wherever space is an issue.

Note:
The drill hole locations are different when a depth reducing collar is used. See the Depth reducing collar panel cutout figure
below.

● 18J0-0030 8 Series Depth Reducing Collar - 1 3/8”

● 18J0-0029 8 Series Depth Reducing Collar - 3”
● 18J0-0184 8 Series Depth Reducing Collar - 3 3/4”







 

  

   ! 
   

 

    



Figure 8: Depth reducing collar dimensions

30 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation


 
















   

Figure 9: Depth reducing collar panel cutout

1601-0450 31
Chapter 2 - Installation

7,-6:-;7"# ; "& <&=

$ '( )2*7,*-*5 1>?@A)54
BCD?EFBFC GH>IEA )0 BF JK 1)./ #L4

  !"#$ !%&&'

$ '( )**+,*-)* ).-/0"# 1-2.+334 
$ '( )**+,*-)) -"# 1/5.6334 
$ '( )**+,*-0* -./0"# 1+0.-334 

7 8"8 !'"9 #"

7+6/*-'6.MNH

         


     
      
  

    
    
        
   
   
    
 
   

    
   

Figure 10: Depth reducing collar installation

To mount an 8 Series relay with a depth reducing collar, follow these steps:
1. Drill mounting holes as shown on the Depth reducing collar panel cutout figure above.
2. Mount the collar on the captive unit using eight screws.
3. Mount the combined unit and collar on the panel using eight screws.

32 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation

2.5 DRAW-OUT UNIT WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION

Caution:
Turn off control power before drawing out or re-inserting the relay to prevent mal-operation.

Follow the steps outlined in the diagrams below to insert and withdraw.

1601-0450 33
Chapter 2 - Installation

STEP 1

SCALE 0.400

HANDLE TO BE LIFTED TO 90
POSITION WHILE SLIDING
DRAW-OUT UNIT INTO
CAPTIVE UNIT

STEP 3
STEP 2

PUSH HANDLE DOWN

AND TIGHTEN THE SCREW
MAINTAIN HANDLE LIFTED POSITION
WITH 16 IN-LB TORQUE
UNTIL DRAW-OUT UNIT
HANDLE SHOULD BE FLUSH
IS FULLY INSERTED
WITH FRONT PANEL SURFACE

Figure 11: Unit withdrawal and insertion diagram

34 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation

2.6 REMOVABLE POWER SUPPLY

Follow the steps outlined in the below diagram to insert (#1) or remove (#2) the power supply from the unit.
  

     

  

         
         
        
         


     
      
        
            
  
          
       

Figure 12: Insert or Remove the Power Supply

Figure 13: Unlatch Module

1601-0450 35
Chapter 2 - Installation

2.7 REMOVABLE MAGNETIC MODULE

Warning:
You must follow all preparation steps before removing the CT/VT magnetic module.

Warning:
You must identify all current and voltage sources connected to the relay before
starting the removal process.

Warning:
Only suitably-qualified personnel may remove the magnetic module from an
installed relay.

Warning:
Appropriate PPE is required based on the arc flash calculations.

Caution:
LOTO (Lockout Tag Out) of the system is required prior to module removal/
replacement.

Follow the procedures outlined below to remove or replace the CT/VT magnetic module.

PREPARATION
1. Shut down and de-energize all systems connected to the relay.
2. Review all cautions and warnings in the introduction.

Warning:
A relay, with the magnetic module removed, does NOT have an internal automatic
CT shorting mechanism.

Warning:
Hazardous voltages may exist when opening the secondary circuits of live current
transformers.

Warning:
Make sure that in-field current transformer secondary circuits are shorted out
before making or removing any connection to the current transformer (CT) input
terminals.

36 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation

 
 
 



Figure 14: Removing/replacing the CT/VT Magnetic Module

REMOVAL

Caution:
LOTO (Lockout Tag Out) of the system is required prior to module removal/
replacement.

1. Remove the draw-out unit from the chassis. Carefully set aside.
2. Within the captive chassis, unscrew the mounting screw (as indicated in the following figure).
3. Insert the magnetic module extractor tool as shown in the following figure, without engaging the pins.
4. Slide the tool to the left, engaging the pins fully (see arrow in figure).
5. Pull the tool handle towards the operator to disengage the module, and carefully remove the module from the
chassis.
6. Remove the tool from the module, and save for future use.

REPLACEMENT

Caution:
LOTO (Lockout Tag Out) of the system is required prior to module removal/
replacement.
Ensure the replacement CT /VT module is the same type as the removed module.
Alternate models and configurations may be unsafe for use.

1. Insert the extractor tool into the front of the module, then slide the tool to the left to engage the tool pins.
2. Place the module/tool at the front of the chassis so that it is flush with the left and bottom sides.
3. Slide the module/tool into the back of the chassis as far as it will go, making sure the connectors mate while
keeping the module flush to the left and bottom sides of the chassis.
4. Tighten the captive mounting screw using a torque of 6 in-lbs.
5. Remove the tool from the magnetics module and save for future use.
6. Insert the draw-out unit.
7. Re-energize the relay system.

1601-0450 37
Chapter 2 - Installation

8. Remove the external shorting equipment from the CT inputs.

9. Ensure the In Service LED on the relay front panel is green.
10. Navigate to the Target message screen (press Home and then Targets) and check that the Target screen
does not show any Self-Test errors. Self-Test errors may indicate that the module has not been mounted
properly.
11. Verify that CTs and VTs, digital inputs and other circuits are all metering correctly.

38 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation

2.8 REMOTE MODULE I/O (RMIO)

If using the Remote RTD module, follow these installation steps.

Figure 15: RMIO - DIN rail mounting - Base & Expansion units

Figure 16: RMIO - Base Unit screw mounting

1601-0450 39
Chapter 2 - Installation

Figure 17: RMIO - Expansion Unit screw mounting

40 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation

2.9 IP20 BACK COVER

If using the IP20 back cover, follow these installation steps.
1. Place the IP20 cover in the orientation shown over the CT/VT terminal blocks, routing wiring through the
cover slots.
2. Secure the cover with the 4 screws provided. Suggested tightening torque is 8 lb-in (0.9 Nm).

Figure 18: IP20 Back Cover installation

1601-0450 41
Chapter 2 - Installation

2.10 ARC FLASH SENSOR

The Arc Flash sensor houses the fiber optics and membrane that are used to detect the arc flash. Two mounting
screw holes are provided to affix the sensors to the panel.

Caution:
If the Arc Flash Protection is used, operands for Arc Flash sensor failures must be
assigned to an auxiliary output relay. This must be connected to the control logic of
the breaker equipment to ensure safe operations when the output relay is asserted.
In the event of this assertion, the Hazard Reduction Category code cannot be
maintained unless backup protection is continuing to maintain it.

Caution:
Arc Flash sensor fiber is pressure sensitive and must be handled carefully to avoid
damage. Read the following guidelines fully before proceeding.

Take care when handling the Arc Flash sensor fiber.

● Do not bend the sensor fiber sharply (with a radius of less than 25 mm (1 inch)). Sharp bends can damage
the fiber. Do not pull or tug loops of sensor fiber, as sharp bends may result.
● Do not clamp the sensor fiber tightly during installation. The sensor fiber should be held in place loosely for
the best long-term performance. Avoid over-tightening ties which may deform or break the sensor fiber.
● Do not pull or tug sensor fiber with force, as this may cause internal damage or separate the fiber from the
cable connector.
● Do not twist the sensor fiber, as twisting can damage the fiber resulting in substandard performance.
● Do not attach sensor fiber directly to the bus.
● Avoid surface temperatures above 70°C or 158°F to prolong the life of the fiber.
● Secure all sensor fibers (loosely but securely) away from any moving parts.
● Use the factory-provided dust caps on all Arc Flash sensor fiber and connectors when not in use, to avoid
dust contamination in the transceiver and sensor plugs.

42 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation

Installlation

Figure 19: AF Sensor - front, side and top view



 

 




 
Figure 20: AF Sensor - dimensions of sensor tip

Note:
The sensor fiber should be secured loosely for the best long-term performance. Avoid over-tightening ties which may deform
or break the sensor fiber.

Before installing the AF sensor unit, ensure that all other drilling and installation is complete to minimize possible
damage to the sensitive unit.

1601-0450 43
Chapter 2 - Installation

To install the AF sensor and route the sensor fiber, follow these steps:
1. Choose a location for the sensor clear of any obstructions that could shield the sensor from arc flash light.
2. Mount the sensor securely, using the mounting screw holes.
3. Once the sensor is securely mounted, carefully route the sensor fiber from the AFS sensor to the base unit,
minimizing loops and curves for the strongest possible signal.
4. Secure all sensor fibers (loosely but securely) away from any moving parts.

Note:
Both the AF sensor connections (CH 1 through CH 4) and the sensor cables are shipped with dust caps in place to avoid dust
contamination. The small rubber dust caps must be removed before operation.

44 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation

2.11 PHYSICAL CONSIDERATIONS OF WIRING

When installing two lugs on one terminal, both lugs must be oriented as shown in the picture below. This is to
ensure the adjacent lower terminal block does not interfere with the lug body.

S
W
WAS

1 2 3

LO
T L
T L
BLO
D D

Figure 21: Positioning the lugs correctly

Figure 22: Correct Installation Method

Figure 23: INCORRECT INSTALLATION METHOD (lower lug reversed)

1601-0450 45
Chapter 2 - Installation

2.11.1 TERMINAL STRIP TYPES

There are two types of removable terminal strips as shown: right-angle plugs with side screw connections, and
straight plugs with front screw connections.

Figure 24: Right-angle plugs with side screw connections

46 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation

Figure 25: Straight plugs with front screw connections

2.11.2 WIRE SIZE

Use the following guideline for wiring to terminal strips A, B, C, D, F, G, H:
● 12 AWG to 24 AWG
● Suggested wiring screw tightening torque: 4.5 in-lbs (0.5 N-m)
● Usage of ferrules or pin terminals is recommended
● Suggested wire stripping / pin contact length:
○ Right-angle connection type plug: 7 to 8 mm
○ Front connection type plug: 12 mm
Use the following guideline for wiring to terminal blocks J, K:
● 12 AWG to 22 AWG (3.3 mm2 to 0.3 mm2): Single wire termination with/without 9.53 mm (0.375”) maximum
diameter ring terminals.
● 14 AWG to 22 AWG (2.1 mm2 to 0.3 mm2): Multiple wire termination with 9.53 mm (0.375”) maximum
diameter ring terminals. Two ring terminals maximum per circuit.
● Suggested wiring screw tightening torque: 15 in-lb (1.7 N-m)
● Suggested mounting screw tightening torque (to attach terminal block to chassis): 8 in-lb (0.9 N-m)

1601-0450 47
Chapter 2 - Installation

2.12 TERMINAL CONNECTIONS

All the terminal strips are labeled with a slot letter to identify the module slot position and numbers to identify the
terminals within the module.

Note:
Make sure that the first letter on the terminal strip corresponds to the slot location identified on the chassis silkscreen.

Due to the possible number of applications, it is not possible to present typical connections for all possible schemes.
The information in this section covers the main aspects of interconnectivity, in the general areas of inputs, outputs,
communications and grounding. The figure below shows the rear terminal layout of the 8 Series platform.

48 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation

2.12.1 GENERAL CONNECTIONS

 I AC A A

C C  C C
 B D
1 1 1 1 E E
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 P
T 
5 5 5 
6 6 6  
7 7 7 R
8 8 8
9 9 9
1 1 1
  P
T
F G H 21 21 
31 31  
1 1 1 41 41
2 2 2 R
3 3 3 51 51
4 4 4 61 61
5 5 5 71 71
6 6 6 81 81 
7 7 7
8 8 8 J K
9 9 9 1 1
1 1 1
11 11 11 2 2
21 21 21 3 3
4 4
5 $%&' ( ); +,-. / .: 5
31 31 31
41 41 41 6 6
51 51 51 7 7
61 61 61 8 8
71 71 71 9 9
81 81 81
91 91 91 1 1
2 2 2 11 11
21 21 21 21 21
22 22 22 13 $%&' ( )* +,-. / .0 13
23 23 23 41 41
42 42 42
51 51
16 16

I AC AA!" #

1601-0450 49
Chapter 2 - Installation

Figure 26: Rear Terminal Layout of the Platform

Power Supply
H - HV Power Supply L - LV Power Supply
Terminal Description Terminal Description
(DC Voltage input polarity)
1 Line 1 +ve (positive)
2 Neutral 2 -ve (negative)
3 Ground 3 Ground

Communications
SE - Comms - Basic Ethernet 1E/1P/3E/3A - Comms - Advanced Ethernet
Terminal Description Terminal Description
1 IRIG-B (+) 1 IRIG-B (+)
2 IRIG-B (-) 2 IRIG-B (-)
3 RS485_1 (+) 3 RS485_1 (+)
4 RS485_1 (-) 4 RS485_1 (-)
5 RS485_1 COM 5 RS485_1 COM
6 RESERVED 6 RESERVED
7 RESERVED 7 RESERVED
8 optional RMIO COM 8 optional RMIO COM
9 optional RMIO + 9 optional RMIO +
10 optional RMIO - 10 optional RMIO -
RJ45 ETHERNET RJ45 NOT USED

50 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation

2.13 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION


    ! " " # 
"! $% &' (
 )*  ! " " #  "! $% &' +
 ,&,+  -' " ' %. '!/ ! #!  "
0'! 01'/
2 *%" ' " % 3!1 ( ) / 43()5
$%  " -  &' ( '/
22 3!- & "' "'!" 67 % 3' ! )*



Figure 27: Optional I/O card terminal mappings

1601-0450 51
Chapter 2 - Installation

 

Figure 28: Optional I/O card terminal mappings cont.

AC Analog
AC Inputs - 1 X 3-Phase 1/5A CT, 4 AC Inputs - 1 X 3-Phase 1/5A CT, AC Inputs - 1 X 3-Phase CT, SM
VT (Slot J) 1x50:0.025A Field Inputs with DCmA or DCV
(Slot K - OPTIONAL) Field Current Input
(Slot K - OPTIONAL)
Terminal Description Terminal Description Terminal Description
1 CT1 PhA 1 CT2 PhA 1 CT2 PhA
2 CT1 PhA RETURN 2 CT2 PhA RETURN 2 CT2 PhA RETURN
3 CT1 PhB 3 CT2 PhB 3 CT2 PhB
4 CT1 PhB RETURN 4 CT2 PhB RETURN 4 CT2 PhB RETURN
5 CT1 PhC 5 CT2 PhC 5 CT2 PhC
6 CT1 PhC RETURN 6 CT2 PhC RETURN 6 CT2 PhC RETURN
7 CT1 N/G* 7 CBCT_IN (or 7 CT2 N/G
50:0.025_IN)
8 CT1 N/G RETURN* 8 CBCT_RETURN (or 8 CT2 N/G RETURN
50:0.025_RETURN)
9 VT1A IN 9 RESERVED 9 AC Field Voltage Input
VF +
10 VT1A RETURN 10 RESERVED 10 AC Field Voltage Input
VF -
11 VT1B IN 11 RESERVED 11 DC Exciter Voltage
Input VE +

52 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation

AC Inputs - 1 X 3-Phase 1/5A CT, 4 AC Inputs - 1 X 3-Phase 1/5A CT, AC Inputs - 1 X 3-Phase CT, SM
VT (Slot J) 1x50:0.025A Field Inputs with DCmA or DCV
(Slot K - OPTIONAL) Field Current Input
(Slot K - OPTIONAL)
Terminal Description Terminal Description Terminal Description
12 VT1B RETURN 12 RESERVED 12 DC Exciter Voltage
Input VE -
13 VT1C IN 13 RESERVED 13 DC Field Current Input
IF +
14 VT1C RETURN 14 RESERVED 14 DC Field Current Input
IF -
15 VT1N IN 15 RESERVED 15 DC PF Regulator
Voltage Output PFVout
+
16 VT1N RETURN 16 RESERVED 16 DC PF Regulator
Voltage Output PFVout
-
* If Ground Current option is 0B or 5B:
7 CBCT_IN (or
50:0.025_IN)
8 CBCT_RETURN (or
50:0.025_RETURN)

1601-0450 53
Chapter 2 - Installation

2.14 RMIO MODULE INSTALLATION

The optional remote module (RMIO) is designed to be mounted near the motor. This eliminates the need for
multiple RTD cables to run back from the motor, which may be in a remote location, to the switchgear.
Although the RMIO is internally shielded to minimize noise pickup and interference, it should be mounted away from
high current conductors or sources of strong magnetic fields.

Figure 29: RMIO unit showing 2 IO_G modules

PU U I
 I
 I
 I


1 1 1 1
 L    
S N    
 G    
   
T 9 9 9 9
R 8 8 8 8
7 7 7 7
6 6 6 6
ot + B 5 5 5 5
 1 1 1 1
- B
 B    
C    
   


Figure 30: RMIO terminal identification with 4 IO_G modules

54 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation

 w !"#g$%&
g&u'5 bu – 

er e I
I = <

ZT (*) SHELD TWSTED PAR B RMO +
: OPTOCOUPLER 6'!&7 ;w$&
OPTOCOUPLER : B RMO -
DATA
DATA D COM

SCADA, PLC, OR B3 COMMON

PERSONAL COMPUTER
GROUND THESHELD ATTHE (*)TERMNATNGMPEDANCEATEACH END 8942181.
SCADA/PLC/COMPUTERONLY (typically  0 ohms and  nF)
Figure 31: RMIO wiring diagram

1601-0450 55
Chapter 2 - Installation

2.15 PHASE SEQUENCE AND TRANSFORMER POLARITY

For correct operation of the relay features, follow the instrument transformer polarities, shown in the wiring
diagrams. Note the solid square markings that are shown with all instrument transformer connections. When the
connections adhere to the drawing, the arrow shows the direction of power flow for positive watts and the positive
direction of lagging vars. The phase sequence is user programmable for either ABC or ACB rotation.
Depending on order code, the relay can have up to four (4) current inputs in each J slot and K slot. Three of them
are used for connecting to the phase CT phases A, B, and C. The fourth input is a ground input that can be
connected to either a ground CT placed on the neutral from a Wye connected transformer winding, or to a donut
type CT measuring the zero sequence current from a grounded system. The relay CTs are placed in a packet
mounted to the chassis of the relay. There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. Current
transformers with 1 to 12000 A primaries may be used.

Caution:
Verify that the relay’s nominal input current of 1 A or 5 A matches the secondary
rating of the connected CTs. Unmatched CTs may result in equipment damage or
inadequate protection.

Caution:
IMPORTANT: The phase and ground current inputs correctly measure up to 46
times the current input’s nominal rating. Time overcurrent curves become
horizontal lines for currents above 20 × PKP.

56 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation

2.16 GROUND AND SENSITIVE GROUND CT INPUTS

There are two dedicated ground inputs referred to throughout this manual as the Ground Current (1A/5A secondary)
and the Sensitive Ground (50:0.025) inputs.
Before planning to make any ground connections, be aware that the relay automatically calculates the neutral
(residual) current from the sum of the three phase current phasors, which is used by the Neutral IOC and TOC
which are both suitable for the ground fault detection.
The following figures show two possible ground connections using the ground current input (Terminals J7 and J8)
and sensitive ground connections using the sensitive ground current input (Terminals K7 and K8).
The ground input (Terminals J7 and J8) is used in conjunction with a zero sequence CT (core balance) as a source,
or in the neutral of wye-connected source CTs.
When using the residual connection, set the Ground CT Primary setpoint to a value equal to the Phase CT Primary
setpoint. Note that only 1A and 5A secondary CTs may be used for the residual connection.

MOTOR

J1 J3 J5 869
J2 J4 J6

J7 J8 J7 J8

GROUND GROUND

894077A1.cdr

Figure 32: Ground Current Input Connections

Alternatively, the 50:0.025 ground CT input has been designed for sensitive ground current detection on high
resistance grounded systems where the GE Digital Energy 50:0.025 core-balance CT is to be used.
For example, in mining applications where earth leakage current must be measured for personnel safety, primary
ground current as low as 0.5 A primary may be detected with the GE Digital Energy 50:0.025 CT. Only one ground
CT input tap must be used on a given unit. Note that when this CT input is selected for the Ground Fault function,
fixed ratio of 50:0.025 A is used by the relay.

1601-0450 57
Chapter 2 - Installation

GE 50:0.025
core-balance CT

MACHINE

* Terminals J7 and J8
K7* K8* if Ground Current
option is 0B or 5B
Isg

SENSITIVE
GROUND
SENSITIVE GROUND INPUT
WITH ZERO SEQUENCE CT
894221A2.cdr

Figure 33: Sensitive Ground Current Input Connections

58 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation

2.17 ZERO-SEQUENCE CT INSTALLATION

The figure below shows the various CT connections and the exact placement of a Zero Sequence current CT, so
that ground fault current can be detected. Twisted pair cabling on the Zero Sequence CT is recommended.

U    

G o
 oo o 
 

4  o
m
  o   o
 
Sc Sc  
A B C N  " $ %

G o

o
  

T& '(&)*+,
-)./ 01 &*
LOA
l&2+ .3+1

99 !"#
LOA

Figure 34: Zero Sequence (Core Balance) CT Installation

1601-0450 59
Chapter 2 - Installation

2.18 VOLTAGE INPUTS

The relays have four channels for AC voltage inputs, each with an isolating transformer. Voltage transformers up to
a maximum 5000:1 ratio may be used. The nominal secondary voltage must be in the 10 to 240 V range.
The relay supports wye and delta (or open delta) VT connections. The typical open delta VT wiring diagram is
shown in the following figure: Open Delta VT Connections. The typical wye VT wiring diagram is shown in the wiring
diagrams.
=>+>?

()*+,-*./ 012*,1 3456

!"#$ %

!"#$ &

!"#$ '

  


       

  

    

 

 

789:;9<

Figure 35: Open Delta VT Connections

60 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation

2.19 CONTROL POWER

Control power is supplied to the relay such that it matches the relay’s installed power supply range.

Caution:
Control power supplied to the relay must match the installed power supply range. If
the applied voltage does not match, damage to the unit may occur. All grounds
MUST be connected for normal operation regardless of control power supply type.

For more details, please refer to the power supply section.

Caution:
The relay should be connected directly to the ground bus, using the shortest
practical path. A tinned copper, braided, shielding and bonding cable should be
used. As a minimum, 96 strands of number 34 AWG should be used. Belden catalog
number 8660 is suitable.

Figure 36: Control Power Connection

1601-0450 61
Chapter 2 - Installation

2.20 CONTACT INPUTS

Depending on the order code, the relay has a different number of contact inputs which can be used to operate a
variety of logic functions for circuit switching device control, external trips, blocking of protection elements, etc. The
relay has contact inputs and virtual inputs that are combined in a form of programmable logic to facilitate the
implementation of various schemes.
The voltage threshold at which the contact inputs detect a closed contact input is programmable as 17 V DC for 24
V sources, 33 V DC for 48 V sources, 84 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources, and 166 V DC for 250 V sources.
Wet or Dry input signal types can be connected to contact input terminals as shown in the figure: Wet and Dry
Contact Input Wiring Examples.
Dry inputs use an internal +24V supply. The voltage threshold must be set to 17V for the inputs to be recognized
using the internal +24V.

Note:
The same type of input signal must be connected to all contact inputs on the same contact input card.

62 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation

I

SI 
SI
( 

I

SI 
SI
( Y
E 

D
S

Y

Figure 37: Wet and Dry Contact Input Wiring Examples

1601-0450 63
Chapter 2 - Installation

2.21 OUTPUT RELAYS

The locations of the output relays have a fixed assignment for the platform called the master identifier. I/O options
that include inputs occupy the fixed assigned output locations so in these cases the relay assignment maps to the
master identifier.
The critical failure output relay is reserved as Relay_8 and it is omitted and is not programmable.
Slots F, G, H Terminal Master Identifier Slots F,G,H with I/O options A, A, A
Terminal# SLOT F SLOT G SLOT H Terminal# SLOT F SLOT G SLOT H

1 RELAY_1 RELAY_9 RELAY_17 1 RELAY_1 RELAY_9 RELAY_17

2 RELAY_1 RELAY_9 RELAY_17 2 RELAY_1 RELAY_9 RELAY_17

3 RELAY_1 RELAY_9 RELAY_17 3 RELAY_1 RELAY_9 RELAY_17

4 RELAY_2 RELAY_10 RELAY_18 4 RELAY_2 RELAY_10 RELAY_18

5 RELAY_2 RELAY_10 RELAY_18 5 RELAY_2 RELAY_10 RELAY_18

6 RELAY_2 RELAY_10 RELAY_18 6 RELAY_2 RELAY_10 RELAY_18

7 RELAY_3 RELAY_11 RELAY_19 7 RELAY_3 RELAY_11 RELAY_19

8 RELAY_3 RELAY_11 RELAY_19 8 RELAY_3 RELAY_11 RELAY_19

9 RELAY_3 RELAY_11 RELAY_19 9 RELAY_3 RELAY_11 RELAY_19

10 RELAY_4 RELAY_12 RELAY_20 10 RELAY_4 RELAY_12 RELAY_20

11 RELAY_4 RELAY_12 RELAY_20 11 RELAY_4 RELAY_12 RELAY_20

12 RELAY_4 RELAY_12 RELAY_20 12 RELAY_4 RELAY_12 RELAY_20

13 RELAY_5 RELAY_13 RELAY_21 13 Digital In_1 Digital In_8 Digital In_15

14 RELAY_5 RELAY_13 RELAY_21 14 Digital In_2 Digital In_9 Digital In_16

15 RELAY_5 RELAY_13 RELAY_21 15 Digital In_3 Digital In_10 Digital In_17

16 RELAY_6 RELAY_14 RELAY_22 16 Digital In_4 Digital In_11 Digital In_18

17 RELAY_6 RELAY_14 RELAY_22 17 Digital In_5 Digital In_12 Digital In_19

18 RELAY_6 RELAY_14 RELAY_22 18 Digital In_6 Digital In_13 Digital In_20

19 RELAY_7 RELAY_15 RELAY_23 19 Digital In_7 Digital In_14 Digital In_21

20 RELAY_7 RELAY_15 RELAY_23 20 Common Common Common

21 RELAY_7 RELAY_15 RELAY_23 21 +24V +24V +24V

22 RELAY_8 RELAY_16 RELAY_24 22 RELAY_8 RELAY_16 RELAY_24

23 RELAY_8 RELAY_16 RELAY_24 23 RELAY_8 RELAY_16 RELAY_24

24 RELAY_8 RELAY_16 RELAY_24 24 RELAY_8 RELAY_16 RELAY_24

64 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation

Slots F, G, H with I/O options M, L, F Slots F,G,H with I/O options A, L, A

Terminal # SLOT F SLOT G SLOT H Terminal # SLOT F SLOT G SLOT H

1 RELAY_1 Analog Out_1 Digital In_8 1 RELAY_1 Analog Out_1 RELAY_9

2 RELAY_1 Analog Out_2 Digital In_9 2 RELAY_1 Analog Out_2 RELAY_9

3 Reserved Analog Out_3 Digital In_10 3 RELAY_1 Analog Out_3 RELAY_9

4 RELAY_2 Analog Out_4 Digital In_11 4 RELAY_2 Analog Out_4 RELAY_10

5 RELAY_2 Analog Out_5 Digital In_12 5 RELAY_2 Analog Out_5 RELAY_10

6 Reserved Analog Out_6 Digital In_13 6 RELAY_2 Analog Out_6 RELAY_10

7 RELAY_3 Analog Out_7 Digital In_14 7 RELAY_3 Analog Out_7 RELAY_11

8 RELAY_3 Return Digital In_15 8 RELAY_3 Return RELAY_11

9 Reserved Shield Digital In_16 9 RELAY_3 Shield RELAY_11

10 RELAY_4 Analog In_1 Digital In_17 10 RELAY_4 Analog In_1 RELAY_12

11 RELAY_4 Analog In_2 Common 11 RELAY_4 Analog In_2 RELAY_12

12 Reserved Analog In_3 +24V 12 RELAY_4 Analog In_3 RELAY_12

13 Digital In_1 Analog In_4 ARC FLASH 13 Digital In_1 Analog In_4 Digital In_8
Sensor 1 Sensor
14 Digital In_2 Return 2 Sensor 3 14 Digital In_2 Return Digital In_9
Sensor 4
15 Digital In_3 Shield 15 Digital In_3 Shield Digital In_10

16 Digital In_4 Reserved 16 Digital In_4 Reserved Digital In_11

17 Digital In_5 Reserved 17 Digital In_5 Reserved Digital In_12

18 Digital In_6 Reserved 18 Digital In_6 Reserved Digital In_13

19 Digital In_7 RTD_Hot 19 Digital In_7 RTD_Hot Digital In_14

20 Common RTD_Comp 20 Common RTD_Comp Common

21 +24V RTD_Return 21 +24V RTD_Return +24V

22 RELAY_8 Shield 22 RELAY_8 Shield RELAY_16

23 RELAY_8 Reserved 23 RELAY_8 Reserved RELAY_16

24 RELAY_8 Reserved 24 RELAY_8 Reserved RELAY_16

Slots F,G,H with I/O options A, A, F Slots F, G, H with I/O options A, N, F

Terminal # SLOT F SLOT G SLOT H Terminal # SLOT F SLOT H

1 RELAY_1 RELAY_9 Digital In_15 1 RELAY_1 Digital In_8

2 RELAY_1 RELAY_9 Digital In_16 2 RELAY_1 Digital In_9

3 RELAY_1 RELAY_9 Digital In_17 3 RELAY_1 Digital In_10

1601-0450 65
Chapter 2 - Installation

Slots F,G,H with I/O options A, A, F Slots F, G, H with I/O options A, N, F

Terminal # SLOT F SLOT G SLOT H Terminal # SLOT F SLOT H

4 RELAY_2 RELAY_10 Digital In_18 4 RELAY_2 Digital In_11

5 RELAY_2 RELAY_10 Digital In_19 5 RELAY_2 Digital In_12

6 RELAY_2 RELAY_10 Digital In_20 6 RELAY_2 Digital In_13

7 RELAY_3 RELAY_11 Digital In_21 7 RELAY_3 Digital In_14

8 RELAY_3 RELAY_11 Digital In_22 8 RELAY_3 Digital In_15

9 RELAY_3 RELAY_11 Digital In_23 9 RELAY_3 Digital In_16

10 RELAY_4 RELAY_12 Digital In_24 10 RELAY_4 Digital In_17

11 RELAY_4 RELAY_12 Common 11 RELAY_4 Common

12 RELAY_4 RELAY_12 +24V 12 RELAY_4 +24V

13 Digital In_1 Digital In_8 ARC FLASH 13 Digital In_1 ARC FLASH
Sensor 1 Sensor 1 Sensor
14 Digital In_2 Digital In_9 Sensor 2 14 Digital In_2 2 Sensor 3
Sensor 3 Sensor 4
15 Digital In_3 Digital In_10 15 Digital In_3
Sensor 4
16 Digital In_4 Digital In_11 16 Digital In_4

17 Digital In_5 Digital In_12 17 Digital In_5

18 Digital In_6 Digital In_13 18 Digital In_6

19 Digital In_7 Digital In_14 19 Digital In_7

20 Common Common 20 Common

21 +24V +24V 21 +24V

22 RELAY_8 RELAY_16 22 RELAY_8

23 RELAY_8 RELAY_16 23 RELAY_8

24 RELAY_8 RELAY_16 24 RELAY_8

66 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation

2.22 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

One two-wire RS485 port is provided. Up to thirty-two relays can be daisy-chained together on a communication
channel without exceeding the driver capability. For larger systems, additional serial channels must be added.
Commercially available repeaters can also be used to add more than 32 relays on a single channel. Suitable cable
should have a characteristic impedance of 120 ohms and total wire length should not exceed 1,200 meters (4,000
ft).
Voltage differences between remote ends of the communication link are not uncommon. For this reason, surge
protection devices are internally installed across all RS485 terminals. Internally, an isolated power supply with an
opto-coupled data interface is used to prevent noise coupling.

 
F 4;9   E  
%  5'G H
     
5  5'G (
 
 


 
  G
 
   
  

/      

I
I
    J
  '( )*+),  J 
 5'G H
4;9     /   
 
   5'G (
47<=+>?@@< 1&2 AB3, ?CD 1 C09

 

  %& '( )*+),

     , 
-
.
 /  0
1&22 3 45222 6789 F 4;9
 5'G H
 5'G (



   :

 !"#$

Figure 38: RS485 wiring diagram

Caution:
To ensure that all devices in a daisy-chain are at the same potential, it is imperative
that the common terminals of each RS485 port are tied together and grounded at
the master end. Failure to do so may result in intermittent or failed
communications.

The source computer/PLC/SCADA system should have similar transient protection devices installed, either
internally or externally. Ground the shield at one point only, as shown in the figure above, to avoid ground loops.
Correct polarity is also essential. The relays must be wired with all the positive (+) terminals connected together and
all the negative (–) terminals connected together. Each relay must be daisy-chained to the next one. Avoid star or
stub connected configurations. The last device at each end of the daisy-chain should be terminated with a 120 ohm
¼ watt resistor in series with a 1 nF capacitor across the positive and negative terminals. Some systems allow the

1601-0450 67
Chapter 2 - Installation

shield (drain wire) to be used as a common wire and to connect directly to the COM terminal; others function
correctly only if the common wire is connected to the COM terminal, but insulated from the shield. Observing these
guidelines ensure a reliable communication system immune to system transients.

68 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation

2.23 IRIG-B
IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows time stamping of events to be synchronized among connected
devices within 1 millisecond. The IRIG-B time code formats are serial, width-modulated codes which can be either
DC level shift or amplitude modulated (AM) form. The type of form is auto-detected by the relay. Third party
equipment is available for generating the IRIG-B signal; this equipment may use a GPS satellite system to obtain
the time reference so that devices at different geographic locations can also be synchronized.

!  "#
$%& '())*'+,()
(%+,()-.

<=<>?@

A<BC DEFC   


>CGC=HAE= 3 01 /
IJK LMNOP QR 
STUVNPWJX TQJWVSPXJ 4 02 
LNYZSV KSZ [X WLXJ\
56275189:;0

  
Figure 39: IRIG-B connection

1601-0450 69
Chapter 2 - Installation

2.24 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

The following illustrates the electrical wiring of the Draw out unit.
çèéêëìèíî íï ðíñêé ïòíñ ïíé ðíóèìèôê ñõììó
ðíóèìèôê çèéêëìèíî íï òõööèîö ôõéó

D  E FGHI  %      

JKL
JKLD M!
JKL ¹º¶ »· ¦¯¯ °§ ±¤¨¤¥² ¤¥
³´µµ¶³·¸´µ ¤¥¦§¨©ª§¤«¥ ¬­¥©­®


 O N O
  ÝÙÞßÜÙà
ØÙÚÛÜ

%   
ü åû åå åä åú åù å åÿ
T T T T T T T T T å ä ú ù ÿ þ ý
T T T T T T å ä ú ù
T s s s s s s ÿ þ ý
s s   

‰ ‰
» » »á »á »³ »³ » » ¸ ‰ µ ¸ á µ ¸ ³ µ ¸ä µ ¸ ‰ µ ¸á µ ¸ ³ µ ¸ä µ ‘‰
r ‡Ž
q Š‰ Œ ‹ äå´âµæ
p ‡ˆ Š‰‹  áâã
&'()*+ *,-(+(*.& Š‰ ˆ
»´ · ä¶ ¸µ â·ã
fghij h fghij k fghij l `abcde
³âå嶵· ¸µ â·ã ˆ à Ú âß Ý âØÜßÛ
Z[\]^ \ Z[\]^ t Z[\]^ u UVWVXVYU
³á³·
o
ØÙÚÛÜØØÝÞ
)/01*)12 )/003)1(/0
__   n

áâà < 8!9 :9! ""#$ $

HIJK m HIJK L 󧆈 ; V\\WXU]QR^
457   457 BC
wxõ êëìëíîïë ðñíx ãå YTZV\YZUR[T
456 wxu êëìëíîïëééðñít ·å¸ ˆ ãä
» ãú 
 PZRUWZXU
URURVWXSYWUZR
wxô
wxó êëìëíîïëéðñíõ =
456 =>?@A PQRSQT
wxò êëêëììëëííîïë
îïëéðñíu
ðñíô
<7; ãù 
êëìëíîïëééðñíó ÝÛ Ü ã
5:
wxø 897
5 FGE

» ãÿ
wx÷ êëìëíîïëéðñíò 564
ãþ
wtö æçèèçé CD
ãý
wtx stuv B
@
A?@

 
ãü £
? ãåû
ÖÓ¾À ÌÌÏÊÉ ÌÒ×ÍÏ ¾
>
‰â ù ãåå
ãåä

ÖÓ¾¿ ÌÌÏÊÉ ÌÒ×ÍÏ ½
 ! ""#$ $

ÖÓ¾Æ ÌÌÏÊÉ ÌÒ×ÍÏ À 
³å¸·¸³‰Š ãää
ÖӾŠÌÌÏÊÉ ÌÒ×ÍÏ ¿ 
ÊËÌÍ ÎÏ ÐÑÌÒÓ ã‰å¶¸ŠŠ‰â嶺 ãäú
ãäù
ÖÓ¾Ä ÌÌÏÊÉ ÌÒ×ÍÏ Æ 

  

ÖӾà ÌÌÏÊÉ ÌÒ×ÍÏ Å 
ÖÓ¾Â
ÖÓ½Á
ÌÌÏÊÉ ÌÒ×ÍÏ Ä
ÎÕ""ÕÒ

¼¾ 
 
ÖÓ½¾ ½¿ ! ä vw å ÏÇÌ× ¼½

‰â ü ävw ä » ¼À
ú

ä vw ¼¿
Ó¾ ÌÌÏÊÉ ÌÒ×ÍÏ ¾
ävw ù ÎÉÕÑÈÖÊÍÐ ½ ¼Æ
Ó½
ÓÀ
ÌÌÏÊÉ ÌÒ×ÍÏ ½
‰â åû ä vw
GF » ¼Å
ÌÌÏÊÉ ÌÒ×ÍÏ À
ÿ ED

Ó¿ ÌÌÏÊÉ ÌÒ×ÍÏ ¿ FGE ä vw C ¼Ä
ÓÆ ÌÌÏÊÉ ÌÒ×ÍÏ Æ

CD ä vw þ B ÑÏÊÇÏ ÌÒÓÌÔÌÏ
@? ¼Ã £
‰â åå ý

B ¼Â
ÓÅ ÌÌÏÊÉ ÌÒ×ÍÏ Å  ä vw @A?
ü
 @ 
ÓÄ ÌÌÏÊÉ ÌÒ×ÍÏ Ä  A?@ ä vw > ¼¾Á
Óà ÌÌÏÊÉ ÌÒ×ÍÏ Ã 
? ävw åû ÊÍÐ ¿ ¼¾¾
‰â åä åå
 >
Ó ÌÌÏÊÉ ÌÒ×ÍÏ Â ¼¾½
ävw
åä
 ’“”•– —˜™š•—š›
Ó¾Á ÌÌÏÊÉ ÌÒ×ÍÏ ¾Á ¼½½
ä vw ÎÇÌÏÌÎÊÉ ›œ˜™ žšœ
Ó¾¾ ÎÕ""ÕÒ
HIJK # J@ x$ %&J'+B (J)K% J*+I, ä vw ää ¼ÊÌÉÍÇÈ ¼½À —˜™š’˜” Ÿ˜“’
Ó¾½ ½¿ !
‰â åÿ ävw äú ÇÈÉÊË ¼½¿ ’“ ˜¡“¢
äù
C DSGI L yzG{Q yD Q|QySQ}SO RLO~ DSGI  yD RyIL yzG{S 
ÎÓ¾ ¼ÌÔÈÇ ÌÒ×ÍÏ ¾ 3
ÎÓ½
ÎÓÀ
¼ÌÔÈÇ ÌÒ×ÍÏ ½
¼ÌÔÈÇ ÌÒ×ÍÏ À
2
-1
0
ÊËÌÍ Ï ÐÑÌÒÎ Ì ÍÐÌ ÓË
4 5 6 7 8
ävw
/
ÎÓ¿ .
¼ÌÔÈÇ ÌÒ×ÍÏ ¿ -

ÇÏ ¾ ÓÕÏ Ô¾
ÎÕ"× Ô½ Ü߀
ξ ÓÕÏ ÇÏ ¾Ö½ ÇÈÏÍÇÒ ÔÀ
ÇÏ Ä ÓÕÏ Ô¿
ν ÎÕ"× ÇÏ ½
ÎÀ ÇÈÏÍÇÒ ÇÏ ÄÖà ÎÕ"× ÔÆ Ü߀
ο ÓÕÏ ÓÕÏ ÔÅ
ÇÏ Ã ÇÏ À
ÎÆ ÎÕ"× ÎÕ"× ÔÄ
ÎÅ ÓÕÏ ÇÏ ÀÖ¿ ÇÈÏÍÇÒ ÔÃ
ÇÏ Â
ÎÄ ÎÕ"× ÑÓÌÈÉ ÔÂ
Îà ÇÈÏÍÇÒ ÇÏ ÂÖ¾Á ÓÕÏ Ô¾Á
ÇÏ ¿
ÎÂ ÑÓÌÈÉ ÎÕ"× Ô¾¾
ξÁ ÓÕÏ ÓÕÏ Ô¾½
ÇÏ ¾Á ÇÏ Æ
ξ¾ ÎÕ"× ÎÕ"× Ô¾À
ξ½ ÓÕÏ HIJK ? J@ A$ %&J'@ J@ %&J'HB (J)K%J*+I, ÇÏ ÆÖÅ ÇÈÏÍÇÒ Ô¾¿
ÇÏ ¾¾
ξÀ ÎÕ"× ÇÏ Å ÓÕÏ Ô¾Æ
ξ¿ ÇÈÏÍÇÒ 9:; <<=<> C DEFFGHID JK GLM NGFFOH HIP QD ROSS ÎÕ"× Ô¾Å
ˆ ‡ˆ ‰Š
¶åã´µ
³´ â·¶å
ξÆ
ξÅ
ÓÕÏ
ÎÕ"×
ÇÏ ¾½
ÑÓÌÈÉ
ÇÈÑÈÇ!È
Ô¾Ä
Ô¾Ã
Ô
¸¹º»¼½º¾¿À¿Á¿þ¿Á½ÄÃÁÃÅÆÇÄÃÈÁÉ
Ûß ÛÜÞÛß
ξÄ
ξÃ
ÑÓÌÈÉ
ÇÈÑÈÇ!È

ÕÖ×
³©ª«¬ª­®®¯
´ª«°±©­°µ¶¶«·­¶ g ÷øù úûüûý þýûüÿ ü û
 üÿ
°¬©«ª±²
¡•” ”’•–
SOOTQVSWTX YNZ
VN[[\RQVSPQNR
NOPQNR ]^X_ NRT`
›œž
MNOPQNRSTU ‹ŒŽ‹‘’Œ“
Š‹ŒŠŽŠ‹
‚ƒ„ †‡ˆ‰‰„
Š‹ŒŠŽŠ‹
‡ˆ‰‰„ š—† ¢£¤
HIJK #$ %&J'I (J)K% J*+I,
¢£¤ š—† ¢£¤

ˆ¶åã´µ‰Š
³´‡ˆâ·¶å g
›œž Ÿ
‘’“ ”’•– œžžŸ ¡œ¢£¡ ¤ |}~}|}€ yz{ 

!
™šƒ
—˜‰„ ƒ ¥—¥¦§¨ —˜™š›

 
 


 
       
cb cb " # $ % & ' (  " # $ %
   

     
a a        

ÛÛØ âß 
q q” q• q q† q– q„ qƒ qr q‚ )* )+ ), )- ). )/ )0 )1 )2 )*3 )** )*+ )*, )*- )*. )*/ )*0 )*1 )*2 )+3 )+* )++)+, )+-

wz† {x
fghijhklmnlofiiholpfi
{z„{~w}~{

defgh ijkhgl mn fh opnqrlhl

em sgdtdnusqmhp hrl nrgv

wxy z{w|}~{ €~ wxy z{w|}~{ €~

z{{~{ wxw‚€ƒ z{{~{ wxw‚€ƒ
„w~wz{{~ €}„}| „w~wz{{~ x„}| _` _ab_aa _ac_ad_ae

¥¦§¨©¦ª«¬­®¯

Figure 40: Typical Wiring (892769A4)

70 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation

Note:
The Trip output relay mode depends on the Switching Device Type selection. If the selection is Breaker the relay is in a
non-failsafe mode, if the selection is Contactor the relay is in a failsafe mode. These defaults are applied in
<PlatformSoftwareVersion> when you are creating a set point file. If settings are done using the relay’s HMI, the user must
ensure that the Operation setpoint for the breaker or contactor is as noted above.

‰Š‹
;98U<:QV ><S9 6;° ijhkfikjl
]^_`a b ‹‘kf ijhkfikjl
]^_`a c
YZ[Z\
]^_`a d

efgh
ijhkfikjl
ŒŽ 

>99 P8R7:S
<:=7; T<8<:P <:
<:>;876;<R: UQ:7QV
      
<Q : < O : < 6 : < P :

1J.KL . 1J.KL M 1J.KL 3 ,N420*

67889:; <:=7;>
mnopqmpnr qsstumqpuno
vupw vxyz {ytpq nsyo
?@AB I
prqo|upuno |pqrpyr nspuno

 ¨
?@AB C D EFAGH
;8<= 
„ 

[”•–—˜™ ˜š›–™–˜œ”
6VR>9 } Q7~ 
—žŸ˜—Ÿ —žž¡—Ÿ–ž
ˆ) „ 
¯
$ 5.+0
’ ‡%  66 ¢£¤¥
 *+,+-./ +012-  † >;Q8; <:<O<;  ¢£¦§
“  #
*+,+-./ +012-  (
K-.N- '# ‚
 *+,+-./ +012-  #) ( ª«¬
K-41  ('  ƒ ¢£¦§
*+,+-./ +012- 
 *+,+-./ +012-  !& Q7~<V<Q8€  *3
%$
 *+,+-./ +012-  !#  
 *+,+-./ +012-  !" ­¬§¥®
68<;<6QV  ¢£¦§
 345540 Q<V789  ©3
 W X 89VQ€ 

±²³



Figure 41: Typical wiring diagram (contactor application with open transition wye-delta starter) (894083A1)

1601-0450 71
Chapter 2 - Installation

12345678 95:2 ;1< efZgh_ ;1

X

X
EFGHIJGKL
MNOGIN PQRS 12345678 95:2 ;1< TUVUW
=>?@A B Y
=>?@A C Y
=>?@A D Y

6Z[\<] 9^\\_ ` a 8 b 9^\\_ c a d

    
0  .    / 

!"#$% # !"#$% & !"#$% ' ()*+,-

 





Figure 42: Speed2 Motor wiring diagram (894114A1)

72 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation

PQRST wx¶yomyxp ·¸¹ º

Pw ¢£
bc ¡
¡
Ÿ
]e œ
›
ž
•
]ghij Ž‘’Ž“ 
kQlmnopqR œ
rhsgstuv ™š›
—˜
b^ –
deef ”•
xyz{|}y~ ~€ ~‚{z €ƒ~‚ €~z ~„y}y { ‚†}}„ Pw
~„y}y { xyz{|}y~ ~€ ƒ†‡‡y‡ †z„ BCDEF

ݱ»°Þ»± ßàáâ ­»±¼½¾°¿ ¬½À» ¥­Á ˜™š›œž Ÿ ¡™ ¢›£ ñè èê òêêðîçê êè åêòéê êíð îèêèé
¯ãäÁå ° óêíèæê êíð èôêò ð ññðé ðêóèé÷
ñ óéðñ  åð ðéð ñòîò ð êè êíð
¯ãäÁå Ý éðôòõ îòõ éðåæôê ö êíð ñ  å èê
æçèçé
çéèçðéôõ ïèðïêðñ 
¯ãäÁå ¥
JKG LH 7@@ A8 B5956C 56 €
DEFFGDHIEF 56789:;85<6 =>6:>? „ ‡ ˆ
~ ‚ƒ ‚† ‚†
WxSyoqR
kQzQTRp
¬»» ì±®ê¾À {Ry|xp} njopmjq
½¾¯ê­ ë½±½¾ì ½¾ ‹ ‹
‰
‹
Š
‹ ijklm
½¾¬­±ê¥­½®¾ ‰Š ‰Œ ¤Y ¥¦§¬­®¯°±²
‰Œ ³²®­±§ ´¬¯µ¬¯
¼°¾ê°¿

õ£ õŒ¢ õŒŒ õŒ‹ õŒ¡ õŒ õŒ§ õŒ¦ õŒ õ‹ õ¡ õ õ§ õ¦ õ¥ õ¤ Œ ‹  ¡  § ¦ ¥ ¤ GH GIJ GII GIK GIL GIM GIN GIO ´· ´¶ ´¸

L0 L0 Lr Lr LD LD Lº Lº I 0 F Ir F ID F Iu F I 0 F Ir F I D F Iu F WPa b]c W`a W`_ \]^ UP_ a _ 

  

¤Y ¥¦§ 


 uvEsFw
  
 ûüýþÿ ý ûüýþÿ  ûüýþÿ  ö÷ø÷ù÷úö
¨©ª«©ª   rst
ZY Z[ XY  
µÂÃÄÅÆÇ ÆÈÉÄÇÄÆÊ LE1H0uG IF/sHt DsvvGFH IF/sHt ‡¹ ²‰†¹´„ ¹‰ƒ†‚ DrDH PQRST U V W  € ‚ƒ„
ÅËÌÍÆÅÍÎ ÅËÌÌÏÅÍÄËÌ Ô·Õ¶ÖÕ· ¶¸¸¹º²¶µº³´
ÀÁÂÃ  ÀÁÂÃ 
ˆ‰‡ Ø
‚†ƒ‡
×
¬­®¯ ÐÑÓ óùù ôõòú îïû
ÐÑÓ ©ÛªÜ
œ ‘’“’”•– ’—˜”  ŠŒ ¦§ª« öñ÷óù ö÷òñ
ÐÑÒ  ‘’“’”•– ’—˜”  HvI/ Š‹ í÷ïòô÷õòïø
› ‘’“’”•– ’—˜” œ
L Š¡ ¬­°±­ òï òïóôõðöôò÷ï
û ÐÑÒ íîïðîñ
ÿ ¦«§ÙÚ
š ‘’“’”•– ’—˜” 
ùþ
Š ¦§ª«
™ ‘’“’”•– ’—˜” › ý °„±‚²³´ƒµ ¶ Š§
üû
Ÿ ‘’“’”•– ’—˜” š ù
úù 

L Š¦
ž ‘’“’”•– ’—˜” ™ ø ýü Š¥

 ŽŽ 
   û ¨©ª«© ¬­®¬¯¬© Š¤ 4
ûÿ
Š£

 ŠŒ¢
¼gdOQ » ]¼]`[Z ]ch^` O 0sº ŠŒŒ
¼gdOP » ]¼]`[Z ]ch^` N ŠŒ‹
¼gdOW » ]¼]`[Z ]ch^` Q û

DvIHID01 Š‹‹ ²³´µ¶²µ³· ¶¸¸¹º²¶µº³´
¼gdOV » ]¼]`[Z ]ch^` P ÿ
þù Š0I1svG Š‹¡
¼gdOU » ]¼]`[Z ]ch^` W ý
ü qrst uv wxsyz vG10K
¼gdOT » ]¼]`[Z ]ch^` V ùû
Š‹
¬­°±­
¼gdOS » ]¼]`[Z ]ch^` U ùú ¬­®¯
ø ¦§¨©
¼gdNR _f¿¿fc MO ¦§ª« ¤
¼gdNO ½NP ¾ uŒ `X]h MN
0sº £ u‹ L MQ ¥¥
u¡ MP
dO » ]¼]`[Z ]ch^` O _ZfbYg[^a N MW
dN » ]¼]`[Z ]ch^` N u 
0sº Œ¢ u§  L MV
dQ » ]¼]`[Z ]ch^` Q 

dP » ]¼]`[Z ]ch^` P
u¦
MU


dW » ]¼]`[Z ]ch^` W û åðð ö ðôñ
ýü u¥ þ b`[X` ]cd]e]` MT 4
dV » ]¼]`[Z ]ch^` V ÿ
ùþ
éðò÷ðéïèêéòïêèé 

0sº ŒŒ u¤ ÿýþ MS
òççô ïòêè óé û
dU » ]¼]`[Z ]ch^` U
ý ý MOR
üû
ù   åêéæïêè îòæòô ûÿ u£ ü
dT » ]¼]`[Z ]ch^` T úù uŒ¢ [^a P MOO
dS » ]¼]`[Z ]ch^` S
ø 
0sº Œ‹ uŒŒ MON éðôòõ ïèêòïêå
dOR » ]¼]`[Z ]ch^` OR MNN
dOO _f¿¿fc uŒ‹ _X]`]_[Z åíèó ó êí
ÀÁÂÃ Ä Âá Å ÆÇÂÈÌã ÉÂÊÃÆÂËÌÁÍ u‹‹ M[]Z^XY MNQ ïèêéèô çèóðé
dON ½NP ¾
XYZ[\ éðîèðñ
0sº Œ¦ u‹¡ MNP
_dO M]eYX ]ch^` O Ô ä åôèê í èò  å òò ôò ôð óíð åôèê   å óêí èô
Ó u‹
_dN M]eYX ]ch^` N Î
Ò
Ñ
qrst Õv wxsyu Ös×twsØzrÙ
_dQ M]eYX ]ch^` Q Ð
Ï
_dP M]eYX ]ch^` P Î

X`» O df` eO
_f¿h eN mp
_O df` X`» OgN XY`^Xc eQ
X`» U df` eP
_N _f¿h X`» N
_Q XY`^Xc X`» UgT _f¿h eW mp
_P df` X`» Q df` eV
X`» T
_W _f¿h _f¿h eU
_V df` X`» QgP XY`^Xc eT
X`» S
_U _f¿h bd]YZ» eS
_T XY`^Xc X`» SgOR df` eOR
X`» P
_S bd]YZ» _f¿h eOO
_OR df` X`» W df` eON
X`» OR
_OO _f¿h _f¿h eOQ
_ON df` X`» WgV XY`^Xc eOP
X`» OO ÀÁÂà à Âá âÅ ÆÇÂÈá Âá ÆÇÂÈÀã ÉÂÊÃÆÂËÌÁÍ
_OQ _f¿h X`» V df` eOW
_OP XY`^Xc ÚÛÜ ÝÝÞÝß ä åæççèéêå ëì èíî ïèççðé éêñ òå óðôô _f¿h eOV
/GvtEF 01
_OW df` bd]YZ» eOU
X`» ON
DE./sHGv _OV _f¿h XYbYX¾Y» eOT
_OU bd]YZ»
lp{ lmolp _OT XYbYX¾Y»
_`abc daefg fhifjefh dkjh jlmn kj ohp

|}~ ˆ‰Š ‹ŒŒŽ ŽŒ‘’Œ“ ”•–—

Z[QRWX PTW\] ]R^T] >21-  1/23 89:; =
Á½½Â¿ÄÁÅÂÆ Ç¼È »¼½¾¿¼ÀÁÂà 2344567289736:
PQRSQTUUVWS PRQXY ļÉÉÊÀ¿ÄÁ¾¿¼À
¼½¾¿¼À ËÌÆÍ ¼ÀÂÎ '()'*+'(
 !"#$%&&!"
'()'*+'(
$%&&!" 74#"?@A
ÀÁÂÃ ÄÅ ÆÇÂÈÁ ÉÂÊÃÆÂËÌÁÍ
"?@A 74#"?@A

/GvtEF 01
89:; <
DE./sHGv ,-./0 1/23 CDEEFGHCIJHDGK #$%$#&$' !"


67
!


 

 
45&! L>LMNO >?@AB
 
        
ô ô " # $ % & ' ( " 
# $ %       
ó
ò
ó
ò         
( ; <  ,  - = + *   () )* )+ ), )- ). )/ )0 )1 )2 )*3 )** )*+ )*, )*- )*. )*/ )*0 )*1 )*2 )+3 )+* )++ )+, )+-
´°°²‚‚ ±¹‰†

ÏÐÑÒÓÔÕ      

ÕÓÐÖÓ×ÏÕØ×Ó

ßàáâã äåæãâç èé áã êëéìíçãç

àè îâßïßéðîìèãë ãíç éíâñ

ÏÔÙ ÐÓÏÚØ×ÓÛ Ü×
ÐÓÕÓ×ÓÛ ÏÔÏÝÜÞ ÏÔÙ ÐÓÏÚØ×ÓÛ Ü×
ÖÏ×ÏÐÓÕÓ× ÜØÕÖØÕÚ ÐÓÕÓ×ÓÛ ÏÔÏÝÜÞ
ÖÏ×ÏÐÓÕÓ× ÒÔÖØÕÚ      

-

Figure 43: Typical wiring Brush-type Motor (892792A2)

1601-0450 73
Chapter 2 - Installation

œ¥›› ˜¦ §œ›Ÿ Pž
bc

ghijkgl PQRST žmŸno nms

¨l©¨kªlg ¡¢£ ¤

b^
deef
xyz{|}y~ ~€ ~‚{z €ƒ~‚ €~z ~„y}y { ‚†}}„ Pž
~„y}y { xyz{|}y~ ~€ ƒ†‡‡y‡ †z„ BCDEF
ôõ öõ÷ ø÷÷ùúû÷ ÷õ ü÷øý÷ ÷þù úõ÷õý
ÿ ÷þõ
÷ ÷þù õ÷øù ô  ôùý öù÷ÿõý
ݱ»°Þ»± ßàáâ ­»±¼½¾°¿ ¬½À» ¥­Á ˜™š›œž Ÿ ¡™ ¢›£ ôö ÿ ýùô üùùýù ôøúø ù ÷õ ÷þù
¯ãäÁå ° ýùø úø ýùü
÷ ÷þù ôö ü öõ÷
¯ãäÁå Ý ûýõûùý  õööù ÷ùô
æçèçé
¯ãäÁå ¥
JKG LH 7@@ A8 B5956C 56 zy ~} ~ ~
DEFFGDHIEF 56789:;85<6 =>6:>? {|
€
{
wx {
WmSnopR
qQrQTRs
¬»» ì±®ê¾À tRnumsv njopmjq
„ „ „ „
½¾¯ê­ ë½±½¾ì ½¾ ijklm
‚ƒ ‚ ƒ
 ‘’“”•–—˜™š
½¾¬­±ê¥­½®¾ ‚† ‚† ›š–•™“ œ”—”—
¼°¾ê°¿

õ£ õŒ¢ õŒŒ õŒ‹ õŒ¡ õŒ õŒ§ õŒ¦ õŒ õ‹ õ¡ õ õ§ õ¦ õ¥ õ¤ Œ ‹ ¡  § ¦ ¥ ¤ GH GIJ GII GIK GIL GIM GIN GIO ´· ´¶ ´¸

L0 L0 Lr Lr LD LD Lº Lº I 0 F Ir F I D F I u F I 0 F Ir F I D F I u F WPa b]c W`a W`_ \]^ UP_ a _ î

ó ä æ
ç ë è
ò æ éê í uvEsFw
‡Y ˆ‰Š äå è ê
  
 ûüýþÿ ý ûüýþÿ  ûüýþÿ  ö÷ø÷ù÷úö ZY Z[
‹ŒŽŒ ñ ç
æ
ì rst
XY ð
µÂÃÄÅÆÇ ÆÈÉÄÇÄÆÊ LE1H0uG IF/ sHt DsvvGFH IF/sHt ‡¹ ²‰†¹´„ ¹‰ƒ†‚ DrDH PQRST U V W ï € ‚ƒ„
ÅËÌÍÆÅÍÎ ÅËÌÌÏÅÍÄËÌ Ô·Õ¶ÖÕ· ¶¸¸¹º²¶µº³´
ÀÁÂÃ  ÀÁÂÃ 
ˆ‰‡ Ø
‚†ƒ‡
×
¬­®¯ ÐÑÓ óùù ôõòú îïû
ÐÑÓ ©ÛªÜ öñ÷óù ö÷òñ
œ ‘’“’”•– ’—˜”  ŠŒ ¦§ª« í÷ïòô÷õòïø
ÐÑÒ  ‘’“’”•– ’—˜”  HvI/ Š‹
¬­°±­ òï òïóôõðöôò÷ï
› ‘’“’”•– ’—˜” œ Ýã L Š¡ íîïðîñ
â ÐÑÒ ¦«§ÙÚ
š ‘’“’”•– ’—˜”  á Š ¦§ª«
àÛ
™ ‘’“’”•– ’—˜” › ß °„±‚²³´ƒµ ¶ Š§
Þ
Ÿ ‘’“’”•– ’—˜” š ÛÝ ã L Š¦
ÛÜ 
ž ‘’“’”•– ’—˜” ™ Ú ßÞ Š¥

 ŽŽ
   Ý
â
¨©ª«© ¬­®¬¯¬© Š¤ 4
Ýá Š£
⠊Œ¢
¼gdOQ »] ¼]`[Z ]ch^` O 0sº ŠŒŒ
¼gdOP » ] ¼]`[Z ]ch^` N ŠŒ‹
¼gdOW » ] ¼]`[Z ]ch^` Q ãÝ
â DvIHID01 Š‹‹ ²³´µ¶²µ³· ¶¸¸¹º²¶µº³´
¼gdOV »] ¼]`[Z ]ch^` P á
Ûà Š0I1svG Š‹¡
¼gdOU »] ¼]`[Z ]ch^` W ß
ÞÝ qrst uv wxsyz vG10K
¼gdOT »] ¼]`[Z ]ch^` V Û Š‹
¬­°±­
¼gdOS »] ¼]`[Z ]ch^` U ÛÜ ¬­®¯
Ú ¦§¨©
¼gdNR _f¿¿fc MO ¦§ª« ¤
¼gdNO ½NP ¾ uŒ `X]h MN
0sº £ u‹ L MQ ¥¥
u¡ MP
dO »] ¼]`[Z ]ch^` O _ZfbYg[^a N MW
dN »] ¼]`[Z ]ch^` N u 
0sº Œ¢ u§  L MV
dQ »] ¼]`[Z ]ch^` Q 

dP » ]¼]`[Z ]ch^` P ã u¦
MU
dW »] ¼]`[Z ]ch^` W Ýã üùù ùô

ßÞ þ b`[X` ]cd]e]` MT 4
â
á
u¥ ý
ýùø ùý  õö÷ýø ÷õý
dV »] ¼]`[Z ]ch^` V Ûà

0sº ŒŒ u¤ þÿ MS
ß øûû ø÷ õö ÿ ý ö Ý ýü
dU »] ¼]`[Z ]ch^` U ÞÝ â
u£ MOR
dT »] ¼]`[Z ]ch^` T
Û ö öü÷ý
÷ õö úøö
ø Ýá
ÜÛ â uŒ¢ [^a P MOO
dS »] ¼]`[Z ]ch^` S
Ú
0sº Œ‹ uŒŒ MON ýùø õö÷ø ÷ü
dOR »] ¼]`[Z ]ch^` OR
MNN
dOO _f¿¿fc uŒ‹ _X]`]_[Z üþõÿö ÿ ÷þ
ÀÁÂÃ Ä Âá Å ÆÇÂÈÌã ÉÂÊÃÆÂËÌÁÍ u‹‹ M[]Z^XY MNQ õö÷ýõ ûõÿùý
dON ½NP ¾
XYZ[\
0sº Œ¦ u‹¡ MNP ýùúõùô
_dO M]eYX ]ch^` O Ô ä åôèê í èò å òòôò ôð óíð åôèê  å óêí  èô
Ó u‹
_dN M]eYX ]ch^` N Î
Ò qrst Õv wxsyu Ös×twsØzrÙ
Ñ
_dQ M]eYX ]ch^` Q Ð
Ï
_dP M]eYX ]ch^` P Î

X`» O df` eO
_f¿h eN mp
_O df` X`» OgN XY`^Xc eQ
X`» U df` eP
_N _f¿h X`» N
_Q XY`^Xc X`» UgT _f¿h eW mp
_P df` X`» Q df` eV
X`» T
_W _f¿h _f¿h eU
_V df` X`» QgP XY`^Xc eT
X`» S
_U _f¿h bd]YZ» eS
_T XY`^Xc X`» SgOR df` eOR
X`» P
_S bd]YZ» _f¿h eOO
_OR df` df` eON
X`» OR X`» W
_OO _f¿h _f¿h eOQ
_ON df` X`» WgV XY`^Xc eOP
X`» OO ÀÁÂà à Âá âÅ ÆÇÂÈá Âá ÆÇÂÈÀã ÉÂÊÃÆÂËÌÁÍ
_OQ _f¿h X`» V df` eOW
_OP XY`^Xc ÚÛÜ ÝÝÞÝß ä åæççèéêå ëì èíî ïèççðé éêñ òå óðôô _f¿h eOV
/ GvtEF01
_OW df` bd]YZ» eOU
X`» ON
DE./sHGv _OV _f¿h XYbYX¾Y» eOT
_OU bd]YZ»
lp{lmolp _OT XYbYX¾Y»
_`abc daefg fhifjefh dkjh jlmn kj ohp

|}~ ˆ‰Š ‹ŒŒŽ ŽŒ‘’Œ“ ”•–—

Z[QRWX PTW\] ]R^T] >21-  1/23 89:; =
PQRSQTUUVWS PRQXY    2344567289736:
 !
 "#$ % '()'*+'(
 !"#$%&&!"
'()'*+'(
$%&&!" 74#"?@A
ÀÁÂÃ ÄÅ ÆÇÂÈÁ ÉÂÊÃÆÂËÌÁÍ
"?@A 74#"?@A

/ GvtEF 01 89:; <

DE./sHGv ,-./0 1/23 CDEEFGHCIJHDGK #$%$#&$' !" 

67 !
45&! L>LMNO >?@AB


 

 
           
Ù Ù " # $ % & ' (  "  
# $ %       
Ø
×
Ø
×        
´°°²‚‚ ±¹‰†
( ; <  ,  - = + *   () )* )+ ), )- ). )/ )0 )1 )2 )*3 )** )*+ )*, )*- )*. )*/ )*0 )*1 )*2 )+3 )+* )++)+, )+-

     

«¬­®¯°±
±¯¬²¯³«±´³¯

ÄÅÆÇÈ ÉÊËÈÇÌ ÍÎ ÆÈ ÏÐÎÑÒÌÈÌ

ÅÍ ÓÇÄÔÄÎÕÓÑÍÈÐ ÈÒÌ ÎÒÇÖ

µ¶· ¸¹µº»¼¹½ ¾¼
¸¹¿¹¼¹½ µ¶µÀ¾Á µ¶· ¸¹µº»¼¹½ ¾¼
µ¼µ¸¹¿¹¼ ¾»¿Â»¿º ¸¹¿¹¼¹½ µ¶µÀ¾Á
µ¼µ¸¹¿¹¼ ö»¿º      

&'()'* *+,- -

Figure 44: Typical wiring Brushless-type Motor (892793A3)

74 1601-0450
 Chapter 2 - Installation

Field Contactor
Application

G1 G1 CO IL -
AUX 9*
AUX 9 G2 G2
(Field T rip)
G3 G3
G4 G4
AUX 10 G5 Field Contactor AUX 10 G5
Application (Field Close)
G6 G6
OUTPUT RELAYS

OUTPUT RELAYS
G7 CO IL - G7
AUX 11
G8 AUX 11 G8
(Field T rip)
G9 G9
G10 G10
AUX 12 G11 G11
AUX 12
(Field Close)
G12 + G12
G22 G22
AUX 16 G23 AUX 16 G23
G24 G24
* Field T rip Relay operation must
Field Breaker be programmed as Failsafe
Application

G1
TRIP
CO IL -
AUX 9
G2
(Field T rip)
G3
CL O SE
G4 CO IL
AUX 10 G5
(Field Close)
G6
+
OUTPUT RELAYS

G7
AUX 11 G8
G9
G10
AUX 12 G11
G12
G22
AUX 16 G23
G24

Figure 45: Typical wiring diagrams of synchronous motor field switching devices (contactor and breaker)
(869 switching devices)

1601-0450 75
Chapter 2 - Installation

76 1601-0450
 CHAPTER 3

INTERFACES
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

78 1601-0450
 Chapter 3 - Interfaces

3.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter contains the following sections:
Chapter Overview 79
First access 80
Front panel options 81
Software Interface 102

1601-0450 79
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

3.2 FIRST ACCESS

There are two methods of interfacing with the relay.
● Using the relay keypad and display.
● Using the EnerVista D&I Setup software software.
This section provides an overview of the interfacing methods using both of these methods.
When first accessing the relay, log in as Administrator either through the front panel or through EnerVista D&I Setup
software connected serially (so that no IP address is required). Use the default password (the default password is
0).

Basic Security
If the relay is in the commissioning phase and you want to bypass authentication, switch the SETPOINT ACCESS
setting on or assign it to a contact input. Once the setting is on, you have complete administrator access from the
front panel. If a contact input is chosen, the access is also conditional on the activation of the respective contact
input.
For more information on setpoint access and other security features available with basic security, refer to Basic
Security.

CyberSentry
If logging in through EnerVista D&I Setup software, choose Device authentication and login as Administrator.

Note:
If the relay is in the commissioning phase, to bypass authentication use the setpoint access feature to gain administrative
access to the front panel in the same way as with basic security.

80 1601-0450
 Chapter 3 - Interfaces

3.3 FRONT PANEL OPTIONS

Relays from hardware version C (firmware version 4 onwards) can be delivered with following different front panels:
● The 10-pushbutton membrane faceplate
● The 3-pushbutton membrane faceplate
The front panels provide menu navigation through a selection of navigation pushbuttons and a high quality graphical
display. The 3-button faceplate includes 3 programmable function pushbuttons and 17 programmable LEDs.
The 10-Pushbutton Membrane faceplate includes 10 programmable function pushbuttons for a total of 22
programmable LEDs.
The front panel provides menu navigation through a selection of navigation pushbuttons and a high quality graphical
display. A USB type B port allows connection to a PC with EnerVista D&I Setup software software.
The following figures show the different options.

Note:
These figures are representative only. They may not reflect the exact model that this manual describes.

Figure 46: 3-pushbutton membrane front panel

1601-0450 81
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

Figure 47: 10-pushbutton membrane front panel

3.3.1 GRAPHICAL DISPLAY PAGES

The front panel liquid crystal display (LCD) allows visibility under various lighting conditions. When the keypad and
display are not being used and there are no active Targets, the Home screen with system information is displayed
after a user-defined period of inactivity. Pressing the Escape key during the display of the default message, returns
the display to the previous display screen. Any Trip, Alarm, or Pickup operation causing a new active Target is
displayed immediately, automatically overriding the Home screen.

82 1601-0450
 Chapter 3 - Interfaces

3.3.1.1 MENU HIERARCHY

7!89

!" —0››&$4
:*,*$
#$%&'%$(

 
—¬6,-‘%(
§&(, –$6/ ˜&,&  
$- 3&(‘ 
)*+,&-, .+/0,( 
10,/0, 2%3&4(
  
56$,0&3 .+/0,(
  
56$,0&3 10,/0,(

3%¦ —,&,%(
œžžŸ ¡¢£¤¡ ¥   
.+š*$›&,6*+ ”  
˜%™6-% —,&,0(
)3*-'
•–• —,&,0(

;

89 ¨ZddGFb <
=8> ?@ABCD

ªYCYF
EFGBDHABCD
©dkA^GB]A
XZFFABCD VGCG jYWWAF
_Y[CGWAD IJKJL MKNLK OPQJLRS
`FAaZAB]b lmnmo pnqon pnqnrsnrts
­®¯° ±²³´µ¶µ´·¸´²¹º
‚ƒ„ ‚† ‡ƒˆƒ
cGFdYBH]D
eNLfJghQ iPKPQKhJg `GZ[C \AkYFCD
Y€AF TFAGUAFD
?BAFWb VHW XYZBCAFD
Y€AF `G]CYF
X[AGF \A]YF^D
uvwwxyz {x|}y~
»¼½¾¾¿ÀÁÂÃÄÅ
Y€AF VAdGB^
{‰wxŠz‰‹y}Œ ‹Žxw
’F] `[GD“
\EVD
\EV ªG«HdZdD
’BG[YW ©BkZCD
`[A«?[AdABCD

1601-0450 83
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

Figure 48: Menu hierarchy

Figure 49: Typical paging operation from the main menu

3.3.1.2 WORKING WITH GRAPHICAL DISPLAY PAGES

The display contains five main menu items labeled Targets, Status, Metering, Setpoints, and Records located at the
bottom of the screen. Choosing each main menu item displays the corresponding sub-menu.

84 1601-0450
 Chapter 3 - Interfaces

Figure 50: Typical paging

There are two ways of navigating through the menu:

● using the pushbuttons corresponding to the soft tabs from the screen
● by selecting the item from the list of items on the screen using the Up and Down pushbuttons to move the
yellow highlighted line, and pressing the Enter pushbutton.

  
         

Figure 51: Tab Pushbuttons

The tab pushbuttons are used to enter the menu corresponding to the label on the tabs. If more than 5 tabs exist,
the first and the last tab are labeled with arrows to allow you to scroll to the other tabs.

1601-0450 85
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

 
 
  

Figure 52: Keypad Pushbuttons

Each Keypad pushbutton serves the following function:

● The Home pushbutton is used to display the home screen, and all screens defined under the Front Panel/
Screens menu as default screens.
● The Help pushbutton is used to provide the Modbus address corresponding to the present location when in
the Actual Values menu.
● The Enter pushbutton has a dual function. It is used to display a sub-menu when an item is highlighted. It is
also used to save the desired value for any selected setpoint.
● The Up, and Down pushbuttons are used to select/highlight an item from a menu, as well as select a value
from the list of values for a chosen item.
● The Up, Down, Left and Right pushbuttons on the membrane faceplate are used to move the yellow
highlight. These pushbuttons are also used on special screens to navigate to multiple objects.
● The Escape pushbutton is used to display the previous menu. This pushbutton can also be used to cancel a
setpoint change.
● The Reset pushbutton clears all latched LED indications, target messages, and latched output relays,
providing the conditions causing these events are not present.

To change (or view) an item on (or from) the menus:

● Use the pushbuttons that correspond to the tabs (Targets, Status, Metering, Setpoints, Records) on the
screen to select a menu.
● Use the Up and Down pushbuttons to highlight an item.

86 1601-0450
 Chapter 3 - Interfaces

● Press Enter to view a list of values for the chosen item. (Some items are view-only.)
● Use the Up and Down pushbuttons to highlight a value.
● Press Enter to assign the highlighted value to the item.

3.3.1.3 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM

BKR1 LED setting for Breaker symbol color configuration

In all devices the Breaker symbol color can be configured as per the color scheme setting in Setpoints > Device >
Front Panel > Display Properties > Color Scheme.

Single Line Diagram for and Breaker/Contactor & Motor status color
The relay has a single line diagram (SLD) that represents the power system. The single line diagram provided is
pre-configured to show:
● Breaker status
● AC input connection
● System voltage
Accompanying the single line diagram are typical metered values associated with the power system.
The single line diagram is configured as the default menu but this can be changed under Setpoints > Device >
Front Panel > Default Screen.

Figure 53: SLD and typical metered values screen

The breaker/contactor status icon changes state according to the breaker/contactor status input and the color of the
icon changes in accordance with the color scheme setting (Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > Display
Properties > Color Scheme). Regardless of the switching device selection (System > Motor > Setup > Switching
Device), the breaker/contactor colors follows the color scheme setting By default, Green (Open) is selected.
The Breaker/Contactor and motor status color is based on the following logic.

1601-0450 87
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

Figure 54: Breaker/Contactor and Motor status color

In addition, the following motor status appears when the relay includes synchronous motor application order codes.

When switching device detection (Breaker or Contactor) Connected/Disconnected (Racked-In/Racked-Out) is

configured, the symbols change with respect to the Connected/Disconnected state of the switching device. The
following table further illustrates this with an example of the switching device Close state when the color scheme is
set to Green (Open).

*The relay considers the breaker state Connected when detection of the Connected/Disconnected state of the
breaker is not configured. Connected/Disconnected detection is not configured when setpoint Connected (under
Setpoints > System > Breaker) is set to Off.
The parameters displayed in the Front panel screen example are as follows:
Asynchronous Motor Applications* Synchronous Motor Applications**

88 1601-0450
 Chapter 3 - Interfaces

Parameter Input for the value Parameter Input for the value
Ia (3.xx) Metering\CT Bank 1 -J1\J1 Ia Motor Load Metering\Motor\Motor Load\Motor
Ia RMS (4.10) Metering\CT Bank 1 -J1\J1 Ia RMS Load
Ib (3.xx) Metering\CT Bank 1 -J1\J1 Ib TCU Status\Motor\Motor Thermal Capacity
Ib RMS (4.10) Metering\CT Bank 1 -J1\J1 Ib RMS Used
Ic (3.xx) Metering\CT Bank 1 -J1\J1 Ic Current Unbal Metering\Motor\Motor Load\Motor
Ic RMS (4.10) Metering\CT Bank 1 -J1\J1 Ic Current Unbalance
Ig Metering\CT Bank 1 -J1\J1 Ig Voltage(L-L) Metering\Ph VT Bnk1-J2\J2 V AVG L-
L
Ep Metering\Energy 1\Pwr1 Pos Field DC Amps Metering\SM Bnk1-K2\SM Field Amps
WattHours
Eq Metering\Energy 1\Pwr1 Pos Field VDC Metering\SM Bnk1-K2\SM Field VDC
VarHours
P Metering\Power 1\Pwr1 Real P Metering\Power 1\Pwr1 Real
Q Metering\Power 1\Pwr1 Reactive Q Metering\Power 1\Pwr1 Reactive
PF Metering\Power 1\Pwr1 PF PF Metering\Power 1\Pwr1 PF
* Requires Order Code selection 'NN/S1/S5' for Phase Currents - Slot K Bank 1/2
** Requires Order Code selection 'C5/D5' for Phase Currents - Slot K Bank 1/2

3.3.2 THREE-PUSHBUTTON FRONT PANEL LEDS

Note:
The rugged front panel is is not available for all models. See the order codes for details

Front panel LED details:

● Number of LEDs: 17
● Programmability: Any FlexLogic operand
● Reset mode: self-reset or latched
The front panel provides two columns of 7 LED indicators each, and 3 LED pushbutton indicators. The IN-SERVICE
(LED 1) indicator from the first LED column is a non-programmable LED. LED 3 in the first LED column is
programmable and defaulted to PICKUP. The bottom 3 LED indicators from the first column, and the 7 LED
indicators from the second LED column are fully programmable. The indicators TRIP (LED 2), and ALARM (LED 3),
are also programmable, and can be triggered by either a selection of FlexLogic operand assigned in their own
menu, or by the operation of any protection, control or monitoring element with function selected as Trip, Alarm,
or Latched Alarm.
The RESET key is used to reset any latched LED indicator or Target Message once the condition has been cleared
(latched conditions can also be reset via the RESETTING menu).

1601-0450 89
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

 


 


 
 

 
 

 
 

 
 


 

 
 
 
 
Figure 55: LED numbering

Some status indicators are common while some are feature specific which depend on the availability in the order
code. The common status indicators in the first column are described below.
Status Indicator Description
IN SERVICE Green color = Relay powered up, passed self-test has been programmed, and ready to serve.
This LED indicates that control power is applied, all monitored inputs, outputs, and internal
systems are OK, and that the device has been programmed.
Red color = Relay failed self test, has not been programmed, or out of service.
TRIP This LED indicates that the element selected to produce a trip has operated. This indicator
always latches; as such, a Reset command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.
ALARM This LED indicates that the FlexLogic™ operand serving as an Alarm switch has operated.
Latching of the indicator depends on the selected protection function. A Reset command must
be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.
PICKUP This LED indicates that at least one element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.
TEST MODE This LED indicates that the relay has been set into Test Mode.
MESSAGE This LED indicates the presence of Target Messages detected by the relay.
LOCAL MODE This LED indicates that the relay is operating in local mode.

Breaker status indication is based on the breaker’s 52a and 52b contacts. With both contacts wired to the relay and
configured, closed breaker status is determined by closed 52a contact and opened 52b contact. Vice-versa the
open breaker status is determined by opened 52a contact and closed 52b contact. If both 52a and 52b contacts are
open, due to a breaker being racked out from the switchgear, both the Breaker Open and Breaker Closed LED
Indicators will be off.
The Event Cause indicators in the first column are described as follows:

90 1601-0450
 Chapter 3 - Interfaces

Events Cause LEDs are turned On or Off by protection elements that have their respective target settings selected
as either Self-Reset or Latched. If a protection element target setting has Self-Reset selected, then the
corresponding Event Cause LEDs remain On as long as the operate operand associated with the element remains
asserted. If a protection element target setting is Latched, then the corresponding Event Cause LEDs turn On
when the operate operand associated with the element is asserted and will remain On until the RESET button on
the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset.
Default labels are shipped in the package of every product, together with custom templates. A custom LED template
is available for editing and printing. You can download the document GET-20035 from the website. The default
labels can be replaced by user-printed labels. Customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations
where languages other than English are used to communicate with operators.

3.3.3 TEN-PUSHBUTTON FRONT PANEL LEDS

Note:
The Ten-pushbutton front panel is only available for the 850. See the order codes for details.

Front panel LED details:

● Number of LEDs: 22 (LEDs 13 and 14 are not available)
● Programmability: Any FlexLogic operand
● Reset mode: self-reset or latched
The 10 Pushbutton-Membrane front panel provides one column of 12 multi-color LED indicators and 10 single-color
LED pushbutton indicators. The IN-SERVICE (LED 1) and the PICKUP (LED 4) indicators from the first LED column
are non-programmable LEDs. The indicators TRIP (LED 2), and ALARM (LED 3) are programmable, and can be
triggered by either a selection of FlexLogic operand assigned in their own menu, or by the operation of any
protection, control or monitoring element with function selected as Trip, Alarm, or Latched Alarm.
The RESET key is used to reset any latched LED indicator or Target Message once the condition has been cleared
(latched conditions can also be reset via the RESETTING menu).

1601-0450 91
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

Figure 56: LED numbering

92 1601-0450
 Chapter 3 - Interfaces

Figure 57: Typical LED Indicator Panel

Some status indicators are common while some are feature specific which is dependent upon the order code. The
common status indicators in the first column are described below.
Status Indicator Description
IN SERVICE This LED indicates that control power is present, all monitored inputs, outputs, and
internal systems are OK, and that the device is programmed.
TRIP This LED indicates that the FlexLogic operand serving as a trip switch has operated. This
indicator always latches so a reset command must be initiated to allow the latch to be
reset.
ALARM This LED indicates that the FlexLogic operand serving as an alarm switch has operated.
Latching of the indicator depends on the selected protection function. The Reset
command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.
PICKUP This LED indicates that at least one element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.

TEST MODE This LED indicates that the relay has been set into Test Mode.
MESSAGE This LED indicates the presence of Target Messages detected by the relay.
PHASE A FAULT This LED indicates that phase A of the Phase Time Overcurrent 1 function has operated.
PHASE B FAULT This LED indicates that phase B of the Phase Time Overcurrent 1 function has operated.
PHASE C FAULT This LED indicates that phase C of the Phase Time Overcurrent 1 function has operated.
GROUND FAULT This LED indicates that the Ground Time Overcurrent 1 function has operated.
50P INST OC This LED indicates that the Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 function has operated.

1601-0450 93
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

27 PHASE UV This LED indicates that the Phase Undervoltage 1 function has operated.
(Order Code without Autoreclose)

LOCKOUT This LED indicates that the Autoreclose function has reached the lockout stage.
(Order Code with Autoreclose)

3.3.4 HOME SCREEN ICONS

The next figure shows the icons available on the front screen. For descriptions of these screen icons see the
following table.

Figure 58: Home Screen Icons

Icon Type Description of Icon

Security Access User not logged in - green and locked
User logged in - Icon is red and unlocked
Setpoint Group Identifies the active setpoint group
Active Target When the target auto navigation setting is disabled, the message LED and the Active Target
icon are the only indication of active target messages.
Breaker Health The Breaker Health icon is blue when the setting for the breaker health function is not
disabled. When the setting is disabled the icon is gray.
Settings Save Indicates that a setting is being saved on the relay (i.e., when changing one of relay settings).
Icon is ON (relay is saving to flash memory) Icon is OFF (relay is not saving to flash memory)
Local Mode Indicates that Local Mode is active. During Local Mode, the control for the breakers and
disconnect switches can be performed only by the relay front panel.

Note:
The security icon only represents the security access level through the front panel.
Do not remove power from the relay whenever the Settings Save icon is ON. When power is removed the data being saved
can also be lost.

94 1601-0450
 Chapter 3 - Interfaces

3.3.5 RELAY MESSAGES

3.3.5.1 TARGET MESSAGES

Targets are messages displayed on the screen when any change of state of protection, control, monitoring, or digital
signal takes place. Depending on the model, targets for each element are enabled, or latched by default. You can
disable targets for any particular element if desired.
Target Messages are displayed in order of their activation, whereas in cases of simultaneous activation, they are
displayed in the order outlined below (from highest to lowest priority):
1. Targets generated by pressing programmable pushbutton
2. Targets generated by Contact inputs
3. Targets generated by Protection, Control and Monitoring elements
4. Targets generated by communications.
In cases where the Pickup and Operate flags from an element are detected at the same time, the Pickup flag is not
displayed. The Operate flag is displayed instead.
LED #6, from the first column of LEDs, is factory configured to be triggered by the FlexLogic operand ANY
TARGET, to indicate the presence of at least one target message. This LED is labeled as MESSAGE. The LED can
be programmed to any other FlexLogic operand by choice.

MESSAGE TIMEOUT
The timeout applies to every screen apart from the default screen. Examples include viewing, metering, or
navigating to a screen with setting, etc. If no further navigation is performed, no pushbutton is touched, and/or no
target is initiated for the time specified in the message timeout setpoint, the display goes back to the default screen
(the metering summary screen).
The target message overrides the message timeout. The message timeout starts timing after each target message,
and if no more activity is recorded for the specified time, the display goes back to the default screen.
Pressing a programmable pushbutton activates a new screen with a Target Message corresponding to the
programmed pushbutton action. The pushbutton Target Message is displayed for 10 seconds then defaults to the
screen that was displayed before pressing the pushbutton. The pushbutton Target Message is recorded in the list
with other generated Target Messages.
Target Messages can be cleared either by pressing the pushbutton corresponding to the CLEAR tab, or by initiating
a RESET command. The CLEAR command clears only the Target Messages, while initiating a RESET clears not
only the Target Messages, but also any latched LEDs and output relays.

3.3.5.2 SELF-TEST ERRORS

The relay performs self-diagnostics at initialization (after power up), and continuously as a background task to
ensure that the hardware and software are functioning correctly. There are two types of self-test warnings indicating
either a minor or major problem. Minor errors indicate a problem with the relay that does not compromise protection
and control functionality of the relay. Major errors indicate a problem with the relay which takes it out of service.

Caution:
Self-Test Warnings may indicate a serious problem with the relay hardware!

1601-0450 95
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

Upon detection of a minor problem, the relay does the following:

● Displays a detailed description of the error on the relay display as a target message
● Records the minor self-test error in the Event Recorder
● Flashes the ALARM LED
Upon detection of a major problem, the relay will:
● De-energize the relay assigned under setting Major Self-Test Relay if the relay is programmed for failsafe
operation or energized if programed for non-failsafe operation.
● De-energize all output relays
● Turn off the IN SERVICE LED
● Flash the TRIP LED
● Assert the Self-Test Trip OP FlexLogic operand
● Display Major Self-test error with the error code as a target message
● Record the major self-test failure in the Event Recorder
When Alarm is selected as a function, upon detection of a major problem, the relay will:
● Flash the ALARM LED.
● Assert Self-Test Alarm OP FlexLogic operand.
● Display Major Self-test error with the error code as a target message
● Display Major Self-test error as a target message
● Record the major self-test failure in the Event Recorder.
Under both conditions, the targets cannot be cleared if the error is still active.

Figure 59: Minor Errors

96 1601-0450
 Chapter 3 - Interfaces

Figure 60: Major Errors

1601-0450 97
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

Minor self-test errors

Minor Self-test Error Description of Problem Frequency of Test What to Do
Message1
Order Code Error Hardware doesn't match order Every 1 second
code
CPU S/N Invalid CPU card doesn’t have valid Every 1 second
data to match the order code.
Slot “$” IO S/N Invalid2 IO card located in slot $ Every 1 second
doesn’t have valid data to
match the order code.
Comms S/N Invalid Comms card doesn’t have Every 1 second
valid data to match the order
code.
CPanel S/N Invalid Control Panel doesn’t have Every 1 second
valid data to match the order
code.
PSU S/N Invalid Power Supply Unit doesn’t Every 1 second
have valid data to match the
order code. If alert doesn’t self-reset then
contact factory. Otherwise
RTC Error The CPU cannot read the time Every 1 second
monitor re-occurrences as
from the real time clock
errors are detected and self-
Product Serial Invalid The product serial number Every 1 second reset
doesn’t match the product
type
Comm Alert #1 Every 1 second
Communication error between
Comm Alert #2 Every 1 second
CPU and Comms board
Comm Alert #3 Every 1 second
FLASH Error The permanent storage Every 1 second
memory has been corrupted
SPI Error Communication error between Every 1 second
CPU and LEDs, Keypad or
peripheral memory devices
Invalid MAC Address MAC address is not in the Every 1 second
product range
Calibration Error Unit has default calibration Boot-up and every 1 second
values
Clock Not Set Clock has the default time Every 1 second Set clock to current time
WiFi Default Settings SSID and Passphrase is the Every 1 second Set SSID and Passphrase
factory default
Link Error Primary3 Port 1 or Port 4 (depending on Every 1 second Ensure Ethernet cable is
order code) is not connected connected, check cable
functionality (i.e. physical
damage or perform continuity
test), and ensure master or
peer device is functioning. If
none of these apply, contact
the factory.

98 1601-0450
 Chapter 3 - Interfaces

Minor Self-test Error Description of Problem Frequency of Test What to Do

Message1
Link Error Secondary Port 5 is not connected Every 1 second Ensure Ethernet cable is
connected, check cable
functionality (i.e. physical
damage or perform continuity
test), and ensure master or
peer device is functioning. If
none of these apply, contact
the factory.
Traffic Error Primary Abnormally high amount of Every 1 second Contact site IT department to
Broadcast and Uni-cast traffic check network for
on port 1 or port 4 malfunctioning devices
Traffic Error Secondary Abnormally high amount of Every 1 second Contact site IT department to
Broadcast and Uni-cast traffic check network for
on port 5 malfunctioning devices
Ambient Temperature >80C The ambient temperature Every 1 second Inspect mounting enclosure
surrounding the product has for unexpected heat sources
exceeded 80C (i.e loose primary cables) and
remove accordingly
Event Rate High Abnormally high amounts of Every 1 second Ensure settings are not set
events have been generated close to nominal ratings.
so the relay has stopped Ensure FlexLogic equations
logging to prevent further do not have impractical timing
issues for status events
IRIG-B Failure A bad IRIG-B input signal has Every 1 second Ensure IRIG-B cable is
been detected connected, check cable
functionality (i.e. physical
damage or perform continuity
test), ensure IRIG-B receiver
is functioning, and check input
signal level (it may be less
than specification). If none of
these apply, contact the
factory.
CAN_1 Error Every 1 second
CAN_2 Error Every 1 second
Version Mismatch CPU and Comms do not have Boot-up and Every 1 second Ensure that both the CPU and
the same revision on firmware Comms FW was uploaded
during the upgrade process
SelfTestFWUpdate The updating of the firmware Every 1 second Re-try uploading firmware. If
failed the upload doesn’t work a
second time contact factory
Remote CAN IO Mismatch RMIO card detection Every 1 second Check RRTD connections,
mismatch check if the RRTD
configuration is still valid,
Validate CANBUS IO.
1 Failure is logged after the detection of 5 consecutive failures
2$ is the slot ID (i.e. F, G, H etc.)
3 To disable Link Error Primary target when not in use with SE order code, change IP address to 127.0.0.1

1601-0450 99
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

Major Self-test Error Latched Target Description of Frequency of Test What to do

Message Message Problem
Relay Not Ready No PRODUCT SETUP On power up and Program all required
INSTALLATION setting whenever the settings and then set
indicates relay is not in PRODUCT SETUP the PRODUCT SETUP
a programmed state. INSTALLATION setting INSTALLATION setting
is altered. to Ready.
Major Self-Test (error Yes Unit hardware failure Every 1 second Contact the factory and
code) detected supply the failure code
as noted on the display.

Note:
When a total loss of power is present, the Critical Failure Relay (Output Relay 8) is de-energized.

3.3.5.3 OUT OF SERVICE

When the relay is shipped from the factory, DEVICE IN SERVICE is set to Not Ready. The IN SERVICE LED will
be orange and the critical fail relay will be de-energized but this will not be classified as a major self-test. An out of
service event will be generated in the event recorder.

3.3.5.4 FLASH MESSAGES

Flash messages are warning, error, or general information messages displayed in response to pressing certain
keys. The factory default flash message time is 2 seconds.

3.3.6 LABEL REMOVAL

For versions up to 3.xx, the front panels are supplied with a label removal tool for removing the LED label and user-
programmable pushbutton label.

100 1601-0450
 Chapter 3 - Interfaces

The following procedures describes how to use the label removal tool.
1. Bend the tabs of the tool upwards as shown in the image.

2. Slide the label removal tool under the LED label as shown in the next image. Make sure the bent tabs are
pointing away from the relay. Move the tool inside until the tabs enter the pocket.

3. Remove the tool with the LED label.

The following describes how to remove the user-programmable pushbutton label from the front panel.
1. Slide the label tool under the user-programmable pushbutton label as shown in the next image. Make sure
the bent tab is pointing away from the relay.
Remove the tool and user-programmable pushbutton label as shown in image.

1601-0450 101
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

3.4 SOFTWARE INTERFACE

3.4.1 ENERVISTA D&I SETUP SOFTWARE

Although you can enter settings manually using the control panel keys, you can also use a PC to download
setpoints through the communications port. EnerVista D&I Setup software is used to make this as convenient as
possible. With EnerVista D&I Setup software, it is possible to:
● Program and modify settings
● Load setting files from a computer
● Save setting files to a computer
● Read actual values
● Monitor status
● Read pre-trip data and event records
● Get help on any topic
● Upgrade the firmware
The software allows immediate access to all features with easy to use pull down menus in the familiar Windows
environment. This section provides the necessary information to install the software, upgrade the relay firmware,
and write and edit setting files.
The software can run without a relay connected to the computer. In this case, settings may be saved to a file for
future use. If a relay is connected to a PC and communications are enabled, you can configure the relay from the
setting screens. In addition, measured values, status and trip messages can be displayed with the actual value
screens.

3.4.1.1 HARDWARE & SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

EnerVista D&I Setup software has the following system requirements:
● Dual-core processor
● Microsoft Windows 10 or higher; 32-bit or 64-bit.
● At least 1 GB of free hard disk space is available.
● At least 2 GB of RAM is installed.
● 1280 x 800 display screen
The EnerVista D&I Setup software can be installed from the GE Multilin website.

3.4.1.2 INSTALLING ENERVISTA D&I SETUP SOFTWARE

Use the following procedure to install EnerVista D&I Setup software using the EnerVista D&I Setup software
Launchpad application (found on the GE Multilin website).
1. Double-click the installation package and follow the instructions to install the software on the local PC.
2. When the installation is complete, start the EnerVista D&I Setup software Launchpad application.
3. Click the IED Setup section of the LaunchPad toolbar.
4. In the EnerVista D&I Setup software Launchpad window, click the Add Product button and select the
required Protection System. Select the Web option to ensure the most recent software release.
5. Click the Add Now button to list software items. EnerVista D&I Setup software Launchpad obtains the latest
installation software from the Web and automatically starts the installation process. A status window with a
progress bar is shown during the downloading process.

102 1601-0450
 Chapter 3 - Interfaces

6. Select the complete path, including the new directory name, where the software is to be installed.
7. Click on Next to begin the installation. The files are installed in the directory indicated, the USB driver is
loaded into the computer, and the installation program automatically creates icons and adds the EnerVista
D&I Setup software to the Windows start menu.
8. The required device is added to the list of installed IEDs in the EnerVista D&I Setup software Launchpad IED
Setup window.

If you are going to communicate from your computer to the relay using the USB port:
1. Connect the USB cable from your computer to the relay's USB port.
2. Launch EnerVista D&I Setup software from the LaunchPad. Then in EnerVista D&I Setup software 8 Series
setup software > Device Setup, select USB as the Interface type.
3. Select the Read Order Code button.

3.4.1.3 UPGRADING ENERVISTA D&I SETUP SOFTWARE

The latest software can be downloaded from the GE website.
After upgrading, check the version number under Help > About. If the new version does not display, try uninstalling
the software and reinstalling the new version.

3.4.2 CONNECTING ENERVISTA D&I SETUP SOFTWARE TO THE RELAY

3.4.2.1 USING THE QUICK CONNECT FEATURE

The Quick Connect button can be used to establish a fast connection through the front panel USB port of a relay.
Select USB and press the Connect button. Alternatively, Ethernet or WiFi (not all models) can be used as the
interface.
When connected, a new site called Quick Connect appears in the Site List window.
The Site Device has now been configured via the Quick Connect feature for communications through whichever
interface has been chosen.

3.4.2.2 CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS

Before starting, verify that the Ethernet cable is properly connected to the relevant Ethernet port.

Note:
The relay supports a maximum of 3 TCP/IP sessions.

1. Install and start the latest version of the software (available from the GE Multilin Website). See the previous
section for the installation procedure.
2. Click on the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add Site button to define a
new site.
3. Enter the desired site name in the Site Name field. If desired, a short description of the site can also be
entered. In this example, we will use Substation 1 as the site name.
4. The new site appears in the upper-left list.
5. Click the Add Device button to define the new device.

1601-0450 103
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

6. Enter the desired name in the Device Name field, and a description (optional).
7. Select Ethernet from the Interface drop-down list. This displays a number of interface parameters that must
be entered for proper Ethernet functionality.
8. Enter the IP address, slave address, and Modbus port values assigned to the relay (from the Setpoints >
Device > Communications menu).
9. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the relay and upload the order code. If a communications
error occurs, ensure that the Ethernet communication values correspond to the relay setting values.
10. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window
(or Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista D&I Setup software window.
The Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications.

3.4.2.3 CONNECTING TO THE RELAY

Now that the communications parameters have been properly configured, communications with the relay can be
initiated.
1. Expand the Site list by double clicking on the site name or clicking on the + box to list the available devices
for the given site.
2. The required device trees can be expanded by clicking the + box. The following list of headers is shown for
each device:
○ Device Definition
○ Status
○ Metering
○ Quick Setup
○ Setpoints
○ Records
○ Maintenance
3. Expand the Setpoints > Device > Front Panel list item and double click on Display Properties or Default
Screens to open the settings window.
4. The settings window opens with a corresponding status indicator on the lower left of the EnerVista D&I Setup
software window.
5. If the status indicator is red, verify that the serial, USB, or Ethernet cable is properly connected to the relay,
and that the relay has been properly configured for communications (steps described earlier).
The settings can now be edited, printed, or changed. Other setpoint and command windows can be displayed and
edited in a similar manner. Actual Values windows are also available for display. These windows can be arranged
and resized, if necessary.

3.4.2.4 CONFIGURING USB ADDRESS

By default, the relay USB port uses the network address 172.16.0.2. In some cases this IP is part of the corporate
network for the computer and conflicts with existing computers or other devices on that network. To resolve this
conflict, change the USB address to be in a different network. This change must be made to the computer settings,

104 1601-0450
 Chapter 3 - Interfaces

the relay settings, and the EnerVista D&I Setup software settings in order to connect to the relay through the USB
port.
1. Open the Windows Control Panel and select Network and Internet > Network Sharing. The exact path may
vary depending on the version of Windows.

2. Click Change adapter settings.

3. Find the GE RNDIS Device (or GE RNDIS Device #2) and right-click the network it is on to open the
Properties window.
4. Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and click Properties.

5. In the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window, ensure that Use the following IP Address
is selected, and enter an appropriate IP address.

1601-0450 105
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

6. Click OK to save the new settings.

7. In the EnerVista D&I Setup software, navigate to File > Preferences > USB and change the IP address to
match. This address will now be used by EnerVista D&I Setup software when the interface selected is USB.

8. Click OK to save the new settings.

9. On the front panel of the relay, navigate to Setpoint > Device > Communications > USB.
10. Change both the USB IP Address and USB GWY IP Address setpoints to match the IP address the
computer is now using.
The relay should now communicate with the computer through the USB port.

3.4.3 WORKING WITH SETPOINTS

When a settings file is being uploaded to a device, the DEVICE IN SERVICE setting switches to Not Ready for the
duration of the upload. This ensures that all new settings are applied before the device is operational. A settings file
uploads operations including the following:
● EnerVista D&I Setup software menu option Write Settings File to Device
● Logic Designer changes saved online
● SLD configuration saved online
● IEC 61850 configuration saved online
● FlexLogic configuration saved online
● CID file uploaded to device
Individual setting changes from the device front panel or the EnerVista D&I Setup software Online Window do not
change the state of the DEVICE IN SERVICE setting.

3.4.3.1 ENTERING SETPOINTS

The following System Setup page is used as an example to illustrate entering setpoints. In this example, we will
changing the voltage sensing setpoints.
1. Establish communications with the relay.
2. Select the Setpoint > System > Voltage Sensing menu item.

106 1601-0450
 Chapter 3 - Interfaces

3. Select the Aux. VT Secondary setpoint by clicking anywhere in the parameter box. This displays three
arrows: two to increment/decrement the value and another to launch the numerical keypad.

4. Clicking the arrow at the end of the box displays a numerical keypad interface used to enter values within the
setpoint range displayed near the top of the keypad: Click = to exit from the keypad and keep the new value.
Click on X to exit from the keypad and retain the old value.

1601-0450 107
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

5. For setpoints requiring non-numerical pre-set values (e.g. Phase VT Connection below), clicking anywhere
within the setpoint value box displays a drop-down selection menu arrow. Select the desired value from this
list.

6. In the Setpoints > System Setup > Voltage Sensing dialog box, click on Save to save the values into the
relay. Click YES to accept any changes and exit the window. Click Restore to retain previous values. Click
Default to restore Default values.
7. For setpoints requiring an alphanumeric text string (e.g. relay name), the value may be entered directly within
the setpoint value box.

Note:
When using Setpoint Groups, an element from one group can be dragged and dropped on the same element in another
group, copying all settings.

3.4.3.2 USING SETPOINT FILES

The EnerVista D&I Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings:
1. In off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later download to communicating
relays.
2. Directly modifying relay settings while connected to a communicating relay, then saving the settings when
complete.
3. Creating/editing settings files while connected to a communicating relay, then saving them to the relay when
complete.
Setting files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A setting file contains data pertaining to
the following types of relay settings:
● Device Definition
● Relay Setup
● System Setup
● Protection
● Control
● Inputs/Outputs

108 1601-0450
 Chapter 3 - Interfaces

● Monitoring
● FlexLogic
● Quick setup
● Protection summary
● IEC 61850 configurator
● Modbus user map
Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.
The relay displays relay setpoints with the same hierarchy as the front panel display.

3.4.3.3 DOWNLOADING AND SAVING SETPOINT FILES

You should make a backup of the in-service settings before any changes are made or any work undertaken on
commissioned devices. This section describes how to backup settings to a file and how to use that file to restore
settings to the original relay or to a replacement relay.
Setpoints must be saved to a file on the local PC before performing any firmware upgrades. Saving setpoints is also
highly recommended before making any setpoint changes or creating new setpoint files.
The setpoint files in the EnerVista D&I Setup software window are accessed in the Files Window. Use the following
procedure to download and save setpoint files to a local PC.
1. Ensure that the site and corresponding device(s) have been properly defined and configured.
2. Select the desired device from the site list.
3. Select Read Device Settings from the online menu item, or right-click on the device and select Read Device
Settings to obtain settings information from the device.
4. After a few seconds, the software requests the name and destination path of the setpoint file. The
corresponding file extension is automatically assigned. Press Receive to complete the process. A new entry
is added to the tree, in the File pane, showing path and file name for the setpoint file.

3.4.3.4 ADDING SETPOINT FILES TO THE ENVIRONMENT

EnerVista D&I Setup software allows you to review and manage a large group of setpoint files. Use the following
procedure to add an existing file to the list.
1. In the offline pane, right-click on Files and select the Add Existing Settings File item.
2. The Open dialog box is displayed, prompting to select a previously saved setpoint file.
3. Browse for the file to be added then click Open. The new file and complete path will be added to the file list.

3.4.3.5 CREATING A NEW SETPOINTS FILE

Eenrvista allows you to create a new setpoint files independent of a connected device. These can be uploaded to a
relay at a later date. The following procedure illustrates how to create new setpoint files.
1. In the Offline pane, right click and select the New Settings File item. The Create New Settings File box
appears, allowing for the configuration of the setpoint file for the correct firmware version. It is important to
define the correct firmware version to ensure that setpoints not available in a particular version are not
downloaded into the relay.
2. Select the Firmware Version, and Order Code options for the new setpoint file.
3. For future reference, enter some useful information in the Description box to facilitate the identification of the
device and the purpose of the file.

1601-0450 109
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

4. To select a file name and path for the new file, click the button beside the File Name box.
5. Select the file name and path to store the file, or select any displayed file name to replace an existing file. All
setpoint files should have the extension .CID.
6. Click OK to complete the process. Once this step is completed, the new file, with a complete path, is added
to the software environment.

Note:
Offline settings files can be created for invalid order codes in order to support file conversion from different products,
upgrades, and special orders. To validate an order code, visit the GE Multilin online store.
Filenames for setting files cannot have a period character (.) other than the one that is added in front of CID.

3.4.3.6 UPGRADING SETPOINT FILES TO A NEW REVISION

It is often necessary to upgrade the revision for a previously saved setpoint file after the firmware has been
upgraded. This is illustrated in the following procedure:
1. Establish communications with the relay.
2. Select the Status > Information > Main CPU menu item and record the Firmware Version.
3. Load the setpoint file to be upgraded into the EnerVista D&I Setup software 8 Series setup software
environment.
4. In the File pane, select the saved setpoint file.
5. From the main window menu bar, select the Offline > Edit Settings File Properties menu item and note the
File Version of the setpoint file. If this version is different from the Firmware Revision noted in step 2, select a
New File Version that matches the Firmware Revision from the pull-down menu. For example, if the firmware
revision is J0J08AA150.SFD (Firmware Revision 1.50) and the current setpoint file revision is 1.10, change
the New File Version to 1.5x.
6. Enter any special comments about the setpoint file in the Description field.
7. Select the desired firmware version from the New File Version field.
8. When complete, click OK to convert the setpoint file to the desired revision.

3.4.3.7 PRINTING SETPOINTS

EnerVista D&I Setup software allows you to print partial or complete lists of setpoints. Use the following procedure
to print a list of setpoints:
1. Select a previously saved setpoints file in the File pane or establish communications with a relay.
2. If printing from an online device, select the Online > Print Device Information menu item. If printing from a
previously saved setpoints file, select the Offline > Print Settings File menu item.
3. The Print/Export Options dialog box appears. Select Setpoints in the upper section and select either Include
All Features (for a complete list) or Include Only Enabled Features (for a list of only those features which
are currently used) in the filtering section and click OK.
4. Setpoint lists can be printed in the same manner by right clicking on the desired file (in the file list) or device
(in the device list) and selecting the Print Device Information or Print Settings File options.

110 1601-0450
 Chapter 3 - Interfaces

3.4.3.8 PRINTING VALUES FROM A CONNECTED DEVICE

A complete list of actual values can also be printed from a connected device with the following procedure:
1. Establish communications with the desired relay.
2. From the main window, select the Online > Print Device Information menu item
3. The Print/Export Options dialog box will appear. Select Actual Values in the upper section and select either
Include All Features (for a complete list) or Include Only Enabled Features (for a list of only those features
which are currently used) in the filtering section and click OK.
Actual values lists can be printed in the same manner by right clicking on the desired device (in the device list) and
selecting the Print Device Information option.

3.4.3.9 LOADING SETPOINTS FROM A FILE

Note:
An error message occurs when attempting to upload a setpoint file with a revision number that does not match the relay
firmware.

The following procedure illustrates how to load setpoints from a file. Before loading a setpoints file, it must first be
added to the software environment.
1. Select the previously saved setpoints file from the File pane of the main window.
2. Select the Offline > Edit Settings File Properties menu item and verify that the corresponding file is fully
compatible with the hardware and firmware version of the target relay.
3. Right-click on the selected file and select the Write Settings File to Device item.
4. Select the target relay from the list of devices shown and click Send. If there is an incompatibility, an
Incompatible device order codes, versions or Serial Locks error will occur.
If there are no incompatibilities between the target device and the settings file, the data is transferred to the relay.
An indication of the percentage completed is shown in the bottom of the main window.

3.4.3.10 UNINSTALLING FILES AND CLEARING DATA

The relay can be decommissioned by turning off the power to the unit and disconnecting the wires to it. Files can be
cleared after uninstalling Emervista or the relay, for example to comply with data security regulations. On the
computer, settings files can be identified by the .CID extension.
To clear the current settings file do the following:
1. Create a default settings file.
2. Write the default settings file to the relay.
3. Delete all other files with the .CID extension.
4. Delete any other data files, which can be in standard formats, such as COMTRADE or .csv.
You cannot directly erase the flash memory, but all records and settings in that memory can be deleted. Do this from
the front panel or EnerVista D&I Setup software using: Records > Clear Records

3.4.4 QUICK SETUP

The Quick Setup item can be accessed online or offline in EnerVista D&I Setup software. Settings changes can be
made from both of these screens.

1601-0450 111
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

Quick Setup is designed for quick and easy user programming. Power system parameters, and settings for some
simple overcurrent elements are easily set. The Quick Setup screen works as follows:
● Settings names and units can be viewed at this screen. To view the range of the settings, hover the cursor
over the setpoint value field.
● Configure and save the settings as required.
● The Save, Restore and Default buttons function the same as in the individual setting setup screens.
● Attempting to enter and save a setting value which exceeds the range gives a warning dialog box. Correct the
setting value and save to proceed.

Note:
In Quick Setup, the value is not replaced with the maximum value of the setting.

For example, the Phase CT Primary setting has a range of 1 to 12000, but the user enters 12001 and tries to
save it. Quick Setup displays a warning dialog. Pressing OK leaves the setting value at 12001, but not 12000
(max. value) as is the case with other views.

3.4.5 UPGRADING RELAY FIRMWARE

To upgrade the firmware, follow the procedures listed in this section. Upon successful completion of this procedure,
the relay will have new firmware installed with the factory default setpoints.The latest firmware files are available
from the GE website.

Note:
EnerVista D&I Setup software prevents incompatible firmware from being loaded into a relay.
Uploading firmware on a WiFi interface is not allowed.
Before upgrading firmware, it is very important to save the current settings to a file on your PC. After the firmware has been
upgraded, it will be necessary to load this file back into the relay.

3.4.5.1 LOADING NEW RELAY FIRMWARE

Do the following to load new firmware into the relay's flash memory.
1. Connect the relay to the local PC and save the setpoints to a file.
2. Select the Maintenance > Update Firmware menu item. A screen appears with information on how long the
upload will take. Select OK to proceed.
3. EnerVista D&I Setup software requests the new firmware file. Locate the folder that contains the firmware file
to load into the relay.The firmware filename has the following format.

     
 
/  
    
  ! " #
$  %&
$&# ' #  ()*+, - .
A screen appears advising that a backup of the settings file should be made before proceeding with the
firmware upgrade. Select YES to proceed.
4. EnerVista D&I Setup software now prepares the relay to receive the new firmware file. The front panel
momentarily displays Upload Mode.

112 1601-0450
 Chapter 3 - Interfaces

5. A screen appears confirming the firmware versions of the target device and the selected .SFD. Click YES to
proceed with the firmware loading process.
6. EnerVista D&I Setup software will prompt the user to reboot the relay after both the Boot 1 and Boot 2
uploads.

Note:
The relay should be rebooted BEFORE pressing OK.

7. Wait for the Comms upload process to complete.

8. Wait for the Mains upload process to complete.
9. EnerVista D&I Setup software notifies you when the relay is successfully updated.

Note:
Wait for the relay to boot up, then cycle power to the relay to complete the firmware update process.

After successfully updating the firmware, the relay is not in service and requires setpoint programming. To
communicate with the relay, the communication settings may have to be manually reprogrammed.
When communication is established, you must reload the saved setpoints back into the relay.
Modbus addresses assigned to features, settings, and corresponding data items (i.e. default values, min/max
values, data type, and item size) may change slightly from version to version of firmware. The addresses are
rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified.

3.4.6 SLD CONFIGURATOR

The SLD Configurator allows users to create customized single line diagrams (SLD) for the front panel display. The
SLDs must be configured from the SLD Configurator in the EnerVista D&I Setup software, located under Setpoints
> SLD Configurator. The SLD Configurator allows breakers, switches, metering, and status items on the SLD.
SLDs are viewed from the relay front panel and individual SLD pages can be selected for the default home screen
pages. The relay provides several SLD pages. Each page can have a combination of active and passive objects.
Status, metering, and control objects are active while the static images for bus, generator, motor, transformer,
ground, etc. are passive objects.

1601-0450 113
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

Figure 61: SLD Page

For optimum use, the first SLD page can be used for the overall SLD and the subsequent pages can be used for
breaker/switch specific CT/VT placement, metering and status. Once the configurable SLDs are programmed, they
are saved within the relay settings file. The SLD pages can also be saved individually as local XML files. The locally
stored XML files can then be reloaded to generate another diagram. SLDs represent objects using GE symbols
(similar to ANSI).

Figure 62: Template SLD

The following figure shows the objects that are available for design in the SLD Configurator and their maximum
usage limits [X]. The maximum limit reflects the maximum possible order code.

114 1601-0450
 Chapter 3 - Interfaces

Figure 63: SLD Configurator Component Library

3.4.6.1 CONTROL OBJECTS

The control objects consist of selectable breakers and disconnect switches. The following figure shows the different
symbols in the GE Standard style and IEC style. If the switching element is tagged, blocked, or bypassed, indicators
with the letters T, B, and By appear on the lower right corner of the element. The breaker/switch name is displayed
at the top of the object.

Note:
The displayed breaker name is configured in the setpoint Setpoints > System > Breakers > Breaker[X] > Name. This
setpoint has a 13-character limit. The name should be kept to a minimum so that it appears properly on the SLD.

1601-0450 115
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

Figure 64: Control Object Symbols

Note:
GE symbols are color-coded ANSI symbols.

The control objects status follows the color scheme from the Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > Display
Properties > Color Scheme setting. By default, this setting is set to Green (open). If set to Red (open), the
status colors are reversed.
If the setting is used, the breaker symbols automatically change to the Truck CB symbols. The SLD assumes that if
the Breaker Racked-In/Racked-Out input is used (anything other than Off), the appropriate Truck CB symbol will
be used.
The following figure shows the orientation available for the control objects. The default position for the control
objects is 0 degrees. Orientation in multiple directions allows for configuration of the single line diagram according
to the existing drawings and ensure the correct side for the fixed/moving contacts.

116 1601-0450
 Chapter 3 - Interfaces

Figure 65: Orientation for Breakers and Switches

3.4.6.2 STATUS OBJECTS

The status objects consist of digital operands. Up to 15 digital status elements can be configured per SLD page.
The status object acts as an LED on the screen. If the diagram shows a gray circle, it means the assigned input is
low. If it shows a red circle, the assigned input is high. The following figure shows an example of the Reclose
Blocked signal in both On and Off state.

Figure 66: Reclose Blocked signal

In addition, Remote Breaker status objects are added for GE and IEC style. Remote breaker status allows
monitoring of three distant breakers. These objects are not controllable and hence cannot be used for selection and
operation.

1601-0450 117
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

3.4.6.3 METERING OBJECTS

The metering objects consist of metering elements. Up to 15 metering elements can be configured per SLD page.
The metering object has an input for all the available FlexAnalog values. The units for these values are dynamically
scaled as per the defaults. The following figure shows the metering element on a configured SLD.

Figure 67: Metering Element on configured SLD

3.4.6.4 DEVICE STATUS OBJECT

The configurable SLD feature in the relay allows only one device status object per SLD page. The device status
does not have any properties. It is simply shown as Status: [device status].

3.4.6.5 STATIC OBJECTS

Static objects are used as simple bitmap images or text/drawing blocks to complete the single line diagram. There is
no control associated with these static objects. The static objects consist of drawing tools, text object, and power
system components.

3.4.6.6 FRONT PANEL INTERACTION

8 Series relays use the Select-Before-Operate (SBO) mechanism for local control of breakers and switches [IEC
61850-7-2]. Initially, the diagram can be browsed through all available breakers and switches by using the
navigation keys. After navigation, selection must be made for the breaker or switch object by pressing the Enter
key. After selecting the desired switch or breaker, control operations can then be carried out on the selected switch
or breaker. The relay allows local opening, closing, tagging, blocking, and bypassing. Front panel control is only
allowed when the relay is in Local Mode.

3.4.6.6.1 NAVIGATION
The SLD can be accessed in two ways from the front panel of the relay. The original location for the SLD pages is
under Status > Summary > Single Line Diagram > SLD [X]. However, a more convenient way to access an SLD

118 1601-0450
 Chapter 3 - Interfaces

page is by setting it as a default home screen at Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > Home Screens > Home
Screen1. Pressing the home button more than once rotates through the configured home screens. If the desired
SLD is set to Home Screen 2 through Home Screen 10, it can be activated by pressing home button until it
appears on the screen. If no home screen is configured, the default screens become active. If the default screens
are disabled, Status > Summary > Values screen is shown.

3.4.6.6.2 BREAKER/SWITCH BROWSING AND SELECTION

While in the SLD screen, only one page is active at any point of time. If SLD1 is active, only breakers and switches
on SLD1 can be operated and controlled. By default, when entering the SLD menu, the screen displays SLD1.
SLD2 through SLD6 can be accessed through the navigation pushbuttons as shown in the Active element
selection with flash message figure, found later in this section.
To browse through the control elements on the SLD page, the navigation keys can be used. On the rugged front
panel, the up and down keys can be pressed for navigation and on the membrane front panel, up, down, left, and
right keys can be pressed. With the rugged front panel navigation, pressing down sequentially rotates through all
the available breakers and switches on the screen. Pressing the up key rotates through in a reverse order. With the
membrane front panel, the up, down, left, and right keys can navigate to the closest breaker/switch depending on
the key press direction.

While browsing through switches/breakers the active element is shown with a blue colored border around it. To
select a breaker/switch, the browsing indicator border must be around the desired breaker or switch. The breaker or
switch can then be selected by pressing the Enter key. As the breaker or switch is being selected, a flash message
appears indicating that the breaker or switch has been selected as shown in the following figure. Once the element
is selected for operation, the SLD control pushbuttons appear and the color of the highlighter will change to maroon
indicating that the breaker or switch is selected. By default, the control pushbuttons are programmed for Tag,
Block, and Bypass. For each control action, a flash message is displayed.

1601-0450 119
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

Figure 68: Active element selection with flash message

Browsing and selection is allowed only when the relay is in Local Mode and the user has security access of at least
operator level. To check if the relay is in local mode, look for an LM symbol on the task pane at the top of the
screen. Pressing navigation keys on SLD pages while in remote mode does nothing.
Control pushbuttons appearing on the SLD page are only active while a control object is selected.
The control object is deselected if you navigate to any screen other than the SLD or by pressing the Escape key. If
no action is taken after selection, the object is automatically deselected after the Bkr/Sw Select timeout setting
(Setpoints > Control > Control Mode > Bkr/Sw Select Timeout). Once deselected, the control pushbutton labels
return to the SLD page navigation labels and the color of the box around the object changes back to blue for
browsing. Pressing Escape once more removes the browsing highlight around the objects. If inactive during
browsing for the timeout setting (Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > Message Timeout), the browsing highlight
around the object disappears. If an object is selected, Home button operation is prohibited. The object must be de-
selected by pressing Escape in order for the Home button to function.
After upgrading from firmware versions 1.3x to 1.7x, the breaker/contactor starting/stopping operations from the
front panel now follow a select-before-operate mechanism. The breaker/contactor must be first selected by
browsing and pressing the Enter key for selection. Once selected, the function can be started or stopped with the
front panel’s pushbuttons.

3.4.6.6.3 CONTROL OPERATIONS

The control operations carried out through the front panel of the relay are done only in Local Mode (Setpoints >
Control > Local Control Mode > Local Mode). Opening and closing operations can be carried out by pressing the
Open and Close pushbuttons on the relay front panel. Other operations such as tagging, blocking and bypassing
can be carried out by pressing the control pushbuttons that appear after the control object selection.

Note:
Remote operations are allowed for opening, closing, blocking, and bypassing. Tagging must be done locally.
It is recommended that tagging is only used for maintenance purposes. When a breaker or a switch is tagged, it cannot be
bypassed although the letters By may appear below the element on SLD.
If breaker is selected and relay status is changed to Out-of-Service, the breaker control actions, such as tag, blocked, bypass
and open/close are blocked. The breaker may remain in the selected state, but no action can be executed.

120 1601-0450
 Chapter 3 - Interfaces

Once the selected breaker or switch is tagged, a letter T appears below the associated element. Similarly, for
blocking, letter B appears and for bypassing, letters By appear below the associated breaker or switch as shown in
the last column of the following figure. The blocking and bypassing letters also appear if the breakers/switches are
blocked or bypassed remotely. These are linked to their respective breaker/switch in the SLD Configurator window
so that when that breaker/switch is deleted, the letters also get deleted.
Permitted breaker/switch operations are described in the following figure when various letter indications are present
under the control element.

Note:
For bypassing select-before-operate to start and stop the motor, the Start Motor PB and Stop Motor PB settings can be
utilized under breaker/contactor control.

3.4.7 FLEXCURVE EDITOR

The FlexCurve Editor is designed to graphically view and edit the FlexCurve. The FlexCurve Editor screen is shown
as follows for FlexCurves A, B, C, and D:

1601-0450 121
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

● The Operate Curves are displayed, which can be edited by dragging the tips of the curves
● A Base curve can be plotted for reference, to customize the operating curve. The blue colored curve in the
picture is a reference curve. It can be Extremely Inverse, Definite Time, etc.
● The Trip (Reset and Operate) Times in the tables and curves work interactively i.e., changing the table value
affects the curve shape and vice versa.
● Save Configured Trip Times.
● Export Configured Trip Times to a CSV file
● Load Trip Times from a CSV File
● The screen above shows the model for viewing FlexCurves. Select Initialize to copy the trip times from the
selected curve to the FlexCurve.

3.4.8 TRANSIENT RECORDER (WAVEFORM CAPTURE)

EnerVista D&I Setup software can be used to capture waveforms (or view trace memory) from the relay at the
instance of a pickup, trip, alarm, or other condition.

122 1601-0450
 Chapter 3 - Interfaces

Note:
The COMTRADE Version used on 8 Series relays is C37.111-1999.

● With EnerVista D&I Setup software running and communications established, select the Records >
Transients > Transient Records menu item to open the Transient Recorder Viewer window.
● Click on Trigger to trigger a waveform capture.
● To view the captured waveforms, click on the Launch Viewer button. A detailed Waveform Capture window
appears as shown below.
● Click on the Save button to save the selected waveform to the local PC. A new window appears, requesting
the file name and path. One file is saved as a COMTRADE file, with the extension CFG. The other file is a
DAT file, required by the COMTRADE file for proper display of waveforms.
● To view a previously saved COMTRADE file, click the Open button and select the corresponding
COMTRADE file.

1601-0450 123
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

● The red vertical line indicates the trigger point.

● The date and time of the trigger are displayed at the top left corner of the window. To match the captured
waveform with the event that triggered it, make note of the time and date shown in the graph, then find the
event that matches the same time in the event recorder. The event record provides additional information on
the cause and system conditions at the time of the event.

124 1601-0450
 Chapter 3 - Interfaces

● From the window main menu bar, press the Preference button

to open the COMTRADE Setup page, in order to change the graph attributes. Change the color of each
graph as desired and select other options as required by checking the appropriate boxes. Click OK to store
these graph attributes and to close the window. The Waveform Capture window reappears based on the
selected graph attributes.
● To view a vector graph of the quantities contained in the waveform capture, press the View Phasors button
to display the following window:

3.4.9 PROTECTION SUMMARY

Protection Summary is a single screen which holds the summarized information of different settings from Grouped
Elements and Monitoring Elements.
The Protection Summary Screen allows the user to:
● view the output relay assignments for the elements
● modify the output relay assignments for the elements
● view the Function status for the elements
● navigate to the respective element screen on a button click.

1601-0450 125
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

With EnerVista D&I Setup software running and communications established, select the Setpoints > Protection
Summary menu item to open the Protection Summary window.

3.4.10 FLEXLOGIC FAVOURITES

With EnerVista D&I Setup software version 2.70 and above, use the FlexLogic Favourites to create a customized
list of FlexLogic operands that use Format Code FC142.
Select Edit FlexLogic Favourites from either the offline menu or the popup menu from an offline CID file to access
a screen where the FlexLogic Favourite list can be modified. The FlexLogic Favourites screen includes a left tree
that shows all the FlexLogic Operands available for the CID file. The right tree shows all the FlexLogic operands
included in the Favourites list.
In the FlexLogic Favourites screen, press the Smart Update button to examine the CID file. Any FlexLogic
operands associated with an enabled feature/element will be added to the FlexLogic Favourites list. Operands will
never be automatically removed from the Favourites list, but can be removed manually by selecting the operand
and pressing the << button. Operands can also be added to the Favourites list by selecting the operands in the left
tree and pressing the >> button.
Select the check-box to use FlexLogic Favourites in any screen with a setting that is configured using the FlexLogic
operand (FC142).
FlexLogic Favourites is enabled when the settings are shown in BOLD and the background color of the setting is
brighter.

3.4.11 OFFLINE SETTINGS FILE CONVERSION

EnerVista D&I Setup software supports conversion of offline settings files created in the SR Series platform. This
feature allows the conversion of existing offline setting files to 8 Series files.
EnerVista D&I Setup software reduces the manual effort required when moving from an older product to a newer
product. The settings file conversion feature takes an existing settings file and generates a new settings file
compatible with the relay specified with the order code. After the import is complete, the results are displayed in an
interactive results window.

3.4.11.1 CONVERTING LEGACY FILES

EnerVista D&I Setup software software version 1.2x and above supports conversion of SR 469 files above version
5.0 only to 869 settings files. For files below version 5.0x, first convert these files to version 5.0 or higher using the
latest EnerVista D&I Setup software 469 Setup software before doing the conversion.
The conversion can only be initialized with EnerVista D&I Setup software from the Offline/New Settings File
commands located in the taskbar, as follows:
1. In the menu taskbar, click on Offline and select the New Settings File item. The Create New Settings File
dialog box appears, which allows for the setpoint file conversion.
2. Select the Firmware Version and Order Code option for the new setpoint file.
3. For future reference, enter some useful information in the Description box to facilitate the identification of the
device and purpose for the file.
4. To select the file name and path for the new file, click the button beside the File Name box.

126 1601-0450
 Chapter 3 - Interfaces

5. To select the SR settings file used for initialization, check the box to the left of Initialize Settings from SR
Settings File.
6. To locate and select the file to convert, click the ellipsis button beside the Initialize Settings from SR Settings
File box.
7. Click OK to begin the conversion and complete the process. Once this step is completed, the new file, with a
complete path, is added to the EnerVista D&I Setup software software environment.

Note:
If there are settings that are not applicable to the later model, they are ignored and will not appear in the settings list.

3.4.11.2 CONVERSION SUMMARY REPORT

At the end of the conversion process, the results are summarized in a Settings Conversion Report.
The report is found under Device Definition in the offline file window.

Note:
Print the Settings Conversion Report immediately following conversion for future reference in case the report is removed or
the settings are modified from the EnerVista D&I Setup software.

3.4.11.3 RESULTS WINDOW

The conversion summary results window has the following columns:
● SettingName: the same tree structure as in the offline window, but with status icons
● SettingValue: the converted value for the settings file
● Original SettingName: setting name of the input file
● Original SettingValue: setting value of the input file

Note:
All other settings available (not shown in the conversion report) in the file are set to default and must be verified before putting
the relay into service.
Settings in the results window are linked to setting screens. Click in the results window to navigate to the corresponding
settings window.

Note:
Custom curves from the 469 cannot be converted, although they appear in the conversion report.

Status Icons
The status icons show the conversion results:

Manual configuration required

Successful conversion

Value is not supported

1601-0450 127
Chapter 3 - Interfaces

Print Report
If desired, the conversion summary report can be printed using the File/Print command in the taskbar or it can be
printed from the GUI print button.

Note:
Even if the report shows that a conversion has been successful (green checkbox icon), all settings must still be verified before
putting the relay in service.

128 1601-0450
 CHAPTER 4

ABOUT SETPOINTS
Chapter 4 - About Setpoints

130 1601-0450
 Chapter 4 - About Setpoints

4.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter contains the following sections:

Chapter Overview 131
About Setpoints 132
Setpoints Entry Methods 133
Common Setpoints 134
Logic Diagrams 137

1601-0450 131
Chapter 4 - About Setpoints

4.2 ABOUT SETPOINTS

The relay has a considerable number of programmable setpoints, all of which make the relay extremely flexible.
These setpoints have been grouped into a variety of menus which are available from the paths shown below. Each
setpoints menu has sub-sections that describe in detail the setpoints found on that menu.

Note:
Use the path provided to access the menus from the front panel and from the EnerVista D&I Setup software software.
Certain named settings allow custom names. Do not create 13-character long names using the largest width characters (i.e.
WWWWWWWWWWWWW). Doing so can cause the last 3 characters to overlap the setting name when viewed from the HMI
or the EnerVista D&I Setup software software.

Figure 69: Main Setpoints Display Hierarchy

132 1601-0450
 Chapter 4 - About Setpoints

4.3 SETPOINTS ENTRY METHODS

Before placing the relay in operation, you must enter the setpoints, which define the system characteristics, inputs,
relay outputs, and protection settings. You can use one of the following methods:
● Front panel, using the keypad and the display.
● Front USB port, connected to a portable computer running the EnerVista D&I Setup software software.
● Rear Ethernet, copper or fiber port connected to portable computer running the EnerVista D&I Setup software
software.
● Rear RS485 port and a SCADA system running user-written software.
● If applicable for your model, using the Wi-Fi wireless connection to a portable computer running the EnerVista
D&I Setup software software.
Using a computer is the easiest method, as files can be stored and downloaded for fast, error free entry. To facilitate
this process, the EnerVista D&I Setup software software is is available for download. The relay leaves the factory
with setpoints programmed to default values, and it is these values that are shown in all the setpoint message
illustrations.
At a minimum, you must set the Setpoints > System setpoints for the system to function correctly. To safeguard
against the installation of a relay whose setpoints have not been entered, the Out-Of-Service self-test warning is
displayed. In addition, the Critical Failure relay is de-energized. Once the relay has been programmed for the
intended application, you should change the Setpoints > Device > Installation > Device In Service setpoint from
Not Ready (the default) to Ready. Before putting the relay in the Ready state, you should work through each page
of setpoint messages, entering values either by keypad or computer.

1601-0450 133
Chapter 4 - About Setpoints

4.4 COMMON SETPOINTS

To make the application of this device as simple as possible, similar methods of operation and similar types of
setpoints are incorporated in various features. Rather than repeat operation descriptions for this class of setpoint
throughout the manual, a general description is presented in this overview. Details that are specific to a particular
feature are included in the discussion of the feature. The form and nature of these setpoints is described below.

FUNCTION
The <ELEMENT_NAME> FUNCTION setpoint determines the operational characteristic of each feature. The range
for this setpoint is: Disabled, Trip, Latched Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm and Configurable.
If the FUNCTION setpoint is selected as Disabled, then the feature is not operational.
If FUNCTION is selected as Trip or Latched Trip, then the feature is operational. When the Trip or Latched
Trip function is selected and the feature operates, the output relay #1 Trip operates (when selected as Trip
Relay), and the TRIP LED is lit.
When the Latched Trip function is selected and the feature operates, the TRIP LED and trip output operands will
remain latched. The Latched Trip can be reset by issuing the reset command.
If FUNCTION is selected as Alarm or Latched Alarm, then the feature is operational. When this function is
selected and the feature operates, the ALARM LED is lit and any assigned auxiliary output relays operate. The Trip
output relay does not operate, and the TRIP LED is not lit.
When FUNCTION is selected as Latched Alarm, operation of the Latched Alarm function depends on the
selection of the setting LATCH ALARM OPERATION, configured under Path: Setpoints > Device > Installation.
When the setting LATCH ALARM OPERATION is set to Self-Reset while an element is set to Latched Alarm,
only the Alarm LED will remain latched. When setting LATCH ALARM OPERATION to Latched, both Alarm LED
and element will remain latched.
When Alarm is selected and the feature operates, the ALARM LED flashes, and it self-resets when the operating
conditions are cleared.
If FUNCTION is selected as Configurable, the feature is fully operational but outputs are not driving any action,
such as output relay #1, ALARM LED or anything else. Operands from this element must be programmed to the
required action which may be as simple as the auxiliary output relay from the list of available relays in the element
itself; FlexLogic, Trip Bus etc.

Note:
The FlexLogic operands generated by the operation of each feature are active, and available to assign to outputs, or use in
FlexLogic equations, regardless of the selected function, except when the function is set to Disabled.

PICKUP
The setpoint selects the threshold equal to or above (for over elements) or equal to or below (for under elements)
which the measured parameter causes an output from the measuring element.

PICKUP DELAY
The setpoint selects a fixed time interval to delay an input signal from appearing as an output.

DROPOUT DELAY
The setpoint selects a fixed time interval to delay dropping out the output signal after being generated.

134 1601-0450
 Chapter 4 - About Setpoints

TDM
The setting provides a selection for Time Dial Multiplier which modifies the operating times per the selected inverse
curve. For example, if an IEEE Extremely Inverse curve is selected with TDM=2, and the fault current is 5 times
bigger than the pickup level, operation of the element can not occur until 2.59 s after pickup.

OUTPUT RELAYS
The <ELEMENT_NAME> RELAYS setpoint selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates an
output. The range is Operate or Do Not Operate, and can be applied to any combination of the auxiliary output
relays. The default setting is Do Not Operate.
The available auxiliary relays vary depending on the order code.

DIRECTION
The <ELEMENT_NAME> DIRECTION setpoint is available for overcurrent features which are subject to control
from a directional element. The range is Disabled, Forward, and Reverse. If set to Disabled, the element is
allowed to operate for current flow in any direction. There is no supervision from the directional element. If set to
Forward, the OC element is allowed to operate when the fault is detected by the directional element in forward
direction. In this mode, the OC element does not operate for fault in reverse direction. If set to Reverse, the OC
element is allowed to operate when the fault is detected in reverse direction, and does not operate in forward
direction.

RESET
Selection of an Instantaneous or a Timed reset is provided by this setting. If Instantaneous is selected, the
element resets instantaneously providing the quantity drops below 97 to 98% of the pickup level before the time for
operation is reached. If Timed is selected, the time to reset is calculated based on the reset equation for the
selected inverse curve.

BLOCK
The <ELEMENT_NAME> BLOCK setpoint selects an operand from the list of FlexLogic operands, which when
active, blocks the feature from running. When set to On the feature is always blocked; when set to Off, block is
disabled.

EVENTS
The <ELEMENT_NAME> EVENTS setpoint can be set to Enabled, or Disabled. If set to Enabled, the events
associated with the pickup, operation, or other conditions of the feature are recorded in the Event Recorder.

TARGETS
The <ELEMENT_NAME> TARGETS setpoint can be set to Disabled, Self-Reset, or Latched. If set to Self-
Reset, or Latched, the targets associated with the pickup, operation, or another condition of the feature are
displayed on the screen of the 8 Series 869 relay. The targets disappear from the screen when Self-Reset is
selected, and the conditions are cleared. The targets stay on the screen, when Latched is selected, and the
conditions are cleared.

1601-0450 135
Chapter 4 - About Setpoints

Note:
The targets of status, control and pickup conditions are always self-reset type, regardless of the Self-Reset, or Latched
configuration of setpoint <ELEMENT_NAME> TARGETS.
To ensure the settings file inside the relay is updated, wait 30 seconds after a setpoint change before cycling power.
When IP addresses are changed and sent as a Settings file, the unit reboots twice.

136 1601-0450
 Chapter 4 - About Setpoints

4.5 LOGIC DIAGRAMS

Refer to the logic diagrams provided for a complete understanding of the operation of each feature. These
sequential logic diagrams illustrate how each setpoint, input parameter, and internal logic is used in a feature to
obtain an output. In addition to these logic diagrams, the Setpoints chapter provides written descriptions for each
feature.
● Setpoints: Shown as a block with a heading labeled SETPOINT. The exact wording of the displayed setpoint
message identifies the setpoint. Major functional setpoint selections are listed below the name and are
incorporated in the logic.
● Comparator Blocks: Shown as a block with an inset box labeled RUN with the associated pickup/dropout
setpoint shown directly above. Element operation of the detector is controlled by the signal entering the RUN
inset. The measurement/comparison can only be performed if a logic 1 is provided at the RUN input. The
relationship between a setpoint and input parameter is indicated by the following symbols: < (less than), >
(greater than), etc.
● Pickup and Dropout Time Delays: Shown as a block with indication of two timers – the tPKP (Pickup Delay),
and tDPO(Dropout Delay).
● LED Indicators: Shown as the following schematic symbol (X).
● Logic: Described with basic logic gates (AND, OR, XOR, NAND, NOR). The inverter (logical NOT), is shown
as a circle: O
● FlexLogic operands: Shown as a block with a heading labeled FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS. Each feature
produces output flags (operands) which can be used further for creating logic in the FlexLogic equation editor,
or Trip Bus, or can be directly assigned to trigger an output. The operands from all relay features constitute
the list of FlexLogic operands.

1601-0450 137
Chapter 4 - About Setpoints

138 1601-0450
 CHAPTER 5

DEVICE SETPOINTS
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

140 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

5.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter describes the Device setpoint menu settings in detail.
This chapter contains the following sections:
Chapter Overview 141
Device menu hierarchy 142
Custom Configuration 143
Real-time Clock 146
Security 151
Communications 164
Transient Recorder 183
Data Logger 185
Fault Reports 188
Event Data 190
Flex states 191
Front Panel 192
Resetting 214
Installation 215
Self-test errors 218
Clear Records 223

1601-0450 141
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

5.2 DEVICE MENU HIERARCHY

‚ƒ„ †  ‡ˆ‰Š‚‹Œ„‰ ‡
@ AbG P  
Ral Tm Cl ck
485
cury UB

C mmu
ca
 W-F
Set point s v !
Eh
"# $%& Tra

 Rc rdr
 G =

'()*%$ zaa { ggr DNP P  

DNP/ IE 104 P   L

O*%)*%$ aul R r
IE 60870-5-104
+,.%!% .( ~
 zaa
IE 60870-5-103
M.( %., (2
l} a HJK QVXYVZ[Z\V] ^_`fjq w`qj

9.(%,.: HJK\V] š`qj›œžfŸ ¡ Ÿ_œ¢ œ

? @ AbG D £
;:x<.2 !

|$% (2 P = >??>b LED

r
 a
l
P = >??>b PB

R
g >b PB

Ž‘’“”•–
€
alla

D—>˜ P —  

D ™>G  

D ™>G  

       

Figure 70: Device Display Hierarchy

142 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

5.3 CUSTOM CONFIGURATION

The custom configuration features allows you to customize the configurations as desired.

Configuration Mode
The 8-series platform, supports a multitude of functions and features including:
● Protection and Control (P&C)
● Asset Monitoring
● Flexible Logic Engine (FlexLogic)
● Records and Reporting
● Time Synchronization
● Testing/Simulation
Taking into consideration user experience, configuration mode controls how the Setpoints are presented by only
displaying settings that are typically used, or settings that are important to configure.
Two configuration modes are supported:
● Simplified - In this mode, some of the functions, features and settings are hidden or made read-only (grayed
out). All the settings made in Regular configuration mode are still applied during simplified mode (they are
either hidden or read-only), so simplified configuration mode can also be seen as a way of locking advanced
setpoints.
● Regular - In this mode, all function/features and setpoints of the device are editable and nothing is hidden or
grayed out.
Configuration mode is applicable to the Setpoints items only and does not control view/presentation to other main
menu items, such as Device Definition, Status, Metering, Records, Commands and Maintenance. The configuration
mode setting is available to be changed by the Administrator role. The configuration mode control is applicable to
device HMI and setup software, as well as online and offline setting files.

Note:
Configuration mode does not disable the device functionality or settings. It only controls the view or presentation on the HMI
and setup software screens. Therefore, settings which are hidden or Read-only are preserved and applied within the device.

The home icon on the home page changes color according to the configuration mode. When in Simplified
configuration mode, the home icon color is green. When in regular mode the home icon color is blue.

Example 1: Setting items view control

The Phase TOC 1 function in Regular mode has 14 editable setpoints. In the Simplified mode this function has only
6 out of the 14 setpoints made available to edit. 5 setpoints are hidden, and 3 setpoints are read/view-only.

Note:
All setpoints under Regular mode are still applied and used by the device. For example the Input is hidden but configured as
Phasor during Regular mode, therefore Phase TOC 1 still applies Phasor as an input. Similarly, Reset is read-only, and
Phase TOC 1 still applies Instantaneous for resetting. The read-only settings are greyed out.

1601-0450 143
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

r Simplified
..\Current\Phase TOC 1 ..\Current\Phase TOC 1
Item Name Value Unit Item Name Value Unit
Function Disabled Function Disabled
Signal Input CT Bank 1 -J1 Signal Input CT Bank 1 -J1
Input Phasor
Pickup 1.000 x CT
Pickup 1.000 x CT
Curve IEEE Mod Inverse
Curve IEEE Mod Inverse
TDM 1.00
TDM 1.00
Reset Instantaneous
Reset Instantaneous
Direction Disabled Direction Disabled
Voltage Restraint Disabled Voltage Restraint Disabled
Volt Lower Limit 0.1 p.u. Relays Do Not Operate
Block Off PTOC 1
Relays Do Not Operate
Events Enabled
Targets Self-Reset
PTOC 1

Figure 71: Comparison of the setpoints for Regular and Simplified mode

Example 2: Function/Feature view control

The differences in the Inputs setpoint screens for Regular and Simplified mode are shown below. Under Simplified
mode, the Virtual Inputs and Remote Inputs are hidden for any configuration change. However, the device will still
accept and process virtual and remote inputs based on what is configured during Regular mode. This way,
Simplified configuration mode does not change the behavior of the device.

r Simplified
..\Setpoints\Inputs ..\Setpoints\Inputs
Item Name Item Name
Contact Inputs Contact Inputs
Virtual Inputs Analog Inputs
Analog Inputs
Remote Inputs

Inputs MA In

Inputs V Inputs MA In Rem In

Figure 72: Comparison of the Inputs screens for Regular and Simplified mode

144 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

CONFIG MODE
Path: Setpoints > Device > Config Mode
Range: Simplified, Regular
Default: Regular
This setting allows selection of the configuration mode while the device is accessed by the Administrator role. In
Regular configuration mode, all values in settings/functions can be edited. In Simplified configuration mode,
selected settings/functions are hidden or the values are read-only to enhance user experience with minimum
setpoint changes.

1601-0450 145
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

5.4 REAL-TIME CLOCK

Path: Setpoints > Device > Real Time Clock
The relay is capable of receiving a time reference from several time sources in addition to its own internal clock for
the purpose of time-stamping events, transient recorders and other occurrences within the relay. The accuracy of
the time stamp is based on the time reference that is used. The relay supports an internal clock, SNTP, IRIG-B, and
PTP IEEE 1588 (version 2) as potential time references.
If two or more time sources are available, the time source with the higher priority shown in Time Sources table is
used where 1 is considered to be the highest priority. Please note that the time source priority of PTP and IRIG-B
can be swapped. If both PTP and IRIG-B are available, by default the clock syncs to PTP over IRIG-B. If PTP is not
available, the CPU syncs the internal clock to IRIG-B.

Time Sources
Time Source Priority
PTP (IEEE1588) 1*
IRIG-B 2*
SNTP 3
Internal Clock 4
* The priority of IRIG-B and PTP can be swapped.

Note:
Synchronization by IEC103, DNP, Modbus and IEC104 is not going to be issued if there is a sync source from IRIG-B, SNTP
or PTP.

5.4.1 PTP CONFIGURATION

Path: Setpoints > Device > Real Time Clock > Precision Time

PORT 4(5) PTP FUNCTION

Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
When the port setting is selected as Disabled PTP is disabled on the port. The relay does not generate, or
listen to, PTP messages on the port.

PORT 4(5) PATH DELAY ADDER

Range: 0 to 60000 ns in steps of 1 ns
Default: 0 ns
The time delivered by PTP is advanced by the time value in the setting prior to the time being used to
synchronize the relay’s real time clock. This is to compensate for time delivery delays not compensated for in the
network. In a fully compliant Power Profile (PP) network, the peer delay and the processing delay mechanisms
compensate for all the delays between the grandmaster and the relay. In such networks, the setting is zero.
In networks containing one or more switches and/or clocks that do not implement both of these mechanisms, not
all delays are compensated, so the time of message arrival at the relay is later than the time indicated in the
message. The setting can be used to approximately compensate for the delay. Since the relay is not aware of

146 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

network switching that dynamically changes the amount of uncompensated delay, there is no setting that always
completely corrects for uncompensated delay. A setting can be chosen that reduces worst-case error to half of
the range between minimum and maximum uncompensated delay if these values are known.

PORT 4(5) PATH DELAY ASYMMETRY

Range: -1000 to +1000 ns in steps of 1 ns
Default: 0 ns
The setting corresponds to Delay Asymmetry in PTP, which is used by the peer delay mechanism to compensate
for any difference in the propagation delay between the two directions of a link. Except in unusual cases, the two
fibers are of essentially identical length and composition, so the setting is set to zero.
In unusual cases where the length of link is different in different directions, the setting is to be set to the number
of nanoseconds longer the Ethernet propagation delay is to the relay compared with the mean of path
propagation delays to and from the relay. For instance, if it is known say from the physical length of the fibers
and the propagation speed in the fibers that the delay from the relay to the Ethernet switch it is connected to is
9000 ns and that the delay from the switch to the relay is 11000 ns, then the mean delay is 10000 ns, and the
path delay asymmetry is +1000 ns.

STRICT POWER PROFILE

Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Power profile (IEEE Std C37.238™ 2011) requires that the grandmaster clock be power profile compliant, that
the delivered time have a worst-case error of ±1 µs, and that the peer delay mechanism be implemented. With
the strict power profile setting enabled, the relay selects as master only clocks displaying the IEEE_C37_238
identification codes. It uses a port only when the peer delay mechanism is operational. With the strict power
profile setting disabled, the relay uses clocks without the power profile identification when no power profile clocks
are present, and uses ports even if the peer delay mechanism is non-operational.
The setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP-capable ports.

PTP DOMAIN NUMBER

Range: 0 to 255
Default: 0
The setting is set to the domain number of the grandmaster-capable clock(s) to which they can be synchronized.
A network may support multiple time distribution domains, each distinguished with a unique domain number.
More commonly, there is a single domain using the default domain number zero.
The setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP-capable ports.

PTP VLAN PRIORITY

Range: 0 to 7
Default: 4
The setting selects the value of the priority field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in request messages issued by the
relay’s peer delay mechanism. In compliance with PP (Power Profile) the default VLAN priority is 4, but it is
recommended that in accordance with PTP it be set to 7.
Depending on the characteristics of the device to which the relay is directly linked, VLAN Priority may have no
effect.

1601-0450 147
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

The setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP-capable ports.

PTP VLAN ID
Range: 0 to 4095
Default: 0
The setting selects the value of the ID field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in request messages issued by the relay’s
peer delay mechanism. It is provided in compliance with PP (Power Profile). As these messages have a
destination address that indicates they are not to be bridged, their VLAN ID serves no function, and so may be
left at its default value.
Depending on the characteristics of the device to which the relay is directly linked, VLAN ID may have no effect.
The setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP-capable ports.

PTP PRIORITY
Range: 1, 2
Default: 1
The setting sets the priority of PTP time for the relay. If set to 1 and IRIG-B is available, the relay syncs the
relay’s time reference to the PTP time. If set to 2 and IRIG-B is available, the relay syncs its reference to IRIG-B
time.

5.4.2 CLOCK
Path:Setpoints > Device > Real Time Clock > Clock

DATE
Format: Month/Day/Year
Range: Month: 1 to 12; Day: 1 to 31; Year: 2008 to 2094
Default: 01/01/2008

TIME
Range: 0 to 23: 0 to 59:0 to 59
Default: 00:00:00

LOCAL TIME OFFSET FROM UTC

Range: –24.00 to 24.00 hrs in steps of 0.5 hrs
Default: 0.00 hrs

REAL TIME CLOCK EVENTS

Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled (FW 3.00), Disabled (FW4.10

IRIG-B
Range: Disabled, Enabled

148 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

Default: Disabled

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME

Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled

DST START MONTH

Range: January to December (all months)
Default: Not Set

DST START DAY

Range: SUN to SAT (all days of the week)
Default: Not Set

DST START WEEK

Range: 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, Last
Default: Not Set

DST START HOUR

Range: 0 to 23
Default: 2

DST END MONTH

Range: January to December (all months)
Default: Not Set

DST END WEEK

Range: 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, Last
Default: Not Set

DST END DAY

Range: SUN to SAT (all days of the week)
Default: Not Set

DST END HOUR

Range: 0 to 23
Default: 2

Note:
IRIG-B is available in all relays. A failure on IRIG-B triggers an event and a target message.
IRIG-B is auto-detected. The signal type is detected in the hardware, so there are no configurable options.

1601-0450 149
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

5.4.3 SNTP PROTOCOL

8 series relays accept time synchronization from up to two different SNTP servers. In order to define number of
SNTP servers to be used, different settings for each SNTP server must be configured.
● If one SNTP server is used to synchronize the relay, the SNTP Server and UDP port settings must be
configured with the corresponding settings.
● If two SNTP servers are used to synchronize the relay, the SNTP Server IP and UDP port for the main server
must be configured, along with the SNP Server 2 IP and UDP port for the back-up server.

Note:
8 Series relays only support SNTP unicast. It may take 2-3 minutes for the relay to synchronize with the SNTP server.

Path: Setpoints > Device > Real Time Clock > SNTP

SNTP FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled

SNTP SERVER IP ADDRESS

Range: Standard IP Address Format
Default: 0.0.0.0

SNTP UDP PORT NUMBER

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
Default: 123

SNTP SERVER 2 IP ADDRESS

Range: Standard IP Address Format
Default: 0.0.0.0

SNTP 2 UDP PORT NUMBER

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
Default: 123

Note:
The SNTP and PTP settings take effect after rebooting the relay.

150 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

5.5 SECURITY
OVERVIEW
The Multilin delivers full cyber security data classification with the use of security levels that help the user to comply
with security standards and guidelines. For Cyber Security, there is a choice of two order code options - Basic or
Advanced Security (CyberSentry):
● Basic Security – The basic security feature is the default offering of the product. It supports role based
access control (RBAC), encrypted communication between the IED and EnerVista configuration software,
with other functionalities such as security events storage on the IED, Inactivity Timeout and Lockout based on
authentication failure.
● CyberSentry – This feature refers to the advanced security options available as a software option. When this
option is purchased, it is automatically enabled and Basic Security is disabled. It supports the same
functionality as a Basic Security IED, but additionally it supports user management with non-shared accounts,
centralized authentication and logging of security events in syslog format to the configured syslog server. It
also supports the configuration of two US servers and two syslog servers to ensure redundancy and
availability.

GENERAL RULES FOR ROLES

● In an Advanced security device, all the roles (defined on the device as well as defined on the RADIUS server)
are password protected. In a basic security device, all the roles are password protected, except for the
Viewer role which is user-defined on the device. A user with Viewer capability, defined on the RADIUS server,
is password protected.
● All the roles, except for the Viewer role, support only one session at one time.
● The Viewer role has read-only access to all values in the relay except for one service command which is
described in the Password Recovery Procedure section below.
● In an Advanced security IED, all the roles can choose to log out. In a basic security IED, all the roles, except
for the Viewer, are able to log out.
● The setpoint access is used for the purpose of bypassing security on the interface defined by the BYPASS
ACCESS setting.
● The setpoint access setting may be either switched directly on or assigned to a digital input.
● If the setpoint access setting is assigned to a digital input, the digital input needs to be activated through a
physical key (jumper).
● The setpoint access setting may be set only by an Administrator.

PASSWORD COMPLEXITY
The password complexity is available on both Basic Security and Advanced Security.
If password complexity is enabled, a user account requires an alpha-numeric password that meets the following
requirements:
● Passwords cannot contain the user account name or parts of the user's full name that exceed two
consecutive characters
● Passwords must be 8 to 20 characters in length
● Passwords must contain characters from the following four categories: - English uppercase characters (A
through Z) - English lowercase characters (a through z) - Base 10 digits (0 through 9) - Non-alphanumeric
characters (e.g. ~, !, @, #, $,%,&)

1601-0450 151
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

PASSWORD RECOVERY PROCEDURE

In the event of losing all passwords, the 8 Series 869 can be reset to factory defaults by following the procedure
below:
1. Send an email to the customer support department providing a valid serial number and using a recognizable
corporate email account. (Worldwide e-mail: [email protected])
2. Customer support provides the code to reset the relay to factory defaults.
3. Enter the code provided from the front panel, under the menu Setpoints > Device > Installation > Service
Command to reset the relay to factory defaults.

Note:
Even a Viewer may execute this operation.

The current limitation for the maximum number of Viewer sessions from EnerVista is three when the
Communications card is present.
When the communications card is not present, a maximum of two Viewer sessions may be initiated through
EnerVista. If two Viewers are connected, a third connection is only allowed for an Administrator. No Operator has
access. However, if an Operator is connected, before any other user, only one Viewer is allowed so that an
Administrator can connect. This is because the maximum number of TCP connections from EnerVista, when the
Communications card is not present, is only three. (With a Communications card, the maximum number of TCP
connections is five.)

SECURE TUNNELING
The following items are supported in the feature:
● Under the CyberSentry option, the Multilin supports SSH secure tunneling of MODBUS communications
between itself and EnerVista setup software.
● SSH secure tunneling is supported on Ethernet only.
● If bypass security is set (through setpoint access), the communications over Ethernet is not encrypted.

SECURITY EVENTS STORED ON IED

The Security_Events.CSV file stores security events information. A total of 1024 events are stored in a circular
buffer in a non-volatile memory. Once the file reaches its limit, the oldest event will get over-written by the newest
event.The following information will be supported and stored in the events file for each event:
● Event Number
● Data/Time (UTC)
● Username
● IP Address
● Role
● Activity Value
This file will be stored on the IED and is accessible from SFTP clients for users with the Administrator role. For
Basic Security, this is the only file to give security audit information to the user. This file is useful for Advanced
Security users if the syslog server is either not configured or not functioning.

ROLE ACCESS MAP

The detailed role access map is defined in the following figure.

152 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

Role Access Map

Roles Administrator Engineer Operator Viewer
Targets R R R R
Settings
Security Settings RW R R R
Change own PW (Basic Security) Yes Yes Yes No

Change own PW (Advanced Security) Yes Yes Yes Yes

Create New/Modify Users, Assign RW No No No

Roles (Advanced Security)
Non-Security Settings RW RW R R

FlexLogic RW RW R R

IEC 61850 Settings RW RW R R

Factory Settings No No No No

Commands

Date/Time Change RW RW No No

BKR Related RW RW RW No

Clear Records RW No No No

Restore Defaults RW No No No

Reset W W W No

File Operations

Config File Read R R R R

Config File Write W W No No

Actual Values
Status R R R R
Metering R R R R

Reports
Events R R R R
Waveforms R R R R
Security Audit Log R R No No

1601-0450 153
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

Maintenance
Upload Firmware W No No No
Modbus Analyzer R R R R

Note:
Commands may be issued freely through protocols other than Modbus (e.g. DNP and IEC 61850) without user-authentication
or encryption of data taking place, even if the relay has the advanced security feature enabled.

5.5.1 BASIC SECURITY

The 8 Series 869 Basic Security supports four roles: Administrator, Engineer, Operator and Viewer.
The main settings structure is available from Path: Setpoints > Device > Security.

LOGIN
The setting allows a user to login with a specific role.
1. Whenever a new role is logged in, the user is prompted to enter a password.
2. If the wrong password is entered, an Authentication Failed! message is displayed
3. If the maximum failed authentications occur an Account Blocked! message is displayed.
4. The Viewer is the default choice and it does not require a password.

LOGOUT
This setting logs out the current user and logs in as Viewer. If the user is already an Viewer, this setting does not
apply. When logging out, a switch to Viewer role is performed.

CHANGE PASSWORDS
1. The Change local passwords menu is shown on the front panel and EnerVista on a successful login of
Administrator role.
2. If password complexity is enabled, the rules as defined in Security must be obeyed. If password complexity is
disabled this setting accepts 1 to 20 alphanumeric characters. See Path: Setpoints > Device > Security >
Change Local Passwords.
3. The default password is 0, which is programmed from the factory.
4. The login setting in this menu is similar to that in the parent security settings.
5. The Viewer does not have password associated with it, so it is not shown in this setting.

LOAD FACTORY DEFAULTS

The Administrator role can change this setting. This setting resets all the settings, communication and Security
passwords, and all records.

ACCESS LOCKOUT
Access lockout is the number of failed authentications (the default is 3 and the maximum is 99) before the device
blocks subsequent authentication attempts for the lockout period. A value of 0 means Access Lockout is disabled.

154 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

ACCESS LOCKOUT PERIOD

Access lockout period is the period of time in minutes of a lockout (the default is 3 and the maximum is 9999). A
value of 0 means that there is no lockout period.

ACCESS TIMEOUT
Access timeout is the time of idleness before a logged in user is automatically logged out. This timeout applies to all
users, independent of the communication channel (serial, Ethernet or direct access).

PASSWORD COMPLEXITY
This setting is available so that the option of selecting between simple passwords and complex ones is provided.
● The setting is only available to Administrator.
● By default Password Complexity is Disabled.
● When Password Complexity is Enabled, it follows the rules defined in Security.

BYPASS ACCESS
This feature allows security authentication to be bypassed. Once this setting is anything other than Disabled, the
user gets Administrator access rights on the configured interface for the period of time when the SETPOINT
ACCESS setting is On. For example, if user configures BYPASS ACCESS as Local, then no user authentication is
needed to access the device over USB or HMI when SETPOINT ACCESS is On. Another option is to configure
BYPASS ACCESS as HMI only - enabling the user to view and modify all settings, view actual values or execute
commands. The use of this feature should be restricted only in commissioning phase or when it is considered safe.

SETPOINT ACCESS
This setting is only available to Administrator. It is used for the purpose of bypassing security. It can be either
switched on or assigned to a digital input. If assigned to a digital input, the digital input needs to be activated
through a physical key.

Note:
If the maximum number of Viewer roles already logged in on the relay has been reached, you must log in on the Security
screen within one minute of making the connection otherwise your session is terminated.

FACTORY SERVICE MODE

When the factory service mode feature is enabled, the device may go into factory service mode. The default value
is Disabled.

REQUIRE PW FOR RESET KEY

This setting is only available to the Administrator. The Require PW for Reset Key is used for the purpose of
bypassing security. If this setting is Enabled and an alarm or trip occurs on the relay, the Reset button is not
available to the Operator. Only the Administrator can reset the relay with their password.

REQUIRE PW FOR D/T CHANGE

The date/time can be set by any role, if this setting is disabled. If this setting is enabled the date/time can only be
set by the Administrator.

1601-0450 155
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

REQUIRE PW FOR CONTROL

If this setting is disabled, Operator controls do not require a password. If this setting is Enabled, an Operator
password is required. By default Require PW for Control is Enabled.

5.5.2 CYBERSENTRY
The following features are supported in the CyberSentry feature:
● CyberSentry provides secure tunneling of MODBUS communications between itself and the EnerVista setup
software, using SSH.
● All the roles supported in the Basic Security are supported.
● Server authentication using RADIUS is added.

SECURITY SETTINGS STRUCTURE

The figure below shows the location of the Security settings in the device display hierarchy.

156 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

< L'  ' K L>

< L' =E'
' K L>
=E
G (( <((
 ' <((
= > ?   @  (
<(( =
<(( = A>
<(( 
A ((B>  C 
   

 "#$%&#    ?   J K>
    
AD (E FA <>>((
D (E FA <>>((
(E A H I
AD  > ( FA <>>((
D  > ( FA <>>((
 > ( < LD A
MNOPQRN ST UVR MNWNX YNZ
[.\]25. 7^ _65 `ab )*+,-.

HB A ((B>
)*+,-. /012,2345+465
 ' '( 7+338650
'@ A ((B>
HB A ((B>
)*+,-. 9:.5+465
7+338650
'@ A ((B>

      !  ;

Figure 73: Security Settings Structure

SECURITY SETTINGS

AUTHENTICATION METHOD
Range: Device, Server/Device, Device/Server
Default: Device/Server
The AUTHENTICATION METHOD setting allows user to configure the priority for authentication method for each
authentication attempt. If user selects Device Authentication, then only Local authentication will be utilized. The
relay will not communicate with RADIUS server for authentication. When user selects Server/Device
Authentication then the relay will first connect with remote RADIUS server for authentication but if that is not
reachable then it will authenticate user based on local database of credentials. If Device/Server
authentication is selected, then priority for authentication will be given to device credentials database driven. If
that fails, then the relay will try to connect to remote RADIUS server for authentication.

1601-0450 157
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

LOGIN
Range: Administrator, Engineer, Operator, Viewer
Default: Viewer
The setting allows a user to login with a specific role.
Whenever a new role is logged in, the user is prompted to enter a password. If the wrong password is entered,
an Authentication Failed! message is displayed. If the maximum failed authentications occur, the Account
Blocked! message is displayed. Viewer is the default and it does not require a password.

LOGOUT
Range: Yes, No
Default: No
This setting logs out the current user. When logging out from the panel, a switch to the Viewer role is performed.

DEVICE AUTHENTICATION
Range: Yes, No
Default: Yes
Device authentication setting offers the option to disable or enable this type of authentication. By default device
authentication is on, but the option to turn it off is provided and may be chosen when a RADIUS server is
accessible and will be used exclusively.
Only an Administrator role may change this setting. If an Administrator disables it, the role remains logged in, but
it is not allowed to write any other settings. In Enervista, a popup window warns that such changes are not going
to be saved.
If device authentication is disabled, Enervista still displays both radio buttons for choosing between device and
server authentication. See the EnerVista Setup section below. However the drop down menu, when local is
selected, has only the Administrator option. Once logged in, this role is only able to switch on device
authentication. After switching on the device authentication, the Administrator gains write access to all the other
settings without the need to logout and login again.

LOAD FACTORY DEFAULTS

Range: Yes, No
Default: No
An Administrator role is able to change this setting. This resets all the settings, communication and security
passwords, and all records.

ACCESS LOCKOUT
Range: 0-99
Default: 3
This is the set number of failed authentications before the device blocks subsequent authentication attempts for
the lockout period. A value of 0 means that Access Lockout is disabled.

ACCESS LOCKOUT PERIOD

Range: 0-9999 minutes

158 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

Default: 3 minutes
This is the set period of time in minutes of a lockout. A value of 0 means that there is no lockout period.

Note:
The lockout period is measured from the moment the maximum number of failed authentications has been reached.
Additional attempts to login during the lockout period do not extend this time.

ACCESS TIMEOUT
Range: 2-999 minutes
Default: 5 minutes
This is the time of idleness before a logged in user is automatically logged out. The Access Timeout setting
applies to all users, independent of the communication channel (serial, Ethernet or direct access).

ENABLE PASSWORD COMPLEXITY

Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting is available to provide the option of selecting between simple passwords and complex ones. It is
only available to the Administrator role.The default password is ChangeMe1# When password complexity is
enabled, it follows the rules defined in Security.

SYSLOG PRIMARY IP ADDRESS

Range: 0.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.254
Default: 0.0.0.0
This is the Primary IP address of the target Syslog server all security events are transmitted to.

SYSLOG SECONDARY IP ADDRESS

Range: 0.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.254
Default: 0.0.0.0
This is the Secondary IP address of the target Syslog server all security events are transmitted to.

SYSLOG PORT NUMBER

Range: 1 to 65535
Default: 514
This sets the UDP port number of the target Syslog server all security events are transmitted to.

SETPOINT ACCESS
Range: Off, On, Digital Input
Default: Off
This setting is only available to the Administrator role. Setpoint Access may be assigned to a digital input.
When the digital input is activated, the user has Administrator access to the front panel.

1601-0450 159
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

FACTORY SERVICE MODE

Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
When the feature is Enabled, the Factory role is accessible and the device can enter factory service mode.The
setting may be changed only by an Administrator.

Note:
The factory role password cannot be altered.

REQUIRE PW FOR RESET KEY

Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
If this setting is Enabled and an alarm or trip occurs on the relay, the Reset button is not available to the
Operator. Only the Administrator can reset the relay with their password.

REQUIRE PW FOR D/T CHANGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
The date/time can be set by any role, if this setting is disabled. If this setting is enabled the date/time can only be
set by an Administrator.

CHANGE PASSWORD SETTINGS

The two menu items: Change Administrator Password, and Change Observer Password are available only to
Administrator, which is the only role that has permissions to change passwords for itself and the other local roles.
Each password change menu has two settings: New Password and Confirm Password. With Enable Password
Complexity enabled, each setting can have 6 to 20 alphanumeric characters. With Enable Password Complexity
disabled, each setting takes 1 to 20 alphanumeric characters.
If Enable Password Complexity is enabled, its rules must be obeyed. The default password is 0. The Viewer role
does not have a password associated with it, so there is no need to show it in the list of password changing roles.

ENERVISTA SETUP
For the software setup the following applies:
● Some security settings (such as Radius configuration) are only accessible and configurable through the
Enervista program.
● The Enervista software only allows for changes that are permitted by the user’s logged in role. For example,
the Observer role cannot write to any settings, but can only view.

160 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

● If the settings file is modified off line, the relay checks for the role of the user and allows the download only if
the role is Administrator (see table below). If the role is different, Enervista notifies the user via a pop-up
window that this operation is allowed only for Administrators.
● The Enervista Login Screen has two radio buttons to choose between device and server authentication.
○ If server authentication is chosen, the screen provides User Name: and Password: fields
○ If device authentication is chosen the User Name: field changes to a drop down menu. If device
authentication is enabled internally, the drop down menu contains all predefined roles. If device
authentication is disabled, the drop down menu has only the Administrator option. This is to allow for
switching on the device authentication. Once logged in, the Administrator is only able to turn on the
device authentication, but once the device authentication is enabled, access to all the other settings is
granted.
● A file download may be performed only from the relay.
Role
File Access Administrator Engineer Operator Viewer
Read (Download from 8 Series All files Yes Yes Yes Yes
869)
Write (Upload to 8 Series 869) Settings file Yes No No No
Firmware Yes No No No

Note:
In special cases security settings, such as RADIUS IP address and port, if modified offline, can result in interruption of service
when applied online, if the user is not aware of the change having been made. For this reason, if these settings have been
modified, offline, they will not be written during the file write operation.

RADIUS SETTINGS
The following are settings that need to be configured through Enervista in order to set up communication with two
RADIUS servers. For configuring the RADIUS server itself, consult the RADIUS documentation. An example is
provided, see Communications Guide.
Setting Name Description Range Default Units Minimum
Permissions
Primary Radius IP IP address of primary Radius 0.0.0.0 to 0.0.0.0 - Administrator
Address server. Default value indicates no 223.255.255.254
Primary Radius server is
configured, and so Radius is
disabled.
Secondary Radius IP address of primary Radius 0.0.0.0 to 0.0.0.0 - Administrator
IP Address server. Default value indicates no 223.255.255.254
Secondary Radius server is
configured, and so Radius is
disabled.
Primary Radius authentication port 1 to 65535 1812 - Administrator
Authentication Port
Vendor ID An identifier that specifies Radius 1 to 65535 Value that - Administrator
vendor specific attributes used represents General
with the protocol. Electric (2910)

1601-0450 161
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

Radius Authentication method used by PEAPv0, EAP- EAP-TTLS - Administrator

Authentication Radius server. Currently fixed to TTLS, PEAP, PAP
Method EAP-TTLS.
Timeout Timeout in seconds in between 0 to 9999 10 sec Administrator
re-transmission requests
Retries Number of retries before giving 0 to 9999 3 - Administrator
up
Radius Shared Secret used in See password N/A - Administrator
Authentication authentication. It is only displayed section for
(Shared) Secret as asterisks. This setting must requirements
meet the CyberSentry password
requirements.
Confirm Radius Confirmation of the shared See password N/A - Administrator
Authentication secret. Only display as asterisks. section for
(Shared) Secret requirements

SECURITY EVENTS
The event recorder records the events described in the following table.
Event Record Level Description
FAILED_AUTH, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP Warning (4) A failed authentication with time stamp in UTC time
when it occurred.
USER_LOCKOUT, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP: Error (3) The user lockout has occurred because of too many
failed authentication attempts.
SETTING_CHG, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP: Notice (5) An event to indicate setting change(s).
LOGIN, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP: Warning (4) An event to indicate when a certain role logged in.
MANUAL_LOGOUT, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP: Warning (4) An event to indicate when a certain role logged out or
timed out. Origin: Username and IP:MAC
TIMED_LOGOUT, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP: Warning (4) An event to indicate when a certain role logged out or
timed out. Origin: Username and IP:MAC
PRIM_RADIUS_UNREACH, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP: Critical (2) RADIUS server is unreachable. Origin: RADIUS server
IP address and port number.
SEC_RADIUS_UNREACH, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP: Critical (2) RADIUS server is unreachable. Origin: RADIUS server
IP address and port number.
CLEAR_EVENT_RECORDS, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP: Warning (4) Clear event records command was issued.
CLEAR_TRANSIENT_RECORDS, ORIGIN, Notice (5) Clear transient records command was issued.
TIMESTAMP:
BYPASS ACCESS ACTIVATED Critical (1) Bypass access has been activated.
BYPASS ACCESS DEACTIVATED Critical (1) Bypass access has been deactivated.
PRIM_SYSLOG_UNREACHABLE Critical (2) SYSLOG server is unreachable. Origin: SYSLOG
server IP address and port number
SEC_SYSLOG_UNREACHABLE Critical (2) SYSLOG server is unreachable. Origin: SYSLOG
server IP address and port number
MODBUS TCP Enabled Warning (4) Port 502 has been opened for Read/Write
MODBUS TCP Disabled Warning (4) Port 502 Closed
MODBUS TCP ReadOnly Warning (4) Port 502 has been opened for Read Only operations.

162 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

Firmware Upload Successful Notice (5) [IEEE 1686] requires audit logging for firmware related
aspects. A software is generic that includes also
firmware.

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
The following operands are added for CyberSentry.
CyberSentry FlexLogic Operand Description
AUTHENTICATION FAIL Operand set for Failed Authentication self test and alarm
UNAUTH SETTING CHANGE ATTEMPT Operand set for unauthorized setting change action
RADIUS SRV UNAVAILABLE Operand set for RADIUS servers unavailable self test

1601-0450 163
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

5.6 COMMUNICATIONS
8-series relays relays have a two-stage communications capability. The base CPU supports the Modbus protocol
through the Ethernet, USB and serial ports. In addition, the base CPU also supports the IEC 103, DNP serial, DNP
TCP/IP, Ethernet and TFTP protocol. Once the communications module option is added to the base, the
communications module supports IEC 61850 Ed.2. The communications CPU also supports Modbus TCP, DNP
TCP, TFTP, SFTP, and SNTP protocol.

5.6.1 GENERAL COMMUNICATIONS SETUP

Note:
The below settings are applied only to devices with IEC 61850 order codes.

MULTI-LEVEL CONTROL
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
When set to Enabled, control authority from multiple levels (Bay, Station and Remote) are allowed
simultaneously, based on Local/Remote status and status authority status. Otherwise only one level has the
authority to control, based on Local/Remote status and status authority status.

IED LOCAL STATUS

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This selects an operand that indicates whether the IED is in Local or Remote mode. When the operand value is
set, the IED is in Local mode and any commands from remote protocols (IEC 61850, DNP3, IEC 104 or 103,
Modbus) are rejected.

5.6.2 MODBUS PROTOCOL

All Ethernet ports and serial communication ports support the Modbus protocol. The only exception is if the serial
port has been configured for DNP or IEC 60870-5-103 operation (see descriptions below). This allows the EnerVista
D&I Setup software (which is a Modbus master application) to communicate with the relay.
The relay implements a subset of the Modicon Modbus RTU serial communication standard. The Modbus protocol
is hardware-independent. That is, the physical layer can be any of a variety of standard hardware configurations.
This includes USB, RS485, fiber optics, etc. Modbus is a single master / multiple slave type of protocol suitable for a
multi-drop configuration.
The relay is always a Modbus slave with a valid slave address range 1 to 254.

DATA FRAME FORMAT AND DATA RATE

One data frame of an asynchronous transmission to or from a relay typically consists of 1 start bit, 8 data bits, and 1
stop bit. This produces a 10-bit data frame. This is important for transmission through modems at high bit rates.
Modbus protocol can be implemented at any standard communication speed. The relay supports operation at 9600,
19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 bps baud rate. The USB interface supports ModBus TCP/IP.

164 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

FUNCTION CODE SUPPORTED

The following functions are supported:
● FUNCTION CODE 03H - Read Setpoints
● FUNCTION CODE 04H - Read Actual Values
● FUNCTION CODE 05H - Execute Operation
● FUNCTION CODE 06H - Store Single Setpoint
● FUNCTION CODE 07H - Read Device Status
● FUNCTION CODE 08H - Loopback Test
● FUNCTION CODE 10H - Store Multiple Setpoints
● FUNCTION CODE 42H - Group Settings Read
● FUNCTION CODE 43H - Group Settings Write
When a ModBus master such as the EnerVista D&I Setup software communicates with the relay over Ethernet, the
relay slave address, TCP port number and IP address for the associated port must be configured and are also
configured within the Master for this device. The default ModBus TCP port number is 502.

5.6.3 MODBUS CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS

The following ModBus parameters are configurable:
Path:Setpoints > Device > Communications > Modbus Protocol

MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS

Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1
Default: 254
For the RS485 ports each 8 Series 869 must have a unique address from 1 to 254. Address 0 is the broadcast
address to which all Modbus slave devices listen. Addresses do not have to be sequential, but no two devices
can have the same address, otherwise conflicts resulting in errors occur. Generally, each device added to the
link uses the next higher address starting at 1.

MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER

Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
Default: 502
The TCP port number used with Modbus over Ethernet. Note that the maximum number of simultaneous
Modbus connections supported over Ethernet is three for an 8 Series 869 without the communications card and
five for an 8 Series 869 with the communications card.

COMPATIBILITY
Range: Disabled, SR750, FlexMap
Default: Disabled
Compatibility mode changes the Modbus actual value registers to emulate an SR750 or SR735 relay. The
emulation supports typical actual value data for common data items.
Starting in version 2.90, choose FlexMap for SR750 support to include support for additional SR750 registers.
See the 8 Series Protective Relay Communications guide for the list.

1601-0450 165
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

Note:
When in compatibility mode the rear RS485 port and the rear Ethernet ports are not accessible via EnerVista D&I Setup
software so it is not possible to change any settings, view actual values or retrieve records. When in compatibility mode the
actual values supported can be read via the rear RS485 or rear Ethernet Ports using Modbus Master e.g. PLC or DCS. The
front USB port should be used for connection and EnerVista D&I Setup software activities.

FLEXMAP FILE
Range: Up to 13 alphanumeric characters
Default: SR735XA290.000 or SR750XA290.000
The Flexmap File describes the translation from the Multilin Modbus memory map to the target Modbus memory
map.
For SR750 support enter the filename SR750XA290.000.
For SR735 support enter the filename SR735XA290.000.

MODBUS 485 READ ACTUALS

Range: Function Code 03h, Function Code 04h
Default: Function Code 04h
The Modbus 485 Read Actuals setting configures the Function Code that the relay responds to from a Modbus
Master when Actual Values are requested. Use this setting in scenarios where the Modbus Master can only
communicate using Function Code 03h for requesting Actual Values.

Note:
This setting applies only to the RS485 connection.
When this setting is changed to Function Code 03h, retrieving configuration settings through the RS485 port is not possible.

MODBUS ACTIVITY TIMEOUT

Range: 0 to 3600 s in steps of 1 s
Default: 0 s
The Modbus Activity Timeout specifies the minimum time without Modbus communication. This timeout is
used to declare the Modbus Loss of Communication state.
The Modbus state is always Active if the Modbus Activity Timeout is 0 s.

MODBUS ERROR RESPONSES

The following exception response codes are implemented.
Error ID Exception Description
01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION The function code transmitted is not one of the functions supported by the 8
Series 869.
02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS The address referenced in the data field transmitted by the master is not an
allowable address for the 8 Series 869.
03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE The value referenced in the data field transmitted by the master is not within
range for the selected data address.

166 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

5.6.4 RS485
On the rear, the relay is equipped with two RS485 serial communication ports. The RS485 port has settings for
baud rate and parity. It is important that these parameters agree with the settings used on the computer or other
equipment connected to this port. A maximum of 32 relays can be daisy-chained and connected to a DCS, PLC or a
PC using the RS485 port.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Communications > RS485

BAUD RATE
Range: 2400, 4800, 9600, 1200, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200
Default: 115200

PARITY
Range: None, Odd, Even
Default: None

PORT PROTOCOL
Range: Modbus, DNP 3.0, IEC 60870-5-103
Default: Modbus

5.6.5 USB
The USB parameters are as follows:
IP Address: 172.16.0.2
IP Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
IP GWY IP Address: 172.16.0.1

Note:
Whenever the device is rebooted, the USB cable needs to be unplugged and plugged in again for proper communication to be
established over USB.

Connecting multiple relays over USB to a single PC is not possible because in the case of USB, the IP address of
the device 172.16.0.2 is constant.

5.6.6 ETHERNET PORTS

The following communication offerings are available.

Base Offering
● 2x Copper (RJ45) Ports
● Modes: 10/100 Mbps
● Protocols: Modbus TCP, DNP 3.0, IEC 61850 GOOSE, SNTP, IEC 62439-3 clause 4 (PRP)

1601-0450 167
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

Advanced Offering
● 4x Copper (RJ45) Ports or 2x Fiber
● Modes: 10/100 Mbps (copper)
● 100Mbps (Fiber)
● Protocols: Modbus TCP, DNP 3.0, IEC 61850 GOOSE, SNTP, IEC 62439-3 clause 4 (PRP)

5.6.6.1 NETWORK SETTINGS MENU

This section describes the network settings menu. If the communications card is installed network port 1 is no
longer available. When using more than one Ethernet port, configure each to belong to a different network or subnet
using the IP addresses and mask, else communication becomes unpredictable when more than one port is
configured to the same subnet.

Note:
Use the softkeys and Down/Up key to enter an IP address. When entering an IP address you must press the BACK key first
to switch between softkey mode and the Down/Up key mode.

NETWORK 1, 2, 4, 5
Range: Standard IPV4 Address format
Default: 192.168.11.11 (Port 1)
Default: 192.168.11.12 (Port 2)
Default: 192.168.11.13 (Port 4)
Default: 192.168.11.14 (Port 5)

The setting sets the port’s IPV4 address in standard IPV4 format.

Note:
The setting is valid on Port 2(5) if Prt1(4) is set to Independent

Note:
The setting is valid on Port 2 if Prt1 Operation is set to Independent.

Note:
172.17.X.X/16 and 172.18.X.X/16 are reserved IPs.

PRT1(1,2,4,5) SUBNET IP MASK

Range: Standard IPV4 mask format
Default: 255.255.255.0 (Port 1, 2, 4, 5)
This setting specifies the IPv4 mask associated with the corresponding port IP address.

168 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

PRT1 OPERATION
Range: Independent, LLA, PRP
Default: Independent
This setting determines the mode of operation for ports 1 and 2: Independent, LLA or PRP.
Independent operation: Ports 1, 2, 4 and 5 operate independently with their own MAC and IP address.
LLA operation: Ports 1, 2, 4 and 5 use port 1’s MAC and IP address settings while port 2 is in standby mode in
that it does not actively communicate on the Ethernet network but monitors its link. If port 1 is active and the link
loss problem is detected, communications is switched to port 2 immediately. Port 2 is, in effect, acting as a
redundant or backup link to the network for port 1.
LLA (Link Loss Alert): is a proprietary feature supported by the fiber optic ports. When enabled, this feature is
able to detect a failure of the fiber link. If Prt1 Operation is set to LLA, the detection of a link failure by this
feature triggers the transfer of communications. If LLA is enabled on a port with a non-fiber SFP, the target
message LLA not supported by Prt (1 or 2) is displayed on the keypad and an event is logged.

Note:
LLA is not available on port 4,5 copper (RJ45). When the port operation is selected, the relay requires a reboot for the setting
to be applied.

Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) operation: Ports 1 and 2 use the same MAC address and combine
information at the link layer. It is intended to only be used if the two ports are connected to separate parallel
LAN’s. In this mode of operation, both ports cannot be connected to the same LAN. The receiving devices (8
Series 869) process the first frame received and discard the duplicate through a link redundancy entity (LRE) or
similar service that operates below layer 2. Aside from LRE, PRP uses conventional Ethernet hardware but both
ports must know they are in PRP. Ports of PRP devices operating with the same Internet Protocol (IP) addresses
for traffic that uses IP Management protocols such as Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) must operate
correctly.
Duplicate Discard mode: This is the normal setting for PRP operation and once set it allows the sender LRE to
append a six-octet field that contains a sequence number, the Redundancy Control Trailer (RCT) to both frames
it sends. The receiver LRE uses the sequence number of the RCT and the source MAC address to detect
duplicates. It forwards only the first frame of a pair to its upper layers.

Note:
NOTE: redundancy operations work in pairs Port1/2 and Port4/5 only. It is not interchangeable between all ports.

5.6.7 ROUTING
When the configuration card is present, a default route and a maximum number of 6 static routes can be configured.
The default route is used as the last choice, if no other route towards a given destination is found.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Communications > Routing > Default Route

GATEWAY ADDRESS
Range: Standard IPV4 unicast address format (0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254)
Default: 127.0.0.1

1601-0450 169
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

This setting sets the gateway of the default route to be used by IP traffic sent from the relay, if no other route
towards a given IP destination is found.
This setting is available only if the communications card is present.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Communications > Routing > Static RT1 (2 to 6)

RT1 (2,3,4,5,6) DESTINATION

Range: Standard IPV4 network address format (0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254)
Default: 127.0.0.1
This setting sets the destination IPv4 route. This setting is available only if the communications card is present.

RT1 (2,3,4,5,6) MASK

Range: Standard IPV4 network mask format
Default: 255.0.0.0
This setting sets the IP mask associated with the route. This setting is available only if the communications card
is present.

RT1 (2,3,4,5,6) GATEWAY

Range: Standard IPV4 unicast address format (0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254)
Default: 127.0.0.1
This setting sets the destination IP route. This setting is available only if the communications card is present.

RULES FOR ADDING AND DELETING STATIC ROUTES

1. By default, the value of the destination field is 127.0.0.1 for all static routes (1 to 6). This is equivalent to
saying that the static routes are not configured. When the destination address is 127.0.0.1, the mask and
gateway must also be kept as default values.
2. By default, the value of the default route gateway address is 127.0.0.1. This means the default route is not
configured.
3. Use any of the static network route entries numbered 1 to 6 to configure a static network route. Once a route
destination is configured for any of the entries 1 to 6, that entry becomes a static route and it must meet all
the rules listed in Important Notes below.

170 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

4. To configure the default route, enter a default gateway address. A default gateway address configured must
be validated against Rule #5, the next rule.
5. Routes are deleted by replacing the route destination with the default address (127.0.0.1). When deleting a
route, the mask and gateway must also be put back to their default values.
6. The default route is deleted by replacing the default gateway with the default value 127.0.0.1.

Note:
Host routes are not supported at present.
The route mask has IPv4 mask format. In binary this is a set of contiguous bits of 1 from left to right, followed by one or more
contiguous bits of 0.
The route destination and mask must match. This can be verified by checking that RtDestination & RtMask == RtDestination
This is an example of a good configuration: RtDestination= 10.1.1.0; Rt Mask= 255.255.255.0
This is an example of a bad configuration: RtDestination = 10.1.1.1; Rt Mask= 255.255.255.0
The route destination must not be a connected network.
The route gateway must be on a connected network. This rule applies to the gateway address of the default route as well.
This can be verified by checking that: RtGwy & Prt4Mask) == (Prt4IP & Prt4Mask) || (RtGwy & Prt5Mask) == (Prt5IP &
Prt5Mask)

TARGETS
Wrong Route Config
Description: A route with mismatched destination and mask has been configured.
Message: Wrong route configuration.
Solution: Rectify the IP address and mask of the mis-configured route.

TOPOLOGY

Figure 74: Topology Example

In the topology example above, the Multilin device is connected through the two Ethernet ports available on the
communications card.

1601-0450 171
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

Port1 (IP address 10.1.1.2) connects to LAN 10.1.1.0/24 and to the Internet through Router1. Router 1 has an
interface on 10.1.1.0/24 and the IP address of this interface is 10.1.1.1.
Port2 (IP address 10.1.2.2) connects to LAN 10.1.2.0/24 and to EnerVista D&I Setup software through Router 2.
Router 2 has an interface on 10.1.2.0/24 and the IP address of this interface is 10.1.2.1.
Configuration
Network addresses:
PRT21IP ADDRESS = 10.1.1.2PRT1 SUBNET IP MASK = 255.255.255.0PRT2 IP ADDRESS = 10.1.2.2PRT2
SUBNET IP MASK = 255.255.255.0
Routing Settings:
IPV4 DEFAULT ROUTE: GATEWAY ADDRESS = 10.1.1.1
STATIC NETWORK ROUTE 1: RT1 DESTINATION = 10.1.3.0/24RT1 NET MASK = 255.255.255.0RT1
GATEWAY = 10.1.2.1
Behavior:
One static network route was added to the destination 10.1.3.0/24, where a laptop running Enervista is located.
This static route uses a different gateway (10.1.2.1) than the default route. This gateway is the address of Router
2, which is aware of destination 10.1.3.0 and is able to route packets coming from the device and destined to
Enervista.

5.6.8 DNP PROTOCOL SETTINGS

Path: Setpoints > Device > Communications > DNP protocol

DNP Channel 1(2) Port

Range: None, Network - TCP, Network - UDP
Default: None
The DNP Channel 1 Port and DNP Channel 2 Port settings select the communications port assigned to the
DNP protocol for each channel. When set to Network - TCP, the DNP protocol can be used over TCP/IP on
channels 1 or 2. When set to Network - UDP, the DNP protocol can be used over UDP/IP.

DNP Address
Range: 0 to 65519 in steps of 1
Default: 65519
The DNP address sets the DNP slave address. This number identifies the device on a DNP communications
link. Each DNP slave must be assigned a unique address.

DNP Client Address 1(2)

Range: standard IP address
Default: 0.0.0.0
The DNP Client Address settings can force the device to respond to a maximum of two specific DNP masters.

DNP TCP/UDP Port 1(2)

Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

172 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

Default: 2000

Note:
DNP Channel 1 Port will take the DNP TCP/UDP Port 1 and DNP Client Address 1 to allow/reject connections. The same
relation is used by channel 2.

DNP Unsol Resp Function

Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
This setting will take effect for Ethernet communication only if the main card is present or a comms card is
available in the device. This setting enables/disables the unsolicited response functionality. It is disabled for
RS485 applications since there is no collision avoidance mechanism.

DNP Unsol Resp Timeout

Range: 0 to 60 s in steps of 1
Default: 5 s
Sets the time the relay waits for a DNP master to confirm an unsolicited response.

Unsol Resp Max Retries

Range: 1 to 255 in steps of 1
Default: 10
Sets the number of times the device retransmits an unsolicited response without receiving confirmation from the
master; a value of 255 allows infinite re-tries.

Unsol Resp At Startup (F/W version 4.00 onwards)

Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
When relay is rebooting, unsolicited responses work without an Enable message needed, but this is only
possible once the Master resets the communications with the relay. This happens with both Reset Link or Class
1 request messages.

DNP Unsol Resp Dest Addr

Range: 1 to 65519 in steps of 1
Default: 1
Sets the DNP address to which all unsolicited responses are sent. The IP address to which unsolicited
responses are sent is determined by the device from the current TCP connection or the most recent UDP
message.

DNP Time Sync IIN Period

Range: 1 to 10080 min. in steps of 1
Default: 1440 min

1601-0450 173
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

This setting determines how often the Need Time Internal Indication (IIN) bit is set by the device. Changing this
time allows the DNP master to send time synchronization commands more or less often, as required.

Note:
If the requirement for synchronization is more than a couple of seconds, consider synchronization via other means such as
IRIG-B or 1588. Given network asymmetry, the consistency of the network latency, clock drift, and additional delays due to
routers located between the client and the device all contribute error.

DNP Message Fragment Size

Range: 30 to 2048 in steps of 1
Default: 240
This setting determines the size, in bytes, at which message fragmentation occurs. Large fragment sizes allow
for more efficient throughput; smaller fragment sizes cause more application layer confirmations to be necessary
which can provide for more robust data transfer over noisy communication channels.

DNP OBJECT 1(32) Default Variation

These settings allow selection of the DNP default variation number for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and
32. The default variation refers to the variation response when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or
3 scans.

TCP Connection Timeout

Range: 10 to 300 s in steps of 1
Default: 120 s
This setting specifies a time delay for the detection of dead network TCP connections. If there is no data traffic
on a DNP TCP connection for greater than the time specified by this setting, the connection will be aborted.. This
frees up the connection to be re-used by a client.
The menu path for the DNP/IEC104 point lists is shown below.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Communications > DNP/IEC104 Point Lists
Binary Input/MSP Points
Analog Input/MME Points
Binary Outp/CSC/CDC Pnts

Binary input points (DNP) or MSP points (IEC 60870-5-104)

You can configure the binary inputs points for the DNP protocol, or the MSP points for IEC 60870-5-104 protocol to
a maximum of 96 points. The data source for each point is user-programmable and can be configured by assigning
FlexLogic operands. For a complete list, see Format Code FC142.
The menu path for the binary input points (DNP) or MSP points (IEC 60870-5-104) is shown below.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Communications > DNP/IEC104 Point Lists > Binary Input/MSP Points
Point 0 Entry
...
Point 255 Entry

174 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

Analog input points (DNP) or MME points (IEC 60870-5-104)

You can configure up to 255 analog input points for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The menu path for the
analog input point (DNP) or MME points (IEC 60870-5-104) is shown below.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Communications > DNP/IEC104 Point Lists > Analog Input / MME Points
Analog IP Point 0 Entry
Point 0 Scale Factor
Point 0 Deadband

DNP ANALOG INPUT POINT 0(255) SCALE FACTOR

Range: / 0.001, / 0.01, / 0.1, / 1, / 10, / 100, / 1000, / 10000, / 100000
Default: /1
These are numbers used to scale analog input point values. Each setting represents the scale factor for the
analog input point. For example, if the DNP PHASE A VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR setting is set to / 1000,
and the Phase A voltage is 72000 V, the Phase A voltage sent on to the relay is 72 V. The settings are useful
when analog input values must be adjusted to fit within certain ranges in DNP masters.

Note:
A scale factor of / 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10.

DNP ANALOG INPUT POINT 0(255) DEADBAND

Range: 1 to 100000000 in steps of 1
Default: 30000
The setting is the threshold value to define the condition to trigger unsolicited responses containing analog input
data. Each setting represents the default deadband value for the associated analog input. For example, to
trigger unsolicited responses from the relay when phase A current changes by 15 A, the DNP Current Deadband
for Phase A current should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the deadband default values. DNP object
34 points can be used to change deadband values from the default for each individual DNP analog input point.
Whenever power is removed and re-applied, the new deadbands are in effect.

Binary output points (DNP) or CSC/CDC points (IEC 60870-5-104)

You can configure the binary output points for the DNP protocol, or the CSC/CDC points for IEC 60870-5-104
protocol to a maximum of 16 points. The data source for each point is user-programmable and can be configured by
assigning FlexLogic operands. The menu path for the binary output points (DNP) or CSC/CDC points (IEC
60870-5-104) is shown below.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Communications > DNP/IEC104 Point Lists > Binary Output / CSC/CDC Points
Binary Output Point 0 ON
Binary Output Point 0 OFF
...
Binary Output Point 31 ON
Binary Output Point 31 OFF

1601-0450 175
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

Note:
The DNP/IEC 60870-5-104 point lists always begin with point 0 and end at the first Off value. Since DNP / IEC 60870-5-104
point lists must be in one continuous block, any points assigned after the first Off point are ignored.

BINARY INPUT POINTS

The DNP binary input data points are configured through the DNP/IEC104 POINT LISTS BINARY INPUT/MSP
POINTS menu. When a freeze function is performed on a binary counter point, the frozen value is available in the
corresponding frozen counter point.
● Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
● Change Event Object Number: 2
● Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 22 (assign class)
● Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with status), Configurable
● Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time),
Configurable
● Change Event Scan Rate: 8 times per power system cycle
● Change Event Buffer Size: 1024
● Default Class for All Points: 1

POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION COUNTERS

The following details lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze
function is performed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter
point. Digital Counter values are represented as 16 or 32-bit integers. The DNP 3.0 protocol defines counters to be
unsigned integers. Care should be taken when interpreting negative counter values.

BINARY COUNTERS
● Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 20
● Change Event Object Number: 22
● Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze noack), 9 (freeze and clear), 10 (freeze
and clear, noack), 22 (assign class)
● Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Binary Counter with Flag)
● Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Counter Change Event without
time)
● Change Event Buffer Size: 10
● Default Class for all points: 3

FROZEN COUNTERS
● Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 21
● Change Event Object Number: 23
● Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
● Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter with Flag)
● Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Counter Change Event without
time)
● Change Event Buffer Size: 10
● Default Class for all points: 3

176 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

BINARY AND FROZEN COUNTERS POINT INDEX NAME/DESCRIPTION

● 0 Digital Counter 1
● 1 Digital Counter 2
● 2 Digital Counter 3
● 3 Digital Counter 4
● 4 Digital Counter 5
● 5 Digital Counter 6
● 6 Digital Counter 7
● 7 Digital Counter 8
● 8 Digital Counter 9
● 9 Digital Counter 10
● 10 Digital Counter 11
● 11 Digital Counter 12
● 12 Digital Counter 13
● 13 Digital Counter 14
● 14 Digital Counter 15
● 15 Digital Counter 16

ANALOG INPUTS
It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of analog inputs are transmitted through DNP as signed
numbers. Even for analog input points that are not valid as negative values, the maximum positive representation is
32767 for 16-bit values and 2147483647 for 32-bit values. This is a DNP requirement. The deadbands for all Analog
Input points are in the same units as the Analog Input quantity. For example, an Analog Input quantity measured in
volts has a corresponding deadband in units of volts. Relay settings are available to set default deadband values
according to data type. Deadbands for individual Analog Input Points can be set using DNP Object 34.
1. A default variation refers to the variation response when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3
scans. The default variations for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32 are selected via relay settings.
This optimizes the class 0 poll data size.
2. For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with
qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08,
are responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. For change event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts – the relay is not restarted, but the DNP process is
restarted.

5.6.9 IEC60870-5-104
The IEC 60870-5-104 communications protocol is supported on Ethernet ports 4 and 5 only. Setting changes
become active after rebooting.

Note:
Both DNP and IEC104 protocol can work at the same time, but consider that there is only one point map. So, the two
protocols use the same data mapping, i.e., same point index and same point source.
The relay supports up to two IEC104 client connections simultaneously.

Path: Setpoints > Device > Communications > IEC 60870-5-104

1601-0450 177
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

Channel 1 Port
Channel 2 Port
Common Address of ASDU
Client Address 1
Client Address 2
TCP Port Number 1
TCP Port Number 2
Cyclic Data Period
Object Info Addrs Bnry
Object Info Addrs Analog
Object Info Addrs Countrs
Object Info Addrs Cmnd
Object Info Analog Param
By default the Object Information Address for the different data is as follows:
M_SP (Single Points) = 1000
M_ME (Measured value) = 2000
M_IT (Integrated Totals) = 3000
C_SC or C_DC (Single or Double Command) = 4000
P_ME_NB (Parameter of measured value) = 5000
Each Measured value has a Parameter of measured value (P_ME_NB) associated to its threshold.
The IEC 60870-5-104 Deadbands settings are used to determine when to trigger spontaneous responses
containing M_ME_NB_1 analog data. Each setting represents the threshold value for each M_ME_NB_1 analog
point.
For example, to trigger spontaneous responses when a current value changes by 15 A, the Analog Point xx
Deadband setting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the deadbands.
P_ME_NB_1 (parameter of measured value, scaled value) points can be used to change threshold values, from the
default, for each individual M_ME_NB_1 analog point. There are three ways to send the measurands to the Master
station. The measurands are part of the General Group and Group 2, so when a general interrogation or group 2
interrogation takes place all the measurands are included in the response. Also, there is a cyclic data period setting
where it is configured in the scan period to send the measurands to the Master. And the last way, is by sending
spontaneously when a deadband overflow takes place. The IEC104 Channels sub-menu information is shown
below.
Commands are executed over the Binary Outputs. The first 8 Binary Outputs are configured to receive Select/
Operate Commands and the next 8 Binary Outputs are configured to receive Direct Execute Commands.
The IEC104 CHANNEL 1 PORT and IEC104 CHANNEL 2 PORT settings select the communications port assigned
to the IEC104 protocol for each channel. When this setting is set to Network - TCP, the IEC104 protocol can be
used over TCP/IP on channels 1 or 2. The IEC104 NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS settings can force the relay to
respond to a maximum of two specific IEC104 masters which own the configured IP Addresses. The settings in this
sub-menu are shown below.

178 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

Note:
IEC104 CHANNEL 1 PORT takes the Port Number 1 and Client Address 1 to allow or reject connections. The same
method is used by channel 2.

GROUPS OF DATA
The data is organized into groups in order to provide values when the controlling station requests them by a general
or group interrogation.
Group 1 is set by the 96 Single Points (M_SP).
Group 2 is set by the 32 Measured values (M_ME).
Group 3 is set by the 32 Measured thresholds (P_ME).
These 96 Single Points and 32 Measured Values are also sent as a response to a General Interrogation.
The Integrated Totals (M_IT) has its own Counter Group 1, and it is sent as a response to a General Request
Counter.

5.6.10 IEC60870-5-103
The point map for the 103 is different from the one shared by the IEC104 and DNP protocols. IEC 60870-5-103
serial communications protocol is supported on the rear RS485 port only.
The DNP, IEC 103 and Modbus cannot be enabled simultaneously. Only one instance of DNP 3.0, IEC 103 or
Modbus can run on the RS485 serial port.
Path: SETPOINTS > DEVICE > COMMUNICATIONS > IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL

IEC103 Common ASDU Addrs

Range: 0 to 254 in steps of 1
Default: 0

IEC103 Sync Timeout

Range: 0 to 1440 minutes in steps of 1 min
Default: 0 min
All binary inputs are configured from FlexLogic operands. For a complete list, see Format Code FC142.

Note:
Pay attention when configuring the function type and information number of the different points, because they must be unique.
There is no mechanism in the EnerVista D&I Setup software or the front panel HMI to detect duplication of the information
index.
The IEC 60870-5-103 point lists always begin with point 0 and end at the first Off value. Since IEC 60870-5-103 point lists
must be in one continuous block, any points assigned after the first Off point are ignored.

5.6.11 IEC 61850

The optional communications processor supports both the IEC 61850 GOOSE and IEC 61850 MMS Server service
as per IEC 61850 standard Ed. 2. The GOOSE messaging service provides the ability for the relay to Publish/
Subscribe Digital Input and other element statuses and its Quality and Timestamp to/from other IEDs with
supporting GOOSE messaging service. Server support allows remote control center, RTU/Gateway, local HMI or

1601-0450 179
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

other client role devices access to the relay for monitoring and control. The configuration of IEC 61850 services is
accomplished using the EnerVista D&I Setup software.
The IEC 61850 Server (i.e. the relay) reports information to the IEC 61850 Client, such as the Local HMI, RTU and
Gateway. This information consists of logical device data, data sets, data control block, logical nodes and their data
attributes.
Appendix B lists the implementation details of IEC 61850, including the logical nodes and number of instances for
each that are supported..
Data Obj data attribute Type FC Name Description
PhyHealth ENS This physical device’s health
stVal ENUMERATED ST 3 when ANY MAJOR ERROR ==On; 2
when ANY MINOR ERROR==On; 1
otherwise

5.6.11.1 IEC61850 CONFIGURATOR

The relay supports the IEC 61850 protocol, which is an order code option.
The IEC 61850 configurator is found in both the online and offline section of the EnerVista D&I Setup software for
configuring the online and offline settings file respectively.

ONLINE SETTINGS FILE

Two options are available to configure the relay’s online settings file.
1. Configuration
○ Configure the device through the Device Setup or Quick connect screen.
○ The IEC 61850 Configurator item is displayed after Maintenance.

○ Launch the online IEC 61850 configurator screen, by double-clicking on IEC61850 Configurator.
○ Select the required settings from the different tab displays (in the configurator screen) to complete the
IEC 61850 configuration.
2. Online right-click option
○ Select any online relay and right click on the selected item. More options become available for
selection, as described below.
ADDITIONAL OPTIONS

180 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

Generate ICD file: The menu option generates a default ICD file with the respective order code option and saves
the file to the path selected previously.

Read Device Settings: The menu option reads all the settings from the relay by TFTP and creates a file with
extension *.CID. The created *.CID file consists of two sections. A private section where all non IEC 61850 settings
are available, and a public section in which IEC 61850 related settings are implemented.
When creating a CID file using a 3rd party ICT/SCL tool, ensure the following:
● The order code in the CID file must match the device order code if writing the CID file directly into the relay.
The Desc value in communication settings of the CID file must match the relay’s order code.
● The maximum allowed services must be equal or below the specified limits as in ICD/CID.
● Configure Datasets only in LLN0 logical node.
● Creating new LD, LN, and communication-AP settings is not recommended.

OFFLINE SETTINGS FILE

The Generate ICD File menu option generates a default ICD file with the respective order code option and saves
the file to the path selected previously.

1601-0450 181
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

IEC 61850 CONFIGURATOR DETAILS

The IEC61850 Configurator allows editing of all sections of the IEC 61850 CID and ICD file. No other operations
can be performed in the EnerVista D&I Setup software if the IEC61850 Configurator is open. Close the IEC 61850
session to perform other operations.

Note:
When the IEC 61850 configuration is saved while online, the DEVICE IN SERVICE state (Setpoints > Device > Installation)
switches to Not Ready for the duration of the upload. This ensures that all new settings are applied before the device is
operational.

The IEC61850 Configurator consists of five sections:

● ICD/CID
● Settings
● Reports
● GOOSE Reception
● GOOSE Transmission

5.6..1 REMOTE MODBUS DEVICE EDITOR

182 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

5.7 TRANSIENT RECORDER

The Transient Recorder contains waveforms captured at the same sampling rate as the other relay data at the point
of trigger. By default, data is captured for all AC current and voltage inputs available on the relay as ordered.
Transient record is generated upon change of state of at least one of the assigned triggers: Trigger Source,
Trigger on Any Pickup, Trigger on Any Operate, Trigger on Alarm, or Trigger on Trip.
The number of cycles captured in a single transient record varies based on the number of records, sample rate, and
the number of selected channels. There is a fixed amount of data storage for the Transient Recorder: the more data
captured, the less the number of cycles captured per record.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Transient Recorder

NUMBER OF RECORDS
Range: 1 to 16 in steps of 1
Default: 5
The selection from the range defines the desired number of records.

SAMPLES PER CYCLE

Range: 8/c, 16/c, 32/c, 64/c, 128/c
Default: 32/c
This setpoint provides a selection of samples-per-cycle for representing the waveform. The waveform records
can be viewed using the EnerVista D&I Setup software software.

TRIGGER MODE
Range: Overwrite, Protected
Default: Overwrite
When Overwrite setting is selected, the new records overwrite the old ones, meaning the relay will always
keep the newest records as per the selected number of records. In Protected mode, the relay will keep the
number of records corresponding to the selected number of records, without saving further records that are
beyond the selected number of records.

TRIGGER POSITION
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1%
Default: 20%
This setting indicates the location of the trigger with respect to the selected length of record. For example at 20%
selected trigger position, the length of each record will be split on 20% pre-trigger data, and 80% post-trigger
data.

TRIGGER SOURCE:
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The trigger source can be any digital input: an operand from the list of FlexLogic operands, a contact input, a
contact output, a virtual input or output, or a remote input or output.

1601-0450 183
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

TRIGGER ON ANY PICKUP

Range: On, Off
Default: Off
Selection of On enables triggering of the recorder upon pickup condition detected by any of the protection or
control elements.

TRIGGER ON ANY OPERATE

Range: On, Off
Default: Off
Selection of On enables triggering of the recorder upon operate state of any of the enabled protection or control
elements.

TRIGGER ON TRIP
Range: On, Off
Default: Off
Selecting the On setting enables triggering of the recorder when any of the protection elements configured as a
Trip function operates, or the state of the operand assigned to operate the #1 Trip output relay changes to
High.

TRIGGER ON ALARM
Range: On, Off
Default: Off
Selecting On setting enables triggering of the recorder when any of the protection elements configured as
Alarm, or Latched Alarm function operates, or the state of the operand assigned to trigger the Alarm LED
changes to High.

DIGITAL INPUT 1 to 64
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

ANALOG INPUT 1 to 16
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic analog parameter
Default: Off

Note:
A consecutive transient record cannot be triggered until the first record has been completed.

184 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

5.8 DATA LOGGER

The data logger samples and records up to 16 analog parameters at a configured rate. All data is stored in non-
volatile memory, where the information is retained upon a relay control power loss.
The data logger can be configured with a few channels over a long period of time, or with larger number of channels
for a shorter period of time. The relay automatically partitions the available memory between the channels in use.
The selection of the rate for logging data also affects the duration of recorded data. The data logger has longer
duration for sampling rates at longer periods of time (i.e. 1 minute, 30 minutes, 1 hour), as compared to sampling
rates at short periods (i.e. per cycle, or per second).
The recorded data can be downloaded to EnerVista D&I Setup software and displayed with parameters on the
vertical axis and time on the horizontal axis.

Note:
If data is not available for the entire duration of pre-trigger, the trigger position will be based on available pre-trigger.

Path: Setpoints > Device > Data Logger

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Continuous, Triggered
Default: Continuous
This setting configures the mode in which the data logger operates. When set to Continuous, the data logger
actively records any configured channels at the rate defined in the Data Logger Rate setting. The data logger is
idle in this mode if no channels are configured. When set to Triggered, the data logger begins to record any
configured channels at the instance of the rising edge of the trigger (FlexLogic operand). The data logger
ignores all subsequent triggers and continues to record data until the active record is full. Once the data logger is
full, capturing of data stops until it is cleared.
Clear Data Logger
Once the data logger is full, a Clear Data Logger command is required to clear the data logger record, before a
new record can be started. Performing the Clear Data Logger command also stops the current record and resets
the data logger to be ready for the next trigger. The Clear Data Logger command is located at Setpoints >
Records > Clear Records. The Data Logger Storage Capacity table below shows an example of the
dependency of the data logger storage capacity with respect to the selected number of channels, and the
selected rate (time interval) at which the logged values are taken. The Data Logger buffer space can be
monitored to produce an alarm when the logged data occupies 80% of the data logger storage space. Target
message, and operand Data Logger ALRM is generated at this time.

TRIGGER
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setting selects the signal used to trigger the start of a new data logger record. Any FlexLogic operand can
be used as a trigger source. The Triggered setting only applies when the Data Logger Function is set to
“Triggered”.

1601-0450 185
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

TRIGGER POSITION
Range: 0 to 50% steps of 1%
Default: 20%
This setpoint defines the percentage of buffer space that is used for recording pre-trigger samples.

DATA LOG FULL ALARM (4.10 onwards)

Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
This setpoint disables/enables the Data Logger Full event and target message.

RATE
Range: 1 cycle, 1 second, 30 seconds, 1 minute, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 6 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours, 24
hours
Default: 1 minute
This setting selects the time interval at which the actual value is recorded.

CHANNEL 1(16) SOURCE

Range: Off, Any FlexAnalog parameter
Default: Off
This setpoint selects the metering analog value that is to be recorded in Channel 1(16) of the data log. The
parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: the type of relay, the type and number of CT/VT
hardware installed, and the type and number of Analog Inputs hardware installed. Upon startup, the relay
automatically prepares the parameter list.

CHANNEL 1(16) MODE

Default: Sample
Range: Sample, Min, Max, Mean
This setpoint defines the type of sample to be logged in the data logger record with respect to the selected rate,
i.e the time interval selected under the setpoint Rate.
While enabled the Data Logger executes every protection pass and each of the four modes —Sample, Max,
Min or Mean. The FlexAnalog values are updated at protection-pass rate:
In Sample mode the data logger records the FlexAnalog value updated in the first protection-pass from the time
interval selected under setpoint Rate.
In Max mode the data logger records the maximum protection pass value of the selected FlexAnalog parameter
from all protection pass values from the time interval selected under setpoint Rate.
In Min mode the data logger records the minimum protection pass value of the selected FlexAnalog parameter
from all protection pass values from the time interval selected under setpoint Rate.
In Mean mode, the data logger records the average value among all the values at protection-pass rate, from the
time interval selected under setpoint Rate.
The mean (average) is calculated simply using the well known ratio between the sum of all the values and their
number over the time interval.

186 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

Figure 75: Data Logger Storage Capacity

1601-0450 187
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

5.9 FAULT REPORTS

The relay supports up to 15 fault reports. The trigger conditions and the analog quantities to be stored are entered
in this menu.
When enabled, this function monitors the pre-fault trigger. The pre-fault data are stored in the memory for
prospective creation of the fault report on the rising edge of the pre-fault trigger. The element waits for the fault
trigger as long as the pre-fault trigger is asserted, but not shorter than 1 second. When the fault trigger occurs, the
fault data is stored and the complete report is created. If the fault trigger does not occur within 1 second after the
pre-fault trigger drops out, the element resets and no record is created.
The user-programmable fault report contains a header with the following information:
● Relay model
● Device name
● Firmware revision
● Date and time of trigger
● Name of pre-fault trigger (FlexLogic operand)
● Name of Fault trigger (FlexLogic operand)
● Active setting group at the time of pre-fault trigger
● Active setting group at the time of fault trigger.
The fault report continues with the following information:
● All current and voltage phasors (one cycle after the fault trigger)
● Pre-fault values for all programmed analog channels (one cycle before pre-fault trigger)
● Fault values of all programmed analog channels (one cycle after the fault trigger)
Each Fault Report created can be saved as a text file using the Enervista software. The file names are numbered
sequentially to show which file is older than the other.
The trigger can be any FlexLogic operand, but in most applications it is expected to be the same operand, usually a
virtual output, that is used to drive an output relay to trip a breaker. A Fault Rpt Trig event is automatically created
when the report is triggered.
If a number of protection elements, such as overcurrent elements, are ORed to create a fault report trigger, the first
operation of any element causing the OR gate output to become high triggers the fault report. However, If other
elements operate during the fault and the first operated element has not been reset (the OR gate output is still
high), the fault report is not triggered again. Considering the reset time of protection elements, there is very little
chance that fault report can be triggered twice in this manner. As the fault report must capture a usable amount of
pre and post-fault data, it cannot be triggered faster than every 20 ms.
The fault report stores data, in non-volatile memory, pertinent to an event when triggered. Each fault report is stored
as a file to a maximum capacity of fifteen files. A sixteenth trigger overwrites the oldest file.
The Enervista software is required to view all captured data. The relay faceplate display can be used to view the
date and time of trigger, the fault type and the distance location of the fault.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Fault Report

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled

188 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

PRE-FAULT TRIGGER
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setpoint specifies the FlexLogic operand to capture the pre-fault data. The rising edge of this operand
stores one cycle-old data for subsequent reporting. The element waits for the fault trigger to actually create a
record as long as the operand selected as Pre-Fault Trigger is On. If the operand remains Off for 1 second, the
element resets and no record is created.

FAULT TRIGGER
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setpoint specifies the FlexLogic operand to capture the fault data. The rising edge of this operand stores the
data as fault data and results in a new report. The trigger (not the pre-fault trigger) controls the date and time of
the report. The distance to fault calculations are initiated by this signal.

ANALOG CHANNELS 1 to 32
These settings specify an actual value such as voltage or current magnitude, true RMS, phase angle, frequency,
temperature, etc., to be stored should the report be created. Up to 32 analog channels can be configured.

1601-0450 189
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

5.10 EVENT DATA

The Event Data feature stores 64 FlexAnalog quantities each time an event occurs. The relay is able to capture a
maximum of 1024 records. The Event Data behavior matches that of the Event Recorder. This is a Platform feature
and a Basic option so it has no dependencies.
There is no enabling or disabling of the feature. It is always on.
When changes are made to the Event Data settings, the Event data is cleared and the Snapshot.txt file is deleted.
The Event Record remains as is and is not cleared.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Event Data

PARAMETER 1 to 64
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog Parameter
Default: Off

190 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

5.11 FLEX STATES

The Flex State feature provides a mechanism where any of 256 selected FlexLogic operand states or any inputs
can be used for efficient monitoring.
The feature allows user-customized access to the FlexLogic operand states in the relay. The state bits are packed
so that 16 states may be read out in a single Modbus register. The state bits can be configured so that all of the
states which are of interest are available in a minimum number of Modbus registers.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Flex States

PARAMETER 1 (to 256)

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

1601-0450 191
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

5.12 FRONT PANEL

The relay provides an easy to use faceplate for menu navigation through five navigation pushbuttons and high
quality graphical display. Conveniently located on the panel is a group of seven pushbuttons for Up/Down value
selection, Enter, Home, Escape, Help, and Reset functions. The faceplate includes three programmable function
pushbuttons with LEDs.
The ten pushbutton membrane faceplate (available for 850 only for hardware versions A and B, and all models for
hardware version C) includes ten programmable function pushbuttons and twelve programmable LEDs.

Note:
The USB port on the Front Panel is intended for connection to a portable PC.

5.12.1 PROGRAMMABLE LEDS

Path: Setpoints > Device > Front panel >Programmable LEDs

LED “IN SERVICE”

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: In-Service
This setpoint requires assigning of FlexLogic operand to turn on the LED “In Service” This LED indicates that
control power is applied, all monitored inputs, outputs, and internal systems are OK, and that the device has
been programmed.

LED “TRIP”
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Any Trip
The setpoint requires a FlexLogic operand to be assigned in order to turn on the TRIP LED, when triggered. This
indicator always latches, and a reset command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.
The LED can be also triggered by the operation of a protection, control, or monitoring element with its function
selected as Trip.

LED “ALARM”
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Any Alarm
The setpoint requires a FlexLogic operand to be assigned in order to turn on the ALARM LED, when triggered.
The indicator is a self-reset indicator, unless it is initiated from a protection, control, or monitoring element whose
function is selected as Latched Alarm. Resetting the Latched Alarm LED is performed by initiating a Reset
command.

LED “PICKUP”
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Any Pickup

192 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

The setpoint requires a FlexLogic operand to be assigned in order to turn on the PICKUP LED , when triggered.
The indicator is a self-rest indicator and will turn off if the condition evolves into a fault or the measured
parameter drops below the pickup level.

LED x NAME
Range: Up to 13 alphanumeric characters
Default: LED 5
The setpoint is used to select the LED name by choosing up to 13 alphanumeric characters.

LED x COLOR
Range: Off, Red, Green, Orange
Default: Orange
The setpoint selects the color of the LED. Three colors are available for selection: Red, Green, and Orange.

Note:
This setting is not available for LEDs 18 to 24.

LED x TRIGGER
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operands
Default: Testing On
This setpoint requires the assigning of a FlexLogic operand to trigger the selected LED upon operation.

LED x TYPE
Range: Self-reset, Latched
Default: Testing On
The setpoint defines the type of LED indication as either Self-Reset (the LED resets after the FlexLogic
operand drops out), or Latched (the LED stays latched upon dropping out of the FlexLogic operand).

5.12.1.1 LED ALLOCATION TABLES

Default LED setpoints for 3 Pushbutton Front Panels

Name Color Trigger Type
LED1 In Service Green In-Service Self-Reset
LED2 Trip Red Any Trip Latched
LED3 Alarm Orange Any Alarm Self-Reset
LED4 Pickup Green Any Pickup Self-Reset
LED5 Test Mode Orange Testing ON Self-Reset
LED6 Message Orange Active Target Self-Reset
LED7 Local Mode Orange Local Mode ON Self-Reset
LED8 Stopped Green Motor Stopped Self-Reset
LED9 Starting Red Motor Starting Self-Reset

1601-0450 193
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

LED10 Running Green Motor Running Self-Reset

LED11 Overload Orange Motor Overload Self-Reset
LED12 Start Inhibit Orange Start Inhibit Self-Reset
LED13 Ground Fault Orange GndFault OP Self-Reset
LED14 Hot RTD Orange Hot RTD Self-Reset

Default LED setpoints for 10 Pushbutton Membrane Front Panel

Name Color Trigger Type
LED1 In Service Green In-Service Self-Reset
LED2 Trip Red Any Trip Latched
LED3 Alarm Orange Any Alarm Self-Reset
LED4 Pickup Green Any Pickup Self-Reset
LED5 Test Mode Orange Testing ON Self-Reset
LED6 Message Orange Active Target Self-Reset
LED7 Local Mode Orange Local Mode ON Self-Reset
LED8 Stopped Green Motor Stopped Self-Reset

LED9 Starting Red Motor Starting Self-Reset

LED10 Running Green Motor Running Self-Reset

LED11 Overload Orange Motor Overload Self-Reset

LED12 Start Inhibit Orange Start Inhibit Self-Reset

LED13 Not available Not available Not available Not available

LED 14 Not available Not available Not available Not available

LED 15 PB 1 Orange PB 1 On Self-Reset

LED16 PB 2 Orange PB 2 On Self-Reset

LED17 PB 3 Orange PB 3 On Self-Reset

LED18 PB 4 Orange PB 4 On Self-Reset

LED19 PB 5 Orange PB 5 On Self-Reset

LED20 PB 6 Orange PB 6 On Self-Reset

LED21 PB 7 Orange PB 7 On Self-Reset

LED22 PB 8 Orange PB 8 On Self-Reset

LED23 PB 9 Orange PB 9 On Self-Reset

LED24 PB 10 Orange PB 10 On Self-Reset

194 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

5.12.2 PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS

Note:
The 10 pushbutton panel is available only for the 850 for hardware versions A and B, and for all models from hardware
version C.

The user-programmable pushbuttons provide an easy and error-free method of entering digital state (on, off)
information. Depending on the faceplate three to ten pushbuttons are available for programming.
The digital state of the pushbuttons can be entered only locally (by directly pressing the front panel pushbutton).
Typical applications include breaker control, autorecloser blocking and settings groups changes. The user-
programmable pushbuttons are under the control level of password protection.

Figure 76: 3 Pushbutton Front Panel

1601-0450 195
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

Figure 77: 10 Pushbutton Front Panel

Each pushbutton asserts its own on and off FlexLogic operands (for example, PUSHBUTTON 1 ON and
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF). These operands are available for each pushbutton and are used to program specific
actions. Each pushbutton has an associated LED indicator. By default, this indicator displays the present status of
the corresponding pushbutton; ON or OFF. This can be changed by programming the LED Trigger setting in the
Programmable LED settings menu.
The activation and deactivation of user-programmable pushbuttons is dependent on whether latched or self-reset
mode is programmed.

LATCHED MODE
In Latched Mode, a pushbutton can be set (activated) by directly pressing the associated front panel pushbutton.
The pushbutton maintains the set state until deactivated by a Reset command or after a user-specified time delay.
The state of each pushbutton is stored in non-volatile memory and maintained through loss of control power.

196 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

The pushbutton is Reset (deactivated) in Latched Mode by directly pressing the associated active front panel
pushbutton. It can also be programmed to Reset automatically through the PB 1 AUTORESET and PB 1
AUTORESET DELAY settings. These settings enable the auto-reset timer and specify the associated time delay.
The auto-reset timer can be used in select-before-operate (SBO) switching device control applications, where the
command type (CLOSE/OPEN) must be selected prior to command execution. The selection must Reset
automatically if control is not executed within a specified time period.

SELF-RESET MODE
In Self-reset mode, a pushbutton remains active for the time it is pressed (the pulse duration) plus the Dropout time
specified in the PUSHBTN 1 DROPOUT TIME setting. The pushbutton is Reset (deactivated) in Self-reset mode
when the dropout delay specified in the PUSHBTN 1 DROPOUT TIME setting expires.The pulse duration of the
pushbutton must be at least 50 ms to operate the pushbutton. This allows the user-programmable pushbuttons to
properly operate during power cycling events and various system disturbances that may cause transient assertion
of the operating signals.
The operation of each user-programmable pushbutton can be inhibited through the PUSHBTN 1 LOCK setting. If
locking is applied, the pushbutton ignores the commands executed through the front panel pushbuttons. The locking
functions are not applied to the auto-reset feature. In this case, the inhibit function can be used in SBO control
operations to prevent the pushbutton function from being activated and ensuring “one-at-a-time” select operation.
The locking functions can also be used to prevent accidental pressing of the front panel pushbuttons.
Pushbutton states can be logged by the Event Recorder and displayed as Target Messages. In latched mode, user-
defined messages can also be associated with each pushbutton and displayed when the pushbutton is ON or
changing to OFF.
Path:Setpoints > Device > Programmable PBs > Pushbutton 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Self-reset
This setting selects the characteristic of the pushbutton. If set to Disabled the pushbutton is not active and the
corresponding FlexLogic operands (both ON and OFF) are de-asserted. If set to Self-reset the control logic is
activated by the pulse (longer than 100 ms) issued when the pushbutton is being physically pressed.
When in Self-reset mode and activated locally, the pushbutton control logic asserts the ON corresponding
FlexLogic operand as long as the pushbutton is being physically pressed, and after being released the
deactivation of the operand is delayed by the PUSHBTN 1 DROPOUT TIME setting. The OFF operand is
asserted when the pushbutton element is deactivated.
If set to Latched, the control logic alternates the state of the corresponding FlexLogic operand between ON and
OFF on each button press or by virtually activating the pushbutton (assigning Set and Reset operands). When in
Latched mode, the states of the FlexLogic operands are stored in a non-volatile memory. Should the power
supply be lost, the correct state of the pushbutton is retained upon subsequent power-up of the relay.

ID TEXT
Range: Up to 13 alphanumeric characters
Default: Open (PB1), Close (PB2), F1 (PB3), Gnd Trip Enabled (PB4), SCADA Enabled (PB5), Hot Line Tag
(PB6), Demand Reset (PB7), Alt Settings (PB8), Target Reset (PB9), PB Block (PB10)
Default: Start (PB1), Stop (PB2), F1 (PB3), Gnd Trip Enabled (PB4), SCADA Enabled (PB5), Hot Line Tag
(PB6), Demand Reset (PB7), Alt Settings (PB8), Target Reset (PB9), PB Block (PB10)

1601-0450 197
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

This setting specifies the 13-character line of the user-programmable message and is intended to provide the ID
information of the pushbutton.

ON TEXT
Range: Up to 13 alphanumeric characters
Default: PB1 On (or PB[X] On)
This setting specifies the 13-character line of the user-programmable message and is displayed when the
pushbutton is in the ON position.

OFF TEXT
Range: Up to 13 alphanumeric characters
Default: PB1 Off (or PB[X] On)
This setting specifies the 13-character line of the user-programmable message and is displayed when the
pushbutton is activated from the ON to the OFF position and the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is Latched. This
message is not displayed when the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is Self-reset as the pushbutton operand
status is implied to be “OFF” upon its release. The length of the “OFF” message is configured with the
PRODUCT SETUP/DISPLAY PROPERTIES/FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting.
The message programmed in the PUSHBTN 1 ID and PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT settings will be displayed as long
as Pushbutton 1 On operand is asserted, but not longer than the time period specified by the FLASH MESSAGE
TIME setting. After the flash time has expired, the default message or other active target message is displayed.
The instantaneous Reset of the flash message will be executed if any relay front panel button is pressed or if
any new target or message becomes active.
The PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT setting is linked to Pushbutton 1 Off operand and will be displayed in conjunction
with PUSHBTN 1 ID only if the pushbutton element is in Latched mode.

HOLD PRESSED
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1 s
Default: 0.1 s
This setting specifies the time required for a pushbutton to be pressed before it is deemed active.
The timer is Reset upon release of the pushbutton. Note that any pushbutton operation will require the
pushbutton to be pressed a minimum of 60 ms. This minimum time is required prior to activating the pushbutton
hold timer.

AUTORESET
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the user-programmable pushbutton Autoreset feature. The setting is applicable only if the
pushbutton is in Latched mode.

AUTORESET DELAY
Range: 0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1 s
Default: 1.0 s
This setting specifies the time delay for automatic Reset of the pushbutton when in the Latched mode.

198 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

LOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setting assigns a FlexLogic operand serving to inhibit pushbutton operation from the front panel
pushbuttons. This locking functionality is not applicable to pushbutton autoreset.

DROPOUT TIME
Range: 0.0 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1 s
Default: 0.0 s
This setting applies only to Self-reset mode and specifies the duration of the pushbutton “active” status after
the pushbutton has been released. The length of time the operand remains on has no effect on the pulse
duration.
The setting is required to set the duration of the pushbutton operating pulse.

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

1601-0450 199
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

>A
i h#
^ lk h# === " ===
B? bbim  " ==  ==
 i  B ==  ==
lkk 
ij g === g ===
>A
^ blkb
i h == h# ==
B II B W #" == " ==
A@ H A@ H ?B imi  ==  ==
L" abc) G G kkl  B == ==
  FE
)  FE
) ji 
g ==

g ==
"f ? D) ? D)
& > >
  " = 8< = 8<
 ^ DC4 DC4
 -
  
!& bca

L" )
f"&

Y  "^
r   -
qp &!
MNO o
n
Y

MNO MNO

Z[

87
)6
5 U
/;0
)6 STR
EX0 5 bca
S S. )
FE V. %
W 3 L" 
 
)/  `$
4/ -
9/ Z[ B%
1230
78) /.
65 e9
8/7
)6 MNO
5 MNO

Y Z[ MNO

"
LK -

KKJ " !&d"
L - - B
 ""
 `@ **+
4 
@ ] @
4
] A )
^ -\
^ --
_

Z[ MNO MNO

B B W
B II - A@ A@
A@ H   ( !', V
H
G 
 G   '%& 
sTX
 FE 
FE  ) 
? ))  /)4  $"   ?
>
?
> D)<  "
 9/ /90
> D<   /90 9/ /   "#!   V3. 0< <6
    **+ = = 8  "%
= 8 
<6 87 312 
   2 D4 A
F6 ;4
 D4
C  ;4
:
)6
5
0/
.
 ) Ws  C V :

Q
P

Figure 78: Pushbuttons Logic Diagram

200 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

PB1 to PB3 Default Values (3 pushbutton Front Panels)

PB1 PB2 PB3
Function Self-Reset Self-Reset Self-Reset
ID Text Start Stop F1
ON Text PB1 ON PB2 ON PB3 ON
OFF Text PB1 OFF PB2 OFF PB3 OFF
LED Trigger PB1 ON PB2 ON PB3 ON
Hold Pressed 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
Autoreset Disabled Disabled Disabled
Autoreset Delay 1.0s 1.0s 1.0s
Lock Off Off Off
Dropout Time 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s
Events Enabled Enabled Enabled

PB1 to PB10 Default Values (10 Pushbutton Membrane Front Panel)

PB1 PB2 PB3 PB4 PB5 PB6 PB7 PB8 PB9 PB10
Function Self- Self- Self- Self- Self- Self- Self- Self- Self- Latched
Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset
ID Text Start Stop PB3 Ctrl Ground Remote PB6 Ctrl Demand Alternate Trigger PB Lock
Trip Enabled Reset Settings Transient
Enabled Recorder
ON Text PB1 ON PB2 ON PB3 ON PB4 ON PB5 ON PB6 ON PB7 ON PB8 ON PB9 ON PB10 ON
OFF Text PB1 OFF PB2 OFF PB3 OFF PB4 OFF PB5 OFF PB6 OFF PB7 OFF PB8 OFF PB9 OFF PB10
OFF
LED PB1 ON PB2 ON PB3 ON PB4 ON Local PB6 ON PB7 ON PB8 ON PB9 ON PB10 ON
Trigger Mode
OFF
Hold 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 3.0s
Pressed
Autorese Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
t
Autorese 1.0s 1.0s 1.0s 1.0s 1.0s 1.0s 1.0s 1.0s 1.0s 1.0s
t Delay
Lock PB10 ON PB10 ON PB10 ON PB10 ON PB10 ON PB10 ON PB10 ON PB10 ON PB10 ON Off
Dropout 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s
Time
Events Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

5.12.3 TAB PUSHBUTTONS

The Tab Pushbuttons provide an easy and error-free method of entering digital state (on, off) information. Twenty
(20) Tab Pushbuttons are available for programming.

1601-0450 201
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

The digital state of the Tab Pushbuttons can be entered locally (by directly pressing the front panel pushbutton) or
through Modbus by specifying the correct COMMAND sequence. Typical applications include breaker control,
autorecloser blocking, and settings groups changes. The Tab Pushbuttons are under the control level of password
protection. Only one pushbutton can be pressed at a time. If multiple pushbuttons are pressed simultaneously, the
button pressed first takes the priority.
The Tab Pushbutton settings can be accessed from Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > Tab Pushbuttons > Tab
PB1. The Tab Pushbutton control can be executed by navigating to Status > Summary > Tab Pushbuttons. By
default, the summary page is shown to quickly glance at the active tab pushbuttons. The individual pages can then
be accessed from the summary page. Each Tab Pushbutton asserts its own OFF and ON FlexLogic operands (for
example, TAB PB 1 ON and TAB PB 1 OFF). These operands are available for each pushbutton and can be used to
program specific actions. Each pushbutton has an associated “LED” indicator. By default, this indicator displays the
present status of the corresponding pushbutton ON state.
The activation and deactivation of Tab Pushbuttons is dependent on whether latched or self-reset mode is
programmed.
SELF-RESET MODE: In Self-reset mode, a Tab Pushbutton remains active for the time it is pressed (the pulse
duration) plus the Dropout time specified in the settings. The pushbutton is deactivated in Self-reset mode when the
dropout delay specified in the Dropout Time setting expires. The pulse duration of the pushbutton must be at least
100ms to operate the pushbutton.
LATCHED MODE: In Latched Mode, a pushbutton can be set (activated) by directly pressing the associated tab
pushbutton. The pushbutton maintains the set state until deactivated by another press of the same button. The state
of each pushbutton is stored in non-volatile memory and maintained through the loss of control power.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > Tab PBs > Tab PB1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Self-reset (up to 3.xx)
Default: Disabled (from 4.10)
This setting selects the characteristic of the pushbutton. If disabled, the pushbutton is not active and the
corresponding FlexLogic operands (both ON and OFF) are de-asserted. If set to Self-reset the control logic is
activated by the pulse issued when the pushbutton is being physically pressed.
When in Self-Reset mode and activated locally, the pushbutton control logic asserts the Tab PB [X] ON
FlexLogic operand as long as the pushbutton is being physically pressed, and after being released the
deactivation of the operand is delayed by the Dropout Time setting. The OFF operand is asserted when the
pushbutton element is deactivated.
If set to Latched, the control logic alternates the state of the corresponding FlexLogic operand between ON and
OFF on each button press. When in Latched mode, the states of the FlexLogic operands are stored in a non-
volatile memory. Should the power supply be lost, the correct state of the pushbutton is retained upon
subsequent power-up of the relay. When the pushbutton operand is in the ON state, the operand appears on the
target message until the pushbutton is pressed again to change it to the OFF state.

ID TEXT
Range: Up to 13 alphanumeric characters
Default: Tab PB 1 (or Tab PB[X])
This setting specifies the 13-character line of the user-programmable message and is intended to provide the ID
information of the pushbutton. This text is used to describe the pushbutton in the FlexLogic operands.

202 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

LINE 1 TEXT
Range: 2 lines of alphanumeric characters
Default: [blank]
This setting specifies the text that is displayed on Line 1 of the button when in the normal view.

LINE 2 TEXT
Range: 2 lines of alphanumeric characters
Default: [blank]
This setting specifies the text that is displayed on Line 2 of the button when in the normal view.

LINE 1 SHORT TEXT

Range: 2 lines of alphanumeric characters
Default: [blank]
This setting specifies the text that is displayed on Line 1 of the button when in the summary view. This is also the
text that appears on the tabs when operating the pushbuttons from the Single Line Diagram view.

LINE 2 SHORT TEXT

Range: 2 lines of alphanumeric characters
Default: [blank]
This setting specifies the text that is displayed on Line 2 of the button when in the summary view.

BUTTON COLOR
Range: Black, Red, Yellow, Blue, Green, Teal, Purple, White
Default: Black
This setting specifies the background color of the Tab Pushbutton. If the button is disabled, the button color by
default is shown as gray.

TEXT COLOR
Range: Black, Red, Yellow, Blue, Green, Teal, Purple, White
Default: White
This setting specifies the text color of the Tab Pushbutton.

INDICATOR COLOR
Range: Black, Red, Yellow, Blue, Green, Teal, Purple, White
Default: Yellow
This setting specifies the color of the “LED” indicator for the Tab Pushbutton.

INDICATOR TRIGGER
Range: TAB PB 1 ON, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: TAB PB 1 ON

1601-0450 203
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

This setting assigns a FlexLogic operand to trigger the Indicator to change color from the default color (white) to
the selected color.

HOLD PRESSED
Range: 0.1 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1 s
Default: 0.1 s
This setting specifies the time required for a pushbutton to be pressed before it is deemed active.
The timer is Reset upon release of the pushbutton. Note that any pushbutton operation will require the
pushbutton to be pressed a minimum of 100ms.

AUTORESET
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Tab Pushbutton Autoreset feature. The setting is applicable only if the pushbutton is in
“Latched” mode.

AUTORESET DELAY
Range: 0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1 s
Default: 1.0 s
This setting specifies the time delay for automatic Reset of the pushbutton when in the “Latched” mode.

LOCK
Range: Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setting assigns a FlexLogic operand to inhibit pushbutton operation from the front panel pushbuttons. This
locking functionality is not applicable to pushbutton autoreset.

DROPOUT TIME
Range: 0.0 s to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1 s
Default: 0.0 s
This setting applies only to “Self-reset” mode and specifies the duration of the pushbutton “active” status after
the pushbutton has been released. The length of time the operand remains on has no effect on the pulse
duration.
The setting is required to set the duration of the pushbutton operating pulse.

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

204 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

5.12.4 ANNUNCIATOR
The graphical annunciator panel provides an emulation of a conventional physical annunciator panel with backlit
indicators each inscribed with a description of the alarm condition that lights the indicator. The annunciator has 36
user-configurable (programmable) indicators. The indicators can be arranged in pages of 3x3 or 2x2 grids. Each
indicator can have up to 3 lines of configurable text. When the indicators are not active (i.e. a configured
FlexOperand for the annunciator is not triggered), the background is black and the foreground text color is gray.
When the associated FlexOperand becomes active, the background and the foreground turns brighter in color per
the color configuration. When disabled, the indicators are grayed out with no text.

Layout
If the grid layout is selected to be 3x3, the annunciator has 4 pages. If the grid layout is 2x2, the annunciator has 9
pages. The numbering of the indicators is shown as follows.

Grid Layout 3x3 – Indicator Numbering

Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4

Grid Layout 2x2 – Indicator Numbering

Page 1 Page 2 Page # Page 9

33 3

3 3

Navigation
The annunciator panel can be displayed in two ways. By default, the annunciator panel is programmed as one of
the homescreens. This means that when on the home page, pressing the home button multiple times rotates
through all the homescreens. Alternatively, the annunciator can be accessed by navigating to Status\Summary
\Annunciator\Page1. Individual annunciator pages can also be assigned as a homepage. If the auto navigation
setting is enabled in the setup, the screen automatically jumps from home to the annunciator page with the first
active alarm. Pages with active alarms will have a maroon flashing tab pushbutton label. If other pages have active
alarms, the >> button will show a flashing label.
Path:Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > Annunciator > Annunciator Setup

RESET ANNUNCIATOR
Range: Off, any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

1601-0450 205
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

This setting designates a FlexLogic operand that, when activated, acknowledges/resets all annunciator windows
in the graphical front panel. This setting is the same as that defined under Setpoints > Device > Resetting >
Reset Annunciator.
The Reset Annunctr OP (OPRD) FlexLogic operand is activated by the two sources of RESET command,
operand source and manual source. Each individual source of a RESET ANNUNCIATOR command also
activates its individual operand Reset Annunctr OP (OPRD) or Reset Annunctr OP (MNUL) to identify the source
of the command. Both of these operands generate an event in the event record when activated. The Reset
Annunciator setting selects the operand that activates the Reset Annunctr OP (OPRD) operand. The RESET
pushbutton in the front panel or the reset command from the EnerVista D&I Setup software 8 Series Setup
software activates the Reset Annunctr OP (MNUL) operand.

PAGE LAYOUT
Range: 3x3, 2x2
Default: 3x3
This setting selects the grid layout of the annunciator pages. The default 3x3 grid layout provides 4 annunciator
pages and 2x2 provides 9 pages.

AUTO NAVIGATION
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
This setting when enabled, automatically navigates to the annunciator panel page from where the indication was
triggered. While in the annunciator panel, if no action is taken, the screen returns back to the home page after
the timeout setting.

FOCUSED NAVIGATION
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
When this setting is enabled at the same time as the AUTO NAVIGATION setting, the page that has the active
indicator will come into focus. The focus will change to the newest indicator as soon as that becomes active.
Target Messages and Default Screens both have a lower priority than the FOCUSED NAVIGATION setting of
the Annunciator Panel.
Path:Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > Annunciator > Indicator 1(36)

ALARM INPUT
Range: Off, any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off
This setting specifies the input operand used to activate the corresponding indicator.

ALARM TYPE
Range: Off, Self-Reset, Latched
Default: Off
This setting specifies the alarm type. Self-Reset alarms track the state of the corresponding input operand.
Latched alarms can be reset using Reset pushbutton or through Acknowledgment via graphical front panel.

206 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

The alarm type of each annunciator indicator may be configured as Off, Self-Reset, or Latched. The default
mode is Off. In this mode, the indicator is grayed out without any text. In self-reset mode, the indicator’s inactive
state is by default in black background with dark gray color text. When the associated operand becomes active
(i.e. the assigned FlexOperand is triggered), the configured background color and foreground text color appears.
In latched mode, the configured operand causes the background to flash when it becomes active. If the alarm is
then acknowledged or reset, the background stops flashing. If the operand becomes inactive, the indicator
returns to its default colors. The behavior of these modes conforms to ISA-18.1-1979 (R2004) standard - A-4-5-6
(self-reset), and M-6 (latched).

Note:
If the Annunciator Alarm was initiated by another element that is of a Latched type (e.g. Trip Bus), you must navigate out of
the Annunciator and then reset the latched element. This action will reset the latched element, the Annunciator Alarm and
also the Trip LED if applicable.

State
rma

Vsa F F

O
 p




 d R B 
 O Acwlg
N

State bn
rma

Vsa 

Figure 79: Self-Reset Mode

State: orma

V
sa : F F

Opd O N

 State:  arm
 R  B 
R  B 
 Ac wld g V
sa : FastF as
Ac wld g 
AND
AND
Opd O 
Op d O N
R  B 
Ac wld g
AND
Opd O N
State: bnorma

V
sa : 

Figure 80: Latched Mode

When any annunciator page is displayed with an alarm condition, the navigation keys can be used to select an
indicator. Once selected, the alarm condition can be acknowledged by pressing the reset pushbutton or by pressing
the enter key. A confirmation message is displayed for acknowledging the alarm. Pressing the Reset or Enter key
again acknowledges the alarm and pressing the Escape button discards the message. When the alarms are active
under latched mode, a power loss retains the previous state of the alarm as the alarm states are stored in non-
volatile memory.

TEXT LINE 1 (2,3)

Range: 15 Alphanumeric Characters
Default: [blank]

1601-0450 207
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

These settings specify the displayed text on the corresponding line in the alarm indicator. Three lines can be
displayed with each line allowing up to 15 alphanumeric characters.

TEXT COLOR
Range: Black, Red, Yellow, Blue, Green, Teal, Purple, White
Default: White
This setting specifies the color of the alarm indicator text.

BACK COLOR
Range: Black, Red, Yellow, Blue, Green, Teal, Purple, White
Default: Red
This setting specifies the color of the alarm indicator background. When the indicator becomes active, the
background changes color from the default Black to the programmed alarm back color.

5.12.5 DISPLAY PROPERTIES

Some relay messaging characteristics can be modified to suit different situations using the Front Panel Display
Properties setting.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > Display Properties

COLOR SCHEME
Range: Green (open), Red (open)
Default: Green (open)
This setting defines the color scheme for the breaker status. If it is programmed Green (open), the breaker open
status is shown in the color green on the single line diagram and on the device status.

FLASH MESSAGE TIME

Range: 1 to 10 s in steps of 1 s
Default: 5 s
Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for several seconds in response
to certain key presses during programming. These messages override any normal messages. The duration of a
flash message on the display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates.

SCREEN TIMEOUT
Range: 10 to 900 s in steps of 1 s
Default: 120 s
If no pushbutton has been pressed for certain period of time, the relay automatically reverts to its default screen.
If the Default Screens are Enabled, Default Screens will become active after the Screen Timeout expires. If the
Default Screens are Disabled, The Actuals\Summary page is displayed after the Screen Timeout expires.

DISPLAY INTENSITY
Range: 10%-100%

208 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

Default: 100%
The backlight can be reduced be make the screen easier to view under higher atmosphere lighting.

Note:
Only available on Membrane and 10 Pushbutton front panel

INACTIVITY TIMEOUT
Range: 10 to 900 s in steps of 1 s
Default: 300 s
When the Inactivity Timeout expires, the screen will dim to Inactivity Intensity.
If the Default Screens are Disabled, the Screen Saver images will become active when the Inactivity Timeout
expires. If the Defaults Screens are Enabled, the Default Screens will be displayed at the Inactivity Intensity
when the Inactivity Timeout expires.
If a new Target occurs and the Target Auto Navigation is enabled, the Target Screen will become active. If the
system is in an inactive state, the system will switch to an active state. The intensity will return to Display
Intensity. If targets are present, the Default Screens will still become operational after the Inactivity Timeout.

INACTIVITY INTENSITY
Range: 10% - 100%
Default: 50%
The inactivity intensity can be varied so that backlight is on at a low intensity instead of being fully shut off.

TARGET AUTO NAVIGATION

Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
When the target auto navigation is set to Enabled, it will override the current menu page and go to the target
message page when a target is active.

The Active target Icon shown above, will be the only indication of active target messages.

LANGUAGE
Range: English, French, German, Polish, Russian, Ukrainian,
Default: English
This setting selects the language used to display the settings, metering, status, and targets. The range is
dependent on the order code of the relay.

1601-0450 209
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

5.12.5.1 SUPPORT FOR CYRILLIC LANGUAGES

The 8 Series of relays support the Russian and Ukrainian languages, but for this to work you also need to configure
your Windows system accordingly. You can do this by selecting the required language. Modify the settings in the
following locations:
● Control panel > Region > Adminstrative tab > Change System Locale > Language for non-Unicode
programs
● Control panel > Region > Language Preferences
For more information, refer to your Microsoft documentation.

5.12.6 SCRATCHPAD
You can enter up to ten lines of information under the message scratchpad screen. This information could be
installation notes, or any other information which may be useful, such as reminding operators to perform certain
tasks. You can enter these messages using the EnerVista D&I Setup software setup software or the front panel
keypad.
Messages can be displayed in the following ways:
● On the front panel, all ten scratchpad message lines are displayed under the path: Setpoints\Device\Front
Panel\Scratchpad
● On the front panel, this scratchpad screen can also be displayed as a default screen when the Scratchpad
option is selected under the path: Setpoints\Device\Front Panel\Default Screen. The display disappears
after the message time-out period specified by the path: Setpoints\Device\Front Panel\Display Properties
\Message Timeout.
● On the front panel, this scratchpad screen can also be displayed as a FlexScreen when the relevant
FlexLogic operand is asserted. this can be set under the path: Setpoints\Device\Front Panel\FlexScreens
\FlexScreen [X] Operate, if Scratchpad is selected for the corresponding setpoint at the path: Setpoints
\Device\Front Panel\FlexScreens\FlexScreen [X].
Path: Setpoints\Device\Front Panel\Scratchpad

Line 1(10)
Range: up to 26 alphanumeric characters
Default: Text 1(10)
This menu is used to enter user-defined text. 10 lines are available, and each line supports up to 26 characters.
This user-defined text can be entered from the front panel keypad or the EnerVista D&I Setup software.

5.12.7 DEFAULT SCREENS

The relay provides the convenience of configuring and displaying up to three default screens from a predefined list.
Each type of screen to display can be selected, and the display time programmed. The sequence of displaying the
screens starts after the time of inactivity programmed in the MESSAGE TIMEOUT setpoint, when no PB has been
pressed, and no target message is present. Pressing a pushbutton, or the presence of a target message inhibits the
sequential display of default screens. The screen displays resume only after the target messages are cleared, and
no PB pressing is recorded for 30 seconds. When configured the home screen is changed to the first screen
defined by this feature. Display timeouts also return to this first screen (i.e. default screen 1).
If the default screens feature is disabled and there are no home screens programmed, the home page will show the
Metering > Summary > Values screen after the message timeout inactivity period.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > Default Screen

210 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
This setpoint enables the feature. Displaying of the screen starts 30 s after setting the feature to “Enabled”,
providing no targets have been issued, nor a PB has been pressed.

DISPLAY TIME
Range: 5 to 900 s in steps of 1 s
Default: 10 s
The display time is the amount of time that each of the three screens are displayed within the display sequence.

DEFAULT SCREEN X
Range: varieties of screens for selection
Default: SLD (for Default Screen 1 only), Off (for others)
This setpoint enables the user to input the default screens. FW versions up to 3.xx offer 3 default screens. FW
versions 4.10 and onward offer 5 default screens.

DEFAULT SCREEN INTENSITY (not available from rev 4.10 onwards)

Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 10%
Default: 100%
The default screen intensity can be varied so that the backlight is at a low intensity instead of being fully shut off.

5.12.8 HOME SCREENS

The home screens allow the selection of a set of pages as home pages (max. 10). Multiple home pages are
configured and navigated to by pressing the home button repeatedly. Navigate through all available home screens
by repeatedly pressing the home button.
When returning to the home screen (either by pressing escape or directly pressing the Home button) through the
different menus, the last accessed home screen is shown. Subsequent presses of the Home button navigates to the
next programmed home screen on the list.
While accessing the home screens, the tab pushbutton navigation labels show the root menu – i.e. Targets, Status,
Metering, Setpoints, and Records. The exceptions are the Tab Pushbuttons screens which instead show
pushbuttons in the navigation labels.
If the default screens are enabled, the first default screen is shown after 30 seconds plus the inactivity period
defined in Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > Display Properties > Message Timeout. If the default screens
feature and screen saver are disabled, the screen defaults to the Values screen after the inactivity period.
When the home screens are programmed and the default screens feature is enabled but the screens are set to Off,
the last accessed home screen is shown as the home page.
By Default, the first home screen is configured to show the first single line diagram.

1601-0450 211
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

Note:
When on any single line diagram page, if an object is selected, the home button will not function. The selected object must
first be de-selected by pressing the escape button to be able to use the home button functionality again.

Path: Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > Home Screens

HOME SCREEN 1
Range: All available pages
Default: SLD1

HOME SCREEN 2
Range: All available pages
Default: Tab PB Summary

HOME SCREEN 3
Range: All available pages
Default: Annunciator Pg 1

HOME SCREEN 4
Range: All available pages
Default: Values

HOME SCREEN 5 to 10
Range: All available pages
Default: Off

5.12.9 FLEXSCREENS
The FlexScreens allow you to select a page to appear on the display based on the results of an OPERATE setting.
Up to five FlexScreens can be configured. When the OPERATE setting evaluates to a TRUE, the FlexScreen
configured will be displayed.
Path: Setpoints > Device > Front Panel > FlexScreens

FLEXSCREEN 1
Range: All available pages
Default: Off

FLEXSCREEN 1 OPERATE
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setpoint requires the assignment of a FlexLogic operand to turn on FlexScreen 1.

212 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

FLEXSCREEN 2
Range: All available pages
Default: Off

FLEXSCREEN 2 OPERATE
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setpoint requires the assignment of a FlexLogic operand to turn on FlexScreen 2.

FLEXSCREEN 3
Range: All available pages
Default: Off

FLEXSCREEN 3 OPERATE
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setpoint requires the assignment of a FlexLogic operand to turn on FlexScreen 3.

FLEXSCREEN 4
Range: All available pages
Default: Off

FLEXSCREEN 4 OPERATE
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setpoint requires the assignment of a FlexLogic operand to turn on FlexScreen 4.

FLEXSCREEN 5
Range: All available pages
Default: Off

FLEXSCREEN 5 OPERATE
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setpoint requires the assignment of a FlexLogic operand to turn on FlexScreen 5.

1601-0450 213
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

5.13 RESETTING
Some events can be programmed to latch the faceplate LED event indicators and target message on the display.
Depending on the application some auxiliary output relays can be programmed to latch after the triggering event is
cleared. Once set, the latching mechanism holds all the latched indicators, messages, and auxiliary output relays in
the set state, after the initiating condition has cleared, until a RESET command is received to return these latches
(except the FlexLogic latches) to the reset state.
The RESET command can be sent from the faceplate Reset pushbutton, a remote device via a communication
channel, or any programmed FlexLogic operand. Executing the RESET command from either source creates a
general FlexLogic operand RESET OP. Each individual source of a RESET command also creates its individual
operand RESET OP (PB), RESET (COMMS), and RESET OP (OPERAND) to identify the source of the command.

RESET INPUT 1(2,3):

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The setpoint selects an operand from the list of FlexLogic operands. The targets, LEDs, and latched output
relays reset upon assertion from any of the operands selected as Reset Inputs.

214 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

5.14 INSTALLATION
Path:Setpoints > Device > Installation

DEVICE NAME
Range: Up to 13 alphanumeric characters
An alphanumeric name may be assigned to the device.

DEVICE IN SERVICE
Default: Not Ready
Range: Not Ready, Ready
The relay is defaulted to the “Not Ready” state when it leaves the factory. This safeguards against the installation
of a relay whose settings have not been entered. When powered up successfully, the “IN SERVICE” LED
becomes red. The relay in the “Not Ready” state blocks signaling of any output relay. These conditions remain
until the relay is explicitly put in the “Ready” state.

SERVICE COMMAND
Range: 0 to 65535
Default: 0

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
Range: Celsius, Fahrenheit
Default: Celsius
Selects engineering unit of temperature display.

LATCHED ALARM OPERATION

Range: Self-Reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset (845, 850, 869, 889)
Default: Latched (859)
When set to Self-Reset while a protection element is set to Latched Alarm, only the Alarm LED will remain
latched. When set to Latched, both Alarm LED and element will remain latched.

REMOTE IO DETECT VALUE

Range: Up to 6 alphanumeric characters
Shows the letter type of the Remote RTD card Board ID installed (e.g. GGGG).

CURRENT CUTOFF
Range: 0.000 to 1.000 p.u. in steps of 0.001 p.u.
Default: 0.020 p.u.

VOLTAGE CUTOFF
Range: 0.0 to 300.0 in steps of 0.1 V

1601-0450 215
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

Default: 1.0 V

Note:
Lower the Voltage Cutoff and Current Cutoff levels with care as the relay accepts lower signals as valid measurements.
Unless dictated otherwise by a specific application, the default settings of “0.020 pu” for current and “1.0 V” for voltage are
recommended.

OV/UV DPO RANGE

Range: 97–99% , 95-97%
Default: 97-99 %
This setpoint defines the drop-out range applicable for the voltage protection functions.
The enumerate value of ‘97-99%’ specifies that the dropout voltage level is achieved when the voltage level
drops below 2 % of the pickup value.
For ’95-97%’, the drop-out voltage level is specified when the voltage level drops below 4% of the pickup voltage
level.
For Undervoltage elements:
The ’97-99%’ value determines the drop-out condition of the pickup flag is given when the voltage level is higher
than 2% of the pickup voltage level.
On the other hand, the ’95-97%’ value establishes that the drop-out level of the pickup flag is given when the
voltage is higher than the 4% of the pickup voltage level.
The next table summarizes both conditions:
OV/UV DPO Range OV Functions UV Functions
(Dpo Level) (Dpo Level)
97-99% 2% [97-99% pickup] 102% [101-103% pickup]
95-97% 4% [95-97% pickup] 104% [103-105% pickup]

BKR 1 STATUS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Target Message for the breaker status is shown when the set to ‘Enabled’. When ‘Disabled’, all target messages
related to breaker status will be blocked.

Note:
This setting is available when Setpoints > System > Motor > Setup > Switching Device Type = Breaker

BKR 3 STATUS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

CONTACTOR 1 STATUS
Range: Enabled, Disabled

216 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

Default: Enabled
The Target Message for the contactor status is shown when enabled. When disabled, all target messages
related to contactor status are blocked.
This setting is available when Setpoints > System > Motor > Setup > Switching Device Type = Contactor

1601-0450 217
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

5.15 SELF-TEST ERRORS

The relay performs self-diagnostics at initialization (after power up), and continuously as a background task to
ensure that the hardware and software are functioning correctly. There are two types of self-test warnings indicating
either a minor or major problem. Minor errors indicate a problem with the relay that does not compromise protection
and control functionality of the relay. Major errors indicate a problem with the relay which takes it out of service.

Caution:
Self-Test Warnings may indicate a serious problem with the relay hardware!

Upon detection of a minor problem, the relay does the following:

● Displays a detailed description of the error on the relay display as a target message
● Records the minor self-test error in the Event Recorder
● Flashes the ALARM LED
Upon detection of a major problem, the relay will:
● De-energize the relay assigned under setting Major Self-Test Relay if the relay is programmed for failsafe
operation or energized if programed for non-failsafe operation.
● De-energize all output relays
● Turn off the IN SERVICE LED
● Flash the TRIP LED
● Assert the Self-Test Trip OP FlexLogic operand
● Display Major Self-test error with the error code as a target message
● Record the major self-test failure in the Event Recorder
When Alarm is selected as a function, upon detection of a major problem, the relay will:
● Flash the ALARM LED.
● Assert Self-Test Alarm OP FlexLogic operand.
● Display Major Self-test error with the error code as a target message
● Display Major Self-test error as a target message
● Record the major self-test failure in the Event Recorder.
Under both conditions, the targets cannot be cleared if the error is still active.

218 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

Figure 81: Minor Errors

Figure 82: Major Errors

1601-0450 219
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

Minor self-test errors

Minor Self-test Error Description of Problem Frequency of Test What to Do
Message1
Order Code Error Hardware doesn't match order Every 1 second
code
CPU S/N Invalid CPU card doesn’t have valid Every 1 second
data to match the order code.
Slot “$” IO S/N Invalid2 IO card located in slot $ Every 1 second
doesn’t have valid data to
match the order code.
Comms S/N Invalid Comms card doesn’t have Every 1 second
valid data to match the order
code.
CPanel S/N Invalid Control Panel doesn’t have Every 1 second
valid data to match the order
code.
PSU S/N Invalid Power Supply Unit doesn’t Every 1 second
have valid data to match the
order code. If alert doesn’t self-reset then
contact factory. Otherwise
RTC Error The CPU cannot read the time Every 1 second
monitor re-occurrences as
from the real time clock
errors are detected and self-
Product Serial Invalid The product serial number Every 1 second reset
doesn’t match the product
type
Comm Alert #1 Every 1 second
Communication error between
Comm Alert #2 Every 1 second
CPU and Comms board
Comm Alert #3 Every 1 second
FLASH Error The permanent storage Every 1 second
memory has been corrupted
SPI Error Communication error between Every 1 second
CPU and LEDs, Keypad or
peripheral memory devices
Invalid MAC Address MAC address is not in the Every 1 second
product range
Calibration Error Unit has default calibration Boot-up and every 1 second
values
Clock Not Set Clock has the default time Every 1 second Set clock to current time
WiFi Default Settings SSID and Passphrase is the Every 1 second Set SSID and Passphrase
factory default
Link Error Primary3 Port 1 or Port 4 (depending on Every 1 second Ensure Ethernet cable is
order code) is not connected connected, check cable
functionality (i.e. physical
damage or perform continuity
test), and ensure master or
peer device is functioning. If
none of these apply, contact
the factory.

220 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

Minor Self-test Error Description of Problem Frequency of Test What to Do

Message1
Link Error Secondary Port 5 is not connected Every 1 second Ensure Ethernet cable is
connected, check cable
functionality (i.e. physical
damage or perform continuity
test), and ensure master or
peer device is functioning. If
none of these apply, contact
the factory.
Traffic Error Primary Abnormally high amount of Every 1 second Contact site IT department to
Broadcast and Uni-cast traffic check network for
on port 1 or port 4 malfunctioning devices
Traffic Error Secondary Abnormally high amount of Every 1 second Contact site IT department to
Broadcast and Uni-cast traffic check network for
on port 5 malfunctioning devices
Ambient Temperature >80C The ambient temperature Every 1 second Inspect mounting enclosure
surrounding the product has for unexpected heat sources
exceeded 80C (i.e loose primary cables) and
remove accordingly
Event Rate High Abnormally high amounts of Every 1 second Ensure settings are not set
events have been generated close to nominal ratings.
so the relay has stopped Ensure FlexLogic equations
logging to prevent further do not have impractical timing
issues for status events
IRIG-B Failure A bad IRIG-B input signal has Every 1 second Ensure IRIG-B cable is
been detected connected, check cable
functionality (i.e. physical
damage or perform continuity
test), ensure IRIG-B receiver
is functioning, and check input
signal level (it may be less
than specification). If none of
these apply, contact the
factory.
CAN_1 Error Every 1 second
CAN_2 Error Every 1 second
Version Mismatch CPU and Comms do not have Boot-up and Every 1 second Ensure that both the CPU and
the same revision on firmware Comms FW was uploaded
during the upgrade process
SelfTestFWUpdate The updating of the firmware Every 1 second Re-try uploading firmware. If
failed the upload doesn’t work a
second time contact factory
Remote CAN IO Mismatch RMIO card detection Every 1 second Check RRTD connections,
mismatch check if the RRTD
configuration is still valid,
Validate CANBUS IO.
1 Failure is logged after the detection of 5 consecutive failures
2$ is the slot ID (i.e. F, G, H etc.)
3 To disable Link Error Primary target when not in use with SE order code, change IP address to 127.0.0.1

1601-0450 221
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

Major Self-test Error Latched Target Description of Frequency of Test What to do

Message Message Problem
Relay Not Ready No PRODUCT SETUP On power up and Program all required
INSTALLATION setting whenever the settings and then set
indicates relay is not in PRODUCT SETUP the PRODUCT SETUP
a programmed state. INSTALLATION setting INSTALLATION setting
is altered. to Ready.
Major Self-Test (error Yes Unit hardware failure Every 1 second Contact the factory and
code) detected supply the failure code
as noted on the display.

Note:
When a total loss of power is present, the Critical Failure Relay (Output Relay 8) is de-energized.

222 1601-0450
 Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

5.16 CLEAR RECORDS

The Clear Records command is accessible from the front panel and from the EnerVista D&I Setup software.
Path: Device > Clear Records
Records can be cleared by assigning On to the appropriate setting.

Note:
The Clear Records command is also available from Records> Clear Records, where the allowable settings also include
FlexLogic operands.

1601-0450 223
Chapter 5 - Device Setpoints

224 1601-0450
 CHAPTER 6

SYSTEM SETPOINTS
Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

226 1601-0450
 Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

6.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter describes the Device setpoint menu settings in detail.
This chapter contains the following sections:
Chapter Overview 227
System menu hierarchy 228
Current Sensing 229
Voltage sensing 233
Power Sensing 235
Power System 236
Preset Values 240
Motor setup 241
Switching device 254
Breakers 255
Switches 261
FlexCurves 265

1601-0450 227
Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

6.2 SYSTEM MENU HIERARCHY

Figure 83: Device Display Hierarchy

228 1601-0450
 Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

6.3 CURRENT SENSING

The Current Sensing menu provides the setup menu for the Current Transformers (CTs) connected to the 869
terminals. The setup of the three-phase CTs, and the Ground CT requires a selection of primary CT ratings. The
secondary CT ratings are selected in the relevant order code. The CT inputs are grouped in banks of four currents:
● three inputs for phase currents A, B, and C
● one input for ground current.
The AC card has two AC banks, one bank currents and one bank voltages.
The basic Motor Protection System has 8 AC inputs, which reside on the card inserted in slot J.
There are four options for the 8 AC inputs from card J as follows:
Option 1 (P5G5/P1G1):
● four AC input currents, 3 CTs for phase currents and 1 CT for the ground or residual connection current, and
● four AC input voltages, 3 VTs for phase voltages, and 1 VT for auxiliary voltage
Option 2 (P50B/P10B):
● four AC input currents, 3 CTs for phase currents and 1 CT for Sensitive 50:0.025A ground or residual
connection current, and
● four AC input voltages, 3 VTs for phase voltages, and 1 VT for auxiliary voltage
Option 3 (P5S1/P1S1):
● four AC input currents, 3 CTs for phase currents and 1 CT for ground or residual connection current, and
● four AC input voltages, 3 VTs for phase voltages, and 1 VT for auxiliary voltage
Option 4 (P55B):
● four AC inputs currents, 3 CTs for phase currents and 1 Sensitive 50:0.025A CT for ground or residual
connection current, and
● four AC inputs voltages, 3 VTs for phase voltages, and 1 VT for auxiliary voltage
Additionally, a second card can be inserted into slot K. There are four options for the four AC input currents as
follows:
Option 1 (P1B1/P5B5):
● 3 CTs for phase currents and 1 CT for Sensitive 50:0.025A ground current
Option 2 (NNS1):
● 1A CT for sensitive ground current
Option 3 (C5G5/C55B):
● four AC inputs currents, 3 CTs for phase currents and 1 CT for ground or residual connection current
● three synchronous motor input, 1 Field AC Voltage, 1 Field DC Voltage, 1 Field DCMA Current and 1 PF
Regulation Voltage Output
Option 4 (D5G5/D55B):
● four AC inputs currents, 3 CTs for phase currents and 1 CT for ground or residual connection current
● three synchronous motor input, 1 Field AC Voltage, 1 Field DC Voltage, 1 Field VDC Current and 1 PF
Regulation Voltage Output
The Current sensing selection is found in the following menus:
Path:Setpoints > System > Current Sensing > CT Bank 1-J1

1601-0450 229
Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

Path:Setpoints > System > Current Sensing > CT Bank 2-K1

CT BANK NAME
This setting allows the user to specify CT bank name which will appear in all menus and metering screens.

PHASE CT PRIMARY
Range: 1 A to 12000 A (up to FW 3.xx)
Range: 1 A to 50000 A in steps of 1A (from FW 4.10)
Default: 500 A
Enter the primary rating of the three-phase feeder CTs wired to the relay phase CT terminals. With the phase
CTs connected in wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents (Ia + Ib + Ic = Neutral
Current = 3I0) is used as the input for the neutral.

GROUND CT PRIMARY
Range: 1 A to 12000 A (up to FW 3.xx)
Range: 1 A to 50000 A in steps of 1A (from FW 4.10)
Default: 500 A
Enter the primary rating of the ground CT wired to the relay ground CT terminals. When the ground input is used
for measuring the residual 3I0 current, the primary current must be the same as the one selected for the phase
CTs.

SENSITIVE GROUND CT PRIMARY (displayed only if the Sensitive ground input is installed)
Range: 1 A to 12000 A (up to FW 3.xx)
Range: 1 A to 50000 A in steps of 1A (from FW 4.10)

Default: 500 A
Enter the primary rating of the sensitive ground CT wired to the relay sensitive ground CT terminals.

Note:
The Sensitive Ground CT Primary setpoint is available only with ground current order code option S1.

Note:
The cut-off for current measurements is 0.02 x CT. This is the minimum value above which metering functions.

Synchronous Motor Field Current Sensing

This menu provides configures the synchronous motor field current input. Depending on the order code selection,
the relay provides either dcmA or VDC type input to measure the DC field current. Selection of the DC field input
type (dcmA or VDC) depends on the DC Current Transducer (DCCT) installed.
These settings are available only with synchronous motor order codes (Phase Current options C5/D5 for Slot K).
Path:Setpoints > System > Current Sensing > SM FLD A-K2

230 1601-0450
 Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

NAME
This setting allows the user to specify the name to appear in all menus and metering screens.

RANGE
Slot K with order code option C5:
Range: 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
Default: 4 to 20 mA
Slot K with order code option D5:
Range: 0 to 10 VDC
Default: 0 to 10 VDC

Max FLD Amps Primary (MFA)

Range: 1.00 to 3000.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Default: 100.00 A
This value specifies the maximum primary side DC field current that corresponds to the maximum of the range
selected under setpoint RANGE.
For example:
A DCCT installed to measure the DC field current has the following specifications: primary DC current range, Iin:
0 - 200 ADC; secondary DC current range, Iout: 0 - 20 mA.
In order to correctly calculate the primary field DC current from the measured secondary DCMA, setpoints Max
FLD Amps Primary (MFA) and RANGE must be set to 200 A and 0-20 mA, respectively.

Figure 84: DC Field Current Input Characteristics

1601-0450 231
Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

*)%,-./%*

6 7 + 4 
5 + 01

! 01
+  2
  3

      #$%&#' (#'&)*
     !
    ! 4 

 
   +
" 
   5 +
  
 
 

+  2
9:;<=>?@ABCD
1 
    !8 7 + 

Figure 85: DC Field Current Input

232 1601-0450
 Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

6.4 VOLTAGE SENSING

The Voltage Sensing menu provides the setup for all VTs (PTs) connected to the relay voltage terminals.
Path: Setpoints > System > Voltage Sensing > Ph VT Bnk1-J2

PHASE VT BANK NAME

Range: Any combination of 13 alphanumeric characters
Default: Ph VT Bnk 1-J2
Enter the name of the phase voltage from bank J2.

PHASE VT CONNECTION
Range: Wye, Delta, Single
Default: Wye
Select the type of phase VT connection to match the VTs (PTs) connected to the relay.
Pseudo Voltage / Single VT Voltage
In cases when the distribution feeder has only one VT/voltage source (to measure single phase to neutral
voltage or phase-to-phase voltage), the relay facilitates 3-phase power and energy measurements derived from
pseudo 3-phase voltages. The pseudo 3-phase voltage are derived from any one VT source connected by
considering balanced 3-phase system (i.e. all three phase voltages and currents same in magnitude and placed
120 degrees apart with individual phases). Since, the pseudo 3-phase voltage calculation relies on balanced
power system, the calculation accuracies are influenced by system unbalance conditions. In case of perfectly
balanced system, the calculated pseudo voltages are same as actual system voltages, however, the errors in 3-
phase power and energy calculation increases with system unbalance. The generated 3-phase voltages from a
single-phase reference input are only used for calculating the 3-phase metering quantities.

PSEUDO VOLTAGE REFERENCE

Range: Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc, Vca
Default: Van
This setting is only applicable when PHASE VT CONNECTION is set to Single.
This means there is only one VT/voltage source available for metering. The relay allows any type of connection
(A to neutral, B to neutral, C to neutral, A to B phase, B to C phase, and C to A phase) with a single VT
reference input. It derives all 3-phase voltages (i.e. VA, VB and VC) from the provided single voltage reference
input by considering 3-phase balanced system.
When setpoint PSEUDO VOLTAGE REFERENCE is configured to Van or Vab, single-phase VT inputs are
connected to relay VT Channel 1. Similarly, when PSEUDO VOLTAGE REFERENCE is configured to Vbn(Vbc)
and Vcn(Vca), VT inputs are connected to VT Channel 2 and Channel 3, respectively.
When Pseudo Voltage is used, sequence components (positive, negative and zero sequence voltage) displayed
in the metering value are not a measured quantity, so they should be ignored when VT source is set to Single.

PHASE VT SECONDARY
Range: 10.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1 V
Default: 120.0 V

1601-0450 233
Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

Select the output secondary voltage for phase VTs connected to the J2 bank.

PHASE VT RATIO
Range: 1.00 to 5000.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00
Select the phase VT ratio to match the ratio of the VTs connected to the J2 bank.

AUX. VT NAME
Range: Any combination of 13 alphanumeric characters
Default: Ax VT Bnk1-J2
Enter the name of the auxiliary voltage from bank J2.

AUX. VT CONNECTION
Range: Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc, Vca, Vn
Default: Van
Select the voltage type corresponding to the one applied to the Aux VT relay terminals from bank J2. Select Vn
(neutral voltage), if the neutral voltage is applied to the relay auxiliary VT.

AUX. VT SECONDARY
Range: 10.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1 V
Default: 120.0 V
Select the output secondary voltage of the aux. VT connected to the aux. VT input from bank J2.

AUX. VT RATIO
Range: 1.00 to 5000.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00
Select the aux. VT ratio to match the ratio of the VT connected to the aux. VT input from bank J2.

Note:
The nominal PHASE VT SECONDARY and the AUX VT SECONDARY voltage settings are the voltages across the phase VT
terminals and the auxiliary VT terminals correspondingly when nominal voltage is applied.

Note:
For example, on a system of 13.8kV nominal primary voltage, and a 14400:120 volt VT in a Delta connection, the secondary
voltage would be 115V, i.e. (13800/14400)*120. For a Wye connection, the voltage value entered must be the phase to
neutral voltage which would be 115/√3 = 66.4 V.

Note:
On a 14.4 kV system with a Delta connection and a VT primary to secondary turns ratio of 14400:120, the voltage value
entered would be 120 V, i.e. 14400/120.

234 1601-0450
 Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

6.5 POWER SENSING

The power computation is performed using the voltage and current inputs. In cases when the connected VTs and
CTs have opposite polarity, the power sensing menu provides for inverting the power measurement.
Path:Setpoints > System > Power Sensing > Power 1 > Power (X)

PHASE CT&VT POLARITY

Range: Same, Inverse
Default: Same
When Inverse is selected, this setpoint inverts (multiplies phase currents by -1) the CT polarity for the phase
currents from CT bank, with respect to the phase voltages from the VT bank.

Note:
The setpoint for inversion of the power metering will be useful to avoid the physical inversion of the CT connections on the
relay. As the power metering will affect the power directional elements, the user must determine the correct forward and
reverse direction of the power, before setup.

RESET EVENT ENERGY

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
At the rising edge of the FlexLogic operand selected under this setpoint, all energy metering values (under
Metering > Energy 1(X) > Energy) are logged and reset to zero, and Reset Energy D/T is recorded and
displayed.
The logged values are displayed as the Last Event Pos(Neg) WattHours and Last Event Pos(Neg) VarHours
under Metering > Energy 1(X) > Energy Log.
An application example could be monitoring of the total energy accumulated at the end of an event or a shift
interval. An event/shift interval can be defined per the breaker status operand (open or closed) or operand
derived by the Time of Day Timer element. Time-based shift schedules can be set in the Time of Day Timer
element.

1601-0450 235
Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

6.6 POWER SYSTEM

Path:Setpoints > System > Power System

NOMINAL FREQUENCY
Range: 60 Hz, 50 Hz
Default: 60 Hz
The power system NOMINAL FREQUENCY is used as a default to set the digital sampling rate if the system
frequency cannot be measured from available AC signals. This may happen if the signals selected for frequency
tracking are not present, or a valid frequency is not detected. Before reverting to the nominal frequency, the
frequency tracking algorithm holds the last valid frequency measurement for a safe period of time while waiting
for the signals to reappear or for the distortions to decay.

REVERSE PH ROTATION - CT Bnks, REVERSE PH ROTATION - VT Bnks

Default: Off
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
The relay provides the flexibility of dynamically reversing the phase rotation (ABC <-> ACB) of both current and
voltage phases. These setpoints can be used to reverse phase rotation of CT bank(s) and VT bank independent
of each other. There may be a reverse motor application when only current phase rotation is reversed (ABC <->
ACB) while voltage phase rotation remains the same. An example of such an application is illustrated in the
figure below.

236 1601-0450
 Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

Figure 86: Reverse motor application, current phase rotation reversed

These settings dynamically reverse the phase rotation of all currents/voltages set under Setpoints > System >
Power System > Phase Rotation. For example, if the nominal phase rotation is ABC but the condition (FlexLogic
operand) becomes true (high), then the phase rotation switches to ACB.
The reverse phase rotation feature is only intended for use in special applications such as pumped storage
schemes, reverse motor application, etc. As soon as the reverse phase rotation condition (FlexLogic operand)
status becomes false (low), the phase rotation returns to the nominal value set under Setpoints > System > Power
System > Phase Rotation.

1601-0450 237
Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

Note:
Dynamic switching of the phase rotation (ABC <-> ACB) using this feature blocks all relay functions that use current and
voltage measurements for 3 cycles as soon as phase rotation switches from forward to reverse or reverse to forward.

Caution:
Any FlexElement that uses FlexAnalog values (current, voltage, power, impedance)
must be blocked using the FlexLogic operands 'Ph Rotation Inhibit' in order to
secure element operation during the phase rotation switching process.

Caution:
In applications when only the current phase rotation reverses while voltage phase
rotation remains same, as illustrated by the figure below, different CT and VT phase
rotations may result in unexpected operation of the functions that use power,
power factor, and impedance. It is recommended to block these functions.

XY
Z[\] ^
_`ab
 c 


     c 
  f g h>i
       
S&-O% T %1KM -%( *(U '-&-(   D
$%&'( )*+,- .,//(*-' 01/ V OQOK(' -1 +/(R(*- W&O5
0/12 .3 4&*5 &*M 01/-% 'UG-O%G*H )<= )4= ). 7    # 9:#
!"# !# ! :;7 9 7 8

 P eUG-O%G*H W&O5 -1

    01/U&/M +%&'( /1-&-G1*
  f g h>i
       
S&-O% T %1KM -%( *(U '-&-(   D
01/ V OQOK(' -1 +/(R(*- @<= @4= @.
  !67 7  W&O5 &*M 01/-% 'UG-O%G*H >?   # 9:#
 8   :;7 9 7 8
"# # 
XY
Z[\] ^
_`ab
P eUG-O%G*H W&O5 -1
01/U&/M +%&'( /1-&-G1*  ! d
jklmnopqrstu
FG'G*HIJ&KKG*H A > > C7 D 
LMH( N(-(O-G1* B 
E > E >

FG'G*HIJ&KKG*H P<KK F(K&Q J,*O-G1*' -%&- ,'(

LMH( N(-(O-G1* O,//(*-' &*M R1K-&H('
2(&',/(2(*-'
Figure 87: Reverse phase rotation logic diagram

FREQUENCY TRACKING
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

238 1601-0450
 Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

The frequency reference is provided by composite signal derived by the Clarke transformation (VFREQUENCY =
(2VA – VB – VC) / 3) for better performance during fault, open pole, and VT and CT fail conditions.
If present, the three-phase voltages are used for frequency tracking. Phase A voltage is used as a phase
reference.
FREQUENCY TRACKING is switched automatically by an algorithm, to the three-phase currents (or auxiliary
voltage signal for the tie-breaker configuration), if the frequency detected from the three-phase voltage inputs is
declared invalid. The switching is not performed if the frequency from the alternative reference signal is detected
invalid.
Upon detecting valid frequency on the main frequency and phase reference signal, tracking is switched back to
that reference.

Note:
FREQUENCY TRACKING should be set to “Disabled” only under very unusual circumstances. Consult the factory for special
variable-frequency applications.

1601-0450 239
Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

6.7 PRESET VALUES

You can preset the following actual value accumulators. When the accumulator is preset with a new value, the relay
overwrites the previous actual value and continues the accumulation starting from the new value. The accumulated
value is displayed in Status or Metering.
Path: Setpoints > System > Preset Values

POS WATT HOURS

Range: 0.000 to 4294967.295 MWh in steps of 0.001 MWh
This value sets the Positive Watt Hours. The accumulated Positive Watt Hours are shown in METERING >
ENERGY 1 > PWR1 POS WATTHOURS. Clearing the Energy Use Data sets the displayed value to the preset
value.

NEG WATT HOURS

Range: 0.000 to 4294967.295 MWh in steps of 0.001 MWh
This value sets the Negative Watt Hours. The accumulated Negative Watt Hours are shown in METERING >
ENERGY 1 > PWR1 NEG WATTHOURS. Clearing the Energy Use Data sets the displayed value to the preset
value.

POS VAR HOURS

Range: 4294967.295 MWh in steps of 0.001 Mvarh
This value sets the Positive (negative) Var Hours. The accumulated Positive Var Hours are shown in METERING
> ENERGY 1 > PWR1 POS VARHOURS. Clearing the Energy Use Data sets the displayed metering value to
the preset value.

NEG VAR HOURS

Range: 4294967.295 MWh in steps of 0.001 Mvarh
This value sets the Negative Var Hours. The accumulated Negative Var Hours are shown in METERING >
ENERGY 1 > PWR1 NEG VARHOURS. Clearing the Energy Use Data sets the displayed metering value to the
preset value.

240 1601-0450
 Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

6.8 MOTOR SETUP

The following settings reflect the design and configuration of the motor that the relay will protect. Note that some
protection elements are dependent on these settings for correct operation.
Path:Setpoints > System > Motor > Setup

SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR TYPE (not for Firmware version 4 onwards)

Range: None, Brushless, Brush-type
Default: None

Note:
This setpoint is only available when the order code Phase Currents - Slot K options is one of C5/D5.

This setting specifies the type of synchronous motor. Proper selection of the synchronous motor type enables the
corresponding settings and functions, which are different for the two different motors and alter operation of the relay.

MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS (FLA)

Range: 1 to 5000 A in steps of 1 A
Default: 100 A
This setting represents the full load current (FLA) of the motor. FLA is a standard motor parameter that can be
found on the motor nameplate.

MOTOR OVERLOAD FACTOR

Range: 1.00 to 1.50 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00
This setting defines the current level at which the motor is considered to be overloaded. If the motor current
exceeds the Motor Overload Factor threshold, the Thermal Model reacts by accumulating thermal capacity.
Normally, this factor is set slightly above the motor service factor to account for inherent load measuring errors
(CTs and limited relay accuracy). The typical total inaccuracy factor is 8 to 10%; as such, for motors with a
thermal capability at a rated service factor of 1 or 1.15, the Motor Overload Factor must be set to 1.1 or 1.25
respectively.

MOTOR NAMEPLATE VOLTAGE

Range: 100 to 50000 V in steps of 1 V
Default: 600 V
This setting represents the rated phase-to-phase motor voltage. The MOTOR NAMEPLATE VOLTAGE setting is
used as a reference for the voltage dependent thermal overload curve feature and indicates a 100% voltage
starting condition.

MOTOR HORSEPOWER
Range: 100 to 200000 HP in steps of 1 HP
Default: 4000 HP
This setting represents the motor rated horsepower (HP).

1601-0450 241
Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

Note:
This setting is only needed in the Stator-Inter-Turn Fault element to calculate negative sequence impedance when the
setpoint Neg Seq Imp Autoset

RATED SPEED
Range: 100 to 7200 RPM in steps of 1
Default: 3600 RPM
RPM defines the rated speed of the motor.

Note:
In 2 Speed motor application, when 2-Speed Motor Protection is “Enabled” and Speed2 Motor Switch is “On”, setpoint
Speed2 Rated Speed, programmed under System > Motor > Setup, will be used by the Speed Protection as the rated
value.

MOTOR RATED EFFICIENCY

Range: 0.0 to 100.0% in steps of 1.0
Default: 100.0%
This setting represents the motor rated efficiency and is used by the ESA (electrical signature analysis) element
found under Monitoring. This setting is only available with order code option Extended (E) Monitoring.

EMERGENCY RESTART
Range: FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This feature must only be used in an emergency, as it defeats the purpose of the relay – protecting the motor.
The input selected by the setting is used to reset the motor thermal capacity used from its current value to 0%,
so that a hot motor may be restarted. The selected input also sets the Start Inhibit block functions lockout time to
zero. These are: Thermal Inhibit, Maximum Starting Rate and Time Between Starts. However, a Restart
Delay inhibit lockout will remain active (it may be used as a backspin timer) and any trip condition that remains
(such as a hot RTD) will still cause a trip.
In the event of a real emergency, the Emergency Restart input must remain asserted until the emergency is over.
All the associated output relays reset until the Emergency Restart Input is removed. However, the TCU does
not remain reset to zero if the Emergency Restart input remains asserted, the thermal model continues
calculating the TCU.
The Emrg Restart Alarm operand is asserted if the Emergency Restart input remains asserted for 10 seconds.

NUMBER OF STARTS TO LEARN

Range: 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Default: 3
This setting selects number of motor start and stop records to calculate learned data presented in the Setpoints
> Records > Motor Learned Data.

LOAD AVERAGE CALC. PERIOD

Range: 1 to 90 min in steps of 1 min

242 1601-0450
 Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

Default: 15 min
This setting adjusts the period of time over which the average motor load and power is calculated. The
calculation is ignored during motor starting.

SWITCHING DEVICE TYPE

Range: Breaker, Contactor
Default: Contactor
Default: Breaker
This setting specifies the type of switching device installed to stop or start the motor.

FIELD SWITCHING DEVICE TYPE

Range: Breaker, Contactor
Default: Breaker
This setting specifies the type of switching device installed to connect or disconnect the synchronous motor field.

Note:
This setpoint is not available when the setpoint SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR TYPE is set to None or the unit order code does
not have synchronous motor selected.

MOTOR LOAD FILTER INTERVAL

Range: 0 to 60 cycles in steps of 1 cycle (from firmware version 4.0
Range: 0 to 32 cycles in steps of 1 cycle (up to firmware version 3.x
Default: 0 cycles
This value (when non-zero) averages current and power factor for the programmed number of cycles using a
running average technique.This setting is intended for use on driving reciprocating loads or variable frequency
drives (VFD).
With the reciprocating load application, the number of cycles to average can be determined from current
waveform capture using the Oscillography/Datalogger feature. The second way to determine this setpoint is by
using the following relation:
N = P / 2, where N is the number of cycles to average and P is the number of poles on the motor.
For example: Set the MOTOR LOAD FILTER INTERVAL equal to 3 cycles for a motor driving reciprocating load
with 6 number of poles.
The latter approach of determining the cyclic load only applies to the applications where loads are coupled
directly to the motor (with no gear box).

Note:
When set greater than one cycle, Motor Load Filter Interval may increase trip/alarm times for the following protection
elements: Acceleration Time, Current Unbalance, Mechanical Jam, Overload, Thermal Model, Undercurrent, Power Factor,
Three-Phase Apparent Power, Three-Phase Reactive Power, Three-Phase Real Power and Under Power. No other elements
are affected. Trip/alarm times increase 16.7 ms (or 20msec @50Hz) for each additional cycle in the filter interval.

1601-0450 243
Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

 1 
F 36 66 "66 3
66 66 "66 
@E 65 ;76 1
C " 5" 5" 5" "5 "5 7 7

D   7 ;

BA := C  := := > > >
: : : : 67
@? 1 1/ 1/ 1/ 1/ 1/ 1/ 7
/       :

KHJ
I z
ON
ML qrp e
aY PQ` on hg
XW KJ jm f
ij
UUVT I ghf y
QK ON hg
ML ono f
JI PR` qs ik
VV ut y
UZ KJ hg
X\ I
[V xonw
f
_^ NOM ov ild
LS l | {
VU] PG
S c b

ƒ ƒ „
‹Œ‰ 6 6
Š‰ 0/ 0/
/ Ž  
1 >
<  ->
 06 ‘ 7;
6
 -$ ” • ’ 6 0<
0/6 Œ 77
 ‹‰ 3
  Š‰ : 1
' ' 7;
1  ”–‘ 
6
7; -0> -0> / 77
6 /6 ” ’ /6 <6
77 ! ˆ † † ‡ ! :
0/ Ž 0/ 0-
: =  “ =  $

)*+ )*+
/
)*+

:= 0= >
$8

$
/ ( —
‚ €
 6< }
€ 0
  5  -$6  0>
    0 -0
0  / /
   665 7

 ! 2    08
  1 " -9 €5 -9
7;
%$ '1
# /0  6 5  -
$
" . ( ~ 77
-$ # €#
!   '&& 87 0 " 0
 ,- % 6 :  87 $3 $ $"  78 €3 € €"
4 &6 4 &6

Figure 88: Motor Load Averaging Filter for VFD and Cyclic Load Motor Applications

244 1601-0450
 Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

EXCITER VDC FILTER LENGTH

Range: 2 to 30 cycles in steps of 1 cycle
Default: 2 cycles
This setting is only applicable to synchronous motor application.
The Exciter VDC filter is used as an additional filter used to smooth the field DC current and voltage signals. Its
purpose is to eliminate unwanted overshoots and noises from the DC measurements. This filter uses a running
average technique applied on samples of window length set by the setting Exciter VDC Filter Length.
The Exciter VDC filter is applicable to both field DC voltage and current. It proves improved stability and accuracy
and makes the system less prone to false triggers. However, you should be aware that it increases trip/alarm times
of the following functions.
● Field Undercurrent
● Field Overcurrent
● Field Overvoltage
● Field Undervoltage
● Field Overtemperature.
The Exciter VDC filter does not affect the field DC current input used in the motor state machine for determining
motor states (such as SM Field Applied, SM Stabilizing, and SM Running). Therefore, the filter does not extend to
the motor state determination process.

NUMBER OF POLES
Range: 2 to 64 in steps of 2
Default: 2
This setting represents the number of poles of the motor.

MAX. ACCELERATION TIME

Range: 1.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s (firmware version up to 3.xx)
Range: 1.00 to 250.00 s in steps of 0.01 s (firmware version 4.0 onwards
Default: 10.00 s
This setting specifies the maximum acceleration time. This setting can be estimated experimentally by starting a
given motor several times under various load and electrical conditions and measuring the starting time. Some
security margin should be applied.
This setting is used by the Acceleration Time element and Motor Start Statistics.
The Acceleration Time element operates if the motor is not in the Running state when this time expires.
Regardless of whether the Acceleration Time element is Enabled or Disabled, this setting is also required to
calculate the Motor Start Statistics when the motor doesn’t go in the Running state from the Start state, i.e.
unsuccessful motor start. For a successful motor start, motor Starting and Running states are used to calculate
the motor start statistics.

2-SPEED MOTOR PROTECTION

Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled

1601-0450 245
Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

Note:
2-Speed Motor Protection is used in Stator-Inter-Turn Fault element, Electrical Signature Analysis and Backspin protection.

This setting is used to enable the two-speed motor function. This function provides proper protection for a two-
speed motor where there are two different full load values. The two-speed functionality is required for motors having
two windings wound into one stator. One winding, when energized, provides one of the speeds. When the second
winding is energized, the motor takes on the speed determined by the second winding. The algorithm integrates the
heating at each speed into one thermal model using a common thermal capacity used register value for both
speeds. Using the relay for such applications provides several options, allowing the removal of traditional wiring and
interlocking.
● Use the front panel pushbuttons and provide necessary operate and interlock logic via FlexLogic.
● Use the external pushbuttons and provide necessary operate and interlock logic using FlexLogic as shown
below.
● Use a traditional external control schematic with some connections to the relay for control and protection.

SPEED2 MOTOR SWITCH

Range: Off, any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off
If the two-speed motor feature is used, this setting specifies a FlexLogic operand to indicate the current motor
speed. This is typically an indication that the contactor at speed 2 is energized. When the assigned FlexLogic
operand (typically a contact input operand) is asserted, the algorithm switches to speed 2 (high speed). If the
assigned FlexLogic operand is de-asserted, the algorithm switches to speed 1 (low speed). This allows the relay
to determine which settings must be active at any given time.

SPEED2 SWITCH 2-1 DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 5.00 s
This setting specifies the time delay to transfer from high to low speed. This allows the motor to slow down
before energizing at low speed. When the motor is switched from high speed to low speed, the Speed2 Trans
2-1 Op FlexLogic operand is set for time defined by the SPEED2 SWITCH 2-1 DELAY setting to allow inputs for
control logic of contactors and breakers at both speeds. FlexLogic operands required for contactor and breaker
control are provided.

SPEED2 MAX. ACCEL TIME

Range: 1.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 10.00 s
This setting is used by the Speed2 Acceleration Time element and Speed2 Motor Start.
When the setpoint 2-SPEED MOTOR PROTECTION is programmed as enabled, regardless of the Acceleration
Time element being Enabled or Disabled, this setting is also required to calculate the motor start statistics when
the motor does not go into the Running state from the Start state, i.e. unsuccessful motor start. Otherwise, in the
successful motor start case, motor Starting and Running states are used to calculate the motor start statistics.

SPEED2 CT PRIMARY
Range: 1 to 12000 A in steps of 1 A (firmware version up to 3.xx)

246 1601-0450
 Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

Range: 1 to 20000 A in steps of 1 A (firmware version 4.0 onwards)

Default: 500 A
This setting specifies the primary rating of the three-phase CTs installed at the speed 2 stator winding terminals.

SPEED2 MOTOR FLA

Range: 1 to 5000 A in steps of 1 A
Default: 100 A
This setting specifies the motor full load current for speed 2.

SPEED2 RATED SPEED

Range: 100 to 7200 RPM in steps of 1 RPM
Default: 3600 RPM
This setting specifies the motor rated speed for speed 2. In addition, this setting is also used by the Speed
element as the rated value.


8  ! " " !%!$ 9' 
  #$!%& 8 :;<
*+ @A BACD  EFG
 )  ! "  !" 8 
, !=>?
  ! " #$!%&'
(()
@A BACD  EFG
-./0 12/314 56104 /1/.  ! "  
4 172



Figure 89: Two-Speed Motor Protection

6.8.1 VARIABLE FEQUENCY DRIVES

Path: Setpoints > System > Motor > VFD

Note:
The VFD function is not available when the relay is used for synchronous motor applications (SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR
TYPE set to Brush-type or Brushless at Setpoints > System > Motor > Setup).

Some Variable Frequency Drives (VFD), for example pulse width modulated drives, generate significant distortion in
voltages introducing harmonics. However, distortion due to these harmonics is not as significant in currents as in
voltages. The functionality of various protection elements is made adaptive to the VFD motor applications
depending on the system configurations. The possible system configurations can be: (a) motor start and run
through the VFD only, (b) VFD with Bypass (BP) Switch i.e., motor run through the bypass switch without VFD but
the VFD is required for starting.
The VFD Function must be enabled in order to ensure proper performance of the relay for motor applications with
VFD. In the motor application when VFD can be bypassed via the Bypass Switch as shown in Figure 1(B), status of
the bypass switch must be configured as a selected input under setpoint BYPASS SWITCH.

1601-0450 247
Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

If the VFD Function is enabled and the Bypass Switch operand is not asserted (i.e., bypass switch is open) then the
algorithms adopt the following changes:
● The frequency tracking source is switched from three-phase voltages to three-phase currents. For the case
where currents are not available or system frequency cannot be measured from the available ac signals, the
power system nominal frequency is used as a default. All elements will function properly for a frequency
range of 3Hz to 72Hz.
● Thermal Model Voltage Dependent (VD) function is blocked automatically.

248 1601-0450
 Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

● The VFD Not Bypassed operand is asserted, which could be used to block the voltage elements via Block
setting of the elements.
● To mitigate oscillations, all motor current functions except Short Circuit, Ground Fault and Differential
elements use the Motor Load Averaging Filter of length setpoint MOTOR LOAD FILTER INTERVAL set
under Setpoints > System Setup > Motor
● When the VFD configuration support FUNCTION is enabled and the Bypass Switch operand is now asserted
(i.e. bypass switch is closed) then the frequency tracking source will be switched from currents to voltages.
All voltages elements will work as normal, VFD Not Bypassed operand will be de-asserted while VFD Bypass
operand will be asserted and all motor functions will then be using the normal RMS currents.

Note:
To ensure the proper working of the voltage related functions and metering, CTs and VTs must be on the motor side of the
VFD. In the case that the voltage inputs to the relay are measured at the busbar side of the VFD and there is a frequency
difference between the bus and motor sides of the VFD then voltage functions must not be used or must be blocked. In the
case that the voltage inputs to the relay are measured at motor side of the VFD, voltages may or may not be sinusoidal and
highly distorted depending on the VFD type. We recommend that voltage functions are blocked if VFD output voltages are not
sinusoidal and highly distorted. If VFD output voltages are substantially sinusoidal, which can be verified from the metering,
oscillography and data logger, then blocking of the voltage elements is not required.

&

!"

 #
$%$








 

 
 
 
 
 

 '())*+,*-./0

Figure 90: Possible VT Locations: Busbar or Motor Side of the VFD

With the VFD motor application, the motor protection relay uses the running average technique to smooth out the
phasor’s ripple due to the distortion generated by the VFD. When setpoint MOTOR LOAD FILTER INTERVAL is set

1601-0450 249
Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

to non-zero cycles, the Motor Load Averaging Filter can increase Trip or Alarm times for the following protection
elements:
● Acceleration Time
● Current Unbalance
● Mechanical Jam
● Overload
● Thermal Model
● Reduced Voltage Start
● Undercurrent
● Power Factor
● Three-Phase Apparent Power
● Three-Phase Reactive Power
● Three-Phase Real Power
● Under Power
The short circuit elements such as short circuit, ground fault, differential and TOC/IOC, will trip as per the
specification.
Note that when using this filter for the VFD motor application running at a low frequency, it will result in very long
delay times for the Trip or Alarm. For example, if the setpoint MOTOR LOAD FILTER INTERVAL is set to 10 cycles
and the motor is running at 20Hz (tracking frequency), then the Trip/Alarm delay is increased by 0.5 sec.
In order to avoid long Trip/Alarm delays, the Trip/Alarm delay is limited internally to the number of cycles equal to
the minimum of the maximum delay at nominal frequency and average filter delay at tracking frequency as follows:

where:
● N = The setpoint Motor Load Filter Interval for the number of cycles in the range 0 to 32
● Fn = The nominal system frequency in Hz (50 or 60 Hz)
● F = The tracking frequency in Hz
This adjustment to the filter length to avoid large Trip/Alarm delay is only applicable when the VFD Function is
enabled and the Bypass Switch operand is not asserted. This adjustment is not applicable when this filter is applied
to motor application with reciprocating load. Following examples shows the Trip/Alarm times delay calculation with
the above mentioned adjustment to the filter length when the average filter of length MOTOR LOAD FILTER
INTERVAL is applied for the VFD applications:
Example 1:
● Setpoint MOTOR LOAD FILTER INTERVAL, N = 20 cycles
● Tracking frequency, F = 40Hz
● Setpoint Nominal Frequency, Fn = 60Hz
● Maximum time delay @ Nominal Frequency = (1/Fn) x 16 cycles x 1000 = ~270 msec
● Actual time delay @ or tracking Frequency = (1/F) x 20 cycles x 1000 = ~500 msec

250 1601-0450
 Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

The Trip/Alarm time delay is then = Min(270, 500) = 270msec

Example 2:
● Setpoint MOTOR LOAD FILTER INTERVAL, N = 4 cycles
● Tracking frequency, F = 70 Hz
● Nominal Frequency, Fn = 60 Hz
● Maximum time delay @ Nominal Frequency = (1/Fn) x 16 cycles x 1000 = ~270 msec
● Actual time delay @ Actual or tracking Frequency = (1/F) x 4 cycles x 1000 = ~60 msec
The Trip/Alarm time delay is then = Min(270, 60) = 60 msec
For the VFD motor application, setpoint MOTOR LOAD FILTER INTERVAL (under Setpoints > System Setup >
Motor) can be determined from the captured load waveforms obtained from the Datalogger or Oscillography
features by following the steps below:
1. Capture the pre-filtered load analog value from the Datalogger/Oscillography. This analog value is defined as
Motor Load in the Thermal Model analog values. Motor Load is the average of three RMS input currents and
is applied at the input of motor load averaging filter.
2. By analyzing the captured waveform in Step 1, estimated the length of oscillation that repeats itself at regular
intervals. Estimation of length must be done in nominal power cycles.
3. Set the Motor Load Filter Interval equal to the value estimated in Step 2 plus a recommended margin of 1
cycle.
4. Capture the Fltd Motor Load analog value from the Datalogger/Oscillography. Fltd Motor Load is the
motor load current after filtration of oscillations due to VFD.
5. Analyze the captured waveform in Step 4 to see if the estimate value from Step 2 is appropriate enough to
mitigate the oscillations. If needed, repeat Steps 1-4 in order to achieved the appropriate value of the setpoint
MOTOR LOAD FILTER INTERVAL until oscillations become negligible.

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the VFD configuration support.

BYPASS SWITCH
Range: FlexLogic operand
Default Off
This setting defines the digital input to determine if motor is powered by the VFD or directly from the AC source
through bypass switch. The VFD Bypassed operand will be asserted when VFD is bypassed i.e. motor is directly
powered by the AC system or the utility. This operand can be used to block the voltage based elements via
Block setting of the desired elements if this operand is not asserted i.e. VFD is not bypassed.

Note:
We recommend blocking the voltage based elements via Block setting of the desired elements if VFD Not Bypassed is
asserted.

STARTING FREQUENCY
Range: 3.0 to 72.0 Hz in steps of 0.1 Hz

1601-0450 251
Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

Default: 10.0 Hz
This setting defines starting frequency, which provides faster tracking to the frequency once motor is energized.
For example, in the motor application when VFD is required at the starting and normally the starting frequency is
10 Hz then set the Starting Frequency equal to 10 Hz rather than nominal system frequency. If this value is not
known then simply set this value equal to the system Nominal Frequency.
'() B@AN<O

 HI

DEF;=GF:J
KLMF=L
D;<;@A

 !"!#

 $%&!% *+,

BC?<AA
DEF;=G
D;<;@A

  89:;<=; >:?@;A

 1 7
2 2
    3   3
  4 4
  5 5
  6 6
hijklkmnopqr

 -./.0

PQR STUTV WTXYVYZ U[VT\][ U[Y ^_` PaR STUTV WTXYVYZ U[VT\][ U[Y ^_` XbU[
acWdee fXbUg[

Figure 91: Typical Motor Applications with VFD and Bypass Switch

252 1601-0450
 Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

> >
= =
L < <
@/ E 4;: 4;:
@ K/ @H 6 6
G/  89 /0 89
F/ G. . 7  7
. / # 63 0/
365  54 
, 43 
2 - 23 

! 
D D 
C 
C 


( 1

E@
H

&- .#
@- @
 / /
 G 
B// F./ G.- 1 (
  

)*+

)*+ )*+

# #
> K/ " C >
=  K- K- =
< &. &. <
4;:   / 4;:

@ /.    
6 1   @ @/ E   6 '10
89
'E
 G/ -J 
G/ .. B-    89
@ F/  F/ G    /
7
.  . KM/  . " C  !  7 -
365  B  G G % '10  365 
43 . @  @E @$ @$ #$ B/  43 .-
2 -- . / / H " A  (' 2 -
-K -K.  @H I$ "$  @ IC C"
!
@? &&
, !  J  $ J C  % ,

Figure 92: VFD Logic

1601-0450 253
Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

6.9 SWITCHING DEVICE

The relay supports two types of motor switching devices: breakers and contactors. A breaker operation is controlled
by two coils labeled “Trip” and “Close”. Each of them has to be separately energized with a short pulse in order to
change the state of the breaker. A contactor operation is controlled by a single coil. When the coil is energized, the
main contacts are closed and when the coil is de-energized, the main contacts are open. You need to select either
“Breaker” or “Contactor” and the selection must match the actual device type used.
The selection is made in Setpoints > System > Motor > Switching Device Type.

254 1601-0450
 Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

6.10 BREAKERS
The status of each winding breaker is detected by monitoring the state of either one, or two contact inputs. We
recommend you monitor the status of the breaker using both breaker auxiliary contacts 52a, and 52b. However
using only one of them is also acceptable.
The breaker connection/disconnection to/from the power system is provided by monitoring the contact input BKR
CONNECTED. If the contact input is asserted, the breaker is considered to be connected to the primary system.
When the breaker is determined to be disconnected, the breaker state is shown to be neither open, nor closed. The
trolley is integrated with a circuit breaker (CB), which works as a Disconnect Switch. CB Trolley status based on the
contact input selected under the CONNECTED and BKR TROLLEY setpoints.
Path: Setpoints > System > Breakers

NAME
Range: Up to 13 alphanumeric characters
Default: BKRX

CONTACT INPUT 52a

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
Selects the Contact Input connected to the Breaker auxiliary contact 52a.

CONTACT INPUT 52b

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
Selects the Contact Input connected to the Breaker auxiliary contact 52b.

CONNECTED
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
Select a contact input to show whether the breaker is connected (Racked-in, or disconnect switches switched-
on), or disconnected (racked-out, or disconnect switches switched-off) from the system.

BKR TROLLEY
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
Select a contact input to show whether the Breaker Trolley is connected or disconnected from the system.

TRIP RELAY SELECT

Range: Off, Any Output Relay
Default: Relay 1

1601-0450 255
Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

This setting is typically available for two or more breaker applications. For single breaker applications, the setting
is hidden and trip relay selection is defaulted to Relay 1.Any output relay from the list of available output relays
can be programmed for breaker tripping action.

CLOSE RELAY SELECT

Range: Off, Relay X
Default: Relay 2
This setting is typically available for two or more breaker applications. For single breaker applications, the setting
is hidden and close relay selection is defaulted to Relay 2.Any output relay from the list of available output relays
can be programmed for breaker closing action.

Breaker status depending on availability of contacts 52a and 52b

52a Contact 52b Contact
Breaker Status
Configured Configured

Open Closed

52a contact open 52b contact

Yes Yes 52a contact closed 52b contact open
closed
Yes No 52a contact open 52a contact closed
No Yes 52b contact closed 52b contact open
No No Breaker Not Configured Breaker Not Configured

Breaker status with both contacts 52a and 52b configured

52a Contact 52b Contact
Breaker Status
Configured Configured
Off On BKR Opened
On Off BKR Closed
On On BKR Unknown State
Off Off BKR Unknown State

256 1601-0450
 Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

Figure 93: Breaker Connected/Disconnected (Racked-In/Racked-Out) Detection

^][ p SS^[

`cd 1  Fqsfdtu

C Aj aej    jaj akk!

R
lj  a ! e rjrj ane
o

S 

5a A WY ZY[\  ]^_S

F a !=1, OO = 0 `cd 1  Or!

@
N
D
PB &IJK B6IL4I6 M&QTIJ

@
N
D WY ZY[\  ]^_S
C
R
`cd 1 e!

S 

5b A
@
N
F a !=1, OO = 0 D

PB &IJK B6IL4I6 QPIUIJ

"#$%&'()* '+$-./2 WY ZY[\  ]^_S

@
N C
3B46 79. :;.;$<
D R `cd 1  !

"#$%&'()* '+$-./2
3B46 79> :;.;?:<
&IJK L&L6V

WY ZY[\  ]^_S
X
C EG mH
@ R `cd 1 f gh ijaj
N
D

8


Figure 94: Breaker State Detection logic diagram

Path: Setpoints > System > Contactor > Contactor 1

If the selection in Setpoints > System > Motor > Switching Device Type is Contactor, the menu shows the
following:Path: Setpoints > System > Contactor

NAME
Range: Up to 13 alphanumeric characters
Default: Contactor 1

1601-0450 257
Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

CONTACT INPUT 52a

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
Selects the Contact Input connected to the contactor auxiliary contact 52a.

CONTACT INPUT 52b

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
Selects the Contact Input connected to the contactor auxiliary contact 52b.

CONNECTED
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
Select a contact input to show whether the contactor is connected (Racked-in, or disconnect switches switched-
on) or disconnected (racked-out, or disconnect switches switched-off) to the system. This setpoint is only
applicable to the withdrawable type of contactors

TRIP RELAY SELECT

Range: Off, Any Output Relay
Default: Relay 1
Output Relay 1 can be programmed for contactor tripping action. If, for example, instance Relay 1 is
programmed under this setpoint for tripping, the operation of the output will follow the Trip Logic

CLOSE RELAY SELECT

Range: Off, Relay X
Default: Off
Selection of any auxiliary relay assigns the Start command to the selected output relay. The selected auxiliary
output relay under this setpoint follows the Close Logic.

Note:
Any relay that is selected as Close Relay will not then be available for selection in any element.

Note:
The logic for contactor configuration and the Open/Close status is shown in the tables below:

Contactor status depending on availability of contacts 52a and 52b

52a Contact 52b Contact
Breaker Status
Configured Configured

Open Closed

52a contact open 52a contact closed

Yes Yes
52b contact closed 52b contact open

258 1601-0450
 Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

52a Contact 52b Contact

Breaker Status
Configured Configured

Open Closed

Yes No 52a contact open 52a contact closed

No Yes 52b contact closed 52b contact open
No No Breaker Not Configured Breaker Not Configured

Contactor status with both contacts 52a and 52b configured

52a Contact 52b Contact
Breaker Status
Configured Configured
Off On BKR Opened
On Off BKR Closed
On On BKR Unknown State
Off Off BKR Unknown State

 !"#$% &'#'(&

*+ -+./  234S
C55 6 5 
S

AN
D *+ -+./  234S
CC  )
R C55 C 5 
F   =1, OO = 0
879:;7<>?@BE

Figure 95: Contactor Connected/Disconnected (Racked-In/Racked-Out) Detection

1601-0450 259
Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

EGHIJE KJSSGIJ
C46/a7/49 4/ C46MP;

O
R

A/ 01a2/ 461 746/a7/ 894;9a<<1=

S

>/4 4t/8t/ 910a?2 % a6= C,$@B
CAC  5 a
`defghijk lneopqr suv wxx s y QUJVUWIYZ W[JHG\]S
C46/a7/49 C46MP;t91=
!
N
D

!
N
D QUJVUWIYZ W[JHG\]S
O
R C46/a7/49 C0421=

S


CAC  5 b !
N
`defghijk lneopqr suv wxx s y D

O QUJVUWIYZ W[JHG\]S
F    ! R C46/a7/49 8161=
(  ) N
D
F   
( )

L&: ''*+
X 3"m#
O $
R
" m# QUJVUWIYZ W[JHG\]S
!
N ,ACT C46/a7/49 6^_6 $/a/
D
O z{|}~€‚ƒ„
R %

*L-L.
(cc)

Figure 96: Contactor State Detection logic diagram

260 1601-0450
 Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

6.11 SWITCHES
The Single Line Diagram (SLD) relays can be configured with up to 9 disconnect switches. The disconnect switch
detection is performed by monitoring the state/states of either one or preferably two contact inputs 89a and 89b.
Monitoring the status of the switch using both auxiliary contacts 89a, and 89b is recommended, however using only
one of them is also possible.When both contacts are programmed, the switch can be monitored for state
discrepancy, i.e. both auxiliary contacts OFF, or both auxiliary contacts ON during operation. Discrepancy Alarm
Delay can be programmed to reflect the transition of the switch during operation from Closed to Opened, and
Opened to Closed. If no auxiliary contact discrepancy is detected after the time delay expires, the switch will be in
one of its normal states, i.e. Opened or Closed. However, if contact inputs discrepancy is detected after the time
delay expires, the relay will issue a SW1(9) Discrepancy target message and illuminate the ALARM LED. The
switch discrepancy condition can be reset by the operand assigned under Reset Alarm setpoint, providing both
contact inputs 89a and 89b show normal states on the relay.
Path: Setpoints > System > Switches > Switch 1(9)

NAME
Range: 13 alphanumeric characters
Default: SW 1
Assign a user-defined name to the disconnect switch. This name is used in the SLD, flash messages related to
disconnect switch 1, and the event recorder.

CONTACT INPUT 89a

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
Select an operand (usually NO aux. contact wired to contact input in the relay) to reflect the status of the
Disconnect Switch auxiliary contact 89a.

CONTACT INPUT 89b

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
Select an operand (usually NC auxiliary contact wired to contact input in the relay) to reflect the status of the
Disconnect Switch auxiliary contact 89b.

ALARM DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 2.000 s
This setting specifies the required time interval to overcome transient disagreement between the 89a and 89b
auxiliary contacts during disconnect switch operation. If transient disagreement still exists after this time has
expired, SW1(9) Discrepancy FlexLogic operand is asserted for alarm and/or blocking purposes.

RESET ALARM
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

1601-0450 261
Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

Select an operand from the list of FlexLogic operands, which when asserted resets the Switch Discrepancy
state. Please note that resetting the discrepancy alarm will work only after no discrepancy condition exists
between the switch aux contacts 89a and 89b.

OPEN RELAY SELECT

Range: Off, Relay 1, ..., Relay X
Default: Off
This setpoints selects an output relay from the list of available output relays that is used to open the Disconnect
Switch once an open command is issued either from the front panel or remotely. This output relay is controlled
from the Switch Control menu.

CLOSE RELAY SELECT

Range: Off, Relay 1, ..., Relay X
Default: Off
This setpoint selects an output relay from the list of available output relays that is used to close the Disconnect
Switch upon issued close command from either front panel or remotely. This output relay is controlled from
Switch Control menu.

Note:
The selection of Output Relay for Open Relay Select and Close Relay Select has higher priority than other settings as follows:
If an Output Relay is first set to Operate"under a protection element for example, and then this same Output Relay is
selected under either Open Relay Select or Close Relay Select, this Output Relay is automatically reverted to Do Not
Operate and hidden from the menu of the protection element. Deselecting the Output Relay from Open Relay Select or
Close Relay Select unhides the output in the menu of the protection element showing the setting value Do Not Operate.

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
This setting disables or enables the disconnect switch operation events.

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-Reset, Latched
Default: Enabled
This setting disables or enables the disconnect switch operation Targets.
The logic for Switch configuration and the Open, and Close status is shown in the following tables.

Switch configuration with Open and Close status

Contact Input 89a Contact Input 89b
SwitchStatus
setpoint programming setpoint programming

Open Closed

89a contact open 89b contact

Yes Yes 89a contact closed 89b contact open
closed

262 1601-0450
 Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

Contact Input 89a Contact Input 89b

SwitchStatus
setpoint programming setpoint programming

Open Closed

Yes No 89a contact open 89a contact closed

No Yes 89b contact closed 89b contact open
No No Not Configured Not Configured

Switch status with both contacts 89a and 89b programmed

89a Contact Status 89b Contact Status Disconnect Switch Status

Off On SW[X] Opened

On Off SW[X] Closed
On On SW[X] Intermittent, SW[X] Discrepancy
Off Off SW[X] Intermittent, SW[X] Discrepancy

1601-0450 263
Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

R

Q X
P

 V opmn
 jl
O T kh
N C ji
hg
L
M

BW
U
LK 
BS
I
H
G&
GF
ED
&

R R R
  J 
Q Q Q
P
P
P

    T
 U  U B C  W
O O T O [
N BT N N CT
LM  LM VT bc`a` cf >? LM
^_ de W
L
 L
 ] LK

K BS K BS BS



  
  
 X  [ 
R U 
T
C 
 C
T U  
Q Z [ @A 
P

 WY C @ BT T 
  \ C 

O
N
L >?
M
>?
LK 
BS
=>?

:;< :;< :;< :;<

>?

:;<

  R

R

  /. 8 Q /. 8 Q
P
P

    - 7$
,$ -7  -, $-7 
    + 6  +$' 76 
  ' -5
  )*( 4 O * 95
)( 4 O

 
  3 N  N 



 &'% 2 LM &'% 32 LM
#$ 01 #$ 01
  " LK
" LK

  !   !
 

Figure 97: Disconnect Switch State Detection logic diagram

264 1601-0450
 Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

6.12 FLEXCURVES
The relay incorporates four programmable FlexCurves - FlexCurve A, B, C and D. The points for these curves are
defined in the EnerVista D&I Setup software. User-defined curves can be used for Time Overcurrent protection in
the same way as IEEE, IAC, ANSI, and IEC curves. Each of the four FlexCurves has 120-point settings for entering
times to reset and operate, 40 points for reset (from 0 to 0.98 times the Pickup value) and 80 for operate (from 1.03
to 20 times the Pickup). This data is converted into two continuous curves by linear interpolation between data
points.
Path: Setpoints > System > FlexCurves

Note:
Use EnerVista D&I Setup software to select, design or modify any of the FlexCurves.

The following table for FlexCurves A, B, C, and D details the 120 points as well as the characteristic for each of
them, and a blank cell to write the time value when the operation (for I > Ipickup) or the reset (for I < Ipickup) is
required.
RESET TIME ms RESET TIME ms OPERATE TIME OPERATE TIME OPERATE TIME OPERATE TIME
ms ms ms ms
0.00 0.68 1.03 2.9 4.9 10.5

1601-0450 265
Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

0.05 0.70 1.05 3.0 5.0 11.0

0.10 0.72 1.1 3.1 5.1 11.5
0.15 0.74 1.2 3.2 5.2 12.0
0.20 0.76 1.3 3.3 5.3 12.5
0.25 0.78 1.4 3.4 5.4 13.0
0.30 0.80 1.5 3.5 5.5 13.5

0.35 0.82 1.6 3.6 5.6 14.0

0.40 0.84 1.7 3.7 5.7 14.5

0.45 0.86 1.8 3.8 5.8 15.0

0.48 0.88 1.9 3.9 5.9 15.5

0.50 0.90 2.0 4.0 6.0 16.0

0.52 0.91 2.1 4.1 6.5 16.5

0.54 0.92 2.2 4.2 7.0 17.0

0.56 0.93 2.3 4.3 7.5 17.5

0.58 0.94 2.4 4.4 8.0 18.0

0.60 0.95 2.5 4.5 8.5 18.5

0.62 0.96 2.6 4.6 9.0 19.0

0.64 0.97 2.7 4.7 9.5 19.5

0.66 0.98 2.8 4.8 10.0 20.0

The first two columns (40 points) correspond to the RESET curve. The other 4 columns, with 80 points in total,
correspond to the OPERATE curve. The reset characteristic values are between 0 and 0.98xPKP, and the operation
values are between 1.03 and 20xPKP.
The final curve is created by means of a linear interpolation from the defined points. This is a separate process for
the RESET and the OPERATE curve.
The definition of these points is performed in a separate module from the relay, using a configuration program
included in EnerVista D&I Setup software, which incorporates a graphical environment for viewing the curve, thus
making it easy to create.

Note:
The relay using a given FlexCurve applies linear approximation for times lying between the user-entered points. Therefore,
special care must be taken when setting the points close to a Pickup multiple of 1; that is, 0.97*Ipickup and 0.98*Ipickup
should be set to a similar value as 1.03*Ipickup. Otherwise, the thermal model may incorrectly estimate the TCU% level
resulting in undesired behavior.

FLEXCURVE A, B, C, D CONFIGURATION WITH EnerVista D&I Setup software

266 1601-0450
 Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

EnerVista D&I Setup software allows for easy configuration and management of FlexCurves and their associated
data points. Prospective FlexCurves can be configured from a selection of standard curves to provide the best
approximate fit, then specific data points can be edited afterwards. Alternately, curve data can be imported from a
specified file (.csv format) by selecting the Import Data From setting.
Curves and data can be exported, viewed, and cleared by clicking the appropriate buttons. FlexCurves A, B, C, and
D are customized by editing the operating time (ms) values at pre-defined per-unit current multiples. Note that the
pickup multiples start at zero (implying the “reset time”), operating time below Pickup, and operating time above
Pickup.

1601-0450 267
Chapter 6 - System Setpoints

268 1601-0450
 CHAPTER 7

INPUT AND OUTPUT SETPOINTS

Chapter 7 - Input and Output Setpoints

270 1601-0450
 Chapter 7 - Input and Output Setpoints

7.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter describes the Device setpoint menu settings in detail.
This chapter contains the following sections:
Chapter Overview 271
Inputs 272
Outputs 277

1601-0450 271
Chapter 7 - Input and Output Setpoints

7.2 INPUTS

Setpoints Device

System
Contact Inputs
Inputs
Data
VirtualCapture
Inputs
Outputs
Analog Inputs * Not for F/W 4.0 or later

Protection
Remote Inputs*

Monitoring * Remote Inputs is only available when

IEC 61850 is selected in the order code

Control

FlexLogic
Testing
894331A1

Figure 98: Inputs Display Hierarchy

7.2.1 CONTACT INPUTS

The relay is equipped with a number of Contact Inputs, all of which are programmable apart from the ACCESS
switch input. These digital inputs have default names to match the functions of the inputs (differential, speed,
emergency restart, remote reset and spare).However, in addition to their default settings they can also be
programmed for use as generic inputs to set up trips and alarms or for monitoring purposes based on external
contact inputs. These Contact Inputs are dry input signals, which use an internal DC voltage source.
The Contact Inputs are either open or closed with a programmable debounce time to prevent false operation from
induced voltage. The debounce time is adjustable as per manufacturer specifications.
A raw status is scanned for all Contact Inputs synchronously at the constant rate of one protection pass (1/8 cycle)
as shown in the figure below. The DC input voltage is compared to a user-settable threshold. A new Contact Input
state must be maintained for a user-configurable debounce time in order for the relay to validate the new contact
state. In the figure below, the debounce time is set at 2.5 ms; thus the 3rd sample in a row validates the change of
state (mark no. 2 in the diagram). Once validated (debounced), the new state will be declared and a FlexLogic
operand will be asserted at the time of a new protection pass. A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence that
validates the new state is used when logging the change of the Contact Input into the Event Recorder (mark no. 1 in
the diagram).
Protection and control elements, as well as FlexLogic equations and timers, are executed eight times in a power
system cycle. The protection pass duration is controlled by the frequency tracking mechanism. The FlexLogic

272 1601-0450
 Chapter 7 - Input and Output Setpoints

operand reflecting the debounced state of the contact is updated at the protection pass following the debounce
(marked no. 2 on the figure below). The update is performed at the beginning of the protection pass so all protection
and control functions, as well as FlexLogic equations, are fed with the updated states of the Contact Inputs.
The FlexLogic operand response time to the Contact Input change is related to the debounce time setting plus up to
one protection pass (variable and depending on system frequency if frequency tracking enabled). For example, 8
protection passes per cycle on a 60 Hz system correspond to a protection pass every 2.1 ms. With a contact
debounce time setting of 3.0 ms, the FlexLogic™ operand-assert time limits are: 4.2 + 0.0 = 4.2 ms and 4.2 + 2.1 =
6.3 ms. The 4.2 ms is the minimum protection pass period that contains a debounce time, 3.0 ms.
Regardless of the contact debounce time setting, the Contact Input event is time-stamped with 1 protection pass
accuracy using the time of the first scan corresponding to the new state (mark no. 1 below). Therefore, the time
stamp reflects a change in the DC voltage across the Contact Input terminals that was not accidental as it was
subsequently validated using the debounce timer. The debounce algorithm is symmetrical: the same procedure and
debounce time are used to filter the LOW-HIGH (marks no.1 and 2 in the figure below) and HIGH-LOW (marks no.
3 and 4 below) transitions.

Figure 99: Contact Input Debouncing Mechanism and Time-stamping Sample Timing

Path: Setpoints > Inputs > Contact Inputs

The Contact Inputs menu contains configuration settings for each Contact Input as well as voltage threshold for all
Contact Inputs.

NAME
Range: Up to 13 alphanumeric characters
Default: CI 1

1601-0450 273
Chapter 7 - Input and Output Setpoints

An alphanumeric name may be assigned to a Contact Input for diagnostic, setting, and event recording
purposes. The CI X ON (Logic 1) FlexLogic operand corresponds to Contact Input X being closed, while CI X
OFF corresponds to Contact Input X being open. The default names of the contact inputs are matched to the
functions of the inputs (differential, speed, emergency restart, remote reset and spare). However, in addition to
their default settings they can also be programmed for use as generic inputs to set up trips and alarms or for
monitoring purposes based on external contact inputs

DEBOUNCE TIME
Range: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5 ms
Default: 10.0 ms
The Debounce Time defines the time required for the contact to overcome ‘contact bouncing’ conditions. As this
time differs for different contact types and manufacturers, set it as a maximum contact debounce time (per
manufacturer specifications) plus some margin to ensure proper operation.

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
For example, to use Contact Input F1 as a status input from the breaker 52b contact, to seal-in the trip relay and
record it in the Event Records menu, make the following settings changes:
CONTACT INPUT 1 NAME: 52b
CONTACT INPUT 1 EVENTS: Enabled

Note:
The 52b contact is closed when the breaker is open and open when the breaker is closed.

7.2.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS

The relay is equipped with 64 Virtual Inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input signals from
the keypad or from communications protocols. This has the following advantages over Contact Inputs only:
● The number of logic inputs can be increased without introducing additional hardware.
● Logic functions can be invoked from a remote location over a single communication channel.
● The same logic function can be invoked both locally via contact input or front panel keypad, and/or remotely
via communications.
● Panel switches can be replaced entirely by virtual switches to save cost and wiring.
All Virtual Input operands are defaulted to Off (logic 0) unless the appropriate input signal is received.
Path: Setpoints > Inputs > Virtual Inputs > Virtual Input

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
If this setting is disabled, the input is OFF (logic 0) regardless of any attempt to alter the input. If enabled, the
input operates as shown on the logic diagram below, and generates output FlexLogic operands in response to
received input signals and the applied settings.

274 1601-0450
 Chapter 7 - Input and Output Setpoints

NAME
Range: Up to 13 Alphanumeric Characters
Default: VI 1
An alphanumeric name may be assigned to a Virtual Input for diagnostic, setting, and event recording purposes.

TYPE
Range: Latched, Self-reset
Default: Latched
There are two types of operation: self-reset and latched. If VIRTUAL INPUT x TYPE is “Self-Reset,” when the
input signal transits from OFF to ON the output operand will be set to ON for only one evaluation of the
FlexLogic equations, then return to OFF. If set to “Latched,” the virtual input sets the state of the output operand
to the same state as the most recent received input.
The self-reset operating mode generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the FlexLogic equations
(i.e., a pulse of one protection pass). If the operand is to be used anywhere other than internally in a FlexLogic
equation, it will likely have to be lengthened in time. A FlexLogic timer with a delayed reset time can perform this
function.

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

S

S
VT I T 1
FI T I :
D=0
E=1 A
 
ViL L 1 Lt I=1 T 
!"#$%&'() *#+,./2
L- O
ViL L 1 Lt FF =0 A Dt L 3 V 1 I

 
S

S
VT I T 1
T E: A
L 

845679;<>?@B
-L

Figure 100: Virtual Inputs Scheme Logic

7.2.3 REMOTE INPUTS

Remote inputs provide a means of exchanging digital state information between Ethernet-networked devices
supporting IEC 61850. Remote inputs that create FlexLogic operands at the receiving relay are extracted from
GOOSE messages originating in remote devices.
Remote input 1 must be programmed to replicate the logic state of a specific signal from a specific remote device
for local use. The programming is performed by the three settings shown in the Virtual Inputs section.
Path: Setpoints > Inputs > Remote Inputs

1601-0450 275
Chapter 7 - Input and Output Setpoints

NAME
Range: Up to 13 Alphanumeric Characters
Default: VI 1
An alphanumeric name may be assigned to a Remote Input for diagnostic, setting, and event recording
purposes.

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
This setting enables event generation whenever Remote Input Status is updated.

276 1601-0450
 Chapter 7 - Input and Output Setpoints

7.3 OUTPUTS

 
 
 ./01/0 23456 7 897:;2<=

 !"#" $"%#&'(

)&#%&# *(+",- STUVTU WXYZ[ \ ]^_` VabcaZddXe
Zf gYbfX
   hi'#&"+ )&#%&#- >?@A?@ BCDEF G HIJK L@EM@ NOPQRQ@

   jk"+lm )&#%&#-


  
n   opqrsotuvwxy

z{|{} ~ z{|{}  z{|{} € z{|{} 

Figure 101: Outputs Display Hierarchy

7.3.1 OUTPUT RELAYS

The relay is equipped with four Form-C output relays. Each relay has normally open (NO) and normally closed (NC)
contacts and can switch up to 8 A at either 250 V AC or 30 V DC with a resistive load. The NO or NC state is
determined by the ‘no power’ state of the relay outputs.

TRIP AND CLOSE RELAYS

All four output relays may be programmed for fail-safe or non-fail-safe operation. When in fail-safe mode, output
relay activation or a loss of control power will cause the contacts to go to their power down state.
Example:
● A fail-safe NO contact closes when the relay is powered up (if no prior unreset trip conditions) and will open
when activated (tripped) or when the 859 loses control power.
● A non-fail-safe NO contact remains open when the relay is powered up (unless a prior unreset trip condition)
and will close only when activated (tripped). If control power is lost while the output relay is activated (NO
contacts closed) the NO contacts will open. These Auxiliary Relays can be energized from the menu of the
protection or control feature or from their respective menus when assigning a FlexLogic operand (trigger)
under the setpoint Aux Rly # Operate. By default, Aux Relay 1 and 2 are programmed for tripping and alarm
purposes, respectively. They are labeled Trip, Alarm, Aux 1 and Aux 2.

1601-0450 277
Chapter 7 - Input and Output Setpoints

Depending on how an Aux. Relay is assigned, one of the following logic diagrams apply:
● If any of the auxiliary output relays are programmed under the Breaker or Contactor menu for tripping, the
operation of the output follows the Trip logic outlined in the logic diagram (Relay 1 TRIP Selected for Breaker
1 logic diagram) below.
● If any of the auxiliary output relays are programmed under Breaker or Contactor menu for closing, the
operation of the output follows the Close logic diagram (Close Selected for Breaker 1 logic diagram).
● If the auxiliary output is not programmed for tripping or closing a breaker, the operation of the output follows
the generic relay logic from logic diagram (Auxiliary relays general logic).
The Trip and Close selected auxiliary relays will follow the respective Trip and Close logic, meaning they will have
fixed operating characteristics as they depend on switching device feedback for resetting.
Any auxiliary output relay, when selected for switching device tripping or closing, is excluded from the list for
selection from the menu of all elements.
The operation of output relays selected for breaker Trip and breaker Close are breaker-controlled relays designed to
be controlled by the state of the breaker as monitored by a 52a contact, 52b contact, or both.
If the selection for TYPE setpoint is Dropoff, Trip and Close relay operation follows the logic outlined below:
● The Trip and Close relays reset after breaker is detected in a state corresponding to the command. When a
command is sent to one of these special relays, it remains operated until the requested change of the breaker
state is confirmed and the initiating condition has reset.
● If the command resets without a change of the breaker state, the output relay is reset after a default interval
of 2 seconds.
● If neither of the breaker auxiliary contacts 52a nor 52b is programmed to a logic input, the Trip Relay resets
after a default interval of 100 ms after the initiating input resets. The Close Relay is reset after 200 ms.
● The Dropoff Time setpoint is available only when the output relay is selected as Dropoff. In all other cases
the Dropoff Time setpoint is hidden and deactivated. The default setting for the Dropoff time is 100 ms.
If the selection is Latched, the relay is energized by any trip or open command and remains energized upon
element dropout. Latched auxiliary outputs can be reset with a reset command.
If Self-Reset type is selected, the output relay is energized when the corresponding element operates and it
stays energized until the element drops out.

DWELL TIMER
When the input energizing quantity is true, output is also activated at the same time instance. If the input energizing
quantity stays activated for a time period shorter than the predefined amount of time “pickup value” output stays
activated for “pickup value” time (even if the input energizing quantity is activated again in between.
If the input energizing quantity stays activated for a time period longer than the predefined amount of time “pickup
value”, output is deactivated when the input energizing quantity is deactivated.

7.3.1.1 RELAY SELECTED FOR BREAKER TRIP

Path:Setpoints > Outputs > Output Relays > Aux Relay 1

NAME
Range: Up to 13 alphanumeric characters
Default: Trip
The setpoint is used to name the Trip relay by selecting up to 13 alphanumeric characters.

278 1601-0450
 Chapter 7 - Input and Output Setpoints

SEAL-IN TIME (displayed only if Type=Pulsed)

Range: 0.00 to 9.99 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.10 s
This setting defines the time to be added to the Reset time of Relay 1 “Trip” output, thus extending its pulse
width. This is useful for those applications where the 52 contacts reporting the breaker state are faster than the
52 contacts that are responsible for interrupting the coil current.

BLOCK
Range: Disabled, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Disabled
This setting defines a Block to the Trip output relay. When the selected input is asserted, the Trip output relay is
blocked.

OPERATE
Range: Off, On, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setpoint provides a selection of any operand from the list of FlexLogic or communications, which can be
used to energize the Trip output relay.
When set to On, the output relay is constantly asserted (On=1).
When set to Off and no FlexLogic operand is selected, the output relay operates as set in individual protection
elements.

Note:
Setting OPERATE to On supersedes individual protection function settings.

TYPE
Range: Pickup, Dropoff, Dwell, Pulse, Pickup/Dropoff, Self-Reset, Latched
Default: Pickup
This setting defines the sequence type of the Trip output relay. The functionality is described in the Outputs
section.

OPERATION
Range: Non-Failsafe, Failsafe
Default: Non-Failsafe
Failsafe operation causes the output relay to be energized when the Trip condition signal is low and de-
energized when the same signal is high. A failsafe relay also changes state (if not already activated by an
operand driving this output relay) when control power is removed. Conversely a non-failsafe relay is de-
energized in its normal non-activated state and will not change state when control power is removed (if not
already activated by a protection element).

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled

1601-0450 279
Chapter 7 - Input and Output Setpoints

Default: Enabled

Note:
When the setpoint Function in the protection element menu is set to "Trip", the output relays selected under the Breaker menu
for breaker tripping need to be re-selected from the protection element menu. These output relays will not be operational even
if selected to operate from the protection element menu, if the function is set to "Alarm", "Latched Alarm", or “Configurable”.

280 1601-0450
 7.3.1.2

1601-0450
Breaker Open
(from Breaker Detection)

At least one
contact programmed
(from Breaker Detection)

For 859

This timer starts on the falling edge Operate Output

Trip when at least of a pulse, and issues a positive Relay 1 if selected under

Path:Setpoints > Outputs > Output Relay

pulse upon time expiry
one breaker Breaker or Contactor setup
contact configured
2 sec For 850, 869, and 889(single breaker)

OR

Figure 102: Relay Selected for Breaker Trip

AND
SETTING SETPOINT Operate Output
Relay ( Ready = 1) Relay 1 TRIP
BLOCK Dropoff Value
AND For 845, and 889(two breakers)
Off = 0 t

AND
Operate the selected
Upon dropout of the trip signal and no Aux Relay programmed
This timer starts on the falling edge of breaker open status detected, this timer for BKR trip
a pulse, and issues a positive pulse will start on the raising edge of a pulse
upon time expiry issued from either of the two timers, and TRIP
will produce positive pulse upon time
OR

expiry.
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 100 ms When breaker open status is detected,
and no trip is present, the output relay
AND

BKR 1 Manual Open

AND

SETTING will stay reset.

Relay ( Ready = 1)
OR

Relay ( Ready = 1)
OPERATE

FL Operand, Off = 0
TRIP
Trip without

OR
BKR 1 Local Open configured
breaker contact FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

RELAY SELECTED FOR BREAKER CLOSE

AND

OR
Aux Relay
Relay X
( Ready
ON = 1)
BKR 1 Remotel Open RESET (command)
SETPOINT
Trip request
For 859 only
TYPE:
NOTE: Relay 1(Trip) is programmed by the
AND

UVR UV Trip OP
Dropoff
manufacturer for breaker tripping on 850,
Self-Reset

OR
869 and 889(single breaker option) relays.
For 850 only Latched
Additional output relays can be selected to
OPEN ( from Transfer Scheme) Pickup
OR

operate from the menu of each element.

Pickup/Dropoff
For 845 only
Dwell
Element operation with selection of Aux
Relay programmed for BKR tripping
Pulse SETPOINT
Pickup Value
For 850, 869, 859 and 889 only
Dropoff Value
TRIP ( from Any Element set to “Trip”) LED: TRIP
RUN

Timers

OR
869 Only: When Contactor is selected as a Switching
RESET (command) Device, all the inputs associated with Contactor are

AND
used by the ‘Trip’ logic
892826C1.vsd

Close relay or an Auxiliary relay. This selection is made at Setpoints > System > Breakers (Contactor) >
Breakers 1 (Contactor 1) > Close Relay Select. If the selected value of the CLOSE RELAY SELECT setting is
Output Relay 2 (F4) is labeled CLOSE/AUX on the wiring diagram. As suggested by that name, it can be used as a

281
Chapter 7 - Input and Output Setpoints
Chapter 7 - Input and Output Setpoints

Off, Output Relay 2 functions as an Auxiliary relay. If the selected value is Relay 2, Output Relay 2 functions as a
Close relay.
The default value is Off. The description below applies to Relay 2 Close functionality. For the Relay 2 auxiliary
functionality; see the Auxiliary Relays generic logic figure.
Path: Setpoints > Outputs > Output Relays > Aux Relay 2 (Close)

Note:
The output relays selected under the Breaker menu for breaker closing are excluded from the list of outputs for selection
under the menus of all elements providing such output relay selection.

Note:
For If Aux Relay 2 is selected for Breaker Close or Contactor Close, the relay name from the Output Relays menu changes to
Close If Aux Relay 2 is not selected, the name reverts to Aux Relay 2.

Breaker Close
(from Breaker Detection)

At least one
contact programmed
(from Breaker Detection)

This timer starts on the falling edge

of a pulse, and issues a positive
pulse upon time expiry

Close when at least Timer

SETTING one contact configured
BLOCK AND 2 sec OR
SETPOINT
Off = 0
Dropoff Value
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AND t
SETTING BKR 1 Manual Close
Relay ( Ready = 1)
Operate the selected
OPERATE Aux Relay programmed
This timer starts on the falling edge Upon dropout of the close signal and no
of a pulse, and issues a positive for
FL Operand, Off = 0 breaker close status detected, this timer
pulse upon time expiry will start on the raising edge of a pulse BKR or Contactor close
issued from either of the two timers, and OR
200 ms will produce positive pulse upon time

AND
BKR 1 Local Close CLOSE
expiry.
Relay ( Ready = 1) AND

OR
OR
BKR 1 Remotel Close Block Close
( from Transfer scheme)
For 859 only
Autorestart Close Attempt For 850 only FLEXLOGIC
OR CLOSE
OPERAND
OR
UVR Close
AuxRelay
Relay X ON
( Ready = 1)
For 850 only
AND RESET (command)
OR Close without NOTE: Relay 2
CLOSE (from Transfer Scheme) SETPOINT Trip Relay (Close) is set for
configured contact
TYPE: AND breaker close by
CLOSE (from UV restoration) Dropoff default for 850,
Self-Reset and 869 relays
CLOSE ( from UF restoration) Latched
Pickup
OR

CLOSE ( from UV Reactive Power restoration)

Pickup/Dropoff
Dwell
CLOSE (from Autoreclose) Pulse SETPOINT
AND
Pickup Value
AND
Close request Dropoff Value
RUN
Autoreclose In - Progress
Timers

Breaker Failure

892827C1.vsd

Figure 103: Relay Selected for Breaker close

7.3.1.3 AUXILIARY OUTPUT RELAYS

The relay is equipped with Auxiliary Output relays. The I/O cards, and the number of auxiliary output relays are
defined at the time of relay ordering. Auxiliary Relays can be energized directly from the menu of the protection or
control feature or from their respective menus by assigning a FlexLogic operand (trigger) under the setpoint AUX
RLY # OPERATE. Changing the state of any of the Auxiliary Relays will be inhibited if the relay is in Not Ready
mode.

NAME
Range: Up to 13 alphanumeric characters
Default: Aux Rly #

282 1601-0450
 Chapter 7 - Input and Output Setpoints

The setpoint is used to name the auxiliary output relay by selecting up to 13 alphanumeric characters.

DROPOFF VALUE (only for F/W 4.00 and later)

Range: 0 to 14400000 in steps of 1 ms
Default: 0 ms
This setting is used to set the drop-off time delay for Dropoff, Pickup/Dropoff.

SEAL-IN TIME (displayed only if Type=Pulsed)

Range: 0.00 to 9.99 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.10 s
When Type = Pulsed is selected, the setpoint AUX RLY # SEAL-IN TIME is displayed in the menu for selection
of the time interval for which the output relay will remain Energized. The actual time, for which the output relay
stays energized, starts from the time of output first trigger, and ends when Output Seal-In Time expires. The
Seal-In time applies at the dropdown edge of the output relay. If during timing out of the Seal-In Time, another
pulse/pulses occur, the Seal-In Time will be reapplied to the last pulse, resulting in prolonged time for which the
output will stay energized before going to de-energized mode.

BLOCK
Range: Disabled, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Disabled
This setting defines a block to the Auxiliary output relay. When the selected input is asserted, the Aux relay is
blocked.

OPERATE
Range: Off, On, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setpoint provides a selection of any operand from the list of FlexLogic or communications, which can be
used to energize the auxiliary output relay.
When set to On, the output relay is constantly asserted (On=1).
When set to Off and no FlexLogic operand is selected, the output relay operates as set in individual protection
elements.

Note:
Setting OPERATE to On supersedes individual protection function settings.

TYPE
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Pulsed
Default: Pulsed
If Self-Reset is selected, the output relay is energized as long as the element is in operating mode, and
resets when the element drops out. If Latched is selected, the output relay stays energized upon element
dropout. The latched auxiliary outputs can be reset by issuing a reset command. For Pulse selection, see SEAL-
IN TIME (displayed only if Type = Pulsed).

1601-0450 283
Chapter 7 - Input and Output Setpoints

OPERATION
Range: Non-Failsafe, Failsafe
Default: Non-Failsafe
Failsafe operation causes the output relay to be energized when the operand assigned to the OPERATE AUX
RLY # setting is low and de-energized when the same operand is high. A failsafe relay also changes state (if not
already activated by an operand driving this output relay) when control power is removed. Conversely, a non-
failsafe relay is de-energized in its normal non-activated state and will not change state when control power is
removed from the(if not already activated by a protection element).

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

284 1601-0450
 7.3.2

1601-0450
AND
RESET (Command)

VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

assigned for use are set to OFF (Logic 0).

OR
SETPOINT

Figure 104: Auxiliary Relays generic logic

TYPE AND

Latched
Opearte Aux
Self- Reset
AND Output Relay
Dropoff AND
OR Relay
This setpoint is displayed only (Ready = 1)
upon Pulsed output type selection
SETPOINT
OPERATE SETPOINT
Off = 0 AND Dropoff Value
FLEXLOGIC
Operation (from Protection, OR t
OPERAND
Control, or Monitoring Elements) AuxRelay
Relay( Ready
X ON=
1)

SETTING
AND
Relay ( Ready = 1)
BLOCK

Off = 0

SETPOINT SETPOINT
TYPE: Pickup Value
Pickup Dropoff Value
Pickup/Dropoff RUN
Dwell
Pulse Timers

  

The relay is equipped with 96 virtual outputs that may be assigned for use via FlexLogic. Virtual outputs not

285
Chapter 7 - Input and Output Setpoints
Chapter 7 - Input and Output Setpoints

A name can be assigned to each virtual output. Any change of state to a virtual output can be logged as an event if
programmed to do so. Virtual outputs are resolved in each protection pass via the evaluation of FlexLogic
equations.
For example, if Virtual Output 1 is the trip signal from FlexLogic and the trip relay is used to signal events, the
settings would be programmed as follows:
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 NAME: Trip
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: Enabled
Path: Setpoints > Outputs > Virtual Outputs > Virtual Outputs 1 (32)

NAME
Range: up to 13 alphanumeric characters
Default: VO 1
An alphanumeric name may be assigned to a virtual output for diagnostic, setting, and event recording
purposes.

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled

7.3.3 ANALOG OUTPUTS

Depending on the order code, the relay supports one optional DC analog card. The Analog card has 4 analog inputs
and 7 analog outputs.There are three Analog Output channel scenarios for analog minimum and maximum output
range shown in the figure below. Type A characteristics apply when the minimum range is 0 and the maximum
range is a positive (+ve) value. Type B characteristics apply when the minimum and maximum ranges are definitely
positive (+ve) values. Type C characteristics apply when the minimum range is a negative (-ve) and the maximum
range is a positive (+ve) value. The following diagram illustrates these characteristics.

Figure 105: Analog Outputs Channel Characteristics

Path: Setpoints > Outputs > Analog Outputs > Analog Output 1(X)

286 1601-0450
 Chapter 7 - Input and Output Setpoints

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled

RANGE
Range: 0 to 1 mA, 0 to 5 mA, 0 to 10 mA, 0 to 20 mA, or 4 to 20 mA
Default: 0 to 1 mA
This setting provides the selection for the analog output range.

PARAMETER
Range: Off, any Flex Analog Parameter
Default: Off
This setting selects the measured parameter to control the Analog Output level.

MIN VALUE
Range: Populates per selection of the analog parameter
Default: 0
This setting defines the minimum value of the analog output quantity. It populates based on the selection of the
analog parameter.

MAX VALUE
Range: Populates per selection of the analog parameter
Default: 0
This setting defines the maximum value of the analog output quantity. It populates based on the selection of the
analog parameter.
Each channel can be programmed to represent a FlexAnalog parameter available in the respective relay. The range
and steps is the same as the range of the FlexAnalog.

PF SCALING TYPE
Range: Flat, Step
Default: Flat
The measured Power Factor values can be transferred to any of the available analogue outputs. There are two
options for scaling power factor: Flat and Step.

Note:
This setting is only available when Analog Output is selected as Power Factor.

1601-0450 287
Chapter 7 - Input and Output Setpoints

Figure 106: Flat Scaling

Flat scaling is a simple ascending linear function. It covers all selected ranges. The above figure shows the graph
for the 4 to 20 mA output range in Flat Scaling. It covers the entire selected power factor range from the minimum
(-0.99) to the maximum setting (+1.00).

Figure 107: Step Scaling

288 1601-0450
 Chapter 7 - Input and Output Setpoints

Step scaling is a discontinuous descending linear function with one step-up point. The figure above shows the
related graph for the 4 to 20 mA output range in Step Scaling. It covers all the entire selected power factor range
from the minimum (-0.01) to the maximum setting (+0.00).

1601-0450 289
Chapter 7 - Input and Output Setpoints

290 1601-0450
 CHAPTER 8

PROTECTION
Chapter 8 - Protection

292 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

8.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter contains the following sections:

Chapter Overview 293
Protection 294

1601-0450 293
Chapter 8 - Protection

8.2 PROTECTION
The protection elements are organized in six (6) identical setpoint groups: Setpoint Group 1 to Setpoint Group 6.

Setpoints
Device Group 1 Motor
System Group 2 2-speed Motor
Inputs Group 3 Current
Outputs Group 4 Voltage
Protection Group 5 Impedance
Monitoring Group 6 Power
Control Frequency
Flexlogic
Testing

Figure 108: Protection Display Hierarchy

Each Setpoint Group has the same protection functions, depending on the relay order code.

8.2.1 MOTOR ELEMENTS OVERVIEW

The relay provides the following motor protection elements:
● Thermal Model
● Current Unbalance
● Percent Differential
● Mechanical Jam
● Undercurrent
● Loss of Excitation
● Overload Alarm
● Short Circuit
● Ground Fault
● Acceleration Time
● Underpower
● (SC Speed-Dep Thermal Prot)
● Field Undercurrent
● Field Overcurrent
● Field Undervoltage
● Field Overvoltage

294 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

8.2.1.1 PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL

The relay provides one Percent Differential element per protection group using an internal summation method
(described below). It is intended for use on the stator windings of the rotating machinery. This element is available
only if the second AC analog input card with the K1-CT bank is properly installed in slot K.
Two methods are available, depending upon the power wiring option used (for wiring options, please refer to
Installation / Electrical installation / Differential CT inputs chapter of the manual):
● Internal Summation percent differential
● Core Balance percent differential.
For internal summation percent differential, we recommend that the terminal side CTs and neutral side CTs have the
same ratios. The maximum allowable ratio mismatch is 10:1. In the case of a mismatch, the relay scales the
currents to the primary of the CT with the higher primary value which is used as the CT reference for the percent
differential element.
Internal summation and core balance percent differential both operate in per phase basis (phase-segregated). The
key variables used in the element are the Restraining current (Ir) and the Differential current (Id). The way they are
calculated depends on the used differential method as follows:
Internal Summation Method
For internal summation method, differential current Id and restraint current Ir are defined below:

Id = |Its - Ins|
Ir = MAX{|Its|, |Ins|}
Where: Its is the current phasor of the terminal side CTs (J1-CT bank), in per unit normalized to the reference CT
nominal; Ins is the current phasor of the neutral side CTs (K1-CT bank), in per unit normalized to the reference CT
nominal; They are calculated based on the following equations:
Its = (Its_sec_amp)(CTts_pri_rating)/(Cts_sec_rating)(CTref_pri-rating)
Ins = (Ins_sec_amp)(CTns_pri_rating)/(Cns_sec_rating)(CTref_pri-rating)
Where:
● Its_sec_amp = the terminal side CT current phasor in secondary amps
● Ins_sec_amp = the neutral side CT current phasor in secondary amps
● CTts_sec_rating = the terminal side CT secondary current rating
● CTns_sec_rating = the neutral side CT secondary current rating
● CTts_pri_rating = the terminal side CT primary current rating
● CTns_pri_rating = the neutral side CT primary current rating
● CTref_pri_rating = the reference CT primary current rating
● The reference CT is the CT with the maximum primary current rating

The Percent Differential element with the internal summation method selected uses dual slope dual break point
differential/restraint characteristic. The main purpose of the percent-slope characteristic is to prevent misoperation
caused by unbalances between CTs during external faults. CT unbalances arise as a result of the following factors:
● CT accuracy errors
● CT saturation

1601-0450 295
Chapter 8 - Protection

The characteristic allows for very sensitive settings when fault current is low and less sensitive settings when fault
current is high and CT performance may produce incorrect operate signals. The dual slope characteristic is shown
in the following figure.

Figure 109: Percent Differential Characteristic

The horizontal axes value of the percent differential characteristic is the Restraining current (Ir) and the vertical axes
value is the Differential current (Id).
Each pair of measured restraining and differential currents represents a point on the previous figure: Percent
Differential Characteristic. If this point is located above the limit line (area labeled “Operate”), then the differential
flag is set (DIF=1). If the point is located below or on the limit line (area labeled “Block”), then the differential flag is
reset (DIF=0).
Core Balance Method
The Percent Differential element with core balance method selected does not use the dual slope dual break point
differential/restraint characteristic. Instead, unrestraint differential measured directly from a core balance CT is used
in this element. The differential element operates as per the equations shown below, where r is the restraint factor
on motor starting, a user setting, and STARTING is a flag (either equal to 1 or equal to 0), which is an indication
whether the motor is starting. Note that the setpoints related to biased differential with internal summation method,
including slopes and break points, are not used in core balance method.

296 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

DIF = Id - r*STARTING*Ir > pickup

Id = |Idcb|
Ir = I|p|
STARTING = Motor Starting Flag
Where
● Ip is the terminal side CT current phasor in per unit based on the terminal CT nominal
● Idcb is the core balance CT differential current phasor in per unit based on the core balance CT nominal. They
are calculated as shown:
Ip = Its_sec_amp/CTts_sec_rating
Idcb = Idcb_sec_amp/CTdcb_sec_rating
Where:
● Its_sec_amp = the terminal side CT current phasor in secondary amps
● Idcb_sec_amp = the core balance CT current phasor in secondary amps
● CTts_sec_rating = the terminal side CT secondary current rating
● CTdcb_sec_rating = the core balance CT secondary current rating

Setpoints
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1 > Motor > Percent Differential

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled

TYPE
Range: Internal Sum, Core Balance
Default: Internal Sum
The setting defines the method used for differential protection and requires proper CT connections per method
employed. Refer to the wiring diagram in the Electrical Installation chapter.

PICKUP
Range: 0.05 to 1.00 x CT in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.20
The setting is applicable to both the internal summation method and core balance method.
This setting defines the minimum differential current required for operation. The setting is based on the amount
of differential current that can be seen under normal operating conditions. A setting of 0.1 to 0.3 pu is generally
recommended. The CT base of the setting is the reference CT nominal (the CT with the maximum primary

1601-0450 297
Chapter 8 - Protection

current rating) for the internal summation method, and the core balance CT nominal for the core balance
method.

SLOPE 1
Range: 1 to 100% in steps of 1
Default: 25%
The setting is applicable for restraint currents from zero to BREAK 1, and defines the ratio of differential to
restraint current above which the element operates. The slope is set to ensure sensitivity to internal faults at
normal operating current levels. The criterion for setting this slope is to allow for maximum expected CT
mismatch error when operating at the maximum permitted current. This maximum error is generally in the range
of 5 to 10% of CT rating.

BREAK 1
Range: 0.50 to 2.00 x CT in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.50
The setting defines the end of the Slope 1 region and the start of the transition region. It should be set just above
the maximum normal operating current level of the machine.

BREAK 2
Range: 2.00 to 30.00 x CT in steps of 0.01
Default: 4.00
The setting defines the end of the transition region and the start of the SLOPE 2 region. It must be set to the
level at which any of the protection CTs are expected to begin to saturate. To avoid discontinuity in the cubic
spline calculation, the relay applies a minimum margin of 0.3 CT between BREAK 1 and BREAK 2.

SLOPE 2
Range: 1 to 100% in steps of 1
Default: 95%
The setting is applicable for restraint currents above the BREAK 2 setting. The slope is set to ensure stability
under heavy external fault conditions that could lead to high differential currents as a result of CT saturation. A
setting of 80 to 100% is recommended. The transition region (as shown on the percent differential characteristic)
is a cubic spline, automatically calculated by the relay to result in a smooth transition between SLOPE 1 and
SLOPE 2 with no discontinuities.

RESTRAINT FACTOR STARTING

Range: 0.000 to 1.000 in steps of 0.001
Default: 0.100
This setting defines the restraint factor during machine starting for the core balance method applications only. A
portion (defined by this setting) of the current from the terminal CT is subtracted from the core balance CT
differential current to avoid possible faulty operation caused by inrush current during motor starting. It must be
noted that current from the terminal CT and current from the core balance CT are in per unit based on their own
CT nominal with the application of this restraint factor in the relay.

298 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 10.000 in steps of 0.001
Default: 0.000
This setting defines the pickup time delay of the percent differential element.

PICKUP DELAY WHILE STARTING (from FW 4.10)

Range: 0.000 to 60.000s in steps of 0.001
Default: 0.000
This setting defines the pickup time delay during starting of the motor. This setpoint is only applicable when Core
Balance type is selected. Pickup delay during starting may be used to ride through nuisance tripping during start.

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Latched

Note:
The values of the setpoints for minimum pickup, Break 1 and Break 2 are expressed in terms of CT reference. Please see the
definition of CT reference which is described in the second paragraph of this section.

DC Saturation Detection:
D.C. components of both J1-CT and K1-CT bank currents, in phases A, B and C must be first calculated. The
calculation is performed only if the internal summation method is selected. The method is described below.

In other words, the d.c. component is an absolute value of the average of current samples over one last cycle of
data.

1601-0450 299
Chapter 8 - Protection

DCph = (Idcts > D1 x |Its|) AND (|Its| > PFP)

Operation 2 (Eq. 6) is performed three times for each phase separately.
DCns = (Idcns > D1 x |Ins|) AND (|Ins| > PFP)
D1 is a factory constant of 1/2. A new component of the saturation condition is derived as in the figure below:

Saturation Detection
External faults near rotating machines typically result in very large time constants of DC components in the fault
currents. Also, when energizing a step-up transformer, the inrush current being limited only by the machine
impedance can be significant and can last for a very long time. In order to provide additional security against
misoperations during these events, the relay incorporates saturation detection logic. When saturation is detected
the element makes an additional check on the angle between the terminal side CT and differential CT currents. If
this angle indicates an internal fault then tripping is permitted. The latter applies only when the Internal summation
method is used.
The saturation detector is implemented as a state machine (see next figure). "NORMAL" is the initial state of the
machine. When in "NORMAL" state, the saturation flag is not set (SAT = 0). The algorithm calculates the saturation
condition, SC. If SC = 1 while the state machine is "NORMAL", the saturation detector goes into the "EXTERNAL
FAULT" state and sets the saturation flag (SAT = 1). The algorithm returns to the "NORMAL" state if the differential
current is below the first slope, S1, for more than 200 ms. When in the "EXTERNAL FAULT" state, the algorithm
goes into the "EXTERNAL FAULT & CT SATURATION" state if the differential flag is set (DIF = 1). When in the
"EXTERNAL FAULT & CT SATURATION" state, the algorithm keeps the saturation flag set (SAT = 1). The state
machine returns to the "EXTERNAL FAULT" state if the differential flag is reset (DIF = 0) for 100 ms.

300 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

There are three SAT flags (one per phase). The corresponding FlexLogic operands are:
● Percent Diff Sat A
● Percent Diff Sat B
● Percent Diff Sat C

Figure 110: Saturation detection state machine

Phase comparison principle

The test for direction can be summarized by the following equation:
If (|Its| > B1 or (|Its| > K x Ir and |Its| > PKP)) and (|Ins| > B1 or (|Ins| > K x Ir and |Ins| > PKP))
Then DIR = abs ( <Its - <Ins ) > 90°
Else DIR = 1
where:
● Ir = restraining current
● DIR = flag indicating that the phase comparison principle is satisfied,
● B1 = breakpoint 1 setting,
● Its, Ins = current phasor at the terminal and neutral side banks, respectively
● K = factory constant of 0.25

1601-0450 301
Chapter 8 - Protection

There are three DIR flags (one per phase). The corresponding FlexLogic operands are:
● Percent Diff Dir A
● Percent Diff Dir B
● Percent Diff Dir C

Note:
That the above CT saturation (SAT) and phase direction (DIR) checking are applicable to internal summation method only. If
the Core balance method is selected, neither SAT nor DIR check is performed, the fixed values SAT=0 and DIR = 1 are used.

SETPOINT
FUNCTION LED: TRIP

Disabled
Trip

AND
TRIP
OR

Latched Trip

AND
Configurable
SETPOINT
LED: PICKUP
Pickup

AND
SETPOINT Slope 1 S
LATCH
Break 1
AND

BLOCK
RESET R FlexLogic Operands
Off = 0 Break 2 Command
Percent Diff PKP
Slope 2

OR
FlexLogic Operands
Restraint Factor Starting (r)
SETPOINT Percent Diff PKP A
RUN
Terminal side currents (Its) TYPE: Internal Summation Restraint
(J1-CT) Bank FlexLogic Operands
Phasors
Phase A current (Ia) Percent Diff PKP B
Iar
Phase B current (Ib)
Ibr FlexLogic Operands
Phase C current (Ic) Icr Iad– r*STARTING*Iar > pickup Percent Diff PKP C

Neutral side currents (Ins) (K1-CT)

|Id| = |Its – Ins| Differential RUN
SETPOINT
SETPOINTS
|Ir| = MAX{|Its|, |Ins|} Phasors Pickup Delay
Bank
Output Relays
Phase A current (Ia) Iad Tpkp

AND
0
Do Not Operate, Operate

OR
Phase B current (Ib) Ibd Tpkp
0
Phase C current (Ic) Icd FlexLogic Operands
Ibd –r*STARTING*Ibr >pickup Tpkp
0

AND
Percent Diff Sat A FlexLogic Operands

OR
RUN Percent Diff Dir A Percent Diff OP
SETPOINT
SETPOINT

AND

OR
Pickup Delay FlexLogic Operands
Terminal side currents (Its) TYPE: Core Balance
FlexLogic Operands Tpkp Percent Diff OP A
(J1-CT) Bank 0

AND
Phase A current (Ia)

AND
Percent Diff Sat B Tpkp

OR
Icd– r*STARTING*Icr > pickup OR 0
FlexLogic Operands
Phase B current (Ib) Ir = | Ip | Restraint Percent Diff Dir B
Percent Diff OP B
Phasors SETPOINT Tpkp
Phase C current (Ic) 0

AND
TYPE:

OR
FlexLogic Operands
Internal Summation
Core Balance currents (Idcb) (K1- FlexLogic Operands Percent Diff OP C
Core Balance SETPOINT
AND

CT) Bank Percent Diff Sat C

AND
OR

Pickup Delay While Starting*

Phase A current (Ia) Iad>(0.5 x PKP) Percent Diff Dir C
Differential 10s Tpkp
Id = | Idcb |
OR

Phase B current (Ib) Phasors Ibd>(0.5 x PKP) 0

0s

AND
Phase C current (Ic) Icd>(0.5 x PKP) Tpkp
0
Tpkp
0

AND
FlexLogic Operands
Motor Starting

Applicable when setpoint Type = Core- Balance FlexLogic Operands

894103C1vsdx Percent Diff Warn

Figure 111: Percent Differential logic diagram

8.2.1.2 THERMAL MODEL (49)

The Thermal model consists of five key elements:
● Thermal model curve (overload)
● Overload pickup level
● Unbalance biasing of the motor current while the motor is running
● Motor cooling time constants
● Biasing of the thermal model based on hot/cold information and/or measured stator temperature
The algorithm integrates both stator and rotor heating into a single model. The motor heating level is maintained in
the Thermal Capacity Used (TCU) register. If the motor has been stopped for a long time, it will be at ambient
temperature and the Thermal Capacity Used will be zero. If the motor is in overload, the output operand is set once
the thermal capacity used reaches 100%.
Once the motor load current exceeds the overload level (FLA x overload factor), it enters an overload phase; that is,
the heat accumulation becomes greater than the heat dissipation. The thermal model reacts by incrementing the
Thermal Capacity Used at a rate dependent on the selected thermal curve and overload level. When the thermal
capacity reaches 100%, the Thermal TRIP OP operand (typically configured to trip the motor) is set.

302 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Resetting of Thermal OP and output relays depends on the selection of Trip Function.
● When Trip Function is is set to Trip or Configurable, thermal model outputs (output relay(s) and operand
Thermal OP) reset automatically as soon as TCU level drops to 97%.
● When Trip Function is set as Latched Trip, Thermal Trip OP and output relays will remain asserted until
current drops below OL*FLA level and Reset command is initiated or Emergency Restart input is asserted.
In the event of a loss of control power to the relay while the motor status is not Motor Stopped or Tripped, the
thermal capacity will remain unchanged when control power is restored.
If the motor status is Motor Stopped or Tripped when control power is lost, the thermal capacity will decay for the
duration of the loss of control power based on the stopped motor cooling rate if the real time clock (RTC) was
working properly during the power loss. However, if clock was not working properly, the TCU value will remain
unchanged when the relay power is restored.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1 > Motor > Thermal Model

TRIP FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled
The setting enables the Thermal Model trip functionality.

OVERLOAD CURVE
Range: Motor, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B, FlexCurve C, FlexCurve D, FlexCurve OL, IEC
Default: Motor
The thermal model curve determines the thermal limit overload conditions that can damage the motor. This curve
accounts for motor heating in both the stator and rotor during stall, acceleration, and running conditions. The
overload curve can take one of six formats: Motor, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B, FlexCurve C, FlexCurve D,
FlexCurve OL, or IEC. The selected curve (except IEC) can also serve as a base for a voltage dependent
overload curve if the VOLTAGE DEPENDENT FUNCTION setting is “Enabled”. The algorithm uses memory in
the form of a register called Thermal Capacity Used. This register is updated every power cycle using the
following equation:
 

  
   
 

1601-0450 303
Chapter 8 - Protection

Where:
t trip○— represents the time coordinate on the time-current overload curve, corresponding to the equivalent
motor current detected within any power cycle period of motor overload. In text, it is also specified as time to
trip.
Tsystem
○ — represents the period in seconds corresponding to the nominal power system frequency.

When the Overload Curve is selected as “Motor”, the trip time is then calculated using the following equation:
 


 
 

 

       
 

Always set the overload curve slightly lower than the thermal limits provided by the motor manufacturer. This
ensures that the motor is tripped before the thermal limit is reached.
The Motor curve is based on typical motor thermal limit curves and is normally used for standard motor applications
(see the following Standard Motor Curves figure and Standard TD Multipliers table). The pickup level for the Motor
curve is calculated as MOTOR OVERLOAD FACTOR setting (OL) times the MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS setting
(FLA). The MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS (FLA) setting can be found in the Setpoints > System > Motor menu. The
IEC motor curve is described in the IEC CURVE k FACTOR setting.

Pickup Level vs. Standard “Motor” Curve TD Multipliers

STANDARD “Motor” Curve TD MULTIPLIERS
Pickup x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 x 10 x 11 x 12 x 13 x 14 x 15
Level
1.01 4353.6 8707.2 13061 17414 21768 26122 30475 34829 39183 43536 47890 52243 56597 60951 65304
1.05 853.7 1707.4 2561.1 3414.9 4268.6 5122.3 5976.0 6829.7 7683.4 8537.1 9390.8 10245 11098 11952 12806
1.10 416.68 833.36 1250.0 1666.7 2083.4 2500.1 2916.8 3333.5 3750.1 4166.8 4583.5 5000.2 5416.9 5833.6 6250.2
1.20 198.86 397.72 596.58 795.44 994.30 1193.2 1392.0 1590.9 1789.7 1988.6 2187.5 2386.3 2585.2 2784.1 2982.9
1.30 126.80 253.61 380.41 507.22 634.02 760.82 887.63 1014.4 1141.2 1268.0 1394.8 1521.6 1648.5 1775.3 1902.1
1.40 91.14 182.27 273.41 364.55 455.68 546.82 637.96 729.09 820.23 911.37 1002.5 1093.6 1184.8 1275.9 1367.0
1.50 69.99 139.98 209.97 279.96 349.95 419.94 489.93 559.92 629.91 699.90 769.89 839.88 909.87 979.86 1049.9
1.75 42.42 84.83 127.24 169.66 212.07 254.49 296.90 339.32 381.73 424.15 466.56 508.98 551.39 593.81 636.22
2.00 29.16 58.32 87.47 116.63 145.79 174.95 204.11 233.26 262.42 291.58 320.74 349.90 379.05 408.21 437.37
2.25 21.53 43.06 64.59 86.12 107.65 129.18 150.72 172.25 193.78 215.31 236.84 258.37 279.90 301.43 322.96
2.50 16.66 33.32 49.98 66.64 83.30 99.96 116.62 133.28 149.94 166.60 183.26 199.92 216.58 233.24 249.90
2.75 13.33 26.66 39.98 53.31 66.64 79.96 93.29 106.62 119.95 133.27 146.60 159.93 173.25 186.58 199.91
3.00 10.93 21.86 32.80 43.73 54.66 65.59 76.53 87.46 98.39 109.32 120.25 131.19 142.12 153.05 163.98
3.25 9.15 18.29 27.44 36.58 45.73 54.87 64.02 73.16 82.31 91.46 100.60 109.75 118.89 128.04 137.18
3.50 7.77 15.55 23.32 31.09 38.87 46.64 54.41 62.19 69.96 77.73 85.51 93.28 101.05 108.83 116.60
3.75 6.69 13.39 20.08 26.78 33.47 40.17 46.86 53.56 60.25 66.95 73.64 80.34 87.03 93.73 100.42
4.00 5.83 11.66 17.49 23.32 29.15 34.98 40.81 46.64 52.47 58.30 64.13 69.96 75.79 81.62 87.45
4.25 5.13 10.25 15.38 20.50 25.63 30.75 35.88 41.00 46.13 51.25 56.38 61.50 66.63 71.75 76.88
4.50 4.54 9.09 13.63 18.17 22.71 27.26 31.80 36.34 40.88 45.43 49.97 54.51 59.05 63.60 68.14

304 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

STANDARD “Motor” Curve TD MULTIPLIERS

Pickup x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 x 10 x 11 x 12 x 13 x 14 x 15
Level
4.75 4.06 8.11 12.17 16.22 20.28 24.33 28.39 32.44 36.50 40.55 44.61 48.66 52.72 56.77 60.83
5.00 3.64 7.29 10.93 14.57 18.22 21.86 25.50 29.15 32.79 36.43 40.08 43.72 47.36 51.01 54.65
5.50 2.99 5.98 8.97 11.96 14.95 17.94 20.93 23.91 26.90 29.89 32.88 35.87 38.86 41.85 44.84
6.00 2.50 5.00 7.49 9.99 12.49 14.99 17.49 19.99 22.48 24.98 27.48 29.98 32.48 34.97 37.47
6.50 2.12 4.24 6.36 8.48 10.60 12.72 14.84 16.96 19.08 21.20 23.32 25.44 27.56 29.67 31.79
7.00 1.82 3.64 5.46 7.29 9.11 10.93 12.75 14.57 16.39 18.22 20.04 21.86 23.68 25.50 27.32
7.50 1.58 3.16 4.75 6.33 7.91 9.49 11.08 12.66 14.24 15.82 17.41 18.99 20.57 22.15 23.74
8.00 1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.10 12.49 13.88 15.27 16.65 18.04 19.43 20.82
10.00 1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.10 12.49 13.88 15.27 16.65 18.04 19.43 20.82
15.00 1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.10 12.49 13.88 15.27 16.65 18.04 19.43 20.82
20.00 1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.10 12.49 13.88 15.27 16.65 18.04 19.43 20.82

STANDARD “Motor” Curve TD MULTIPLIERS-continued

Pickup x 16 x 17 x 18 x 19 x 20 x 21 x 22 x 23 x 24 x 25
Level
1.01 69658 74011 78365 82719 87072 91426 95779 100133 104487 108840
1.05 13659 14513 15367 16221 17074 17928 18782 19635 20489 21343
1.10 6666.92 7083.60 7500.28 7916.96 8333.64 8750.33 9167.01 9583.69 10000 10417
1.20 3181.78 3380.64 3579.50 3778.36 3977.22 4176.08 4374.94 4573.80 4772.66 4971.52
1.30 2028.86 2155.67 2282.47 2409.28 2536.08 2662.88 2789.69 2916.49 3043.30 3170.10
1.40 1458.18 1549.32 1640.46 1731.59 1822.73 1913.87 2005.00 2096.14 2187.28 2278.41
1.50 1119.84 1189.83 1259.82 1329.81 1399.80 1469.79 1539.78 1609.77 1679.76 1749.75
1.75 678.63 721.05 763.46 805.88 848.29 890.71 933.12 975.54 1017.95 1060.37
2.00 466.53 495.69 524.84 554.00 583.16 612.32 641.48 670.63 699.79 728.95
2.25 344.49 366.02 387.55 409.08 430.62 452.15 473.68 495.21 516.74 538.27
2.50 266.56 283.22 299.88 316.54 333.20 349.86 366.52 383.18 399.84 416.50
2.75 213.24 226.56 239.89 253.22 266.55 279.87 293.20 306.53 319.86 333.18
3.00 174.91 185.85 196.78 207.71 218.64 229.57 240.51 251.44 262.37 273.30
3.25 146.33 155.47 164.62 173.76 182.91 192.06 201.20 210.35 219.49 228.64
3.50 124.38 132.15 139.92 147.70 155.47 163.24 171.02 178.79 186.56 194.34
3.75 107.11 113.81 120.50 127.20 133.89 140.59 147.28 153.98 160.67 167.37
4.00 93.28 99.11 104.94 110.77 116.60 122.43 128.26 134.08 139.91 145.74
4.25 82.00 87.12 92.25 97.37 102.50 107.62 112.75 117.87 123.00 128.12
4.50 72.68 77.22 81.76 86.31 90.85 95.39 99.93 104.48 109.02 113.56
4.75 64.88 68.94 72.99 77.05 81.11 85.16 89.22 93.27 97.33 101.38
5.00 58.29 61.94 65.58 69.22 72.87 76.51 80.15 83.80 87.44 91.08
5.50 47.83 50.82 53.81 56.80 59.79 62.78 65.76 68.75 71.74 74.73

1601-0450 305
Chapter 8 - Protection

STANDARD “Motor” Curve TD MULTIPLIERS-continued

Pickup x 16 x 17 x 18 x 19 x 20 x 21 x 22 x 23 x 24 x 25
Level
6.00 39.97 42.47 44.97 47.46 49.96 52.46 54.96 57.46 59.96 62.45
6.50 33.91 36.03 38.15 40.27 42.39 44.51 46.63 48.75 50.87 52.99
7.00 29.14 30.97 32.79 34.61 36.43 38.25 40.07 41.89 43.72 45.54
7.50 25.32 26.90 28.48 30.07 31.65 33.23 34.81 36.40 37.98 39.56
8.00 22.20 23.59 24.98 26.37 27.76 29.14 30.53 31.92 33.31 34.69
10.00 22.20 23.59 24.98 26.37 27.76 29.14 30.53 31.92 33.31 34.69
15.00 22.20 23.59 24.98 26.37 27.76 29.14 30.53 31.92 33.31 34.69
20.00 22.20 23.59 24.98 26.37 27.76 29.14 30.53 31.92 33.31 34.69

CURVE EFFECT
Range: Cutoff, Shift
Default: Cutoff
This setting affects the trip time thermal curves when the Overload Curve is selected as Motor. This setting takes
into account the design of the machine with respect to overload capability as determined by the overload
(service) factor. For motor designs where temperature rise above ambient is based on full load current, this
setting should be selected as “Cutoff”. The trip time is then calculated using the following equation:
 


 
 

 

       
 

For specialized motor designs where temperature rise above ambient is based on the product of the overload
factor and full load current (OL × FLA), this setting must be selected as “Shifted”. The trip time is then calculated
using the following equation:
 


 
 

 

       
   

In both the above equation, the motor stator current (Imotor= Ieq as defined by equation (13) and motor rated
current (FLA) are expressed in Amps. In case of uncertainty, the more conservative “Cutoff” value should be
used. The following figure illustrates the impact of this setting on the time to trip thermal curves.

306 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Figure 112: Impact of Thermal Model Curve Effect Setting

CURVE k FACTOR
Range: 1.00 to 1.50 in steps of 0.05
Default: 1.10
The setting applies only to the IEC motor curve and is applied as described below. Refer to the IEC 255-8
standard for additional details on its application.
If IEC is selected as the Overload Curve, the relay can apply the IEC 255-8 hot and cold curve characteristics
to the thermal model. Appropriate selection of Hot/Cold curve characteristic is based on the motor status and
Thermal Capacity (TC) Used as per the following table.

1601-0450 307
Chapter 8 - Protection

The IEC255-8 cold curve trip time is defined as follows:



   



   

The IEC255-8 hot curve trip time is defined as follows:

 

 

     



  

where:
ttrip○= time to trip
τ = ○IEC time constant defined by IEC CURVE TIME CONSTANT 1 and IEC CURVE TIME CONSTANT 2
settings.
Imotor
○ = Ieq measured motor load current as defined in equation 13
Ip =○Motor load current before overload occurs
k = ○k-factor (overload factor) defined by IEC CURVE k FACTOR setting applied to FLA
FLA○ = Motor rated current specified by the MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS setting, can be found in the
Setpoints > System > Motor menu

The square of the motor load current, Ip2 in the equation above, represents the thermal capacity of the motor
before overload occurs, as determined by the equation shown in the description below for the COOL TIME
CONSTANT RUNNING setting. Therefore, the trip time obtained from the IEC hot curve takes into account a
percent of the thermal capacity that has already been used. The motor thermal model automatically determines
the hot and cold states of the motor based on the motor state prior to overload and thermal capacity used (TCU)
as per the following table.
Prior to overload condition Upon overload Selection of IEC curve
condition Characteristic by 869
Motor Status TC Used Motor Status
Stopped Less than 5% Starting Cold
Stopped Greater than or equal to 5% Starting Hot
Running Less than 5% Overload Hot
Running Greater than or equal to 5% Overload Hot

IEC CURVE TIME CONSTANT 1(2)

Range: 0 to 1000 min in steps of 1
Default: 45 min
The thermal model specifies two IEC thermal time constants defined by setpoints IEC CURVE TIME
CONSTANT 1 and IEC CURVE TIME CONSTANT 2. These settings specify thermal time constants for IEC
motor curves in the preceding equations as per the IEC 255-8 standard.
Motor during starting (Ieq > 2 x k x FLA) is rotor-limited, and subjected to extensive heating. The thermal model
requires a separate heating constant specified by IEC CURVE TIME CONSTANT 2 in order to properly reflect

308 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

the rotor heating. However, during running overload (k x FLA < Ieq ≤ 2 x k x FLA) the motor is stator-limited, and
the thermal model uses the stator heating time constant specified by IEC CURVE TIME CONSTANT 1.
Thermal model automatically selects the IEC CURVE TIME CONSTANT 1 or IEC CURVE TIME CONSTANT 2
based on the motor load current as per the following table.

Selection of IEC Curve Time Constant 1 or 2 by 869

IEC Time Constant Selection Criteria
IEC Curve Time Constant 1 (k x FLA) < Ieq ≤ (2 x k x FLA)
IEC Curve Time Constant 2 Ieq> (2 x k x FLA)

When the IEC motor curves are selected, the relay calculates the time to trip using the IEC255-8 cold curve and
IEC255-8 hot curve equations and increases Thermal Capacity Used as defined by the Thermal Capacity Used
equation above. If the overload disappears or the motor is tripped (stopped), then the Thermal Capacity Used
decreases as per the equation in the COOL TIME CONSTANT RUNNING setting description, to simulate motor
cooling, depending on the motor status and the values programmed for the COOL TIME CONSTANT RUNNING
and COOL TIME CONSTANT STOPPED settings. If the IEC curve is selected, then the following applies:
The relay calculates the time to trip using the IEC255-8 cold curve and IEC255-8 hot curve equations and
increases Thermal Capacity Used as defined by the Thermal Capacity Used equation above. If the overload
disappears or the motor is tripped (stopped), then the Thermal Capacity Used decreases as per the equation in
the COOL TIME CONSTANT RUNNING setting description, to simulate motor cooling, depending on the motor
status and the values programmed for the COOL TIME CONSTANT RUNNING and COOL TIME CONSTANT
STOPPED settings. If the IEC curve is selected, then the following applies:
For○two-speed motor applications, the IEC CURVE k FACTOR and IEC CURVE TIME CONSTANT 1(2)
settings are used at both speeds.
Voltage
○ dependent overload curves are not applicable.
The○motor status is evaluated using motor FLA and the IEC CURVE k FACTOR setting.

TD MULTIPLIER
Range: 1.00 to 25.00 in steps of 0.01 (thermal model curve is Motor)
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 (thermal model curve is FlexCurve A/B/C/D/OL)
Default: 1.00
The multiplier is used to shift the overload curve on the time axis to create a family of the different curves. The
TD MULTIPLIER value is used to select the curve that best matches the thermal characteristics of the protected
motor.

Note:
If thermal model curve is selected as “Motor”, then the TD MULTIPLIER (TDM) can be specified between “1.00” and “25.00”
as indicated in the Standard Motor Curves diagram below.

1601-0450 309
Chapter 8 - Protection

Figure 113: Standard Motor Curves

310 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Note:
During the interval of discontinuity, the longer of the two trip times is used to reduce the chance of nuisance tripping during
motor starts.

FLEXCURVES
In some applications, the shape of the motor thermal damage curve substantially deviates from the standard.
Furthermore, the characteristics of the starting (locked rotor and acceleration) and running thermal damage curves
may not correspond smoothly. In these cases, it may be necessary to use a custom curve so the motor can be
started successfully and used to its full potential without compromising protection. For these conditions, it is
recommended that the FlexCurves A, B, C, D, or OL be used.

FLEXCURVES A, B, C, D
The relay incorporates four programmable FlexCurves - A, B, C and D that allow the programming of selected trip
times for pre-determined current levels. The points for these curves are defined by the user in the EnerVista D&I
Setup software. Each of the four FlexCurves has 120-point settings for entering times to reset and operate; 40
points for reset (from 0 to 0.98 times the Pickup value) and 80 for operate (from 1.03 to 20 times the Pickup),
whereas Pickup equals OL x FLA. However, when these curves are used as an Overload Curve in Thermal Model
protection, the 40 points for reset are not required.

Note:
The thermal model applies FlexCurve (A to D) to estimate TCU% until the current drops below 0.97 x Ipickup (97% hysteresis).
Therefore, special care must be taken when setting the points close to a Pickup multiple of 1; that is, 0.97*Ipickup and
0.98*Ipickup should be set to a similar value as 1.03*Ipickup, whereas Ipickup equals OL x FLA. Otherwise, the thermal model
may incorrectly estimate the TCU% level resulting in undesired behavior.

FLEXCURVE OL
FlexCurve OL, on the other hand, provides the flexibility of choosing the number of operating points, including
programmable trip time values as well as operate quantity values as multiple of FLA. The following Table shows
comparison between FlexCurves (A, B, C and D) and FlexCurve OL.

Comparison between FlexCurves A, B, C and D and FlexCurve OL

Features FlexCurve A, B, C, D FlexCurve OL
Total Number of Operating Points: 120 (Fixed) 10 to 30 (Configurable)
Number of Reset and Trip Points: 40 Reset and 80 Trip points Maximum 30 points for Trip only (no
reset curve)
Operating Current Quantities are: Fixed (multiple of PKP) Configurable (multiple of FLA)
Operating Trip Times are: Configurable (units msec) Configurable (units seconds)
Operating Current Quantities are: Fixed Configurable
Can be Initialization by: Various Curves including Standard Motor Only Standard Motor Curves
Curves

1601-0450 311
Chapter 8 - Protection

Note:
If thermal model curve is selected as FlexCurve (A/B/C/D) or FlexCurve OL, then the TD Multiplier can be specified between
0.00 and 600.00. The time dial multiplier (TDM) setting allows the selection of a multiple of the base curve shape (where the
time dial multiplier = 1) with the curve shape setting. For example, all times for a TDM = 10 are ten times the multiplier 1 or
base curve values.

The EnerVista D&I Setup software allows for easy configuration and management of FlexCurves and their
associated data points. Prospective curves can be configured from a selection of standard curves to provide the
best approximate fit, then specific data points can be edited afterwards. Alternately, curve data can be imported
from a specified file (.csv format) by selecting the Import Data setting.
As seen below, if the running (2) and the locked rotor thermal limit curves were smoothed into one standard
overload curve, the motor could not start at 80% line voltage. A custom curve (1) is required.
For high inertia load applications (when the Voltage Dependent Function is enabled), the locked rotor thermal limit
section of the programmed motor or the FlexCurve overload curve is modified and becomes dynamically adaptive to
system voltage changes. A detailed explanation of this function is given later in this section.

312 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Figure 114: FlexCurve Example

1601-0450 313
Chapter 8 - Protection

The relay incorporates four programmable FlexCurves - FlexCurve A, B, C, and D. The points for these curves are
defined by the user in the EnerVista D&I Setup software. User-defined curves can be used for Thermal Model
protection in the same way as standard Motor Curves and IEC curves. Each of the four FlexCurves has 120-point
settings for entering times to reset and operate, 40 points for reset (from 0 to 0.98 times the Pickup value) and 80
for operate (from 1.03 to 20 times the Pickup). However, when these curves are used as an Overload Curve in
Thermal Model protection, the 40 points for reset are not required.
EnerVista D&I Setup software allows for easy configuration and management of FlexCurves and their associated
data points. Prospective FlexCurves can be configured from a selection of standard curves to provide the best
approximate fit, then specific data points can be edited afterwards. Alternately, curve data can be imported from a
specified file (.csv format) by selecting the Import Data setting.

Note:
If a thermal model curve is selected as “FlexCurve” then the TD Multiplier can be specified between “0.00” and “600.00”. The
time dial multiplier (TDM) setting allows the selection of a multiple of the base curve shape (where the time dial multiplier = 1)
with the curve shape setting. For example, all times for a TDM = 10 are ten times the multiplier 1 or base curve values.

UNBALANCE BIAS K FACTOR

Range: 0 to 19 in steps of 1
Default: 0
Unbalanced phase currents cause rotor heating that is not shown in the motor thermal damage curve. When the
motor is running, the rotor rotates in the direction of the positive sequence current at near synchronous speed.
Negative sequence current, which has a phase rotation that is opposite to the positive sequence current, and
hence opposite to the direction of rotor rotation, generates a rotor voltage that produces a substantial current in
the rotor. This current has a frequency that is approximately twice the line frequency: 100 Hz for a 50 Hz system
or 120 Hz for a 60 Hz system. Skin effect in the rotor bars at this frequency causes a significant increase in rotor
resistance and therefore, a significant increase in rotor heating. This extra heating is not accounted for in the
thermal limit curves supplied by the motor manufacturer as these curves assume positive sequence currents
from a perfectly balanced supply voltage and motor design.
The thermal model may be biased to reflect the additional heating that is caused by negative sequence current
when the motor is running. This biasing is done by creating an equivalent motor heating current rather than
simply using the average current. This equivalent current is calculated using the equation shown below.




  


where:
Ieq ○
= thermal model biased motor load current
Iavg○= average of the three RMS currents

314 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

I_1○= positive sequence current

I_2○= negative sequence current
K =○constant
The motor derating as a function of voltage unbalance as recommended by NEMA (National Electrical
Manufacturers Association) is shown below. Assuming a typical induction motor with an inrush of 6 x FLA and a
negative sequence impedance of 0.167, voltage unbalances of 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5% equals current unbalances of
6, 12, 18, 24, and 30% respectively. Based on this assumption, the amount of motor derating for different values
of K entered for setting UNBALANCE BIAS K FACTOR is also shown in the following figure.

Note:
The curve created when K = 8 is almost identical to the NEMA derating curve.

Figure 115: Medium Motor Derating Factor Due to Unbalanced Voltage

If a value of K = 0 is entered, unbalance biasing is defeated and the overload curve times out against the measured
per unit motor positive sequence current. The following equations can be used to calculate k.


            
 
where ILR is the per unit locked rotor current.

COOL TIME CONSTANT RUNNING

Range: 1 to 1000 minutes in steps of 1 minute
Default: 15 minutes
The thermal capacity used value is reduced in an exponential manner when the motor current is below the full
load amps times overload factor (OL x FLA) settings to simulate motor cooling. The motor COOL TIME
CONSTANT RUNNING should be entered for running case. Motor cooling is calculated as follows:

  

      


  

     

1601-0450 315
Chapter 8 - Protection

where:
TCU
○ = thermal capacity used.
TCU
○ start = TCU value caused by overload condition.
TCU○ end= TCU value dictated by the hot/cold curve ratio when the motor is running. This value is 0 when the
motor is stopped).
t=○time in minutes.
τcool
○= COOL TIME CONSTANT RUNNING.
Ieq ○
= Equivalent motor heating current (also defined as Thermal Model Biased Motor Load Current).
OL ○= Overload factor specified by the MOTOR OVERLOAD FACTOR setting.
FLA○ = Motor rated current specified by the MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS setting.
hot○/ cold = hot/cold curve ratio
For the case when the motor is running cyclic or reciprocating load of small load cycle, it is recommended to
calculate the value of COOL TIME CONSTANT RUNNING using the below equation.

  
 

where TDM is the TD Multiplier.

However, COOL TIME CONSTANT RUNNING can be only selected using the above equation when
OVERLOAD CURVE is set to “Motor”.

COOL TIME CONSTANT STOPPED

Range: 1 to 1000 minutes in steps of 1 minute
Default: 30 minutes
The Thermal Capacity Used value is reduced in an exponential manner when the motor current is stopped after
running rated load or tripped due to overload. The motor COOL TIME CONSTANT STOPPED must be entered
for the stopped cases. A stopped motor normally cools significantly slower than a running motor.
For the motor stopped case, motor cooling is also calculated using the same equation above, however; the value
of the cool time constant (τ) is now COOL TIME CONSTANT STOPPED and TCUend is now 0.

316 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Figure 116: Thermal Model Cooling

HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO

Range: 0.01 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1
The motor manufacturer sometimes provide thermal limit information for a hot/cold motor. The algorithm uses
this data if this setting is programmed. The value entered for the setting dictates the level at which Thermal
Capacity Used settles for current that is below the motor overload factor (OL) times FLA. When the motor is

1601-0450 317
Chapter 8 - Protection

running at a level that is below this limit Thermal Capacity Used rises or falls to a value based on Ieq (thermal
model biased motor load current).



    
  
where:
TCU
○ end = Thermal Capacity Used, if Ieq remains steady state.
Ieq ○
= equivalent motor heating current (also defined as Thermal Model Biased Motor Load Current)
OL ○= Overload factor specified by the MOTOR OVERLOAD FACTOR setting.
FLA○ = Motor rated current specified by the MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS setting.
hot/cold
○ = HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO setting.

RTD BIAS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
When Enabled, this feature acts as an additional check of the motor overheating through the current based
thermal model. The current based thermal model estimates motor heating from the thermal overload curves and
cooling time constants. The thermal overload curves are based solely on measured current, assuming a normal
40°C ambient temperature and normal motor cooling. This feature provides additional protection in cases where
there is an unusually high ambient temperature, or motor cooling is malfunctioning, or motor temperature
increases due to other unexpected factors, or the overload curve was selected incorrectly. Therefore, if the motor
stator has embedded RTDs, the RTD Bias feature is used to augment the thermal model calculation of Thermal
Capacity Used.This feature uses the hottest stator RTD temperature value to estimate the RTD Thermal
Capacity Used and compare this value to the Thermal Capacity Used calculated by the current based thermal
model (overload curve and cool times). The larger of the two values is used from that point onward. Since RTDs
have a relatively slow response, RTD biasing is useful for slow motor heating. Other portions of the thermal
model are required during starting and heavy overload conditions when motor heating is relatively fast
The RTD Bias feature is active only if the optional RTD Input module has been installed.
Each stator RTD must be first configured as STATOR application under Setpoints > Monitoring > RTD
Temperature > RTD 1(X). RTDs configured as Stator type are used by the thermal model for determining the
RTD Bias.
The RTD bias feature alone cannot generate a trip. Even if the RTD bias feature forces the RTD bias thermal
capacity used to 100%, the load current must be above the overload pickup (OL x FLA) setting to set the output.

RTD BIAS MINIMUM

Range: 0 to 250°C in steps of 1
Default: 40°C

RTD BIAS CENTER

Range: 0 to 250°C in steps of 1
Default: 130°C

318 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

RTD BIAS MAXIMUM

Range: 0 to 250°C in steps of 1
Default: 155°C
The RTD bias feature is a two-part curve (RTD Bias Thermal Capacity Used) constructed from three points:
minimum, center and maximum. If the maximum stator RTD temperature is below the RTD BIAS MINIMUM
setting (typically 40°C), no biasing occurs. If the maximum stator RTD temperature is above the RTD BIAS
MAXIMUM setting (typically at the stator insulation rating or slightly higher), then the thermal memory is fully
biased and RTD bias thermal capacity used is forced to 100%. At values in between, the present RTD bias
thermal capacity used created by other features of the thermal model is compared to the RTD bias thermal
capacity used. If the value of the RTD bias thermal capacity used is higher, then this value is used from that
point onward. The RTD BIAS CENTER setting must be set to the rated running temperature of the motor. The
relay automatically determines the RTD bias thermal capacity used value for the center point using the HOT/
COLD SAFE STALL RATIO setting.



     
    

At < RTD_Bias_Center temperature

 


  
 
  
    

 


At > RTD_Bias_Center temperature,

  
   
              
 !  

where:
RTD_Bias_TCU
○ = thermal capacity used due to hottest stator RTD
Temp
○ actual = current temperature of the hottest stator RTD
Temp
○ min = RTD BIAS MINIMUM setting

1601-0450 319
Chapter 8 - Protection

Temp
○ center = RTD BIAS CENTER setting
Temp
○ max = RTD BIAS MAXIMUM setting
TCU
○ at RTD_Bias_Center = thermal capacity used defined by the HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO setting

Figure 117: RTD Bias Curve

RTD BIAS PICKUP DELAY

Range: 0 s to 600 s in steps of 1 s
Default: 2 s
This setting specifies the amount of time the RTD bias thermal capacity used must remain at 100% or above to
generate a trip.

RTD BIAS VOTING

Range: Disabled, Enabled

320 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Default: Disabled
The RTD biasing feature selects the maximum stator RTD temperature to calculate the RTD Thermal Capacity
Used. However, in the event of the malfunction of the maximum temperature RTD, the RTD Bias Voting function
assures extra security. This function requires another stator RTD to be voted with the maximum temperature
RTD.
Maximum stator RTD temperature will be used by the RTD Biasing feature only if both maximum stator RTD
temperature and voting RTD temperature, which is the second maximum temperature, lie within the range
defined by the setpoint RTD BIAS VOTING BAND. If the maximum stator RTD temperature and voting RTD
temperature don’t lie within the settable range than next maximum stator RTD temperature will require voting by
the next voting RTD. If voting fails, RTD Bias feature will block automatically.

Note:
At least two RTDs have to be configured as Stator type (under Setpoints > Monitoring > RTD Temperature) for this feature
to become active.

RTD BIAS VOTING BAND

Range: 0 to 50°C in steps of 1°C
Default: 10°C
This value specifies the temperature difference range between the maximum stator RTD temperature and
another voting stator RTD temperature.
Examples:Assuming RTD BIAS VOTING is Enabled and RTD BIAS VOTING BAND is programmed as 10°C
and three RTDs are programmed as Stator type under Setpoints > Monitoring > RTD Temperature.
Example 1: Actual temperature values of RTD1, RTD2 and RTD3 are 100°C, 95°C and 80°C, respectively.
The Voting feature selects RTD1 (100°C) as the maximum temperature RTD among the three RTDs and RTD2
(95°C) as the voting RTD. Because, temperature difference between RTD1 and RTD2 is less than the RTD
BIAS VOTING BAND of 10°C, RTD1 temperature will be selected as the maximum stator RTD temperature.
Example 2: Actual temperature values of RTD1, RTD2 and RTD3 are 100°C, 85°C and 80°C, respectively.
RTD1 (100°C) is selected as the maximum temperature RTD among the three RTDs and RTD2 (85°C) as the
voting RTD. Since the temperature difference between RTD1 and RTD2 is greater than the RTD BIAS VOTING
BAND of 10°C, RTD1 temperature will not be selected as the maximum stator RTD temperature and RTD1 is
declared as a malfunctioning RTD internally.
The Voting feature will then select RTD2 (85°C) as the maximum temperature RTD from the remaining two
RTDs, and RTD3 (80°C) as the voting RTD. The RTD2 temperature (85°C) is chosen as input to the RTD Bias
feature because the temperature difference between RTD2 and RTD3 is less than the RTD BIAS VOTING
BAND of 10°C.

SPEED BIAS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled

Note:
This feature is only applicable to a brush-type synchronous motor with Phase Currents Slot - K order code options C5/D5 for
the K2-slot card.

1601-0450 321
Chapter 8 - Protection

The brush-type synchronous motor runs in induction mode from the motor starting to the synchronized state. In
the starting state, the motor is rotor-limited and the rotor is subjected to extensive heating. SPEED BIAS, when
Enabled, acts as an additional check of the amortisseur, or squirrel cage winding rotor heating. This feature
takes the estimated speed-dependent thermal capacity used (actual value) and compares this value to the
Thermal Capacity Used calculated by the current-based method and RTD Bias method (when enabled). The
largest of these three values is used from that point onward.
The○Speed Bias feature is only applicable to brush-type synchronous motor and requires that the SC Speed-
Dependent Thermal Protection function be enabled.
Speed-biasing
○ is not applicable to brushless synchronous motors and induction motors. The Speed Bias
feature alone cannot generate a trip.
Even
○ if the SM SC Spd-Dep TC Used reaches 100%, the load current must be above the overload pickup
(OL x FLA) setting to set the output.
Speed
○ Bias is only applicable when a brush-type synchronous motor is in induction mode (no DC field
applied) with the motor in the Starting, Running or SM Resync state.

VOLT. DEPENDENT (VD) FUNCTION

Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
If the motor is called upon to drive a high inertia load, it is quite possible and acceptable for the acceleration time
to exceed the safe stall time (keeping in mind that a locked rotor condition is different than an acceleration
condition). The voltage dependent overload curve feature is tailored to protect these types of motors. This curve
is composed of the three characteristics of thermal limit curve shapes as determined by the stall or locked rotor
condition, acceleration, and running overload. The following figure presents the typical thermal limit curve for
high inertia application.
In this instance, each distinct portion of the thermal limit curve must be known and protection coordinated
against that curve. The relay protecting the motor must be able to distinguish between a locked rotor condition
(curve 4) and an accelerating condition for different levels of the system voltage (curves 2 and 3). Voltage is
continually monitored during motor starting and the acceleration thermal limit portion of the relay overload curve
is dynamically adjusted based on motor voltage variations.
The acceleration thermal limit is a function of motor speed during the start. The dynamically shifted voltage
dependent overload curve inherently accounts for the change in motor speed as a function of motor impedance.
The change in impedance is reflected by motor terminal voltage and line current. This method aids to set
dynamically the appropriate value of the thermal limit time for any given line current at any given terminal
voltage.
The VOLT. DEPENDENT (VD) FUNCTION setpoint enables the voltage dependent feature and modifies the
locked rotor portion of the programmed relay overload curve with respect to the acceleration thermal limits.
These thermal limits are typically available from the machine specifications provided by motor manufacturer.

Note:
Variable frequency drives (VFD) generates significant distortion in voltage input, therefore, Voltage Dependent Function is
blocked when operand VFD Not Bypassed is asserted. VFD Not Bypassed is asserted when VFD FUNCTION is Enabled
and operand Bypass Switch is not asserted. More detail can be found in Variable Frequency Drives.

322 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

VD MIN MOTOR VOLTS

1601-0450 323
Chapter 8 - Protection

Range: 60 to 99% in steps of 1

Default: 80%
The setting defines the minimum allowable line voltage applied to the motor during the acceleration if VOLTAGE
DEPENDENT FUNCTION is Enabled. This voltage is expressed as a percentage of the Setpoints > System >
Motor > Motor Nameplate Voltage setting. If the measured line voltage drops below this setting during
acceleration, the thermal curve is switched to one based on the programmed minimum voltage thermal limit:







VD VOLTAGE LOSS
Range: Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setting is used to address situations when the voltage input into thermal model has been lost. In this case,
the voltage dependent algorithm readjusts the voltage dependent curve to avoid an inadequate thermal
protection response. The VT fuse failure function is typically used to detect a voltage loss condition. If a voltage
loss has been detected while the motor accelerates, the thermal curve is switched to one based on the
programmed 100% voltage thermal limit:







VD STALL CURRENT @ MIN V

Range: 1.50 to 20.00 FLA in steps of 0.01
Default: 4.50 x FLA
The setting defines the locked rotor current level at minimum motor voltage (I1).

VD STALL TIME @ MIN V

Range: 0.1 to 1000.0 in steps of 0.1
Default: 20.0 seconds
The setting defines the maximum time that the motor is allowed to withstand the locked rotor current at minimum
motor voltage (t1).

VD ACCEL. INTERSECT @ MIN V

Range: 1.50 to 20.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 4.00 x FLA
The setting defines the starting current level corresponding to the crossing point between the acceleration
thermal limit at minimum voltage and the programmed relay overload curve (I2). This value can be typically
determined from motor acceleration curves. The value at the breakdown torque for the minimum voltage start is
recommended for this setting.

VD STALL CURRENT @ 100% V

Range: 1.50 to 20.00 FLA in steps of 0.01

324 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Default: 6.00 x FLA

The setting defines the locked rotor current level at the rated motor voltage (I3).

VD STALL TIME @ 100% V

Range: 0.1 to 1000.0 in steps of 0.1
Default: 10.0 seconds
The setting defines the maximum time the motor is allowed to withstand the locked rotor current at rated motor
voltage (t3).

VD ACCEL. INTERSECT @ 100% V

Range: 1.50 to 20.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 5.00 x FLA
The setting defines the starting current level corresponding to the crossing point between the acceleration
thermal limit at rated voltage and the programmed relay overload curve (I4). The value can be typically
determined from the motor acceleration curves. The current value at the breakdown torque for the 100% voltage
start is recommended for this setting. The voltage dependent overload curves are shown in the following figure.

1601-0450 325
Chapter 8 - Protection

Figure 118: Voltage Dependent Overload Curves

326 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

ALARM FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latch Alarm
Default: Disabled
The setting enables the Thermal Model alarm functionality.

ALARM PICKUP
Range: 10.00 to 100.00% in steps of 1.00
Default: 75.00%
The setting specifies a pickup threshold of the Thermal Capacity Used (TCU) for the alarm function.

TRIP MODE (up to 3.xx)

Range: Self-Reset, Latched
Default: Latched
When TRIP MODE is set to Self-Reset, thermal model outputs (output relays and Thermal OP operand) reset
automatically as soon as the TCU level drops to 97%.
When TRIP MODE is set to Latched, Thermal Trip OP and output relays remain asserted until the current
drops below the OL*FLA level and a Reset command is initiated or Emergency Restart input is asserted.

ALARM OUTPUT RELAY X

Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate.

TRIP OUTPUT RELAY X

Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Latched

BLOCK (THERMAL MODEL BLOCK)

Range: Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The thermal model can be blocked by any asserted FlexLogic operand. While the blocking signal is applied, the
element remains running and updates the thermal memory, but the states of the Thermal Trip OP and Thermal
Alarm OP operands will reset. When the element blocking signal is removed, the element logic is based on the

1601-0450 327
Chapter 8 - Protection

new value of the thermal capacity and updates the status of the Thermal Trip OP and Thermal Alarm OP
operands.
The following procedure, along with the previous figure, illustrates the construction of the voltage overload
curves.
1. Draw a curve for the running overload thermal limit. The curve is one that has been selected in the relay as
an Overload Curve.
2. Determine the point of intersection between the Overload Curve and the vertical line corresponding to the
per-unit current value of VD ACCEL. INTERSECT @ MIN V (see point 2).
3. Determine the locked rotor thermal limit point for the minimum voltage motor start. The coordinates of this
point are the per-unit current value of VD Stall Current @ Min Volts and the time value of VD Safe Stall Time
@ Min V (see point 1).
4. The line connecting points 1 and 2 constructs the acceleration curve for the system voltage level defined by
the VD MIN MOTOR VOLTS setting. The acceleration time-current curve for the minimum voltage starting is
calculated from the following equation:

ttrip = AFactor × e − I /σ
where
I −I
σ = 1 2 and AFactor = t1 × e I1 /σ
In ( t2 / t1 )

where:
○ I is a variable multiplier of the motor rated current (values between I1 and I2),
○ I1 is a multiplier of the rated motor current (FLA) specified by the VD STALL CURRENT @ MIN V
setting,
○ t1 is a time value specified by the VD SAFE STALL TIME @ MIN V setting,
○ I2 is a multiplier of the rated motor current (FLA) specified by the VD ACCEL. INTERSECT @ MIN V
setting, and
○ t2 is a time coordinate of the intersection point between the thermal model curve and the vertical line
corresponding to the per-unit current value of the VD ACCEL. INTERSECT @ MIN V setting.
5. Determine the point of intersection between the Overload Curve and the vertical line corresponding to the
multiplier of the rated current value of the VD ACCEL. INTERSECT @ 100% V setting (see point 4).

328 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

6. Draw the locked rotor thermal limit point for the 100% voltage motor start. The coordinates of this point are
the multiplier of the rated current value (FLA) of the VD STALL CURRENT @ 100% V setting and the time
value of the VD SAFE STALL TIME @ 100% V setting (see point 3).
7. The line connecting points 3 and 4 constructs the acceleration curve for the motor rated system voltage. The
acceleration time-current curve for the rated voltage starting is calculated from the same equations, but the
setpoints associated with the 100% voltage starting are applied.
8. The line connecting points 1, 3 and 5 represent the motor safe stall conditions for any system voltage from
the minimum to 110% of rated. Ideally, all the points on this line are characterized by the same thermal limit
(I2t), but the equivalent starting impedance at reduced voltage is greater than the impedance at full voltage.
As such, the higher terminal voltages tend to reduce I2t. The rate of I2t reduction is dictated by the VD STALL
CURRENT and VD SAFE STALL TIME setpoints for rated and minimum voltage conditions. For voltage
conditions above rated, the locked rotor thermal limit and acceleration curve are extrapolated up to 110% of
the terminal voltage. The point coordinates (Is, Ts) for 110% are extrapolated based on the I1, T1, I3, and
T3values. For starting currents at voltages higher than 110%, the trip time computed from 110% V thermal
limit value is used.

Note:
The voltage dependent curve for current values above 8 times pickup (OL x FLA) are clamped and the time to trip is frozen at
the level calculated for the 8 times pickup current.

The following three figures (a), (b) and (c) illustrate the resultant overload protection curve for minimum, 100%, and
maximum line voltages. For voltages between these limits, the relay shifts the acceleration curve linearly and
constantly, based on the measured line voltage during a motor start. Figures (d), (e) and (f) illustrate the motor
starting curves for the following abnormal conditions: line voltages below the minimum, above 110%, and the
situation for voltage loss.
For the Voltage Dependent Overload Curve Protection figure: (a) At Minimum Voltage, (b) At 100% Voltage, (c) At
110% Voltage, (d) At Less Than Minimum Voltage, (e) At Voltage Loss Condition, (f) At More Than 110% Voltage

1601-0450 329
Chapter 8 - Protection

Figure 119: Voltage Dependent Overload Curve Protection

Note:
For the three abnormal voltage situations, the relay makes a transition from the acceleration curve to Motor or FlexCurve
when the Motor Running or Motor Overload operands are asserted.

330 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

 !"#$%!
56789, .,:,;.,;7
'*;)7<5;-
./01 2 3
,1 2 4 

IJ KJ#L$M #" NO%P
'. ;57 j:8>>,.


 & 

†‡ [ €  €„„ €‚
Z X YW \ U
 !"#$%! ~~€‚~‚‚ƒ [ XY ‹ „ W ˆ ~~~‰ƒŠ [XY ‹ „W
)*+,-
& 
 '()R
'()

 !"#$%!

56789, .,:,;.,;7 
56789, 65>> -
2 5==


 !"#$%!
&575+ ;8&,:687,
56789, -
   

 
 !"#$%!
:_0 7 +/-
8(//^ 7 +/- Eqrs[EklmCp 75 7Œ,+&86
/ E\
Eklmno &5.,6 659<)
 ( 
`abcd efghbidc
  
 '()R
8 +&>
> t0  EBCDF EF E@@A ?
j +&> uvw2/xyz{z|{|y}
) +&>
EG E@@A ?  443S 
 T  
 !"#$%!
YU [ Z
 . &/ ZX YW \ V U V
& 0- Y
E H EBCD
/

IJ KJ#L$M #" NO%P  &// 


T  
&575+ +*;;<;9
>& +*;;<;9 YU [ Z
ZX Y W \ @ U @
>& >1//Q/ Y
>& +,>;)
&575+ 5,+658.
 433S 

IJ KJ#L$M #" NO%P T  

&575+ >78+7<;9 YU [ Z
ZX YW \ ] U ]
Y

Figure 120: Voltage Dependent Overload Curve Selection logic diagram

1601-0450 331
Chapter 8 - Protection


‹‹Œ–‹—“˜ Œ‹™‰ŽŒ‰• N "+> (#
O
P
š›œ L
L M
`
ab 
c M
N %ZBHIWB %GWZGW
*\EDKB *e@W BAWIHW O BKIg 8¹(#º
P *

 %EKg \E »<Ÿ
"!,
(# [&',(%'> L N 
M O
+\AIJKB]^_ P *
,RSTUž Ÿ V
H\Z L L N ,@YYIE]
"IWdeB]H\Z M M O 
P
,@EFDGHIJKB N "!,
(BC ž %" X ["! O

 P * N
O "+> !"!
+ ?(!*> }~~€ ‚ƒ„ † € P
L + ?(!* ('( & > *
M L

 + ?(!* ,' #%('> ,@YYIE] M
!"! [&',(%'> + ?(!* !Q( & > N
O *
+ ?(!* -%(')> P
+\AIJKB]^_
L + ?(!* -%(') ?!'+>
 "!,
!KIHY M L
 !" %+" ,&-> ‰Š‹ŒŽ ‘‹ ’“”• M 
"IWdeB] !KIHY
+ &"(#"(> š›œ *
,%%" (  ,%'*!' &''(')> ,@YYIE]
,%%" (  ,%'*!' *%##+>
&'       

%% (##+ H\Z %GWZGW BKIg Q
®oi¯ °iªkp±n hnmn²³n²k %% *%##+ rs tsu vwxyzux{ vwxyzux
´©oµn ¶nªn§k¤i² ·i±¤§ %% *!(') !,&!" -!"&*
¶§¸n¯n BABW , RSTU W@ _V
%% &''(') `
ab 
c
\A\ED  !" %#
]DB %% %-"%!+
(BC ‡ %" X ["!  !" #$# `
ab 
c
 !" !"! %#
./012 34552671 N
W ,RSTUV ,RSTU ‡ !KIHY O
(!  * N P

(?  * #\dfGZ O
P !KIHY %GWZGW BKIg Q
(,  * hi jik lmnopknq lmnopkn
#@A *BC ( ,RSTU ‡ 8__V
'BD *BC ( (

 
N
O
*, , RSTUV | L P
* *, *Z]ˆ +BZ , &AB] M
%EKg \E »=Ÿ *, ,RSTU ‡
 
+ ,RSTUV 8__V
*!%  # *'*% 8 %EKg \E »=Ÿ


*!%  # *'*% 9 ¡¢h £¤p¥ ¦¤§¨©m hnªp«
*!%  # *'*% : + , RSTU ‡
8__V W¬­¬ _ ¼½¾¿ÀÁ¼ç³o
*!%  # *'*% ;
*!%  # *'*% < IX BYZ
*!%  # *'*% = @WWBAW +

Figure 121: Thermal Model logic diagram

8.2.1.3 CURRENT UNBALANCE (46)

Unbalance current, also known as negative sequence current or I2, results in disproportionate rotor heating. You
configure it by setting a non-zero value for the Unbalance Bias K Factor under Setpoints > Protection > Group
1(6) > Motor > Thermal Model. This feature protects the motor against unbalance by tripping when the motor’s
thermal capacity is exhausted. The current unbalance protection can detect this condition and issue an alarm or trip
before the motor has heated substantially. Unbalance is defined as the ratio of negative-sequence to positive-
sequence current,

 
 


where Afactor is the adjustment factor used to prevent nuisance trip and/or alarm at light loads.
If the motor is operating at an average current level (Iavg) equal to or greater than the programmed full load current
(FLA, as selected by Setpoints > System > Motor > Setup), the adjustment factor (Afactor) is one. However, if the
motor is operating at an average current level (Iavg) less than FLA then the adjustment factor (Afactor) is the ratio of
average current to full load current.
If this element is enabled, a trip and/or alarm occur(s) once the unbalance level equals or exceeds the set pickup for
the set period of time. If the unbalance level exceeds 40% or when Iavg ≥ 25% FLA and current in any one phase is
less than the cutoff current, the motor is considered to be single phasing and a trip occurs within 2 seconds. Single
phasing protection is disabled if the unbalance trip feature is “Disabled”.

332 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Note:
Unusually high unbalance levels can be caused by incorrect phase CT wiring.

Path:Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Motor > Current Unbalance

TRIP FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Current Unbalance Trip functionality.

UNBAL INPUT
Range: I2/I1, Lookup Table
Default: Lookup Table
In VFD driven motor applications, measurement of the sequence component (I1, I2) from currents Phasors may
not be accurate depending on the VFD output current signatures. The relay provides calculation of unbalance
current (%) using the Lookup table method, so, when setpoint VFD FUNCTION = Enabled, the relay by default
uses unbalance current (%) determined from the Lookup Table established from the graph shown below. The
ratio of negative to positive-sequence current is calculated from 0 to 30%, not 50%.
Unbalance (%) is calculated as:

  
       !"

  &
   #$%   !"

0
 +,-
  !" ' ()* . +,- & ()*

  !" ' / . +,-  ()*

Imin and Imax are the minimum and maximum of the three phase filtered RMS currents. The ratio of negative
sequence to positive sequence current for any magnitude of phase current may be displayed on a graph as

1601-0450 333
Chapter 8 - Protection

shown below (providing the supply is a true three phase supply and there is no zero-sequence current flowing,
no ground fault).

Figure 122: Negative to Positive Sequence Current Ratio

Note:
The UNBAL INPUT setpoint is applicable only when VFD FUNCTION is Enabled.

START BLOCK DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.50 s
This setting specifies the length of time to block the current unbalance function when motor is starting. The
element is active only when the motor is running and is blocked upon the initiation of a motor start for a period
specified by this setting. A value of 0 specifies that the feature is not blocked from start. For values other than 0,

334 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

the feature is disabled when the motor is stopped and also from the time a start is detected until the time entered
expires.

TRIP PICKUP
Range: 4.0 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1%
Range: 4.0 to 40.0% in steps of 0.1% (when setpoint UNBAL INPUT = Lookup Table) (applicable to 859
firmware version 4 or later, or 869 firmware version 3 or later)
Default: 15%
The setting specifies a pickup threshold for the trip function. When setting the pickup level, note that a 1%
voltage unbalance typically translates into a 6% current unbalance. To prevent nuisance trips or alarms, the
pickup level must not be set too low. Also, since short term unbalances are common, a reasonable delay must
be set to avoid nuisance trips or alarms. This setting must be greater than the corresponding setting for the
alarm stage.

TRIP CURVE
Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time
Default: Definite Time
Definite Time
When the curve is programmed as definite time, the trip element operates when the operating quantity exceeds
the pickup level for longer than the set time delay (programmed as TRIP PICKUP DELAY).
Inverse Time
The curve for the unbalance current is defined as:

T = TDM/[Unbal]2, where Unbal is defined by the preceding unbalance equation, T = time in seconds when I2 >
pickup (minimum and maximum times are defined by setpoints), TDM = time dial multiplier

TRIP PICKUP DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s (when TRIP CURVE = Definite Time)
Default: 1.00 s
The setting specifies a time delay for the trip function. This setting is only applicable when TRIP CURVE is
programmed as Definite Time.

Note:
Small power system transients or switching device operation can generate spurious negative sequence current that can result
in the false operation of the Current Unbalance element. In order to prevent false operation of the element, it is strongly
recommended to set Trip Pickup Delay and Alarm Pickup Delay settings greater than two power cycles.

TRIP TDM
Range: 0.00 to 180.00 in steps of 0.01 (when TRIP CURVE = Inverse Time)
Default: 10.00
The setting provides a selection for Time Dial Multiplier which modifies the operating times per the inverse curve.
This setting is only applicable when TRIP CURVE is programmed as Inverse Time.

1601-0450 335
Chapter 8 - Protection

TRIP MAX TIME

Range: 0.00 to 1000.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
The Unbalance maximum time defines the maximum time that any value of negative sequence current in excess
of the pickup value will be allowed to persist before a trip is issued. This setting can be applied to limit the
maximum tripping time for low level unbalances. This setting is only applicable when TRIP CURVE is
programmed as Inverse Time.

TRIP MIN TIME

Range: 0.00 to 1000.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.25 s
Unbalance minimum time defines the minimum time setting that can be applied to limit the minimum tripping
time. Small power system transients or switching device operation can generate spurious negative sequence
current that can result in the false operation of the Current Unbalance element. Unbalance minimum time must
be set in order to prevent false operation of the element. This setting is only applicable when TRIP CURVE is
programmed as Inverse Time.

TRIP RESET TIME

Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting defines the linear reset time of the trip element time accumulator. It is the maximum reset time from
the threshold of tripping based on the motor unbalance inverse curve. The reset time has an accumulator/
integrator to represent the thermal memory counter which increments linearly if the motor unbalance current is
above the threshold, and decrements linearly if it is below the threshold. This setting is only applicable when
TRIP CURVE is programmed as Inverse Time.

336 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Figure 123: Unbalance Inverse Time Curves

TRIP DROPOUT DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
The setting specifies a time delay to reset the trip command. This delay must be set long enough to allow the
breaker or contactor to disconnect the motor. This setting is only applicable when TRIP CURVE is programmed
as Definite Time.

TRIP OUTPUT RELAY X

Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

ALARM FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
The setting enables the Current Unbalance Alarm functionality.

1601-0450 337
Chapter 8 - Protection

ALARM PICKUP
Range: 4.0 to 30.0% in steps of 0.1% (when setpoint UNBAL INPUT = Lookup Table) (applicable to 859
firmware version 4 or later, or 869 firmware version 3 or later)
Range: 4.0 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1%
Default: 10%
The ALARM PICKUP setting specifies a pickup threshold for the alarm function.
For example, if the supply voltage is normally unbalanced up to 2%, the current unbalance seen by a typical
motor is 2 × 6 = 12%. In this case, set the current unbalance alarm pickup to 15% and the current unbalance trip
pickup to 20% to prevent nuisance tripping; 5 or 10 seconds is a reasonable delay.

ALARM PICKUP DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
The setting specifies a time delay for the alarm function.

ALARM DROPOUT DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
The setting specifies a time delay to reset the alarm command.

ALARM OUTPUT RELAY X

Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK
Range: Any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off
The Current Unbalance can be blocked by any asserted FlexLogic operand.

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Latched

338 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

*HG,
5'6
D
E
-./0 123/ F

lm.nm1o2p 10.qr3s-

*
 >)%$ J%, B
C

U
5'6

G'45QR! -./0123/ -./0123/-

D
E
B
*
  +),
*
  +) GH*
I,

*
 F  -./0 123/
C D
E
*
 GJJ)$ GH*
I,
)%
*
$T
*
 F J9 5'U V
*
$T
KLK
MNO
G % J9'W J9'
)4'5 {
5'6 789 HH$ 

-./0 123/ 66'Q

lm.nm1o2p 10.qr3s-

*J+,
) )%
*
*
 J

JSR! ) )%
*
*
 +

-./0 123/
lm.nm1o2p 10.qr3s-

lm.nm1o2p 10.qr3s $
$ *J+ GH*
I,

) )%
* $  +
tuL
 99Q !

lm.nm1o2p 10.qr3s-
B
-./0 123/ C
) )%
* $  J

$  >)%$ J%,

-./0123/
G'45QR! D
E
D J9 5'U V
F
$ 9 E
B F
G % J9'W J9'
C
*'7vQ $9
cdefghiec B
C
P&'45
$  )bH,
lm.nm1o2p 10.qr3s-
D
$   +), E
F 
U $9
     $  789 G5'U,

$  $G,
*
$T *HG, $9
    
$  
V $ H, xyz, $ 9'

%&'    ( $   % $ H, HH$  J9 5'U k$ 

B
C
$  HH$ $ H, 66'Q

$  GJJ)$ GH*
I, x=z, $ 9' v

XYZ [Y  ZZ \  -./0123/
„ 57Q '8j
)%
]Z^_ X `\a J$J >)** *J
G
 >*
 )4'5 R
:€‚ƒ # k!!A
„† '7 $9 5'U


~ :;< { >*
W
:€‚ƒ R k )%
* {  +) D
k E
  :;< R # 
 }   }   F
| :;<
~ :;< >*
W
:€‚ƒ R 
  >*
B
C
>6 9 ? U6 ? 

D lm.nm1o2p 10.qr3s-
E B
F  C
 %w*H T
 %w J

"j k *
$T
:;< { !"= # >*

-./0123/
HH$ 
D J9 5'U V
E 66'Q
F

 !!" # $ G % J9'W J9'
B
C
  !!" # $
D
E
  !!" # $ F

)4'5 ? @!A

B
C "
! xz@!z|
=7Q

Figure 124: Current Unbalance logic diagram

8.2.1.4 MECHANICAL JAM (50LR)

A motor load can become constrained (mechanical jam) during starting or running. The starting current magnitude
alone cannot provide a definitive indication of a mechanical jam; however, the running current magnitude can.
Therefore, the Mechanical Jam element is specially designed to operate for running load jams. Starting load jams
are detected by monitoring acceleration time and speed.
After a motor has started and reached the running state, a trip or alarm occurs if the magnitude of any phase
current exceeds the setting PICKUP for a period of time specified by the setting PICKUP DELAY.
The thermal element also operates during mechanical jams but after a delay when the thermal capacity reaches
100%. Not only does the Mechanical Jam protect the motor by tripping it quicker than the thermal protection, it can
also prevent or limit damage to the driven equipment in the event of a locked rotor during running.
The Mechanical Jam is armed as long as the motor status is not “Starting” or “Stopped”; this includes “Running” and
“Overload”. As soon as any phase current exceeds the user-selectable threshold, the element picks up and
operates after the programmed time delay. The element uses currents configured under Setpoints > System >
Current > Sensing and motor status asserted by the thermal model element. Both the signal source and thermal
protection must be configured properly in order for the mechanical jam protection to operate.
When the 2-Speed Motor Protection functionality is employed, the relay will block Mechanical Jam Protection during
the acceleration time from Speed 1 to Speed 2 until the motor current has dropped below overload pickup level (OL
x FLA) or the ACCEL TIME Fr. SPD 1-2 has expired. At a point in time when the motor has reached the Speed 2
running stage, the Mechanical Jam will be re-enabled using the setpoint Speed2 Motor FLA set under Setpoints >
System > Motor > Setup. The Pickup level must be set higher than the motor loading during normal operation, but
lower than the motor stall level for both speeds. Normally the delay is set to the minimum time delay or set so that
no nuisance trips occur due to momentary load fluctuations.
Path:Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Motor > Mechanical Jam

1601-0450 339
Chapter 8 - Protection

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled
The setting enables the Mechanical Jam functionality.

PICKUP
Range: 1.00 to 10.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01
Default: 2.00 x FLA
The setting defines the excessive current condition that identifies a mechanical jam. As the element is not armed
during start conditions, this threshold can be set below the starting current. Since the element is armed during
overload conditions, this setting must be higher than the maximum overload current. The setting is entered in
multiplies of FLA (programmed under Setpoints > System > Motor > Setup menu).

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.10 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
The setting specifies the pickup delay of the element. In the case of large motors that could feed close-in feeder
faults, this setting can coordinate with feeder protection to avoid false tripping due to excessive fault currents fed
by the motor.

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
The setting defines the reset delay of the element. Typical application includes time seal-in of the tripping
command

BLOCK
Range: Any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off
The mechanical jam can be blocked by any asserted FlexLogic operand.

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

340 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Disabled
Default: Latched


‹ + 
(!‘:’
+!%
,";:’ +!% & 
' 
‘= 
23
4356 
789
,";:’ ‘=
ž +!%
žŸ$‘:
 )( +
 £¤¥ + %:,:
\]^_]`abc `d^efgh 
& $,%$, :‘ >¦+§
STUTV WUXVUYZ[ & '
'
STUTV WUTllkq £¨¥ + %:,: ,;:
 :‘:",:’ :#:©
 

  ž,", +!% :‘
+ Œ



 )( 


iVTj WkUlTYZU m “VTUktUYTZ m & 23
4356 
789
STUTV m Wlkqr †ttk”kVXUYTZ ' ž ‘=

 Yjk 


 
‹ +   
 
†ˆˆ„ •S„ i‚– W“‡ — ˜r‰ + Œ

(!‘:’  
 
iVTj WkUlTYZU m “VTUktUYTZ m   & ==ž’ $,%$, :‘ ¡
U™š›šœ '
STUTV m †ttk”kVXUYTZ UYjk  !"#$% ))+ ( , %:,:¢ %:,:


 23
4356 
789
\]^_]`abc `d^efgh    ()* &

 (  + ()* ' :"; <= > 
Wlkkqr STUTV WsYUtu  S€€‚ €ƒ„‚ €†‡ i†ˆ€‚‰
 ,-.-
  ))(Š  +  ‹ ,/01
iVTj WkUlTYZU m WnoUkj
m STUTV m WkUpl + Π
 !"#$% & 23
4356 
789
 '
‚YoYZ[ „q[k :"; <= >  

IŽ ?@ABC DEFFCGHB MFNO vwxy z {| } ~|

?@ABC DEFFCGH DP QAGR

  > :"  !"#$%

  vwxy ° ± ³ ´v µ v¶ µ v·¸
²
 

?@ABC DEFFCGHB IAJGKHELC

MFNO ?@ABC DEFFCGH DP QAGR
    
     £¥­¥¨®¯"’
    
‹ ª‹( %%‘!",!ž¢ %;: "$:ž, :
«!,";:’ ¬= ¬$ž’=:ž,‘ ; =ž!,$’:
¦©© § ,  ¦©© § «;:ž :,%!ž,
ª‹( ‹$ž",!ž ! )ž‘:’ ž’ %:ž’ ª‹( ,
 %:’ ! :,:’

Figure 125: Mechanical Jam 1 logic diagram

8.2.1.5 UNDERCURRENT (37)

The relay provides one Undercurrent element per protection group. The element responds to a per-phase current.
When the motor is in the running state, an alarms occurs if the magnitude of any phase current falls below the
undercurrent alarm pickup level for the time specified by the undercurrent alarm delay. Furthermore, a trip occurs if
the magnitude of any phase current falls below the undercurrent trip pickup level for the time specified by the
undercurrent trip delay. The alarm and trip pickup levels must be set lower than the lowest motor loading during
normal operations.
The Undercurrent element is active only when the motor is running and is blocked upon the initiation of a motor start
for a period of time defined by the setting START BLOCK DELAY. This block may be used to allow pumps to build
up head before the undercurrent element trips or alarms. A second independent Undercurrent protection element is
provided for Speed 2. If 2 speed functionality is enabled, the relay relies on the motor speed indication; so the main
Undercurrent protection element is only active when the motor is running at speed 1 (low speed), and the Speed2
Undercurrent protection element is only active when the motor is running at high speed (speed 2).
Path:Setpoints > Protection > Group 1 > Motor > Undercurrent 1

TRIP FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Undercurrent Trip functionality.

1601-0450 341
Chapter 8 - Protection

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: dependent upon the order code
Default: CT Bank 1-J1
This setting provides the CT Bank input for the Undercurrent element.

START BLOCK DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 15000.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.50 s
The Undercurrent element is active only when the motor is running and it is blocked upon the initiation of a motor
start for a period of time defined by the START BLOCK DELAY setting (e.g., this block can be used to allow
pumps to build up head before the undercurrent element trips or alarms).

START BLOCK DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.50 s
The Undercurrent element remains blocked when the breaker closes for a period of time defined by this setting.
The START BLOCK DELAY setting allows the connected load to build-up to a certain level before the
undercurrent element trips or alarms.

TRIP PICKUP
Range: 0.10 to 0.99 x FLA in steps of 0.01 x FLA
Default: 0.70 x FLA
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the trip function.

TRIP PICKUP
Range: 0.05 to 0.95 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 0.60 x CT
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the trip function.

TRIP PICKUP DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies a time delay for the trip function.

TRIP DROPOUT DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies a specifies a time delay to reset the trip command. This delay should be set long enough to
allow the breaker or contactor to disconnect the motor.

342 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

TRIP DROPOUT DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies a specifies a time delay to reset the trip command. This delay should be set long enough to
allow the breaker or contactor to disconnect the feeder.

TRIP OUTPUT RELAY X

Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

ALARM FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Undercurrent Alarm functionality.

ALARM PICKUP
Range: 0.10 to 0.99 x FLA in steps of 0.01 x FLA
Default: 0.75 x FLA
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the alarm function.

ALARM PICKUP
Range: 0.10 to 0.95 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 0.70 x CT
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the alarm function.

ALARM PICKUP DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies a time delay for the alarm function.

ALARM DROPOUT DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies a time delay to reset the alarm command.

ALARM OUTPUT RELAY X

Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand

1601-0450 343
Chapter 8 - Protection

Default: Off
The Undercurrent can be blocked by any asserted FlexLogic operand.

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Latched
lm4nm7o8p 764qr9s
QUJ ]GV^
B NhHi ]Z_ wEi ]< <^IGFI >TF^TF
C
D ZI;J x y]Z_z
X j<U~TG;I VU w{|
Y
w{|i ]< <^IGFI FOI

         34567895 B
C E WI;IFIP :GI=IG}
         ]GV^ _V=T^ 345678953 D j<UFF<G ]GV^ ZI;J
 ]GV^ _V=T^ HI;J NQ]jk
Z[\ g e ]GV^ _V=T^ ]GV^ HG<^<TF HI;J lm4nm7o8p 764qr9s3
 X ZhEh] Z
f e ]GV^ _V=T^ Y F`M` [UPIGTG ]GV^ >_
Fabc j<RRUP
 X
d e ]GV^ _V=T^ Y
€OIU SH STUFV<U VW hU;IP UP 34567895
<^IGUP ‚SH \<F :J^WWIPƒ VW ]GTIv
34567895 ]GV^ >TF^TF ZI;J u
TGGIUF VU^TFW GI W„VFOIP G<R
_OW<G †UVFTPI F< SV;FIGIP Z†E‡ Q;GR _V=T^ 345678953 H< \<F >^IGFIv >^IGFI
Q;GR _V=T^ HI;J
Z[\ g e Q;GR _V=T^
X Q;GR HG<^<TF HI;J
f e Q;GR _V=T^ Y F`M` lm4nm7o8p 764qr9s3
Fabc
d e Q;GR _V=T^ [UPIGTG ]GV^ _t_

34567895 NhHi Q;GR

]Z_ S[\j]>\i B
C
HVW;IP@A D
]GV^ X X
Y Y
NFOIP ]GV^ B
B C
j<U~TG;I C D E
D
NQ]jk
ZhEh] Z
j<RRUP

lm4nm7o8p 764qr9s3
[UPIGTG Q;GR >_
34567895 [UPIGTG Q;GR _t_
:;<=
>?@A 34567895 34567895
EFGF :;<= HI;J Q;GR >TF^TF ZI;J u
FKLM A H< \<F >^IGFIv >^IGFI
&'()'*+,- *.(/012 B
 ! " ##$% C
D

34567895
Q;GR STUFV<U
HVW;IP
Q;GR X
Y
NFOIP Q;GR

w|ˆA|‰Q‰‡PG

Figure 126: Undercurrent logic diagram

8.2.1.6 LOSS OF EXCITATION (40)

Typically, a synchronous machine has an excitation system, which supplies DC (Direct Current) to energize the
rotor/field winding. This excitation to the machine rotor may be completely or partially lost due to various abnormal
conditions, such as field circuit open or short, loss of supply to the excitation system, or unintentional trip of a field
breaker and so on. Due to loss of excitation, the synchronous machine may act as an induction machine, which
may cause the machine to over-speed (above synchronous speed) and also draw reactive power (Var) from the
system. Therefore, Loss Of Excitation (LOE) protection is applied to protect synchronous machines from over-
speeding, as well as to recover systems from voltage collapse.

344 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Diameter
Circle 2
Diameter
Circle 1
Circle 1

Circle 2
Offset

Offset
R

Figure 127: Loss of excitation Characteristic

Loss of excitation protection is achieved using positive sequence impedance measurements (from voltage and
currents), and two inverted offset (Mho) circles, as shown. User configurable Under-Voltage (UV) supervision and
sufficient positive sequence current (>0.05 x CT) are applied for additional protection of this element. Each
individual circle characteristic can be applied independently. In the case where a circle element is enabled and the
measured positive sequence impedance falls within this circle, the element operates with the corresponding time
delay setting. Further, a 20 ms reset delay is applied to the element logic which enhances protection dependability,
especially when measured impedance jitters around a circle boundary.

Note:
All impedance (in ohms) settings refer to the relay side impedance quantity, i.e. the CT/VT secondary side when looking into
the machine.

Base impedance should be calculated on secondary side.

The following is the guideline used to derive the setting of this element.
The inner circle (Circle 1) diameter is set to machine base impedance (i.e. 1 pu), which considers the loss of field
during full loading to medium loading of the machine. An offset is one half of the direct axis transient reactance (X'd)
- both impedances referring to the relay side. The corresponding time delay for the inner circle needs to be higher
than the worst case power swing scenario, and hence this value is determined from stability studies (typically, this
value may be in the range of 0.2 s to 0.5 s).

1601-0450 345
Chapter 8 - Protection

On the other hand, the outer circle (e.g. Circle 2) diameter is set to the synchronous reactance of the machine (Xd)
and an offset equal to one half of the direct axis transient reactance (X'd) - both impedances referring to the relay
side. This allows the machine to be protected during light load conditions or with reduced field excitation. The
corresponding time delay for the outer circle should be high enough to prevent mis-operations due to power swings,
and hence this value is determined from stability studies (typically, this value may be in the range of 0.5 s to 2 s).

Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Motor > Loss of Excitation

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: Positive Impedance 1, Positive Impedance 2
Default: Positive Impedance 1
The signal input selection to apply this element at the terminal or neutral side CT. The CT and VT sources used
by Positive impedance 1 and 2 are specified in Metering > Impedance > Pos Seq Impedance. Positive
sequence impedance 1 is calculated using 3-phase J1 currents and 3-phase J2 voltages. With K-slot order code
option, positive sequence impedance 2 is calculated using 3-phase K1 currents and 3-phase J2 voltages.

CIRCLE 1 FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled

CIRCLE 1 DIAMETER
Range: 0.1 to 300.0 ohms in steps of 0.1 ohms
Default: 25.0 ohms
This setting is the diameter of the Circle 1 characteristic in ohms, referring to the CT/VT secondary (relay).

CIRCLE 1 OFFSET
Range: 0.1 to 300.0 ohms in steps of 0.1 ohms
Default: 2.5 ohms

346 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

This setting is the offset of the Circle 1 characteristic in ohms, referring to the CT/VT secondary (relay).

CIRCLE 1 PICKUP DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.30 s

CIRCLE 1 UV SUPERVISION
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
Under-voltage supervision of the element can be enabled or disabled. If Enabled for Circle 1, the positive
sequence voltage at the machine terminal should be lower than setting value in “UV Supervision” in order to
execute the Circle 1 impedance element, i.e. LOE Circle 1 is enabled only in case voltage drops below the “UV
supervision” level. This additional check ensures the drop in machine terminal voltage in case of loss of
excitation.

CIRCLE 1 OUTPUT RELAY X

Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

CIRCLE 2 FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Default: Disabled

CIRCLE 2 DIAMETER
Range: 0.1 to 300.0 ohms in steps of 0.1 ohms
Default: 35.0 ohms
This setting is the diameter of the Circle 2 characteristic in ohms, referring to the CT/VT secondary (relay).

CIRCLE 2 OFFSET
Range: 0.1 to 300.0 ohms in steps of 0.1 ohms
Default: 2.5 ohms
This setting is the offset of the Circle 2 characteristic in ohms, referring to the CT/VT secondary (relay).

CIRCLE 2 PICKUP DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s

CIRCLE 2 UV SUPERVISION
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
Under-voltage supervision of the element can be enabled or disabled. If Enabled for Circle 2, the positive
sequence voltage at the machine terminal should be lower than setting value in “UV Supervision” in order to

1601-0450 347
Chapter 8 - Protection

execute the Circle 2 impedance element, i.e. LOE Circle 1 is enabled only in case voltage drops below the “UV
supervision” level. This additional check ensures the drop in machine terminal voltage in case of loss of
excitation.

CIRCLE 2 OUTPUT RELAY X

Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

UV SUPERVISION
Range: 0.00 to 1.50 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Default: 0.70 x VT
This setting specifies the pickup value for under-voltage supervision for one or both circles (if enabled).

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Latched

SETPOINT FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

FUNCTION: Any Trip
Disabled=0
LED: TRIP
AND

Trip To operate Output Relay

Latched Trip 1(TRIP)
OR

OR

Alarm
Latched Alarm
Configurable S
AND

SETPOINTS LATCH
AND

BLOCK R
Off = 0 LED: ALARM
AND

FlexLogic Operands FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR

VT Fuse Fail 1 OP Any Alarm

AND

From System\Motor\Setup S
SETPOINTS COMPARATOR LATCH SETPOINT
Synchronous Motor Type RUN
Command R Output Relay X
None=0 I1 > 0.05 x CT
AND

RESET Do Not Operate, Operate

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Motor Starting
OR

LOE Circle 1 OP
Motor Running
OR

SETTING
Motor Overload
AND

AND

UV SUPERVISION
SM Field Applied FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
RUN
IV1| > PKP SETTING LOE Circle 1 PKP
SETTING
OR CIRCLE 1 DIAMETER
CIRCLE 1 UV
SUPERVISION CIRCLE 1 OFFSET
SETTING
Disabled=0 RUN
TIMER CIRCLE 1 DELAY
Enabled=1 SETTING
SIGNAL INPUT
0 tpkp
20 ms 0
CIRCLE 1
V1 Impedance 1 or 2 depending
I1 on Signal Input selection

894172C1

Figure 128: Loss of Excitation Logic Diagrams: circle 1

348 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

SETPOINT FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

FUNCTION: Any Trip
Disabled=0
LED: TRIP

AND
Trip To operate Output Relay
Latched Trip OR 1(TRIP)

OR
Alarm
Latched Alarm
Configurable S

AND
SETPOINTS LATCH

AND
BLOCK R
Off = 0 LED: ALARM

AND
FlexLogic Operands FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR
VT Fuse Fail 1 OP Any Alarm

AND
From System\Motor\Setup S
SETPOINTS COMPARATOR LATCH SETPOINT
Synchronous Motor Type RUN
Command R Output Relay X
None=0 I1 > 0.05 x CT
AND

RESET Do Not Operate, Operate

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Motor Starting

OR
LOE Circle 2 OP
Motor Running
OR

SETTING
Motor Overload
AND

AND
UV SUPERVISION
SM Field Applied FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
RUN
IV1| > PKP SETTING LOE Circle 2 PKP
SETTING
OR Circle 2 DIAMETER
Circle 2 UV
SUPERVISION Circle 2 OFFSET
SETTING
Disabled=0 RUN
TIMER Circle 2 DELAY
Enabled=1 SETTING
SIGNAL INPUT
0 tpkp
20 ms 0
Circle 2
V1 Impedance 1 or 2 depending
I1 on Signal Input selection

894173C1

Figure 129: Loss of Excitation Logic Diagrams: circle 2

8.2.1.7 OVERLOAD ALARM

The Overload Alarm is used to alarm abnormal load increases that can indicate problems with the process. An
alarm is enabled only after the acceleration stage is complete and the motor has entered the running or overload
stage. Once enabled, the alarm is generated when the biased motor load current exceeds the PICKUP setting for
the time delay specified by the setting PICKUP DELAY. When the current has subsided, the alarm stays active for
the time specified by the setting PICKUP DELAY.
Path:Setpoints > Protection > Group 1 > Motor > Overload Alarm

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Default: Disabled

PICKUP
Range: 0.50 to 3.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01 x FLA
Default: 0.70 x FLA

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand

1601-0450 349
Chapter 8 - Protection

Default: Off

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Latched

AND
LED:
ALARM
SETPOINT FlexLogic Operands

OR
FUNCTION Any Alarm
Disabled

AND
S
Alarm
LATCH
OR

Latched Alarm
R
Configurable
RESET Set
Dominant
Command

SETPOINT SETPOINT
BLOCK PICKUP SETPOINT
AND

Off = 0 RUN SETPOINTS

PICKUP DELAY:
OUTPUT RELAY X

MOTOR STATUS Iavg > PICKUP DROPOUT DELAY: Do Not Operate, Operate

OR
Running
Overload
tPKP FlexLogic Operands
tDPO
OR

SM Resync Overload Alarm OP

SM Running
Applicable to Only 869 Synchronous FlexLogic Operands
Motor Application
Overload Alarm PKP

Phase Currents (RMS) from J1-CT

Bank
Phase A current (Ia)
Phase B current (Ib)
Phase C current (Ic)
894097A3

Figure 130: Overload Alarm logic diagram

8.2.1.8 SHORT CIRCUIT

If Short Circuit is enabled, a trip or alarm occurs once the magnitude of any phase current exceeds the setting
PICKUP for the time specified by the setting PICKUP DELAY.

Note:
Care must be taken when turning on this feature. If the interrupting device (contactor or circuit breaker) is not rated to break
the fault current, the function of this feature must not be configured as Trip. Alternatively, this feature may be programmed
as Alarm or Latched Alarm and assigned to an auxiliary relay connected to an upstream device which is capable of
breaking the fault current.

Path:Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Motor > Short Circuit

350 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled
The setting enables the Short Circuit setting.
If the operating condition is satisfied when Trip is selected as the function, the logic operands Short Circuit PKP
and Short Circuit OP are asserted, which in turn operates the LED trip and trip output relay.
If Alarm is selected, the LED alarm flashes on Short Circuit operation, and it automatically resets when the
activating condition clears.
If Latched Alarm is selected, the LED alarm flashes on Short Circuit operation, and stays on after the condition
clears, until a reset command is initiated. The TRIP output relay does not operate if Latched Alarm or Alarm
function is selected. Any assignable output relays can be selected to operate when the Short Circuit function
is selected as Latched Alarm, Alarm or Trip.

OVERREACH FILTER
Range: Off, On
Default: Off
When a motor starts, the starting current (typically 6 × FLA for an induction motor) has an asymmetrical
component. This asymmetrical current may cause one phase to see as much as 1.6 times the normal RMS
starting current. If the Pickup was set at 1.25 times the symmetrical starting current, it is probable that there
would be nuisance trips during motor starting. A rule of thumb has been developed over time that short circuit
protection be at least 1.6 times the symmetrical starting current value. This allows the motor to start without
nuisance tripping. The overreach filter removes the DC component from the asymmetrical current present at the
moment of fault. This eliminates overreach; however, the response time slows slightly (10 to 15 ms) but remains
within specification.

PICKUP
Range: 1.00 to 30.00 x CT in steps of 0.01
Default: 6.00 x CT
The setting specifies a pickup threshold for the Short Circuit element.
If 2-Speed Motor Protection functionality is employed, then the CT primary is the value of setting “2-Speed CT
Primary” that can be found under Setpoints > System > Motor.

Note:
Special care must be taken when setting Pickup for motor applications with low and high speed windings. Pickup must be set
with enough margin such that short circuit elements do not malfunction when switching from one speed to another.

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.00 s
The setting specifies the pickup delay for the Short Circuit element.

1601-0450 351
Chapter 8 - Protection

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.00 s
The setting defines the reset delay of the element.

BLOCK
Range: Any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off
The Short Circuit can be blocked by any asserted FlexLogic operand.

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Latched

352 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

869: To operate Output

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Do Not Operate, Operate
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

Contactor Trip Relay

859: To operate the
selected Breaker/
Relay 1(TRIP)

Short Circuit 1 PKP

SETPOINT

Short Circuit 1 OP
Any Alarm
Any Trip

Output Relay X
LED: ALARM
LED: TRIP
OR

OR OR

LATCH
LATCH

R
S
R
S
AND AND AND AND

Command
RESET
tRST
DROPOUT DELAY:
SETPOINTS
PICKUP DELAY:

tPKP

OR
Metering > Motor > Short Circuit
IB > Pickup
IA > Pickup

IC > Pickup

ACTUAL VALUES
SETPOINT

SC RMS Ib
SC RMS Ia

SC RMS Ic
PICKUP:
RUN

AND
OVERREACH FILTER:
SETPOINT

Off or On

OR
Phase Currents from Phase Current
SETPOINT
SETPOINT

CT bank

IC RMS
IA RMS
IB RMS

894099C1
Latched Alarm
Configurable
Latched Trip
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0

BLOCK:
Off=0
Alarm
Trip

Figure 131: Short Circuit logic diagram

8.2.1.9 MOTOR GROUND FAULT (50SG)

When motor stator windings become wet or suffer insulation deterioration, low magnitude leakage currents often
precede complete failure and resultant destructive fault currents. This ground fault protection provides early
detection of such leakage current, so that the motor can be tripped in time to limit motor damage. However,
sometimes a high magnitude ground fault occurs, which is too high for the contactor to interrupt. In this case, it is
best to set the Ground Fault function as a Control to signal an upstream device, or wait for the fuses to do the

1601-0450 353
Chapter 8 - Protection

interruption. Various situations (e.g. contactor bounce) can cause transient ground currents during motor starting,
which can exceed the pickup level for a very short period of time. The TRIP PICKUP START DELAY setting can be
fine-tuned to an application such that it still responds very quickly, but rides through normal operational
disturbances. Normally, the Ground Fault time delays are set as short as possible (0 seconds). However, time to trip
might have to be increased if nuisance tripping occurs. Special care must be taken when the ground input is wired
to the phase CTs in a residual connection. When a motor starts, the starting current (typically 6 × FLA for an
induction motor) has an asymmetrical or DC component. This momentary DC component causes each of the phase
CTs to react differently, and cause a net current into the ground input of the relay. A 20 ms block of the ground fault
element when the motor starts normally enables the relay to ride through this momentary ground current signal.
Path:Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Motor > Ground Fault

TRIP FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Latched Trip, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Ground Fault Trip functionality.

GROUND CT TYPE
Range: 1/5A, 50:0.025A, 1A SG
Default: 1/5A
For high resistance grounded systems, sensitive ground current detection is possible if the 50:0.025A or 1A
sensitive ground input is used. To use the 50:0.025A input, select “50:0.025A” for the Ground CT Type. On
solidly grounded systems where fault currents can be quite large, the 1/5A (1A or 5A depending on the order
code) secondary ground CT input must be used for either zero-sequence or residual ground sensing. If the
connection is residual, the Ground CT secondary and primary values must be the same as the phase CT. If
however, the connection is zero-sequence, the Ground CT secondary and primary values must be entered.

Note:
The Ground CT type setting is only applicable when 50:0.025A or 1A sensitive ground is selected in the order code.
Otherwise, this setting is hidden and 1/5A secondary Ground CT Type is used as the base value.

TRIP PICKUP
For 1/5A Ground CT Type:
Range: 0.01 to 10.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 0.20 x CT
For 50:0.025 Ground CT Type (Ground Current order code option B1/B5/0B):
Range: 0.50 to 25.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Default: 10.00 A
For 1A Sensitive Ground CT Type (Ground Current order code option S1):
Range: 0.005 to 3.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 0.200 x CT
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the trip function.

354 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

TRIP PICKUP
For 1/5A Ground CT Type:
Range: 0.01 to 10.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 0.20 x CT
For 50:0.025 Ground CT Type :
Range: 0.50 to 25.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Default: 10.00 A
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the trip function.

TRIP PICKUP DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 1800.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies the amount of time motor ground current must exceed pickup to generate a trip when the
motor is in a running or overload condition.

TRIP PICKUP START DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 1800.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies the amount of time motor ground current must exceed pickup to generate a trip when the
motor is in a starting condition.

Note:
The TRIP PICKUP START DELAY must be set less than the motor starting time in order to avoid any delayed operation of
the element in an event of a ground fault that occurs during motor start and continues while the motor enters into running
state.

TRIP PICKUP RUN DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 1800.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies the amount of time motor ground current must exceed pickup to generate a trip when the
motor is in a running condition.

TRIP DROPOUT DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.01 s
This setting specifies a time delay to reset the trip command. This delay must be set long enough to allow the
breaker or contactor to disconnect the motor.

TRIP OUTPUT RELAY X

Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

1601-0450 355
Chapter 8 - Protection

ALARM FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Ground Fault Alarm functionality.

ALARM PICKUP
For 1/5A Ground CT Type:
Range: 0.01 to 10.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 0.10 x CT
For 50:0.025 Ground CT Type:
Range: 0.50 to 25.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Default: 5.00 A
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the alarm function.

ALARM PICKUP
For 1/5A Ground CT Type:
Range: 0.01 to 10.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 0.10 x CT
For 50:0.025 Ground CT Type (Ground Current order code option B1/B5/0B):
Range: 0.50 to 25.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Default: 5.00 A
For 1A Sensitive Ground CT Type (Ground Current order code option S1):
Range:0.005 to 3.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 0.100 x CT
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the alarm function.

ALARM PICKUP DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 1800.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies the amount of time motor ground current must exceed pickup to generate an alarm.

ALARM DROPOUT DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.01 s
This setting specifies a time delay to reset the alarm command.

ALARM OUTPUT RELAY X

Range: Operate, Do Not Operate

356 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK
Range: Any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off
The Ground Fault can be blocked by any asserted FlexLogic operand.

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Disabled
Default: Latched

1601-0450 357
358
8.2.1.10
Chapter 8 - Protection

neglecting to release a fan brake.

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
LED: TRIP

ACCELERATION TIME
869: To operate Output
AND

Relay 1(TRIP)
OR

Figure 132: Ground Fault logic diagram

859: To operate the
SETPOINTS selected Breaker/
S
TRIP PICKUP START DELAY:
AND

Contactor Trip Relay

OR

TRIP DROPOUT DELAY: LATCH

tPKP SETPOINT
SETPOINT t RST

AND
RESET R
SETPOINT Trip Output Relay X
TRIP FUNCTION: Command
TRIP PICKUP: Do Not Operate, Operate
OR

RUN

AND
Disabled=0
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Trip SETPOINTS
Ig > Pickup GndFault 1 Trip OP
Latched Trip TRIP PICKUP RUN DELAY:

OR
OR

TRIP DROPOUT DELAY: GndFault 1 Trip PKP

Configurable tPKP tRST

AND
SETPOINT
BLOCK:
Off=0

SETPOINT
SETPOINT
ALARM FUNCTION: ALARM PICKUP: SETPOINTS
ALARM PICKUP DELAY:
RUN

AND
Disabled=0 ALARM DROPOUT DELAY: LED: Alarm
AND

ALARM tPKP tRST FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

Ig > Pickup

OR
LATCH ALARM Any Alarm
OR

S SETPOINT
AND

SETPOINT
LATCH Alarm Output Relay X
GROUND CT TYPE: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND Do Not Operate, Operate
RESET R
1/5A Motor Starting 20ms 0 Command
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

OR
50:0.025A* Motor Stopped
GndFault 1 Alrm OP
1A SG*
GndFault 1 Alrm PKP
Ig RMS

* if selected in the order code

otherwise use 1/5A
894090C1

during a start as early as possible to minimize re-starting delays once the cause of the stall is remedied, e.g.
Many motors have a time margin between acceleration-time and the stall limit. It is advantageous to detect stalling

1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

The Acceleration Time element compares actual starting time with a pre-determined time setting (defined under
Setpoints > System > Motor as MAX. ACCELERATION TIME) and operates when it is exceeded. This element
has the functionality to adapt the tripping time for starts with lower starting current, and it stores acceleration time
and current of the last five starts.

Note:
In both Definite Time and Adaptive mode, if motor remains in Starting state for more than two times the set MAX.
ACCELERATION TIME, the element de-asserts the asserted operating flag, and resets timer to zero so that thermal
protection operates according to set thermal limits.

The element uses currents configured under Setpoints > System > Current Sensing and motor status asserted by
the Thermal Model protection element. Both the signal source and thermal protection must be configured properly in
order for the Acceleration Time protection to operate.
The following figure shows examples of constant and variable acceleration currents and explains measurement of
the acceleration time and current. Part “a” represents a constant current start and part “b” represents a variable
current start.
The element stores the basic statistics for the last five successful starts. The following values are retained, available
for display and accessible via communications:
● Date and time of starting.
● Acceleration time (seconds).
● Effective acceleration current (multiplies of FLA).
● Peak acceleration current (multiplies of FLA).
Recorded effective acceleration current and time could be used for fine-tuning of the relay settings.
$%

 
$&

$(

$)

$'
 
 
  0 0 0
  1 2 0 2  2 /
    3
/
$*

 !" #  !" #

   

+,- +.-



Figure 133: Sample Acceleration Currents: (a) Constant Current Start and (b) Variable Current Start

Path:Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Motor > Acceleration Time

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable

1601-0450 359
Chapter 8 - Protection

Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled
The setting enables the Acceleration Time functionality.

CURRENT
Range: 1.00 to 10.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01
Default: 6.00 x FLA
The setting is only used in the Adaptive mode. The setting defines a constant current that when applied to the
motor accelerates the motor within the normal acceleration time. The setting is used to adapt the tripping action
when the current is changing significantly during the start, such as due to voltage dips.

MODE
Range: Definite Time, Adaptive
Default: Definite Time
The setting defines the operating mode of the Acceleration Time element. When set to “Definite Time”, the
element times duration of the motor start and operates when the starting time exceeds the Max. Acceleration
Time (defined under Setpoints > System > Motor). When set to “Adaptive”, the element uses the effective
accelerating current to adapt to the starting conditions. The operating equation assumes that the accelerating
power is proportional to the square of the current and neglects any current unbalance or impact of the rotor slip.
Consequently, in the Adaptive mode, the element operates when the square of the current integrated from the
beginning of the start up to a given time exceeds the product of acceleration Current2 x Max. Acceleration Time.

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK
Range: Any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off
The Acceleration Time element can be blocked by any asserted FlexLogic operand.

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Disabled
Default: Latched

360 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

SETPOINT
FUNCTION:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Disabled=0 Any Trip
Trip
LED: TRIP

AND
Latched Trip 869: To operate Output

OR
Alarm Relay 1(TRIP)

AND

OR
Latched Alarm
859: To operate the
Configurable selected Breaker/
S

AND
Contactor Trip Relay
LATCH
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
R
Motor Stopped LED: ALARM

AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR
SETPOINT SETPOINT Any Alarm
BLOCK: CURRENT:

AND
S
Off=0
MAX ACCELERATION TIME:
Definite Time LATCH SETPOINT
RUN
SETPOINT Command R Output Relay X
RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
Mode: Adaptive
T > MAX ACCELERATION TIME FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR
Motor Accel Time OP

OR
RUN

Phase Currents Magnitude from

Phase Current CT bank
I2 T > Current2 x MAX.
IA Mag or IA FLTD RMS*
ACCELERATION TIME
MAX

IB Mag or IB FLTD RMS*

RECORDS
IC Mag or IC FLTD RMS*
Start Date
*For VFD application, phase currents are Calculate: Start Time
switched from fundamental Phasor Peak acceleration current
magnitude (IA/B/C Mag) to Filtered RMS (IA/ Start Acceleration Time
Effective acceleration current
B/C FLTD RMS) when setpoint VFD Function Acceleration time Start Effective Current
is Enabled and operand ‘VFD Not Bypassed’ Start Peak Current
is asserted

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Motor Starting
Motor Running
OR

SM Field Applied*
* Synchronous Motor Application. Not
applicable to 859
 

Figure 134: Acceleration Time logic diagram

8.2.1.11 UNDERPOWER (37P)

The Underpower element responds to total three-phase real power (kW) measured from the phase currents and
voltages. When the motor is in the running state, a trip and/or alarm occurs once the magnitude of three-phase real
power falls below the pickup level for a period of time specified by the TRIP PICKUP DELAY and/or ALARM
PICKUP DELAY. The pickup must be set lower than the lowest motor loading during normal operations. For
example, Underpower may be used to detect loss of load conditions. Loss of load conditions does not always cause
a significant loss of current. Power is a more accurate representation of loading and may be used for more sensitive
detection of load loss. This may be especially useful for detecting process related problems.
Path:Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Motor > Underpower

TRIP FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled
The setting enables the Underpower Trip functionality.

START BLOCK DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 15000.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.50 s
The setting specifies the length of time to block the Underpower function when the motor is starting. The
Underpower element is active only when the motor is running and is blocked upon the initiation of a motor start
for a period of time specified by this setting. For example, this block may be used to allow pumps to build up
head before the Underpower element trips or alarms. A value of 0 specifies that the feature is not blocked from

1601-0450 361
Chapter 8 - Protection

start. For values other than 0, the feature is disabled when the motor is stopped and also from the time a start is
detected until the time entered expires.

TRIP PICKUP
Range: 1 to 25000 kW in steps of 1 kW
Default: 1 kW
The setting specifies a pickup threshold for the trip function. This setting is typically set at a level less than the
corresponding setting for the alarm function.

TRIP PICKUP DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.01 s
The setting specifies a time delay for the trip function. The time delay must be long enough to overcome any
short lowering of the load (e.g. during system faults).

TRIP DROPOUT DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.01 s
The setting specifies a time delay to reset the trip command. This delay must be set long enough to allow the
breaker or contactor to disconnect the motor.

TRIP OUTPUT RELAY X

Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

ALARM FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
The setting enables the Underpower Alarm functionality.

ALARM PICKUP
Range: 1 to 25000 kW in steps of 1 kW
Default: 2 kW
The setting specifies a pickup threshold for the alarm function. The alarm pickup threshold must be less than the
motor load during normal operation.

ALARM DROPOUT DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.01 s
The setting specifies a time delay to reset the alarm command.

362 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

ALARM OUTPUT RELAY X

Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK
Range: Any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off
The Underpower can be blocked by any asserted FlexLogic operand.

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Disabled
Default: Latched
Three Phase Currents from FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
CT bank Underpwr Trip PKP
IA SETPOINT
TRIP PICKUP: SETPOINTS
IB FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP PICKUP DELAY:
IC RUN TRIP DROPOUT DELAY: Any Trip
tPKP tRST LED: TRIP
P3ph < Trip Pickup

AND
Three Phase Voltages from VT 869: To operate Output
Bank P3ph = Pa + Pb + Pc Relay 1(TRIP)
VOLTAGE CONNECTION

OR
WYE DELTA 859: To operate the
VAG VAB S selected Breaker/

AND
Contactor Trip Relay
VBG VBC LATCH
VCG VCA FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
RESET R
Command Underpwr Trip OP

OR
SETPOINT
Output Relay X
IA mag > 0.1 x FLA Do Not Operate, Operate
AND

IB mag > 0.1 x FLA SETPOINT

IC mag > 0.1 x FLA ALARM PICKUP: SETPOINTS
ALARM PICKUP DELAY:
RUN
ALARM DROPOUT DELAY:
VA mag > 0.25 x Vrated tPKP
P3ph < ALarm Pickup tRST
AND

VB mag > 0.25 x Vrated

SETPOINT
AND

VC mag > 0.25 x Vrated

TRIP FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Trip LED: Alarm
AND
OR

Latched Trip FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

Configurable

OR
Any Alarm
AND

SETPOINT
AND

S
BLOCK: LATCH
Off=0
RESET R
SETPOINT Command
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND START BLOCK DELAY:
Motor Stopped tBLK 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Underpwr Alarm OP
Underpwr Alarm PKP
AND

SETPOINT
ALARM FUNCTION: SETPOINT
AND

Output Relay X
Disabled=0
Do Not Operate, Operate
ALARM
OR

LATCH ALARM

894096A1

Figure 135: Underpower logic diagram

8.2.1.12 SQUIRREL CAGE SPEED-DEPENDENT THERMAL PROTECTION

Note:
SC Speed-Dependent Thermal Protection is only applicable to brush-type synchronous motors with squirrel-cage (SC)
windings.

1601-0450 363
Chapter 8 - Protection

The amortisseur, or squirrel-cage (SC) winding, of a brush-type synchronous motor is one of the motor elements
most susceptible to thermal damage. Used only during motor starts, and with limitations on available space, it is
usually made of lighter material than the cage winding of an induction motor. The cage is also vulnerable to
overheating should the motor be allowed to run out of synchronism with no excitation. In this case, it runs as an
induction motor at some value of slip which produces cage current that develops running torque. The cage of a
synchronous motor is not designed for continuous operation, therefore, an important protective function of the
controller is to prevent overheating of the cage both during starting, and running out of synchronism.
Monitoring the starting condition of a brush-type synchronous motor can be accomplished by looking at the
frequency of induced field current, as is done to establish synchronism. The allowable stall time of a specific motor
quantifies the limited time the motor can safely remain stalled (as provided by the motor manufacturer). Combining
these two concepts, an acceleration schedule can be established for the motor in terms of running time at any
speed less than synchronous, as a percent of allowable stall time. Increased air circulation from the rotor fan
reduces the heating rate as the motor accelerates, allowing running time to increase. Frequency can be measured
directly as an indication of speed, and the curves for Time vs Speed provided by the motor manufacturer can be
used for protection by the 869 that integrates the time-speed function.

Note:
Speed-dependent thermal protection is a stand-alone feature that does not require feedback from the main thermal model.
The thermal capacity calculated by speed-dependent thermal protection only takes speed into account, without allowing for
motor starting current. In contrast, the main thermal model is current-based, but can include the effect of speed when the
Speed Bias feature is enabled. For more details on current-based thermal model speed biasing, see the Speed Bias section
under Thermal Model (49).

Path:Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Motor > SM SC Spd-Dept Thermal Prot

TRIP FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the squirrel-cage (SC) speed-dependent thermal protection functionality. Speed-dependent
thermal protection is only active when motor is in the Starting or Resync state.

TIME-SPEED CURVE
Range: SPM 1.05, SPM 1.46, SPM 2.05, SPM 3.00, FlexCurve ST
Default: SPM 1.05
The speed-dependent thermal overload curve determines the thermal limit conditions that can damage the
amortisseur, or squirrel-cage rotor winding of a brush-type synchronous motor. This curve accounts for motor
heating during starting, i.e. during stall and acceleration conditions. The curve can take one of the five curves.
The selected curve can also serve as a base for a voltage dependent (VD) curve if Voltage Dependent function
is Enabled. The algorithm uses memory in the form of a register called SC Thermal Capacity Used. This register
is updated every two power cycles using the following equation

364 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

where:
● trun represents the time coordinate on the time-speed curve, corresponding to the motor speed,
● Tsystem represents the period in seconds corresponding to the two nominal power system frequency cycles.

Note:
The relay initiates a trip operation and displays SC Thermal OP if the calculated thermal limit of the cage winding reaches
100%.

Cooling
Squirrel-cage thermal protection enters a cool-down mode when the motor state changes to Stopped from Running
(unsuccessful start) or to SM Stabilizing from Running (successful start). In either condition, the SC thermal
capacity used value is reduced in an exponential manner. The algorithm applies the same cooling time constants
found in the main (current-based) thermal model referred to as 'Cool Time Constant Stopped' and 'Cool Time
Constant Running'. When the main thermal model is disabled, the cooling algorithm applies a time constant of 20
minutes. Thus, after every 20 minutes of elapsed time, the SC thermal capacity used value should be decremented
approximately by 37% of its initial value.
Motor cooling is calculated as follows:

where:
● SC TCused is the squirrel-cage winding thermal capacity used,t is the time in minutes,τcoolis the Cool Time
Constant.
● After a successful start, such that motor state changes to SM Stabilizing from Running, τcool is the Cool Time
Constant Running found under the description of the main thermal model.
● After an unsuccessful start, such that motor state changes to Stopped from Running, τcool is the Cool Time
Constant Stopped found under the main thermal model.
● When the main Thermal Model is Disabled, regardless of the motor state, SC Speed-Dependent Thermal
Protection takes τcool as equal to 20 min.

Description of SPM 1.05, SPM 1.46, SPM 2.05, and SPM 3.00
The following figure shows the predefined time vs. speed curves for the squirrel-cage winding used by the SC
heating protection during acceleration. The motor speed is determined from the induced field voltage frequency.
Maximum allowable stall time at zero speed is programmed as 'Stall Time'. Curve name suggests the time multiple
that motor may run at 50% speed and is expressed as a multiple of the allowable motor Stall Time (ST).
Example: If the motor Stall Time is programmed as 10 seconds and SPM 3.00 is selected, then motor can run at:

1601-0450 365
Chapter 8 - Protection

3.00 x 10 sec. = 30 seconds at 50% speed

Figure 136: Amortisseur (squirrel-cage) winding protection

Description of Custom curve

When none of the four pre-defined curves (SPM 1.05 through 3.00) is applicable, the FlexCurve ST setting provides
the option of a customized time vs. speed curve. The number of operating points, time, and speed value as multiple
of nominal speed can be defined based on the nominal frequency.When values of time vs. speed are not available
for use building a custom curve, the EnerVista D&I Setup software can estimate the curve using the option Est
Time-Speed available under the FlexCurve ST menu.
FlexCurve ST settings are found under Path:System > FlexCurves.

366 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

VD Function
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
Many synchronous motor starting applications involve either reduced voltage (starting reactor or
autotransformer) or part-winding starting methods. When these methods are used, the available torque for
acceleration is reduced compared to the torque resulting from a full-voltage start. In addition, the allowable stall
time of a motor is extended during a reduced-voltage start due to the reduced heating-rate resulting from lower
inrush currents.
This voltage-dependent (VD) setpoint, when enabled, allows the to take advantage of the motor's extended stall
time so that the motor and load can accelerate to synchronous speed over a longer time period than is allowed
for a full voltage start. The acceleration torque is reduced as the square of the ratio of reduced voltage to full
voltage, and the motor-heating rate is proportional to the square of the starting current. Since the motor inrush
current is reduced proportionally with the voltage reduction (due to the constant impedance of the synchronous
motor at stall) the following allowable stall time factor K applies:

Where:
Vrated
○ is from the Motor Nameplate Voltage and can be found under Path:System > Motor > Setup,
Vratio
○ is the Phase VT Ratio or Auxiliary VT Ratio can be found under Path:Setpoints > System > Voltage
Sensing,

1601-0450 367
Chapter 8 - Protection

VRMS○ is the measured secondary phase to phase voltage. VRMS is the lowest RMS value between VAB,
VBC, and VCA.
For○the selected Time-Speed Curve, the relay uses the factor 'K' for increasing the stall time above the full
voltage allowable stall time for any given speed, as shown in the following figure.
In case
○ of voltage loss, the speed-time curve is switched to one based on the programmed 100% voltage by
considering factor K equals 1.

Figure 137: Protection for reduced voltage starts

STALL TIME @ 0% Speed

Range: 1.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 10.00 s
This setpoint determines the allowable time that power may be applied to the motor during locked rotor
conditions. This information is usually found on the motor control data sheet provided by the motor manufacturer.

368 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

RUN TIME
Range: 1.05 to 3.00 x ST in steps of 0.01 x ST
Default: 1.05 x ST
This setpoint is only used when FlexCurve ST is initialized by the 'Est Time-Speed' curve option available under
FlexCurve ST setup.
Run Time is the time that the motor may run at 50% speed and is expressed as a multiple of the allowable motor
Stall Time (ST).
EXAMPLE: If the motor Stall Time is set to 10 seconds and Run Time is set to 3.00 x ST, then motor can run at:
3.00 x 10 seconds = 30 seconds at 50% speed

Application Example:
A motor manufacturer provides a series of accelerating speed-versus-time curves as shown in the figure below.
These curves normally include: Longest Acceleration, Pole-Tip or Shortest Amortisseur Bar Hot & Cold Stall Limits,
Shortest Starting Resistor Stall Limit, and Stall Protection.

Figure 138: Accelerating speed vs. time profile at 100% rated voltage

When a Speed-versus-Time profile is available, build the custom curve by selecting FlexCurve ST under the
setpoint 'Time-Speed Curve'. Time-versus-speed points should be selected to match the manufacturer-
recommended Stall Protection curve.
When the motor manufacturer does not include Stall Protection in this set of curves, the general rule is to draw the
Stall Protection line close to the Hot Stall Limit Line, except near zero speed where it must be drawn closer to the

1601-0450 369
Chapter 8 - Protection

Acceleration Line to trip sooner under full jam conditions. This is done to preserve thermal capacity for another start;
once the jam has been cleared. Therefore, custom FlexCurve ST operating points (Time-versus-Speed) must be
selected between the Longest Acceleration line and Shortest Starting Resistor Stall Limit line.

Note:
When the VD Function is enabled, it is important to ensure that time-versus-speed points are entered for 100% Rated
Voltage. If the motor manufacturer provides a speed-versus-time profile for reduced voltage starts then the adjusted time
value should be entered. The adjusted time value can be calculated as follows: Time (@100% Rated Voltage) = Time (@80%
Vrated) / K-factor where K-factor is defined in the previous equation. When no speed-versus-time profile is available, set the
'Time-Speed Curve' to 'FlexCurve ST' and initialize it with the 'Est Time-Speed' curve option to generate an estimated curve.

VOLTAGE LOSS
Range: Any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off
This setting is used to address situations when the voltage input used for the voltage dependent function (the VD
Function setpoint) has been lost. The VT fuse failure function is typically used to detect a voltage loss condition.

ALARM FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latch Alarm
Default: Disabled
This setting enables alarm functionality.

ALARM PICKUP
Range: 10.00 to 100.00% in steps of 1.00%
Default: 75.00%
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the thermal capacity used (TCU) for the alarm or latch alarm
function.

TRIP MODE
Range: Self-Reset, Latched
Default: Latched
When trip mode is programmed as Self-Reset, as soon as SC TCU dropped to 97% the SC Slip-dependent
Thermal protection automatically resets the trip command to the output TRIP Relay 1 and Trip LED becomes
OFF. However, when trip mode is set as Latched, trip output and trip LED only resets when RESET command
from the relay front panel is initiated.

ALARM OUTPUT RELAY X

Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

TRIP OUTPUT RELAY X

Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

370 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

BLOCK
Range: Any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off

Note:
Block, when asserted, resets the output operands Trip Latch and Trip LED. However, the protection element keeps the SC
TCU calculation active and does consider elapsed time during Blocking in order to calculate the TCU.

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Latched

1601-0450 371
372
Delay.
8.2.1.13
Chapter 8 - Protection

SETPOINTS
TRIP FUNCTION: LED: TRIP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND

Disabled=0
Motor Starting
Trip
OR

SM Resync
Latched Trip Operate Output

OR
Motor Running
Configurable S Relay 1(TRIP)
AND

Motor Overload

OR
LATCH

AND
SM Field Applied
SETPOINTS

AND

OR
R
Alarm Function: SM Stabalizing
RESET
SM Running

OR
Disabled=0 Command

AND
Stopped
Alarm
Latched Alarm SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS TIME-SPEED CURVE:
VD VOLTAGE LOSS: STALL TIME:
AND

R
AND

SETPOINTS COOL TIME CONSTANT RUNNING:*

MOTOR NAMEPLATE VOLTAGE:

SM FIELD UNDERCURRENT (37F)

LATCH
Synchronous Motor Type: PHASE VT RATIO: COOL TIME CONSTANT STOPPED:*
S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AUXILIARY VT RATIO:
AND

Brush-type SC Thermal OP
OR

Reset Dominant
RUN

AND
From System/Motor
Factor 1 RESET SETPOINT
SETPOINTS RUN Command Trip Output Relay X

AND

OR
VD Function: Do Not Operate, Operate
Enabled=1 2 LED: ALARM

Run Time x Stall Time

 
Factor earV

AND
K

Speed %
AND

iarV  S RV 

o
SETPOINTS
RUN
OR

VD VOLTAGE LOSS:
TCused < 97%
() ( 1) x100%
ss
Off=0  s  !  s 
S
AND

n
TCused 100%
"
RUN LATCH
Phase Voltages TCused Alarm Pickup
/
"
() ( 1) R
VA RMS
 c  t  t du T  t du T
Select lowest value Reset TC Used To 0% RESET
VB RMS VRMS= min(VAB,VBC,VCA)
Command

Figure 139: SC Speed-Dependent Thermal Protection logic diagram

VC RMS
SETPOINTS
AND

ACTUAL VALUE EMERGENCY RESTART: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

Rotor Slip Off=0 SETPOINTS SC Thermal Alarm OP
AND

BLOCK:
OR

*Note: The algorithm applies the same cool time SETPOINT

constants programmed under Thermal Model as Cool Off=0
Alarm Output Relay X
Time Constant Stopped and Cool Time Constant
Running. However, when Thermal Model is Disabled, Do Not Operate, Operate
)(# '&%$# cool equals 20 mins.

DC field current input. When the motor is in the SM Running or Motor Overload state, an alarm occurs if the
The relay provides two synchronous motor (SM) Field Undercurrent elements per protection group, that respond to

magnitude of the field current falls below the undercurrent Pickup level for the time specified by the setpoint Pickup

1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

SM Field Undercurrent protection is active when the motor is in the SM Running or Motor Overload state. Moreover,
to prevent misoperation in case of sudden loss of field, 869 allows element to operate after the field is lost while
motor remains operated in induction mode. However, element is blocked from operation if 869 attempts to
resynchronize motor using PF Resync Mode.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Motor > SM Field Undercurrent

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm or Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled
This setting enables SM Field Undercurrent functionality. When set to Trip, the protection element operates the
Trip Relay (Output Relay 1) to open the main circuit breaker/contactor. To trip the field winding breaker/contactor,
the FlexLogic operand 'FLD UC[X] OP' must be used to operate the selected relay set under Path: Setpoints >
System > Breaker 2 (or Contactor 2).

PICKUP
Range: 0.05 to 1.20 x MFA in steps of 0.01 x MFA
Default: 0.10 x MFA
This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the SM Field Undercurrent function. The pickup level is defined as
a multiple of MFA (maximum field current at primary of DCCT). MFA is defined by the setpoint 'Max FLD Amps
Primary (MFA)' programmed under Path: Setpoints > System > Current Sensing > SM FLD A-K2. MFA
corresponds to the maximum output value of the DCCT (direct current transformer) or current transducer.
For example, a pickup setting of 0.50 x MFA corresponds to 1000 A primary when Max FLD Amps Primary is
programmed as 2000 A. Pickup values between 0 and 1 are scaled linearly.

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies a time delay for the SM Field Undercurrent function.

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.00 s

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK
Range: Any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off

1601-0450 373
Chapter 8 - Protection

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-Reset, Latched
Default: Latched

374 1601-0450
 Delay.
8.2.1.14

1601-0450
SETPOINT
FUNCTION:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Disabled=0 Any Trip
Trip
LED: TRIP
Latched Trip 869: To operate Output
AND

Relay 1(TRIP)

OR
Alarm

Figure 140: Field Undercurrent logic diagram

OR

Latched Alarm
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

SM FIELD OVERCURRENT (76F)

Configurable
FLD UC1 PKP S
AND

SETPOINT SETPOINT LATCH

Pickup
Block R
RUN
LED: ALARM
Off=0

AND
AND

FLD I < Pickup SETPOINTS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

Pickup Delay
OR

Dropout Delay Any Alarm

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
tPKP tRST
SM Running S
AND

OR
Motor Overload
LATCH SETPOINT

OR

AND
SM Field Applied
Command R Output Relay X
Motor Running
RESET Do Not Operate, Operate

OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

AND
FLD UC1 OP
OR

SM Field Amps
From SM Bnk1-K2
894239C1

DC field current input. When the motor is in the SM Running or Motor Overload state, an alarm occurs if the
magnitude of the field current exceeds the overcurrent Pickup level for the time specified by the setpoint Pickup
The relay provides two synchronous motor (SM) Field Overcurrent elements per protection group, that respond to

375
Chapter 8 - Protection
Chapter 8 - Protection

SM Field Overcurrent protection is active only when the motor is in the SM Running or Motor Overload state.

Note:
Motor Running or SM Resync motor states indicates that the induction mode of the synchronous motor is active, that is, no
field is being applied to excite the rotor.

Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Motor > SM Field Overcurrent

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm or Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled
This setting enables SM Field Overcurrent functionality. When set to Trip, the protection element operates the
Trip Relay (Output Relay 1) to open the main circuit breaker/contactor. To trip the field winding breaker/contactor,
the FlexLogic operand 'FLD OC[X] OP' must be used to operate the selected relay set under Path: Setpoints >
System > Breaker 2 (or Contactor 2).

PICKUP
Range: 0.05 to 1.00 x MFA in steps of 0.01 x MFA
Default: 0.90 x MFA
This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the SM Field Overcurrent function. The pickup level is defined as a
multiple of MFA (maximum field current at primary of DCCT). MFA is defined by the setpoint 'Max FLD Amps
Primary (MFA)' programmed under Path: Setpoints > System > Current Sensing > SM FLD A-K2. MFA
corresponds to the maximum output value of the DCCT (direct current transformer) or current transducer.
For example, a pickup setting of 0.50 x MFA corresponds to 1000 A primary when Max FLD Amps Primary is
programmed as 2000 A. Pickup values between 0 and 1 are scaled linearly.

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies a time delay for the SM Field Overcurrent function.

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.00 s

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK
Range: Any FlexLogic Operand

376 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Default: Off

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-Reset, Latched
Default: Latched

SETPOINT FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

FUNCTION TRIP LED Any trip
Disabled = 0

AND
Trip To trip relay

OR
Latched Trip
Alarm
OR

AND
Latched Alarm S
Configurable Latch Alarm LED
R
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

AND

OR
Any alarm
SETPOINT SETPOINT SETPOINT
Block Pickup Pickup delay
SETPOINT
AND

AND
Off = 0 Run Dropout delay S
Latch Output relay x
Fld I PKP tPKP tRST R Do not operate
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND Operate
SM running Reset
OR

Motor overload
AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SM field applied

OR
FLD OC 1 OP

SM field amps FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

From SM Bnk1-K2
FLD OC 1 PKP



SETPOINT FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

FUNCTION TRIP LED Any trip
Disabled = 0
AND

Trip To trip relay

OR

Latched Trip
Alarm
OR

AND

Latched Alarm S
Configurable Latch Alarm LED
R
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND

OR

Any alarm
SETPOINT SETPOINT SETPOINT
Block Pickup Pickup delay
SETPOINT
AND

AND

Off = 0 Run Dropout delay S

Latch Output relay x
Fld I PKP tPKP tRST R Do not operate
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND Operate
SM running Reset
OR

Motor overload
AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SM field applied
OR

FLD OC 1 OP

SM field amps FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

From SM Bnk1-K2
FLD OC 1 PKP



Figure 141: Field Overcurrent logic diagram

1601-0450 377
Chapter 8 - Protection

8.2.1.15 SM FIELD UNDERVOLTAGE (27F)

The relay provides two synchronous motor (SM) Field Undervoltage elements per protection group, that respond to
DC field voltage input. A trip or alarm occurs if the magnitude of the field voltage falls below the undervoltage
Pickup level for the time specified by the setpoint Pickup Delay.
SM Field Undervoltage protection is active in all motor states (Stopped, Starting, Running, SM Stabilizing, SM
Running, SM Resync and Overload).

Note:
This function requires a VDN Module (Voltage Divider Network Module) to connect exciter output (primary side) to relay input
(secondary side) via the VDN Module.

Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Motor > SM Field Undervoltage

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm or Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled
This setting enables SM Field Undervoltage functionality. When set to Trip, the protection element operates the Trip
Relay (Output Relay 1) to open the main circuit breaker/contactor. To trip the field winding breaker/contactor, the
FlexLogic operand 'FLD UV[X] OP' must be used to operate the selected relay set under Path: Setpoints >
System > Breaker 2 (or Contactor 2).

PICKUP
Range: 0.0 to 350.0 V in steps of 0.1 V
Default: 50.0 V
This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the SM Field Undervoltage function. The pickup level is defined in
primary DC voltage, which corresponds to the primary (exciter side) of the VDN Module.

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies a time delay for the SM Field Undervoltage function.

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.00 s

MINIMUM VOLTAGE
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 V in steps of 0.1 V
Default: 20.0V
This setting sets the minimum voltage for SM Field Undervoltage function.

378 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

BYPASS STOPPED BLOCK

Range: NO, YES
Default: NO
If the exciter is designed to be energized with motor starting (as with shaft connected rotating exciters), the SM
Field Undervoltage element must be blocked when the motor is in the Stopped state. For such applications, this
setpoint must be set to NO.
If the exciter is energized prior to starting the motor, the SM Field Undervoltage element must be active when the
motor is in the Stopped state. For such applications, this setpoint must be set to YES.

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK
Range: Any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-Reset, Latched
Default: Latched

1601-0450 379
380
8.2.1.16
Chapter 8 - Protection

SETPOINT
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Trip FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Latched Trip Any Trip

OR
Alarm LED: TRIP
Latched Alarm 869: To operate Output
AND

Relay 1(TRIP)

Figure 142: Field Undervoltage logic diagram

Configurable
OR

SM FIELD OVERVOLTAGE (59F)

SETPOINT S
AND

Block LATCH
SETPOINT SETPOINTS
Off=0 Pickup R

level for the time specified by the setpoint Pickup Delay.

Pickup Delay
RUN Dropout Delay LED: ALARM
AND

FLD VDC < Pickup tPKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

AND
SETPOINT tRST
OR

Any Alarm
Bypass Stopped Block
Yes S
AND

OR
No LATCH SETPOINT
Command R Output Relay X
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SETPOINT
RESET Do Not Operate, Operate

AND
Motor Stopped Minimum Voltage
FLD VDC Minimum FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FLD UV1 OP
OR

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SM Field VDC
FLD UV1 PKP
From SM Bnk1-K2
894241C1

DC field voltage input. A trip or alarm occurs if the magnitude of the field voltage exceeds the overvoltage Pickup
The relay provides two synchronous motor (SM) Field Overvoltage elements per protection group, that respond to

1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

SM Field Overvoltage protection is active in all motor states (Stopped, Starting, Running, SM Stabilizing, SM
Running, SM Resync and Overload).

Note:
This function requires a VDN Module (Voltage Divider Network Module) to connect exciter output (primary side) to relay input
(secondary side) via the VDN Module.

Path:Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Motor > SM Field Overvoltage

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm or Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled
This setting enables SM Field Overvoltage functionality. When set to Trip, the protection element operates the
Trip Relay (Output Relay 1) to open the main circuit breaker/contactor. To trip the field winding breaker/contactor,
the FlexLogic operand 'FLD OV[X] OP' must be used to operate the selected relay set under Path: Setpoints >
System > Breaker 2 (or Contactor 2).

PICKUP
Range: 1.0 to 350.0 V in steps of 0.1 V
Default: 100.0 V
This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the SM Field Overvoltage function. The pickup level is defined in
primary DC voltage, which corresponds to the primary (exciter side) of the VDN Module.

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies a time delay for the SM Field Overvoltage function.

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.00 s

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

BYPASS STOPPED BLOCK

Range: NO, YES
Default: NO
If the exciter is designed to be energized with motor starting (as with shaft connected rotating exciters), the SM
Field Overvoltage element must be blocked when the motor is in the Stopped state. For such applications, this
setpoint must be set to NO.

1601-0450 381
Chapter 8 - Protection

If the exciter is energized prior to starting the motor, the SM Field Overvoltage element must be active when the
motor is in the Stopped state. For such applications, this setpoint must be set to YES.

BLOCK
Range: Any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-Reset, Latched
Default: Latched
SETPOINT
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Trip FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Latched Trip Any Trip
OR

Alarm LED: TRIP

AND
Latched Alarm 869: To operate Output
Relay 1(TRIP)
Configurable

OR
SETPOINT S

AND
Block LATCH
SETPOINT SETPOINTS
Off=0 Pickup R
Pickup Delay
LED: ALARM
AND

RUN Dropout Delay

AND
FLD VDC Pickup tPKP tRST FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETPOINT

OR
Any Alarm
Bypass Stopped Block
AND
Yes S
OR

No LATCH SETPOINT
Command R Output Relay X
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND

RESET Do Not Operate, Operate

Motor Stopped
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR
FLD OV1 OP

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SM Field VDC
FLD OV1 PKP
From SM Bnk1-K2
894242C1

Figure 143: Field Overvoltage logic diagram

8.2.2 2-SPEED MOTOR ELEMENTS OVERVIEW

The relay provides the following motor protection elements:
● 2-speed thermal model
● 2-speed acceleration
● 2-speed undercurrent

8.2.2.1 2-SPEED THERMAL MODEL

Path:Setpoints > Protection > Group1(6) > 2-Speed Motor > Speed2 Thermal Model
When the two-speed motor functionality is used, these settings allow the selection of the proper parameters for the
thermal model when the motor is switched to the second speed. There is one thermal model and it has inputs for

382 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

overload conditions from calculations at both speeds. As such, the accumulated thermal capacity is calculated from
overload contributions at each speed.
The algorithm integrates the heating at each speed into one thermal model using a common thermal capacity used
register value for both speeds.
This section gives details on settings for thermal model at the second motor speed.

OVERLOAD CURVE
Range: Motor, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B, FlexCurve C, FlexCurve D, FlexCurve OL, IEC
Default: Motor

TD MULTIPLIER
Range: 1.00 to 25.00 in steps of 0.01 when thermal model curve is Motor
Default: 1.00
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 when thermal model curve is FlexCurve A/B/C/D/OL
Default: 0.00

VOLT. DEPENDENT (VD) FUNCTION

Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled

VD MIN MOTOR VOLTS

Range: 60 to 99% in steps of 1
Default: 80%

VD VOLTAGE LOSS
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

VD STALL CURRENT @ MIN V

Range: 1.50 to 20.00 FLA in steps of 0.01
Default: 4.50 x FLA

VD STALL TIME @ MIN V

Range: 0.1 to 1000.0 in steps of 0.1
Default: 20.0 s

VD ACCEL. INTERSECT @ MIN V

Range: 1.50 to 20.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 4.00 x FLA

VD STALL CURRENT @ 100% V

Range: 1.50 to 20.00 FLA in steps of 0.01

1601-0450 383
Chapter 8 - Protection

Default: 6.00 x FLA

VD STALL TIME @ 100% V

Range: 0.1 to 1000.0 in steps of 0.1
Default: 10.0 s

VD ACCEL. INTERSECT @ 100% V

Range: 1.50 to 20.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 5.00 x FLA
   ! "#
 $%&
' '(( )'(
 
  .
  /
  0

1234.5 67825

  *+% 

"# * ,%& -
) ).
) )/
) )0

9:228- 1234.5 9:228@ 1234.5

67825 ;2<<=>?; 67825 ;2<<=>?;
7AA 7>
EFGHFIJKL IMGNOPQ
6''C 9D  @
0<=B2



Figure 144: 2-speed Thermal Model logic diagram

8.2.2.2 2-SPEED ACCELERATION

Path:Setpoints > Protection > Group1(6) > 2-Speed Motor > Speed2 Acceleration
Speed2 Acceleration Time functionality is enabled when the motor is switched from speed 1 to speed 2 and 2-
Speed Motor Protection (set under Setpoints > System > Motor > Setup) is enabled.

Note:
Speed2 Acceleration CURRENT and MODE settings and functionality at speed 2 are identical to those of speed 1 and are
described in the Acceleration Time element.

Two additional settings define the transition between speeds. A two-speed motor is usually started at a low speed
(speed 1) and then switched to a higher speed (speed 2) when required. When the motor starts directly at high
speed, then the Speed 2 MAX. ACCEL. TIME setting (defined under Setpoints > Setup > Motor) specifies the
maximum acceleration time at speed 2. When the motor is switched from a low-to-high speed setting, the Speed 2
ACCEL. TIME FR. SPD 1-2 setting specifies the acceleration time. When the motor is switched from high speed to
low speed, the Speed2 Trans 2-1 Op FlexLogic operand is set for a time defined by the Speed 2 Switch 2-1 Delay
setting (under Setpoints > System > Motor > Setup) to allow inputs for control logic of contactors and breakers at
both speeds. The acceleration time at speed 2 becomes functional only if the acceleration time at speed 1 is
enabled. When the acceleration time at any speed is not required, it can be permanently blocked.

384 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

CURRENT
Range: 1.00 to 10.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01
Default: 6.00 x FLA

MODE
Range: Definite Time, Adaptive
Default: Definite Time

ACCEL TIME FR. SPD 1-2

Range: 0.50 to 250.00 s in steps of 0.01
Default: 10.00 s
This setting is provided to select maximum accelerating time from speed 1 to speed 2 when motor is switched
from low-to-high speed.

BLOCK
Range: Any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off

1601-0450 385
386
8.2.2.3
Chapter 8 - Protection

SETPOINT
FUNCTION:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Disabled=0 Any Trip
Trip
LED: TRIP
Latched Trip 869: To operate Output
AND
Relay 1(TRIP)

OR
Alarm

AND
OR

Latched Alarm
859: To operate the
Configurable selected Breaker/
S
From Setpoint > Protection > Motor >
AND

Contactor Trip Relay

Acceleration Time LATCH

2-SPEED UNDERCURRENT
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND R
Motor Stopped LED: ALARM
AND

Speed2 Motor Switch

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETPOINT
SETPOINT
OR

Any Alarm

AND
2-SPEED MOTOR PROTECTION CURRENT:
Enabled=1 S
AND

SPEED2 MAX. ACCEL. TIME:

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
From Setpoint > System > Motor > Setup LATCH
ACCEL TIME FR. SPD 1-2: Spd2 Accel Time OP
Definite Time

Figure 145: Speed2 Acceleration Time logic diagram

Command R
RUN
SETPOINT
RESET
SETPOINT
BLOCK:
Adaptive Output Relay X
Off=0
T > SPEED2 MAX. ACCEL. TIME Do Not Operate, Operate
OR

Programmed under Setpoint >

SETPOINT
OR

Protection > Motor > Acceleration

RUN Time
Mode:

Phase Currents Magnitude from

Phase Current CT bank I2 T > CURRENT2 *
IA Mag or IA FLTD RMS* SPEED2 MAX. ACCEL. TIME
IB Mag or IB FLTD RMS* RECORDS

MAX
IC Mag or IC FLTD RMS* Start Date
*For VFD application, phase currents are Calculate: Start Time
switched from fundamental Phasor Peak acceleration current Start Acceleration Time
magnitude (IA/B/C Mag) to Filtered RMS (IA/ Effective acceleration current
Start Effective Current
B/C FLTD RMS) when setpoint VFD Function Acceleration time
is Enabled and operand ‘VFD Not Bypassed’ Start Peak Current
is asserted

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Motor Starting
Motor Running
894023C1

Path:Setpoints > Protection > Group1(6) > 2-Speed Motor > Speed2 Undercurrent
If the Speed2 Undercurrent function is enabled, a trip or alarm is initiated once the IA, IB or IC current magnitude

detect loss-of load conditions. This can be especially useful for detecting process related problems. This element is

1601-0450
falls below the pickup level for a period of time specified by the delay. For example, the undercurrent can be used to
 Chapter 8 - Protection

active if the motor is running at Speed 2. The undercurrent function at speed 2 becomes functional only if
undercurrent at speed 1 is enabled. When the undercurrent function at any speed is not required, it can be
permanently blocked.

START BLOCK DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 15000.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.50 s
This setting specifies a time to block the undercurrent function when the motor is starting directly at speed 2.
Prior to starting, the motor state is determined from the Motor Stopped operand. The speed 2 undercurrent
element is active only when the motor is running at speed 2 and is blocked upon the initiation of a motor start for
a period of time defined by the START BLOCK DELAY setting (for example, this block can be used to allow
pumps to build up head before the undercurrent element trips or alarms). A value of zero (0) specifies that the
feature is not blocked from start. For values other than zero (0), the feature is disabled when the motor is
stopped and also from the time a start is detected until the time entered expires. A one second delay is added to
prevent wrong operation of the element when motor is switched from speed 1 to speed 2.

TRIP PICKUP
Range: 0.10 to 0.99 x FLA in steps of 0.01 x FLA
Default: 0.70 x FLA

TRIP PICKUP DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s

TRIP DROPOUT DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s

ALARM PICKUP
Range: 0.10 to 0.99 x FLA in steps of 0.01 x FLA
Default: 0.75 x FLA

ALARM PICKUP DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s

ALARM DROPOUT DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

1601-0450 387
388
8.2.3
Chapter 8 - Protection

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
LED: TRIP 8S: To operate Output

AND
869: 3 Ph Currents from J1-CT bank Relay 1(TRIP)
859: 3 Ph Currents from CT bank Configurable in 859
OR

Ia 859: To operate the

SETPOINT S selected Breaker/
Ib SETPOINTS
Trip Pickup
AND

Contactor Trip Relay

Ic Trip Pickup Delay LATCH
RUN Ia < Trip Pickup Trip Dropout Delay FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
When VFD Function is Enabled and RESET R
Ib < Trip Pickup tPKP

OR
operand ‘VFD Not Bypassed’ is True, tRST Command Spd2 U/C OP
current inputs are switched from Phasor Ic < Trip Pickup
OR

Magnitude to Filtered RMS. SETPOINT

Figure 146: Undercurrent logic diagram

Trip Output Relay X
SETPOINT

● Phase time overcurrent (Phase TOC)

SETPOINT Alarm Pickup SETPOINTS Do Not Operate, Operate
RUN Alarm Pickup Delay Programmed under Setpoint >
TRIP FUNCTION: Ia < Alarm Pickup
Alarm Dropout Delay Protection > Motor >
Ib < Alarm Pickup

OR
Disabled=0 tPKP Undercurrent
tRST FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Trip Ic < Alarm Pickup Spd2 U/C PKP
Latched Trip

OR
LED: Alarm
Configurable
From Setpoint > Protection >

● Phase instantaneous overcurrent (Phase IOC)

Motor > Undercurrent
AND
OR

Setpoints/System/Motor
2-Speed Motor Protection

CURRENT ELEMENTS OVERVIEW

S
AND

AND
Disabled = 0
LATCH
From Setpoint > System >
Motor > Setup RESET R
Command

AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Speed2 Motor Switch FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Spd2 U/C Alm OP
SETPOINT
Spd2 U/C Alm PKP
Block
Off=0 SETPOINT SETPOINT
Start Block Delay Alarm Output Relay X
tBLK 0 Do Not Operate, Operate
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Motor Stopped Programmed under Setpoint >

AND
Protection > Motor >
Undercurrent
SETPOINT
Alarm Function
Disabled
Alarm

OR
Latched Alarm
From Setpoint > Protection >

The 869 motor protection relay provides the following current protection elements:
Motor > Undercurrent

894024A1

1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

● Phase directional overcurrent (Phase Directional OC)

● Neutral time overcurrent (Neutral TOC)
● Neutral instantaneous overcurrent (Neutral IOC)
● Neutral directional overcurrent (Neutral Directional OC)
● Ground time overcurrent (Ground TOC)
● Ground instantaneous overcurrent (Ground IOC)
● Sensitive ground time overcurrent (Sensitive Ground TOC)
● Sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent (Sensitive Ground IOC)
● Negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent (Negative Sequence IOC)

The relay has six setpoint groups with phase, neutral, and ground elements per group. The programming of the
time-current characteristics of these elements is identical in all cases and is only covered in this section. The
required curve is established by programming a Pickup Current, Curve Shape, Curve Multiplier, and Reset Time.
The Curve Shape can be either a standard shape or a user-defined shape programmed with the FlexCurve feature.

8.2.3.1 INVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT CURVES

The Inverse Time Overcurrent Curves used by the Time Overcurrent elements are the IEEE, IEC, GE Type IAC,
ANSI, I2t and I4t standard curve shapes. This allows for simplified coordination with downstream devices.
If none of these curve shapes are adequate, FlexCurves may be used to customize the inverse time curve
characteristics. The definite time curve is also an option that may be appropriate if only simple protection is
required.

OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES

IEEE ANSI IEC GE TYPE IAC OTHER
IEEE Extremely Inverse ANSI Extremely Inverse IEC Standard Inverse IAC Extremely Inverse I2t
IEEE Very Inverse ANSI Very Inverse IEC Very Inverse IAC Very Inverse I4t
IEEE Moderately IEC Extremely Inverse FlexCurves™ A, B, C
ANSI Normally Inverse IAC Inverse
Inverse and D
US Inverse ANSI Moderately UK Long Time Inverse
IAC Short Inverse Recloser Curve
Inverse
US Short Time Inverse Rectifier Definite Time
FR Short Time Inverse RI
Standard Inverse (1.3s)
BPN EDF

A time dial multiplier setting allows the selection of a multiple of the base curve shape (where the time dial multiplier
= 1) with the curve shape setting. Unlike the electromechanical time dial equivalent, operate times are directly
proportional to the time multiplier (TD MULTIPLIER) setting value. For example, all times for a multiplier of 10 are
10 times the multiplier 1 or base curve values. Setting the multiplier to zero results in an instantaneous response to
all current levels above Pickup.
Time Overcurrent time calculations are made with an internal energy capacity memory variable. When this variable
indicates that the energy capacity has reached 100%, a Time Overcurrent element will operate. If less than 100%
energy capacity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of 97 to 98% of the
Pickup value, the variable must be reduced.

1601-0450 389
Chapter 8 - Protection

Two types of this resetting operation are available: DT and Inverse. The Inverse selection can be used where
the relay must coordinate with electromechanical relays. The DT selection is intended for applications with other
relays, such as most static relays, which set the energy capacity directly to zero or some fixed time delay when the
current falls below the reset threshold or when inverse curve coordination is not available.

Note:
In IEEE, ANSI, IAC, I2T, I4T User Curves, multiplier setting TDM value is provided by the Time Dial setting

IEEE CURVES
The IEEE Time Overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the IEEE C37.112-1996 curve
classifications for extremely, very, and moderately inverse. The IEEE curves are derived from the formula:

Where:
● T = operate time (in seconds)
● TDM = Multiplier setting
● I = input current
● Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
● A, B, p = constants
● TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is Timed)
● tr = characteristic constant

IEEE INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEEE CURVE SHAPE A B P tr
IEEE Extremely Inverse 28.2 0.1217 2.000 29.1
IEEE Very Inverse 19.61 0.491 2.000 21.6
IEEE Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.1140 0.02000 4.85
US Inverse 5.95 0.180 2.000 5.95
US Short Time Inverse 0.16758 0.11858 0.02000 2.261

IEEE CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

TDM CURRENT (I/Ipickup)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEEE EXTREMELY INVERSE
0.5 11.341 4.761 1.823 1.001 0.648 0.464 0.355 0.285 0.237 0.203
1.0 22.682 9.522 3.647 2.002 1.297 0.927 0.709 0.569 0.474 0.407
2.0 45.363 19.043 7.293 4.003 2.593 1.855 1.418 1.139 0.948 0.813
4.0 90.727 38.087 14.587 8.007 5.187 3.710 2.837 2.277 1.897 1.626

390 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

TDM CURRENT (I/Ipickup)

1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
6.0 136.090 57.130 21.880 12.010 7.780 5.564 4.255 3.416 2.845 2.439
8.0 181.454 76.174 29.174 16.014 10.374 7.419 5.674 4.555 3.794 3.252
10.0 226.817 95.217 36.467 20.017 12.967 9.274 7.092 5.693 4.742 4.065
IEEE VERY INVERSE
0.5 8.090 3.514 1.471 0.899 0.654 0.526 0.450 0.401 0.368 0.345
1.0 16.179 7.028 2.942 1.798 1.308 1.051 0.900 0.802 0.736 0.689
2.0 32.358 14.055 5.885 3.597 2.616 2.103 1.799 1.605 1.472 1.378
4.0 64.716 28.111 11.769 7.193 5.232 4.205 3.598 3.209 2.945 2.756
6.0 97.074 42.166 17.654 10.790 7.849 6.308 5.397 4.814 4.417 4.134
8.0 129.432 56.221 23.538 14.387 10.465 8.410 7.196 6.418 5.889 5.513
10.0 161.790 70.277 29.423 17.983 13.081 10.513 8.995 8.023 7.361 6.891
IEEE MODERATELY INVERSE
0.5 3.220 1.902 1.216 0.973 0.844 0.763 0.706 0.663 0.630 0.603
1.0 6.439 3.803 2.432 1.946 1.688 1.526 1.412 1.327 1.260 1.207
2.0 12.878 7.606 4.864 3.892 3.377 3.051 2.823 2.653 2.521 2.414
4.0 25.756 15.213 9.729 7.783 6.753 6.102 5.647 5.307 5.041 4.827
6.0 38.634 22.819 14.593 11.675 10.130 9.153 8.470 7.960 7.562 7.241
8.0 51.512 30.426 19.458 15.567 13.507 12.204 11.294 10.614 10.083 9.654
10.0 64.390 38.032 24.322 19.458 16.883 15.255 14.117 13.267 12.604 12.068
US Inverse
0.5 2.470 1.082 0.462 0.288 0.214 0.175 0.152 0.137 0.127 0.120
1.0 4.940 2.163 0.924 0.577 0.428 0.350 0.304 0.274 0.254 0.240
2.0 9.880 4.327 1.848 1.153 0.856 0.700 0.608 0.549 0.509 0.480
4.0 19.760 8.653 3.695 2.307 1.712 1.400 1.216 1.098 1.018 0.960
6.0 29.640 12.980 5.543 3.460 2.568 2.100 1.824 1.647 1.526 1.441
8.0 39.520 17.307 7.390 4.613 3.423 2.800 2.432 2.196 2.035 1.921
10.0 49.400 21.633 9.238 5.767 4.279 3.500 3.040 2.744 2.544 2.401
US Short Time Inverse
0.5 10.350 6.062 3.831 3.040 2.621 2.356 2.171 2.032 1.924 1.837
1.0 20.700 12.123 7.662 6.079 5.241 4.712 4.341 4.065 3.849 3.674
2.0 41.400 24.247 15.324 12.159 10.483 9.423 8.683 8.130 7.698 7.349
4.0 82.800 48.493 30.648 24.317 20.966 18.847 17.365 16.259 15.395 14.698
6.0 124.200 72.740 45.972 36.476 31.448 28.270 26.048 24.389 23.093 22.046
8.0 165.600 96.987 61.296 48.635 41.931 37.694 34.730 32.519 30.791 29.395
10.0 207.001 121.233 76.620 60.793 52.414 47.117 43.413 40.648 38.489 36.744

1601-0450 391
Chapter 8 - Protection

ANSI CURVES
The ANSI time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the ANSI C37.90 curve classifications
for extremely, very, and moderately inverse. The ANSI curves are derived from the following formulae:

Where:
● T = operate time (in seconds)
● TDM = Multiplier setting
● I = input current
● Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
● A to E = constants
● TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is Timed)
● tr = characteristic constant

ANSI INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

ANSI CURVE SHAPE A B C D E tr
ANSI Extremely Inverse 0.0399 0.2294 0.5000 3.0094 0.7222 5.67
ANSI Very Inverse 0.0615 0.7989 0.3400 -0.2840 4.0505 3.88
ANSI Normally Inverse 0.0274 2.2614 0.3000 -4.1899 9.1272 5.95
ANSI Moderately Inverse 0.1735 0.6791 0.8000 -0.0800 0.1271 1.08

ANSI CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

TDM CURRENT (I/Ipickup)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
ANSI EXTREMELY INVERSE
0.5 2.000 0.872 0.330 0.184 0.124 0.093 0.075 0.063 0.055 0.049
1.0 4.001 1.744 0.659 0.368 0.247 0.185 0.149 0.126 0.110 0.098
2.0 8.002 3.489 1.319 0.736 0.495 0.371 0.298 0.251 0.219 0.196
4.0 16.004 6.977 2.638 1.472 0.990 0.742 0.596 0.503 0.439 0.393
6.0 24.005 10.466 3.956 2.208 1.484 1.113 0.894 0.754 0.658 0.589
8.0 32.007 13.955 5.275 2.944 1.979 1.483 1.192 1.006 0.878 0.786
10.0 40.009 17.443 6.594 3.680 2.474 1.854 1.491 1.257 1.097 0.982
ANSI VERY INVERSE
0.5 1.567 0.663 0.268 0.171 0.130 0.108 0.094 0.085 0.078 0.073

392 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

TDM CURRENT (I/Ipickup)

1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
1.0 3.134 1.325 0.537 0.341 0.260 0.216 0.189 0.170 0.156 0.146
2.0 6.268 2.650 1.074 0.682 0.520 0.432 0.378 0.340 0.312 0.291
4.0 12.537 5.301 2.148 1.365 1.040 0.864 0.755 0.680 0.625 0.583
6.0 18.805 7.951 3.221 2.047 1.559 1.297 1.133 1.020 0.937 0.874
8.0 25.073 10.602 4.295 2.730 2.079 1.729 1.510 1.360 1.250 1.165
10.0 31.341 13.252 5.369 3.412 2.599 2.161 1.888 1.700 1.562 1.457
ANSI NORMALLY INVERSE
0.5 2.142 0.883 0.377 0.256 0.203 0.172 0.151 0.135 0.123 0.113
1.0 4.284 1.766 0.754 0.513 0.407 0.344 0.302 0.270 0.246 0.226
2.0 8.568 3.531 1.508 1.025 0.814 0.689 0.604 0.541 0.492 0.452
4.0 17.137 7.062 3.016 2.051 1.627 1.378 1.208 1.082 0.983 0.904
6.0 25.705 10.594 4.524 3.076 2.441 2.067 1.812 1.622 1.475 1.356
8.0 34.274 14.125 6.031 4.102 3.254 2.756 2.415 2.163 1.967 1.808
10.0 42.842 17.656 7.539 5.127 4.068 3.445 3.019 2.704 2.458 2.260
ANSI MODERATELY INVERSE
0.5 0.675 0.379 0.239 0.191 0.166 0.151 0.141 0.133 0.128 0.123
1.0 1.351 0.757 0.478 0.382 0.332 0.302 0.281 0.267 0.255 0.247
2.0 2.702 1.515 0.955 0.764 0.665 0.604 0.563 0.533 0.511 0.493
4.0 5.404 3.030 1.910 1.527 1.329 1.208 1.126 1.066 1.021 0.986
6.0 8.106 4.544 2.866 2.291 1.994 1.812 1.689 1.600 1.532 1.479
8.0 10.807 6.059 3.821 3.054 2.659 2.416 2.252 2.133 2.043 1.972
10.0 13.509 7.574 4.776 3.818 3.324 3.020 2.815 2.666 2.554 2.465

IEC CURVES
For European applications, the relay offers three standard curves defined in IEC 255-4 and British standard BS142.
These are defined as IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, and IEC Curve C. The formula for these curves is:

1601-0450 393
Chapter 8 - Protection

BPN EDF Curve Operate Equation

Where:
● T = operate time (in seconds)
● TDM = Multiplier setting
● I = input current
● Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
● K, E = constants
● tr = characteristic constant
● TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is Timed)

IEC (BS) INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEC (BS) CURVE SHAPE K E tr
IEC Curve A (BS142) 0.140 0.020 9.7
IEC Curve A (BS142) 13.500 1.000 43.2
IEC Curve A (BS142) 80.000 2.000 58.2
IEC Short Inverse 0.050 0.040 0.500
Long Time Inverse 120 1 -
Rectifier 45900 5.6 -
Standard Inverse (1.3s) 0.0607 0.02 3.55

IEC (BS) CURVE SHAPE K E L

BPN EDF 1000 2 0.655

Note:
When using Long Time Inverse, Rectifier, IEC Short Time Inverse, BPN EDF curves for the operate characteristic, DT
(Definite Time) is always used for the Reset characteristic

394 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

IEC CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

TDM CURRENT (I/Ipickup)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEC CURVE A
0.05 0.860 0.501 0.315 0.249 0.214 0.192 0.176 0.165 0.156 0.149
0.10 1.719 1.003 0.630 0.498 0.428 0.384 0.353 0.330 0.312 0.297
0.20 3.439 2.006 1.260 0.996 0.856 0.767 0.706 0.659 0.623 0.594
0.40 6.878 4.012 2.521 1.992 1.712 1.535 1.411 1.319 1.247 1.188
0.60 10.317 6.017 3.781 2.988 2.568 2.302 2.117 1.978 1.870 1.782
0.80 13.755 8.023 5.042 3.984 3.424 3.070 2.822 2.637 2.493 2.376
1.00 17.194 10.029 6.302 4.980 4.280 3.837 3.528 3.297 3.116 2.971
IEC CURVE B
0.05 1.350 0.675 0.338 0.225 0.169 0.135 0.113 0.096 0.084 0.075
0.10 2.700 1.350 0.675 0.450 0.338 0.270 0.225 0.193 0.169 0.150
0.20 5.400 2.700 1.350 0.900 0.675 0.540 0.450 0.386 0.338 0.300
0.40 10.800 5.400 2.700 1.800 1.350 1.080 0.900 0.771 0.675 0.600
0.60 16.200 8.100 4.050 2.700 2.025 1.620 1.350 1.157 1.013 0.900
0.80 21.600 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.700 2.160 1.800 1.543 1.350 1.200
1.00 27.000 13.500 6.750 4.500 3.375 2.700 2.250 1.929 1.688 1.500
IEC CURVE C
0.05 3.200 1.333 0.500 0.267 0.167 0.114 0.083 0.063 0.050 0.040
0.10 6.400 2.667 1.000 0.533 0.333 0.229 0.167 0.127 0.100 0.081
0.20 12.800 5.333 2.000 1.067 0.667 0.457 0.333 0.254 0.200 0.162
0.40 25.600 10.667 4.000 2.133 1.333 0.914 0.667 0.508 0.400 0.323
0.60 38.400 16.000 6.000 3.200 2.000 1.371 1.000 0.762 0.600 0.485
0.80 51.200 21.333 8.000 4.267 2.667 1.829 1.333 1.016 0.800 0.646
1.00 64.000 26.667 10.000 5.333 3.333 2.286 1.667 1.270 1.000 0.808
IEC SHORT INVERSE
0.05 0.153 0.089 0.056 0.044 0.038 0.034 0.031 0.029 0.027 0.026

0.10 0.306 0.178 0.111 0.088 0.075 0.067 0.062 0.058 0.054 0.052
0.20 0.612 0.356 0.223 0.175 0.150 0.135 0.124 0.115 0.109 0.104
0.40 1.223 0.711 0.445 0.351 0.301 0.269 0.247 0.231 0.218 0.207
0.60 1.835 1.067 0.668 0.526 0.451 0.404 0.371 0.346 0.327 0.311
0.80 2.446 1.423 0.890 0.702 0.602 0.538 0.494 0.461 0.435 0.415
1.00 3.058 1.778 1.113 0.877 0.752 0.673 0.618 0.576 0.544 0.518
Rectifier
0.05 264.241 48.313 4.896 0.976 0.280 0.101 0.042 0.020 0.010 0.006
0.10 528.482 96.626 9.792 1.952 0.559 0.201 0.085 0.040 0.021 0.012
0.20 1056.964 193.251 19.583 3.904 1.119 0.403 0.170 0.080 0.042 0.023
0.40 2113.928 386.502 39.167 7.808 2.237 0.806 0.340 0.161 0.083 0.046

1601-0450 395
Chapter 8 - Protection

TDM CURRENT (I/Ipickup)

1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
0.60 3170.891 579.754 58.750 11.712 3.356 1.209 0.510 0.241 0.125 0.069
0.80 4227.855 773.005 78.334 15.615 4.474 1.612 0.680 0.322 0.166 0.092
1.00 5284.819 966.256 97.917 19.519 5.593 2.015 0.850 0.402 0.208 0.115
Standard Inverse (1.3s)
0.05 0.373 0.217 0.137 0.108 0.093 0.083 0.076 0.071 0.068 0.064
0.10 0.745 0.435 0.273 0.216 0.186 0.166 0.153 0.143 0.135 0.129
0.20 1.491 0.870 0.546 0.432 0.371 0.333 0.306 0.286 0.270 0.258
0.40 2.982 1.739 1.093 0.864 0.742 0.665 0.612 0.572 0.540 0.515
0.60 4.473 2.609 1.639 1.295 1.113 0.998 0.918 0.858 0.811 0.773
0.80 5.964 3.479 2.186 1.727 1.484 1.331 1.224 1.144 1.081 1.030
1.00 7.455 4.348 2.732 2.159 1.856 1.664 1.530 1.429 1.351 1.288

IAC CURVES
The curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formula:

Where:
● T = operate time (in seconds)
● TDM = Multiplier setting
● I = input current
● Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
● A to E = constants
● tr = characteristic constant
● TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is Timed)

GE TYPE IAC INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IAC CURVE SHAPE A B C D E tr
IAC Extremely Inverse 0.0040 0.6379 0.6200 1.7872 0.2461 6.008
IAC Very Inverse 0.0900 0.7965 0.1000 -1.2885 7.9586 4.678
IAC Inverse 0.2078 0.8630 0.8000 -0.4180 0.1947 0.990
IAC Short Inverse 0.0428 0.0609 0.6200 -0.0010 0.0221 0.222

396 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

IAC CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

TDM CURRENT (I/Ipickup)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IAC EXTREMELY INVERSE
0.5 1.699 0.749 0.303 0.178 0.123 0.093 0.074 0.062 0.053 0.046
1.0 3.398 1.498 0.606 0.356 0.246 0.186 0.149 0.124 0.106 0.093
2.0 6.796 2.997 1.212 0.711 0.491 0.372 0.298 0.248 0.212 0.185
4.0 13.591 5.993 2.423 1.422 0.983 0.744 0.595 0.495 0.424 0.370
6.0 20.387 8.990 3.635 2.133 1.474 1.115 0.893 0.743 0.636 0.556
8.0 27.183 11.987 4.846 2.844 1.966 1.487 1.191 0.991 0.848 0.741
10.0 33.979 14.983 6.058 3.555 2.457 1.859 1.488 1.239 1.060 0.926
IAC VERY INVERSE
0.5 1.451 0.656 0.269 0.172 0.133 0.113 0.101 0.093 0.087 0.083
1.0 2.901 1.312 0.537 0.343 0.266 0.227 0.202 0.186 0.174 0.165
2.0 5.802 2.624 1.075 0.687 0.533 0.453 0.405 0.372 0.349 0.331
4.0 11.605 5.248 2.150 1.374 1.065 0.906 0.810 0.745 0.698 0.662
6.0 17.407 7.872 3.225 2.061 1.598 1.359 1.215 1.117 1.046 0.992
8.0 23.209 10.497 4.299 2.747 2.131 1.813 1.620 1.490 1.395 1.323
10.0 29.012 13.121 5.374 3.434 2.663 2.266 2.025 1.862 1.744 1.654
IAC INVERSE
0.5 0.578 0.375 0.266 0.221 0.196 0.180 0.618 0.160 0.154 0.148
1.0 1.155 0.749 0.532 0.443 0.392 0.360 0.337 0.320 0.307 0.297
2.0 2.310 1.499 1.064 0.885 0.784 0.719 0.674 0.640 0.614 0.594
4.0 4.621 2.997 2.128 1.770 1.569 1.439 1.348 1.280 1.229 1.188
6.0 6.931 4.496 3.192 2.656 2.353 2.158 2.022 1.921 1.843 1.781
8.0 9.242 5.995 4.256 3.541 3.138 2.878 2.695 2.561 2.457 2.375
10.0 11.552 7.494 5.320 4.426 3.922 3.597 3.369 3.201 3.072 2.969
IAC SHORT INVERSE
0.5 0.072 0.047 0.035 0.031 0.028 0.027 0.026 0.026 0.025 0.025
1.0 0.143 0.095 0.070 0.061 0.057 0.054 0.052 0.051 0.050 0.049
2.0 0.286 0.190 0.140 0.123 0.114 0.108 0.105 0.102 0.100 0.099
4.0 0.573 0.379 0.279 0.245 0.228 0.217 0.210 0.204 0.200 0.197
6.0 0.859 0.569 0.419 0.368 0.341 0.325 0.314 0.307 0.301 0.296
8.0 1.145 0.759 0.559 0.490 0.455 0.434 0.419 0.409 0.401 0.394
10.0 1.431 0.948 0.699 0.613 0.569 0.542 0.524 0.511 0.501 0.493

1601-0450 397
Chapter 8 - Protection

I2T CURVES

The curves for the I2t are derived from the formula:

Where:
● T = operate time (in seconds)
● TDM = Multiplier setting
● I = input current
● Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
● TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is Timed)

I2T CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

TDM CURRENT (I/Ipickup)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
0.05 2.22 1.25 0.55 0.31 0.20 0.14 0.10 0.08 0.06 0.05
0.10 4.44 2.50 1.11 0.63 0.40 0.28 0.20 0.16 0.12 0.10
1.00 44.44 25.00 11.11 6.25 4.00 2.78 2.04 1.56 1.23 1.00
10.00 444.44 250.00 111.11 62.50 40.00 27.78 20.41 15.63 123.5 10.00
100.00 4444.44 2500.00 1111.1 625.00 400.00 277.78 204.08 156.25 123.46 100.00
600.00 26666.7 15000.0 6666.7 3750.0 2400.0 1666.7 1224.5 937.50 740.74 600.00

I4T CURVES

The curves for the I4t are derived from the formula:

Where:
● T = operate time (in seconds)
● TDM = Multiplier setting
● I = input current
● Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
● TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is Timed)

398 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

I4T CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

TDM CURRENT (I/Ipickup)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
0.05 0.9876 0.3125 0.0617 0.0198 0.0008 0.0038 0.0021 0.0012 0.0007 0.0005

0.10 1.9753 0.6250 0.1235 0.0391 0.0160 0.0077 0.0042 0.0024 0.0015 0.0010
1.00 19.753 6.250 1.235 0.391 0.160 0.077 0.042 0.024 0.015 0.010
10.00 197.531 62.500 12.346 3.906 1.600 0.772 0.416 0.244 0.152 0.100
100.00 1975.31 625.00 123.46 39.06 16.00 7.72 4.16 2.44 1.52 1.00
600.00 11851.9 3750.0 740.7 234.4 96.00 46.3 25.0 14.65 9.14 6.00

RI (RAPID INVERSE) CHARACTERISTIC

The RI operate curve is represented by the following equation

where:
● T is the operating time
● k(RI) is the Time Multiplier setting.
● I = input current,
● Ipickup = Pickup Current setting

Note:
When using RI for the Operate characteristic, DT (Definite Time) is always used for the Reset characteristic.

RI CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

MULTIPLIER CURRENT (I/Ipickup)

(k(RI)) 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
0.1 0.550 0.452 0.384 0.357 0.343 0.334 0.328 0.323 0.320 0.317
0.2 1.101 0.905 0.768 0.714 0.685 0.667 0.655 0.646 0.639 0.634
0.4 2.202 1.810 1.536 1.429 1.371 1.335 1.310 1.292 1.279 1.268
0.6 3.303 2.715 2.305 2.143 2.056 2.002 1.965 1.939 1.918 1.902
0.8 4.404 3.620 3.073 2.857 2.742 2.670 2.620 2.585 2.558 2.536
1.0 5.505 4.525 3.841 3.571 3.427 3.337 3.276 3.231 3.197 3.171

1601-0450 399
Chapter 8 - Protection

IDG CURVE
The IDG curve is commonly used for time delayed neutral/ground fault protection in the Swedish market. The IDG
curve is represented by the following equation:
T = 5.8 - 1.35 x loge (I/Ipickup)
where:
● T is the operating time
● I = input current,
● Ipickup = Pickup Current setting.
The IDG Is setting is set as a multiple of the Ground/Neutral overcurrent setting Ipickup for the IDG curve. It
determines the actual current threshold at which the element starts.
The IDG Time setting sets the minimum operate time at high levels of fault current for IDG curves.

Note:
When using IDG for the Operate characteristic, DT (Definite Time) with a value of zero is recommended to use for the Reset
characteristic.

400 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Figure 147: IDG Characteristic

EPATR B CURVE
The EPATR B curve is commonly used for Sensitive Earth Fault protection. It is based on primary current settings,
employing a SEF CT ratio of 100:1 A. The EPATR_B curve has 3 separate segments defined in terms of the primary
current. It is defined as follows:
Segment Primary Current Range Based on 100A: Current/Time Characteristic
1A CT Ratio

1 ISEF = 0.5A to 6.0A t = 432 X TMS / ISEF0.655 sec

2 ISEF = 6.0A to 200A t = 800xTMS / ISEF sec

3 ISEF > 200A t = 4 x TMS sec

where TMS (time multiplier setting) is 0.025 - 1.2 in steps of 0.025.

Note:
When using EPATR B curve, DT (Definite Time) is always used for the Reset characteristic.

1601-0450 401
Chapter 8 - Protection

Figure 148: EPATR B characteristic shown for TMS = 1.0

FLEXCURVES
The custom FlexCurves are described in detail in the FlexCurves section of this chapter. The curve shapes for the
FlexCurves are derived from the formulae:
T = TDM x [FlexCurveTime at (I/Ipickup)] when (I/Ipickup) ³ 1.00
TRESET = TDM x [FlexCurveTime at (I/Ipickup)] when (I/Ipickup) £ 0.98
Where:
● T = operate time (in seconds),
● TDM = Multiplier setting,
● I = input current,
● Ipickup = Pickup Current setting,
● TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is timed)

Note:
Flexcurve A/B/C/D is renamed as Def User Curve A/B/C/D

DEFINITE TIME CURVES

The Definite Time curve shape operates as soon as the pickup level is exceeded for a specified period of time. The
base Definite Time curve delay is in seconds. The curve multiplier of 0.05 to 600 makes this delay adjustable from
50 to 600000 milliseconds.
T = TDM in seconds, when I > Ipickup

402 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Treset = TDM in seconds

Where:
● T = operate time (in seconds)
● TDM = Multiplier setting
● I = input current
● Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
● TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is Timed)

Note:
Note: In Definite Time Curves, Multiplier setting value is provided by ‘Time Delay’ setting.

8.2.3.2 PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (51P)

You can configure the TOC element as follows:
● Apply any of the IEEE, ANSI, IEC, and IAC standard inverse curves
● Apply any of the four FlexCurves
● Set it to definite time.
The selection of Time Dial Multiplier and minimum Pickup helps to fine tune the protection for accurate upstream/
downstream coordination and during certain conditions, such as manual closing and maintenance.
The settings of this function are applied to each of the three phases to produce Pickup and Trip flags per phase.
There is no intentional dead band when the current is above the Pickup level. However the Pickup accuracy is
guaranteed within the current input accuracy of 1.5% above the set pickup value. The time overcurrent (TOC)
Pickup flag is asserted, when the current on any phase is above the pickup value. The TOC Trip flag is asserted if
the element stays picked up for the time defined by the selected inverse curve and the magnitude of the current.
The element drops from Pickup without operating if the measured current drops below 97 to 98% of the Pickup
value before the time for operation is reached. When Definite Time is selected, the time for TOC operation is
defined only by the TDM setting. When in Definite Time mode, TDM sets the time to operate in seconds.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Current > Phase TOC > Phase TOC 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Latched Trip, Configurable
Default: Disabled

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: Dependent upon the order code
Default: CT Bank 1-J1
This setting provides the selection for the current input bank. The default bank names can be changed in:
Setpoints > System > Current Sensing > [Name] > CT Bank Name.

INPUT
Range: Phasor, RMS
Default: Phasor

1601-0450 403
Chapter 8 - Protection

This selection defines the method of processing of the current signal. It could be Root Mean Square (RMS) or
Fundamental Phasor Magnitude.

PICKUP
Range: 0.020 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 1.000 x CT

CURVE
Range: Definite Time, IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, IEC Curve C, IEC Short Inverse, Long Time Inverse,
Rectifier,SI(1.3s), BPN EDF, IEEE Mod Inverse, IEEE Very Inverse, IEEE Extr. Inverse, US Inverse, US ST
Inverse, ANSI Extr. Inverse, ANSI Very Inverse, ANSI Norm Inverse, ANSI Mod Inverse, IAC Extr. Inverse, IAC
Very Inverse, IAC Inverse, IAC Short Inverse, I2t, I4t, Rapid Inverse, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B, FlexCurve C,
FlexCurve D.
Default: IEEE Mod Inverse
This setting sets the shape of the selected over-current inverse curve. If none of the standard curve shapes is
appropriate, a FlexCurve can be created. Refer to the User curve and the FlexCurve setup for more details on
their configurations and usage.

TDM
Range: 0.01 to 28800.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00
This is the Time Multiplier Setting to adjust the operate time of IEC Curve A/B/C, IEEE M/V/E Inverse, US
Inverse, US Short Time, ANSI E/V/N/M Inverse, IAC E/V/N/S Inverse, I2T and I4T curves. For example, if an
IEEE Extremely Inverse curve is selected with TDM = 2, and the fault current is 5 times bigger than the PKP
level, the operation of the element will not occur before 2.59 s have elapsed after Pickup.

TMS
Range: 0.025 to 1.200 in steps of 0.005
Default: 1.00
This is the Time Multiplier Setting to adjust the operate time of IEC Short Inverse, Long Time Inverse, Rectifier,
Standard Inverse SI(1.3s), and BPN EDF curves.

K (RI)
Range: 0.10 to 10.00 in steps of 0.05
Default: 1.00
This setting defines the Time multiplier constant to adjust the operate time of the Rapid Inverse (RI) curve.
This k(RI) setting can be made visible from setting management, only when the Curve setting is selected as
Rapid Inverse.

TIME DELAY
Range: 0.000 s to 28800.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 1.000

404 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

This setting defines the time delay for operation. This Time Delay setting can be made visible from setting
management, only when the Curve setting is selected as Definite Time.

DT ADDER
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.00
This setting adds an additional fixed time delay to the IDMT Operate characteristic.The DT Adder setting will be
visible for when any IDMT curves are selected under the Curve setting.

RESET
Range: DT, Inverse
Default: DT
Selection of a Definite Time (DT) or Inverse reset time is provided using this setting.
If Definite Time (DT) reset is selected, the Phase TOC element will reset after a time delay provided by the
Reset Time setting. If Inverse reset is selected, the time to reset is calculated based on the reset equation for
the selected inverse curve.
Note: When using IEC Short Inverse, Long Time Inverse, BPN EDF, Rectifier, Rapid Inverse curves for the
Operate characteristic, Definite Time is used by default as Reset characteristic.

RESET TIME
Range: 0.000 to 28800.000 in steps of 0.001
Default: 0.000
This setting provides selection for dropout time delay used to delay the dropout of the detection of the
overcurrent condition.
This can be made visible from setting management when the Reset setting is selected as DT or when using
Long Time Inverse, IEC Short Inverse, BPN EDF, Rectifier, and Rapid Inverse curves.

DIRECTION
Range: Disabled, Forward (Ph Dir OCx FWD), Reverse (Ph Dir OCx REV)
Default: Disabled
This setting determines the direction of Phase TOC element.

V DEP OC
Range: Disabled, VCO, VRO
Default: Disabled
V Dep OC (Voltage Dependent Overcurrent) replaces the legacy Voltage Restrained Overcurrent (VRO) function
by adding Voltage Controlled Overcurrent functionality to it. This setting can now select Disabled, VCO or VRO.
When enabled, this feature controls the Pickup value of each individual Phase Time Overcurrent element in a
fixed relationship with its corresponding phase input voltage.
An overcurrent protection scheme is co-ordinated throughout a system such that cascaded operation is
achieved. This means that if for some reason a downstream circuit breaker fails to trip for a fault condition, the
next upstream circuit breaker should trip.

1601-0450 405
Chapter 8 - Protection

If the current seen by a local device for a remote fault condition is below its overcurrent setting, a voltage
dependent element may be used to increase the sensitivity to such faults. As a reduction in system voltage will
occur during overcurrent conditions, this may be used to enhance the sensitivity of the overcurrent protection by
reducing the pick-up level.
If cold load pickup, autoreclosing, or manual close blocking features are controlling the protection, the Phase
TOC Voltage Restraint does not work, even when enabled.
In Voltage Controlled Operation (VCO) mode of operation, the under-voltage detector is used to produce a step
change in the current setting, when the voltage falls below the voltage setting V Dep OC V<1. The operating
characteristic of the current setting when voltage-controlled mode is selected is as follows:

Current
Setting

Current Pickup Setting

K x Current Pickup Setting

V Dep OC V1 Measured Voltage

Figure 149: VCO operation

Current
Setting

Current Pickup Setting

K x Current Pickup Setting

V Dep OC V2 V Dep OC V1 Measured Voltage

Figure 150: VRO operation

VT INPUT
Range: Dependent upon the order code
Default: Ph VT Bank 1-J2
This setting provides the selection for the voltage input bank, when V Dep OC is enabled.

V Dep OC V1
Range: 0.01 to 1.20 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT

406 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Default: 0.72 x VT
This setting sets the voltage V1 threshold at which the current setting of the overcurrent stage becomes reduced.
This is on a per phase basis.

V Dep OC k
Range: 0.10 to 1.00 in steps of 0.05
Default: 0.25
This setting determines the Overcurrent multiplier factor used to reduce the pick-up overcurrent setting.

V Dep OC V2
Range: 0.01 to 1.2 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Default: 0.54 x VT
This setting sets the voltage V2 threshold at which the current setting of the overcurrent stage becomes reduced.
This is on a per phase basis.

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Self-reset

1601-0450 407
Chapter 8 - Protection

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
LED: TRIP To operate Output Relay

AND
1(TRIP)
Configurable in 845 & 859

OR
S

AND
LATCH
R
LED: ALARM

AND
SETPOINT
I>[X] FUNCTION: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR
Any Alarm
Disabled

AND
Trip S
Latched Trip LATCH SETPOINT
SETPOINTS
OR

Alarm Command R Output Relay X

Latched Alarm I>[X] CURRENT SET: RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
Configurable FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
I>[X] CURVE:

OR
PTOC I>[X] Trip
SETPOINTS
I>[X] DIRECTION: I>[X] TMS:

Non-Directional
I>[X] TIME DIAL:
Forward
AND

Reverse I>[X] k (RI):

FlexLogic Operands
AND
OR

I>[X] TIME DELAY:

Ph A Reverse (from Phase PTOC I>[X] Trip A
AND

Directional OC element)
I>[X] DT ADDER:
PTOC I>[X] Trip B
AND

Ph B Reverse (from Phase

Directional OC element) Same Logic as for Phase A I>[X] RESET CHAR:
PTOC I>[X] Trip C

I>[X] tRESET: PTOC I>[X] Trip

Ph C Reverse (from Phase Same Logic as for Phase A
AND

Directional OC element) RUN Ia > CURRENT SET

SETPOINTS

OR
I>[X] INHIBIT: SETPOINTS
Adjust PKP
Off=0 I>[X] Rly OP[1-11]
RUN Ib > CURRENT SET Do Not Operate, Operate

USED ONLY IN 845

SETPOINTS SETPOINTS Adjust PKP

SIGNAL
INPUT:
Phase Currents INPUT: RUN Ic > CURRENT SET LED: PICKUP
Phase A current (Ia)
Phase B current (Ib) CT Bank 1 – J1 Phasor, RMS
Phase C current (Ic) OR

From Cold Load Pickup Adjust PKP FlexLogic Operands

TOC Pickup Raise
PTOC I>[X] Start
OR

From Autoreclose
TOC Pickup Raise SETPOINT
PTOC I>[X] Start A
From Manual Close Blocking I>[X] CURRENT SET :
AND

TOC Pickup Raise

I>[X] V Dep OC k PTOC I>[X] Start B

I>[X] V Dep OC V<1 PTOC I>[X] Start C

SETPOINT
I>[X] V DEP OC: I>[X] V Dep OC V<2

Disable RUN

VCO
VRO
Calculate VCO/VRO
Multiplier
Phase Voltages
Phase A Voltage (Va)
Phase B Voltage (Vb)
Phase C Voltage (Vc)




Figure 151: Phase Time Overcurrent Protection logic diagram

8.2.3.3 PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (50P)

The PIOC protection consists of three identical instantaneous overcurrent elements, one for each phase. All three
have identical characteristics. The settings of this function are applied to each of the three phases to produce
Pickup and Trip flags per phase. There is no intentional dead band when the current is above the Pickup level.
However the Pickup accuracy is guaranteed within the current input accuracy of 3% above the set pickup value.
The IOC Pickup flag is asserted, when the current of any phase is above the pickup value. The IOC Operate flag is
asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined in PH IOC PKP DELAY. The element drops from
Pickup without operating if the measured current drops below 97-98% of the Pickup value before the time for
operation is reached.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group1(6) > Current > Phase IOC 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable

408 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: Dependent upon the order code
Default: CT Bank 1-J1 (dependent on order code)
This setting provides the selection for the current input bank. The default bank names can be changed in:
Setpoints > System > Current Sensing > [Name] > CT Bank Name.

INPUT
Default: Phasor (Up to firmware version 3.x)
Default: Phasor (RMS when VFD Function = enabled) (From firmware version 4)

PICKUP
Range (3.xx): 0.020 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Range (4.10): 0.010 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 1.000 x CT

DIRECTION
Range: Disabled, Forward (Ph Dir OCx FWD), Reverse (Ph Dir OCx REV)
Default: Disabled

PICKUP DELAY
Range (3.xx): 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Range (4.10): 0.000 to 28800.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000 s

DROPOUT DELAY
Range (3.xx): 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Range (4.10): 0.000 to 28800.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000 s

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

1601-0450 409
Chapter 8 - Protection

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Self-reset
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
LED: TRIP 8S: To operate Output Relay

AND
1(TRIP)
Configurable in 845 & 859

OR
S

AND
SETPOINT LATCH

FUNCTION: R
LED: ALARM

AND
Disabled
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Trip

OR
Any Alarm
Latched Trip

AND
S
OR

Alarm
Latched Alarm LATCH SETPOINT
Configurable Command R Output Relay X
RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETPOINTS

OR
Phase IOC 1 OP
DIRECTION:
Disabled
SETPOINTS
Forward
AND

Reverse PICKUP:
AND
OR

RUN
SETPOINTS
AND

Ph A Reverse (from Phase

Directional OC element) Ia > PICKUP PICKUP DELAY:

DROPOUT DELAY:
Ph B Reverse (from Phase Same Logic as for Phase A
Directional OC element)
tPKP
AND

RUN tRST
Ph C Reverse (from Phase
Same Logic as for Phase A
Directional OC element) tPKP

OR
Ib > PICKUP
tRST
SETPOINTS tPKP
BLOCK tRST
AND

RUN FlexLogic Operands

Off = 0
Phase IOC 1 OP A
Ic > PICKUP
From Cold Load Pickup Phase IOC 1 OP B
OR

From Autoreclose Phase IOC 1 OP C

(per shot settings)

From Manual Close Blocking

LED: PICKUP

USED ONLY IN 850

SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS
OR

Phase Currents INPUT:

SIGNAL INPUT:
Phase A current (Ia)
FlexLogic Operands
Phase B current (Ib) Phasor, RMS
CT Bank 1 - J1
Phase IOC 1 PKP
Phase C current (Ic)
Phase IOC 1 PKP A
USED ONLY IN 845/889
Phase IOC 1 PKP B


Phase IOC 1 PKP C

Figure 152: Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent logic diagram

8.2.3.4 PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (67P)

The Phase Directional Overcurrent protection elements (one for each of phases A, B, and C) determine the phase
current flow direction for steady state and fault conditions and can be used to control the operation of the phase
overcurrent elements by sending directional bits to inputs of these elements.

410 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

The element is intended to send a directional signal to an overcurrent element to prevent an operation when current
is flowing in a particular direction. The direction of current flow is determined by measuring the phase angle
between the current from the phase CTs and the line-line voltage from the VTs, based on the 90° or quadrature
connection. To increase security for three phase faults very close to the VTs used to measure the polarizing voltage,
a voltage memory feature is incorporated. This feature remembers the measurement of the polarizing voltage 3
cycles back and uses it to determine direction. The voltage memory remains valid for one second after the voltage
has collapsed.
The main component of the phase directional element is the phase angle comparator with two inputs: the operating
signal (phase current) and the polarizing signal (the line voltage, shifted in the leading direction by the characteristic
angle, ECA).
The following table shows the operating and polarizing signals used for phase directional control:

POLARIZING SIGNAL (Vpol)

PHASE OPERATING SIGNAL
ABC PHASE SEQUENCE ACB PHASE SEQUENCE
A Angle of Ia Angle of Vbc × (1ÐECA) Angle of Vcb × (1ÐECA)
B Angle of Ib Angle of Vca × (1ÐECA) Angle of Vac × (1ÐECA)
C Angle of Ic Angle of Vab × (1ÐECA) Angle of Vba × (1ÐECA)

1601-0450 411
Chapter 8 - Protection

For 850D dual feeder applications, when the signal input is from CT Bank 1 – J1, VT Bank 1-J2 is used as the
polarizing voltage source. Similarly, when the signal input is from CT Bank 2 – K1, VT Bank 2 – K2 is used as the
polarizing voltage source.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group1(6) > Current > Phase Dir OC 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: dependent upon the order code
Default: CT Bank 1-J1
This setting provides the selection for the current input bank. The default bank names can be changed in:
Setpoints > System > Current Sensing > [Name] > CT Bank Name.

ECA
Range: 0° to 359° in steps of 1°
Default: 30°
The setting is used to select the element characteristic angle, i.e. the angle by which the polarizing voltage is
shifted in the leading direction to achieve dependable operation.

POLARIZING V THRESHOLD
Range (3.xx): 0.050 to 3.000 x VT in steps of 0.001 x VT (up to FW 3.xx)
Range (4.10): 0.015 to 3.000 x VT in steps of 0.001 x VT (from FW 4.10)
Default: 0.700 x VT
The setting is used to establish the minimum level of voltage for which the phase angle measurement is reliable.
The setting is based on VT accuracy.

REV WHEN V MEM EXP

Range: No, Yes
Default: No
The setting is used to select the required operation upon expiration of voltage memory. When set to “Yes” the
directional element output value is forced to Reverse when voltage memory expires; when set to “No” the
directional element is Forward when voltage memory expires.

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

412 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Self-reset

Note:
The Phase Directional element responds to the forward load current. In the case of a following reverse fault, the element
needs some time – in the order of 8 ms – to change the directional signal. Some protection elements such as Instantaneous
Overcurrent may respond to reverse faults before the directional signal has changed. A coordination time of at least 10 ms
must therefore be added to all the instantaneous protection elements under the supervision of the Phase Directional element.
If current reversal is a concern, a longer delay – in the order of 20 ms – is needed.


 
B mn onpq  Urs
 !  C Ik l  "D
"# ! 
?
@
A

$% &
'' ! 

J tk  u 
"  Q#P
?
@
 < = >  A 8:;
567
rqvrn wrnv (4)*
 B mn onpq  Urs
89(
C Ik l  "D 
 Ik Nx D Ik Nx DtJ
$ $ DO ()*+,-. /)*,012,+1)3
 $ $ DO
$  $ DO

 $  $ DO ?
I% LM D  "NF% @
A
J tk  u 
DOP ' D<! D Q#QRQ Q#P
DQQ ' DS DQ#QRQ
D<! D Q#QRQ T TUV T U

W XYXZ[
"D EF" D G"G "HI W \[X
mn onpq  Urs
J Ik l  "D $
K

J tk  u 
Q#P
]^_`a b cdefg `fhfc_i jd ]^_`a _

mn onpq  Urs
]^_`a g cdefg `fhfc_i jd ]^_`a _ Ik l  "D



Figure 153: Phase Directional Overcurrent Protection logic diagram

8.2.3.5 NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (51N)

The relay computes the neutral current (In) using the following formula:
|In|=|Ia+Ib+Ic|
The settings of this function are applied to the neutral current to produce Trip or Pickup flags. The Neutral TOC
Pickup flag is asserted when the neutral current is above the pickup value. The Neutral TOC Trip flag is asserted if
the element stays picked up for the time defined by the selected inverse curve and the magnitude of the current.
The element drops from Pickup without operation if the measured current drops below 97 to 98% of the Pickup
value before the time for operation is reached. When Definite Time is selected, the time for Neutral TOC operation
is defined only by the TDM setting.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Current > Neutral TOC 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Latched Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable

1601-0450 413
Chapter 8 - Protection

Default: Disabled

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: dependent upon the order code
Default: CT Bank 1-J1
This setting provides the selection for the current input bank. The default bank names can be changed in:
Setpoints > System > Current Sensing > [Name] > CT Bank Name.

INPUT
Range: Phasor, RMS
Default: Phasor
This selection defines the method of processing of the current signal. It could be Root Mean Square (RMS) or
Fundamental Phasor Magnitude.

PICKUP
Range: 0.010 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 0.200 x CT

CURVE
Range: Range: Definite Time, IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, IEC Curve C, IEC Short Inverse ,Long Time Inverse,
Rectifier, SI(1.3s), BPN EDF, IEEE Mod Inverse, IEEE Very Inverse, IEEE Extr. Inverse, US Inverse, US ST
Inverse, ANSI Extr. Inverse, ANSI Very Inverse, ANSI Norm Inverse, ANSI Mod Inverse, IAC Extr. Inverse, IAC
Very Inverse, IAC Inverse, IAC Short Inverse, I2t, I4t, Rapid Inverse, IDG, EPATR B, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B,
FlexCurve C, FlexCurve D.
Default: IEEE Mod Inverse
This setting sets the shape of the selected over-current inverse curve. If none of the standard curve shapes is
appropriate, a FlexCurve can be created. Refer to the User curve and the FlexCurve setup for more details on
their configurations and usage.

TDM
Range: 0.01 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00
This is the Time Multiplier Setting to adjust the operate time of IEC Curve A/B/C, IEEE M/V/E Inverse, US
Inverse, US Short Time, ANSI E/V/N/M Inverse, IAC E/V/N/S Inverse, I2T and I4T curves.

TMS
Range: 0.025 to 1.200 in steps of 0.005
Default: 1.000
This is the Time Multiplier Setting to adjust the operate time of IEC Short Inverse, Long Time Inverse, Rectifier,
Standard Inverse SI(1.3s), BPN EDF and EPATR B curves.

K (RI)
Range: 0.10 to 10.00 Step: 0.05

414 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Default: 1.00
This setting defines the Time multiplier constant to adjust the operate time of the Rapid Inverse (RI) curve.
This setting can be made visible from setting management, only when Curve setting is selected as Rapid
Inverse.

IDG Is
Range: 1.0 to 4.0 in steps of 0.1
Default: 1.5
This setting is set as a multiple of the ground fault overcurrent setting for the IDG curve.
It determines the actual current threshold at which the element starts.
This setting can be made visible from setting management, only when the Curve setting is selected as IDG.

IDG Time
Range: 1.00 to 2.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.20
This setting sets the minimum operate time at high levels of fault current for IDG curves.
This setting can be made visible from setting management, only when the Curve setting is selected as IDG.

Time Delay
Range: 0.000 s to 200.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 1.000
This setting defines the time delay for operation.
This setting can be made visible from setting management, only when the Curve setting is selected as DT
(Definite Time).

DT Adder
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.00
This setting adds an additional fixed time delay to the IDMT Operate characteristic.
This setting will be visible for when any IDMT curves are selected under the Curve setting.

RESET
Range: DT, Inverse
Default: DT
This setting sets a Definite Time (DT) or Inverse reset time.
If Definite Time (DT) reset is selected, the Neutral TOC element will reset after a time delay provided by the
Reset Time setting. If Inverse reset is selected, the time to reset is calculated based on the reset equation for
the selected inverse curve.
When using Long Time Inverse, BPN EDF, Rectifier, IEC Short Inverse, Rapid Inverse, IDG, EPATR B curves the
reset is always definite time defined by the setpoint Reset Time.

1601-0450 415
Chapter 8 - Protection

Reset Time
Range: 0.000 to 100.000 s in stepos of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000s
This setting determines the Reset time for the Definite Time Reset characteristic.
This can be made visible from setting management when the Reset setting is selected as DT or when using
Long Time Inverse, IEC Short Inverse, BPN EDF, Rectifier, IDG, EPATR B and Rapid Inverse curves.

DIRECTION
Range: Disabled, Forward (Ntrl Dir OCx FWD), Reverse (Ntrl Dir OCx REV)
Default: Disabled

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Self-reset

416 1601-0450
 8.2.3.6

formula:

1601-0450
|In| = |Ia + Ib + Ic|
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
SETPOINT
LED: TRIP 8S: To operate Output Relay
FUNCTION:

AND
1(TRIP)
Disabled Configurable in 845 & 859
OR

Trip
Latched Trip S

AND
Alarm
LATCH

OR
Latched Alarm
R
LED: ALARM
Configurable
AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR

SETPOINTS Any Alarm

PICKUP: S
AND

LATCH SETPOINT
CURVE:
Command R Output Relay X
RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
TDM:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RESET: Ntrl TOC 1 OP
OR

SETPOINTS DIRECTION:

BLOCK: RUN In > PICKUP

AND
Off = 0

Adjust PKP LED: PICKUP

Figure 154: Neutral Time Overcurrent Protection logic diagram

SETPOINTS SETPOINTS
Calculated as a sum of SIGNAL
INPUT: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
phase currents INPUT:
Ntrl TOC 1 PKP
Neutral current (In) CT Bank 1 – J1 Phasor, RMS

USED ONLY IN 845/889

From Cold Load Pickup

From Autoreclose
(per shot settings)

From Manual Close Blocking

USED ONLY IN 850



NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (50N)

The Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent protection element computes the neutral current (In) using the following

417
Chapter 8 - Protection
Chapter 8 - Protection

The element responds to the magnitude of a neutral current fundamental frequency phasor calculated from the
phase currents. A positive-sequence restraint is applied for better performance. A small portion (6.25%) of the
positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the zero-sequence current magnitude when forming the
operating quantity of the element as follows:
Iop = 3 * (|I_0| - K * |I_1|) where K = 1/16 and |I_0| = 1/3 * |In|
For FW 4.10 and later, the actual value of operating quantity Iop is available as Neutral IOC Iop under Metering
\Neutral IOC.
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero-sequence
currents resulting from:
● system unbalances under heavy load conditions
● current transformer (CT) transformation errors of during double-line and three-phase faults
● switch-off transients during double-line and three-phase faults
The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for Pickup accuracy and response time (multiple
of Pickup). The operating quantity depends on how test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase injection:
Iop = 0.9375 * I_injected three-phase pure zero sequence injection: Iop = 3 * I_injected).
The settings of this function are applied to the neutral current to produce Pickup and Trip flags. The Neutral IOC
Pickup flag is asserted, when the neutral current is above the pickup value. The Neutral IOC Operate flag is
asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by the Neutral IOC PICKUP DELAY setting. If the
Pickup time delay is set to 0.000 seconds, the Pickup and Operate flags are asserted at the same time. The
element drops from Pickup without operation if the neutral current drops below 97 to 98% of the Pickup value.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Current > Neutral IOC 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: dependent upon the order code
Default: CT Bank 1-J1
This setting provides the selection for the current input bank. The default bank names can be changed in:
Setpoints > System > Current Sensing > [Name] > CT Bank Name.

PICKUP
Range (up to FW 3.xx): 0.050 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Range (from FW 4.10): 0.010 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default (up to FW 3.xx): 1.00 x CT
Default (from FW 4.10): 0.20 x CT

DIRECTION
Range: Disabled, Forward (Ntrl Dir OCx FWD), Reverse (Ntrl Dir OCx REV)
Default: Disabled

418 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000 s

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000 s

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Self-reset

1601-0450 419
Chapter 8 - Protection

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
SETPOINT
LED: TRIP 8S: To operate Output Relay

AND
FUNCTION:
1(TRIP)
Disabled Configurable in 845 & 859

OR
Trip
S

AND
Latched Trip
LATCH

OR
Alarm
Latched Alarm
R
LED: ALARM

AND
Configurable
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR
Any Alarm

AND
S
LATCH SETPOINT
Command R Output Relay X
ACTUAL VALUE
RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
SETPOINTS NEUTRAL IOC1 Iop FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR
PICKUP: Ntrl IOC1 OP
SETPOINTS
DIRECTION:
SETPOINTS PICKUP DELAY:
AND

RUN
BLOCK:
DROPOUT DELAY:
Off = 0 Iop = 3 * (|I_0| - K * |I_1|)

Iop > PICKUP tPKP

tRST
From Cold Load Pickup
OR

From Autoreclose
(per shot settings) LED: PICKUP

From Manual Close Blocking FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

Ntrl IOC1 PKP
USED ONLY IN 850

SETPOINTS

SIGNAL INPUT
Neutral IOC source

I_0 and I_1 CT Bank 1 - J1 Phasor

USED ONLY IN 845/889


Figure 155: Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection logic diagram

8.2.3.7 NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (67N)

Note:
For FW 4.10 onwards, V_X (or VX), is know as V_N (or VN)

The Neutral Directional Overcurrent protection element provides both forward and reverse fault direction indications
shown by the operands Ntrl Dir OC FWD and Ntrl Dir OC REV, respectively. The output operands are asserted if the
magnitude of the operating current is above a Pickup level (overcurrent unit) and the fault direction is seen as
forward or reverse, respectively (directional unit).
The overcurrent unit responds to the magnitude of a fundamental frequency phasor of the neutral current calculated
from the phase currents. There are separate Pickup settings for the forward-looking and reverse-looking functions.
The element applies a positive-sequence restraint for better performance; a small user-programmable portion of the
positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the zero sequence current magnitude when forming the
operating quantity.
Iop = 3 * (|I_0| - K * |I_1|)
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero-sequence
currents resulting from:
● system unbalances under heavy load conditions
● current transformer (CT) transformation errors of during double-line and three-phase faults
● switch-off transients during double-line and three-phase faults.

420 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for Pickup accuracy and response time (multiple
of Pickup). The operating quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase
injection: Iop = (1 – K) × Iinjected ; three-phase pure zero-sequence injection: Iop = 3 × Iinjected).
The positive-sequence restraint is removed for low currents. If the positive-sequence current is below 0.8 x CT, the
restraint is removed by changing the constant K to zero. This facilitates better response to high-resistance faults
when the unbalance is very small and there is no danger of excessive CT errors as the current is low.
The directional unit uses the zero-sequence current (I_0) for fault direction discrimination and may be configured to
use either zero-sequence voltage (Calculated V0 or Measured VX (known as VN for FW4.10 onwards)),
ground current (Ig), or both for polarizing. The following table defines the neutral directional overcurrent element.
Directional unit Overcurrent unit
Polarizing mode Direction Compared phasors
Voltage Forward -V_0 1_0 x 1ÐECA Iop = 3 x {|I_0| - K x |
I_1|}
Reverse -V_0 -1_0 x 1ÐECA
Current Forward Ig I_0
Reverse Ig -I_0 If |I_1| > 0.8 x CT
Dual Forward -V_0 or I_0 x 1ÐECA or
Iop = 3 x {|I_0|}
Ig I_0
if |I_1| £0.8 x CT
Reverse -V_0 or -I_0 x 1ÐECA or
Ig -I_0
Where:
● V_0 = 1/3 * (Vag + Vbg + Vcg) = zero sequence voltage
● I_0 = 1/3 * In = 1/3 * (Ia + Ib + Ic) = zero sequence current
● ECA = element characteristic angle
● In = neutral current
When POLARIZING VOLTAGE is set to Measured VX, one-third of this voltage is used in place of V0.
The following figure explains the use of the voltage polarized directional unit of the element by showing the voltage-
polarized phase angle comparator characteristics for a phase A to ground fault, with:
● ECA = 90° (element characteristic angle = centerline of operating characteristic)
● FWD LA = 80° (forward limit angle = the ± angular limit with the ECA for operation
● REV LA = 80° (reverse limit angle = the ± angular limit with the ECA for operation).
The element incorporates a current reversal logic: if the reverse direction is indicated for at least 1.25 of a power
system cycle, the prospective forward indication will be delayed by 1.5 of a power system cycle. The element is
designed to emulate an electromechanical directional device. Larger operating and polarizing signals will result in
faster directional discrimination bringing more security to element operation.
The forward-looking function is designed to be more secure as compared to the reverse-looking function, and
should therefore be used for the tripping direction. The reverse-looking function is designed to be faster as
compared to the forward-looking function and should be used for the blocking direction. This allows better protection
coordination.
The above bias should be taken into account when using the Neutral Directional Overcurrent element to
directionalize other protection elements.

1601-0450 421
Chapter 8 - Protection

Note:
For relays ordered without voltage inputs, the polarizing signal for the Neutral Directional OC element is the ground current
(Ig) from the bank selected as Signal Input in the element’s menu. In this case the setpoints POLARIZING MODE, and
POLARIZING VOLTAGE are not displayed.

-V 
REV L F L
 
V G
(  

REV   F  

R   R  

L L

 
E

E 

-E 

-  L

VG L

VG

REV L F L
 
V 
8
8

Figure 156: Neutral Directional Voltage-polarized Characteristics

Note:
For 850 Dual Feeder Applications: For Signal Input of CT Bank 1 – J1 >> VT Bank 1 -J2 is considered as Polarizing voltage
source. And, For CT Bank 2 – K1 >> VT Bank 2 – K2 is considered as Polarizing Voltage Source

Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Current > Neutral Directional OC 1(X)

422 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: dependent upon the order code
Default: CT Bank 1-J1
This setting provides selection of the current input bank. The default bank names can be changed in Setpoints
> System > Current Sensing > [Name] > CT Bank Name.

POLARIZING MODE
Range: Voltage, Current, Dual
Default: Voltage
This setting selects the polarizing mode for the directional unit.
If Voltage
○ polarizing mode is selected, the element uses the zero-sequence voltage angle for polarization.
Select either the zero-sequence voltage V0, calculated from the phase voltages, or the zero-sequence
voltage supplied externally as the auxiliary voltage V_X. The calculated V0 can be used as polarizing voltage
only if the voltage transformers are connected in Wye. The auxiliary voltage can be used as the polarizing
voltage if the auxiliary voltage is connected to a zero-sequence voltage source (such as the open delta
connected secondary of VTs). The zero-sequence (V0) or auxiliary voltage (V_X), accordingly, must be
greater than 0.02 x VT to be validated for use as a polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is invalid, neither
forward nor reverse indication is given.
If Current
○ polarizing mode is selected, the element uses the angle of the ground current measured on the
ground current input. The ground CT must be connected between the ground and neutral point of an
adequate source of ground current. The ground current must be greater than 0.05 x CT to be validated as a
polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is not valid, neither forward nor reverse indication is given. For a
choice of current polarizing, it is recommended that the polarizing signal be analyzed to ensure that a known
direction is maintained irrespective of the fault location. For example, if using an autotransformer neutral
current as a polarizing source, it should be ensured that a reversal of the ground current does not occur for a
high-side fault. The low-side system impedance should be assumed minimal when checking for this
condition. A similar situation arises for a wye/delta/wye transformer, where current in one transformer winding
neutral may reverse when faults on both sides of the transformer are considered.
If Dual
○ polarizing mode is selected, the element performs both directional comparisons as described above.
A given direction is confirmed if either voltage or current comparators indicate so. If a conflicting
(simultaneous forward and reverse) indication occurs, the forward direction overrides the reverse direction.

POLARIZING VOLTAGE
Range: Calculated V0, Measured VX (or VN for FW 4.10 onwards)
Default: Calculated V0
Selects the polarizing voltage used by the directional unit when Voltage or Dual polarizing mode is set. The
polarizing voltage can be programmed to be either the zero-sequence voltage calculated from the phase
voltages (Calculated V0) or supplied externally as an auxiliary voltage (Measured VX (or VN))

POLARIZING VOL SUPV

Range (3.xx): 0.005 to 0.100 x VT in steps of 0.005 x VT

1601-0450 423
Chapter 8 - Protection

Range (4.10): 0.005 to 0.400 x VT in steps of 0.005 x VT

Default: 0.020 x VT
The zero-sequence or auxiliary voltage must be greater than the polarizing supervision voltage configured in this
setting, to be validated for use as a polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is invalid, neither forward nor reverse
indication is given.

POS SEQ RESTRAINT

Range: 0.000 to 0.500 in steps of 0.001
Default: 0.063
This setting controls the amount of the positive-sequence restraint. Set to zero to remove the restraint. Set
higher if large system unbalances or poor CT performance are expected.

FORWARD ECA
Range: –180° to 180° in steps of 1°
Default: 75°
This setting defines the element characteristic angle (ECA) for the forward direction in “Voltage” polarizing mode.
“Current” polarizing mode uses a fixed ECA of 0°. The ECA in the reverse direction is the angle set for the
forward direction shifted by 180°.

FORWARD LIMIT ANGLE

Range: 40° to 90° in steps of 1°
Default: 90°
This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit angle for the forward direction.

FORWARD PICKUP
Range (3.xx): 0.050 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Range (4.10): 0.010 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 0.050 x CT
This setting defines the Pickup level for the overcurrent unit of the element in the forward direction. When
selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a ‘positive-sequence restraint’ technique for the
Calculated 3I0 mode of operation.

REVERSE LIMIT ANGLE

Range: 40° to 90° in steps of 1°
Default: 90°
This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit angle for the reverse direction.

REVERSE PICKUP
Range (3.xx): 0.050 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Range (4.10): 0.010 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 0.050 x CT

424 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

This setting defines the Pickup level for the overcurrent unit of the element in the reverse direction. When
selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a ‘positive-sequence restraint’ technique for the
Calculated 3I0 mode of operation.

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Self-reset
 

  


   
       

  
   7+ (#   (., 
 !"#
* !".

  RS TUVRWXY RSZ XT[

\SZ UYU]UTR^

 
55"#  

  

 
 
   

  

 
 

  

 
 
 

  


 
_`abcdea_ 
 $ !  
'$ !  (# ) 
    .216 'F
7(#
 % -  +(#, . 26 'F
fg hijk l m nl 
%$*!  +&, ) 7(# 
opqr stuv wt xyz {|} xx~ 89:;<=> ?9:<@AB<;A9C

  & #2#64 


  

  
%&  DE@@>C; ?9:<@AB<;A9C
$ * 

$ 

.,    
    
 
/  
/ 0 RS TUVRWXY RSZ XT[
0           \SZ UYU]UTR^
     
     

  

1,          
 0
(.  
 #23 4 

 

 
          

7+(#   (. ,  GHIJKLMINOPQ

Figure 157: Neutral Directional Overcurrent Protection logic diagram

1601-0450 425
Chapter 8 - Protection

8.2.3.8 GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (51G)

The settings of Ground Time Overcurrent protection element are applied to the ground input current to produce Trip
or Pickup flags. The Ground TOC Pickup flag is asserted when the ground current is above the PKP value. The
Ground TOC Trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by the selected inverse curve
and the magnitude of the current. The element drops from Pickup without operation if the measured current drops
below 97 to 98% of the Pickup value before the time for operation is reached. When Definite Time is selected, the
time for Ground TOC operation is defined only by the TDM setting.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Current > Ground TOC 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Latched Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Default: Disabled

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: Dependent upon the order code
Default: CT Bank 1-J1
This setting provides the selection for the current input bank. The default bank names can be changed in
Setpoints > System > Current Sensing > [Name] > CT Bank Name.
The Signal Input setting is visible only in the 845 and 889. For other products, it is hidden.

INPUT
Range: Phasor, RMS
Default: Phasor
This selection defines the method of processing of the current signal. It could be Root Mean Square (RMS) or
Fundamental Phasor Magnitude.

PICKUP
Range: 0.010 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 0.200 x CT

CURVE
Range: Range: Definite Time, IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, IEC Curve C, IEC Short Inverse ,Long Time Inverse,
Rectifier, SI(1.3s), BPN EDF, IEEE Mod Inverse, IEEE Very Inverse, IEEE Extr. Inverse, US Inverse, US ST
Inverse, ANSI Extr. Inverse, ANSI Very Inverse, ANSI Norm Inverse, ANSI Mod Inverse, IAC Extr. Inverse, IAC
Very Inverse, IAC Inverse, IAC Short Inverse, I2t, I4t, Rapid Inverse, IDG, EPATR B, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B,
FlexCurve C, FlexCurve D.
Default: IEEE, Moderately Inverse

TDM
Range: 0.05 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00
This is the Time Multiplier Setting to adjust the operate time of IEC Curve A/B/C, IEEE M/V/E Inverse, US
Inverse, US Short Time, ANSI E/V/N/M Inverse, IAC E/V/N/S Inverse, I2T and I4T curves.

426 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

TMS
Range: 0.025 to 1.200 in steps of 0.005
Default: 1.000
This is the Time Multiplier Setting to adjust the operate time of IEC Short Inverse, Long Time Inverse, Rectifier,
Standard Inverse SI(1.3s), BPN EDF and EPATR B curves.

K (RI)
Range: 0.10 to 10.00 Step: 0.05
Default: 1.00
This setting defines the Time multiplier constant to adjust the operate time of the Rapid Inverse (RI) curve.
This setting can be made visible from setting management, only when Curve setting is selected as Rapid
Inverse.

IDG Is
Range: 1.0 to 4.0 in steps of 0.1
Default: 1.5
This setting is set as a multiple of the ground fault overcurrent setting for the IDG curve.
It determines the actual current threshold at which the element starts.
This setting can be made visible from setting management, only when the Curve setting is selected as IDG.

IDG TIME
Range: 1.00 to 2.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.20
This setting sets the minimum operate time at high levels of fault current for IDG curves.
This setting can be made visible from setting management, only when the Curve setting is selected as IDG.

TIME DELAY
Range: 0.000 s to 1200.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 1.000
This setting defines the time delay for operation.
This setting can be made visible from setting management, only when the Curve setting is selected as DT
(Definite Time).

DT ADDER
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.00
This setting adds an additional fixed time delay to the IDMT Operate characteristic.
This setting will be visible for when any IDMT curves are selected under the Curve setting.

1601-0450 427
Chapter 8 - Protection

RESET
Range: DT, Inverse
Default: DT
This setting sets a Definite Time (DT) or Inverse reset time.
If Definite Time (DT) reset is selected, the Neutral TOC element will reset after a time delay provided by the
Reset Time setting. If Inverse reset is selected, the time to reset is calculated based on the reset equation for
the selected inverse curve.
When using Long Time Inverse, BPN EDF, Rectifier, IEC Short Inverse, Rapid Inverse, IDG, EPATR B curves the
reset is always definite time defined by the setpoint Reset Time.

RESET TIME
Range: 0.000 to 100.000 s in stepos of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000s
This setting determines the Reset time for the Definite Time Reset characteristic.
This can be made visible from setting management when the Reset setting is selected as DT or when using
Long Time Inverse, IEC Short Inverse, BPN EDF, Rectifier, IDG, EPATR B and Rapid Inverse curves.

DIRECTION
Range: Disabled, Forward, Reverse
Default: Disabled

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off or PB 4 OFF (GND TRIP ENABLED), Dependent on order code

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Self-reset

428 1601-0450
 8.2.3.9

1601-0450
LED:
In 845 & 859, operate the selected Trip
TRIP
SETPOINT Output Relay

AND
FUNCTION: Operate Output Relay 1 (TRIP)
OR

Disabled
S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Trip

AND
LATCH Any Trip
Latched Trip
R LED:
Alarm

OR
ALARM
Latched Alarm
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Configurable
OR

Any Alarm
SETPOINTS S
AND

PICKUP: LATCH SETPOINT

Command R Output Relay X
CURVE: RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
Direction (from Ground Directional FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TDM:
OC element)
Ground TOC1 OP
OR

Not Applicable in 869 and 859 RESET:

Bridge – P14 only

SETPOINTS DIRECTION:

BLOCK: RUN Ig > PICKUP

AND
Off = 0

LED: PICKUP
SETPOINTS Adjust PKP

Figure 158: Ground Time Overcurrent Protection logic diagram

SETPOINTS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SIGNAL
INPUT: INPUT: Ground TOC1 PKP
From Ground CT

Ground current (Ig) CT Bank 1 – J1 Phasor, RMS

USED ONLY IN 845/889

From Cold Load Pickup

From Autoreclose
(per shot settings)

From Manual Close Blocking

USED ONLY IN 845

894121C1

GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (50G)

above the pickup value. The Ground IOC Operate flag is asserted if the element stays picked-up for the time
defined by the Ground IOC PICKUP DELAY setting. If the The Pickup time delay is set to 0.000 seconds. The
The settings of the Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent protection element are applied to the measured Ground
current for producing Pickup and Trip flags. The Ground IOC Pickup flag is asserted when the Ground current is

429
Chapter 8 - Protection
Chapter 8 - Protection

Pickup and Operate flags will be asserted at the same time. The element drops from Pickup without operation if the
Ground current drops below 97 to 98% of the Pickup value.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Current > Ground IOC 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: dependent upon the order code
Default: CT Bank 1-J1
This setting provides the selection for the current input bank. The default bank names can be changed in
Setpoints > System > Current Sensing > [Name] > CT Bank Name.

PICKUP
Range (up to FW 3.xx): 0.050 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Range (from FW 4.10): 0.010 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default (up to FW 3.xx): 1.00 x CT
Default (from FW 4.10): 0.200 x CT

DIRECTION
Range: Disabled, Forward, Reverse
Default: Disabled

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000 s

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000 s

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

430 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Self-reset
LED: TRIP

AND
SETPOINT
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FUNCTION:

OR
Any Trip
Disabled
S

AND
Trip
LATCH
Latched Trip
R
OR

Alarm
LED: ALARM

AND
Latched Alarm
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Configurable

OR
Any Alarm

AND
S
Direction (from Ground Directional LATCH SETPOINT
OC element) SETPOINTS
Command R Output Relay X
PICKUP: SETPOINTS RESET Do Not Operate, Operate

PICKUP DELAY:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETPOINTS DIRECTION:

OR
Ground IOC1 OP
BLOCK:
AND

RUN DROPOUT DELAY:

Off = 0

Ig > PICKUP tPKP

tDPO
From Cold Load Pickup
OR

From Autoreclose
(per shot settings)
LED: PICKUP
From Manual Close Blocking
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
USED ONLY IN 850 Ground IOC1 PKP
SETPOINTS

From Ground CT SIGNAL INPUT:

Ground current (Ig) CT Bank 1 - J1

894119C1.vsdx
USED ONLY IN 845

Figure 159: Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection logic diagram

8.2.3.10 SENSITIVE GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (51SG)

The settings of the Sensitive Ground Time Overcurrent protection element are applied to the Sensitive Ground input
current to produce Trip or Pickup flags. The Sensitive Ground TOC Pickup flag is asserted when the Sensitive
Ground current is above the PKP value. The Sensitive Ground TOC Trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked
up for the time defined by the selected inverse curve and the magnitude of the current. The element drops from
Pickup without operation if the measured current drops below 97-98% of the Pickup value before the time for
operation is reached. When Definite Time is selected, the time for Sensitive Ground TOC operation is defined only
by the TDM setting.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Current > Sensitive Ground TOC 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Latched Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Default: Disabled

INPUT
Range: Phasor, RMS
Default: Phasor

1601-0450 431
Chapter 8 - Protection

This selection defines the method of processing of the current signal. It can be Root Mean Square (RMS) or
Fundamental Phasor Magnitude.

PICKUP
Range: 0.002 to 3.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 1.000 x CT
The 50:0.025 Ground input (K1-Ig) range is as follows:
Range: 0.50 to 15.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Default: 10.00 A
This setting sets the sensitive ground overcurrent pickup level specified as a multiplier of the nominal CT current.
For example, a PKP setting of 0.9 x CT with 300:5 CT translates into 270A primary current.
In the case of 50:0.025 Ground input (K1-Ig as current input), the pickup level is specified as Ampere in primary.
For example, with a PKP setting of 10.00 A, when ground current (primary) is 10.00A, the K1-Ig will measure
10.000 A, and this function should pick up.

CURVE
Range: Definite Time, IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, IEC Curve C, IEC Short Inverse, Long Time Inverse,
Rectifier,SI(1.3s), BPN EDF, IEEE Mod Inverse, IEEE Very Inverse, IEEE Extr. Inverse, US Inverse, US ST
Inverse, ANSI Extr. Inverse, ANSI Very Inverse, ANSI Norm Inverse, ANSI Mod Inverse, IAC Extr. Inverse, IAC
Very Inverse, IAC Inverse, IAC Short Inverse, I2t, I4t, Rapid Inverse, IDG, EPATR B, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B,
FlexCurve C, FlexCurve D.
Default: IEEE Mod Inverse
This setting sets the shape of the selected over-current inverse curve. If none of the standard curve shapes is
appropriate, a FlexCurve can be created. Refer to the User curve and the FlexCurve setup for more details on
their configurations and usage.

TDM
Range: 0.01 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00
This setting provides the selection for the Time Dial Multiplier by which the times from the inverse curve are
modified. For example if an ANSI Extremely Inverse curve is selected with TDM = 2, and the fault current is 5
times bigger than the PKP level, the operation of the element will occur but not before 2.59s of time has elapsed
from pickup.

TMS
Range: 0.025 to 1.200 in steps of 0.005
Default: 1.00
This is the Time Multiplier Setting to adjust the operate time of IEC Short Inverse, Long Time Inverse, Rectifier,
Standard Inverse SI(1.3s), BPN EDF and EPATR B curves.

K (RI)
Range: 0.10 to 10.00 in steps of 0.05
Default: 1.00

432 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

This setting defines the Time multiplier constant to adjust the operate time of the Rapid Inverse (RI) curve.
This k(RI) setting can be made visible from setting management, only when the Curve setting is selected as
Rapid Inverse.

IDG Is
Range: 1.0 to 4.0 in steps of 0.1
Default: 1.5
This setting is set as a multiple of the Ground Fault overcurrent setting IDG Is for the IDG curve.
It determines the actual current threshold at which the element starts.

IDG TIME
Range: 1.00 to 2.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.20
This setting sets the minimum operate time at high levels of fault current for IDG curves.
IDG Is and IDG Time settings can be made visible from setting management, only when the Curve setting is
selected as IDG.

TIME DELAY
Range: 0.000 s to 200.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 1.000
This setting defines the time delay for operation. This Time Delay setting can be made visible from setting
management, only when the Curve setting is selected as DT.

DT ADDER
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.00
This setting adds an additional fixed time delay to the IDMT Operate characteristic.The DT Adder setting will be
visible for when any IDMT curves are selected under the Curve setting.

RESET
Range: DT, Inverse
Default: DT
Selection of a Definite Time (DT) or Inverse reset time is provided using this setting.
If Definite Time (DT) reset is selected, the Phase TOC element will reset after a time delay provided by the
Reset Time setting. If Inverse reset is selected, the time to reset is calculated based on the reset equation for
the selected inverse curve.
Note: When using IEC Short Inverse, Long Time Inverse, BPN EDF, Rectifier, Rapid Inverse curves for the
Operate characteristic, Definite Time is used by default as Reset characteristic.

RESET TIME
Range: 0.000 to 100.000 in steps of 0.001

1601-0450 433
Chapter 8 - Protection

Default: 0.000
This setting provides selection for dropout time delay used to delay the dropout of the detection of the
overcurrent condition.
This can be made visible from setting management when the Reset setting is selected as DT or when using
Long Time Inverse, IEC Short Inverse, BPN EDF, Rectifier, IDG, EPATR B and Rapid Inverse curves.

DIRECTION
Range: Disabled, Forward, Reverse
Default: Disabled
This setting defines the operation direction of the Sensitive Ground TOC element. Entering the direction for the
Sensitive Ground TOC element does not automatically apply the selection. The direction detection is performed
by the element Sensitive Ground Directional OC, which must be enabled and configured according to the
directionality criteria of the feeder currents.

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The Sensitive Ground TOC is blocked, when the selected operand is asserted.

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
This also sets the events of Sensitive Ground TOC function.

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Self-reset
The selection of Self-reset or Latched settings enables the targets of the Sensitive Ground TOC function.

434 1601-0450
 8.2.3.11

1601-0450
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
LED: TRIP
8S: To operate Output

AND
Relay 1(TRIP)
OR

AND
SETPOINT LATCH

FUNCTION: R
LED: ALARM
Disabled

AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Trip
SETPOINTS
OR

Any Alarm
Latched Trip
PICKUP: S
Alarm

OR
AND

Latched Alarm LATCH SETPOINT

CURVE:
Configurable Command R Output Relay X
Time Dail/TMS/Time Delay RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Direction (from Sens Ground Directional Reset Char
SGnd TOC 1 OP
OR

OC element)
RESET:
Bridge – P14D only

SETPOINTS DIRECTION:

BLOCK: RUN Isg > PICKUP

AND
Off = 0

SETPOINTS
INPUT: Adjust PKP
From Sensitive Ground CT
LED: PICKUP
Sens Ground current (Isg)
Phasor, RMS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Ig (From 50:0.025 CBCT) SGnd TOC 1 PKP
Input for 859

Figure 160: Sensitive Ground Time Overcurrent Protection logic diagram

From Cold Load Pickup

From Autoreclose
(per shot settings)

From Manual Close Blocking

Not for 869 & 859 894039C1

SENSITIVE GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (50SG)

Sensitive Ground current for producing Pickup and Trip flags. The Sensitive Ground IOC Pickup flag is asserted
The settings of the Sensitive Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent protection element are applied to the measured

when the Sensitive Ground current is above the Pickup value. The Sensitive Ground IOC Operate flag is asserted if

435
Chapter 8 - Protection

the element stays picked-up for the time defined by the Sensitive Ground IOC PICKUP DELAY setting. If the Pickup
Chapter 8 - Protection

time delay is set to 0.00 seconds, the Pickup and Operate flags are asserted at the same time. The element drops
from Pickup without operation if the Sensitive Ground current drops below 97 to 98% of the Pickup value.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Current > Sensitive Ground IOC 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled

PICKUP
Range: 0.002 to 3.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 1.000 x CT
This setting sets the instantaneous Sensitive Ground overcurrent pickup level specified as a multiplier of the
nominal CT current for sensitive CT input. For example, a PKP setting of 0.9 x CT with 300:5 CT translates into
270A primary current.

DIRECTION
Range: Disabled, Forward, Reverse
Default: Disabled
This setting defines the operation direction of the Sensitive Ground time overcurrent element. Entering the
direction for the Sensitive Ground IOC element, does not automatically apply the selection. The direction
detection is performed by the element Sensitive Ground Directional OC, which must be enabled and configured
according to the directionality criteria of the feeder currents.

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000 s
This setting provides the selection for the pickup time delay used to delay the operation of the protection.

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000 s
This setting provides the selection for the dropout time delay used to delay the dropout of the detection of the
overcurrent condition.

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The Sensitive Ground IOC is blocked, when the selected operand is asserted.

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate

436 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Self-reset

1601-0450 437
Chapter 8 - Protection

8S: To operate Output

Do Not Operate, Operate

 R

 R

S D NA P O CI G OLE LF
 R
Relay 1(TRIP)

SGnd IOC 1 OP
Any Alarm
Any Trip

Output Relay X
  

SGnd IOC 1 PKP

  
  



LED: PICKUP
LED: ALARM
LED: TRIP
OR

OR OR

LATCH
LATCH

R
S
R
S
AND AND AND AND

Command
RESET

tRST
ST NI OPT S

DROPOUT DELAY:
PICKUP DELAY:

tPKP
Isg > PICKUP
ST NI OPT S
PICKUP:

RUN

AND

OR
TC nuo
G vitisnS o
F
Sensitive Ground current (Isg)
ST NI OPT S


Latched Alarm


Configurable
Latched Trip

FUNCTION:
Disabled

Alarm

BLOCK:
Off = 0
Trip

Figure 161: Sensitive Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection logic diagram

8.2.3.12 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (50_2)

The Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent element may be used to determine and clear unbalance in the
system. The input for computing negative sequence current is the fundamental phasor value. The relay computes
the negative sequence current magnitude |I2| using the following formula:
|I2|=1/3*|Ia+Ib*(1∠240º)+Ic*(1∠120 º)|

438 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

The element responds to the negative-sequence current and applies a positive sequence restraint for better
performance: a small portion (12.5%) of the positive sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the negative
sequence current magnitude when forming the operating quantity:
Iop = |I2| - K * |I_1|
where K = 1/8 and |I_1| = 1/3*|Ia+Ib*(1∠120º)+Ic*(1∠240 º)|
The positive sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious negative-sequence
currents resulting from:
● system unbalances under heavy load conditions
● current transformer (CT) transformation errors during three-phase faults
● fault inception and switch-off transients during three-phase faults.
The positive sequence restraint must be considered when testing for Pickup accuracy and response time (multiple
of Pickup). The operating quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase
injection: Iop = 0.2917 * I_injected; three-phase injection, opposite rotation: Iop = I_injected).
The settings of this function are applied to the calculated negative sequence current to produce Pickup and Trip
flags. The Negative Sequence IOC Pickup flag is asserted, when the negative sequence current is above the pickup
value. The Negative Sequence IOC Operate flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by
the Negative Sequence IOC PICKUP DELAY setting. If the Pickup time delay is set to 0.000 seconds, the Pickup
and Operate flags are asserted at the same time. The element drops from Pickup without operation if the negative
sequence current drops below 97 to 98% of the Pickup value.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Current > Negative Sequence IOC 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: dependent upon the order code
Default: CT Bank 1-J1
This setting provides the selection for the current input bank. The default bank names can be changed in:
Setpoints > System > Current Sensing > [Name] > CT Bank Name.

PICKUP
Range: 0.020 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 1.000 x CT

DIRECTION
Range: Non-Directional, NegSeq Dir [1-4] FWD, NegSeq Dir [1-4]
Default: Non-Directional

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s

1601-0450 439
Chapter 8 - Protection

Default: 0.000 s

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000 s

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Self-reset

440 1601-0450
 8.2.4

1601-0450
● Phase reversal
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
SETPOINT
LED: TRIP 8S: To operate Output Relay
FUNCTION:

AND
1(TRIP)

● Phase undervoltage (Phase UV)

Disabled Configurable in 845 & 859
OR

● Undervoltage curves (UV Curves)

Trip
Latched Trip S
AND

Alarm
LATCH

OR
Latched Alarm
R
LED: ALARM
Configurable
AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR

Any Alarm
Direction (from Neg Seq
Directional OC element) SETPOINTS
S
AND

PICKUP: SETPOINTS LATCH SETPOINT

PICKUP DELAY: Command R Output Relay X

VOLTAGE ELEMENTS OVERVIEW

DIRECTION:
RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
SETPOINTS
RUN DROPOUT DELAY: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

AND
BLOCK:
Neg Seq IOC 1 OP
OR

Off = 0 (|I_2| – K * |I_1|)> PICKUP tPKP

tDPO
From Cold Load Pickup

OR
From Autoreclose
(per shot settings)

LED: PICKUP
From Manual Close Blocking
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
USED ONLY IN 850
Neg Seq IOC 1 PKP
SETPOINTS
Negative Sequence IOC source
SIGNAL INPUT:

Figure 162: Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent logic diagram

I_2 and I_1 CT Bank 1 - J1 Phasor

USED ONLY IN 845/889

The 869 motor protection relay provides the following voltage protection elements:
894042C1

441
Chapter 8 - Protection
Chapter 8 - Protection

● Phase overvoltage (Phase OV)

● Auxiliary undervoltage (Auxiliary UV)
● Auxiliary overvoltage (Auxiliary OV)
● Neutral overvoltage (Neutral OV)
● Negative sequence overvoltage (Neg Seq OV)
● Volts per Herz

8.2.4.1 UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES

The undervoltage elements can be programmed to have an inverse time delay characteristic. The undervoltage
delay setpoint defines a family of curves as shown below.
The operating time is given by:
T = D/(1 - V/Vpkp)
Where:
● T = Operating Time
● D = Undervoltage PICKUP TIME DELAY setpoint (for D = 0.00 operates instantaneously)
● V = Voltage as a fraction of the nominal VT Secondary Voltage
● Vpkp = Undervoltage Pickup Level
The element resets instantaneously if the applied voltage exceeds the dropout voltage. The delay setting selects
the minimum operating time of the phase undervoltage.

Note:
At 0% of Pickup, the operating time equals the Undervoltage PICKUP TIME DELAY setpoint.

Figure 163: Inverse Time Undervoltage Curves

If FlexCurves are selected, the operating time determined based on following equation:
T = FlexCurve (Vpkp / V)

442 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Note:
FlexCurve reverses the ratio of voltages. The ratio of set pickup value to the measured voltage.

Example: For a Pickup set to 0.9 x VT, when the measured voltage is 0.82 x VT, the ratio would be 0.9/0.8 = 1.1,
therefore in the FlexCurve, the corresponding Trip time setting entry is at 1.1 x PKP (not at 0.82 x PKP). On the
other hand, when the measured voltage is 1 x VT, the ratio is 0.9/1 = 0.9, therefore, in the FlexCurve, the
corresponding Reset time entry is at 0.9 x PKP.

8.2.4.2 PHASE REVERSAL (47)

The relay can detect the phase rotation of the three phase voltages. When all three Phase-to-Phase Voltages (Vab,
Vbc and Vca) are greater than 50% of VT, if the phase rotation of the three phase voltages is not the same as the
Phase Rotation or Reverse Phase Rotation (under Setpoints > System > Power System), and there is no fuse
failure, either an alarm or a trip will occur within the programmed PICKUP DELAY time.
Upon detection of the phase reversal, this element will also issue a Phase Rev Inhibit operand to inhibit starting of a
motor.
This element will be blocked automatically by the relay for three cycles when voltage phase rotation dynamically
switches from forward to reverse or reverse to forward. Dynamic switching of the phase rotation (ABC<->ACB) can
be achieved using the feature Reverse Phase Rotation - VT Bnks. More details can be found in section Setpoints >
System > Power System.

Note:
VT is the secondary voltage programmed under Setpoints > System > Voltage Sensing > Phase VT Secondary.

Note:
In 2 Speed motor application, when 2-Speed Motor Protection is Enabled and Speed2 Motor Switch is On, the setpoint
Speed2 Phase Rotation (under Setpoints > System > Motor System > Setup) is used by the Phase Reversal element.

Path:Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Voltage > Phase Reversal

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Phase Reversal functionality.

ENABLE CURRENT MODE

Range: No, Yes
Default: No
When this setpoint is set to No, phase reversal detection algorithm uses three phase voltages only when
voltages are greater than 50% of VT. When programed as “Yes”, currents are used to detect phase reversal
when voltages are less than 50% of VT or voltages are not available. Current based method is only activated
after the measured currents are above 5% of the motor FLA.

1601-0450 443
Chapter 8 - Protection

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies the pickup delay of the element.

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting defines the reset delay of the element.

BLOCK
Range: Any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off
The Phase Reversal can be blocked by any asserted FlexLogic operand.

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Self-Reset

444 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

SETPOINT
FUNCTION: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Disabled=0 Any Trip
Trip LED: TRIP

AND
869: To operate Output
Latched Trip SETPOINT
Relay 1(TRIP)

OR
Alarm PHASE ROTATION:

OR
AND
Latched Alarm Rev Ph Rotation-VT Bnk: 859: To operate the
Configurable RUN S selected Breaker/

AND
Contactor Trip Relay
LATCH

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND Phase Reversal R

VT Fuse Fail 1 OP LED: ALARM

AND
From Setpoints > System > FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR
SETPOINT Power System SETPOINTS Any Alarm
PICKUP DELAY:
BLOCK:

AND
DROPOUT DELAY: S
Off=0 tPKP

OR
tRST LATCH
SETPOINT SETPOINT
PHASE ROTATION: Command R Output Relay X
ACTUAL VALUES
Rev Ph Rotation-CT Bnk: RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
Vab > 50% x VT
AND

Vbc > 50% x VT RUN

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Vca > 50% x VT

OR
Phase Reversal OP
ACTUAL VALUES Phase Reversal
AND

IA > 5% x FLA
AND

IB > 5% x FLA FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

From Setpoints > System >
IC > 5% x FLA Phase Reversal PKP
Power System
Phase Rev Inhibit
SETPOINT
Enable Current Mode:
Yes = 1

VA VAB
VB VBC
VC VCA

IA
IB
IC



Figure 164: Phase Reversal logic diagram

8.2.4.3 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION (27P)

The Phase Undervoltage element may be used to protect voltage sensitive loads and system components against
sustained undervoltage conditions. This element may be used for permissive functions, initiation of the source
transfer schemes, and similar functions.
The Phase Undervoltage element may be set as an instantaneous element with no time delay or as a time delayed
element which can be configured with definite time, inverse time or FlexCurves. The Phase Undervoltage element
has programmable minimum operating threshold to prevent some undesired operation when voltage is not
available. The input voltages are the three phase to phase voltages from delta connected VTs (PTs) or three phase
to ground voltages from wye connected VTs (PTs).
The settings of this function are applied to each of the three voltage inputs to produce Pickup and Trip flags per
voltage input. The UV Pickup flag is asserted, when the measured voltage on any of the three voltage inputs is
below the PKP value. The UV Trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by Pickup time
delay or for the time defined by the selected inverse curve / FlexCurve, and number of voltages required for
operation matches the number of voltages selected in the setting. The element drops from Pickup without operation
if the measured voltage rise above 102 to 103% of the Pickup value, before the time for operation is reached.
The MINIMUM VOLTAGE setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is blocked (a setting of 0
allows a dead source to be considered a fault condition).
This element may be used to give a desired time delay operating characteristic versus the applied voltage (phase to
ground or phase to phase for wye VT connection, or phase to phase for delta VT connection) or as a definite time
element. For the inverse time setpoint, the undervoltage delay setpoint defines a family of curves.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Voltage Elements > Phase UV 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option

1601-0450 445
Chapter 8 - Protection

Default: Disabled

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: dependent upon the order code
Default: Ph VT Bnk1-J2 or LEA Bnk1-J2 (order code dependent)
This setting provides the selection for the voltage signal input.

MODE
Range: Phase to Ground, Phase to Phase
Default: Phase to Ground
Note: F/W rev 4 default is Phase to Phase
This setting provides the selection of phase to ground and phase to phase voltages for a Wye VT connection
(phase to phase for delta connected VT connection).

Note:
Only Phase-to-Phase mode should be used when Delta/Single’ VT Connection Type and Pseudo Reference Phase-to-Phase
is programmed for the Phase VT Connection setting under System/Voltage Sensing.

PICKUP
Range: 0.00 to 1.50 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Default: 1.00 x VT
This setting sets the Phase Undervoltage Pickup level specified per times VT.
For example, a Pickup setting of 0.80 x VT with a 13800:115 VT translates into 11.04kV (or 92V secondary). If
the mode selection is phase to phase and the Setpoints/System Setup/Voltage Sensing/Phase VT Connection
selection is Wye, the previous example translates to the phase to phase voltage value of 11.04kV x 1.732 =
19.12kV.

MINIMUM VOLTAGE
Range: 0.00 to 1.50 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Default: 0.20 x VT
This setting sets the minimum operating voltage for the undervoltage Pickup level specified per times VT.
For example, a PKP setting of 0.20 x VT with 13800:115 VT translates into 2.76kV (or 23V secondary).
If the Mode setting selection is Phase to Phase and the Setpoints/System Setup/Voltage Sensing/Phase VT
Connection selection is Wye, the previous example translates to a
Phase to Phase voltage value of 2.76kV x 1.732 = 4.78kV.

PHASES FOR OPERATION

Range: Any One, Any Two, All Three
Default: Any One
This setting defines the number of voltages required for operation of the Phase UV protection function.

446 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES
Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time, FlexCurves A/B/C/D
Default: Definite Time
This setting provides the selection of definite time delay or time delay inverse undervoltage curves, or
FlexCurves. In the case of FlexCurves, the voltage ratio used is reversed. Refer to the equation and note
regarding FlexCurves in the previous section .

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.020 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 1.000 s
This setting provides definite time pickup delay. This setting can be made visible from setting management, only
when ‘Curve’ setting is selected as DT (Definite Time).

RESET TIME
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000 s
This setting provides selection for dropout time delay used to delay the dropout of the detection of the
undervoltage condition.

RESET MODE
Range: Definite Time, Dependent Time
Default: Definite Time
This setting is based on IEC 60255-151 reset characteristics.
If Definite Time is selected, the percentage of elapsed time for the operate timer is memorized for the set reset
time. If the pickup condition returns before the reset timer has timed out, the operate time initializes from the
memorized value. Otherwise, the memorized value is reset to zero after the reset time times out.

 
  

 



 








Figure 165: Reset Mode Definite Time

If Dependent Time is selected, the operate timer start decrementing when the pickup condition resets. If the pickup
condition returns before the reset timer has timed out, the operate timer again start incrementing. Otherwise, the
relay returns to its reset state after the set reset time.

1601-0450 447
Chapter 8 - Protection


 
  

 


 








Figure 166: Reset Mode Dependent Time

Note:
This setting is hidden when Undervoltage Curve is configured to Definite Time. When Curve is programmed as Definite Time,
the Reset Mode is always Definite Time.

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset

448 1601-0450
 8.2.4.4

1601-0450
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
SETPOINT
LED: TRIP
FUNCTION: 8S: To operate Output Relay

AND
1(TRIP)
Disabled Configurable in 845 & 859
Trip OR
Latched Trip S

AND
LATCH
Alarm

OR
R
Latched Alarm
LED: ALARM
Configurable

AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR

Any Alarm
SETPOINTS
S
BLOCK : AND
LATCH SETPOINT
Off = 0

AND
Command R Output Relay X
RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
859
SETPOINT FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Phase UV1 OP
OR

Bypass Stopped Block SETPOINTS

Yes PICKUP or Starting Pickup*

OR
No
PICK-UP DELAY

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TMS

AND
Motor Stopped
UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES

AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE (27X)

889 RESET TIME SETPOINTS

SETPOINTS RESET MODE PHASES FOR OPERATION:

SETPOINTS
RUN VA(VAB) < PICKUP

AND
SIGNAL INPUT: MINIMUM VOLTAGE:

Figure 167: Phase Undervoltage Protection logic diagram

ANY ONE

initiation of the source transfer schemes and similar functions.

NAME( Ph VT Bnk1-J2
OPERATE: ANY TWO
OR

VA(VAB) MINIMUM FlexLogic Operands

RUN VB(VBC) < PICKUP

AND
ALL THREE }
VB(VBC) MINIMUM Phase UV1 OP A:
ANY ONE
SETPOINTS VC(VCA) MINIMUM RUN VC(VCA) < PICKUP ANY TWO { Phase UV1 OP B:

AND
PICK-UP:
OR

Phase-to-Ground Voltages –
Wye connection MODE: ALL THREE } Phase UV1 OP C:

Phase A voltage (VA)

Phase B voltage (VB) * Starting Pickup is
applicable to 859 only
Phase C voltage (VC)
Phase-to-Phase Voltages –
LED: PICKUP
Delta connection
Ph-Ph AB voltage (VAB)
Ph-Ph BC voltage (VBC)
MODE: Phase to Ground, Phase
Ph-Ph CA voltage (VCA) to Phase (for wye connection) Phase UV1 PKP:
Phase to Phase (Delta VTs)
Calculated Phase-to-Phase Phase UV1 PKP A:
Voltages – Wye connection
Ph-Ph AB voltage (VAB) Phase UV1 PKP B:
{
Ph-Ph BC voltage (VBC)
Ph-Ph CA voltage (VCA) Phase UV1 PKP C:

859
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Motor Starting



The relay provides two identical Auxiliary Undervoltage (UV) elements per protection group, or a total of 12
elements. Each Auxiliary Undervoltage element may be used to protect voltage sensitive loads and system
components against sustained undervoltage conditions. This element may be used for permissive functions,

449
Chapter 8 - Protection
Chapter 8 - Protection

The Auxiliary Undervoltage element may be set as an instantaneous element with no time delay or as a time
delayed element which can be programmed with definite time, inverse time or FlexCurves. The Auxiliary
Undervoltage element has a programmable minimum operating threshold to prevent undesired operation when
voltage is not available. The input voltage is the auxiliary voltage.
The settings of this function are applied to auxiliary voltage input to produce Pickup and Trip flags. The Auxiliary UV
Pickup flag is asserted when the auxiliary input voltage is below the PKP value. The Auxiliary UV Trip flag is
asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by Pickup time delay or for the time defined by the
selected inverse curve/FlexCurve. The element drops from Pickup without operation if the measured voltage rises
above 102 to 103% of the Pickup value before the time for operation is reached.
The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is blocked (a setting of 0 will
allow a dead source to be considered a fault condition).
This element may be used to give a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied voltage, or as a
definite time element. For the inverse time setpoint, the undervoltage delay setpoint defines a family of curves.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Voltage Elements > Auxiliary UV 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: dependent upon the order code
Default: Ax VT Bnk1-J2
This setting provides the selection for the voltage signal input.

PICKUP
Range: 0.00 to 1.50 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Default: 1.00 x VT
This setting sets the Auxiliary Undervoltage Pickup level specified per times VT. For example, a Pickup setting of
0.80 x VT with a 13800:115 VT translates into 11.04kV (or 92V secondary).

MINIMUM VOLTAGE
Range: 0.00 to 1.50 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Default: 0.20 x VT
This setting sets the minimum operating voltage for the undervoltage Pickup level specified per times VT.

UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES
Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time, FlexCurves A/B/C/D
Default: Definite Time
This setting provides the selection of definite time delay or time delay inverse undervoltage curves. In the case of
FlexCurves, the voltage ratio is reversed.

450 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 1.000 s
If Inverse Time is selected as an Undervoltage Curve setpoint, the Pickup Delay value is loaded to variable D in
the curve formula.

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset
LED: TRIP

AND
Operate Output Relay 1 (TRIP)

OR
S
AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
LATCH Any Trip
SETPOINT R
FUNCTION: Set Dominant LED: ALARM
AND

Disabled FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR
Trip Any Alarm
Latched Trip
AND

S
OR

Alarm LATCH SETPOINT

Latched Alarm R Output Relay X
SETPOINTS Command
Configurable RESET Set Dominant Do Not Operate, Operate
PICKUP:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR

SETPOINTS Aux UV 1(2) OP:

PICKUP DELAY:
AND

BLOCK :
UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES:
Off = 0
AND

SETPOINTS RUN Vx > PICKUP LED: PICKUP

MINIMUM VOLTAGE:
SETPOINTS Aux UV 1(2) PKP:
Vx > MINIMUM
SIGNAL INPUT:

NAME( Ax VT Bnk1-J2

889
Auxiliary voltage (Vaux)


Figure 168: Auxiliary Undervoltage Protection logic diagram

8.2.4.5 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION (59P)

The relay provides two identical Phase Overvoltage (OV) elements per protection group, or a total of 12 elements.
Each Phase Overvoltage element may be used to protect voltage sensitive loads and system components against
sustained overvoltage conditions. The Phase Overvoltage element may be set as an instantaneous element with no
time delay or may be set as a definite time element. The input voltages are the three phase to phase voltages from
delta connected VTs or three phase to ground voltages from wye connected VTs.

1601-0450 451
Chapter 8 - Protection

The settings of this function are applied to each of the three voltage inputs to produce Pickup and Trip flags per
voltage input. The OV Pickup flag is asserted when the voltage on any voltage input is above the PKP value. The
OV Trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by the Pickup time delay and that
number of voltages required for operation is equal to the number defined by voltages required for the operation
setting. The element drops from pickup without operation, if the measured voltage drops below the configured
dropout level of the pickup value, before the time for operation is reached. The dropout level can be configured at
Setpoints > Device > Installation > OV/UV DPO Range.
Phase Overvoltage elements may be used to protect voltage sensitive loads and system components against
sustained overvoltage conditions. The Phase Overvoltage element may be set as an instantaneous element with no
time delay or may be set as a definite time element, Inverse Time, or with FlexCurve. The input voltages are the
three phase to phase voltages from delta connected VTs, or the three phase to ground voltages from wye
connected VTs.
This element may be used to give a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied voltage or as a
definite time element. For the inverse time setpoint, the overvoltage pickup delay setpoint defines a family of curves
as shown below.
The operating time is given by:

T = D / [(V/Vpickup)-1] when V > Vpickup

452 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

where:
● T = trip time in seconds
● D = Overvoltage Pickup Delay setpoint
● V = actual phase-phase voltage
● Vpickup = Overvoltage Pickup setpoint

Figure 169: Overvoltage curves

Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Voltage > Phase OV 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled

1601-0450 453
Chapter 8 - Protection

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: dependent upon the order code
Default: Ph VT Bnk1-J2 or LEA Bnk1-J2, dependent on order code
This setting provides the selection for the voltage signal input.

MODE
Range: Phase to Ground, Phase to Phase
Default: Phase to Ground
Note: F/W rev 4 default is Phase to Phase
This setting provides the selection of phase to ground and phase to phase voltages for a Wye VT connection
(phase to phase for delta connected VT connection).

Note:
Only Phase to Phase mode should be selected when Delta/Single VT Connection Type and Pseudo Reference Phase-to-
Phase is programmed for the Phase VT Connection setting under Setpoints > System > Voltage Sensing.

PICKUP
Range: 0.02 to 3.00 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Default: 1.50 x VT
The setting sets the phase overvoltage pickup level to specified per times VT.
For example, a Pickup setting of 1.10 x VT with 13800:115 VT translates into 15.18kV. If the mode selection is
phase to phase and Setpoints > System Setup > Voltage Sensing > Phase VT Connection selection is Wye,
the previous example translates to the phase to phase voltage value of 15.18kV x 1.732 = 26.29kV.

PHASES FOR OPERATION

Range: Any One, Any Two, All Three
Default: Any One
The setting defines the number of voltages required for operation of the Phase OV protection function.

CURVE
Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B, FlexCurve C, FlexCurve D
Default: Definite Time
This setting provides selection of curves for overvoltage as definite time, inverse time overvoltage curves or
FlexCuves.

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 1.000 s
This setting provides definite time pickup delay.

454 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Note:
This Time Delay setting is visible from setting management, only when ‘Curve’ setting is selected as DT (Definite Time).

TMS
Range: 0.5 to 100.0 in steps of: 0.5
Default: 1.0
If the Inverse Time is selected as an Curve setpoint, the TMS value is loaded to variable “D” in the curve formula

Note: This TMS setting is visible from setting management, only when ‘Curve’ setting is selected as IDMT
or Inverse Time.

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 1.000 s

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset

1601-0450 455
Chapter 8 - Protection

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
SETPOINT
LED: TRIP
8S: To operate Output Relay

AND
FUNCTION:
1(TRIP)
Disabled Configurable in 845 & 859

OR
Trip
S

AND
Latched Trip
LATCH

OR
Alarm
R
Latched Alarm
LED: ALARM

AND
Configurable
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR
Any Alarm

AND
S
LATCH SETPOINT
SETPOINTS Command R Output Relay X
RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
SETPOINTS PICKUP: SETPOINTS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR
AND

BLOCK : PICKUP DELAY: Phase OV 1 OP

Off = 0 CURVE:
DROPOUT DELAY: SETPOINTS
RUN VA(VAB) > PICKUP
t PKP
889 only
t RST PHASES FOR OPERATION:
SETPOINTS RUN
t PKP
SIGNAL INPUT: VB(VBC) > PICKUP t RST ANY PHASE
RUN

OR
t PKP OPERATE: ANY TWO
NAME( Ph VT Bnk1-J2 THREE FlexLogic Operands
VC(VCA) > PICKUP t RST }
PHASE
Phase OV 1 OP A:
ANY PHASE
SETPOINTS ANY TWO { Phase OV 1 OP B:

OR
PICKUP:
THREE
Phase-to-Ground Voltages – PHASE }
Wye connection MODE: Phase OV 1 OP C:
Phase A voltage (VA)
Phase B voltage (VB)
Phase C voltage (VC)
Phase-to-Phase Voltages –
Delta connection
Ph-Ph AB voltage (VAB) LED: PICKUP
Ph-Ph BC voltage (VBC) MODE: Phase to Ground, Phase
to Phase (for wye connection)
Ph-Ph CA voltage (VCA) Phase to Phase (Delta
Calculated Phase-to-Phase connection) Phase OV 1 PKP:
Voltages – Wye connection
Ph-Ph AB voltage (VAB) Phase OV 1 OP A:
Ph-Ph BC voltage (VBC)
Ph-Ph CA voltage (VCA) { Phase OV 1 OP B:


 Phase OV 1 OP C:

Figure 170: Phase Overvoltage logic diagram

8.2.4.6 AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION (59X)

The relay provides one Auxiliary Overvoltage (OV) element per protection group, or a total of 6 elements. Each
Auxiliary OV element is used to protect voltage sensitive loads and system components against sustained
overvoltage conditions. This element can be used for monitoring zero-sequence voltage (from an "open corner
delta" VT connection), permissive functions, the source transfer schemes, restoration and similar functions.
The Auxiliary OV element may be set as an instantaneous element with no time delay or may be set as a definite
time element, Inverse Time, or with FlexCurves. The input voltage is the auxiliary voltage.
The settings of the Auxiliary OV Protection function are applied to the auxiliary voltage input to produce pickup and
trip flags. The Auxiliary OV pickup flag is asserted, when the voltage on auxiliary input is above the PKP value. The
Auxiliary OV trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by pickup time delay, Inverse
Time, or FlexCurves. The element drops from pickup without operation, if the measured voltage drops below
97-98% of the pickup value, before the time for operation is reached.
This element may be used to give a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied voltage or as a
definite time element. For the inverse time setpoint, the overvoltage pickup delay setpoint defines a family of curves
as shown below.
The operating time is given by:
T= D / [(V/Vpickup) - 1] when V > Vpickup
Where:
● T = trip time in seconds
● D = Overvoltage Pickup Delay setpoint

456 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

● V = actual phase-phase voltage

● Vpickup= Overvoltage Pickup setpoint
● The element reset rate is a linear reset time from the threshold of trip.

Figure 171: Overvoltage Curves

Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Voltage > Auxiliary OV

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: Ax VT Bnk1-J2
Default: Ax VT Bnk1-J2
This setting provides the selection for the signal input.

PICKUP
Range: 0.00 to 3.00 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Default: 1.50 x VT
This setting sets the auxiliary overvoltage pickup level specified per times VT.
For example, a Pickup setting of 1.10 x VT with 13800:115 VT translates into 15.08kV (or 126.5V secondary).

CURVE
Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time, FlexCurves A/B/C/D

1601-0450 457
Chapter 8 - Protection

Default: Definite Time

This setting provides the selection of curves for the overvoltage as definite time, inverse time overvoltage curves
or FlexCurves.

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.000 - 6000.000s in steps of 0.001s
Default: 1.000s

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 1.000 s
This setting provides definite time dropout delay of the operate signal if the Curve setting is selected as Definite
Time. An instantaneous reset is provided by dropout time delay setting of 0.000 s.If the selected Curve setting is
Inverse Time, the dropout delay value is used to linearly reset the element. If the Curve is selected as a
FlexCurve, the reset setpoints of the FlexCurve are used to reset the element.

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset

458 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

LED: TRIP

AND
Operate Output Relay 1 (TRIP)

OR
S

AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
LATCH Any Trip
SETPOINT
R
FUNCTION: Set Dominant LED: ALARM

AND
Disabled FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR
Trip Any Alarm
Latched Trip

AND
S
OR

Alarm
LATCH SETPOINT
Latched Alarm
Command R Output Relay X
Configurable RESET Set Dominant Do Not Operate, Operate
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETPOINTS SETPOINTS

OR
Aux OV OP
AND

BLOCK : PICKUP:
Off = 0 LED: PICKUP
Overvoltage Curves:

RUN
Vx > PICKUP

889 Aux OV PKP

SETPOINTS
SIGNAL INPUT:
PICK-UP DELAY:
NAME( Ax VT Bnk1-J2

DROP-OUT DELAY:

t PKP
t RST
Auxiliary voltage

Auxiliary Voltage (Vx)


Figure 172: Auxiliary Overvoltage Protection logic diagram

8.2.4.7 NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION (59N)

The relay provides one Neutral Overvoltage (Neutral OV, also called Neutral Displacement) element per protection
group.
The Neutral Overvoltage element can be used to detect asymmetrical system voltage conditions caused by a
ground fault or the loss of one or two phases of the source. The element responds to the system neutral voltage
(3V0), calculated from the phase voltages. The nominal secondary voltage of the phase voltage channels entered
under Setpoints > System > Voltage Sensing > Phase VT Secondary is the base used when setting the Pickup
level. The Neutral Overvoltage element can provide a time-delayed operating characteristic versus the applied
voltage (initialized from FlexCurves A, B, C or D) or can be used as a definite time element. The source voltage
assigned to this element must be configured for a phase VT and phase VTs must be wye connected. VT errors and
normal voltage unbalance must be considered when setting this element.

Note:
The same curves used for the time overcurrent elements are used for Neutral Displacement. When using the curve to
determine the operating time of the Neutral Displacement element, substitute the ratio of neutral voltage to Pickup level for the
current ratio shown on the horizontal axis of the curve plot.

The relay provides Neutral Overvoltage protection with independent time delay characteristics. Each stage provides
a choice of operate characteristics, where you can select between:
● An IDMT characteristic
● A range of user-defined curves
● DT (Definite Time)
The undervoltage delay setpoint defines a family of curves as shown below.
The Inverse Time characteristics is given by:
T = D / [(V/Vpkp) - 1]

1601-0450 459
Chapter 8 - Protection

where:
● T = Operating Time
● D = neutral over voltage Pickup Time Delay setpoint (for D = 0.00 operates instantaneously)
● V = Voltage as a fraction of the nominal VT Secondary Voltage
● Vpkp = neutral over voltage Pickup Level
If FlexCurves are selected, the same curves used for the time overcurrent elements are used for Neutral
Displacement. When using the curve to determine the operating time of the Neutral Displacement element,
substitute the ratio of neutral voltage to the pickup level for the current ratio shown on the horizontal axis of the
curve plot.
T = FlexCurve(V/Vpkp)

Inverse Time neutral over voltage Curves for varying D

The Neutral Overvoltage feature should be applied with caution. It would normally be applied to give line-to-ground
fault coverage on high impedance grounded or ungrounded systems, which are isolated. This constraint stems from
the fact that a measurement of 3V0 cannot discriminate between a faulted circuit and an adjacent healthy circuit.
Use of a time delayed back-up or alarm mode allows other protections an opportunity to isolate the faulted element
first.
The settings of this function are applied to 3V0 calculated from the three phase-to-ground (wye connected VTs)
voltage inputs to produce Pickup and Trip flags per 3V0 calculated voltage. The Neutral OV Pickup flag is asserted
when the calculated 3V0 voltage is above the PKP value. The Neutral OV Trip flag is asserted if the element stays
picked up for the time defined by the selected inverse curve and the magnitude of the 3V0 voltage. The element
drops from Pickup without operation, if the calculated voltage drops below 97 to 98% of the Pickup value before the
time for operation is reached.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Voltage Elements > Neutral OV 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled

460 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: dependent upon the order code
Default: Ph VT Bnk1-J2 or LEA Bnk1-J2, Dependent on order code
This setting provides the selection for the voltage bank input.

PICKUP
Range: 0.02 to 3.00 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT (FW up to 3.xx)
Range: 0.02 to 4.00 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT (FW from 4.10 onwards)
Default: 0.30 x VT

CURVE
Range: Definite Time, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B, FlexCurve C, FlexCurve D, Inverse time (from FW4.10)
Default: Definite Time

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 1.000 s
The NEUTRAL OV 1 PICKUP DELAY setting applies only if the NEUTRAL OV 1 CURVE setting is Definite
time.
If Inverse Time is selected as neutral OV Curve, the Pickup Delay value is loaded to variable D in the curve
formula.

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 1.000 s

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset

1601-0450 461
462
8.2.4.8
Chapter 8 - Protection

or a total of 6 elements.
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
SETPOINT
LED: TRIP 8S: To operate Output Relay
FUNCTION:

AND
1(TRIP)
Disabled Configurable in 845 & 859
OR

Trip
Latched Trip S

AND
Alarm
LATCH

OR
Latched Alarm
R
LED: ALARM
Configurable
AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR

Any Alarm

S
AND

LATCH SETPOINT
SETPOINTS Command R Output Relay X
RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
PICK-UP DELAY:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETPOINTS SETPOINTS DROP-OUT DELAY: Neutral OV 1 OP
OR

BLOCK : PICKUP:
CURVE:
Off = 0 RUN

AND
t PKP

Figure 173: Neutral Overvoltage Protection logic diagram

3_Vo > PICKUP
Van > 0.85 x VT t RST

OR
Vbn > 0.85 x VT

Vcn > 0.85 x VT

LED: PICKUP FlexLogic Operands

Neutral OV 1 PKP:

Phase Voltages
SETPOINTS
Phase A Voltage (Va) SIGNAL INPUT:
Phase B Voltage (Vb) 3_V0
Phase C Voltage (Vc)
Ph VT Bank 1-J2

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION (59_2)

USED ONLY IN 850
894050C1

The relay provides one Negative Sequence Overvoltage (Negative Sequence OV 1) element per protection group,

1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

The Negative Sequence Overvoltage element can be used to detect an asymmetrical system voltage condition, loss
of one or two phases of the source, or reversed phase sequence of voltages. The element responds to the negative
sequence voltage (V2), calculated from the phase voltages. The Negative Sequence Overvoltage element may be
set as an instantaneous element with no time delay, or may be set as a definite time element.
The settings of this function are applied to the calculated Negative Sequence Voltage to produce Pickup and Trip
flags. The Negative Sequence OV Pickup flag is asserted when the Negative Sequence Voltage is above the PKP
value. The Negative Sequence OV Trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by Pickup
time delay. The element drops from Pickup without operation if the calculated Negative Sequence Voltage drops
below 97 to 98% of the Pickup value before the time for operation is reached.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Voltage > Neg Seq OV 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: dependent upon the order code
Default: Ph VT Bnk1-J2 or LEA Bnk1-J2, dependent on order code

PICKUP
Range: 0.00 to 3.00 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Default: 1.00 x VT
This setting sets the Negative Sequence Overvoltage Pickup level specified per times VT. For example, a Pickup
setting of 0.80 x VT with 13800:115 VT translates into 11.04 kV (or 92 V secondary).

Note:
If the 3 phase VT is delta connected, the Negative Sequence Overvoltage pickup level is internally changed to 1/Ö3 of the
user setting, before being compared to the actual negative sequence voltage.

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 1.000 s
This setting provides definite time pick-up delay. Instantaneous operation is selected by pick-up time delay
setting of 0.000 s.

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 1.000 s
This setting provides definite time drop-out delay. An instantaneous reset is provided by drop-out time delay
setting of 0.000 s

1601-0450 463
Chapter 8 - Protection

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand

Default: OffOUTPUT RELAY X

Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset

464 1601-0450
 8.2.4.9

1601-0450
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
LED: TRIP
8S: To operate Output Relay
AND

1(TRIP)

VOLTS PER HERTZ (24)

OR

859: To operate the selected

S Breaker/Contactor Trip Relay
AND

LATCH
R
SETPOINT
LED: ALARM
AND

FUNCTION: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR

Any Alarm
Disabled
Trip S
AND

Latched Trip LATCH SETPOINT

Alarm R Output Relay X

OR
Command
Latched Alarm RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
Configurable FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETPOINTS Neg Seq OV 1 OP:
OR

SETPOINTS PICK-UP DELAY:

SETPOINTS PICKUP:
DROP-OUT DELAY:
BLOCK: RUN

AND
t PKP
Off = 0 V_2 > PICKUP
t RST

LED: PICKUP FlexLogic Operands

Phase Voltages SETPOINTS Neg Seq OV 1 PKP:

Phase A Voltage (Va) Signal Input
Phase B Voltage (Vb)

Figure 174: Negative Sequence Overvoltage Protection logic diagram

Phase C Voltage (Vc) Ph VT Bank 1 – J2

850 Only 894051C1vsdx

voltage on the relay terminals, the V/Hz value is automatically set to “0”. The V/Hz value is established as per

menu are used for V/Hz operation, then V/Hz is based on the selected Setpoint > System > Voltage Sensing >
The volts-per-hertz (V/Hz) value is calculated using the maximum of the three-phase voltage inputs. If there is no

voltage and nominal frequency power system settings as follows: if the phase voltage inputs defined in the source

465
Chapter 8 - Protection
Chapter 8 - Protection

Ph VT Bnk1-J2 > Voltage 1 > Phase VT Secondary setting, and the Setpoint > System > Power System >
Nominal Frequency setting.
For example, if Phase VT Secondary and Nominal Frequency are set as 120 V and 60 Hz, respectively, these set
values define the base unit as 1 x (V/Hz).
The volts-per-hertz ratio after division of these nominal settings is 120/60 = 2.
Assume the PICKUP setpoint from the V/Hz element is set to 1.05 x (V/Hz). This will mean that in order for the
element to pick up, the actual volts-per-hertz ratio after division should be 2 *1.05 = 2.1.
The ratio of 2.1 can be achieved if for example the measured voltage is 126V and frequency is 60 Hz, or the voltage
is constant at 120 V and the frequency is 57.14 Hz, or any other combination of these two values, which after V/Hz
division equals 2.1.
To check back the PICKUP setting, we use the base (V/Hz) unit = 120/60 = 2, such that the PICKUP setting value is
2.1/2 = 1.05 x (V/Hz).
The element has a linear reset characteristic. The reset time can be programmed to match the cooling
characteristics of the protected equipment. The element will fully reset from the trip threshold in Reset Time
seconds. The V/Hz element can be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional time delay or as a Definite
or Inverse timed element. The characteristics of the inverse curves are shown as follows.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Voltage > Volts per Hertz 1(2)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: dependent on the order code
Default: Ph VT Bnk1-J2
This setting specifies the input voltage used to calculate the per-unit volts-per-Hertz (V/Hz). If three phase
voltages are used then set the AC Inputs to “Ph VT Bnk1-J2”. To use the V/Hz element with auxiliary voltage, set
AC Inputs to “Aux VT Bnk1-J2”.

VOLTAGE MODE
Range: Phase-ground, Phase-phase
Default: Phase-ground
If the Phase VT Connection is selected as “Wye”, then the VOLTAGE MODE setting further defines the
operating quantity and per-unit value for this element. If the VOLTAGE MODE is set as “Phase-phase”, then the
operating quantity for this element will be phase-to-phase nominal voltage. Likewise, if the VOLTAGE MODE is
set to “Phase-ground”, then the operating quantity for this element will be the phase-to-ground nominal voltage.
If the Phase VT Connection (set under Setpoint > System > Voltage Sensing) is selected as “Delta”, then the
phase-to-phase nominal voltage is used to define the per-unit value, regardless of the Voltage Mode selection.

PICKUP
Range: 0.80 to 4.00 V/Hz in steps of 0.01

466 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Default: 1.05 V/Hz

Enter the Volts per Hertz value (in V/Hz) above which the Volts per Hertz 1 element will pickup.

CURVE
Range: Definite Time, Inverse A, Inverse B, Inverse C, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B, FlexCurve C, FlexCurve D
Default: Definite Time
Definite Time: For the definite time curve, T(s) = TD multiplier. For example, setting the TD multiplier to 20
results in a time delay of 20 seconds to operate when above the Volts/Hz pickup setting. Instantaneous
operation can be obtained the same way by setting the TD multiplier to “0”.
Inverse Curve A: The curve for the Volts/Hertz Inverse Curve A shape is derived from the formula:

 
 2 `  

    
  
  1
 
where:
● T = Operating Time
● TDM= Time Delay Multiplier (delay in seconds)
● V = fundamental RMS value of voltage (pu)
● F = frequency of voltage signal (pu)

1601-0450 467
Chapter 8 - Protection

● Pickup = volts-per-hertz pickup setpoint (pu)

The volts/hertz inverse A curves are shown below.

Figure 175: Volts-Per-Hertz Curves for Inverse Curve A

Inverse Curve B:The curve for the Volts/Hertz Inverse Curve B shape is derived from the formula:

TDM V
T when
Pickup
 V  F
 Pickup  1
 
where:
where:
● T = Operating Time
● TDM = Time Delay Multiplier (delay in seconds)
● V = fundamental RMS value of voltage (pu)
● F = frequency of voltage signal (pu)

468 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

● Pickup = volts-per-hertz pickup setpoint (pu)

The Volts/Hertz inverse B curves are shown below.

Figure 176: Volts-Per-Hertz Curves for Inverse Curve B

Inverse Curve C:The curve for the Volts/Hertz Inverse Curve C shape is derived from the formula:

TDM V
T when
Pickup
1/2 F
 V 
 Pickup 1
 

where:
● T = Operating Time
● TDM = Time Delay Multiplier (delay in seconds)

1601-0450 469
Chapter 8 - Protection

● V = fundamental RMS value of voltage (pu)

● F = frequency of voltage signal (pu)
● Pickup = volts-per-hertz pickup setpoint (pu)
The Volts/Hertz Inverse C curves are shown below.

Figure 177: Volts-Per-Hertz Curves for Inverse Curve C

TD MULTIPLIER
Range: 0.05 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00
This setting provides a selection for the Time Dial Multiplier which modifies the operating times for the selected
inverse curve.

T RESET
Range: 0.00 to 6000.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00
Enter the time that the Volts per Hertz value must remain below the pickup level before the element resets.

470 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off
The Volts per Hertz can be blocked by any asserted FlexLogic operand.

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset

1601-0450 471
472
8.2.5

8.2.5.1
Chapter 8 - Protection

SETPOINT
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Trip SETPOINTS Any Trip
Latched Trip
Voltage Mode: LED: TRIP 869: To operate

OR
Alarm
Output Relay 1(TRIP)
AND

Latched Alarm Pickup:

Figure 178: Volts per Hertz logic diagram

Configurable in 845 & 859
Configurable
OR

Curve:

ADMITTANCE ELEMENTS
TD Multiplier: S
AND

LATC
Reset Time:
H

NEUTRAL ADMITTANCE (21YN)

SETPOINT RUN R

AND
Block: LED:
ALARM
AND

Off=0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR

Any Alarm
SETPOINT
SIGNAL INPUT: S
AND

t LATC
Ph VT H SETPOINT
Phase Voltage Inputs from Ph VT
Bnk1-J2 Bnk1-J2 Command R Output Relay X
Actual Values RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
WYE Delta FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Van Vab Aux VT
Volts/Hz 1 OP
OR

Bnk1-J2
Vbn Vbc MAX V/Hz
V, F
Vcn Vca
J2-3VT Frequency

Auxiliary Voltage Inputs from Aux FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

VT Bnk1-J2 Volts/Hz 1 PKP
Actual Values
Vx V, F
J2-Vx Frequency



In a medium voltage (MV) network, the compensating reactor is used to compensate the capacitive fault current

1601-0450
ideally to zero at the fault point. However, detection of low ground fault current in such networks is challenging when
 Chapter 8 - Protection

using the conventional current-based ground fault detection methods. This element uses neutral admittance based
criteria to successfully detect the ground fault in the compensated or isolated MV networks. Measured or calculated
values of neutral current (I0) and neutral voltage (V0) are used to calculate the shunt neutral admittance (Y0),
conductance (G0) and susceptance (B0). The element uses one of the three modes (Y0, G0, B0) to operate or block
the output operands.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Admittance > Neutral Admittance 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Neutral Admittance functionality.

CURRENT INPUT
Range: J1 I0, J1 Ig, K1 I0, K1 Ig, K1 Isg
Default: J1 I0
Current input can be programmed to be either the zero-sequence current, J1 I0 and K1 I0, calculated from the
phase currents or measured ground current, J1 Ig and K1 Ig, supplied externally at ground CT input. The setting
range provides flexibility of selecting the current source bank; currents J1 I0 and J1 Ig correspond to Bank 1 –
Slot J1, while currents K1 I0 and K1 Ig correspond to Bank 2 – Slot K1.

Note:
Selection of K1 I0 and K1 Ig, is only available with a Slot K bank order code. Otherwise, the neutral admittance is calculated
from the Slot J options only.

VOLTAGE INPUT
Range: J2 V0, J2 Vaux, K2 V0, K2 Vaux
Default: J2 V0
Voltage input can be programmed to be either the zero-sequence voltage, J2 V0 and K2 V0, calculated from the
phase voltages, or the measured voltage, J2 Vaux and K2 Vaux, supplied externally at auxiliary VT input. The
setting range provides the flexibility of selecting the voltage source bank; voltages J2 V0 and J2 Vaux
correspond to Bank1 - Slot J2, while currents K2 V0 and K2 Vaux corresponds to Bank2 - Slot K2.

Note:
When Voltage Input is set to J2 Vaux or K2 Vaux, it is required that the setpoint AUX VT CONNECTION (under Setpoints >
System > Voltage Sensing) be set to VN for this element, otherwise the element operation will be blocked by the relay.
When Voltage Input is set to J2 V0 or K2 V0, phase voltages must be wye-connected, and setpoint PHASE VT
CONNECTION (under Setpoints > System > Voltage Sensing) must be set to Wye.

Note:
Selection of K2 V0, K2 Vaux, is only available with the Slot K Bank order code. Otherwise, the neutral admittance is calculated
from Slot J options only.

1601-0450 473
Chapter 8 - Protection

VOLTAGE INPUT
Range: J2 V0, J2 Vaux
Default: J2 V0
Voltage input can be configured to be either the zero-sequence voltage, J2 V0, calculated from the phase
voltages or measured voltage, J2 Vaux, supplied externally at auxiliary VT input.

Note:
When Voltage Input is set to J2 Vaux, it is required that the setpoint Aux VT Connection (under Setpoints > System >
Voltage Sensing) be set to “VN” for this element, otherwise the element operation will be blocked by the relay. When Voltage
Input is set to J2 V0, phase voltages must be wye-connected, and setpoint Phase VT Connection (under Setpoints > System
> Voltage Sensing) must be set to “Wye.”

MODE
Range: Y0, G0, B0
Default: Y0
This setting selects the protection criterion (characteristic quantity) of the Neutral Admittance Ground Fault
protection. When this value is set to Y0, G0 and B0, the protection criterion is Neutral-Admittance, Neutral-
Conductance, and Neutral-Susceptance, respectively.

DIRECTION
Range: Non-directional, Forward, Reverse
Default: Non-directional
When set to Non-Directional, the element operates in both forward and reverse direction.When set to
“Forward”, the element operates when the fault is detected in the forward direction. When set to Reverse, the
element operates when the fault is detected in the Reverse direction.The following figures show the interactions
between different setting options of the parameters Mode and Direction per the tripping and operating ranges of
the Neutral Admittance Ground Fault protection.

Note:
This is setting is not applicable to protection criterion mode Y0.

ANGLE CORRECTION
Range: 0.0 to 359.0° in steps of 0.1°
Default: 0.0°
This setting specifies the correction angle between current and voltage.
In addition, this setting can be used to correct the relative polarity of the ground current with respect to voltage. If
the polarity of the current is reversed or not relative to voltage, this setting can be used to change the polarity.
When “180 deg” is selected, the measured admittance Y0 is multiplied with -1 which corresponds to a 180
degree shift in current direction.

474 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

jB
Y0  0
(I0 V0 )
I
V0

I
Y (I  V  1)
V

Secondly, this angle can also be used to eliminate the angular errors of the voltage transformer and/or current
transformers (CT); measured phase angle deviations caused by measuring inaccuracy of voltage transformers,
can be eliminated by properly setting this value.

jB
Y0'
 Y0

c


+
Y0

c
Y0
- Y0"

Y0 REACH
Range: 0.00 to 500.00 mS in steps of 0.01 mS
Default: 1.00 mS
This setting defines the reach of neutral admittance based protection criterion. Neutral Admittance Ground Fault
protection will operate after the set Pickup Delay time when the neutral admittance quantity, Y0, exceeds this
reach level. Regardless of the DIRECTION setting, this element always operates in the non-directional mode.
Operating characteristic depends only on the pick-up threshold defined by this setting.

1601-0450 475
Chapter 8 - Protection

G0 FWD REACH
Range: -500.00 to 500.00 mS in steps of 0.01 mS
Default: 1.00 mS
This setting defines the pickup level of protection criterion based on the neutral conductance. Neutral Admittance
Ground Fault protection will operate after the set Pickup Delay time when the neutral conductance quantity, G0,
exceeds the reach level defined by this setting. This setting is not applicable when the DIRECTION setting is set
to Reverse.

G0 REV REACH
Range: -500.00 to 500.00 mS in steps of 0.01 mS
Default: -1.00 mS
This setting defines the pickup level of protection criterion based on the neutral conductance. Neutral Admittance
Ground Fault protection will operate after the set Pickup Delay time when the neutral conductance quantity, G0,
lies below the reach level defined by this setting. This setting is not applicable when the DIRECTION setting is
set to Forward.
Depending on pick-up threshold (G0) and directional settings, conductance characteristics are as follows:

476 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

jB jB

Block Operate Operate Block

G G

G0 Fwd G0 Rev
Reach Reach

Forward Direction Operate/Block Characteristic Reverse Direction Operate/Block Characteristic

jB jB

Operate Block Operate Block Operate Block

G G

G0 Rev G0 Fwd G0 Fwd G0 Rev

Reach Reach Reach Reach

Non-directional Operate/Block Characteristic Non-directional Operate/Block Characteristic

when G0 Fwd Reach G0 Rev Reach when G0 Fwd Reach < G0 Rev Reach

B0 FWD REACH
Range: -500.00 to 500.00 mS in steps of 0.01 mS
Default: 1.00 mS
This setting defines the pickup level of the protection criterion based on the neutral susceptance. Neutral
Admittance Ground Fault protection will operate after the set Pickup Delay time when the neutral susceptance
quantity, B0, exceeds this setting. This setting is not applicable when the DIRECTION setpoint is set as Reverse.

B0 REV REACH
Range: -500.00 to 500.00 mS in steps of 0.01 mS
Default: -1.00 mS
This setting defines the pickup level of the protection criterion based on the neutral susceptance. Neutral
Admittance Ground Fault protection will operate after the set Pickup Delay time when the neutral susceptance

1601-0450 477
Chapter 8 - Protection

quantity, B0, lies below the reach level defined by this setting. This setting is not applicable when the
DIRECTION setting is set to Forward.
Depending on pick-up threshold (B0) and directional settings, susceptance characteristics are as follows:

jB jB

Operate

B0 Fwd
Block Reach
G G

B0 Rev
Block Reach

Operate

Forward Direction Operate/Block Characteristic Reverse Direction Operate/Block Characteristic

jB jB
Block

B0 Fwd B0 Rev
Block Reach Reach
G G

B0 Rev Operate B0 Fwd

Reach Reach

Operate Block

Non-directional Operate/Block Characteristic Non-directional Operate/Block Characteristic

when B0 Fwd Reach B0 Rev Reach when B0 Fwd Reach < B0 Rev Reach

Note:
All the reach settings, for admittance, conductance, and susceptance, are expressed in secondary Siemens.

MINIMUM CURRENT
Range: 0.02 to 1.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 0.02 x CT
Range (for sensitive ground when Current Input is set to K1 Isg): 0.005 to 0.100 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 0.005 x CT

478 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

This setting specifies the minimum limit of the measuring process ground/sensitive ground current to activate
Neutral Admittance Ground/Sensitive Ground Fault protection. The element remains blocked until the ground/
sensitive ground current value for building the protective criterion exceeds this minimum limit.

MINIMUM VOLTAGE
Range: 0.01 to 1.50 x VT in steps of 0.01 mS
Default: 0.01 x VT
This setting specifies the minimum limit of the measuring process ground voltage to activate Neutral Admittance
Ground Fault protection. The element remains blocked until the ground voltage value for building the protective
criterion exceeds this minimum limit.

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 600.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.100 s
This setting specifies a time delay for the function.

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 600.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000 s
This setting specifies a dropout time delay for the function.

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The element will be blocked, when the selected operand is asserted.

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
The element will be blocked, when the selected operand is asserted.

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Self-reset

1601-0450 479
480
8.2.6

8.2.6.1
Chapter 8 - Protection

SETPOINT
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FUNCTION:
Any Trip
Disabled=0

OUT-OF-STEP (78)
LED: TRIP
Trip AND
Latched Trip Operate Output Relay 1(TRIP)
OR

OR
Alarm
SETPOINT
Latched Alarm

AND
DIRECTION: S
Configurable
AND

Y0 REACH: LATCH
G0 FWD REACH:
SETPOINT R
G0 REV REACH: LED: ALARM

IMPEDANCE ELEMENTS
BLOCK: S0 FWD REACH:
AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off=0 S0 REV REACH:
OR

Any Alarm
RUN jB

AND
Operate
Y0 S
AND

Block G
LATCH SETPOINT
SETPOINT SETPOINT
VOLTAGE INPUT: MIN VOLTAGE: Command R Output Relay X
J2 V0 MIN CURRENT: RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
J2 Vaux RUN jB SETPOINT

AND
V < Min Voltage FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PICKUP DELAY:
K2 V0 Operate Operate

OR
Block Ntrl Admit 1 OP
OR

I < Min Current G

K2 Vaux tPKP
OR
G0 G0 tDOP

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETPOINT Ntrl Admit 1 PKP
RUN jB

AND
ANGLE CORRECTION:
SETPOINT B0 Operate
RUN
CURRENT INPUT: Y0 = Mag(I0/V0) G
J1 I0 = Ang(I0/V0) Block
Y
J1 Ig B0 Operate

G0 = Y0*cos( Y)

Figure 179: Neutral Admittance Ground Protection logic diagram

K1 I0

B0 = Y0*sin( Y)
K1 Ig

K1 Isg ACTUAL VALUES
Ntrl Admit Mag
Ntrl Admit Angle
Ntrl Conductance
SETPOINT
MODE: Ntrl Susceptance
Y0
G0
S0

 

element measures the positive-sequence apparent impedance, and traces its locus with respect to a single blinder
The Out-of-step element provides an out-of-step (loss-of-synchronism or pole slip) tripping function for motors. The

1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

operating characteristic with an offset mho supervisory. The purpose of the supervisory mho is to permit tripping for
swings that pass through the motor and a limited portion of the system, but to prevent operation on stable swings
that pass through both blinders and outside the mho characteristic.
The out-of-step tripping feature operates as follows: The trip sequence identifies unstable power swings by
determining whether the impedance locus enters one blinder, spends a finite time between the left and right blinder
characteristics, and then exits the opposite blinder. The out-of-step trip process is supervised by a mho
characteristic. If the locus enters the left blinder, right blinder and mho characteristic (indicated by the AND
operation of OOS LFT BLD PKP and OOS RGT BLD PKP FlexLogic operands) for an interval longer than PICKUP
DELAY, the timing out signal (OOS TIMER PKP FlexLogic operand) is established. After the PICKUP DELAY timer
times out, latch 1 is set as long as the impedance stays within the mho characteristic. If afterwards, at any time
(given the impedance stays between the two blinders characteristic), the locus exits from the opposite blinder, latch
2 is set as long as the impedance stays inside the mho characteristic. The element is now ready to trip. If the
“Blinder Exit” trip mode is selected, the OOS OP operand is set immediately and sealed-in for the interval set by the
SEAL-IN DELAY. If the “MHO Exit” trip mode is selected, the element waits until the impedance locus leaves the
mho characteristic, and then the OOS OP operand is set and sealed-in.
The element is set to use the single blinder characteristic with a supervisory mho as illustrated below.

The FlexLogic output operands for the out-of-step element are described as follows:
● The OOS Lft Bld PKP, OOS Rgt Bld PKP, and OOS Timer PKP FlexLogic operands are auxiliary operands
that can be used to facilitate testing and special applications.
● The OOS OP FlexLogic operand can be used to trip the circuit breaker to isolate the loss-of-synchronism .
Follow these steps for a typical setting procedure of the out-of-step element:
1. Carry out detailed transient stability studies for the overall system.
2. Determine the values of generator transient reactance (X'd), step-up transformer reactance (XT), and system
impedance under maximum generation (ZmaxS). The total impedance is given by:

1601-0450 481
Chapter 8 - Protection

3. Determine the values of the motor transient reactance (X'd), and system impedance (ZS). The total
impedance is given by Ztotal = ZS + j * X’d
4. Set MHO FORWARD REACH to 1.5 times the transformer impedance in the system direction. Set MHO
REVERSE REACH to twice the generator transient reactance in the generator direction.
5. Set MHO REVERSE REACH for 0.05 to 0.15 times the motor transient reactance. Set MHO FORWARD
REACH to twice the motor transient reactance in the motor direction.
6. Set BLINDERS RCA to the angle of Ztotal, θ.
7. Using the results of transient stability analysis, find the critical angle δc between the and the system, beyond
which the system begins to become unstable. If a stability study is not available, this angle is typically set at
120°. Then, 10 degrees are normally added in order to increase relay operation security, δ = δc +10.
8. Determine the blinder distance, d, from the following equation:

9. Set RIGHT BLINDER and LEFT BLINDER to d.

10. Using the results of the transient stability analysis, find the PICKUP DELAY, which is shorter than the time
required for the impedance locus to travel between the left and right blinders during the fastest expected out-
of-step.
11. Validate the settings with the transient stability study cases.

Figure 180: A Typical Out-of-step Setting

Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Impedance > Out of Step

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option

482 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Default: Disabled

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: Positive Impedance 1, Positive Impedance 2
Default: Positive Impedance 1
This setting provides the selection for the positive sequence impedance which is calculated by terminal side or
neutral side CT. Positive sequence impedance 1 is calculated using 3-phase J1 currents and 3-phase J2
voltages. Positive sequence impedance 2 is calculated using 3-phase K1 currents and 3-phase J2 voltages.

MHO FORWARD REACH

Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01 ohms
Default: 2.00 ohms
This setting specifies the forward reach of the mho characteristic. The reach impedance is entered in secondary
ohms. The reach impedance angle is fixed to 90 degrees.

MHO REVERSE REACH

Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01 ohms
Default: 2.00 ohms
This setting specifies the reverse reach of the mho characteristic. The reach impedance is entered in secondary
ohms. The reach impedance angle is fixed to -90 degrees.

RIGHT BLINDER
Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01 ohms
Default: 2.00 ohms
This setting defines the right blinder position of the blinder characteristic along with the resistive axis of the
impedance plane, expressed ins secondary ohms. The angular position of the blinder is adjustable with the use
of the BLINDERS RCA setting.

LEFT BLINDER
Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01 ohms
Default: 2.00 ohms
This setting defines the left blinder position of the blinder characteristic along with the resistive axis of the
impedance plane, expressed ins secondary ohms. The angular position of the blinder is adjustable with the use
of the BLINDERS RCA setting.

BLINDERS RCA
Range: 40 to 90° in steps of 1°
Default: 90°
This setting defines the angular position of the left and right blinders.

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 1.000 s in steps of 0.001 s

1601-0450 483
Chapter 8 - Protection

Default: 0.100 s
This setting should be set to detect the fastest expected unstable power swing and produce out-of-step tripping
in a secure manner. This timer defines the interval that the impedance locus must spend between the left and
right blinders to establish the out-of-step tripping signal. This time delay must be set shorter than the time
required for the impedance locus to travel between the left and right blinders during the fastest expected out-of-
step. Setting the delay too long can reduce dependability.

TRIP MODE
Range: Blinder Exit, MHO Exit
Default: MHO Exit
Selecting Blinder Exit results in an instantaneous trip after the last step in the out-of-step tripping sequence
is completed (the impedance locus leaves the opposite blinder). The Blinder Exit trip mode stresses the circuit
breakers as the currents at that moment are high (the electromotive forces of the two equivalent systems are
close to 180° apart).
Selecting MHO Exit results in a trip at the moment when the impedance locus leaves the mho characteristic.
The MHO Exit trip mode relaxes the operating conditions for the breakers as the currents at that moment are
low, preventing the breakers from a maximum recovery voltage during interruption. The selection should be
made considering the capability of the breakers in the system.

POS SEQ CURR SUPERVISION

Range: 0.05 to 10.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 1.00 x CT
A common overcurrent pickup level supervises the left and right blinder characteristics. The supervision
responds to the positive sequence current.

SEAL-IN DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 1.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.100 s
The out-of-step trip FlexLogic operand (OOS OP) is sealed-in for the specified period of time. The sealing-in is
crucial to the MHO Exit trip mode, as the original trip signal is a very short pulse occurring when the impedance
locus leaves the mho characteristic after the out-of-step sequence is completed.

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

484 1601-0450
1601-0450
TARGETS

Default: Latched

LED: TRIP

AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR

Any Trip
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

SETPOINT S

AND
FUNCTION: LATCH
Disabled R
Trip LED: ALARM

AND
Latched Trip FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR

Any Alarm
Alarm

OR
Latched Alarm S
AND

S Q3

XOR
Configurable LATCH SETPOINT
LATCH3 R
SETPOINT SETPOINT Command Output Relay X

AND
Reset- RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
BLOCK: POS SEQ CURR SUPV:
Dominant
Off=0 RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
R
OOS OP
OR

Figure 181: Out-of-step Protection Logic Diagram

| I_1 | > PICKUP
FlexLogic Operands

AND
S Q4

AND
VT Fuse Fail 1 OP
LATCH4

From System\Motor\Setup Reset-

0.5 cyc Dominant
SETPOINTS
R

AND
0
Synchronous Motor Type SETPOINTS
None=0 MHO FWD REACH:

AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS MHO REV REACH:
FlexLogic Operands
Motor Starting RIGHT BLINDER: SETPOINT
OOS Rgt Bld PKP
Motor Running LEFT BLINDER: TRIP MODE:

OR
Motor Overload BLINDERS RCA: Blinder Exit

AND
SM Field Applied RUN OOS Lft Bld PKP
SETPOINT Mho Exit
PICKUP DELAY:
tPKP

AND
SETTING Mho SETPOINT OOS Timer PKP
0
AND

S Q1

AND
SIGNAL INPUT 0.5 cyc
AND

RUN 0 SEAL-IN DELAY:

V1 Impedance 1 or 2 depending LATCH1 0
OR

on Signal Input selection S Q2

OR

I1 Reset-
Left Blinder tRST
Dominant LATCH2

AND
RUN 0.5 cyc R
0
AND

Set-Dominant
AND

R
Right Blinder




485
Chapter 8 - Protection
Chapter 8 - Protection

8.2.7 POWER ELEMENTS

8.2.7.1 DIRECTIONAL POWER (32)

The relay provides two identical Directional Power elements per protection group; a total of 12 elements.
The Directional Power element responds to three-phase directional power and is designed for reverse power
(32REV) and low forward power (32FWD) applications for synchronous machines or interconnections involving co-
generation. The relay measures the three-phase power from either a full set of wye-connected VTs or a full-set of
delta-connected VTs. In the latter case, the two-wattmeter method is used.
The element has an adjustable characteristic angle and minimum operating power as shown in the Directional
Power characteristic diagram. The element responds to the following condition:
Pcosq + Qsinq > MIN
Where:
● P and Q are active and reactive powers as measured per the metering convention
● Ɵ is a sum of the element characteristic (DIR POWER 1 RCA) and calibration (DIR POWER 1
CALIBRATION) angles
● SMIN is the minimum operating power.
The element has two independent (as to the PICKUP and DELAY settings) stages for Alarm and Trip, and they can
be set separately to provide mixed power protection.

Figure 182: Directional Power characteristic

By making the characteristic angle adjustable and providing for both negative and positive values of the minimum
operating power, a variety of operating characteristics can be achieved as presented in the figure below. For
example, section (a) in the figure below shows settings for reverse power, while section (b) shows settings for low
forward power applications.

486 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Figure 183: Sample applications of the Directional Power element

Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Power > Directional Power 1(X)

1601-0450 487
Chapter 8 - Protection

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: Power 1, Power 2
Default: Power 1
This setting provides the selection for the power input. Depending on the order code selection, the
corresponding CT/VT inputs to calculate power are selected under Setpoints > System > Power Sensing.

START BLOCK DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 50000.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies the length of time to block this function when the motor is starting. The element is active
only when the motor is running and is blocked upon the initiation of a motor start for a period of time specified by
this setting. For example, this block may be used to allow pumps to build up head before the element trips or
alarms. A value of 0 specifies that the feature is not blocked from start. For values other than 0, the feature is
disabled when the motor is stopped and also from the time a start is detected until the time entered expires.

RCA
Range: 0 to 359° in steps of 1°
Default: 180°
This setting specifies the Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA) for the Directional Power function. Application of this
setting provides the following benefits:
It allows
○ the element to respond to active or reactive power in any direction (active overpower/underpower,
etc.).
Together
○ with a precise calibration angle, it allows compensation for any CT and VT angular errors to permit
more sensitive settings.
It allows
○ for required direction in situations when the voltage signal is taken from behind a delta-wye
connected power transformer and phase angle compensation is required.

For example, the active overpower characteristic is achieved by setting DIR POWER 1 RCA to “0°,” reactive
overpower by setting DIR POWER 1 RCA to “90°,” active underpower by setting DIR POWER 1 RCA to “180°,”
and reactive underpower by setting DIR POWER 1 RCA to “270°”.

CALIBRATION
Range: 0 to 0.95° in steps of 0.05°
Default: 0°
This setting allows the Relay Characteristic Angle to change in steps of 0.05°. This may be useful when a small
difference in VT and CT angular errors is to be compensated to permit more sensitive settings.

488 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

The setting enables calibration of the Directional Power function in terms of the angular error of applied VTs and
CTs. The element responds to the sum of the DIR POWER 1 RCA and DIR POWER 1 CALIBRATION settings.

STAGE 1 SMIN
Range: -3.000 to 3.000 x Rated Power in steps of 0.001 x Rated Power
Default: 0.100 x Rated Power
The setting specifies the minimum power as defined along the relay characteristic angle (RCA) for the stage 1 of
the element. The positive values imply a shift towards the operate region along the RCA line; the negative
values imply a shift towards the restrain region along the RCA line. Refer to the Directional power sample
applications figure for details. Together with the RCA, this setting enables a wide range of operating
characteristics.
The setting applies to three-phase power and the rated power is as follows:
Rated Power = 3 x VTSecondary (phase-neutral) x VTRatio x CTPrimary(Wye-connected VT), or Rated Power =
(3)1/2x VTSecondary (phase-phase) x VTRatio x CTPrimary (Delta-connected VT)
For example:
A setting of 2% for a 200 MW machine is 0.02 × 200 MW = 4 MW.
If 7.967 kV is a primary VT phase-neutral voltage and 10 kA is a primary CT current, the source rated power is
239 MVA, and, SMIN must be set at 4 MW/239 MVA =0.0167 x Rated ≈ 0.017 x Rated.
If the reverse power application is considered, RCA = 180° and SMIN = 0.017 x Rated.
The element drops out if the magnitude of the positive-sequence current becomes virtually zero, that is, it drops
below the cutoff level.

STAGE 1 DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.500 s
The setting specifies a time delay for stage 1. For reverse power or low forward power applications for a
synchronous machine, stage 1 is typically applied for alarming and stage 2 for tripping.

STAGE 2 SMIN
Range: -3.000 to 3.000 x Rated Power in steps of 0.001 x Rated Power
Default: 0.100 x Rated Power
The setting specifies the minimum power as defined along the relay characteristic angle (RCA) for stage 2 of the
element. The setting needs to be coordinated with the setting of stage 1.

STAGE 2 DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 20.000 s
The setting specifies a time delay for stage 2. For reverse power or low forward power applications for a
synchronous machine, stage 1 is typically applied for alarming and stage 2 for tripping.

1601-0450 489
Chapter 8 - Protection

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Self-reset

490 1601-0450
 8.2.7.2

1601-0450
LED: TRIP

AND
SETPOINT FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
DIR POWER 1
OR

Any Trip
FUNCTION:
Disabled S

AND
Trip LATCH
Latched Trip R

REACTIVE POWER (40Q)

LED: ALARM
Alarm

OR
AND

Latched Alarm FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR

Any Alarm
Configurable

Figure 184: Directional Power logic diagram

S
AND

SETPOINTS LATCH SETPOINT

BLOCK: Command R Output Relay X
Off=0 RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

AND
SETPOINT DirPwr 1 OP
OR

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
START BLOCK DELAY:
Motor Stopped tBLK SETPOINTS
0
DIR POWER 1

condition. VTFF detection can be used to block this function.

Applicable to 869 & 859
RCA:
SETPOINTS
DIR POWER 1
I1* > CURRENT CUTOFF CALIBRATION: DIR POWER 1
DIR POWER 1 STAGE 1 DELAY:
OR

*In 850, I1 is positive-sequence current of the FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

current source selected to determine Power ‘Current Cutoff’ is programmed under STAGE 1 SMIN: tPKP
configured under setting ‘Signal Input’. In 869, I1 is Path: Setpoints\Device\Installation DIR POWER 1 DirPwr 1 Stg1 OP
measured as J1 I_1. In 859, I1 is measured as I_1.
STAGE 2 SMIN: 100ms
Three-phase Power RUN DirPwr 1 Stg1 PKP
Real Power (P) DIRECTIONAL POWER
Reactive Power (Q) CHARACTERISTICS DirPwr 1 Stg2 PKP

SETPOINTS
DIR POWER 1
LED: PICKUP
STAGE 2 DELAY: DirPwr 1 PKP
OR

tPKP
DirPwr 1 Stg2 OP
100ms


In a synchronous motor application, the reactive power element can be used to detect excitation system
malfunction, e.g. under excitation, loss of excitation, etc. Once the 3-phase total reactive power exceeds the
positive or negative level, for the specified delay, a trip or alarm occurs indicating a positive or negative KVAR

491
Chapter 8 - Protection
Chapter 8 - Protection

Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1 > Power > Reactive Power

TRIP FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Reactive Power Trip functionality.

POSITIVE VAR TRIP PICKUP

Range: 0.02 to 2.00 x Rated in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.80 x Rated
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the positive MVAR trip function. The level is programmed as a
multiple of Rated MVAR calculated from the rated MVA and rated power factor. Rated reactive power is
calculated as follows: Rated Reactive Power = Rated MVA x sin(cos-1(Rated Power Factor))
Rated MVA and Rated Power Factor are programmed under Setpoints > System > Generator.

POSITIVE VAR TRIP PICKUP

Range: 1 to 25000 kvar in steps of 1
Default: 25 kvar
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the positive var trip function.

NEGATIVE VAR TRIP PICKUP

Range: 0.02 to 2.00 x Rated in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.80 x Rated
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the negative var trip function.

NEGATIVE VAR TRIP PICKUP

Range: 1 to 25000 kvar in steps 1
Default: 25 kvar
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the negative var trip function.

POSITIVE VAR TRIP DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 10.00 s
This setting specifies a time delay for the positive var trip function. Once the 3-phase total reactive power
exceeds the positive level for the duration of the Positive var Trip Delay time, a trip will occur indicating a positive
var condition.

NEGATIVE VAR TRIP DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s

492 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

This setting specifies a time delay for the negative var trip function.

TRIP RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

ALARM FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Reactive Power alarm functionality.

POSITIVE VAR ALARM PICKUP

Range: 0.02 to 2.00 x Rated in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.85 x Rated
This setting is typically set at a level less than the Positive var Trip Pickup for the alarm function.

POSITIVE VAR ALARM PICKUP

Range: 1 to 25000 kvar in steps of 1
Default: 10 kvar
This setting is typically set at a level less than the Positive var Trip Pickup for the alarm function.

NEGATIVE VAR ALARM PICKUP

Range: 0.02 to 2.00 x Rated in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.85 x Rated
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the negative var alarm function.

NEGATIVE VAR ALARM PICKUP

Range: 1 to 25000 kvar in steps of 1
Default: 10 kvar
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the negative var alarm function.

POSITIVE VAR ALARM DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 10.00 s
This setting specifies a time delay for the positive var alarm function.

NEGATIVE VAR ALARM DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies a time delay for the negative var alarm function.

1601-0450 493
Chapter 8 - Protection

ALARM RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK FROM ONLINE

Range: 0.00 to 5000.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.50 s
In a synchronous motor application, it may be desirable not to trip or alarm on reactive power until the speed of
the machine is near the synchronous speed or the field has been applied. Therefore, this feature can be blocked
upon the initiation of a motor start for a period of time specified by this setting. From that point forward, the
reactive power trip and alarm elements are active. A value of zero for the block time indicates that the reactive
power protection is active as soon as motor start is detected.

Note:
The setpoint BLOCK FROM ONLINE is hidden when the order code includes Phase Currents - Slot K option C5/D5 and the
setpoint SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR TYPE (under Setpoints > System > Motor Setup) is programmed as Brushless or
Brush-type. In this case, the Reactive Power element activates when the motor is synchronized (field applied) and therefore
the motor state becomes SM Running or Overload=1 with field applied.

Note:
The setpoint BLOCK FROM ONLINE is visible when the order code does not include Phase Currents - Slot K option C5/D5 or
when the setpoint SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR TYPE (under Setpoints > System > Motor Setup) is programmed as None. In
this case the Reactive Power element runs after the BLOCK FROM ONLINE timer expires.

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset

494 1601-0450
Chapter 8 - Protection

495
@8BkP(ŒŒŒ‹‰
,+(( *)(
9: ,+((
; ; R@46( @4? Q7/ $#87654321
; ; R@46( @4? 3<; '
%& !/0)/.- ,+((
yKx Lw NvNu

=G4G2R<1ˆ=7i
gnq ngp 
+ '
‹Š‰ %& o
nml 


; R@46( @4? Q7/ *)( ' 9: hfgffed 
yKx LwNvNu %&    
i '
9: %& $#7G</
!7Aj) @<=<, kBGji
; R@46( @4? 3<; ' ADCB2; H J@7E<; 7>2=B47+J
yKx LwNvNu %& $ tct=
I
9:

$ _ @4?C G7FE $ cba= '
!s(`1 R@46( @4? 7>2=4Q7/ /.+ ' %& 
 


 !`/0/ ,+- 
=G4G2R<1ˆ=7i !ADCB2; R@46( @4? 7>2=4Q7/ %&     
+ )`i`+  
8G4RR< $#"
7=4@7A z7=4@7A =</ <1 *)( ADCB2; H J@7E<; 7>2=B47+J
!3j467+ =DA=D R@46( 9: I
! 
$ tct= $ H @4?C G7FE 
  i ' '
9: %& !s(`1 R@46( @4? 7>2=23<; /.+ %&
,+(( !1`  !ADCB2; R@46( @4? 7>2=23<; 7654@DQrG<
'   ' A2@) 87FB=4
%& %& 9:
A2@)
$#87654321
!/0)/.- ;0+)
; ; A2@) @4? Q7/
; ; A2@) @4? 3<; 
yKx LwNvNu
; A2@) @4? Q7/ ADCB2; H J@7E<; 7>2= B47+J
‡† „ƒ|‚ €~N}|{u 9: I
$ tct= $ _ @4?C G7FE
!s(`1 ;0+) @4? 7>2=4Q7/ /.+
=G4G2R<1ˆ=7i  
!ADCB2; A2@) @4? 7>2=4Q7/
+ 
^VT]\[ZYXWVTUTS R<@-
*)( ADCB2; H J@7E<; 7>2= B47+J

Figure 185: Reactive Power Logic Diagram

I 7>2= B47+ P@E;
i $ tct= $ H @4?C G7FE
' MNKO NKMLK
9: %& !s(`1 ;0+) @4? 7>2=23<; /. +
  !ADCB2; A2@) @4? 7>2=23<;
' 
%&
; A2@) @4? 3<;
‡† „ƒ|‚ €~N}|{u 9:
=G4G2R<1ˆ=7i
+ )`i`+
8G4RR<
7=4@7A z7=4@7A =</ <1 *)(
!3j467+ =DA=D A2@) 9:
  i '
A2@) !1` 9: %&
'
%&

1601-0450
Chapter 8 - Protection

8.2.8 FREQUENCY ELEMENTS

8.2.8.1 FREQUENCY PROTECTION COMMON SETUP

The relay provides a selection to detect between Normal and Hi-Speed Freq as input to detect underfrequency,
overfrequency and rate of change of frequency (ROCOF). Compared to the regular metered voltage frequency
value, the Hi-Speed Freq input has a faster response time, but is less accurate.
The Normal frequency estimation algorithm checks the time between two positive zero-crossing of the effective
frequency signal. It also provides an extra security condition before considering that the new incoming period would
be valid and available for the estimation of the frequency. The frequency is updated with the integration of the last
16 stored periods. When there is a large change in frequency between two consecutive periods, the estimation of
the frequency is updated with the integration of the last 4 valid periods.
The Hi-Speed Freq estimation algorithm is less restrictive and checks the time between two consecutive zero-
crossings in both directions of the effective frequency signal. Therefore, one measurement (raw frequency) would
be available every half cycle. The frequency is updated with the integration of the latest valid stored periods. The
number of periods used for the calculation is specified by the setting Semicycles Set. Another estimation of the
frequency is also provided after the integration of the latest valid stored periods but considering the setting
Semicycles Reset.
The Actual value Hi-Speed Freq is available under Path: Measurement > Hi-Speed Freq.

High-Speed Frequency
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting enables measurement of Hi-Speed Freq. When enabled, all the frequency-based elements (UF, OF,
ROCOF) provide user-configurable selection between Normal and Hi-Speed Freq. The selection between
Normal and Hi-Speed Freq is specified by the setpoint Frequency Input. When disabled, all the frequency-
based elements (UF, OF, ROCOF) use Normal Frequency.

Freq Set # Semi-Cycles

Range: 5 to 16
Default: 5
Short Description:
The number of semi-cycles used for frequency estimation.

Freq Reset # Semi-Cycles

Range: 3 to 16
Default: 3
The number of semi-cycles used for frequency estimation to evaluate the reset conditions.

8.2.8.2 UNDERFREQUENCY (81U)

The relay can be used as the primary detecting relay in automatic load-shedding schemes based on
underfrequency. The need for such a relay arises if during a system disturbance, an area becomes electrically
isolated from the main system and suffers a generation deficiency due to the loss of either transmission or
generation facilities. If reserve generation is not available in the area, conditions of low system frequency occur

496 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

which can lead to a complete collapse. The relay provides four identical Underfrequency (UNDERFREQ) elements
per protection group, or a total of 24 elements, which can automatically disconnect sufficient load to restore an
acceptable balance between load and generation. The Underfrequency element can be set as an instantaneous
element with no time delay or as a definite time delayed element. The Underfrequency element has the
programmable minimum operating thresholds to prevent undesired operation during periods of light load or
unavailable voltage. The input voltages are the three phase-to-phase voltages from delta connected VTs (PTs),
three phase-to-ground voltages from wye connected VTs (PTs), or single phase auxiliary voltage. The input currents
are the three phase currents.
The Underfrequency Pickup flag is asserted when the measured frequency of the specified source is below the PKP
value and the voltage and current are above the MINIMUM levels. The Underfrequency Trip flag is asserted if the
element stays picked up for the time defined by the Pickup time delay. The element drops from Pickup without
operation if the measured frequency rises above 0.03Hz of the Pickup value and stays dropped-out for the defined
time delay before the time for operation is reached.
The minimum operating voltage setting selects the minimum voltage below which the element is blocked.
The minimum operating current setting selects the minimum current below which the element is blocked. Operation
during periods of light load are prevented.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Frequency > Underfrequency 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled

START BLOCK DELAY (only 859, 869)

Range: 0.00 to 5000.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies the length of time to block this function when motor is starting. The element is active only
when the motor is running and is blocked upon the initiation of a motor start for a period of time specified by this
setting. For example, this block may be used to allow pumps to build up head before the element trips or alarms.
A value of 0 specifies that the feature is not blocked from start. For values other than 0, the feature is disabled
when the motor is stopped and also from the time a start is detected until the time entered expires.

FREQUENCY INPUT
Range: Normal, High-Speed
Default: Normal
You can select Normal or High-speed frequency as an input. Compared to the regular metered voltage
frequency value, the high-speed frequency has the faster response but lesser accuracy. This setpoint is only
available when Hi-Speed Freq is enabled under the path: Setpoints\Protection\Frequency\Common Setup.

PICKUP
Range (normal frequency): 15.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Range (high-speed frequency): 40.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Default: 59 Hz

1601-0450 497
Chapter 8 - Protection

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 2.000 s

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 2.000 s
Default: Ph VT Bnk1-J2

VT INPUT
Range: dependent upon the order code
Default: Ph VT Bnk1-J2 or LEA Bnk1-J2, Dependent on order code

MINIMUM VOLTAGE
Range: 0.000 to 1.250 x VT in steps of 0.001 x VT
Default: 0.700 x VT
The setting sets the minimum voltage for Underfrequency element operation specified per times VT. The setpoint
prevents incorrect operation before energization of the source to the relay location, and during voltage dips.

Note:
If the 3-phase VT uses a delta connection and SIGNAL INPUT is set to Ph VT Bnk1-J2, the positive sequence voltage is used
as the supervision voltage. In such condition, the true supervision level is internally changed to 1/Ö3 of the user setting since
the base of VT here is the phase-phase voltage.

Note:
If the 3-phase VT uses a delta connection, the positive sequence voltage is used as the supervision voltage. In such
condition, the true supervision level is internally changed to 1/Ö3 of the user setting since the base of VT here is the phase-
phase voltage.

Note:
When the source input for tracking frequency differs from that used for Under Frequency function, due to frequency variations,
you may encounter notable voltage measurement errors as the frequency of input signal moves away from the tracking
frequency source input. For instance, when the setting `Frequency Input' is configured to auxiliary voltage (from the 4th VT),
while the tracking frequency comes from the main source's three-phase voltages, any difference between the frequency of the
auxiliary voltage (Vx) and the three-phase voltages (3VT) leads to a magnitude measurement error in Vx, caused by the
deviation of Vx frequency from the main frequency

CT INPUT (not for 889)

Range: dependent upon the order code
Default: CT Bank 1-J1 or CT Bank 1-K1, dependent on order code

MINIMUM CURRENT
Range: 0.000 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT

498 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Default: 0.200 x CT
The setting sets the minimum value of current required on any phase to allow the Underfrequency element to
operate. The setpoint is used to prevent underfrequency tripping during periods of light load, when this action
would have an insignificant effect on the system. A setting of zero is suspend current supervision.

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset

1601-0450 499
500
8.2.8.3
Chapter 8 - Protection

SETPOINT
FUNCTION:
Disabled FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
Trip
LED: TRIP 8S: To operate Output Relay
Latched Trip AND
1(TRIP)
Alarm Configurable in 845 & 859

OR
OR

Latched Alarm
Configurable S
AND

LATCH
SETPOINT
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND START BLOCK DELAY: R
Motor Stopped tBLK LED: ALARM
0
AND

Applicable to 869 & 859 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR

Any Alarm

OVERFREQUENCY (81O)
S
AND

LATCH SETPOINT
Command R Output Relay X
RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETPOINTS Underfreq 1 OP
OR

AND
BLOCK:
Off=0

SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS
UNDERFREQ1 UNDERFREQ1
CT INPUT PICKUP DELAY:
MINIMUM CURRENT:

Figure 186: Underfrequency Protection logic diagram

SETPOINTS
Not Applicable to 869 & 859 UNDERFREQ1
RUN UNDERFREQ1 SETPOINTS
DROPOUT DELAY:
Positive-sequence I MINIMUM PICKUP:
OUTPUT RELAYS (3-7):
869: CT Bank 1 – J1 RUN tPKP

AND
AND
Do Not Operate, Operate
AND

859: CT Bank
0<f
PICKUP tDPO
OR

SETPOINTS LED: PICKUP

SETPOINTS
VT INPUT* Fast reset delay
UNDERFREQ1 SETPOINTS 60 ms
8S*: Ph VT Bnk 1 – J2 MINIMUM VOLTAGE: 0
UNDERFREQ1
859: Ph VT Bnk
AND

RUN PICKUP: Underfreq 1 PKP

* except 859 Positive-sequence
RUN

AND
V MINIMUM

wye/delta 0 < f high-speed
PICKUP

Composite FREQUENCY f
Vx (not appliable to 859) FREQUENCY f high-speed f reset > PICKUP
FREQUENCY f reset

SETPOINTS

Freq Set #Semicycles

SETPOINTS

Freq Reset #Semicycles

SETPOINTS

Frequency Input

Normal

The relay provides identical Overfrequency (OVERFREQ) elements per protection group.
High-speed


A significant overfrequency condition, likely caused by a breaker opening and disconnecting load from a particular
generation location, can be detected and used to quickly ramp the turbine speed back to normal. If this is not done,

1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

the over speed can lead to a turbine trip, which would then subsequently require a turbine start up before restoring
the system. If the overfrequency turbine ramp down is successful, the system restoration can be much quicker. The
overfrequency monitoring feature of the relay can be used for this purpose at a generating location.
The Overfrequency feature is inhibited from operating unless the magnitude of the positive sequence or auxiliary
voltage rises above a threshold. When the supply source is energized, the overfrequency delay timer is allowed to
start timing only when the threshold is exceeded and the frequency is above the programmed Pickup level. In the
same way, when an overfrequency condition starts the overfrequency delay timer and the voltage falls below the
threshold before the timer has expired, the element resets without operating.
The Overfrequency element may be set as an instantaneous element with no time delay, or as a definite time
delayed element. The Overfrequency element has a fixed minimum operating threshold to prevent undesired
operation during periods of unavailable voltage. The input voltages are the three phase-to-phase voltages from
delta connected VTs (PTs), three phase-to-ground voltages from wye connected VTs (PTs), or single phase auxiliary
voltage.
The settings of this function are applied to each source to produce Pickup and Operate flags. The Overfrequency
Pickup flag is asserted when the measured frequency of the specified source is above the PKP value and the
voltage is above the threshold. The Overfrequency Operate flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the
time defined by the Pickup time delay. The element drops from Pickup without operation if the measured frequency
decreases below 0.03 Hz of the Pickup value and stays dropped out for the defined time delay before the time for
operation is reached.
The minimum operating voltage is set as a threshold below which the element is blocked.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Frequency > Overfrequency 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: dependent upon the order code
Default: Ph VT Bnk1-J2 or LEA Bnk1-J2, Dependent on order code
This setting provides selection of the frequency input.

FREQUENCY INPUT
Range: Normal, High-Speed
Default: Normal
You can select Normal or High-speed frequency as an input. Compared to the regular metered voltage
frequency value, the high-speed frequency has the faster response but lesser accuracy. This setpoint is only
available when Hi-Speed Freq is enabled under the path: Setpoints\Protection\Frequency\Common Setup.

START BLOCK DELAY (only 859, 869)

Range: 0.00 to 5000.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s

1601-0450 501
Chapter 8 - Protection

This setting specifies the length of time to block this function when motor is starting. The element is active only
when the motor is running and is blocked upon the initiation of a motor start for a period of time specified by this
setting. For example, this block may be used to allow pumps to build up head before the element trips or alarms. A
value of 0 specifies that the feature is not blocked from start. For values other than 0, the feature is disabled when
the motor is stopped and also from the time a start is detected until the time entered expires.

PICKUP
Range (normal frequency): 15.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Range (high-speed frequency): 40.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Default: 59 Hz

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 2.000 s

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 2.000 s

MINIMUM VOLTAGE
Range: 0.000 to 1.250 x VT in steps of 0.001 x VT
Default: 0.700 x VT
The setting sets the minimum voltage for Overfrequency element operation specified per times VT.

Note:
If the 3-phase VT uses a delta connection and SIGNAL INPUT is set to Ph VT Bnk1-J2, the positive sequence voltage is used
as the supervision voltage. In such condition, the true supervision level is internally changed to 1/Ö3 of the user setting since
the base of VT here is the phase-phase voltage.

Note:
If the 3-phase VT uses a delta connection, the positive sequence voltage is used as the supervision voltage. In such
condition, the true supervision level is internally changed to 1/Ö3 of the user setting since the base of VT here is the phase-
phase voltage.

Note:
When the source input for tracking frequency differs from that used for Under Frequency function, due to frequency variations,
you may encounter notable voltage measurement errors as the frequency of input signal moves away from the tracking
frequency source input. For instance, when the setting `Frequency Input' is configured to auxiliary voltage (from the 4th VT),
while the tracking frequency comes from the main source's three-phase voltages, any difference between the frequency of the
auxiliary voltage (Vx) and the three-phase voltages (3VT) leads to a magnitude measurement error in Vx, caused by the
deviation of Vx frequency from the main frequency.

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand

502 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Default: Off

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset

1601-0450 503
504
8.2.8.4
Chapter 8 - Protection

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
LED: TRIP
8S: To operate Output Relay
SETPOINT
AND

1(TRIP)
FUNCTION: Configurable in 845 & 859
OR

Disabled
S
Trip
AND

LATCH
Latched Trip
R
Alarm

OR
LED: ALARM
Latched Alarm
AND

voltage, current and frequency supervision.

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Configurable

Figure 187: Overfrequency logic diagram

OR

Any Alarm
SETPOINT
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND S
AND

START BLOCK DELAY:

Motor Stopped tBLK 0 LATCH SETPOINT
Applicable to 869 & 859 Command R Output Relay X
RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
SETPOINTS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BLOCK:
Overfreq1 OP
OR

Off=0

AND
Voltage Inputs
None

SETPOINTS SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS
OVERFREQ1

FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE (81R)

SIGNAL INPUT*: OVERFREQ1 PICKUP DELAY:
MINIMUM OPERATING SETPOINTS
WYE DELTA VOLTAGE: OVERFREQ1
OVERFREQ1
VA VAB DROPOUT DELAY:
RUN PICKUP:
VB VBC Positive-sequence RUN tPKP

AND
V MINIMUM
AND

VC VCA tDPO
OR

f PICKUP
Composite

Vx* FREQUENCY f LED: PICKUP

FREQUENCY f high-speed
*Not applicable to 859 FREQUENCY f reset FAST RESET DELAY
SETPOINTS 60 ms FlexLogic Operands
SETPOINTS 0
OVERFREQ1 Overfreq1 PKP
AND

PICKUP:
Freq Set #Semicycles
RUN

AND
Freq Reset #Semicycles
f high-speed PICKUP
From: Setpoints\Protection\
Frequency\Common Setup
f reset < PICKUP

SETPOINTS

Frequency Input

Normal
High-speed 


There is one Frequency Rate of Change protection element which can respond to rate of change of frequency with

1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

The Rate of Change element may be set as an instantaneous element with no time delay or as a definite time
delayed element. The rate of change element has the programmable minimum operating voltage and current
thresholds to prevent undesired operation under specific system conditions.
The settings of this function are applied to each source to produce Pickup and Trip flags.
The Frequency Rate of Change Pickup flag is asserted when the calculated frequency rate of change of the
specified source is above the PKP value, the voltage and current are above the MINIMUM levels, and the frequency
is within a certain range. The Frequency Rate of Change Trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the
time defined by the Pickup time delay. The element instantaneously drops from Pickup without operation, if the
frequency rate of change drops below 96% of the Pickup value, before the time for operation is reached.
The minimum voltage and current thresholds select the minimum voltage and current below which the element is
blocked.
The minimum and maximum frequencies set the operating frequency range out of which the element is blocked.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Frequency > Frequency Rate of Change 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled
The selection of Trip, Latched Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, or Configurable setting enables the element.

FREQUENCY INPUT
Range: Normal, High-Speed
Default: Normal
You can select Normal or High-speed frequency as an input. Compared to the regular metered voltage
frequency value, the high-speed frequency has the faster response but lesser accuracy. This setpoint is only
available when Hi-Speed Freq is enabled under the path: Setpoints\Protection\Frequency\Common Setup.

TREND
Range: Decreasing, Increasing, Bi-directional
Default: Decreasing
The setting allows configuring of the element to respond to increasing or decreasing frequency, or to a frequency
change in either direction.

PICKUP
Range: 0.10 to 15.00 Hz/sec in steps of 0.01 Hz/sec
Default: 0.50 Hz/sec
The setting specifies an intended Pickup threshold.
For applications monitoring a decreasing trend, set TREND to Decreasing and specify the Pickup threshold
accordingly. The operating condition is: -df/dt > PKP.
For applications monitoring an increasing trend, set TREND to Increasing and specify the pickup threshold
accordingly. The operating condition is: df/dt > PKP.

1601-0450 505
Chapter 8 - Protection

For applications monitoring rate of change of frequency in any direction, set TREND to “Bi-Directional” and
specify the Pickup threshold accordingly. The operating condition can be either of the above two conditions.

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 2.000 s
This setting provides a definite Pickup time delay. Instantaneous operation is selected by a Pickup time delay
setting of 0.000 s.

MINIMUM FREQUENCY
Range: 20.00 to 80.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz (3.x.x, normal speed with 4.xx)
Range: 40.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz (4.xx high speed)
Default: 45.00 Hz
The setting defines the minimum frequency level required for operation of the element.
The setting may be used to effectively block the feature based on frequency. For example, if the intent is to
monitor an increasing trend but only if the frequency is already above certain level, this setting is set to the
required frequency level.

MAXIMUM FREQUENCY
Range: 20.00 to 80.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz (3.x.x, normal speed with 4.xx)
Range: 40.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz (4.xx high speed)
Default: 65.00 Hz
The setting defines the maximum frequency level required for operation of the element.
The setting may be used to effectively block the feature based on frequency. For example, if the intent is to
monitor a decreasing trend but only if the frequency is already below a certain level (such as for load shedding),
this setting is set to the required frequency level.

VT INPUT
Range: dependent upon the order code
Default: Ph VT Bnk1-J2 or LEA Bnk1-J2, Dependent on order code
This setting provides selection of the frequency input.

MINIMUM VOLTAGE
Range: 0.000 to 1.250 x VT in steps of 0.001 x VT
Default: 0.700 x VT
The setting defines the minimum voltage level required for operation of the element. The supervising function
responds to the positive-sequence voltage. Overvoltage supervision is used to prevent operation under specific
system conditions such as faults.

506 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Note:
If the 3-phase VT uses a delta connection and FREQUENCY INPUT is set to Ph VT Bnk1-J2, the positive sequence voltage is
used as the supervision voltage. In such condition, the true supervision level is internally changed to 1/Ö3 of the user setting
since the base of VT here is the phase-phase voltage.

Note:
If the 3-phase VT uses a delta connection, the positive sequence voltage is used as the supervision voltage. In such
condition, the true supervision level is internally changed to 1/Ö3 of the user setting since the base of VT here is the phase-
phase voltage.

CT INPUT
Range: dependent upon the order code
Default: CT Bank1-J1 or CT Bank1-K1, dependent on order code
This setting provides the current bank selection for the minimum current setting.

MINIMUM CURRENT
Range: 0.000 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 0.200 x CT
This setting defines the minimum current level required for operation of the element. The supervising function
responds to the positive-sequence current. Typical application includes load shedding. Set the Pickup threshold
to zero if no overcurrent supervision is required. The setting of zero suspends the current supervision.

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The element will be blocked when the selected operand is asserted.

OUTPUT RELAYS
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate
Each relay can be selected to become either energized or de-energized when operated, and to operate as latched,
self-resetting or pulsed.

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
The selection of the Enabled setting enables the events of the function.

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset

1601-0450 507
Chapter 8 - Protection

This setting is used to define the operation of an element target message. When disabled, no target message is
issued upon operation of the element. When set to Self-Reset, the target message and its LED indication
follow the operate state of the element, and self-reset once the operate element condition clears. When set to
Latched, the target message will remain visible after the element output returns to logic 0 until a RESET
command is received by the relay.

508 1601-0450
1601-0450
LED: TRIP
AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR

Any Trip
SETPOINT
FUNCTION: S
AND

LATCH
Disabled
R
Trip
LED: ALARM
Latched Trip
AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Alarm

OR
OR

Any Alarm
Latched Alarm
Configurable S
AND

LATCH SETPOINT
Command R Output Relay X
SETPOINTS
RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
BLOCK:
Off=0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETPOINTS

AND
FreqRate1 OP
OR

FREQ RATE TREND:

Current Inputs SETPOINTS Decreasing

OR
SETPOINTS FREQ RATE Increasing

FREQ RATE MINIMUM CURRENT: Bi-directional

CT INPUT: RUN

OR
CT Bank 1 – J1 Positive-sequence SETPOINTS
OR

I MINIMUM
Only 850 and 845 SETPOINTS
FREQ RATE
Voltage Inputs FREQ RATE PICKUP: PICKUP DELAY:
None FlexLogic Operands
RUN tPKP

AND
FreqRate1 Dwn OP

AND
SETPOINTS
-df/dt PICKUP 0
FREQ RATE SETPOINTS
VT INPUT: SETPOINTS
FREQ RATE SETPOINTS
869 Ph VT Bnk 1 – J2 MINIMUM VOLTAGE: FREQ RATE
FREQ RATE PICKUP: PICKUP DELAY:
859 Ph VT RUN
AND RUN tPKP

Figure 188: Frequency Rate-of-Change Protection logic diagram

Positive-sequence
V MINIMUM FreqRate1 Up OP
wye/delta df/dt PICKUP 0

Composite SETPOINTS
FreqRate1 Up PKP
Vx FREQ RATE
MIN FREQUENCY:

FREQ RATE FreqRate1 Dwn PKP

Note: Aux Voltage (Vx) is not applicable to MAX FREQUENCY:
859 LED: PICKUP
RUN
FREQUENCY f
f > MIN & f < MAX

FreqRate1 PKP
OR


RATE OF CHANGE df/dt

509
Chapter 8 - Protection
Chapter 8 - Protection

8.2.8.5 FAST UNDERFREQUENCY

Frequency variations originate from unbalance conditions between generation and load. The main reasons for these
conditions are given:
● Inadequate load forecast or deficient generation capacity programming.
● Busbars, generator group or interconnection feeders trip.
● System splits into islands.
When the frequency variation is small, the unbalance condition is corrected by the generator regulator. In the case
of big frequency variations, the regulator is not able to correct itself, and the frequency value decreases which the
danger of losing generation capacity.
If this underfrequency condition is not corrected a general blackout may occur.
In case of a shortage of generation capacity, the only possible way of recovering the stability of the system is
through a selective load shedding scheme. The load disconnection is done when the frequency goes down below
certain thresholds, in order to provide adequate reaction time for the generators to recover via their speed
regulators.
It is important to point out that when the frequency decreases quickly, relay operation based on the detection of the
underfrequency condition may not be enough to recover stability. In this case the load shedding scheme must also
take into account the rate of change of frequency. This is done by calculating the frequency derivative over time.
Loads are shed, based not only on an absolute (static) underfrequency threshold, but also on the dynamic rate of
change of frequency.
The Fast Underfrequency element is mainly used in medium voltage and distribution substations as a selective load
shedding scheme. By doing so, frequency recovers stability and potentially dangerous situations that might affect
generators in other parts of the electrical system are avoided.
The Fast Underfrequency element measures frequency by detecting the consecutive voltage zero crossings and
measuring the time between them. The measured frequency has a range between 20 to 70 Hz. The out-of-range
measurement will be classified as invalid, which will not affect the behavior of the SET and RESET counters. The
fast frequency is the average value of the measured frequency in a short window. Compared to the regular metered
voltage frequency value, the fast frequency has the faster response but lesser accuracy.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Frequency > Fast Underfrequency > Common Setup

FREQUENCY INPUT
Range: dependent upon the order code
Default: Ph VT Bnk1-J2
This setting provides the selections for the frequency signal source.

MINIMUM VOLTAGE
Range: 0.10 to 1.10 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Default: 0.40 x VT
The setting sets the minimum voltage for all Fast Underfrequency elements operation specified per times VT.
The setpoint prevents incorrect operation if the voltage decreases below the threshold.

510 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

Note:
If the 3-phase VT uses a delta connection and SIGNAL INPUT is set to Ph VT Bnk1-J2, the positive sequence voltage is used
as the supervision voltage. In such condition, the true supervision level is internally changed to 1/Ö3) of the user setting since
the base of VT here is the phase-phase voltage.

Note:
If the 3-phase VT uses a delta connection, the positive sequence voltage is used as the supervision voltage. In such
condition, the true supervision level is internally changed to 1/Ö3 of the user setting since the base of VT here is the phase-
phase voltage.

SEMICYCLES SET
Range: 1 to 20 in steps of 1
Default: 3
This setting specifies a SET counter prior to picking up. When the frequency is detected to be below the setting
(and the rate of change is below the setting as well if in the DF/DT Type), the element starts counting for
however many consecutive half-periods (semi cycles) it continues below the setting. If the SET counter is
reached, the pickup signal of the element is activated and the element starts the delay timer set independently
for each element. However, the invalid frequency measurement will not affect the SET counter.

SEMICYCLES RESET
Range: 0 to 4 in steps of 1
Default: 0
If the frequency transiently restores and pickup conditions are not satisfied, the element freezes the SET counter
to pick up and starts counting the number of semi cycles to reset the element. If the count of semi cycles to reset
reaches the value set in the setting SEMICYCLES RESET, then the element is reset. On the other hand, if the
pickup conditions are satisfied before reset, the element will continue the count of semi cycles to set from where
it was left. The invalid frequency measurement will not affect the SET counter.
The SEMICYCLES SET and SEMICYCLES RESET settings are common for the eight Fast Underfrequency
elements.
Path: Setpoints > Protection > Group 1(6) > Frequency > Fast Underfrequency > Fast Underfreq1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled

TYPE
Range: UF Only, UF and DF/DT
Default: UF Only
This setting specifies the input to the element. The UF Only type uses only the frequency value. The UF and
DF/DT type considers both frequency and rate of change of frequency (df/dt) as the input.

1601-0450 511
Chapter 8 - Protection

UNDERFREQENCY PICKUP
Range: 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Default: 59.00 Hz
This setpoint sets the Underfrequency Pickup level.

RATE OF CHANGE PICKUP

Range: -10.00 to -0.10 Hz/sec in steps of 0.01 Hz/sec
Default: -0.75 Hz/sec
This setpoint sets the Rate of Change Pickup level.

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 1.000 s

RESET DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000 s

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Self-reset

512 1601-0450
 Chapter 8 - Protection

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
LED: TRIP

AND
SETPOINT
FUNCTION: Operate Output Relay 1(TRIP)

OR
Disabled=0
S

AND
Trip
Latched Trip LATCH
OR

Alarm R
Latched Alarm LED: ALARM

AND
Configurable
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR
Any Alarm

AND
S

SETPOINT LATCH SETPOINT

SETPOINT R
SETPOINT MINIMUM VOLTAGE: Command Output Relay X
SETPOINTS
UF PICKUP:
AND

BLOCK: RUN RESET Do Not Operate, Operate

PICKUP DELAY:
Off=0 RUN SETPOINT
V MINIMUM RESET DELAY: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SEMICYCLES SET:

AND

OR
0 < f < PICKUP tPKP Fast UF 1 OP

OR
J2 Voltage Input RUN Counter
SETPOINT tRST
RESET
FREQUENCY INPUT: SETPOINT
TYPE:
LED: PICKUP
WYE DELTA
UF Only

AND
VA VAB
SETPOINT
VB VBC Positive-sequence UF and df/dt SETPOINT FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SEMICYCLES RESET:
VC VCA ROC PICKUP: Fast UF 1 PKP
RUN Counter
RUN
Composite
RESET
Frequency f Rate of Change df/dt df/dt < PICKUP
Vx
894127C1.vsdx

Figure 189: Fast Underfrequency logic diagram

1601-0450 513
Chapter 8 - Protection

514 1601-0450
 CHAPTER 9

MONITORING
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

516 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

9.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter contains the following sections:

Chapter Overview 517
Monitoring Overview 518
Motor Monitoring 519
Breaker monitoring 565
Power Quality/Voltage Disturbance 579
Functions 583
Harmonic Detection 600
Transient Ground Fault Detection 603
Resistance Temperature Detector Functions 616
Loss of Communications 622

1601-0450 517
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

9.2 MONITORING OVERVIEW

b=FM IF=@JFA c:DFA:=FDG

   
IH:K< IF=@JFA c:DFA:=FDG

 7/0*80/

g=<?h<= i=@FDG IJ==<DA

def

g=<?h<= j<?HAk
7/5802 5+5/ 7*/

mnonpq rsntquvwqs xowyn

 !! 9:;<= >?@A:=

)*+* ,*-+./0
1.23+4526

"!! # )*+* ,*-+./0

z{|}~€ ‚ƒ„ƒ„€~ B<C?DE NOPOQ RS
TUVV
WX
Y
Z [\]
V
Y
Z^X_
[\]
V
$! !% ”•ƒƒ–
)*+* —|~„ƒ„€~
,*-+./0 9JHK<E LJAMJAK `aaZV
WX [\]
V

†) †0‡-0/*+./0
)*+* ,*-+./0
&%'(!# BFGFA?H I:JDA<=K

ˆ‰ŠŠ)*+*
‰‹ Œ‰Ž‘’“‰Š
,*-+./0
l# bFC< :˜ B?™ bFC<=K


 

 

 

 

Figure 190: Monitoring Display Hierarchy

518 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

9.3 MOTOR MONITORING

9.3.1 BROKEN ROTOR BAR

Under healthy rotor conditions, there will be only the slip frequency (s*fs) current in the rotor. A broken rotor bar
creates an asymmetry in the rotor circuit which in turn creates a negative rotating magnetic field at slip frequency (-
s*fs) in the rotor. This negative slip frequency component in the rotor creates fs*(1-2*s) component in the stator. This
causes electromagnetic torque and speed oscillation at twice the slip frequency. This results infs*(1+2*s) and other
harmonics in stator current at fs*(1+2*k*s), where k is an integer and s is the slip. A defect in a rotor bar of an
induction motor causes modulation of the stator current. The impact of broken rotor bars on the stator current can
be determined by analyzing in the frequency domain. This approach to detecting rotor bar failures is called Motor
Current Signature Analysis (MCSA).
There are two methods of detecting a Broken Rotor Bar component.
1. Power Based Coherent Demodulation: This technique uses multiplication of voltage and current samples
thereby shifting the fundamental to DC and fault frequency to lower closer to DC value, to detect the broken
rotor bar component. This method is running when voltage is available and is meeting MOTOR VOLTAGE
SUPERVISION setting check.
2. Conventional current based FFT method: In case voltage is not available or the voltage magnitude is lower
than the MOTOR VOLTAGE SUPERVISION setting value, the algorithm switches to analyzing the frequency
spectrum from current samples only, to detect the broken rotor bar component.
The spectral components due to broken rotor bars can be expressed as: fb = (1 ± 2s)f1. The lower component is
due to broken bars, and the upper one is due to a related speed oscillation. Since the broken rotor bar disturbances
are of an “impulse nature” (not a pure sine wave), the broken rotor bar spectral components can be expressed more
accurately as: fS = (1 ± 2k*s)*f1, where k = 1,2, 3…
The amplitude of harmonic spectral components due to rotor bar defects, where k >= 2, is dependent on the
geometry of the fault. Their amplitude is significantly lower than the “main” sidebar component and they can be
ignored in this analysis.
The following figure shows the frequency spectrum of a Motor with Broken Rotor Bar:

1601-0450 519
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Figure 191: EFT of Stator Current of Induction Machine with Rotor Bar Fault

The figure above shows that the envelope of the stator current waveform is heavily modulated with the broken rotor
frequency present at nearly ±12 Hz with respect to the fundamental frequency.
Patented Power Based Coherent Demodulation method is based on the multiplication of the current signal with any
supply of fundamental frequency signal. The supply frequency signal is readily available in the voltage signal.
Hence, for coherent demodulation, the current signal is multiplied by the corresponding phase or line voltage signal
Va*Ia. This approach allows to increase the contrast between fault signature by shifting fault characteristic
frequency closer to the DC in the whole spectrum.
The FFT of the resultant multiplied signal is shown in the following figure. Comparison of the two figures shows a
clear contrast between fault signature and fundamental frequency in coherent demodulated signal compared to only
current FFT method signal.

520 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Note:
This element is not applicable to synchronous motor applications.

Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Broken Rotor Bar

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Default: Disabled
When Alarm is selected and the Broken Rotor Bar operates, the LED alarm flashes, and self-resets when the
operating conditions are cleared. When Latched Alarm is selected, and the Broken Rotor Bar operates, the
LED alarm flashes during the Broken Rotor Bar operating condition, and is continually lit after the conditions are
cleared. The LED alarm is cleared by issuing the reset command. When Configurable is selected, the
ALARM LED does not turn on automatically. They need to be configured using their own menus and FlexLogic
operands.

START OF BRB OFFSET

Range: -12.00 to 11.99 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Default: 0.40 Hz
This setting defines the beginning of the frequency range where the spectral component due to a rotor bar
failure, is searched.
The setting must be set to a value equal to:
fstart_offset = 2*s* f1 – max(0.3, min(2*s* f1 – 0.4, 1.0))

1601-0450 521
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

where:
f1 =○system frequency
s = ○the motor slip at full load
max○ = returns the largest of its arguments
min○= returns the smallest of its arguments.

For example, if the full load slip is 0.01, set this setting to:
2*0.01*60 – 0.8 = 0.40 Hz, for a 60 Hz power system.

END OF BRB OFFSET

Range: -12.00 to 11.99 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Default: 2.00 Hz
This setting defines the end of the frequency range where the spectral component due to a rotor bar failure, is
searched.
This setting must be set to a value equal to:
fend_offset = 2*s* f1 + max(0.3, min(2*s* f1 – 0.4, 1.0))
where:
f1 =○system frequency
s = ○the motor slip at full load
max○ = returns the largest of its arguments
min○= returns the smallest of its arguments.
For example, if the full load slip is 0.01, set this setting to:
2*0.01*60 + 0.8 = 2.00 Hz, for a 60 Hz power system.

START BLOCK DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 60.00 s
This setting specifies the time for which the broken rotor bar detection algorithm is blocked after the motor status
has changed from “Stopped” to “Running”. This ensures that the broken rotor bar element is active only when
the motor is running.

MINIMUM MOTOR LOAD

Range: 0.50 to 1.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01 x FLA
Default: 0.70 x FLA
This setting is used to block the data acquisition of the Broken Rotor Bar detection function, as long as the motor
load is below this setting. The Broken Rotor Bar detection algorithm cannot accurately determine the BRB
spectral component when a motor is lightly loaded.

MAXIMUM LOAD DEVIATION

Range: 0.00 to 1.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01 x FLA

522 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Default: 0.10 x FLA

This setting is used to block the data acquisition of the Broken Rotor Bar detection function, as long as the
standard deviation of the motor load is above this setting. The Broken Rotor Bar detection algorithm cannot
accurately determine the BRB spectral component when the motor load varies.

MAXIMUM CURRENT UNBALANCE

Range: 0.0 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%
Default: 15.0%
This setting is used to block the data acquisition of the Broken Rotor Bar detection function, as long as the
current unbalance is above this setting. The Broken Rotor Bar detection algorithm cannot accurately determine
the BRB spectral component in a current unbalance situation.

MOTOR VOLTAGE SUPERVISION

Default: 50.0%
Range: 0.0 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%
This setting is used to switch the detection technique from a Power based Coherent demodulation to a Current
based FFT detection method in case the minimum of the three phase-to-phase voltages falls below the setting
configured. This voltage is expressed as a percentage of the Setpoints > System > Motor > Motor Nameplate
Voltage setting. This setting is hidden for non-voltage order code devices.

PICKUP
Default: -40 dB
Range: -60 to -12 dB in steps of -1dB
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for this element. The pickup threshold is usually be set to a level
between –54 dB (likely a cracked rotor bar) and –50 dB (likely a broken rotor bar).

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 5 to 600 min in steps of 5 min
Default: 10 min
This setting is used to set the pickup time delay used to delay the pickup of the detection of the Broken Rotor
Bar condition.

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 5 to 600 min in steps of 5 min
Default: 10 min
This setting is used to set the dropout time delay used to delay the dropout of the detection of the Broken Rotor
Bar condition.

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

1601-0450 523
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The Broken Rotor Bar is blocked when the selected operand is asserted.

EVENTS:
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS:
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Self-reset

524 1601-0450
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

525
commercially available equipment and industrial processes. The condition of a rotating machine can be effectively

electric machine as an implicit transducer built into machine-driven equipment; the current behavior can then be
monitored using a non-intrusive method called Electrical Signature Analysis (ESA). The concept is to treat the
Rotating machines are a critical component of many industrial processes and are frequently integrated in

used to show various operating conditions of the machine as well as the load it is driving.
ikjiihgf

 @
#
  

  ?
>" <  

"   "
= "   < $;
   "
"!
> #,#, #; B
  #!

G$# !B ?

ELECTRICAL SIGNATURE ANALYSIS (ESA)

  L$ 
!! FB?   "
    ! 
L#
$ FB ?   H  $
:9876/51 4321.0/.- $ !B B I
 $ B


" #  "
  
$
 #!

G$# !B
$ 
!! FB
#
$ FB
 $ !B B
dute]cboto a` _ets^]


From
  ? \  
>  =H J I   H
*)( ! [ZOY STXTW VUTPTSRQPON
= "   < $; < # + 
&'&    <$M
   K
   !  ! %$
!   EDC
"!
:9876/51 4321.0/.- %$
$ !

%$
  

 
  ,    
< "! B

 

Figure 192: Broken Rotor Bar Logic Diagram

+ ! ""    <$M




 
  


!

 "< 
!
!   @ $
A $  

  
 
  + !


:9876/51 4321.0/.-

B!$ 
$

1601-0450
9.3.2
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Proven ESA algorithms are implemented in the 8 Series to detect various failure modes in a rotating machine and
its assembly. Some of the proven ESA applications are described as follows. Traditionally, machine condition can
be supervised by measuring quantities such as noise, vibration and temperature. The implementation of these
measuring systems is expensive and proves only to be economical in the case of large motors or critical
applications. A solution to this problem is to use quantities that are already measured in a drive system e.g. the
machine stator current, often required for command purposes. ESA is the technique used to analyze and monitor
the trend of dynamic energized systems.
Specifically, ESA is the monitoring of stator current or voltage (more precisely supply current) of the machine. A
single stator current or voltage monitoring system is commonly used (monitoring only one of the three phases of the
machine supply). Machine stator windings are used as a transducer in ESA, picking the signals (induced currents
and voltages) from the rotor (but also revealing information about the state of the stator). Various electrical and
mechanical fault conditions present in the machine further modulate machine current and/or voltage signal and
contribute to additional sideband harmonics. Faults in machine components produce corresponding anomalies in
the magnetic field and change the mutual and self-inductance of then machine and this appears in the supply
current and/or voltage spectrum as sidebands around line (supply, grid) frequency. Based on fault signatures motor
faults can be identified and their severity can be accessed.

Note:
The technology discussed in this manual has been patented (filed) with following disclosure numbers.

● GE 73745/316350: System, method and procedure for Industrial motor electrical signature analysis.
● US 15/489, 228: An autonomous procedure for electrical signature analysis based machine M&D.

9.3.2.1 ESA PROCEDURE

The following high-level procedure describes how a motor is diagnosed:
1. ESA captures current signal from the CT sensing mechanism available in the relay. No additional sensing or
wiring mechanism is required to install or use ESA.
2. Stator phase A current measured by the J1 slot is used for the purpose of motor current signature analysis.
3. Before doing analysis, a data quality check is performed to verify if the power quality condition is good.
Voltage, frequency, THD, signal stability and voltage/current unbalance levels are checked to be within
satisfactory limits. Signature analysis is performed only if the data quality check passes and an event is
generated if the check fails.
4. Once the data quality check has passed, FFT is applied on J1 phase A current samples to convert time
domain data into frequency domain and obtain current magnitudes at various frequency ranges of interest.
5. For each fault or anomaly, fault frequencies are computed based on supply frequency, speed, harmonic
factor, slip etc. depending on the fault type.
6. Normalized dB magnitudes are computed at fault frequencies (based on formulae) as the ratio of magnitude
at fault frequency and rated magnitude i.e.
Magnitude in dB = 20 * Log10 (X1/Xr),
○ where 'X1' is peak magnitude within fault frequency 'f1' vicinity range in I^2 FFT
○ 'Xr' is rated quantity^2 of motor with same unit.
○ The Rated Current of Machine is MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS (FLA) in settings under System >
Motor > Setup.

526 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

7. Peak magnitude in dB is computed as the highest magnitude observed at a specific fault frequency vicinity
range and Energy in dB is computed as the ratio of root mean square of 3 points around the fault frequency
corresponding to peak magnitude, w.r.t rated magnitude.
Energy in dB = 20 * Log10 (E1/Er)
where:
○ 'E1' is root mean square of 3 points around peak magnitude at fault frequency 'f1'
○ 'Er' is rated quantity or magnitude of motor (rated current) with same unit.
○ The Rated Current of Machine is MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS (FLA) in settings under System >
Motor > Setup.
8. During baseline mode, the dBs are computed as per steps 6 and 7 which are then averaged over the entire
baseline period and then stored as averaged normalized dB with respect to each load bin of the motor. A load
bin is defined as the load interval of 10% within the 0% to 120% range of motor load operation, a total of 12
load bins.

Note:
The relay enters baseline mode at any time if the baseline data for a load bin is not available or has been erased.

1601-0450 527
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

9. During monitoring mode, the dBs are computed at every interval as per steps 6 and 7. These dB levels and
corresponding frequencies can be analyzed using an FFT spectrum analyzer, as shown in the next figure, at
Motor M&D > Records > ESA Record. This spectrum tool works like the Comtrade viewer available for
viewing transient records (Records > Transients > Transient Records) with the red, black and dark pink
lines indicating fault frequencies of bearing, mechanical and stator faults and their corresponding values. FFT
waveform will be visualized as per I^2 FFT format in file including fault frequencies and magnitudes.

Figure 193: Relative Magnitude (dB) vs. Frequency (Hz)

Note:
To support event-based monitoring, an additional FFT file is captured and saved from Motor M&D > Records > ESA Record
(Last PKP). This can be used to analyze the dB values during event conditions.

528 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

10. Based on dBs computed in steps 8 and 9, the change in Peak magnitude and Energy dBs are computed as
the maximum difference in dB levels observed during baseline and monitoring modes at any of the fault
frequencies. The following example is indicative of how a change in dB is computed at various fault
frequencies.

Figure 194: Fault indicating frequencies are highlighted

1601-0450 529
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

11. If the change in dB of peak and energy magnitude is greater than the pick up levels configured in the ESA set
points, then a corresponding fault element is triggered after the configured delay only if the level is sustained.
12. The dBs can be visualized in the form of a circle under Motor M&D > ESA Circle to determine the motor
status (normal, caution or alarm) as represented in the following figure.

Figure 195: Motor status represented in circular format

○ A circle is drawn with 3 dBs taken into consideration – baseline dB corresponding to ‘k’ value where
maximum change in dB is observed, PKP level 1 dB setting and PKP level 2 dB setting as the radius of
circles corresponding to the baseline, caution and alarm zones (‘k’ is the fault harmonic factor).
○ The entire circle is divided into 12 equal sections covering 30 degrees of circumference corresponding
to each load bin. Load bin 1 starts at 0 degrees and ends with load bin 12 at the 360 degree point in
the anti-clockwise direction.
○ The latest or last computed maximum change in dB at a specific ‘k’ is represented as a ‘dot’ in the
current operating load bin and as a trajectory of the last 10 values in the history will be represented per
load bin. The dB data represented in circle format will correspond to the maximum change in dB from
baseline dB at a specific ‘k’ value in the formula (k = 1,2,3) related to the fault.

Note:
In cases where the baseline mode is disabled or the baseline data is not available, the user can configure bearing,
mechanical and stator function elements to operate based on peak magnitude (and energy) dBs. In such cases PKP 1 and
PKP 2 settings are configured to correspond to the magnitude level (i.e. an example of 75 dB and 65 dB for PKP 1 and PKP 2
settings). However, in this case the circle will not plot any data.

530 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

13. Motor M&D data is stored as a short-term historical log with a maximum of 4800 records with data logged at
every 15 minute interval and during every intermediate PKP when the motor is in monitoring mode.
○ The file is stored in the local PC folder where EnerVista D&I Setup software is installed. The filename
format is: log_ESA(Date_timestamp).txt, example: log_ESA20170511_162126.txt
○ The file can also be converted to .csv format
○ The file can be retrieved and viewed by using EnerVista D&I Setup software software in LDR (Learned
Data Record) format under Motor M&D > Records > Historical Log, as shown in the next screenshot.
Details of learned data record view can be found in the Records section under Learned Data.
○ Additionally, the file can be converted to .xlsx or .xls format and opened using Microsoft excel for
analysis purposes or the trending of any parameter(s). T properly align data as rows/columns in the
excel format, open the file and delete cell A1 and select shift cells left.
○ The historical ESA data can also be viewed as trend charts for each sub-system of motor in the Motor
M&D menu.

Figure 196: Viewing Motor M&D data file

○ It is possible to retrieve the baseline data of all the load bins related to the ESA function as part of a
service report, which constitutes two files; ESA_baseline metering data, containing only normalized
peak dB baseline magnitudes per load bin and ESA_detailed baseline data containing all computed
baseline magnitudes per load bin at each fault frequency. The retrieved files can also be viewed offline
in EnerVista D&I Setup software.
○ An ESA health report can be generated in PDF format in Motor M&D > Records menu and contains
consolidated data of all the latest information related to the Broken Rotor Bar, Stator Inter-turn,
Bearing, Mechanical and Stator ESA functions. It also contains the latest FFT waveform and its data.
This report can be used by the maintenance team as digital records for asset management and
condition-based maintenance scheduling.

1601-0450 531
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

9.3.2.2 ESA APPLICATIONS

ESA application for Rolling Element Bearing Fault Detection

Bearing faults are only applicable to the roller element type where the ball bearing design has both outer and inner
races. For journal, sleeve or thrust bearings with alternate designs this algorithm is blocked.
The faults occurring in motor bearings are generally due to excessive load, rise of temperature inside the bearing
and use of bad lubricant. The bearing consists mainly of the outer race and inner race ways, the balls and cage.
This analysis assumes equal distance between the balls. The different faults that may occur in a bearing can be
indicated as a single parameter based on any affected component as shown in the next figure.
● Outer raceway defect
● Inner raceway defect
● Ball defect

GE Proprietary Information - Cla

Energy Connections Multilin (Confidential)
Figure 197: Ball bearing details
The Bearing Flt element uses FFT computation on the current signal to detect bearing failure on an electrical
8Series
machine. The operating condition canProject, Detailed
be defined Designvibration
as: Computing Specification
frequency related to bearing damage
using this equation.

N ω D
 b r (1 + b ) (inner race)
 2 60 Dc
N ω D
f vib =  b r (1 − b ) (outer race) (1)
 2 60 Dc
 Dc ωr Db
2

 (1 − 2
) (ball damage)
 b
D 60 Dc

where Computing stator current frequency related to bearing damage using equation (2).
● Nb is no. of rolling elements (see setpoint No of Rolling Elements for more details)
F_bearing = F_supply ± k * F_vibration (2)
● Dc is cage diameter (see setpoint Cage Diameter for more details)
k is any
● Db is rolling ball diameter (seeinteger:
setpoint1,2,3,…
Rolling Element Ball Diameter for more details)
Compute stator current frequency related to bearing damage using the following equation.
Identifying peak magnitudes or energy in dB at the stator current frequencies and calculating
change in dB magnitude w.r.t baseline (healthy mode) peak magnitudes or energy at the
corresponding stator current frequencies in dB and w.r.t each load bin as given by equations
3 and 4,
532 1601-0450
Change in Energy dB = Energy dB (Latest) – Energy dB (Baseline) (3)
Change in Peak Magnitude dB = Peak magnitude dB (Latest) – Peak magnitude dB (Baseline)
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

where
● k is any integer: 1,2,3
● fsupply is the actual supply frequency (when Frequency Tracking is Enabled), otherwise the Nominal
Frequency (programmed under System > Power System) is taken as supply frequency.
In case of I square FFT, the fault frequency equation for the bearing function will be fbearing = k * fvib
Identifying peak magnitudes or energy in dB at the stator current frequencies and calculating change in dB
magnitude for baseline (healthy mode) peak magnitudes or energy at the corresponding stator current frequencies
in dB for each load bin is given by the following equations:
Change in Energy dB = Energy dB (Latest) – Energy dB (Baseline)
Change in Peak Magnitude dB = Peak magnitude dB (Latest) – Peak magnitude dB (Baseline)

ESA Application for Mechanical Fault Detection

Although mechanical faults like Foundation looseness, Eccentricity and Misalignment (FEM) are different fault
conditions in a rotating machine, they can be identified at the same set of stator current frequencies related to
eccentricity damage. Air-gap eccentricity represents a condition when air gap distance between the rotor and the
stator is not uniform. Two types of abnormal air-gap eccentricity exist: static and dynamic. In the case of static
eccentricity the position of a minimal radial air gap is fixed, while in the case of dynamic eccentricity the position of
the minimal air gap follows the turning of the rotor. Normal (concentric) state, static and dynamic eccentricities are
illustrated in the following figure. As the rotor bars recede or approach the stator magnetic fields, they cause a
change to the current in the stator. In the case of static eccentricity, sideband components appear at frequencies.

Figure 198: Eccentricity details

The Mechanical fault detection application uses ESA computation on the current signal to detect misalignment,
eccentricity and foundation-looseness failure cases of the machine. The operating condition can be defined by
computing the ESA frequencies related to the mechanical defects (shaft misalignment, load unbalance, loose
foundation, dynamic/static eccentricity). The ESA frequencies are calculated using the following equation.

1601-0450 533
 This Mechanical fault element uses ESA computation on current signal to d
misalignment, eccentricity and foundation looseness failure cases of machine. The ope
condition can be defined as:
Chapter 9 - Monitoring
Computing the ESA frequencies related to the mechanical defects (shaft misalignment
unbalance, loose foundation, dynamic/static eccentricity) using equation (5).

2k (1 − s )
f misalignme nt = f [1 ± ] (5)
P
where
k=1, 2, 3, 4….
● k is any integer: 1,2,3
● Identifies
s is actual motor slip computed based onpeak magnitudes
rated or energy
slip and actual in dB at the stator current frequencies. Calc
input power
● maximum change in dB w.r.t
P is number of poles programmed under System > Motor > Setup baseline (healthy mode) peak magnitudes or energy a
corresponding stator current frequencies. This is performed w.r.t current load b
● fsupply is actual supply frequency (when Frequency Tracking is Enabled), otherwise Nominal Frequency
operation as given by equations 6 & 7,
(programmed under System > Power System) is taken as supply frequency.
In case of I square FFT, the fault frequency equation
Change in Energy for
dB the mechanical
= Energy function
dB (Latest) will be:dB (Baseline)
– Energy (6)
fmechanical = k * fr Change in Peak Magnitude dB = Peak magnitude dB (Latest) – Peak magnitude dB (Base
(7)
where rotational frequency in Hz (speed in rpm/60) is represented as fr
ESA(or
You can identify the peak magnitudes Application foratStator
energy in dB Fault Detection:
the mechanical fault frequencies) and calculate the
maximum change in dB at baseline (healthy mode) peak magnitudes (or energy at the corresponding fault
Stator
frequencies). This is performed with Faults
regard to theCause:
current Damage
load bin oftothe
insulation,
operationlaminations, frames
as given by the and winding due to va
following
equations: electro-mechanical and thermal stresses.
Reasons/Effect:
Change in Energy dB = Energy •dB (Latest)
Failure –ofEnergy dB (Baseline)
insulation leading to turn-turn, phase-phase, coil-coil, phase to groun
faults.
Change in Peak Magnitude dB = Peak magnitude dB (Latest) – Peak magnitude dB (Baseline)

ESA Application for Stator Fault Detection

Stator faults cause damage to insulation,
May 10, 2017laminations, frames and winding due to various
C:\NTI\Specs\SR8 electro-mechanical
Bearing & FEM Fault and
thermal stresses. Balakrishna. P

The reasons and effects of this are as follows:

● Failure of insulation leading to turn-turn, phase-phase, coil-coil, phase to ground faults
● Rotor striking the stator due to misalignment
● Shaft deflection or bearing failure causing stator laminations to puncture the coil insulation leading to coil to
ground fault
● Transients in supply voltage due to power system faults, VFDs, operation of breakers leading to turn-turn or
turn-ground fault
● Thermal stress due to overcurrent flowing due to sustained overload or fault, higher ambient temperature,
obstructed ventilation, unbalanced supply voltage etc. increases winding temperature and reduces insulation
life.
● Environment stress based on ambient temperature
The relay detects stator faults using ESA based on fault frequencies computed as:
● CF ± Supply frequency sidebands and
● CF ± Supply frequency ± Rotational frequency sidebands
where:
● CF = Center Frequency = Rotational frequency (rps) * Number of stator slots
● Rotational frequency = Running speed in rpm/60
● Sideband represents the upper and lower frequency region for the stated frequency at the center.
For example, in the following figure ‘fc’ represents the center frequency and ‘fc+fm’ or ‘fc-fm’ represents sidebands
of ‘fc’.

534 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

In case of I square FFT the stator fault frequencies will be shifted by fundamental frequency and the new fault
frequencies will be as shown in the following figure i.e. fc (CF), 'fc+fm', 'fc-fm'.

Note:
Stator ESA will not be applicable in case of no voltage or in the 1-Ph VT option based on the voltage type setting in ESA.

Figure 199: Center frequency with sidebands

The algorithm for detection of Bearing, Mechanical and Stator fault consists of two sections named the Baseline
mode and Operation mode.

Baseline Mode
This mode runs once during the commissioning/installation for a given setup of CTs, PTs and machine rating, for a
default 1 hour per load bin (baseline period - configurable) of motor operational time. All dB computations (highest
normalized peak magnitude and energy at peak magnitude) with baseline data are computed and captured for each
load bin. During the baseline period, dB computations are averaged continuously for each load bin and stored as
averaged normalized dBs. Apart from average (mean), standard deviation is also computed in a recurring fashion
continuously for each load bin and stored as Standard Deviation[N], where N = Load bin number. Thereafter the
device enters into this mode whenever there is a need to capture baseline data for a particular load bin or if the
baseline data is not captured for that particular bin during the initial 1 hour period per load bin (default) after
installation, and enters back to operational or monitoring mode instantly once baseline data is captured and stored.
FFT is run on baseline data samples to capture peak magnitude or energy for each possible harmonic factor (k =
1,2,3) related to bearing, mechanical and stator faults and the averaged values are stored in an internal file for each
load bin. Both data quality check and ESA accuracy checks are performed prior to recording data. Baseline data is
considered the data of a healthy motor. Users can clear baseline data using the ‘Clear ESA baseline data’
command and capture data again by enabling baseline mode and configuring the baseline period.

Monitoring mode
During monitoring mode ESA algorithms for bearing, mechanical and stator faults are computed every 1 minute
based on current square (Ia) samples. FFT is run on these current square (Ia) samples to capture the peak
magnitude or energy for each possible harmonic factor (k = 1,2,3) related to bearing, mechanical and stator faults,
and stored in an internal file for each load bin. Computed ESA dB magnitudes at all fault frequencies after each
interval are compared with baseline magnitudes to extract the maximum change in dB. Both data quality checks
and ESA accuracy checks are performed prior to recording data. Users can clear operational data using the Clear
ESA operational data command.
If load oscillations are present in the system, false alarms may arise specifically for mechanical and broken rotor bar
faults. If the PKP element is switching from ON to OFF and back again frequently, load oscillations may be to blame

1601-0450 535
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

and there is no need to check/correct the load condition. When a real fault occurs, the dB level is sustained and the
fault PKP element does not switch values between ON and OFF repeatedly.

9.3.2.3 ESA SETTINGS

System > Motor > Setup
ESA computation uses some of the existing settings already available. The following are the settings (shown with
their path location) that must be configured.
● Number of Poles: This setting from System > Motor > Setup is used to compute synchronous speed.
(Mandatory)
● Motor Horsepower and Motor Rated Efficiency: These settings from System > Motor > Setup are used to
compute rated input power that in turn is used for speed estimation. (Mandatory)
● Nominal frequency: This setting from System > Power System is used to compute frequency variation in
the case of data quality check. (Mandatory)
● Frequency tracking: This setting from System > Power System, if enabled, is used to compute source
frequency more accurately. Enabling this setting is recommended. (Optional)
● Rated speed: This setting from System > Motor > Setup is used for speed estimation. (Mandatory)
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > ESA

Note:
Some of the existing settings as mentioned in the preceding list will be re-used for ESA computation hence it is necessary to
configure them. Since ESA is dependent on speed and frequency, it is mandatory to configure the rated speed. In addition,
frequency tracking must be enabled for accurate ESA results.

MOTOR MANUFACTURER
Range: n/a
Default: None
Configure the name of the motor manufacturer as a character string using the information taken from the motor
nameplate data.

FUNCTION - BEARING
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
When the Enabled function is selected, the element checks for the Bearing (Eccentricity) Fault status as
programmed.

FUNCTION - MECHANICAL (MECH)

Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
When the Enabled function is selected, the element checks for the mechanical (FEM) Fault status as
programmed.

FUNCTION - STATOR
Range: Disabled, Enabled

536 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Default: Disabled
When the Enabled function is selected, the element checks for the stator Fault status as programmed.

MOTOR TYPE
Range: IND, VFD-IND, Sync
Default: IND
Configure the motor type as Line Fed Induction Motor (IND) or VFD fed Induction Motor (VFD-IND) or Line Fed
Synchronous Motor (Sync). Where the VFD option is required, ensure other settings related to VFD are also
configured under System > Motor > VFD.

VOLTAGE TYPE
Range: 3-Ph VT, 1-Ph VT, No VT
Default: 3-Ph VT
Configure if the voltage input to the relay is available through VT as:
3-Ph
○ VT, if three-phase voltage input is available.
1-Ph
○ VT, if only single-phase voltage input is available.
No ○VT, if no voltage input is available.

Setting dependency: If the voltage type chosen is “No VT” (either because VT is not available with VFD or VT is
on the bus side of the system), then VFD will be considered as voltage-less. 1-Ph VT option is not applicable for
VFD.

DATA QUALITY CHECK

Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
When this setpoint is Enabled, FFT computation on current samples is only performed when data quality checks
are passed. If input phase A current fails any of the following data quality checks, the ESA element asserts a
FlexLogic operand and generates the event Data Quality Check Fail.
Frequency
○ measured shall be within +/- 5% limits of nominal frequency, except for VFD based on Motor type
setting.
Voltage
○ measured shall be within +/- 10% limits of nominal voltage (voltage order code) except for VFD
based on Motor type setting.
THD○ (total harmonic distortion) of phase current computed shall be less than 5% of nominal frequency.
Current
○ unbalance in system computed shall be less than 10% of the FLA.
Voltage
○ unbalance in system computed shall be less than 5%. (Voltage unbalance as per IEC can be
computed as the ratio of V2/V1 represented as % similar to current unbalance, where V1 is pos seq voltage
and V2 is neg seq voltage from metering)
The○total number of cycles of data collected shall be the integral number of cycles for both 50 Hz and 60 Hz
systems i.e. time length shall be multiples of 20 ms and 16.67 ms for 50 Hz and 60 Hz systems respectively.
Due to power supply issues or site specific conditions, the data quality check may not always pass. Under such
conditions, the data quality check may be disabled by operator, however, the performance of ESA algorithms under
such conditions is questionable and should be considered case to case with added scrutiny.

1601-0450 537
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

BASELINE PERIOD
Range: 1 to 300 mins in steps of 1 min
Default: 60 mins
Baseline period indicates the duration of time (motor running hours) that the relay stays in this period to capture
baseline data, during installation or commissioning, for extracting baseline (healthy) dB magnitudes. It should be
set based on motor conditions. If the motor is expected to operate at different load levels and is older, it is better
to have larger baseline period. If the motor usually operates at a set load and is newer, a shorter baseline period
can be used.

BASELINE MODE
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
Baseline mode is disabled by default. During installation/commissioning baseline mode must be enabled along
with having a set baseline period. The relay will capture baseline data for the specified time period then go back
to operational mode automatically. If necessary, the user can clear the baseline data and restart data capture by
enabling baseline mode and setting or changing the baseline period.

NUMBER OF ROLLING ELEMENTS

Range: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
Default: 1
Number of rolling elements must be configured using the motor bearing specification information provided by
manufacturer.

CAGE DIAMETER
Range: 0.001 to 1000.000 inches in steps of 0.001
Default: 0.500 inch
Cage diameter needs to be configured using the motor bearing specification information provided by the
manufacturer. See ‘Dc’ in the following figure: Ball bearing cross-sectional view for reference.

ROLLING ELEMENT BALL DIAMETER

Range: 0.001 to 1000.000 inches in steps of 0.001
Default: 0.100 inch
Rolling element ball diameter needs to be configured using the motor bearing specification information provided
by the manufacturer. See ‘Db’ in the following figure: Ball bearing cross-sectional view for reference.

538 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Figure 200: Ball bearing cross-sectional view

NO. OF STATOR SLOTS

Range: 1 to 500 in steps of 1
Default: 0
Configure the number of stator slots based on the motor design. This information is available from the
manufacturer or found in the motor technical manuals.

BEARING FAULT PKP STAGE 1(2)

Range: 1 to 100 dB in steps of 1 dB
Default: 45 dB (55 dB)
Configure the minimum dB level above the baseline dB level (for any load bin) at which the bearing fault operand
level 1 (level 2) picks up. This setting is applicable to both peak magnitude and energy at peak magnitude.
ESA operates and generates an event when change in dB, ∆dB value is greater than the pickup level in dB and
is sustained for the pickup delay time for the specific load bin. Change in dB, ∆dB is computed from actual dB
level minus baseline dB.
Example 1 - when Baseline Mode is Enabled
Pickup level (dBpkp) is set at 25dB
Baseline dB (dBbaseline) computed by Baseline Mode = -80dB
Actual dB level required to operate = dBbaseline + dBpkp =-80dB + 25dB = -55dB
ESA operates when actual dB is equal to or greater than -55dB
Example 2 - when Baseline Mode is not Enabled
Pickup level (dBpkp) is set at 45dB

1601-0450 539
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Baseline dB (dBbaseline) is fixed = -100 dB.

Actual dB level required to operate ESA = (dBbaseline) + dBpkp = -100dB + 45 = -55dB
ESA operates when actual dB is equal to or greater than -55dB
Therefore, for the same threshold, i.e. -55dB, with baseline mode disabled, the pickup level should be higher as
it is compared with -100dB, as compared to baseline enabled. The pickup level can be adjusted to get threshold
around -55dB to -45dB for Caution, and -45dB to -35dB for Alarm purposes.

BEARING FAULT PKP DELAY 1(2)

Range: 5 to 60 min in steps of 5 min
Default: 10 min (15 min)
Configure the delay in minutes after which the bearing fault operand pickup level 1 (level 2) will operate if the
level sustains.

MECH FAULT PKP STAGE 1(2)

Range: 1 to 100 dB in steps of 1 dB
Default: 45 dB (55 dB)
Configure the minimum dB level above the baseline dB level (for any load bin) at which the bearing fault operand
level 1 (level 2) picks up. This setting is applicable to both peak magnitude and energy at peak magnitude.

MECH FAULT PKP DELAY 1(2)

Range: 5 to 60 min in steps of 5 min
Default: 10 min (15 min)
Configure the delay in minutes after which the bearing fault operand pickup level 1 (level 2) will operate if the
level sustains.

STATOR FAULT PKP STAGE 1(2)

Range: 1 to 100 dB in steps of 1 dB
Default: 45 dB (55 dB)
Configure the minimum dB level above the baseline dB level (for any load bin) at which the bearing fault operand
level 1 (level 2) picks up. This setting is applicable to both peak magnitude and energy at peak magnitude.
In general, set the PKP settings for all faults after baseline data is computed. Once the baseline data is available
based on the motor condition, criticality, application and any other important factors, the PKP settings stage 1
and 2 can be derived as (Baseline dB+Tolerance1) and (Baseline dB + Tolerance 2) where Tolerance 2 >
Tolerance 1.

STATOR FAULT PKP DELAY 1(2)

Range: 5 to 60 min in steps of 5 min
Default: 10 min (15 min)
Configure the delay in minutes after which the bearing fault operand pickup level 1 (level 2) will operate if the
level sustains.

540 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The ESA element is blocked, when the selected operand is asserted.

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
This enables the events of the Stator Inter-Turn fault function.

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Latched
This enables the targets of the Stator Inter-Turn fault function.

Note:
In cases where baseline mode is disabled or baseline data is not available, the PKP related settings of bearing, mechanical
and stator for dB levels should correspond to peak magnitude and not change in dB magnitude (Example: a default of 75dB
for Flt PKP Stg 1 and 65dB for Flt PKP Stg 2).


  g TgT_7
 
 
 8 ;>7 ?>9  8



  : _O £
  L :8 { :8 
  





 ˆ‰  SŠS 9 ; "`@a ˆ‰  SŠS 9 ; "`@a
  7    S8 ` dea
 eŒe /0
1023 
456
/0
1023 
456  €eusz ‹SŠS 
  de ˆ‰  S 9 ; "`@a
€|xu}~ ‹SŠS 
7 8 9 ::  8 ;>7 ? >9  8
<
7 8 R8 :: =  8 ;>7 ? >9  8  8 ;>7 ? >9  8

 /0
1023 
456
7 8 9 8 ; €usz{ €|xu}~
LM8 K _  ; M `La ˆ‰  SŠS 9 ; "`@a
 Q;  M 8 ` a  8 ;>7 ? >9  8


 _  ; M   M 8`a
 L K 9  8 9  `La ¢
 opnm p†mn‡ opqk
  ¤ O Q? 
_VL Q? ; { ‘’‘“”•–—˜’˜“—™š› œ’ ˜•”’˜“”•–
   " eusz{ |xu}~
T: b  €euszeuszrstuvwxuyeusz L 8M S 7;  Ž   ">@>
_VL 8N  Q M:   €|xu}~|xu}~rstuvwxuy|xu}~  8;O  S 7; Ž   ">@>
WXYZW[ \W[Z]^ Q  K S  K 7ƒ Q? ; 7;  Ž   ">@>
!" # $%&'())*+, '(, -..  L 8M ‚ S {  8;O  7ƒ Q? ;  8;O Ž   ">@>
!@ A BCDEF+GHIGJCJEF+ 8N  "   7ƒ Q? ;   g  
 T: b Rc    8;O : „ g  
 9f ? ; R M K  Q M: 
!"PQR 8N O BCD¥E.+GK::OGJCB¥E.+ 98 ?    f   rstuvwxuyeusz{ rstuvwxuy|xu}~  8 ;>7 ? >9  {8 O " K 8
!">!@ S? T RU ¦§¨G©ª M    b  ;P :: 
7 8 ; M  hijklmnk opqk ¢
7 8 A># V   «¬G­®¯ °±GJ²® ‘’‘“”•–—˜’˜“—™š› œ’ žŸ ‘”•‘
  9 8 ; Tb8; Tb; L 8M S 7; Ž   ">@>
A  7 8 LM:  A  ; eusz{ |xu}~ T 
Tb;  8;O  S 7; Ž ">@>
K  L M  8N O  
 K 8 g    g  
R M K   Q M: 


7 8 U 8: f8>RO:  8 ;>7 ? >9  ¡8 O " K 8 b  ;P
 9T ¡
7 8 _  >A  RO:
‘’‘“”•–—˜’˜“—™š› œ’ ˜•”’˜“”•–
9:  M  M  9:
 8 ;>7 ? >9  8
WXYZW[ \W[Z]^
!" # /0
1023 
456
  ¤ O Q?   

³´µ¶·³¸µ¹º»¼

Figure 201: ESA Logic diagram

1601-0450 541
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

9.3.3 STATOR INTER-TURN FAULT

When the insulation of the stator windings deteriorates due to age and other factors, this creates an inter-turn fault.
This type of fault is local and can happen either on the same phase or different phases. An inter-turn fault causes
heating at the local level, but the heat rapidly propagates, causing the fault to extend to other areas of the stator
winding. If an inter-turn fault can be detected in time, it provides warning of upcoming major damage to the system.
The stator inter-turn fault element uses phasor (magnitude and angle) qualities of sequence components to detect
stator turn failure of the induction machine.
The operating condition can be defined as:

Where:
● Zpp = positive sequence impedance
● Znp = cross-coupled negative-to-positive sequence impedance
● ZUBbase = learned unbalance base impedance
● Znp/Zpp can be calculated from V1, V2, I2 and Znn as follows:

Where:
● V1 = positive sequence voltage phasor quantity calculated from the motor terminal voltages
● V2 = negative sequence voltage phasor quantity calculated from the motor terminal voltages
● I1 = positive sequence current phasor quantity calculated from the motor terminal currents
● I2 = negative sequence current phasor quantity calculated from the motor terminal currents
● Znn = negative sequence impedance phasor quantity
For an ideal symmetrical machine Zpn = Znp = 0 i.e., it is a decoupled positive and negative sequence component
circuit for the induction machine. However, in practice the situation is not ideal and due to inherent asymmetry in the
machine the Zpnand Znp values are small non-zero quantities. When a turn fault occurs, the asymmetry in the
system is further aggravated which results in these cross-coupling terms increasing. The normalized cross-coupled
impedance, or ratio of Znp to Zpp as defined by the above equation, is the key operating signal that can effectively
detect a stator inter-turn fault.
The inherent asymmetries in the machine at the time of commissioning and without a stator inter-turn fault present
are represented as:
ZUBbase = (Znp/ Zpp)at 0 inter-turn fault

542 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

The Neg Seq Impedance (Znn) required for the implementation of the above can be set manually if NEG SEQ IMP
AUTOSET is set to Manual. This value can be calculated from the machine equivalent circuit parameters (i.e.
winding inductance and resistance). It can also be measured by deliberately applying the unbalance condition
during commissioning.
When NEG SEQ IMP AUTOSET is set to Auto, the internal algorithm calculates this value from the motor
nameplate information (kWatts, rated voltage and number of poles) using the Heuristic method.
With the known value of Znn and the phasor value for each current and voltage, all parameters of equation (1) are
known and hence the operating signal can be calculated.
The algorithm for detection of the stator inter-turn fault is comprised of two phases:
● Learning Phase – this runs only once during commissioning for the given CTs, PTs and machine rating. This
phase is used to calculate the unbalance impedance ZUBbase of the machine that is used by the monitoring
phase. The setpoint “Learn Turn Fault Data” can be used to initiate the learning phase of the algorithm. Once
set to Yes from front panel, the monitoring algorithm pauses and the learning algorithm runs to acquire a new
set of ZUBbase values. The monitoring phase is disabled until ZUBbase is calculated; once the new average of
ZUBbase is calculated, the monitoring phase is automatically reactivated.
● Monitoring Phase – Once the learning phase is complete and the new average of ZUBbase is available, the
monitoring phase runs, checking for the operating signal, and alarms whenever it exceeds Pickup Stage 1
and Pickup Stage 2.
Both the learning and monitoring phase algorithms calculate the average of ZUBbase over a window size of 100 ms.
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Stator Inter-turn Fault

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Stator Inter-turn Fault function.

NEG SEQ IMP AUTOSET

Range: Manual, Auto
Default: Auto
As a convenient alternative to manually determining the negative sequence impedance (Znn), the relay can
automatically calculate the setting Neg Seq Impedance from the nameplate information (Horse Power, Poles and
Rated Voltage).
When ○ NEG SEQ IMP AUTOSET is changed from Auto to Manual, the learning phase is automatically
initiated to calculate the new ZUBbase.
When○ NEG SEQ IMP AUTOSET is already set to Manual and the Znn value is changed, the learning phase
is automatically initiated to calculate the new ZUBbase.
When ○ NEG SEQ IMP AUTOSET is changed from Manual to Auto, a new Znn value is calculated based on
the nameplate information (Horse Power, Poles and Rated Voltage) and the learning phase is automatically
initiated to calculate the new ZUBbase.
When ○ NEG SEQ IMP AUTOSET is set to Auto and any of the nameplate information (Horse Power, Poles
and Rated Voltage) is changed, a new Znn value is calculated and the learning phase is automatically
initiated to calculate the new ZUBbase.

1601-0450 543
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

NEG SEQ IMPEDANCE MAG

Range: 0.10 to 100.00 Ω in steps of 0.01 Ω
Default: 10.00 Ω
This setting is only visible when NEG SEQ IMP AUTOSET is set to Manual. This setting defines the negative
sequence impedance Znn magnitude calculated by the user.

NEG SEQ IMPEDANCE ANG

Range: 0.0 to 359.0 degrees in steps of 0.1 degrees
Default: 0.0 degrees
This setting is only visible when NEG SEQ IMP AUTOSET is set to Manual. This setting defines the negative
sequence impedance Znn angle calculated by the user.

PICKUP STAGE 1
Range: 0.001 to 10.000 in steps of 0.001
Default: 0.100
This setting specifies a first pickup threshold of the ratio between Znp and Zpp averaged over 100 msec.

PICKUP DELAY STAGE 1

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00
This setting provides the selection for the Pickup 1 time delay used to delay the operation of the protection.

PICKUP STAGE 2
Range: 0.001 to 10.000 in steps of 0.001
Default: 0.600
This setting specifies a second pickup threshold of ratio between Znp and Zpp averaged over Tavg time.

PICKUP DELAY STAGE 2

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00
This setting provides the selection for the Pickup 2 times delay used to delay the operation of the protection.

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.00
This setting provides the selection for the dropout time delay used to delay the dropout of the detection of the
Stator Inter-turn Fault condition.

LEARN TURN FAULT DATA

Default: No

544 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Range: Yes, No
Selecting Yes causes the monitoring algorithm to pause and run the learning phase algorithm. Once the
learning phase algorithm has finished running, LEARN TURN FAULT DATA is automatically set to No.
During
○ the learning phase, the monitoring phase algorithm is blocked.
When
○ a new Znn value is calculated (in Auto mode) or manually entered (in Manual mode), LEARN TURN
FAULT DATA is automatically changed to Yes in order to calculate the new ZUBbase

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operands
Default: Off
The Stator Inter-turn fault element will be blocked, when the selected operand is asserted.

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
This enables the events of the Stator Inter-turn fault function.

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Latched
This enables the targets of Stator Inter-turn fault function.

1601-0450 545
546
9.3.4
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

SETPOINT
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0 SETPOINT

specified by the Pickup Delay setting.

Alarm NEG SEQ IMP AUTOSET: SETPOINTS

OR
Latched Alarm AUTO:
NEG SEQ IMPEDANCE MAG/ANGLE:
Configurable MANUAL:
RUN
RUN
SETPOINT
Learning Phase

Learn Turn Fault Data: Auto-Set Procedure

V 
Z nn I

Yes=1 Z UBbase 
V
SETPOINT
BLOCK:
Off=0

LED: ALARM
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Motor Stopped SETPOINT
SETPOINTS

AND
Any Alarm
OR

PICKUP STAGE 1: PICKUP DELAY STAGE 1:

OR
Motor Tripped
DROPOUT DELAY: S
AND

Motor Starting OP Pickup Stage 1 tPKP

 tRST LATCH

Command R
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND RESET FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

AND
SETPOINTS Stat Trn FLT 1 PKP
OR

Stat Trn FLT 1 OP

Figure 202: Stator Inter-Turn Fault Protection logic diagram

NEG SEQ IMPEDANCE MAG/ANGLE:
SETPOINT
RUN
Output Relays
OR

Monitoring Phase Do Not Operate, Operate

Sequence Components
V Z nn I FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OP
  
Positive Sequence Current
  Z UBbase
V
OR

Stat Trn FLT 2 OP

Positive Sequence Voltage

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Negative Sequence Voltage Stat Trn FLT 2 PKP

SETPOINT LED: ALARM

SETPOINTS
AND

PICKUP STAGE 2: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

PICKUP DELAY STAGE 2:
DROPOUT DELAY: Any Alarm
OR

SYNC. MOTOR FIELD OVERTEMPERATURE (26F)

OP  Pickup Stage 2 tPKP tRST
S
AND

LATCH

Command R
RESET 

The relay provides two Field Overtemperature elements. The element responds to calculated field resistance,
element operates when magnitude of the field resistance or temperature exceeds the Pickup level for the time

1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

This element is applicable to both Brushless and Brush-type synchronous motors. Operation of the element blocks
when motor is running in induction mode i.e. when motor state is Starting, Running or SM Resync.
This function emulates a resistance temperature detector (RTD) on the field windings. The resistance of an RTD is
temperature dependent - it increases as the temperature increases. In this case, the RTD behavior is emulated by
examining the field voltage and current. As the ratio of field voltage to field current increases, the field resistance
increases, indicating an increase in temperature of the field windings.
The motor nameplate contains the motor's maximum temperature rise and field resistance. This information is used
with the multiplier from the table below to determine the maximum field ohms, and therefore the maximum field
winding temperature, at which the motor should be allowed to operate.

Note:
This function requires a VDN Module (Voltage Divider Network Module) to connect exciter output (primary side) to relay input
(secondary side) via the VDN Module.

Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > SM Field Overtemperature

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm or Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled
This setting enables SM Field Overtemperature functionality. When set to Trip, the protection element operates
the Trip Relay (Output Relay 1) to open the main circuit breaker/contactor. To trip the field winding breaker/
contactor, the FlexLogic operand 'FLD OverTemp[X] OP' must be used to operate the selected relay set under
Path: Setpoints > System > Breaker 2 (or Contactor 2).

PICKUP
Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01 ohms
Default: 5.00 ohms
This setting specifies the pickup threshold, and should be based on the primary side values of field current and
voltage.

Note:
This function requires VDN Module to hookup exciter output (primary side) to relay input (secondary side) via VDN Module.

Primary field resistance is calculated as:

Field ohms = primary field voltage / primary field current
where:
Primary
○ Field Voltage equals actual value SM Field VDC and
Primary
○ Field Current equals actual value SM Field Amps
Setting guidelines: The motor nameplate contains the motor's maximum temperature rise and field resistance.
This information is used with the multiplier from the table below to determine the maximum field ohms, and
therefore the maximum field winding temperature, at which the motor should be allowed to operate.

1601-0450 547
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Field Ohms Multiplier

Rise °C Multiplier Rise °C Multiplier Rise °C Multiplier
0 1 40 1.15 110 1.42
5 1.02 50 1.19 120 1.46
10 1.04 60 1.23 130 1.5
15 1.06 70 1.27 140 1.54
20 1.08 80 1.31 150 1.57
25 1.1 90 1.35 160 1.6
30 1.12 100 1.39 170 1.64

Example: A motor with a nameplate field resistance of 2 Ω at 25°C with insulated copper windings has a
maximum temperature rise of 80°C. This corresponds to a field resistance of 1.31 times the resistance at 25°C.
Thus, the Pickup setpoint is set to 1.31 x 2 Ω = 2.62 Ω.

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 10.00 s
This setting specifies a time delay for the SM Field Overtemperature function.

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.00 s

MIN FIELD VOLTAGE

Range: 0.00 to 50.00 VDC in steps of 0.01 VDC
Default: 20.00 VDC
This setting specifies the minimum DC field voltage, in primary volts, for over temperature element operation.
Operation of the element blocks if field DC voltage is below this level.

MIN FIELD CURRENT

Range: 0.02 to 0.30 x MFA in steps of 0.01 x MFA (where MFA is Max FLD Amps Primary)
Default: 0.02 x MFA
This setting specifies the minimum DC field current for over temperature element operation. Operation of the
element blocks if field DC current is below this level.
The pickup level is defined as a multiple of MFA (maximum field current at primary of DCCT). MFA is defined by
the setpoint 'Max FLD Amps Primary (MFA)' programmed under Path: Setpoints > System > Current Sensing
> SM FLD A-K2. MFA corresponds to the maximum output value of the DCCT (direct current transformer) or
current transducer.

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate

548 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Latched
SETPOINT
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Trip FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Latched Trip Any Trip
OR

Alarm LED: TRIP

AND
Latched Alarm 869: To operate Output
Relay 1(TRIP)
Configurable

OR
SETPOINT S

AND
Block LATCH
SETPOINT SETPOINTS
Off=0 R
Pickup Pickup Delay
AND

RUN Dropout Delay LED: ALARM

AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND Ohms Pickup tPKP tRST FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR
Starting Any Alarm
OR

Running

AND
SM Resync S
LATCH SETPOINT
SETPOINTS Command R Output Relay X
Min Field Voltage: RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
Min Field Current:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR
SM Field Amps FLD Amps < MINIMUM FLD OverTemp 1 OP
OR

SM Field VDC FLD VDC < MINIMUM

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
From SM Bnk1-K2
FLD OverTemp 1 PKP
FLD Amps < 0.02 x MFA

1
Zero ACTUAL VALUE
Field Resistance
Calculation of
Field Ohms 0



Figure 203: SM Field Overtemperature logic diagram

9.3.5 POWER FACTOR

When using a synchronous machine, it is desirable not to trip or alarm on power factor until the field has been
applied. Therefore, this feature can be blocked until the machine comes up to speed and the field is applied. From
that point forward, the power factor trip and alarm elements will be active. Once the power factor is less than either
the Lead or Lag level, for the specified delay, a trip or alarm will occur indicating a Lead or Lag condition. The power
factor alarm can be used to detect loss of excitation and out of step.
The relay calculates the average Power Factor in the three phases as follows:
Average Power Factor = Total 3-Phase Real Power / Total 3-Phase Apparent Power
For delta-connected VTs, the Power Factor feature is inhibited from operating unless all three voltages are above
the selected voltage threshold and one or more currents are above the selected current threshold. Power Factor
element delay timers are only allowed to time when the voltage threshold is exceeded on all phases and current
threshold is exceeded on one phase. In the same way, when a Power Factor condition starts the Power Factor

1601-0450 549
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

delay timer, if all three phase voltages fall below the threshold and one phase current threshold falls below the timer
has timed-out, the element resets without operating. A loss of voltage during any state returns both Power Factor
elements to the Reset state.
For wye-connected VTs, the power factor value is calculated from the valid phase(s) for which voltage and current
are above the user selected thresholds. Power Factor element delay timers are only allowed to time when the
supervision conditions are met. In the same way, when a Power Factor condition starts the Power Factor delay
timer, if one or more valid phases no longer satisfy the supervision conditions, the power factor is re-calculated
based on the still valid phase(s). If the element is continuously asserted with the new power factor value, the timer
would continue timing, otherwise, the element resets without operating.
The minimum operating voltage and current are set as a threshold below which the element is reset.
The following figure illustrates the conventions established for use, where the negative value means the lead power
factor, and the positive value means the lag power factor.

+Q

Trip Lag PF

Lead PF=-1 Lag PF=1

-P +P
Lag PF=1 Lead PF=-1

Normal
Operating Zone Trip Lead PF

-Q
Figure 204: Power Factor Conventions

In a synchronous machine, this type of machine can operate in lagging (under excitation), leading (over excitation)
or unity power factor conditions depending on the applied field current. As shown in below figure, V-curves are
normally provided by the machine manufacturer to determine the relationship between the field current and power
factor.

550 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Figure 205: Synchronous Machine Simplified V-Curve Example

In synchronous motor applications, in case of a lagging power factor, two modes of power factor protection are
available. They are as follows:

Resync Mode
When the setpoint PF Mode is set to Resync, this feature initiates an attempt to automatically resynchronize the
motor (instead of direct Tripping when the motor goes into a pull-out condition). When the power factor lags below
the configurable setpoint TRIP LAG LEVEL, the operand SM Resync Init Cmd is asserted. This feature allows the
motor to continue running with field removed for the set Resync Check Delay time, and if resynchronization does
not occur within this time, the Trip relay can then be operated to stop the motor.
Energizing the output relay configured to open the field switching device and/or auto-loading is recommended,
using the FlexLogic operand SM Resync Init Cmd in order to remove the motor-field excitation and disconnect the
load. Note that operand SM Resync Init Cmd, when set to high, remains latched until the motor is successfully
synchronized (i.e. operand SM Running =1 and PF Trip Lag condition becomes false) or the motor
resynchronization fails (operand SM Resync Failed = 1) or the motor is stopped or tripped.

Ride-thru mode
If the alternate ride-thru mode is selected, the field is not removed immediately as in the Resync mode. Instead, if
the power factor dips below the configured threshold of setpoint TRIP LAG LEVEL and persists for the set TRIP
PICKUP DELAY time, the Trip relay operates and the motor stops.

Note:
After the synchronous motor starts, the PF protection function remains inactive in induction mode until the motor completes its
startup sequence and reaches the status SM Running. This indicates that the motor's field is applied, and it has successfully
synchronized. However, if there is an abrupt loss of the field while the main power supply remains connected, the PF
protection in Ride-Thru mode will remain active in induction mode (without field applied) until the pickup delay time elapses.
This allows PF protection to trip or alarm after the programmed delay.

Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Functions > Power Factor

TRIP FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Configurable

1601-0450 551
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Power Factor Trip functionality.

PF MODE
Range: Resync, Ride-thru
Default: Ride-thru

Note:
This setpoint is only applicable to synchronous motor applications with proper order code selection.

Ride-through Mode: This mode allows the motor to ride through power factor dips with duration less than the TRIP
PICKUP DELAY.
Resync Mode: Upon measuring a power factor below the TRIP LAG LEVEL setpoint, the relay may de-energize
the field switching device and Auto-loading relays and attempt to resynchronize the motor. The motor continues to
run with the field removed for the programmed Resync Check Delay, and if resynchronization does not occur within
this time a trip occurs, operating the trip relay and stopping the motor.

Note:
PF Mode only activates when the relay measures lagging PF below the setpoint TRIP LAG LEVEL. PF Mode is not
applicable when the motor is running with leading PF.

Note:
This setting is hidden when setpoint SYNC. MOTOR TYPE (under Setpoints > System > Motor > Setup) is set to None.

Note:
This setting is hidden unless order code option C5/D5 is selected for 'Phase Currents-Slot K Bank 1/2'.

TRIP LEAD LEVEL

Range: 0.05 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00 Lag
This setting specifies the Power Factor Lead Trip level.

Note:
Enter 1.00 to turn off the Trip Lead Level. The HMI also shows it is “OFF”.

TRIP LAG LEVEL

Range: 0.05 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00
This setting specifies the Power Factor Lag Trip level.

552 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Note:
When the Trip Lag Level is set to 1.00, the pickup level turns it off.

TRIP PICKUP DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
The setting specifies a time delay for the trip function.

TRIP DROPOUT DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
The setting specifies a dropout time delay for the trip function.

TRIP OUTPUT RELAY X

Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

ALARM FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latch Alarm
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Power Factor Alarm functionality.

ALARM LEAD LEVEL

Range: 0.05 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00
This setting specifies the Power Factor Lead Alarm level.

Note:
Enter 1.00 to turn off the Alarm Lead Level. The HMI shows “OFF”.

ALARM LAG LEVEL

Range: 0.05 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00
This setting specifies the Power Factor Lag alarm level.

Note:
Enter 1.00 to turn off the Alarm Lag Level. The HMI shows OFF”.

ALARM PICKUP DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s

1601-0450 553
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Default: 1.00 s
The setting specifies a time delay for the alarm function.

ALARM DROPOUT DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
The setting specifies a dropout time delay for the alarm function.

ALARM OUTPUT RELAY X

Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

START BLOCK DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
The Power Factor element can be blocked until the machine comes up to speed and the field is applied. The
element is blocked upon initiation of a motor Starting status for a period of time defined by this setting.

Note:
START BLOCK DELAY is not applicable to synchronous motor applications. The PF element remains blocked until the motor
start sequence is completed.

MINIMUM VOLTAGE
Range: 0.00 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Default: 0.30 x VT
This setting sets the minimum voltage for the Power Factor element operation specified times VT.

MINIMUM CURRENT
Range: 0.00 to 10.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 0.20 x CT
This setting sets the minimum current for the Power Factor element operation specified times CT.

RESYNC INITIATE
Range: Off, any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off
In addition to the power factor initiating motor Resync functionality, this setpoint allows a specified input (e.g.
Reactive Power, Out-of-step, loss of excitation) to initiate the Resync function for resynchronization of the
synchronous motor. When the assigned input is active, the SM Resync Init Cmd is asserted and the TRIP
PICKUP DELAY timer starts. If the motor fails to resynchronize within the TRIP PICKUP DELAY time, the PF
Trip operates.
If more than one input is required to initiate the restoration function, the FlexLogic builder must be used to build
the required logic.

554 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Note:
This setting is hidden unless setpoint PF MODE is selected as Resync Mode and order code option C5/D5 is selected from
'Phase Currents-Slot K Bank 1/2'.

RESYNC CHECK DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 2.00 s
This timer is only applicable to power factor Resync Mode for synchronous motor applications. Upon initiation of
the auto-resynchronization command, the motor continues running with the field removed for the RESYNC
CHECK DELAY time, and if resynchronization does not occur within this time, the Trip relay can be operated to
stop the motor.

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The element is blocked when the selected operand is asserted.

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
The selection of “Enabled” enables the events of the function.

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset

1601-0450 555
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
SETPOINT
LED: TRIP 859: To operate the

AND
TRIP FUNCTION: selected Breaker/
Disabled=0 Contactor Trip Relay

OR
Trip
SETPOINT

OR
Latched Trip S

AND
Trip Lead Level
Configurable Trip Lag Level LATCH
RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
RESET R
Power Factor of Three when PF < 0 Command PF Trip OP
SETPOINTS
Phases & Trip Pickup Delay

OR
(delta-connected VTs) |PF| < Trip Lead Level Trip Dropout Delay SETPOINT

OR
tPKP Trip Output Relay X
Power Factor of Valid tRST
when PF > 0
Do Not Operate, Operate
Phase(s) &
(wye-connected VTs) |PF| < Trip Lag Level
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETPOINTS PF Trip PKP
SETPOINT
Alarm Pickup Delay
Block Alarm Dropout Delay
tPKP tRST
Off=0

AND
SETPOINT
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND Start Block Delay
Motor Stopped tBLK 0
LED: Alarm

AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETPOINTS

OR
SETPOINT Any Alarm
Alarm Lead Level
Voltage Inputs MINIMUM VOLTAGE:
Alarm Lag Level

AND
- delta connected S
RUN
VAB MINIMUM CURRENT: LATCH
when PF < 0
VBC & RESET R
VAB MINIMUM Command
VCA |PF| < Alarm Lead Level
AND

VBC MINIMUM

OR
Current Inputs VCA MINIMUM when PF > 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND

& PF Alarm OP
Phase A Current (IA) IA MINIMUM
OR

|PF| < Alarm Lag Level

PF Alarm PKP
OR

Phase B Current (IB) IB MINIMUM

Phase C Current (IC) IC MINIMUM
SETPOINT
VA MINIMUM Alarm Output Relay X
AND

Voltage Inputs
- wye connected VB MINIMUM Do Not Operate, Operate
VA VC MINIMUM
AND

OR

AND

VB FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
VC PF Alarm PKP
AND

SETPOINT
Alarm Function
Disabled
Alarm
OR

Latched Alarm



Figure 206: Power Factor logic diagram

556 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

SETPOINT
TRIP FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Trip

OR
Latched Trip
SETPOINT
Configurable
Resync Initiate
Off = 0
Power Factor of Three
Phases
(delta-connected VTs) SETPOINT SETPOINTS

OR
Resync Check Delay

AND
PF Mode
Power Factor of Valid Start Timer
Phase(s) Resync
(wye-connected VTs) T > Resync Check Delay
Ride-Thru
Reset Timer
SETPOINT FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SM Resync Failed
Block FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

AND
Off=0 SM Running
SETPOINT S FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Start Block Delay LATCH SM Resync Init. Cmd FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Motor Stopped
AND

tBLK 0 Any Trip

SETPOINT R

OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

AND
Trip Lead Level Motor Tripped LED: TRIP

AND
AND

SM Running Trip Lag Level

Motor Stopped To operate the Trip Relay
OR

SM Resync RUN
OR

OR
Motor Overload SETPOINTS
AND

when PF > 0
SM Field Applied Trip Pickup Delay S

AND
OR
&
Motor Running |PF| < Trip Lag Level Trip Dropout Delay
tPKP LATCH

OR
tRST FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
when PF < 0 RESET R
AND

& Command PF Trip OP

OR

|PF| < Trip Lead Level

OR
SETPOINT SETPOINT
Motor Type Trip Output Relay X
None = 1 SETPOINTS Do Not Operate, Operate

MINIMUM VOLTAGE: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

Voltage Inputs - delta connected PF Trip PKP
VAB MINIMUM CURRENT:
VBC
VAB MINIMUM LED: Alarm

AND
VCA
AND

VBC MINIMUM
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Current Inputs VCA MINIMUM

OR
AND

Any Alarm
Phase A Current (IA) IA MINIMUM
OR

SETPOINT
SETPOINTS

AND
Alarm Lead Level S
OR

Phase B Current (IB) IB MINIMUM Alarm Pickup Delay

Alarm Lag Level SETPOINT
Phase C Current (IC) IC MINIMUM Alarm Dropout Delay LATCH
RUN
AND

tPKP Alarm Output Relay X

VA MINIMUM tRST RESET R
AND

Voltage Inputs when PF < 0 Do Not Operate, Operate

- wye connected VB MINIMUM Command
&
VA VC MINIMUM |PF| < Alarm Lead Level
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND

OR
OR

VB when PF > 0 PF Alarm OP

VC & PF Alarm PKP
|PF| < Alarm Lag Level
AND

SETPOINT
Alarm Function
Disabled
Alarm
OR

Latched Alarm



Figure 207: Synchronous Motor Power Factor logic diagram

9.3.6 SPEED
The relay is capable of measuring the motor/generator speed. Any of the input contacts can be used to read the
pulses from the input source. The source of the pulses can be an inductive proximity probe or Hall Effect gear tooth
sensor. The speed algorithm calculates the number of pulses in the window length (WL) and converts it into an
RPM value. A minimum pulse width of 10% of a revolution is required to detect a pulse from the pulse source.
The following equation is used to calculate the speed based on the detection of the number of pulses N during
window length WL.

Where:
● N = number of pulses during time defined by the Cal. Window Length (WL)
● PPR = pulses per revolution defined by setpoint PULSES PER REV (PPR)
● f = system frequency
● WL is calculated window length in cycles is defined as: WL = (60 x f) / (PPR x 50)
This element has two modes of speed: under speed and over speed which is defined by the setpoint DIRECTION.
In the under speed mode, a trip and alarm is configured so that the machine must be at a certain speed within a set
period of time from starting. The trip and alarm features are configured so that the specified speed (TRIP PICKUP
or ALARM PICKUP) must be reached in the specified time (TRIP DELAY or ALARM DELAY) otherwise the

1601-0450 557
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

element operates. Initially, the time delay begins when the machine starts rotating and resets when the desired
speed is reached. Once the machine is running with the rated speed and then that speed drops below the set
threshold, the time delay restarts and the designated output contact will operate if the machine fails to reach the set
speed in the allotted time.
In the over speed mode, the tachometer trip and alarm features are configured so that if the specified speed (TRIP
PICKUP or ALARM PICKUP) is exceeded for the specified time (TRIP DELAY or ALARM DELAY), the element
operates. Initially, the time delay begins when the machine speed exceeds the pickup value resets when the speed
drops below the pickup.
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Speed

TRIP FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Speed protection Trip functionality.

INPUT
Range: Off, Any Digital Input
Default: Off
Any of the digital input contacts can be used to read the pulses from the input source. For example, an inductive
proximity probe or Hall Effect gear tooth sensor may be used to sense the key on the machine. The probe can
be powered by the +24 V from the input switch power supply. The NPN transistor output can be sent to one of
the digital inputs.

Note:
The voltage threshold must be set to 17 V for the inputs to be recognized using the internal +24 V.

The following figure illustrates wiring examples of PNP-type and NPN-type speed probes connected to the input
terminals.
For illustration purposes, the breaker status inputs are shown along with the speed probe input.
Example a and b: Internal +24V supply is used to power both the speed probe connected to CI # 4 and breaker
status signals (DRY type) connected to CI # 1 & 2 of the same Slot F.
Example c and d: Internal +24V supply is used to power the speed probe connected to CI # 4 while an external
dc power supply is used by the breaker status signals (WET type) connected to CI # 1 and 2. In this example,
since both speed probe and breaker status signals are connected to Slot F, the voltage threshold must be set to
17V.

Note:
When the NPN type speed probe is used, the on/off state of the sensor input is reversed. When the probe sensor state is On
(Closed), the relay sensor Input will indicate Off (Open) and when the probe sensor state is Off (Open), the relay sensor Input
will indicate On (Closed). Thus, when the motor is stopped, the speed sensor input will be ON.

558 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

 

 

Figure 208: Wiring Examples of Speed Protection Input

Note:
The maximum load current that can be delivered by the internal +24 V supply is 80 mA. When the internal +24 V supply is
used to power the probe, the current limitations of the 24V supply must be considered.

RATED SPEED
Range: 100 to 7200 RPM in steps of 1
Default: 3600 RPM
RPM defines the rated speed of the motor.

Note:
This setting is located under Setpoints > System > Motor Setup

Note:
In a two speed motor application, when 2-Speed Motor Protection is “Enabled” and Speed2 Motor Switch is “On”, the setpoint
Speed2 RATED SPEED, programmed under System > Motor > Setup, is used by the Speed protection as the rated value.

RPM defines the rated speed of the generator.

PULSES PER REV

Range: 1 to 6 PPR in steps of 1 PPR
Default: 1 PPR
The Number of pulses per revolution (PPR) is required to calculate the switching frequency of the input pulses.
Switching frequency can be calculated as follows.

1601-0450 559
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Switching frequency = (PPR x RPM) / 60

Where:
PPR
○ = pulses per revolution
RPM
○ = rated speed

DIRECTION
Range: Underspeed, Overspeed
Default: Underspeed
This setting defines the mode for speed protection. When DIRECTION is set to Underspeed, the Trip and/or Alarm
function picks up when the measured motor speed is below the set pickup level. Likewise, when the Direction is set
to Overspeed, the Trip and/or Alarm function picks up when the measured motor speed is above the programmed
pickup level.

Note:
When TRIP FUNCTION is set to Trip and DIRECTION is set to Underspeed, the speed function requires a block signal
configured under the setpoint BLOCK to reset the outputs. It is recommended to use the breaker/contactor open status
operand (Brk1 Opened/Contactor Opened) to indicate that the motor is stopped.

Note:
When TRIP FUNCTION is set to Trip and DIRECTION is set to Underspeed, the speed function requires a block signal
configured under the setpoint BLOCK to reset the outputs. It is recommended to use the breaker/contactor open status
operand (Brk1 Opened/Contactor Opened) to indicate that the generator is stopped.

TRIP PICKUP
Range: 20 to 120% in steps of 1
Default: 75%
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the trip function.

TRIP PICKUP DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the trip function.

TRIP OUTPUT RELAY X

Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

ALARM FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the speed protection Alarm functionality

560 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

ALARM PICKUP
Range: 20 to 120% in steps of 1
Default: 80%
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the Alarm function.

ALARM PICKUP DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies a time delay for the Alarm function.

ALARM OUTPUT RELAY X

Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The Speed protection can be blocked by any asserted FlexLogic operand.

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-Reset, Latched
Default: Latched

1601-0450 561
562
9.3.7
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

resistance and the pole pairs.

OVERTORQUE
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
LED: TRIP
869: To operate Output
AND

Relay 1(TRIP)
OR

859: To operate the

SETPOINT S selected Breaker/
TRIP PICKUP:
AND

SETPOINTS Contactor Trip Relay

SETPOINTS LATCH
SETPOINT RUN Speed < Trip Pickup
RATED SPEED: TRIP PICKUP DELAY: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
INPUT: Pulses Per Rev: tPKP RESET R
0 Command Speed Trip OP
RUN RUN Speed > Trip Pickup
Off=0 Filtering
OR

Assign Contact Input Speed SETPOINT

Figure 209: Speed Protection logic diagram

Measurement Trip Output Relay X

AND
SETPOINT
ALARM PICKUP: Do Not Operate, Operate
Contact Input X status SETPOINTS
RUN Speed< Alarm Pickup ALARM PICKUP DELAY:
SETPOINT tPKP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
0
RUN Speed> Alarm Pickup Speed Trip PKP
TRIP FUNCTION:
Disabled=0 LED: Alarm
Trip
Latched Trip

OR
AND

Configurable
OR

FlexLogic Operand
Motor Stopped S
AND

OR
AND
Motor Tripped LATCH
SETPOINT R

AND
RESET
BLOCK: Command
Off = 0

AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETPOINT Speed Alarm OP
DIRECTION:
Under Speed Speed Alarm PKP

AND
Over Speed
SETPOINT

AND
SETPOINT Alarm Output Relay X

ALARM FUNCTION: Do Not Operate, Operate

AND
Disabled
Alarm

OR
Latched Alarm ACTUAL VALUES
Speed

894176C1

stator resistance can be determined from the motor’s rated voltage and current. Torque metering is intended for
induction motors only, and only positive torque is calculated. Please consult the motor specifications for the stator
Before torque can be determined, the motor stator resistance and number of pole pairs must be entered. The base

1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

The default unit for torque is the SI unit of Newton-meter (Nm). The torque unit is selectable to either Newton-meter
or foot-pound.

Note:
In VFD driven motor application, to ensure proper measurement of the torque, CTs and VTs must be on the motor side of the
VFD. In case, voltages are brought from the bus side of the VFD and there is a frequency difference between the bus and
motor sides of the VFD then it is recommended no to use torque monitoring.

Path: Setpoints\Monitoring\Torque

Torque Setup
Path: Setpoints\Monitoring\Torque\Torque Setup

Torque Metering
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled

Stator Resistance
Range: 0.001 to 2000.000 mohms in steps of 0.001 mohms
Default: 0.080 mohms
Specify motor stator resistance in primary ohms. Stator resistance in primary ohms can be calculated from the
per-unit stator resistance value and base stator resistance. The base stator resistance can be determined from
the motor rated voltage and current. Per-unit stator resistance, motor rated voltage and current are given in the
motor data sheet.

Torque Unit
Range: Newton-meter, Foot-pound
Default: Newton-meter

Overtorque
Path: Setpoints\Monitoring\Torque\Overtorque
Detection of a motor overtorque condition, usually done to protect devices driven by the motor, can be set up
here. The assigned relay activates when the torque measured exceeds the specified level for the specified time
duration.

Function
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Default: Disabled

Pickup Level
Range: 0.1 to 999999.9 Nm (or ft.lb) in steps of 0.1
Default: 4000.0 Nm

1601-0450 563
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Pickup Delay
Range: 0.10 to 600.00 sec in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00 sec

Dropout Delay
Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.00 s
This setting specifies a time delay to reset the alarm command.

Output Relay
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

Block
Range: Off, any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off

Events
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

Targets
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset
AND

LED:
ALARM
SETPOINT FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
OR

FUNCTION Any Alarm

Disabled
AND

S
Alarm
LATCH
OR

Latched Alarm
R
Configurable
RESET Set
Dominant
Command
SETPOINT

SETPOINT PICKUP
AND

BLOCK RUN

Off = 0
SETPOINT SETPOINTS
Te > PICKUP
PICKUP DELAY: OUTPUT RELAY X

DROPOUT DELAY: Do Not Operate, Operate

OR

SETPOINT SETPOINT tPKP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

tDPO
Stator Resistance Number of Poles Overtorque Alarm OP
va(vab) vq
d
vb(vbc) vd FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

Overtorque Alarm PKP

vc(vca) Abc to dq Determine q Torque (Te)
ia
transform d, q iq
Calculation
iq
ACTUAL VALUE
ib id
id Torque
ic
Path: Actual Values\Metering\Torque

Figure 210: Overtorque Protection logic diagram

564 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

9.4 BREAKER MONITORING

9.4.1 TRIP AND CLOSE CIRCUIT MONITORING

The first and second Form A relay outputs on slot F include a circuit to monitor the DC voltage across the output
contact when it is open. To do that, an external jumper is wired between the terminals FA_1 NO and FA_1 OPT/V
for the Trip coil monitoring, or/and FA_2 COM and FA_2 OPT/V for the Close coil monitoring.
The monitor contains a level detector whose output is set to logic 1 (ON) when the voltage is above 20 volts. The
voltage monitor is used to check the health of the overall trip and closing circuit.
The two figures below show the two different connections of the breaker trip and close coils to the relay’s trip and
close output relays for either no voltage monitoring and for voltage monitoring of the circuits.

Output relay 1 (TRIP)
 Output relay 2 (CLOSE)


FA_1 FA_2
NO NO

FA_1 FA_2
COM COM
V V
 
FA_1
OPT/V
  FA_2
OPT/V
 
Trip Close
Coil Coil



Figure 211: Coil Circuits without Monitoring

Output relay 1 (TRIP)
 Output relay 2 (CLOSE)


FA_1 FA_2
NO
   NO
  
FA_1 FA_2
COM COM
V V
 
FA_1
OPT/V
  FA_2
OPT/V
 
Trip Close
Coil Coil




Figure 212: Coil Circuits with Monitoring

To monitor the trip coil circuit integrity, use the relay terminals FA_1 NO and FA_1 COM to connect the Trip coil, and
provide a jumper between terminals FA_1 NO and FA_1 OPT/V voltage monitor).
Some applications require monitoring of the Trip coil or/and Close coil continuously, regardless of the breaker
position (open or closed). This can be achieved by connecting a suitable resistor across the auxiliary contacts. With

1601-0450 565
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

such connections, the trickle current is maintained by the resistor. For these applications the setting for the Bypass
Breaker Status should be enabled.

D +  
O

  1 (T ) !"#!" $%&'* , .0$234

F_1 HIK,
O Er a  L QR<S>;8G
Jr HIK, UWX@S>
F_1
NO M
V 
F_1 HIK,
O T/V 30P
678 YZ@8[[
$ >S[?[<:>
9:;<89<
5a Ba
 r r =>?@
c ac A:?G

r 678 YZ@8[[

C  9:;<89< $ >S[?[<:>

D -  

]^ ` ˜™ š
defgef hijkl m n^odpqs œžŸž ¡¢£¤ ¥ ¦™§œ¨©ª

‚ƒ„m ¹º»¥
^d Š‹zŒy{Ž ™œ¼ Á±ÃÄ°²Å
‚ƒ„m ‘’Œ ¹º»¥ ÆÇÈÉÃÄ
†d ½œ
\ —
‚ƒ„m ¹º»¥
d‡ˆ‰\ œ¾¿À—
«¬­ ÊËɲÌÌ
®¯°±²®± ÄÃÌÍ̱¯Ä
tuv “”’{••
h Œ•–•zx
wxyz{wz ³´µ¶·
³µ¸´
|}~€
|~}
«¬­ ÊËɲÌÌ
®¯°±²®± ÄÃÌÍ̱¯Ä
]^ b
˜™ ›

Figure 213: Trip and Close Coil Circuit with Continuous Monitoring

The value of the resistor is shown in the following table:

Power Supply (V DC) Resistance (Ohms) Power (Watts)
24 1000 2
48 10000 2
110 25000 5
125 25000 5
220 50000 5

566 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Warning:
The Trip and Close Contacts must be considered unsafe to touch when the relay is
energized.

Path:Setpoints > Monitoring > Breaker 1 > Trip Circuit Monitoring

TRIP CIRCUIT MONITORING

FUNCTION:
Range: Disabled, Latched Alarm, Alarm, Configurable
Default: Disabled

PICKUP DELAY:
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 10.000 s

DROPOUT DELAY:
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000 s
This setting provides selection for reset time delay used to delay the dropout of the detection of the overcurrent
condition.

TRIP RELAY SELECT:

Default: Relay 1
Range: Off, Relay X
Any output relay from the list of available output relays can be programmed for breaker tripping coil monitoring.

Note:
It is recommended to select the same Trip Relay set under the "Breaker: Trip Relay Select" option.

BYPASS BREAKER STATE:

Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Set the Bypass Breaker State to Enabled when a by-pass resistor is connected across the breaker auxiliary
contact for continuous Trip circuit monitoring. The circuits are monitored regardless of breaker position.

BLOCK:
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

1601-0450 567
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS:
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS:
Default: Self-reset
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched

568 1601-0450
1601-0450
FUNCTION:
CLOSE CIRCUIT MONITORING
LED: ALARM
AND

SETPOINT
OR

TCM
FUNCTION: S
AND

Disabled
LATCH # 1
Alarm Command Set-Dominant

Latched Alarm

OR
RESET R
Configurable

Figure 214: Trip Circuit Monitoring Diagram

SETPOINT
TCM
BLOCK :
Off = 0 SETPOINTS
OUTPUT RELAYS 3 to 7

Do Not Operate, Operate

Setpoints\Monitoring\Breaker\
Breaker 1 Monitor\Trip Circuit
Monitoring

Range: Disabled, Latched Alarm, Alarm, Configurable

SETPOINT
TCM FlexLogic Operand
Trip Relay Select = Relay 1
PICK-UP DELAY:
Trip Coil 1 BKR1 OP
OR

TCM
DROP-OUT DELAY:
t PKP

AND
t RST
OUTPUT RLY #1 MONITORING
VOLTAGE < THRESHOLD

SETPOINT
TCM
BYPASS BKR STATE: FlexLogic Operand
Disabled = 0
Trip Coil 1 BKR1 PKP

Path:Setpoints > Monitoring > Breaker 1 > Close Circuit Monitoring

OR
FlexLogic Operand

BKR1 Closed

AND
OUTPUT RLY #1 “TRIP”
OPERATE
894080C2

569
Chapter 9 - Monitoring
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Default: Disabled

PICKUP DELAY:
Default: 10.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s

DROPOUT DELAY:
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000 s

CLOSE RELAY SELECT:

Default: Relay 2
Range: Off, Relay X
Any output relay from the list of available output relays can be programmed for breaker coil closing monitoring.

Note:

We recommend selecting the same Trip Relay set under the Breaker: Close Relay Select option.

BYPASS BREAKER STATE:

Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Set the Bypass Breaker State to Enabled when a by-pass resistor is connected across the breaker auxiliary
contact for continuous Close circuit monitoring. The circuits are monitored regardless of breaker position.

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK:
Default: Off
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand

EVENTS:
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS:
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset

570 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

894079C2
LED: ALARM

FlexLogic Operand
FlexLogic Operand
Do Not Operate, Operate
OUTPUT RELAYS 3 to 7

Close Coil 1 BKR1 PKP

SETPOINTS

Close Coil 1 BKR1 OP

OR

Set-Dominant
LATCH # 1

R
S
AND AND OR

Command
RESET

t RST
SETPOINT

DROP-OUT DELAY:
PICK-UP DELAY:

t PKP
CCM

CCM

AND

OR
OUTPUT RLY #2 MONITORING
VOLTAGE < THRESHOLD

OR AND
Breaker 1 Monitor\Close Circuit
Setpoints\Monitoring\Breaker\

Close Relay Select = Relay #2

FlexLogic Operand
Monitoring\

“CLOSE” OPERATE
OUTPUT RLY #2
SETPOINT

SETPOINT
SETPOINT

BYPASS BKR STATE:

Latched Alarm

BKR1 Opened
Configurable

Disabled = 0
FUNCTION:

BLOCK :
Disabled

Off = 0
Alarm

CCM
CCM

CCM

Figure 215: Close Circuit Monitoring Diagram

9.4.2 BREAKER ARCING CURRENT

The relay provides one Breaker Arcing Current element. This element calculates an estimate of the per-phase wear
on the breaker contacts by measuring and integrating the current squared passing through the breaker contacts as
an arc. These per-phase values are added to accumulated totals for each phase and compared to a programmed
threshold value. When the threshold is exceeded in any phase, the relay can set an output operand and set an
alarm. The accumulated value for each phase can be displayed as an actual value.

1601-0450 571
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

The same output operands that are selected to operate the Trip output relay that is used to trip the breaker
indicating a tripping sequence has begun, are used to initiate this feature. A time delay is introduced between
initiation and starting of integration to prevent integration of current flow through the breaker before the contacts
have parted. This interval includes the operating time of the output relay, any other auxiliary relays and the breaker
mechanism. For maximum measurement accuracy, the interval between the change-of-state of the operand (from 0
to 1) and contact separation should be measured for the specific installation. Integration of the measured current
continues for 100 ms, which is expected to include the total arcing period.

Figure 216: Breaker Arcing Current Measurement

Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Breaker > BKR 1 Monitor > BKR 1 Arcing Current

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Default: Disabled

INITIATION
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand, digital input, virtual input or remote input that initiates the Breaker
Arcing Current scheme, typically the Trip signals from internal protection functions.

DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.00 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.030 s
The setpoint provides a delay interval between the time the tripping sequence is initiated and the time the
breaker contacts are expected to part, starting the integration of the measured current.

ALARM LEVEL
Range: 0 to 50000 kA2-c in steps of 1 kA2-c
Default: 1000 kA2-c
The setpoint specifies the threshold value (kA2-cycle) above which the output operand is set.

572 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

OUTPUT RELAYS X
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Self-reset

1601-0450 573
574
9.4.3
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

wear and contact wear.

BREAKER HEALTH
LED: Alarm
AND

SETPOINTS
OR

BKR 1 ARCING S
FUNCTION:
AND

Disabled LATCH # 1

Command Set-Dominant
Alarm
RESET R
Latched Alarm SETPOINTS

OR
AND
Configurable BKR 1 ARCING
DELAY:

Figure 217: Breaker Arcing Current logic diagram

SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS tdelay 100ms

OR
BKR 1 ARCING 0 0 OUTPUT RELAYS 3 to 7
BLOCK:
Do Not Operate, Operate
OR

Off = 0

AND
RECORDS FlexLogic Operands
SETPOINTS BKR 1 ARCING BKR 1 Arc OP
BKR 1 ARCING CURRENTS
INITIATION: Add to accumulator
Off = 0
Total I² cycle
SETPOINTS
RUN
CT Bank current IA BKR 1 ARCING
IA²t Integrate IA² cycle
ALARM LEVEL:
CT Bank current IB RUN
CT Bank current IC IB²t Integrate IB² cycle Select highest value kA² cyc > Alarm Level
RUN
COMMAND
IC²t Integrate IC² cycle
CLEAR BKR 1 ARCING
CURRENT:
YES = 1
NO = 0 Set all to 0
892743C1.vsdx

The relay provides breaker health information by monitoring and analyzing the operation count, arcing energy of
breaking current, arcing time, tripping time, closing time and spring charging time if applicable. The breaker health

1601-0450
status depends on many factors, such as permissible operation number, magnitude of breaking current, mechanical
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

The operation count is able to give direct information by comparing it with the permissible operation number. The
longer tripping time and closing time can provide an approximate estimation of trip/close coils and mechanical wear.
The increasing spring charging time may imply developing problems in motor and spring mechanisms. Meanwhile,
the increase in arcing energy of the breaking current may reflect the possibility of contact wear. Longer arcing time
may suggest the loss of dielectric strength in the arc chamber. If the arcing energy or any of the time intervals is
above the related Pickup levels for the use-defined times, the Alarm Led is lit.
The scheme is equipped with three incomplete sequence timers for Trip/Close time, arc time and spring charge time
respectively. So it automatically resets the related time interval after the programmed delay.
A breaker operation function is also included, where breaker operation failure is caused by either of the following
conditions:
● The breaker does not respond to a Trip command within the programmed breaker operation delay time.
● The breaker does not respond to a Close command within the programmed time.
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Breaker 1 > Breaker Health

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Default: Disabled

MODE
Range: Detection, Monitoring
Default: Detection
The Breaker Health has two running modes: detection and monitoring. Since the monitored time intervals differ
for different breaker types and manufacturers, the detection mode can be used to help set the Pickup settings
based on the historical true values. The operation count, arcing energy of the breaking current, arcing time,
tripping time, closing time and spring charging time are measured and displayed in Records > Breaker Health,
but the element does not pick up when in detection mode. Monitoring mode is the normal mod e, wherein
measurements are analyzed and the element may pick up accordingly.

PRESET TRIP COUNTER

Range: 0 to 100000 in steps of 1
Default: 0
This setting pre-sets the actual operation number when the relay is starting in service or the record is cleared.

TRIP TRIGGER
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setting assigns the trip initiation signal.

CLOSE TRIGGER
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setting assigns the close initiation signal.

1601-0450 575
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

SPRING CHARGE STATUS

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The setting selects the signal to show the status of Spring Charge. Normally, the contact input connected to the
auxiliary contact of the limit switch can be used.

TRIP TIME PICKUP

Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.050 s
The setting sets the Pickup level of the Trip time. The Trip time interval is initiated by the Trip Trigger signal and
stopped by the Open Status signal.

CLOSE TIME PICKUP

Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.050 s
The setting sets the Pickup level of the Close time. The Close time interval is initiated by the Close Trigger signal
and stopped by the Close Status signal.

INCOMPLETE TRP/CLS TIME

Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.100 s
The setting declares a breaker operation failure condition if the breaker does not respond within this time delay.
The setting should be greater than the Trip time PKP value and Close time PKP value.

ARC TIME PICKUP

Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.100 s
The setting sets the Pickup level of the Arc time. The Arc time is initiated by the Open Status signal and stopped
when the current samples in one cycle are less than 0.02 CT. Then the Arc time is equal to the calculated time
interval minus one cycle.

INCOMPLETE ARC TIME

Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.300 s
The setting declares an Arc time failure condition if there are currents flowing through the breaker after this time
delay. This setting should be greater than the Arc time PKP value.

SPRING CHARGE TIME PICKUP

Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 15.000 s
This setting sets the Pickup level of the Spring Charge time. The Spring Charge time is measured from the pulse
duration of the Spring Charge Status.

576 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

INCOMPLETE CHARGE TIME

Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 45.000 s
The setting declares a Charge time failure condition if the spring charging process is not finished after this time
delay. The setting should be greater than the Charge time PKP value.

ARC ENERGY PICKUP

Range: 1 to 100000 kA2-c in steps of 1 kA2-c
Default: 1000 kA2-c
The setting sets the Pickup level of the arc energy. The arc energy value is calculated in the Breaker Arcing
Current element.

Note:
The arc energy is calculated by the breaker arcing current element. If the breaker arcing current element is disabled, the arc
energy is not calculated and this setting should not be used. The arc energy used here is the individual value for each trip and
not the accumulated value recorded in the Breaker Arcing Current element.

ALARM COUNTER
Range: 1 to 100 in steps of 1
Default: 5
The setting sets the alarm counter level. One counter is used to accumulate the Pickup data from all monitoring
quantities. If the counter value is above the alarm counter level, the LED is lit and one operand is asserted.

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset

1601-0450 577
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

LED: ALARM

AND

OR
AND
S

LATCH

Set-Dominant
Command
R
RESET

SETPOINTS
BKR HEALTH
FUNCTION: FlexLogic Operands
Disabled SETPOINTS BKR1 Hlth PKP
Alarm
OR BKR HEALTH
IN ALARM COUNTER:
Latched Alarm

OR
RUN SETPOINTS
Configurable
Counter Real Counter Alarm OUTPUT RELAYS (3-7):

SETPOINTS Command Do Not Operate, Operate

BLOCK: CLEAR RESET

AND

Off=0

AND
SETPOINTS
BKR HEALTH
MODE:

OR
Detection
Monitoring

SETPOINTS SETPOINTS
BKR HEALTH BKR HEALTH
AND

TRIP TRIGER: TRIP TIME PICKUP:

Off=0 RUN
BKR1 Hlth Trip PKP
t_trip PKP

FlexLogic Operand START SETPOINTS

t_trip
BKR1 Opened STOP BKR HEALTH

OR
ARC TIME PICKUP:
START RUN
Current Inputs START t_arc_A BKR1 Arc PKP A
STOP (t_arc_A-t_trip-1 cyc) PKP
Phase A Current (ia) ia < 0.02 xCT for one cyc
RUN
START BKR1 Arc PKP B
START t_arc_B (t_arc_B-t_trip-1 cyc) PKP
STOP
Phase B Current (ib) ib < 0.02 xCT for one cyc RUN
BKR1 Arc PKP C
START (t_arc_C-t_trip-1 cyc) PKP
START t_arc_C
STOP
Phase C Current (ic) ic < 0.02 xCT for one cyc
SETPOINTS
AND

BKR HEALTH
OR

INCOMPLETE ARC TIME:

AND

RUN
t_IAT
AND

t_IAT
OR

OR
BKR1 Arc Fail
AND

t_IAT
AND

Command
AND
OR

RESET
AND

SETPOINTS

BKR HEALTH
OR

INCOMPLETE TRP/CLS TIME:

AND

RUN
OR

BKR1 Hlth OP Fail

t_ITCT
OR
OR

SETPOINTS
AND

BKR HEALTH
AND

CLOSE TRIGER:
Off=0 SETPOINTS
BKR HEALTH
CLOSE TIME PICKUP:
RUN
FlexLogic Operands START BKR1 Hlth Cls PKP
t_close t_close PKP
BKR1 Closed STOP
SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS
BKR HEALTH
BKR HEALTH CHARGE TIME PICKUP:
SPRING CHARGE STATUS: RUN
BKR1 Hlth Chg PKP
Off=0 t_charge t_charge PKP

SETPOINTS

BKR HEALTH
INCOMPLETE CHARGE TIME:

RUN
t_ICT
BKR1 Charge Fail

SETPOINTS
OR

BKR HEALTH
ARC ENERGY PICKUP:
Arc Energy Inputs RUN
BKR1 Engy PKP A
IA2t cycle IA2t PKP
RUN
BKR1 Engy PKP B
IB2t cycle IB2t PKP
RUN
BKR1 Engy PKP C
IC2t cycle IC2t PKP




Figure 218: Breaker Health and Operation logic diagram

578 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

9.5 POWER QUALITY/VOLTAGE DISTURBANCE

The Voltage disturbance function includes both Voltage Swell and Voltage Sag.
Voltage Sag, as described in IEEE 1159-2009 : IEEE Recommended Practice for Monitoring Electric Power Quality,
is a fall in RMS voltage between 0.1 pu and 0.9 pu for durations from 0.5 cycles to 1 min. The condition ends when
the level increases to at least 10% of the nominal voltage above the SAG LEVEL setting. When the voltage on any
phase drops below this level a voltage sag condition occurs. Voltage sags are usually associated with system faults
but can also be caused by switching heavy loads or starting large motors. Short duration voltage sag may cause
process disruptions
Voltage Swell, as described in IEEE 1159-2009, Voltage swell is an increase in RMS voltage above 1.1 pu for
durations from 0.5 cycle to 1 min. To end a Swell condition the level must decrease to 10% of the nominal voltage
bellow the SWELL LEVEL setting. Voltage swells are usually associated with system fault conditions, but they are
much less common than voltage sags. An SLG fault on the system can cause a swell to occur, resulting in a
temporary voltage rise on the healthy phases. Swells can also be caused by switching off a large load, load
shedding, or switching on a large capacitor bank. Voltage swell may cause failure of the components depending
upon the magnitude and frequency of occurrence.
The following reference table represents the different categories of Voltage Sag/Swell conditions based on duration
and pickup level.
Short duration root-mean-square (RMS) Duration Level
Instantaneous
Sag 0.5 - 30 cycles 0.1 - 0.9 pu
Swell 0.5 - 30 cycles 1.1 - 1.8 pu
Momentary
Sag 30 cycles - 3 s 0.1 - 0.9 pu
Swell 30 cycles - 3 s 1.1 - 1.4 pu
Interruption 0.5 cycles - 3 s < 0.1 pu
Temporary
Sag >3 s - 1 min 0.1 - 0.9 pu
Swell >3 s - 1 min 1.1 - 1.2 pu
Interruption >3 s - 1 min < 0.1 pu
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Power Quality > Voltage Disturbance1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Default: Disabled

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: dependent upon the order code
Default: Ph VT Bank 1–J2

MODE
Range: Phase to Ground, Phase to Phase
Default: Phase to Ground

1601-0450 579
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

This setting provides selection of Phase to ground and Phase to phase voltages for a Wye VT connection (phase
to phase for delta connected VT connection).

Note:
Only Phase to Phase mode should be selected when Delta/Single VT Connection Type and Pseudo Reference Phase-to-
Phase are programmed for Phase VT connection under System/Voltage Sensing.

Note:
This setting will be hidden in case of LEA signal input is selected. Mode will be defaulted to Phase to Ground in this case.

VOLT SWELL PICKUP

Range: 0.02 to 3.00 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Default: 1.20 x VT
This setting defines the voltage swell pickup level for phase (A, B, C), and is usually set to a level 1.1 to 1.8
times the VT / nominal voltage.

VOLT SWELL DELAY

Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 5.000 s
This setting specifies an operation time delay for the voltage swell function. Short duration (less than 1 min) or
long duration (more than 1 min) swell overvoltage conditions can be differentiated by setting this delay
appropriately.

MIN VOLT SUPV

Range: 0.02 to 3.00 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Default: 1.20 x VT
This setting defines the minimum feeder voltage level required to identify the voltage sag condition. This will help
to discriminate the voltage sag condition from the feeder down condition.

VOLT SAG PICKUP

Range: 0.02 to 3.00 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Default: 1.20 x VT
This setting defines the voltage sag pickup level, and it is usually set to a level between 0.1 to 0.9 times the VT /
nominal voltage.

Note:
This setting must be higher then value set under MIN VOLT SUPV.

VOLT SAG DELAY

Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 5.000 s

580 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

This setting specifies an operation time delay for the voltage sag function. Short duration (less than 1 min) or
long duration (more than 1 min) sag undervoltage conditions can be differentiated by setting this delay
appropriately.

VOLT SAG ALARM RESET

Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 5.000 s
This setting specifies duration for the Volt Sag operation alarm. After this alarm reset time, the sag operation
alarm is reset until the next sag event. This setting avoids an undesired continuous alarm in case the upstream
power source is turned off.

OUTPUT RELAY X
Rage: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Self-reset

1601-0450 581
582
SETPOINTS LED :
AND
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Voltage Disturbance
FUNCTION:
Disabled
OR

Alarm S
AND

Latched Alarm

OR
LATCH
Configurable
Command
RESET R

SETPOINTS FlexLogic Operands

SETPOINTS
Volt Swell Pickup Volt Swell1 OP A
BLOCK: SETPOINTS Volt Swell1 OP B FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
RUN
Off = 0 Volt Swell1 OP
Volt Swell Delay Volt Swell1 OP C
Va > Volt Swell PKP * VT

AND
OR

SETPOINT
SETPOINTS tPKP Alarm Output Relay X
0
RUN Do Not Operate, Operate
SIGNAL INPUT*:
Vb > Volt Swell PKP * VT tPKP
8S*: Ph VT Bnk1-J2 0
859: Ph VT Bnk1

OR
tPKP
* Not Applicable to 859 RUN 0

Vc > Volt Swell PKP * VT FlexLogic Operands

SETPOINTS VD1 Rise Armed

OR
Phase-to-Ground Voltages –
Wye connection MODE:
VD1 Rise Armed A
Phase A voltage (VA)
VD1 Rise Armed B
Phase B voltage (VB)
Phase C voltage (VC) VD1 Rise Armed C
Phase-to-Phase Voltages –

Figure 219: Voltage Disturbance 1 logic diagram

Delta connection
Ph-Ph AB voltage (VAB)
Ph-Ph BC voltage (VBC)
MODE: Phase to Ground, Phase
Ph-Ph CA voltage (VCA) to Phase (for wye connection)
Phase to Phase (Delta VTs) SETPOINTS
Calculated Phase-to-Phase
Voltages – Wye connection Voltage Disturbance
FUNCTION:
Ph-Ph AB voltage (VAB)
Disabled
Ph-Ph BC voltage (VBC)
Ph-Ph CA voltage (VCA) Alarm
Latched Alarm
Configurable
FlexLogic Operands

Volt Sag1 OP C

Volt Sag1 OP B
LED :
Volt Sag1 OP C
AND
OR

SETPOINTS S
AND

Volt Sag
: Pickup
SETPOINT LATCH
Volt Sag Delay Command
Min Volt Supv
tpkp S RESET R

AND
RUN 0 SETPOINT
SETPOINTS LATCH
Va < VDI Sag PKP * VT Volt Sag Alarm Reset
BLOCK: & tAR R
Va > Min Volt Supv * VT 0
OR

Off = 0
0
RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Volt Sag1 OP
Vb < VDI Sag PKP * VT tpkp S
& 0 SETPOINT
OR

LATCH
Vb > Min Volt Supv * VT Volt Sag Alarm Reset SETPOINT
Alarm Output Relay X
R
OR

tAR Do Not Operate, Operate

0
OR

RUN
0
Vc < VDI Sag PKP * VT
&
Vc > Min Volt Supv * VT tpkp
0
S
SETPOINT FlexLogic Operands
LATCH
Volt Sag Alarm Reset
VD1 Drop Armed
Volt Sag Alarm Reset
OR

R
OR

tAR
0
0
VD1 Drop Armed A

VD1 Drop Armed B

VD1 Drop Armed C

894225C1

1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

9.6 FUNCTIONS

9.6.1 DEMAND
Current Demand is measured on each phase, and on three phases for real, reactive, and apparent power. Setpoints
allow emulation of some common electrical utility demand measuring techniques for statistical or control purposes.

Note:
The relay is not approved as, or intended to be, a revenue metering instrument. If used in a peak load control system, the
user must consider the accuracy rating and method of measurement employed, and the source VTs and CTs, in comparison
with the electrical utility revenue metering system.

The relay can be set to calculate Demand by any of three methods; Thermal Exponential, Block Interval, Rolling
Demand.

Thermal Exponential
This selection emulates the action of an analog peak recording Thermal Demand meter. The relay measures the
quantity (RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent power) on each phase every second, and assumes
the circuit quantity remains at this value until updated by the next measurement. It calculates the Thermal Demand
equivalent based on:

d(t) = D(1 - e-kt)

Where:
● d = demand value after applying input quantity for time t (in minutes)
● D = input quantity (constant)
● k = 2.3/thermal 90% response time.

Figure 220: Thermal Demand Characteristic (15 min response)

The 90% thermal response time characteristic defaults to 15 minutes. A setpoint establishes the time to reach 90%
of a steady-state value, just as with the response time of an analog instrument. A steady-state value applied for
twice the response time will indicate 99% of the value.

Block Interval
This selection calculates a linear average of the quantity (RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent
power) over the programmed Demand time interval, starting daily at 00:00:00 (i.e. 12 am). The 1440 minutes per
day is divided into the number of blocks as set by the programmed time interval. Each new value of Demand
becomes available at the end of each time interval.

1601-0450 583
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Rolling Demand
This selection calculates a linear average of the quantity (RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent
power) over the programmed Demand time interval, in the same way as Block Interval. The value is updated every
minute and indicates the Demand over the time interval just proceeding the time of update.

9.6.1.1 CURRENT DEMAND

The Current Demand for each phase is calculated individually, and the Demand for each phase is monitored by
comparison with a single Current Demand Pickup value. If the Current Demand Pickup is equaled or exceeded by
any phase, the relay can cause an alarm or signal an output relay.
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Functions > Demand > Current Demand 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Default: Configurable

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: dependent upon the order code
Default: CT Bank 1-J1
This setting provides the selection for the current input bank. The bank names can be changed in: Setpoints >
System > Current Sensing > [Name] > CT Bank Name.

MEASUREMENT TYPE
Range: Blk Interval, Exponential, Rolling Dmd
Default: Blk Interval
This setting sets the measurement method. Three methods can be applied.

THERMAL 90% RESPONSE TIME

Range: 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min
Default: 15 min
This setpoint sets the time required for a steady state current to indicate 90% of the actual value to
approximately match the response of the relay to analog instruments. The setpoint is visible only if
MEASUREMENT TYPE is Exponential.

TIME INTERVAL
Range: 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min
Range (859, 869 FW 4.10 onwards): Range: 5 to 90 min in steps of 1 min
Default: 20 min
Default (859, 869 FW 4.10 onwards): 15 min
This setpoint sets the time period over which the current demand calculation is to be performed. The setpoint is
visible only if MEASUREMENT TYPE is Block Interval or Rolling Demand.

584 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

PICKUP
Range: 10 to 10000 A in steps of 1 A
Range (859, 869 FW 4.10 onwards): 0 to 65000 A
Default: 5000 A
This setpoint sets the Current Demand Pickup level.

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Disabled
AND
LED: ALARM

SETPOINTS

OR
AND

S
FUNCTION:

Disabled LATCH

Alarm Set-Dominant
OR

Command R
Latched Alarm
RESET
Configurable

SETPOINTS
AND

BLOCK:
LED: PICKUP
Off=0
SETPOINTS
OUTPUT RELAYS
Do Not Operate, Operate
OR

SETPOINTS
FlexLogic Operands
MEASUREMENT TYPE:
Current Dmd1 PKP

THERMAL 90% RESPONSE To be included in Bridge

TIME:
SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS
TIME INTERVAL: PICKUP:
Current Inputs SIGNAL INPUT:
RUN
Calculate Phase A CURRENT
Phase A Current (IA) IA Demand PICKUP
DEMAND
RUN
OR

Calculate Phase B CURRENT

Phase B Current (IB) CT Bank 1 - J1 IB Demand PICKUP
DEMAND
RUN
Calculate Phase C CURRENT
Phase C Current (IC) IC Demand PICKUP
DEMAND FlexLogic Operands
Current Dmd1 PKP A
USED ONLY IN 845 AND
850 Current Dmd1 PKP B

894060C1.vsdx Current Dmd1 PKP C

Figure 221: Current Demand logic diagram

1601-0450 585
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

9.6.1.2 REAL POWER DEMAND

The Real Power Demand is monitored by comparing it to a Pickup value. If the Real Power Demand Pickup is ever
equaled or exceeded, the relay can be configured to cause an alarm or signal an output relay.
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Functions > Demand > Real Power Demand 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Default: Configurable

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: Power x, (Dependent on order code)
Default: Power 1

MEASUREMENT TYPE
Range: Blk Interval, Exponential, Rolling Demand
Default: Blk Interval
This setting sets the measurement method. Three methods can be applied.

THERMAL 90% RESPONSE TIME

Range: 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min
Default: 15 min
This setpoint sets the time required for steady-state Real Power to indicate 90% of the actual value to
approximately match the response of the relay to analog instruments. The setpoint is visible only if
MEASUREMENT TYPE is Exponential.

TIME INTERVAL
Range: 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min
Default: 20 min
This setpoint sets the time period over which the Real Power Demand calculation is to be performed. The
setpoint is visible only if MEASUREMENT TYPE is Block Interval or Rolling Demand.

PICKUP
Range: 0.1 to 300000.0 kW in steps of 0.1 kW
Default: 5000.0 kW
This setting sets the Real Power Demand Pickup level. The absolute value of real power demand is used for the
Pickup comparison.

RESET DEMAND
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

586 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Any FlexLogic operand can be used to reset the minimum and maximum real power demand from the current
value to zero. These values are reset to zero at the rising edge of the set operand. After reset to zero, calculation
of minimum and maximum real power demand values continues until the next rising edge of the reset operand.
The Reset Demand operand doesn’t reset the current value of the demand used by the Real Power Demand
function.

OUTPUT RELAYS X
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Disabled

1601-0450 587
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

LED: ALARM

AND
SETPOINTS

OR
REAL PWR DEMAND

AND
S
FUNCTION:
Disabled LATCH

Alarm Set-Dominant

OR
Command
Latched Alarm R
RESET
Configurable

SETPOINTS AND
BLOCK:
LED: PICKUP
Off=0
SETPOINTS
OUTPUT RELAYS

OR
Do Not Operate, Operate
SETPOINTS
REAL PWR DEMAND FlexLogic Operands
MEASUREMENT TYPE: RealPwr Dmd PKP
REAL PWR DEMAND
THERMAL 90% RESPONSE
TIME: SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS
REAL PWR DEMAND REAL PWR DEMAND
SIGNAL INPUT:
Real Power Inputs TIME INTERVAL: REAL POWER PICKUP:
RUN
Three-Phase Calculate:
Power 1 Real Demand |P Demand| PICKUP
Real Power (P)
Min Real Demand
Max Real Demand
Not available in 869 Reset Min & Max Real Demand
to 0
ACTUAL VALUES
SETPOINTS Pwr 1 Real Dmd
Pwr 1 Min Real Dmd
RESET DEMAND:
Pwr 1 Max Real Dmd
Off=0

Rising Edge


Figure 222: Real Power Demand logic diagram

9.6.1.3 REACTIVE POWER

he Reactive Power Demand is monitored by comparing to a Pickup value. If the Reactive Power Demand Pickup is
ever equaled or exceeded, the relay can be configured to cause an alarm or signal an output relay.
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Functions > Demand > Reactive Power Demand 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Default: Configurable

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: Power x (Dependent on order code)
Default: Power 1

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: Power 1, Power 2
Default: Power 1

MEASUREMENT TYPE
Range: Blk Interval, Exponential, Rolling Demand

588 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Default: Blk Interval

The setting sets the measurement method. Three methods can be applied.

THERMAL 90% RESPONSE TIME

Range: 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min
Default: 15 min
The setpoint sets the time required for a steady state Reactive Power to indicate 90% of the actual value to
approximately match the response of the relay to analog instruments. The setpoint is visible only if
MEASUREMENT TYPE is Exponential.

TIME INTERVAL
Range: 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min
Default: 20 min
The setpoint sets the time period over which the Reactive Power Demand calculation is to be performed. The
setpoint is visible only if MEASUREMENT TYPE is Block Interval or Rolling Demand.

PICKUP
Range: 0.1 to 300000.0 kvar in steps of 0.1 kvar.
Default: 5000.0 kvar
Any FlexLogic operand can be used to reset the accumulated reactive power demand from its current value to
zero. The accumulated value resets at the rising edge of the set operand. After reset to zero, the reactive power
demand element continues calculating the demand until the next rising edge of the reset operand.

RESET DEMAND
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
Any FlexLogic operand can be used to reset the minimum and maximum reactive power demand from its current
value to zero. The minimum and maximum values reset at the rising edge of the set operand. After reset to zero,
calculation of minimum and maximum reactive power demand values continues until the next rising edge of the
reset operand.
The Reset Demand operand doesn't reset the current value of the demand used by the Reactive Power Demand
function.

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

1601-0450 589
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Disabled
LED: ALARM

AND
SETPOINTS

OR
REACTIVE PWR DMD

AND
S
FUNCTION:
Disabled LATCH

Alarm Set-Dominant
OR

Command
Latched Alarm R
RESET
Configurable

SETPOINTS
AND

BLOCK:
LED: PICKUP
Off=0
SETPOINTS
OUTPUT RELAYS

OR
Do Not Operate, Operate
SETPOINTS
REACTIVE PWR DMD FlexLogic Operands
MEASUREMENT TYPE: ReactvPwr Dmd PKP
REACTIVE PWR DMD
THERMAL 90% RESPONSE SETPOINTS
TIME:
SETPOINTS REACTIVE PWR DMD
SIGNAL INPUT: REACTIVE PWR DMD REACTIVE POWER PICKUP:
Reactive Power Inputs TIME INTERVAL:
Calculate: RUN
Three-Phase
Power 1 Reactive Demand |Q Demand| PICKUP
Reactive Power (Q)
Min Reactive Demand
Max Reactive Demand
Not available in 869 Reset Min & Max Reactive ACTUAL VALUES
Demand to 0
Pwr 1 Reactive Dmd
Pwr 1 Min Reactive Dmd
SETPOINTS
Pwr 1 Max Reactive Dmd
RESET DEMAND:
Off=0

Rising Edge


Figure 223: Reactive Power Demand logic diagram

9.6.1.4 APPARENT POWER DEMAND

The Apparent Power Demand is monitored by comparing to a Pickup value. If the Apparent Power Demand Pickup
is ever equaled or exceeded, the relay can be configured to cause an alarm or signal an output relay.
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Functions > Demand > Apparent Power Demand 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Default: Configurable

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: Power x (Dependent on order code)

590 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Default: Power 1

MEASUREMENT TYPE
Range: Blk Interval, Exponential, Rolling Demand
Default: Blk Interval
The setting sets the measurement method. Three methods can be applied.

THERMAL 90% RESPONSE TIME

Range: 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min
Default: 15 min
The setpoint sets the time required for a steady state Apparent Power to indicate 90% of the actual value to
approximately match the response of the relay to analog instruments. The setpoint is visible only if
MEASUREMENT TYPE is Exponential.

TIME INTERVAL
Range: 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min
Default: 20 min
The setpoint sets the time period over which the Apparent Power Demand calculation is to be performed. The
setpoint is visible only if MEASUREMENT TYPE is Block Interval or Rolling Demand.

PICKUP
Range: 0.1 to 300000.0 kVA in steps of 0.1 kVA
Default: 5000.0 kVA
The setting sets the Apparent Power Demand Pickup level.

RESET DEMAND
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
Any FlexLogic operand can be used to reset the minimum and maximum apparent power demand from its
current value to zero. The minimum and maximum values reset at the rising edge of the set operand. After reset
to zero, calculation of minimum and maximum apparent power demand values continues until the next rising
edge of the reset operand.
The Reset Demand operand doesn't reset the current value of the demand used by the Apparent Power
Demand function.

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

1601-0450 591
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Disabled
LED: ALARM

AND
SETPOINTS

OR
APPARENT PWR DMD

AND
S
FUNCTION:
Disabled LATCH

Alarm Set-Dominant
OR

Command
Latched Alarm R
RESET
Configurable

SETPOINTS
AND

BLOCK:
LED: PICKUP
Off=0
SETPOINTS
OUTPUT RELAYS

OR
Do Not Operate, Operate
SETPOINTS
APPARENT PWR DMD FlexLogic Operands
MEASUREMENT TYPE: ApprntPwr Dmd PKP
APPARENT PWR DMD
THERMAL 90% RESPONSE SETPOINTS
TIME:
SETPOINTS APPARENT PWR DMD
SIGNAL INPUT: APPARENT PWR DMD APPARENT POWER PICKUP:
Apparent Power Inputs TIME INTERVAL:
Calculate: RUN
Three-Phase Power 1 Apparent Demand S Demand PICKUP
Apparent Power (S)
Min Apparent Demand
Max Apparent Demand ACTUAL VALUES
Not available in 869 Reset Min & Max Apparent Pwr 1 Apparent Dmd
Demand to 0 Pwr 1 Min Apparent Dmd
Pwr 1 Max Apparent Dmd
SETPOINTS
RESET DEMAND:
Off=0

Rising Edge


Figure 224: Apparent Power Demand logic diagram

9.6.2 PULSED OUTPUTS

The relay provides a Pulse Output element for four energy measurements. The Pulse Output element can operate
auxiliary relays after an adjustable energy increment for the quantities of positive and negative MWh (Megawatt
hours) and positive and negative MVARh (Mega Volt Amp Reactive hours).
Pulses occur at the end of each programmed energy increment. Upon power-up of the relay, the Pulse Output
function, if enabled, continues from where it was at the time of loss of control power. For example, if control power is

592 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

removed when the positive Watt hours stored at last pulse was 24.000 MWh, when control power is re-applied a
pulse occurs at 34.000 MWh if the energy increment is set at 10.000 MWh.
1. The Auxiliary Output relay(s) used for this element must be set to Self-Resetting. The pulses consist of a
one second on-time and a one second off-time. This feature is programmed such that no more than one
pulse per two seconds is required.
2. The relay is not a revenue class meter and cannot be used for billing purposes.
3. Energy quantities are displayed in MWh and MVarh, with resolutions of 1 kWh and 1 kVarh respectively.
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Functions > Pulsed Outputs

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: Power x (Dependent on order code)
Default: Power 1
This setting provides the power element selection for the CT and VT bank identification.

POS WHS PULSE INCREMENT

Range: 0.000 to 1000.000 MWh in steps of 0.001 MWh
Default: 10.000 MWh
The setpoint specifies the positive Watthours threshold pulse increment after which the output pulse and output
operand are set.

POS WHS PULSE RELAY X

Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

NEG WHS PULSE INCREMENT

Range: 0.000 to 1000.000 MWh in steps of 0.001 MWh
Default: 10.000 MWh
The setpoint specifies the negative Watthours threshold pulse increment after which the output pulse and output
operand are set.

NEG WHS PULSE RELAY X

Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

POS VARHS PULSE INCREMENT

Range: 0.000 to 1000.000 MVARh in steps of 0.001 MVARh
Default: 10.000 MVARh

1601-0450 593
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

The setpoint specifies the positive VARhours threshold pulse increment after which the output pulse and output
operand are set.

POS VARHS PULSE RELAY X

Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

NEG VARHS PULSE INCREMENT

Range: 0.000 to 1000.000 MVARh in steps of 0.001 MVARh
Default: 10.000 MVARh
The setpoint specifies the positive VARhours threshold pulse increment after which the output pulse and output
operand are set.

NEG VARHS PULSE RELAY X

Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Self-Reset

594 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

   

$ $ $ $

) ) ) )

# # # #

   

4 4 4 4

+ + + +

" " " "

3 3 3 3

   

! ! ! !

2 2 2 2

[ [ [ [

   
   

1 1 1 1

   

   

\ \ \ \


0 0 0 0

   

   
'

   


'
/ / / /




) ) ) )

   

'

. . . ' .

,


   

 ,   


   

+  +  +  + 

    ,

%
,

   

   

   

% w

- - - -

'

[ [ [ [

'





   

*
   
t

   

) ) ) )

   

   

& & & &

% % ( % % ^
o

   

( ^

   

] ]

' '

   

& & & &

 

& &

5 % 5 5 % 5 m

c c

b b

c c

b b

 

1 1

. .

 

? ?

% %

? ?

> >

/ /

= =

> >

= =

< <

* *

/ /

< <

9 9

- -

9 9
* *

E E

/ /

G G
8 8
( ( ^ ^

P P

7 7

Z Z Z Z

7 7

 

- - - -

1 1

. .

   

 

- - - -
1 1 1 % 1 %

` `

? ?

@ @

> >

= =

? ?

>
>

< <

> >

>
>

D
D

= = 9 9

C
C

D
D

   

C
C
1 B
< < B

E E

B
B
?
? .

   . 
9 9

G G

   

1
?
?
1

P P
A
A

8 8
.

   

A
%
A

9
9

7 7

   

7 7

9
9

E
E

   
1

; ;

; ;

8 G
G
8

X

_ _

: :

   

P
P

7 -
7

9 9
X

9 9

Y Y Y Y

7
7 /

/
A

E E

   
( ^

( ^ A

I
8 8

G G

- - - -

7 7

1 1

Z Z

P P

 
   

7 7

- - - -
% %

g


&
6

1 %

K K

W W W W

J J

T T T T

U U U U

E E
9
9 9

Q Q Q Q

9 9

F F

E
V V V E V E

K K

I I

U U U U

G
8 8 G G


J J

Q Q Q Q

F F
8 P
P P

7 7
E E

8 P
T T T T

7 7

S S S S
F F
F F F F

F F

R R R R

P P
P P

I I

 N N
N N

Q Q Q Q

P P

N N
F F

O O
O O

 

O O

G G

H N H a N a


M M

J J
G G G G

'

F F F F F F


L L


 5

E A E I E A E I

Figure 225: Pulsed Outputs logic diagram

1601-0450 595
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

9.6.3 DIGITAL COUNTERS

The relay provides sixteen identical Digital Counters. A Digital Counter counts the number of state transitions from
logic 0 to logic 1.
The Digital Counters are numbered from 1 to 16. The counters are used to count operations such as the Pickups of
an element, the changes of state of an external contact (e.g. breaker auxiliary switch), or the pulses from a watt-
hour meter.
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Functions > Digital Counters > Digital Counter 1 (16)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled

NAME
Range: Any 13 alphanumeric characters
Default: Counter 1

UNITS
Range: Any 5 alphanumeric characters
Default: Units
Assigns a label to identify the unit of measure with respect to the digital transitions to be counted. The units label
will appear in the metering corresponding Actual Values Status under Records > Digital Counters.

PRE-SET
Range: -2147483648, 0, +2147483647
Default: 0
The setpoint sets the count to a required pre-set value before counting operations begin, as in the case where a
substitute relay is installed in place of an in-service relay, or while the Counter is running.

COMPARE
Range: -2147483648, 0, +2147483647
Default: 0
The setpoint sets the value to which the accumulated count value is compared. Three FlexLogic output
operands are provided to indicate if the present value is ‘more than (HI)’, ‘equal to (EQL)’, or ‘less than (LO)’ the
set value.

UP
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand for incrementing the Counter. If an enabled UP input is received
when the accumulated value is at the limit of +2147483647, the counter rolls over to -2147483648 and shows
the alarm ‘Digital Counter 1 at Limit’.

596 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

DOWN
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand for decrementing the Counter. If an enabled DOWN input is received
when the accumulated value is at the limit of +2147483647, the counter rolls over to -2147483648 and shows
the alarm ‘Digital Counter 1 at Limit’.

SET TO PRE-SET
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand used to set the counter to the pre-set value. The counter is set at
pre-set value in the following situations:
When
○ the Counter is enabled and Digital Counter 1 Set to Pre-Set operand has value 1 (when the Counter is
enabled and Digital Counter 1 Set to Pre-Set operand has value 0, the Counter will be set to 0).
When
○ the Counter is running and Digital Counter 1 Set to Pre-Set operand changes the state from 0 to 1
(Digital Counter 1 Set to Pre-Set changing from 1 to 0 while the Counter is running has no effect on the
count).
When
○ a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the Counter and Digital Counter 1 Set to Pre-Set operand
has the value 1 (when a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the Counter and Digital Counter 1 Set to
Pre-Set operand has the value 0, the Counter will be set to 0).

RESET
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand for setting the count, either 0 or the pre-set value depending on the
state of the Counter 1 Set to Pre-set operand.

FREEZE/RESET
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand for freezing (capturing) the accumulating count value into a separate
register with the associated date and time of the operation while resetting the count to either 0 or the pre-set
value depending on the state of the Counter 1 Set to Pre-set operand.

FREEZE/COUNT
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand for freezing (capturing) the accumulating count value into a separate
register with the associated date and time of the operation while continuing counting. The present accumulated
value and frozen (captured) value with the associated date/time stamp are available as STATUS values. If
control power is interrupted, during the power-down operation, the accumulated and frozen (captured) values
are saved into non-volatile memory.

1601-0450 597
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

HI OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EQL OUTPUT RELAY X

Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

LO OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

Note:
The counter accumulated value can be reset to zero either by asserting an operand programmed under Reset from the
counter menu, executing the clear Digital Counters command under the Records/Clear menu, or by setting the function of the
counter to “Disabled”.

598 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

0 0 0 [
J
IH 2 )*( J
IH 2 )*( J
IH 2 )*( )*( ZY
X
G 1 ' G 1 ' G 1 ' ' V
 &  &  & &  W
 ,F 30    ,F 30   ,F 30  >  - V
 2 %$ E  2 %$ +  >  2 %$  %$ U
T
   


  1
#" 

+

1
#"
!


 1
#"
!
#" S
R
E 0 !    0    0  !  Q
  /  /  /  
4  4  4  
 /   /   /  
     

   ? ? 
,4 ,4 ,4 P     -

 - - - O  ,   
    K  
 N 


 D 9 C M  -
   ,
L
,4    K   ,
-    ,  
 


    
   -
 6 
56 , E .,
 -,   . , :

  4 ,   6   ,
     ,  56 
  -  ,

, - 4 6 

  
 






 , 6 6

;<= ;<=

;<= AB AB

         
         
          65     6   
          





4



   8   :  @? @?
  :9 : : :9 :9 :9
   9 > 9 9 6     
       4            
    7         6         

Figure 226: Digital Counter logic diagram

1601-0450 599
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

9.7 HARMONIC DETECTION

The Harmonic detection 1(6) element monitors the selected 2nd to 5th harmonic or Total Harmonics Distortion
(THD), which is present in the phase currents. The relay provides six identical Harmonic Detection elements.
In a distribution network, harmonic detection can be used to monitor spurious harmonics from inverter based
distributed energy resources, and take control actions such as islanding DERs or turning on harmonic filters. During
transformer energization or motor starts, the inrush current present in phase currents can impact some sensitive
elements, such as negative sequence overcurrent. Therefore, the ratio of the second harmonic to the fundamental
magnitude per phase is monitored, while exceeding the settable pickup level, an operand is asserted, which can be
used to block such sensitive elements.
During startup or shutdown of generator connected transformers, or following a load rejection, the transformer can
experience an excessive ratio of volts to hertz, that is, become overexcited. Similarly, the ratio of the fifth harmonic
to the fundamental magnitude can be monitored to detect the overexcitation condition.

Note:
The harmonics monitored in this element is calculated from the phase currents, unlike the second or fifth harmonic differential
current used in the transformer differential element.

Note:
The harmonics are updated every protection pass. The THD is updated every three cycles, which is not recommended as a
blocking signal.

Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Harmonic Detection > Harmonic Detection 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Default: Disabled

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: dependent upon the order code
Default: CT Bank 1–J1

HARMONIC
Range: 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, THD
Default: 2nd
This setting selects the specified harmonic or THD to be monitored. The harmonic or THD is expressed in
percent relative to the fundamental magnitude.

PICKUP
Range: 0.1 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%
Default: 20.0%

600 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 60000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000 s

PHASES FOR OPERATION

Range: Any One, Any Two, All Three, Average
Default: Any One
This setting defines the phases required for operation, and the detail is explained below:
ANY
○ ONE: At least one phase picked up.
ANY
○ TWO: Two or more phases picked up.
ANY
○ THREE: All three phases picked up.
AVERAGE:
○ The average of three-phase harmonics or THDs picked up.
If set to Average, the relay calculates the average level of the selected harmonic and compares this level
against the pickup setting. Averaging of the selected harmonic follows an adaptive algorithm depending on the
fundamental current magnitude per-phase. If the fundamental magnitude on any of the three phases goes below
the current cut-off level, the selected harmonic current from that phase is dropped (zeroed) from the equation for
averaging, and the divider is decreased from 3 to 2. The same happens if the magnitude of the fundamental
magnitude on one of remaining two phases drops below the cut-off level. In this case the selected harmonic on
this phase is dropped from summation, and the divider is decreased to 1.

MIN OPER CURRENT

Range: 0.03 to 1.00 x CT in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.10 x CT
This setting sets the minimum value of current required to allow the Harmonic Detection element to operate.
If PHASES FROM OPERATION is set to Average, the average of three-phase currents is used for supervision.
A similar adaptive average algorithm is applied to calculate the average of operation current magnitude.

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Self-reset

1601-0450 601
Chapter 9 - Monitoring


 D DEF



SETPOINT
 , no pDqr Dstuvw
 -
    G
 ! HIJK8
"#$ ,
%&' ! "#$ - ($$)! G=>L
<M;NO9O>
()*+# 23C3 P

SETPOINT

 

SETPOINT
 SETPOINT SETPOINT
SETPOINT . 23 "4C SQTR
000 .32 ./"C3C  2 ,
SETPOINT 223 . . .32"  - ( (% U #% V U #%
. 2 2 "4 3 "%  % ()
.' " +## )% Q"R " 1 000 /0" 1 . . U' U&X ! +UY SETPOINT

.' +## )% Q R  1 000 2 . . 3 "4 FlexLogic Operands

IZ[ J\@] J^M M: ;M:=
.' +## )% Q R  1 000 /0 1 . . _`9a=a _Nbc=d e_f %565
W* 1 000 89:; <=> ? @A
"W #* +## )% QW*R 2 IHH J8Pgg] Ihh >`:== 7
 
/0 1 . . _`9a=a _Nbc=d e_f
SETPOINT
2 IigPIjg] Ik=:9l= k9he=
/"20   _Nbc=d e_m FlexLogic Operands
/0W* 1 . .
.' " /0 Q/0"R 89:; <=> ? ABA
.' /0 Q/0 R 89:; <=>? ABA I
.' /0 Q/0 R
89:; <=>? ABA x
"W #* /0 Q/0W*R
yz{||}~}€‚ƒ 89:; <=>? ABA K

Figure 227: Harmonic Detection logic diagram

602 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

9.8 TRANSIENT GROUND FAULT DETECTION

Some distribution systems run completely insulated from earth. Such systems are called unearthed systems. The
advantage of an unearthed system is that a single phase to earth fault does not cause an earth fault current to flow.
This means the whole system remains operational and the supply is not interrupted. The system must be designed
to withstand high transient and steady state over voltages, however, and so its use is generally restricted to low and
medium voltage distribution systems.
When there is an earth fault in an unearthed 3-phase system, the voltage of the faulted phase is reduced to the
earth potential. This causes the phase voltage in the other two phases to increase, which causes a significant
charging current between the phase-to-earth capacitances. This can cause arcing at the fault location. Many
systems use a Petersen coil to compensate for this, thus eliminating the arcing problem. Such systems are called
compensated networks. The network is earthed with an inductive reactor, where its reactance is made nominally
equal to the total system capacitance to earth. Under this condition, a single-phase earth fault does not result in any
steady state earth fault current.
The introduction of a Petersen coil introduces major difficulties when it comes to determining the direction of the
fault. This is because the faulted line current is the sum of the inductive current introduced by the Petersen coil and
the capacitive current of the line, which are in anti-phase with each other. If they are equal in magnitude, the current
in the faulted line is zero. If the inductive current is larger than capacitance current, the direction of the faulted line
current will appear to be in the same direction as that of the healthy line.
Standard directionalizing techniques used by conventional feeder protection devices are not adequate for this
scenario, therefore, we need a different method for determining the direction of the fault. Two commonly used
methods are the First Half Wave method and the Residual Active Power method.

First Half Wave Method

The initial transient wave, generated at the fault point travels towards the bus along the faulted line, until it reaches
the healthy line. For forward faults the high frequency fault voltage and current components are in opposite
directions during the first half wave, whereas for reverse faults, they are in phase. This fact can be used to
determine the fault direction. This method, however, is subject to the following disadvantages:
● The time duration of the characteristic is very short, in most cases not more than 3ms. Because of this, it
requires a high sampling frequency (3000Hz or even higher)
● It requires an analogue high pass filter, necessitating special hardware
● It is affected by the fault inception angle. For example, when the fault inception angle is 0°, there are no initial
travelling waves.

Residual Active Power Method

Residual Active power, which is sometimes used to detect the instance of a fault can also in some cases be used
for detecting the fault direction. Although the capacitive currents can be compensated by an inductive current
generated by a Petersen coil, the active (instantaneous) current can never be compensated for and this is still
opposite to that of the healthy line. This fact can also be used to directionalise the fault.

1601-0450 603
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

For a forward directional fault, the zero-sequence active power is the power loss of Petersen’s coil, which is
negative. For a reverse fault, the zero-sequence active power is the power loss of the transmission line, which is
positive. This method, however, is subject to the following disadvantages:
● The zero-sequence active power will be very small in magnitude for a reverse directional fault. Its value
depends on the power loss of transmission line.
● The zero-sequence active power may be too small in magnitude to be detected for a forward directional fault.
Its value depends on the power loss of Petersen coil.
● High resolution CTs are required
Due to the low magnitude of measured values, reliability is compromised. This product does not use the above
techniques for directionalisation. This product uses an innovative patented technique called Transient Reactive
Power method to determine the fault direction of an earth fault in a compensated network.

Transient Ground Fault Detection (TGFD) in this device comprises three modules:
● Transient Ground Fault Detection module (TGF)
● Fault Type Detector (FTD)
● Direction Detector (DD)

Note:
Note: TGF is implemented for 50Hz only.

TRANSIENT GROUND FAULT DETECTOR

To establish if there is an earth fault on the system somewhere is straightforward. A simple residual overvoltage
comparison can determine this. Therefore, a TGF[X]> Start signal is produced by comparing the neutral voltage with
a threshold voltage set by VN Threshold. The difficulty comes with establishing the type of fault and its direction.

FAULT TYPE DETECTOR

The FTD uses a Fundamental analysis (FA) technique to establish whether the fault is an intermittent fault or a
steady state faults. For Transient Earth Fault Detection, the detector counts the Residual Voltage bursts within a
specified time window. With some clever signal processing the detector module creates pulses by comparing the
bursts with a settable threshold, then counts these pulses. If the number of pulses equals or exceeds the number
specified by the FTD> Fault Count setting, within the time window specified by the FTD> Time Window, the fault is
deemed to be intermittent and the TGF[X]> Intermit Operand is asserted. If there are fewer pulses than this number,
this indicates either a disturbance or a permanent fault. To establish which, we need to look at the RMS value of the
residual voltage.
If there are fewer pulses than specified and the RMS value does not drop below setting within the specified time
window, the fault is deemed to be permanent. In this case the TGF[X]> Steady Operand is asserted. If there are
fewer pulses than specified and the RMS value does drop below setting, this indicates that a disturbance has been
detected but it is not a fault. In this case, the TGF[X]> Steady Operand is not asserted.
The inputs to this module are:
● The residual voltage
● FTD> VN (defines the threshold which converts the residual voltage burst into a pulse
● FTD> Time Window (defines the time window - default is 2 seconds)
● FTD> Fault Count (defines the fault count)
The FTD outputs two signals to indicate whether the fault is steady state or intermittent.

604 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

DIRECTION DETECTOR
The Direction Detector (DD) uses a patented technique based on Transient Reactive Power (TRP) to establish the
direction of the fault. Unlike traditional methods, this TRP method does not require high resolution CTs or special
analogue filtering hardware and is therefore cheaper to implement.
It can be shown that the residual voltage and residual current components can be reliably used as discriminative
criteria between a faulty and healthy feeder at 220Hz.
The admittance response of a healthy distributed feeder is shown below using a Pi model:

Figure 228: Healthy line response

In the above figure, the phase response of the admittance is consistent at 90o up to frequency f1 (approximately
3000Hz). For a compensated faulty feeder, the admittance response is shown below using a Pi model.

Figure 229: Faulty line response

We can observe that the phase angle (and thus, the reactive power flow) changes from 90° to -90° at frequencies
higher than f2. Based on the above, we have clear direction discrimination between a healthy and faulted feeder at
any frequency between f2 and f1 approximately.

Note:
The resonant frequency in the above system is 70Hz. For a perfectly compensated system, this will be 50Hz.

IED’s use an anti-aliasing band pass filter with cut-off frequency of 150Hz. Furthermore, at 220Hz the post-filter
magnitude is approximately 0.5pu, and at 330Hz, it is less than 0.2pu. To avoid any integer harmonics, and to avoid
severely attenuated quantities due to the filter, we have chosen 220Hz as the most suitable frequency for direction
determination.

1601-0450 605
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

In the forward direction, the residual voltage leads the residual current by 90°, and in the reverse direction the
residual voltage lags the residual current by 90°. These criteria can be used to directionalise the fault.
The residual voltage (Vres) after passing through the bandpass filter tuned to 220 Hz, has 90° added to its phase.
The residual current (Ires) is also passed through a 220 Hz bandpass filter, but no phase shift is applied.
After residual voltage and current signals pass through the band pass filter, VN becomes VN’ due to 90º shift:

   




 

  
 
Figure 230: VN phase shift

As a healthy line is capacitive and a faulty line is inductive:

● If VN’ and IN are in opposite direction it means feeder is faulty (forward) so transient reactive power is
negative.
● If VN’ and IN are in same direction it means feeder is healthy (reverse) so transient reactive power is positive.

Dynamic thresholds
The Transient P and transient Q are calculated during fault conditions to help determine the the fault direction.
The transient active power measurement is computed at nominal frequency. ( P. trans)
The transient reactive power measurement is computed at 220 Hz. (Q trans)
The maximum Values of the Transient P and Q are stored during the fault’s detection and are used for the
calculation of the dynamic thresholds.
After that, at every protection pass the dynamic thresholds are updated as:
● Q negative threshold = -Dir>Qf Pickup + 0.1 * QtransMax
● P negative threshold = -Dir>Qf Pickup + 0.1 * PtransMax
● P positive threshold = Dir>Qr Pickup + 0.1 * PtransMax

The P/Q threshold discriminates between the use of P transient and Q transient in the TGF algorithm. When the
active power is higher than this threshold while the Q transient value are kept below it, the algorithm uses the P
transient as the operate input, otherwise the Q transient value is used instead.
The next figure illustrates the Reactive and active power selection:

606 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring






.





   &'   

(#
4@94?
;:>
>=
<;
7:
897
65
43
120
  !"# + /
+
,- - ,- ) !* -
) !*
,+    @9?4 ,+
2B
9A
>=
;<7
  $%"# 9:78
65
43
21
0/

Figure 231: Reactive and active power selection

The following default settings are recommended for majority of applications:

● FTD>VN 8.000 V
● Dir>Qf Pickup 50.0 KW
● Dir>Qr Pickup 21.0 KW
It is important to note that all settings for the TGFD function, including those at 220Hz, can be set based on 50Hz
nominal secondary values. This is because the gain of the 220Hz transient filter is 1.
The inputs to this module are:
● The residual voltage
● The residual current
● FTD>VN (defines the threshold for the TEFD detection ).
● P/Q Threshold (defines the threshold for the selection between P or Q in fault’s detection)
The TEFD outputs two signals to indicate a forward and a reverse fault.
The Direction Detector should be disabled in the case of solid grounded system and ground directional overcurrent
element is enabled. In such case, the directionality will be determined by the ground directional element. Therefore,
TGFD only should be enabled the FTD (Fault Type detector) to detect an intermittent fault or a transient fault.
The following Operands are also available:
Inhibit: used to inhibit the TEF function and reset all associated DDBs
Reset TEF: can be configured as a user-defined manual reset alarms.

1601-0450 607
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

9.8.1 TRANSIENT GROUND FAULT DETECTION SETTINGS

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Trip, Configurable
Default: Disabled
The selection of Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm or Configurable setting enables the TEFD function.
When Alarm is selected and the TGFD operates, the LED ALARM will flash, and will self-reset, when the
operating conditions are cleared.
When Latched Alarm is selected and the TGFD operates, the LED ALARM will flash during the TGFD operating
condition, and will be alight steadily, after the conditions are cleared. The LED ALARM can be cleared by issuing
a reset command. The Output Relay #1 Trip will not operate if Latched Alarm or Alarm setting is selected.
The Output relay #1 Trip can be configured to operate using the TEFD output operands and the FlexLogic.
The output relay #1 Trip will operate only when Trip function is selected, and the TEFD operates. The LED
ALARM will not turn on, if the TEFD operates when set to function Trip.
When Configurable is selected, neither the trip output, nor the ALARM LED will turn on automatically. They
need be configured using their own menus, and FlexLogic operands.

VT INPUT
Range: Ph VT Bnk1-J2, Ph VT Bnk2-K1
Default: Ph VT Bnk1-J2
This setting provides selection of the voltage signal input.

CT INPUT
Range: CT Bank1-J1, CT Bank2-K1
Default: CT Bank 1-J1
This setting provides selection of the current signal input.

VN THRESHOLD
Range: 0.02 to 0.40 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Default: 0.05 x VT
This setting sets the voltage pickup level specified per times VT.

FAULT DIRECTION DETECTION:

DIRECTIONAL STATUS
Range: Disabled, Direction Detector, Ground OC Dir
Default: Direction Detector
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the TEF element.

DIRECTIONAL MODE
Range: Standard, Advanced

608 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Default: Standard
This setting determines which setting will be used for direction element

PQ THRESHOLD
Range: 5.0 to 2000.0 in steps of 0.1 KW
Default: 30.0 KW
This setting defines the PQ shift threshold in secondary primary values. Although the unit for this setting has
been expressed as KW; it summarizes the use of KW for active power P and KVar for reactive power Q.
When the reactive power is very small, but the Active power is larger than threshold, the Active Power is used to
detect the fault direction

DIR>QF PICKUP
Range: 10.0 to 2000.0 in steps of 0.1 KW
Default: 50.0 KW
This setting sets the pick-up threshold of the P and Q transition in primary values to detect a forward direction
fault.

DIR>QR PICKUP
Range: 5.0 to 2000.0 in steps of 0.1 KW
Default: 21.0 KW
This setting sets the pick-up threshold of the P and Q transitions in primary valuers to detect a reverse direction
fault.

GROUND OC START [ANSI]

Range: GND IOC [X] PKP, GND TOC [X] PKP
Default: GND IOC 1 PKP
The Direction Detector should be disabled and the directionality will be determined by Earth Fault 1 Measured.

Note:
[X]: Total No of Ground IOC elements and No of Ground TOC Elements, respectively

FAULT TYPE DETECTION

FTD> STATUS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the fault type detection in TEF element.

FTD> VN [ANSI]
Range: 0.02 to 0.40 in steps of 0.01 x VT

1601-0450 609
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Default: 0.04 x VT
This setting sets the pick-up threshold for the resides voltage of the fault type detection element.

FTD> TIME WINDOW [ANSI]

Range: 0.500 to 20.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 2.000 s
This setting sets the time window for the fault type detector.

FTD> FAULT COUNT

Range: 0 to 10 in steps of 1
Default: 3
This setting sets the failure number during the time window.

RESET TIME
Range: 30 s to 12000 s in steps of 30 s
Default: 60 s
This setting sets the reset timer.

RESET TGF[X]
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off
This setting resets the Transient Ground Fault Detection element.

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off
The TGFD element will be blocked, when the selected operand is asserted.

OUTPUT RELAYS
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-Reset, Latched
Default: Latched

610 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

9.8.2 TRANSIENT GROUND FAULT DETECTION LOGIC

789 @7A<7
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

." (& /010'2&3

   
 



  ! 789 :;< 9=<

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

 "  ! " (& )*(

   ! #$   " (& +,-   
 "  ! #$   (& )*( 
% & '  (& +,-
789:;< <>?
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

 

 45 45" +06

789;B7><C;7
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

   
 789 @7>A:D
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

Figure 232: Simplified TGFD scheme

Figure 233:

1601-0450 611
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

INTERNAL VALUES

           
 





INTERNAL VALUES

 
 
 


#/!$)
45 /&0( 12,3
!
" #!$$ %&'()*
++, -.
INTERNAL VALUES
7 I F*!
$

65  898:; INTERNAL VALUES

<=> $?@ A I F*!
$ !H
!
" #!$$ %&'()*
++, -. BCDCE

INTERNAL VALUES
7 # F*!
$

 898:; INTERNAL VALUES

<=> $?@ A # F*!
$ !H
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
F;%G (!*( BCDCE

JKLMNOL OPOQR KQSNOTNUS5 KMVV

W NUXOVYTRTZO
[\]^ XV_ ^` abc
[\ XV _ d` abc

Figure 234: Scheme of the calculation of P Trans, Q Trans and U RMS inc

612 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

SETTING
 ,-./ 01234


d! & ' FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
 %
5 6$ # 
  () *+
 
  
 !"# $  
SETTING
abc
dOO C
<> <A.@3 01234
SETTING !7% i j elhlnmop
SETTING
  BC 
<=> 0?43@?-./
<> DE- 01234
 !"# !7%
F ' INTERNAL STATUS
8'  8 $ '9:  
%
':
 #
%
GC 
8:  8 ; '9:  

jmpgqr s impgqr klmlnmop

INTERNAL VALUES SETTING
'   > DE- 01234
D14 H >I <1JKAE :
 W
  
:   D14 H >4 <1JKAE F ' INTERNAL STATUS
C
:   "U !7% 6CC  %
:
 Z

XCC 
'   "U :   ; LMN
 $:O 'P Q R CS6 T : "UV

:   $ MN
 $: 'P Q R CS6 T : "UV

< DE- 01234 :
 !Y
  
F ' INTERNAL STATUS
%
C
6CC  :
 ![
XCC 

SETTING
> DE- 01234
D14 H >I <1JKAE :
 W
  
D14 H >4 <1JKAE F ' INTERNAL STATUS
C
!7% 6CC  %
'
 Z

XCC 
'   ; LMN
 $:O 'P Q R CS6 T ' "UV

'   $ MN
 $: 'P Q R CS6 T ' "UV

< DE- 01234
:
 !Y
  
F ' INTERNAL STATUS
%
C
6CC  '
 ![
XCC 

\2].. < > efghh ij klmlnmop

^<> 01234
!7%
:  "U ; XSC S _CC  INTERNAL STATUS
%
%'`%: ![
'  "U ; FSC S GC 

Figure 235: TGFD Start, PQ Detector, Small PQ Selector and dynamic Q trans & P trans

1601-0450 613
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

INTERNAL STATUS

   JRS NTQMOITPU NMIMOIPQ

VPWGHM
INTERNAL STATUS
  
  FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
    

INTERNAL STATUS  Reset Dominant

 

INTERNAL STATUS 

 

  FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

INTERNAL STATUS      
 


Reset Dominant
SETTING
!843B#82+$0 "#$#%&
5
    
 /   
SETTING

       
  C   
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
   

XYZY[ \]^_ 

SETTING
`abcd e^_Y fg SETTING
  !)*+ COUNTER  !)$%0# 12%+#34
SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
 ! "#$#%& ( /   /  6 7   , -  /   '
   ' , - , .  / .
5

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
 ' SETTING
  A
 !) 893 :8+;2<
,=   >
 ?5@


 Reset Dominant

DE DFGHI JKLM NMIMOIPQ

Figure 236: TRP Direction detector Module and FA Fault Type Detector scheme

614 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

-
 +, ./0 1.123
SETTING

 
Reset Dominant


 - *
  
 +,
  
   Reset Dominant

+LM 

-
 +, ./0 4256

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS Reset Dominant


*

  - NH?ODA? NPAHPA
 +, 2?CDQ R F4256J

Reset Dominant
SETTING 

 !"#$%& '"%"() FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

 *  *K 
*

 

   *+




*
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
 

SETTING *
7 ) " 2?@?A BCDE
8 9 
FAG HDE? IJ

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
 - 

SETTING

7 ) " :;

  


< = >

Figure 237: Alarm & Trip outputs signals and Reset scheme

1601-0450 615
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

9.9 RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTOR FUNCTIONS

9.9.1 RTD TEMPERATURE

The Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) wiring diagram is shown below:

RTD
1

8
 

Figure 238: RTD Wiring diagram

Note:
To enhance the accuracy of the RTD, ensure all 3 cables are of the same length and gauge. In addition, the Compensation
and Return wires must be connected on the RTD side and not on the relay side.

RTD Inputs
The relay has two methods of supporting RTD inputs.
● I/O cards installed in the relay can supply up to 13 RTDs.
● An optional CANBUS-based Remote Input/Output module (RMIO unit) can also be installed, which can
monitor up to 12 additional RTDs (referred to as RRTDs). The RMIO unit supports 6, 9, or 12 RRTDs.
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs) and
convert these signals into a digital format for use as required. These channels are intended to be connected to any
of the RTD types in common use.
Depending on the order code (Advanced Monitoring option selected), the relay is supplied with one combo card
consisting of one RTD input, one Ohms input, four DCmA inputs and seven DCmA outputs. Additionally, the relay
can be furnished with up to two optional RTD cards, each of them having 6 RTD input channels. Only slots B and C
can accept the optional RTD cards.

Note:
If only one RTD card is ordered at the time the relay is ordered, this RTD card is always shown in slot B. The order code
selection does not allow for an RTD card in slot C, if no RTD card is ordered in slot B.

616 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Note:
An I/O card L ordered in Slot G will contain an additional RTD input on the card. It will be the highest RTD number shown (i.e.
if 1 additional RTD card is used, then the low voltage I/O (LVIO )RTD will be RTD #7).

An alphanumeric name is assigned to each channel; this name is included in the channel actual values. It is also
used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter.
Selecting the type of RTD connected to the channel configures the channel. The conversion chart is shown in the
following table.

RTD Temperature vs. Resistance

TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (IN OHMS)
°C °F 100 Ω PT (IEC 120 Ω NI 100 Ω NI 10 Ω CU
60751)
–40 –40 84.27 92.76 77.30 7.49
–30 –22 88.22 99.41 82.84 7.88
–20 –4 92.16 106.15 88.45 8.26
–10 14 96.09 113.00 94.17 8.65
0 32 100.00 120.00 100.00 9.04
10 50 103.90 127.17 105.97 9.42
20 68 107.79 134.52 112.10 9.81
30 86 111.67 142.06 118.38 10.19
40 104 115.54 149.79 124.82 10.58
50 122 119.40 157.74 131.45 10.97
60 140 123.24 165.90 138.25 11.35
70 158 127.08 174.25 145.20 11.74
80 176 130.90 182.84 152.37 12.12
90 194 134.71 191.64 159.70 12.51
100 212 138.51 200.64 167.20 12.90
110 230 142.29 209.85 174.87 13.28
120 248 146.07 219.29 182.75 13.67
130 266 149.83 228.96 190.80 14.06
140 284 153.58 238.85 199.04 14.44
150 302 157.33 248.95 207.45 14.83
160 320 161.05 259.30 216.08 15.22
170 338 164.77 269.91 224.92 15.61
180 356 168.48 280.77 233.97 16.00
190 374 172.17 291.96 243.30 16.39
200 392 175.86 303.46 252.88 16.78
210 410 179.53 315.31 262.76 17.17
220 428 183.19 327.54 272.94 17.56
230 446 186.84 340.14 283.45 17.95
240 464 190.47 353.14 294.28 18.34

1601-0450 617
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (IN OHMS)

°C °F 100 Ω PT (IEC 120 Ω NI 100 Ω NI 10 Ω CU
60751)
250 482 194.10 366.53 305.44 18.73

Note:
RTD type copper (Cu) is only available when order code option ‘S’ is chosen for Slot B or C.

RTD Protection
The relay can monitor up to 12 RTDs and 12 RRTDs, each of which can be configured to have a trip temperature
and an alarm temperature. The RTD Temperature protection menu will be seen on the relay upon availability of RTD
input/inputs. The RRTD Temperature protection setpoints can be seen only if the relay has the RMIO module
installed and validated. The minimum RTD Temperature requirement is to set the setpoint TYPE. The default value
for TYPE, for each RTD is 100 Ω Platinum. The protection RTD Trip, and RTD Alarm from the menu are
optional. They respond to directly measured RTD temperature. The Alarm temperature is set slightly above the
normal measured temperature for the transformer top-oil, bottom-oil, or LTC oil. The Trip temperature is normally
set at the maximum permissible oil temperatures defined as dangerous for the transformer and the transformer
insulation.
This element also monitors the RTD broken connection and blocks the RTD trip and alarm functions if the RTD
connection is detected as Open or Shorted and generates RTD Open and RTD Shorted FlexLogic operands. An
RTD is detected as Open when the RTD connection is either open or the temperature is greater than 250°C. An
RTD is detected as Shorted when the RTD connection is either shorted or the temperature is equal to less than
-40°C.

Note:
The RTD input is active regardless of whether or not, the RTD Trip, or/and RTD Alarm functions are enabled.

Path:Setpoints > RTD Temperature > RTD 1[X]

Path:Setpoints > RRTD Temperature > RRTD 1[X]

TRIP FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled
If a trip is not required from the RTD, select Configurable. This enables the RTD without producing a trip.

NAME
Range: Up to 13 alphanumeric characters
Default: RTD 1

TYPE
Range: 100 Ω Platinum, 100 Ω Nickel, 120 Ω Nickel
Default: 100 Ω Platinum

618 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Selects the type of the RTD used.

APPLICATION
Range: None, Stator, Bearing, Ambient, Other
Default: None
The setting allows each individual RTD to be assigned to a group application. This is useful for some
applications, which require group measurement. Selecting None means that the RTD operates individually and
is not part of any RTD group. Common groups are provided for needs at rotating machines applications such as
Ambient or Bearing.

VOTING
Range: Off, RTD 1, RTD 2….RTD 12
Default: Off
This setting selects the RTD that must also exceed this RTD’s Trip Temperature for a trip to occur. Selecting the
same RTD to which the element is related to, has the same effect as selecting “Off”.

TRIP TEMPERATURE
Range: 1°C to 250°C in steps of 1°C (33°F to 482°F in steps of 2°F)
Default: 155°C (311°F)

TRIP PICKUP DELAY

Range: 0 s to 600 s in steps of 1 s
Default: 2 s

TRIP DROPOUT DELAY

Range: 0 s to 600 s in steps of 1s
Default: 0 s

TRIP OUTPUT RELAY X

Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

ALARM FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled

ALARM TEMPERATURE
Range: 1°C to 250°C in steps of 1°C (33°F to 482°F in steps of 2°F)
Default: 130°C (266°F)

ALARM PICKUP DELAY

Range: 0 s to 600 s in steps of 1 s

1601-0450 619
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

Default: 2 s

ALARM DROPOUT DELAY

Range: 0 s to 600 s in steps of 1 s
Default: 0 s

ALARM OUTPUT RELAY X

Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Latched

hijklmnj  0! 
 6 & "7 -="> 3?6   '!! 37#
\g^T 345 # !$ ! ! N0
hijklmnj  "! "7
!P Q 0! ! 898 * C¤¥)> $D &#
dX]T STUVUWXYZT[ ! :;< +
,
S\e f \T]^T_XW`_T
abYcT_WVbY ’“”• ”–—˜“ FG HGIJ  KLM
™š›
 œ”“ ”–žŸ 3" B CD'6
/0 0!  3" B CD6E6
/0 6 & "7
345
/0 "! "7
R Q/0 0! 
!898 !:;<
 '!! 37 N
" 5! '!O '!

-="> /0
  ! *
+,
"#$ -=" >
 1 6 & 1
2 o 2
 * p *
+ 1 q +
, 2 o ,
p A
q 1
2 -/@
 3=A= 3
% & 00$
Srd
'() S x stuva
 FG HGIJ  KLM
‘
3" B /0 '6
3" B /0 6E6
*
+ Srd
,

S £[wuva
/0 '!! 37 N

" 5! '!O'!
/0  !
"#$ FG HGIJ  KLM
/0 1 h€‚ƒ„ †‡ˆ€‰„Š€‡‹Œƒ  3" B '
2
-! .$ /0 k €Ž‡ˆ„†‚Ž kŒƒ‚€Œ„€† 3" B A.!$
\T]^T_XW`_T eVU^yXgz
{aTyUV`U| }X~_TY~TVW LJ ¡LG ¢LG¡
3" B 0!

 

Figure 239: RTD Protection logic diagram

620 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

9.9.2 RTD TROUBLE

When set to Alarm or Latched Alarm, this element monitors all the RTDs that are either programmed as Alarm or
Trip or Configurable and generates an alarm if any of the RTDs are detected as Open or Shorted. Upon detection of
an RTD Open or Shorted condition, the element also asserts the RTD Trouble PKP and RTD Trouble OP and
operates the assigned output relay. Both RTDs and RRTDs can be monitored using this element.
Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > RTD Trouble

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled

ALARM OUTPUT RELAY X

Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Latched
B!C 
 D
E
F
  
$
!"# %

$ D
 E
% F
  I

'GH

&'! Z (3 &BIB' &

[ [
[[ [[ G 
&'! 5 (3
89:
&'!Z I  *+ ,+-.  /01
[ [
[[ [[
&'! ' # )2)
&'! 5 I  $
% ;<=>? @ A>?=>?
&'! ' # ()
JKLM NOP QRST OUMVUKWXYKU
&&'! Z (3
[ [ 
[ [
[ [
&&'! 5 (3  (3 &4 5

&&'! Z I  ! 6  (37 (3

[ [
[ [
[ [
&&'! 5 I 
 

JKLM NNOP QRST OUMVUKWXYKU

Figure 240: RTD Trouble logic diagram

1601-0450 621
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

9.10 LOSS OF COMMUNICATIONS

This section covers the functionality of the Loss of Communications element.
The relay monitors activity on an interface via the configured protocol for this interface. The communications status
is set for each protocol.
If communication is lost, the enabled interface will issue a Loss of Comms event and operate a combination of
output relays/states.

Note:
The MODBUS ACTIVITY TIMEOUT specifies the minimum time without Modbus communication. This timeout is used to
declare the Modbus ‘Loss of Communication’ state. The MODBUS ACTIVITY TIMEOUT must be set to a value other than 0
for the Loss of Communication”monitoring to work properly.

Note:
MODBUS ACTIVITY TIMEOUT is set under: Setpoints > Device > Communications > Modbus Protocol

Path: Setpoints > Monitoring > Loss of Comms

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled

INTERFACE
Range: Serial, Serial + Ethernet, Ethernet, All
Default: Serial
Only the protocols associated with the selected interface are shown in this screen as options. For example, if
“Ethernet” is selected, select the Ethernet protocols to monitor. The Ethernet protocols selection is defined as
EthernetProtocolBitmask bitmasks.

MODBUS
Range: Off, On
Default: Off

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0 to 600 s in steps of 1
Default: 2 s

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

622 1601-0450
 Chapter 9 - Monitoring

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Latched
>?@A :5;<

+
, ./01230 .43/43 5062789:5;<=
-


E F% 
+
G( #HI*J   ,
-
FK(L >?@ R>R5S A
B
MI#K C

#"'N*J MI#K
+ C D
&(m$K#HI* ,
- Z
\]^_`

T03
@VWŠX2X3

UVWW2XY

5?T?:


+
  ,
- 

   FO F PMQ!
 !"#"$
O% O GPMQ
%&#'"()* cd edf ghijkfil ghijkfi

|}~}€‚ƒ €„~ †‡ˆ‰

   O
>?@A <;Uab<

nopqorstu rvpwxyz{

   OO



Figure 241: Loss of Communications logic diagram

1601-0450 623
Chapter 9 - Monitoring

624 1601-0450
CHAPTER 10

CONTROL
Chapter 10 - Control

626 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

10.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter contains the following sections:

Chapter Overview 627
Control Overview 628
Setpoint Group 629
Motor control 632
Local Control Mode (Breaker and Switches) 670
Breaker Control 680
Switch Control (89) 684
Virtual Input Control 687
Trip Bus 688
Breaker Failure (50BF) 691
Arc Flash Protection 698
VT Fuse Failure (VTFF) 701
Digital Elements 704

1601-0450 627
Chapter 10 - Control

10.2 CONTROL OVERVIEW

  NHO-P,QO R+P/-

967<6 9:;8<=5>5?4
  !"#"$ %#&$#'()
ST SUVWU SXYZX[\X
 ab cdefg hijkdg lfmn
‹XŒZ\XŒ ŽUVX SUVWU‘[
 ’"t&s r"(#$"s !"“p
o$p&qp$ r"(#$"s
  
r"(#&t#"$ r"(#$"s
  
%”'#t• r"(#$"s
 uvwxy z{v|}~v€ w‚ƒ „ |† x
   ‡'$#ˆ&s ‰(Šˆ# r"(#$"s
`   *+,- ./0
12 986:;
.+HIJH+ KI,L/+H
12 34565768
]+^ KLI0_
M* K/0H KI,L/+H
@ABAC D @ABAC E @ABAC F @ABAC G

Figure 242: Control Display Hierarchy

628 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

10.3 SETPOINT GROUP

The relay provides six setpoint groups. All setpoints contained under the protection setpoints are reproduced in six
groups, identified as Setpoint Groups 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6. These multiple setpoints provide the capability for both
automatic and manual switching to protection settings for different operating situations. Automatic (adaptive)
protection setpoint adjustment is available to change settings when the power system configuration is altered.
Automatic group selection can be initiated from the autoreclose, SETPOINT GROUPS and by use of a SET
GROUP x ACTIVE setpoint input. The group selection can be initiated by this input from any FlexLogic operands,
inputs, pushbuttons or communications.
Group 1 is the default for the Active Group and is used unless another group is requested to become active. The
active group can be selected with the ACTIVE SETPOINT GROUP setpoint, by SET ACTIVE x GROUP input or
inputs from autoreclose, SETPOINT GROUPS. If there is a conflict in the selection of the active group, between a
setpoint, inputs and inputs from functions, the higher numbered group is made active. For example, if the inputs for
Group 2, 4, and 6 are all asserted the relay uses Group 6. If the logic input for Group 6 then becomes de-asserted,
the relay uses Group 4. Some application conditions require that the relay does not change from the present active
group. This prevention of a setpoint group change can be applied by setting Change Inhibit inputs (1 to 16). If
needed, typically this change inhibit is done when any of the overcurrent (phase, neutral, ground, or negative
sequence), overvoltage, bus or line undervoltage, or underfrequency elements are picked-up.
Path: Setpoints > Control > Setpoint Groups

ACTIVE SETPOINT GROUP

Range: 1,2,3,4,5,6
Default: 1
The ACTIVE SETPOINT GROUP setting is used for manual selection of the Active Setpoint Group.

SET GROUP 2 (3,4,5,6) ACTIVE

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand that initiates change of the ACTIVE SETPOINT GROUP.

SET GROUP 2 (3,4,5,6) ACTIVE

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand that initiates change of the ACTIVE SETPOINT GROUP.

Note:
SET GROUP 2 defaults to PB 8 ON (ALT SETTING) for some order codes.

GROUP CHANGE INHIBIT 1 (UP TO 16)

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand that inhibits change of the active setpoint group.

1601-0450 629
Chapter 10 - Control

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

630 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

! ! ! ! ! !
      p
            o
 $  $  $  $  $  $ mn
      l
 "#  "#  "#  "#  "#  "# k
j
 1  2  3  4  5  6 j
      i



 


 


 


 


 


 h
      g
F . F . F . F . F . F . e
     
T
EH
=
>T
@
I I
H >
=E K
T =
B ?
@ J
T
=
?
>
%&D %&D %&D %&D %&D =
T

'( '( '( '( '( '(

%&D

%&D '(

%&D '(
%&D %&D %&D %&D %&D %&D

%&D '(

%&D '(

%&D '(

'(

'( '( '( '( '(

'(

...

a b
` 7 7 c
_7 7^ ^ ^ 7^ d7
^ ^
61

1 2 3
    
 < < < <

C C

C

C


 1 $ $ $ $ $ 8; S 








G
     8; XY 0: " " " "
    #" #" #" #" #" 0: 2 3 4 5 6 X 2 3 4 5 6 9: 2 3 4 5 6 C OO C OO C OO C OO
    2 3 4 5 6 98 NV NV NV NV NV ,W0 NV NV NV NV NV , Y9 NV NV NV NV NV #  #  #  ... # 

 

 






 07/ UP UP UP UP UP :
W: UP UP UP UP UP \-, :0 PU PU PU PU PU
[ ] M M M M M
S  S  






 -, MR MR MR MR MR 09 MR MR MR MR MR [0 R R R R R
 
      + QP QP QP QP QP + QP QP QP QP QP
7 PQN PQN PQN PQN PQN
 O  O  O  O  O f)* NM NM NM NM NM )*f NM NM NM NM NM Z ML ML ML ML ML
A     
         
 L L
 
L L
 
L

L L
 
L L
 
L
     

Figure 243: Setpoint Groups logic diagram

1601-0450 631
Chapter 10 - Control

10.4 MOTOR CONTROL

10.4.1 START SUPERVISION

Start Supervision consists of five elements that guard against excessive starting duty. All Start Supervision
elements operate the FlexLogic operand Output Relay 3 (Start Inhibit). In addition to Start Supervision elements,
the Start Inhibit operand also operates when the Phase Reversal element or Any Trip operates, as shown in the
below figure. If the condition that has caused the trip is still present (e.g. hot RTD), the Start Inhibit operand will not
reset until the condition is no longer present or the lockout time has expired. The Auxiliary Output Relay, energized
by the Start Inhibit operand, changes state only when the motor is stopped to accommodate control circuits that
must be continuously energized, such as a contactor.

Note:
The Start Inhibit operand is programmed as factory default to energize the auxiliary Output Relay 3, therefore, it is
recommended to use the auxiliary Output Relay 3 to inhibit the closing of the motor switching device.

  
  
!"  # 
!",-.  

  
!"/-    
 $%  
#& '( 
& #) 
*( + 012234536789
Figure 244: Start Inhibit FlexLogic operand

The five elements of Start Supervision are: Thermal Start Inhibit, Maximum Starting Rate, Maximum Cold/Hot
Starting Rate, Time Between Starts, and Restart Delay.

10.4.1.1 THERMAL INHIBIT

This function is provided to inhibit the starting of a motor if there is insufficient thermal capacity available for a
successful start. Starts are inhibited when the thermal capacity is too large.
TCADJ (adjusted thermal capacity) is the thermal capacity required for a successful start. The relay obtains the
value for adjusted thermal capacity by:
● Automatically learning
● Manually configuring the setpoint TC REQUIRED TO START.
This function uses the following formula to automatically determine thermal capacity required for a successful start
(TADJ) from learned thermal capacity used at the start (TCL) increased by the margin (TC USED MARGIN).

TCADJ = TCL + (1 + TC used margin / 100%)

Example:

632 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

If the thermal capacity used for the last five starts is 24, 23, 27, 26 and 20% respectively, the learned starting
capacity used at start is the maximum which is 27%.
If the set margin is 25%, the adjusted thermal capacity learned value (TCADJ) is calculated as 27% x (1+25%/100%)
= 33.75%.
A start inhibit is issued until the motor current TCU decays to 100% - 33.75 = 66.25%.
The learned thermal capacity used at start (TCL) is calculated even if the Thermal Start Inhibit element is disabled.
The learned thermal capacity used at start (TCL) is stored in a non-volatile memory and it is available after the
power is removed from the device. Once the TCL is calculated, it will take N successful starts before the calculation
is repeated. N is set in Setpoints > System > Motor > Number of starts to learn.
A successful motor start is one in which the motor reaches the Running state or SM Field Applied (in synchronous
motor application).
Under the following conditions, this function uses the manually programmed TC REQUIRED TO START value
instead of the learned thermal capacity used at start (TCL) to determine the thermal capacity required for a
successful start (TCADJ)
● If N number of starts history is not available
● If the Clear Motor Learned Data command (in Records > Clear Records) is executed,
● If the setpoint BYPASS LEARNED START TCU is set to Yes
● If the thermal Inhibit function is disabled and the Thermal Model trips the motor at 100% thermal capacity.
Under any of these conditions, the thermal capacity required for a successful start (TCADJ) is the manually
configured value TC REQUIRED TO START: TCADJ = TC Required to Start
The Thermal Lockout Time calculation is based on the values of TCU, TCADJ and the Cool Time Constant Stopped
(CTCS). The latter is set in Setpoints > Protection > Group 1 > Motor > Thermal Model.
If, for the example above, the Cool Time Constant Stopped = 30 Minutes and the motor TCU = 90%, the lockout
time is:

 
   !    

!      
 "   
If the start history is not available or setpoint BYPASS LEARNED START TCU is set to Yes, then the inhibit time is
calculated using setpoint TC REQUIRED TO START (assuming 85%) as:

        

    


  

    
 


The relay constantly displays the Thermal Lockout Time in the Status > Motor menu even if the motor is neither
stopped nor tripped.
If the Emergency Restart input is asserted during a Thermal Start lockout, the TCU is set to zero and the Thermal
Trip OP is reset. This causes resetting of Thermal Lockout Time to zero and dropout of the Start Inhibit and Thermal
Inhibit OP operands and allows a new start.
In the event of a real emergency, the Emergency Restart input operand must remain asserted at logic 1 until the
emergency is over. The Thermal Inhibit OP and Start Inhibit operands will remain reset until the Emergency Restart
Input operand is de-asserted. However, calculation of the Thermal Lockout Time continues after resetting to zero,
regardless of the duration of the Emergency Restart input.

1601-0450 633
Chapter 10 - Control

Path: Setpoints > Control > Motor Starting > Start Supervision > Thermal Inhibit

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
If the Function is set to Disabled, the element is not functional unless the motor thermal capacity has reached
100% and the thermal model trip function is enabled. In that case, the Thermal Start Inhibit operand operates
and the lockout time is approximately 190% of the Cool Time Constant Stopped. After the lockout time expires,
the TCU will decay by the level defined by setpoint TC REQUIRED TO START and a new start will be allowed.

TC USED MARGIN
Range: 0 to 25% in steps of 1%
Default: 25%
Setpoint values in the range of 0 to 25% specify the margin to be included in the calculation of the adjusted
Thermal Capacity Used at start value. This setpoint is only applicable when learned start TCU is not bypassed
(i.e. BYPASS LEARNED START TCU = No) and N number of starts history is available.

BYPASS LEARNED START TCU

Range: No, Yes
Default: No
This setpoint provides flexibility to bypass the Learned Start TCU (TCL) value to determine the thermal capacity
required to successfully start the motor. When this setpoint is set to No, the thermal inhibit function determines
the thermal capacity required to successfully start the motor using Learned Start TCU. When set to Yes, the
thermal capacity required to successfully start the motor is determined by the value configured under setpoint TC
REQUIRED TO START.

TC REQUIRED TO START
Range: 0 to 85% in steps of 1%
Default: 85%

634 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

This value specifies the thermal capacity required to successfully start the motor. The thermal inhibit function
uses this value instead of the learned thermal capacity used at start (TCL) when:
N number
○ of start history is not available
Setpoint
○ BYPASS LEARNED START TCU is set to Yes
The○Thermal Inhibit function is disabled
The○Thermal Model trips the motor at 100% thermal capacity
  !"
>(> C(>DD m
n
>(> DD

€‚ ƒ„ €‚†‡ ˆ‰ ‡


D BA?(>
~ '% 7 0
EF IJKLMNOPN QRSTUTN
G vwx m
 7 0112 z{x|} n   !"
EF
G ywvwx C(( &#'(
EF
G   !"

 m EF
n
BA?(> G # $% &#'( )*
u'% 7 0
ocpC(( # (>h >( i%q 7 0 EF
G rst

 456   !"
ŠhD =  C((   / 01123 456 # $% &#'( *H*

c>70
+,-+ .+-



C < %9  :901123456;; # $% =>?@>A( $
 
=   9;
 1
456 7 8 9  456
:0112; < 
Ž1Ž‘eq? 

 0
 ‹ ŒA (> C((
456
456 7 (D>(
  9011 3 (D>(;

+,-+ .+-

# $% D?(h

VWXYZ[\X]^V_]XW`^aZXZb
cA$'  >d (( (> %  9c;
9 0 (>e; dA%(fg
,jk  ! ,- l  ;

<$A$ >d c i%A
C(>  > 3 i>%(% $ $>h

Figure 245: Thermal Start Inhibit logic diagram

10.4.1.2 MAXIMUM STARTING RATE

Note:
We recommend using the Maximum Cold/Hot Starting Rate element instead of the Maximum Starting Rate element when the
allowable number of Cold and Hot starts is known.

The Maximum Starting Rate element defines the number of start attempts allowed in a programmable time
interval. After every new start, the number of starts within the past time Interval is compared to the number of starts
allowed. When the maximum number of actual starts within the past Interval is reached, the FlexLogic operand Max
Start Rate PKP is asserted. Once the motor stops, the comparison is performed again and if the two numbers are
the same, the Start Inhibit operand is activated to block the motor start. If a block occurs, the lockout time is equal to
the time elapsed since the ‘oldest start’ within the past Interval that occurred, subtracted from the time of the

1601-0450 635
Chapter 10 - Control

Interval. For more details, please refer to the figure: Maximum Starting Rate logic diagram. Even unsuccessful start
attempts are logged as starts for this feature.
Example: If Max Number of Starts is set to 2 and the Time Interval is set to 60 minutes:
● One start occurs at T = 0 minutes
● A second start occurs at T = 17 minutes
● The motor is stopped at T = 33 minutes
● A block occurs.
● The lockout time is 60 minutes – 33 minutes = 27 minutes.
If the Emergency Restart input is asserted while the motor is stopped or tripped during a Maximum Starting Rate
lockout, the information about the oldest start inside the selected time Interval is erased. This causes a dropout of
the Start Inhibit and allows a new start. If the motor starts while the Emergency Restart input is asserted, the new
start is still recorded. It is important that the Emergency Restart is removed either shortly before or shortly after the
motor is started.

Note:
Consecutive assertion of multiple Emergency Restart inputs erases the equivalent number of the oldest motor starts. For
example: when an Emergency Restart input is asserted twice consecutively, the two oldest starts will be erased and therefore
allow two motor starts.

Note:
The information about motor starts and stops within the past Interval is stored in non-volatile memory and remains in the
memory after the power is removed. When the power is restored, the Maximum Starting Rate element continues working
normally using the information collected before the power loss if the real time clock worked properly during the power loss.
However, when the relay power is restored, if the clock is not working properly or defaulted to the factory setting, LO time will
remain unchanged and prevent the motor from starting until LO time becomes zero or the Emergency Restart is asserted.

Path: Setpoints > Control > Motor Starting > Start Supervision > Maximum Starting Rate

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled

INTERVAL
Default: 60 min
Range: 1 to 300 min in steps of 1min
This setting specifies time interval for monitoring the maximum allowable rate of starting. Set it to 60 minutes for
the classical starts-per-hour functionality.

MAX NUMBER OF STARTS

Range: 1 to 16 in steps of 1
Default: 3
The setting specifies the maximum allowable number of starts that can occur within the specified time Interval.

636 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Latched

++
++
2' "!3. {|g} ~jrsj
%&'( )*'
lnk€kj
,'-."/ 0 1  &6-"! *7  ! 8

THGMGEF
ZRZGEF  
DEFGHIJK LMKNONEP QNEORQS
ghihjklm jnh   !  " #$#
 
oiphqj qjrsj vVw@BC ?@A@BC
++b : :
< > < >
toulj ; = ; =  
,6"!4"'(f "8 ! : : : :
9 9 9 9
  !  " a#

VRWXRYF FNZG [RH

  \J] ^ R[ MFJHFM _`  
x
TUT vT y
z  ! 2' )-)
* *!  ! )'4
CNZG GKJMGO MNEWG
* *!  *55"/ ƒ
„ F‚G RKOGMF MFJHF
* *! e!)55"/

+b cb

  !  " da e)6"

 

Figure 246: Maximum Starting Rate logic diagram

10.4.1.3 MAXIMUM HOT/COLD STARTING RATE

Note:
We recommend using the Maximum Starting Rate element instead of the Maximum Cold/Hot Starting Rate element when
the allowable number of Cold and Hot starts is not known.

This element defines the number of cold and hot start attempts allowed in a certain time interval. On each start, the
TCU level defined by the setpoint Cold/Hot TCU Level is used by this element to determine the start type: Hot or
Cold.
The new start is declared as:
● A Hot Start if the actual TCU% is greater than or equal to the setpoint Cold/Hot TCU Level
● A Cold Start if the actual TCU% is less than the setpoint Cold/Hot TCU Level
At each new start, the number of starts (hot or cold) within the past time interval is compared with the number of
allowed starts (hot or cold).
When the maximum number of actual starts (hot or cold) within the past interval is reached, the FlexLogic operand
Max Hot Start PKP or Max Cold Start PKP is asserted.
Once the motor stops, the comparison is performed again. If the maximum number has been reached, the Start
Inhibit operand is activated to block the motor start. If a block occurs, the lockout time is equal to the time elapsed
since the 'oldest start' within the past interval that occurred, subtracted from the time of the interval. For more

1601-0450 637
Chapter 10 - Control

details, please refer to the figure: Maximum Cold/Hot Starting Rate logic diagram. Note that unsuccessful start
attempts are logged as starts for this feature.
Application Example 1 is illustrated by the the following figure:
● Setpoint Max Number of Cold Starts = 2
● Setpoint Max Number of Hot Starts =2
● Setpoint Interval = 60 mins
● Setpoint Cold/Hot TCU Level = 25%

Figure 247: Application Example 1

When the motor starts at time T = 0 minutes, and the TCU level lies below the set Cold/Hot TCU Level, the
element declares the first start as a Cold Start and increments the cold start counter to 1.
The second start occurs at time T = 25 minutes, and the TCU level lies below the set Cold/Hot TCU Level.
Therefore the element declares the second start as a cold start and increments cold start counter to 2.
After the second start, the element compares the number of cold starts and hot starts within past interval window
with the set value of Max Number of Cold Starts and Max Number of Hot Starts, respectively. The element
asserts the Max Cold Start PKP operand because the number of cold starts has reached the allowed number of
cold starts attempts within past interval.
When the motor stops at T = 50 minutes, the FlexLogic operands Max Cold Start OP and Start Inhibit are asserted.
The motor remains inhibited from starting for 10mins (60 minutes - 50 minutes). Because the number of hot starts
counter equals zero within the past time interval window, the FlexLogic operand Max Hot Start PKP/OP remains at
zero.

638 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

Application Example 2 is illustrated by the followijng figure:

● Setpoint Max Number of Cold Starts = 2
● Setpoint Max Number of Hot Starts =2
● Setpoint Interval = 60 mins
● Setpoint Cold/Hot TCU Level = 25%

Figure 248: Application Example 2

When the motor starts at time T = 0 minutes, the TCU level lies below the set Cold/Hot TCU Level. Therefore the
element declares the first start as a cold start and increments the cold start counter to 1.
The second start occurs at time T = 25 minutes, and the TCU level lies above the set Cold/Hot TCU Level. The
element declares the second start a hot start and increments the hot start counter to 1.
After the second start, the element compares the number of cold starts and hot starts within past interval window
with the corresponding set value of Max Number of Cold Starts and Max Number of Hot Starts, respectively.
Within the past interval window, the number of cold starts remains below the allowed cold starts, so the FlexLogic
operand Max Cld Srt Rate PKP remains zero. Similarly, within the past interval window, the number of hot starts
remains below the allowed hot starts, so the FlexLogic operand Max Hot Start PKP remains zero.
The third start occurs at T = 50 minutes, and the TCU level lies above the set Cold/Hot TCU Level, so the element
declares a third start a hot start and increments the hot start counter to 2.
After the third start, the element compares the number of cold starts and hot starts within past interval window with
the corresponding set value of Max Number of Cold Starts and Max Number of Hot Starts, respectively. Within
the past interval window, the number of cold starts remains below the allowed cold starts, so the FlexLogic operand
Max Cold Start PKP remains zero. However, the number of hot starts has reached the allowed number of hot starts
within the past interval window, therefore the FlexLogic operand Max Hot Start PKP is asserted.
When the motor stops at T = 75 minutes, Max Hot Start OP is asserted and blocks the motor from starting for the
next 10 minutes (60 minutes - 50 minutes).

1601-0450 639
Chapter 10 - Control

Because the cold start counter equals 1 within the past time interval window, Max Cold Start PKP/OP remains de-
asserted.
If the Emergency Restart input is asserted while the motor is stopped or tripped during a Max C/H Start Rate LO
Time, the information about the oldest start inside the selected time interval is erased. This causes a dropout of the
Start Inhibit operand and allows a new start. If the motor starts while the Emergency Restart input is asserted, the
new start is still recorded. It is important that the Emergency Restart is removed either shortly before or shortly after
the motor is started.

Note:
Consecutive assertion of multiple Emergency Restart inputs erases the equivalent number of the oldest motor starts. For
example: when an Emergency Restart input is asserted twice consecutively, the two oldest starts will be erased and therefore
allow two motor starts.

Note:
The information about motor hot and cold starts and stops within the past interval is stored in non-volatile memory and
remains in the memory after the power is removed. When the power is restored, the Maximum Hot/Cold Starting Rate
element continues working normally using the information collected before the power loss. However, if the relay power is
restored and the clock is not working properly or has defaulted to the factory setting, LO time will remain unchanged and
prevent the motor from starting until LO time becomes zero or the Emergency Restart operand is asserted.

Path: Setpoints > Control > Motor Starting > Start Supervision > Maximum Cold/Hot Starting Rate

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled

INTERVAL
Default: 60 min
Range: 1 to 300 min in steps of 1min
This setting specifies time interval for monitoring the maximum allowable rate of starting. Set it to 60 minutes for
the classical starts-per-hour functionality.

MAX NUMBER OF COLD STARTS

Range: 1 to 16 in steps of 1
Default: 3
The setting specifies the maximum allowable number of cold starts that can occur within the specified time
Interval.

MAX NUMBER OF HOT STARTS

Range: 1 to 16 in steps of 1
Default: 2
The setting specifies the maximum allowable number of hot starts that can occur within the specified time
Interval.

640 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

COLD/HOT TCU LEVEL

Range: 0 to 50% in steps of 1
Default: 30%
The TCU level defined by this setpoint is used by the Maximum Starting Rate function to determine the next
start type. The new start is declared as:
Hot○Start if the actual TCU% is greater than this setpoint
Cold
○ Start if the actual TCU% is less than this setpoint.

Once this start inhibit function declares the start type, it will take the corresponding configurable number of starts
(Max Number of Cold Starts or Max Number of Hot Starts) in order to compare with the actual number of starts
within the past time interval.

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Latched

S  S
I !
YZ \ [ !  qr^t uahia
S  S
M
$  % Z & vcebwba

E  = 1 M
$  %  &
R
>20s0./
D;D0./ F   
-./02345 6s5787.9 :7.8;:< M   
F   ^_`_abcd ae_
S SW o`f_ga gahia lLm)+,
T( N)*)+,
T( M Z  
jokca AT PO AT PO
E$ " ] R & ' T ' ' T'
np F   
 Iz
L;@B;C/ /7D0 G;2 {|
F    H4J K ;G s/42/s QU }
>?> l> F   
M " M   V
M ##  np ,7D0 054xs08 s7.@0 {|
/y0 ;580s/ s/42/ } M Z  V
M \## 
SW  X W
M YZ  R [V \$
~€‚ƒ„‚ †‡ˆ
Figure 249: Maximum Hot/Cold Starting Rate logic diagram

1601-0450 641
Chapter 10 - Control

10.4.1.4 TIME BETWEEN STARTS

The Time Between Starts function enforces a minimum time duration between two successive start attempts. A
time delay is initiated with every start attempt, and a new start is not allowed until the specified interval has lapsed.
The timer feature is useful in enforcing the duty limits of starting resistors or starting autotransformers.
At the detection of the motor start, the Time Between Starts timer is loaded with the set Minimum Time. Even
unsuccessful start attempts are logged as starts for this feature. Once the motor is stopped, if the time elapsed
since the most recent start is less than the Minimum Time setting, the Start Inhibit operand is activated to block the
motor start. If a block occurs, the lockout time is equal to the time elapsed since the most recent start subtracted
from the Minimum Time setting.
Example: If Minimum Time is set to 25 min.
● A start occurs at T = 0 minutes
● The motor is stopped at T = 12 minutes
● A block occurs. The lockout time is 25 minutes – 12 minutes = 13 minutes
If the Emergency Restart input is asserted while the motor is stopped or tripped during a Time Between Starts
lockout, the Time Between Starts timer is reset. This causes a dropout of the Start Inhibit operand and allows a
new start. If the motor starts while the Emergency Restart input is asserted, the lockout timer does not remain reset
and starts running from the rising edge of the Motor Starting state. However, Start Inhibit and Time Btwn Start OP
will remain reset until Emergency Restart Input is de-asserted.
The status of the Time Between Starts element (including the time) is stored in non-volatile memory and remains
in the memory after the power is removed. When the power is restored, the Time Between Starts element
continues working normally using the information collected before the power loss. However, if the relay power is
restored and the clock is not working properly or has defaulted to the factory setting, the LO time will remain
unchanged and prevent the motor from starting until it reaches zero, or the Emergency Restart is asserted.
Path: Setpoints > Control > Motor Starting > Start Supervision > Time Between Starts
Function
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
Minimum Time
Range: 1 to 600 min in steps of 1 min
Default: 10 min
Sets time amount of time following a start before a start control is permitted to prevent restart attempts in quick
succession (jogging).
Events
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Targets
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Latched

642 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

 **
7+FG !"#
&' ()  ** H I,

+ ",-. / 0 1 ' 

B
C
D    
E
  !"# $%$
   

1))# !"# 2    

K   !"# 3$

1))# !)JJ.
L
> A
1))# #JJ. = =
@
<; =
: ? B    
C
D
!"# H I,

   
*4 5 4 
**4

+#2 (8 96"#   !"#6 73 

 

Figure 250: Time Between Starts logic diagram

10.4.1.5 RESTART DELAY

The Restart Delay feature is used to ensure that a certain amount of time passes between the time a motor is
stopped and the restarting of that motor. This timer feature can be very useful for some process applications or
motor considerations. If a motor is on a down-hole pump, after the motor stops, the liquid can fall back down the
pipe and spin the rotor backwards. It is very undesirable to start the motor at this time.
The Restart Delay inhibit lockout will remain active (it may be used as a backspin timer) when the Emergency
Restart input is asserted.
The status of the Restart Delay element (including the time) is stored in non-volatile memory and remains in the
memory after the power is removed. When the power is restored, the Restart Delay element continues working
normally using the information collected before the power loss.
Path: Setpoints > Control > Motor Starting > Start Supervision > Restart Delay

FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

MINIMUM TIME
Range: 0 to 65000 s in steps of 1s
Default: 0 s
Sets the amount of time following stop before a start control is permitted.

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

1601-0450 643
Chapter 10 - Control

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Latched

 S S
<E@ B
!"#$%&#  S S I#C%'%

E#'( = 1 M%#%9"9 T%9

>
N
D F   
?
R   

T9%#
)*+,*-./0 -2+34567 F   

M&& B&GG( O R  :

H
M&& T%GG(

> F   

N
D B I#C%'%

SA ; A 

R  <: T%9

8
8

Figure 251: Restart Delay logic diagram

10.4.2 SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR START SEQUENCE CONTROL (56)

When the motor accelerates to near synchronizing speed (about 95% of synchronous speed), DC current is
introduced into the rotor field windings. This current creates constant polarity poles in the rotor, causing the motor to
operate at synchronous speed as the rotor poles lock onto the rotating AC stator poles.
In Starting mode, the synchronous motor salient poles are not excited by their external DC source. Attempting to
start the motor with DC applied to the field does not allow the motor to accelerate. In addition, there is a very large
oscillating torque component at slip frequency, produced by field excitation, which could result in motor damage if
the full field current is applied during the entire starting sequence. Therefore, application of DC to the field is usually
delayed until the motor reaches a speed where it can be pulled into synchronism without slip.
The Start Sequence Control function provides:
● Control of DC field application for both brush-type and brushless synchronous motors. The start sequence
function comprises three field application control methodologies:
○ A slip-frequency-based method for brush-type motor applications.
○ A timer-based method for both brushless and brush-type motor applications.
○ A reluctance-torque based synchronization for brush-type motor applications.
● Incomplete start sequence protection to trip/alarm if the starting sequence is not completed in time.
● Load application relay functionality to enable loading the motor following the DC field application and
unloading the motor following a trip and/or loss of synchronization (pole slipping).
● Motor start interlocking using the motor Starting state to initiate start sequence control. The relay also initiates
start sequence control when the motor goes into re-synchronization mode, by monitoring the motor state SM
Resync.
Starting a Brush-Type Synchronous Motor
The start sequence control function uses rotor speed and rotor angle to close the field switching device in order to
apply the DC field to the rotor winding.

644 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

The rotor frequency is the most positive electrical parameter available for indicating speed. It can be sensed by
detecting the frequency of the voltage across the shunt field discharge resistor (FDRS). Voltage across the FDRS is
not actually the induced field voltage, but it is the voltage, which is essentially in a time-phase relation to the current
through the resistor. That means the current crosses through zero at the same time as the voltage does.
The rotor angle at which the stator winding current and induced field winding current go through zero indicates the
point of maximum flux. Applying excitation at the point of zero induced current (favorable angle) takes advantage of
motor capability in two ways:
● It catches (traps) salient-pole flux at significant magnitude (provided there is a field discharge resistor of
adequate value) and uses it for torque during a 180° acceleration period.
● It catches the rotor in the correct angular position to be pulled forward into step.
The relay detects the proper rotor speed and rotor angle from the field voltage measured across the shunt field
discharge resistor (FDRS). The correct time to close the field switching device is determined by the percent
synchronous slip setpoint and the rotor angle.
When both the rotor speed and the rotor angle conditions are met, the Start Sequence Control function delivers a
signal to the output relay configured to close/open the field switching device in order to apply excitation to the motor
field and to open the field discharge resistor loop.
For normal applications, when the field voltage across discharge resistor (VF) is higher than 30V RMS primary
(prior to VDN), the Start Sequence applies the field when following two conditions are met:
● Rotor Slip (RS) is less than or equal to target Sync Slip % (setpoint).
● RSF ≤ Sync Slip %
where:
● Sync Slip is the setpoint Sync Slip %
● The rotor angle obtained from the measured field voltage is crossing zero in negative direction, i.e. crossing
zero from positive-to-negative.
The following diagram illustrates how the relay automatically responds to normal synchronizing process.

1601-0450 645
Chapter 10 - Control

$%&'(%)*+, -./ 012

3&456&7 83&4)& 9) /:0;



 

 





 !" #

 "



 < =

 > 




Figure 252: Speed-based synchronizing

Optional reluctance torque synchronizing (brush-type motor only)

A lightly loaded synchronous motor connected to a low inertial load may pull into synchronism before the rotor poles
are externally magnetized. This is commonly known as reluctance torque synchronizing. This magnetization can
result in sufficient torque to hold the salient poles in direct alignment with corresponding stator poles and run the
motor at synchronous speed. However, when load is applied, the rotor begins to slip since the torque developed is
only a fraction of the rated torque under separate excitation. Furthermore, the rotor is polarized by the stator flux
under this condition and can therefore be polarized in any direct axis alignment; occurring each 180°. External
excitation forces a pole-to-pole alignment in only one orientation of the direct axis
Should the rotor pull into synchronism 180° away from the normal running alignment, external excitation will build up
rotor flux in opposition to the stator flux. As the external excitation builds up, correct alignment of the rotor to stator
occurs by slipping one pole and the motor will then run in normal synchronism.
The Start Sequence Control must respond with proper application of excitation in the event the motor does
synchronize on the reluctance torque. If, due to reluctance torque, the motor has pulled into synchronization and the
RMS voltage across the discharge resistor drops lower then 30V RMS primary (impossible to detect zero crossing),
the reluctance torque function checks the orientation of the reluctance-torque rotor magnetization.

Correct orientation
Correct orientation is declared when the input voltage drops to zero in the negative direction i.e. the rotor angle
obtained from the measured field voltage is crossing zero in the negative direction, or crossing zero from positive-
to-negative. After the voltage drops below 30V, a zero crossing is not possible. Therefore if the relay detects a
negative-to-positive zero crossing before the voltage drops below 30V, it energizes the FAR relay output as soon as
the voltage drops below 30V. This is demonstrated in the following figure:

646 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

  




        
 

  

  

 

   !

Figure 253: Correct orientation Start Sequence Control applied field

180° disorientation
180° Disorientation is declared when input voltage drops to zero in the positive direction i.e. the rotor angle obtained
from the measured field voltage is crossing zero in the positive direction, or crossing zero from negative-to-positive.
If the relay detects a positive to-negative zero crossing before the voltage drops below prior 30V, the relay checks
the <30V condition and energizes the FAR output relay after the PRS Timer elapses to zero. This is demonstrated
in the following figure:

1601-0450 647
Chapter 10 - Control

  



   !


        
 

  

  

 

"#  

Figure 254: 180° disorientation Start Sequence Control applied field

The length of the PRS timer equals time of half a slip cycle.
PRS Timer = 100 / (2 x Sync slip% x fn)
where:
● Sync Slip is the setpoint Sync Slip %
● fn is the setpoint Nominal Frequency programmed under Setpoints > System > Power System.

Note:
When the motor starts, RMS measurement of the input voltage across FDRS may take time to build up. In such cases the
reluctance torque synchronizing feature may falsely initiate the field application command before the RMS voltage builds up
past the 30V threshold. To prevent such operation, use the Start Block Delay’timer to block element operation.

Starting a Brushless Synchronous Motor

To apply DC excitation to the rotor winding, the Start Sequence Control operates an output relay to close the
switching device after the configurable time delay set under FAR DELAY. The timer starts at the rising edge of the
Motor Starting state.
Path: Setpoints > Control > Motor Starting > SM Start Sequence Control

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, FAR Close, Configurable

648 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Start Sequence Control functionality.
FAR Close bypasses the field switching device control logic (Setpoints > Control > FLD SW Device Control)
and sends a close command directly to the auxiliary output relay set under Close Relay Select (Setpoints >
System > Breakers (Contactors) > SM Field Breaker (Contactor).
To avoid bypassing the field switching device control logic, the setpoint FUNCTION must be set as
Configurable and the operand FLD Sync Cmd must be selected under setpoint CLOSE (Setpoints >
Control > FLD SW Device Control) to initiate the auxiliary output relay closing.

MODE
Default: Time
Range: Time, Slip Freq

Note:
This setting is only applicable when Brush-type is set under Setpoints > System > Motor > Setup > Sync. Motor Type.
When this is set to brushless synchronous motor, the start sequence control is hard coded to Time mode.

In Time mode, start sequence control closes the field switching device to apply a DC excitation to the rotor
winding after the time set by setpoint FAR DELAY.
In Slip Freq. mode, start sequence control closes the field switching device to apply DC excitation to the rotor
winding after the Rotor Slip reaches the level set by setpoint SYNC SLIP %.
In brush-type motor applications, which are started rapidly via pony motors or by other mechanical means, it may
not be possible to measure the rotor slip frequency from field AC voltage input. In such applications, we
recommend using Time mode.

FAR DELAY
Default: 20.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
This setting specifies length of the time after which Start Sequence Control closes the field switching device to
apply a DC excitation to the rotor winding of the synchronous motor. The timer starts counting down as soon as
the main switching device is closed to supply power to the stator winding.

SYNC SLIP %
Range: 1.0 to 10.0% in steps of 0.1%
Default: 5.0%
This setting indicates the slip at which the Start Sequence Control closes the field switching device.
Example: To close the field switching device (apply the field) when the motor reaches 94.5% of synchronous
speed, the SYNC SLIP % setpoint is determined as follows:
100% speed - 94.5% speed = 5.5% sync slip

1601-0450 649
Chapter 10 - Control

Note:
This setting is only applicable to brush-type synchronous motors, and setpoint MODE must be set to Slip Freq in order to
apply this setting. This setting is hidden when the setpoint Setpoints > System > Motor > Setup > Sync. Motor Type is set
to None or Brushless.

REL TORQUE SYNC

Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
When enabled, this setpoint allows reluctance torque synchronizing control for brush-type motors only.

Note:
This setting is only applicable to brush-type synchronous motors, and setpoint MODE must be set to Slip Freq in order to
apply this setting. This setting is hidden when the setpoint Setpoints > System > Motor > Setup > Sync. Motor Type is set
to None or Brushless.

START BLOCK DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies the length of time to block the start sequence control function when the motor starts. An
application of the start block delay may be to prevent the reluctance torque synchronizing feature to falsely apply
DC field before RMS measurement of the voltage across discharge resistor builds up.
This timer is only applicable to brush-type synchronous motors when setpoint MODE is set to Slip Freq.
Otherwise, this setting is hidden.

FAR CLOSE MODE

Range: Self-reset, Latched
Default: Latched
When FAR CLOSE MODE is set to Self-Reset, field application outputs (output relays and operands FLD
Sync Cmd and Rel Torque Sync Cmd) reset automatically as soon as a DC field is applied.
To keep the outputs latched, set FAR CLOSE MODE to Latched. All outputs then remain latched until the
motor is tripped/stopped or setpoint RESET FAR OUTPUT goes high.

RESET FAR OUTPUT

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setting is only applicable when setpoint FAR CLOSE MODE is set to Latched. The selected operand
resets field application outputs when they are latched.

OUTPUT RELAY X
Default: Do Not Operate
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate

650 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

Any assignable output relay can be selected as a Field Application Output Relay to close/open the field
switching device.

INC SEQ FUNCTION

Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latch Alarm, Configurable
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Incomplete Start Sequence functionality.

INC SEQ DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 5.00 s
This setpoint configures the time during which the relay must complete its starting sequence for the starting
sequence to be deemed complete. If this time is exceeded, the relay will trip and display an incomplete
sequence condition.For brush-type motors, this time must be set to not less than the LOAD APPLICATION
DELAY setpoint. For brushless motors, this time must be set to at least the sum of the FAR DELAY setpoint and
the LOAD APPLICATION DELAY setpoint.

Note:
This setpoint only takes effect when INC SEQ DELAY is enabled.

INC SEQ OUTPUT RELAY

Default: Off
Range: Off, Operate
Any assignable output relay can be selected as a Field Application Output Relay to close/open field switching
device.

LOAD APPLICATION RELAY

Default: Off
Range: Off, Operate
The setpoint LOAD APPLICATION RELAY can be used to load the motor following the DC field application and
to unload of the motor following a trip and/or loss of synchronization (pole slipping). Any assignable output relay
can be selected as a load application relay. When the motor is fully synchronized and ready to be loaded, this
relay picks up, the Load Applied target message is issued, and Start Seq. Complete is asserted for 2
seconds.

Note:
To avoid incorrect operation of the output relay selected under setpoint LOAD APPLICATION RELAY, the selected output
relay becomes hidden from the list of available relays for selection in the menu of all elements.

Note:
We strongly recommend you configure a switching device (breaker or contactor) to monitor DC Field application, to prevent
the relay from detecting false application of DC Field due to false field DC current detection.

1601-0450 651
Chapter 10 - Control

LOAD APPLICATION DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 2.00 s
This setting specifies the delay time that begins as soon as the field is applied and allows the synchronous motor to
stabilize following the field application.
The Load Application Delay timer is used for two purposes:
● When the load application function is enabled, the load is applied after this timer elapse to zero.
● This timer is also used to enable power factor protection, field overtemperature protection, field loss
protection and Load Application Relay operation. Therefore, regardless of whether the load application
function is used or not, elements such as power factor protection, field overtemperature protection, and field
under/overcurrent elements remain blocked until this timer expires. We strongly recommend that you do NOT
set this timer to zero. This will avoid false operation of the protection function during the motor stabilizing
state.

UNLOAD APPLICATION
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
Any assignable FlexLogic operand can be used to reset the Load Application Output relay in order to unload
the synchronous motor following a trip and/or loss of synchronization (pole slipping). If more than one input is
required to reset the load application relay, the FlexLogic builder must be used to build the required logic. When
this operand is high, the target massage Load Disconnected is issued for 2 seconds.
This setpoint is not applicable if LOAD APPLICATION RELAY is set to OFF.

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-Reset, Latched
Default: Latched

Note:
Note: Targets of Rel Torque Sync Cmd, FLD Sync Cmd, Load Applied and Load Disconnected conditions stay on the screen
for only 10sec and then disappear even if the associate condition remains true, regardless of Self-Reset, or Latched
configuration of this setpoint.

652 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

SETPOINT
Load Application Relay
Off = 0
Status\Summary\Motor
SM Motor Loaded Successfully
2

AND
To Sheet 1 of 3 SETPOINTS
Load Application Delay: SETPOINT
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND tdelay S Load Application Relay
0
SM Stabilizing Latch Do Not Operate, Operate
Rising R
Edge Reset
Dominant TARGET MESSAGE

AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND Load Applied
SM Field Applied 2 sec Pulse
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Rising
SETPOINTS

OR
Edge Start Seq. CompletedNote
Unload Application:
2 sec Pulse
Off=0
TARGET MESSAGE
OR

Load Disconnected
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Motor Stopped 2 sec Pulse
Motor Tripped Note: The relay may assert a false 'Start Sequence Completed' operand when ‘SM Field Applied’ detection is
based solely on DC field current. Therefore, it is strongly advised to configure a switching device (breaker or
contactor) to monitor DC Field application in order to prevent relay from detecting false DC Field application
894254C1 due to false field DC current detection. For more details on ‘SM Field Applied’, go to chapter Status\Motor\SM
Field Applied Successfully

Figure 255: Start Sequence Control logic diagram (1 of 3)

SETPOINT
FUNCTION:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Disabled=0 Any Trip
Trip
LED: TRIP

AND
Latched Trip 869: To operate Output
OR

Alarm Relay 1(TRIP)

1

OR
Latched Alarm
Configurable SETPOINTS
S
AND
INC SEQ. DELAY:
AND

RUN LATCH
1
Time > IN Seq. Delay R
From Sheet 1 of 3
LED: ALARM
AND

Start Timer Reset Timer

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR
Any Alarm
Motor Stopped
OR

Motor Tripped
AND

S
LATCH SETPOINT
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Command R Output Relay X
Motor Starting
Start Seq. Completed RESET Do Not Operate, Operate

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR

Start Seq. INC

894253C1

Figure 256: Start Sequence Control logic diagram (2 of 3)

1601-0450 653
Chapter 10 - Control

SETPOINT
Load Application Relay
Off = 0
Status\Summary\Motor
SM Motor Loaded Successfully
2

AND
To Sheet 1 of 3 SETPOINTS
Load Application Delay: SETPOINT
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND tdelay S Load Application Relay
0
SM Stabilizing Latch Do Not Operate, Operate
Rising R
Edge Reset
Dominant TARGET MESSAGE

AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND Load Applied
SM Field Applied 2 sec Pulse
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Rising
SETPOINTS

OR
Edge Start Seq. CompletedNote
Unload Application:
2 sec Pulse
Off=0
TARGET MESSAGE
OR

Load Disconnected
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Motor Stopped 2 sec Pulse
Motor Tripped Note: The relay may assert a false 'Start Sequence Completed' operand when ‘SM Field Applied’ detection is
based solely on DC field current. Therefore, it is strongly advised to configure a switching device (breaker or
contactor) to monitor DC Field application in order to prevent relay from detecting false DC Field application
894254C1 due to false field DC current detection. For more details on ‘SM Field Applied’, go to chapter Status\Motor\SM
Field Applied Successfully

Figure 257: Start Sequence Control logic diagram (3 of 3)

Note:
The relay may assert a false Start Sequence Completed operand when SM Field Applied detection is based solely on DC
field current. Therefore, we strongly advise to configure a switching device (breaker or contactor) to monitor DC Field
application to prevent the relay from doing this.

10.4.3 REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTING

The relay can control the transition of a reduced voltage starter from reduced to full voltage. That transition may be
based on Current Only, Current and Timer, or Current or Timer (whichever comes first). When the relay detects a
Motor Starting condition, the current will typically rise quickly to a value in excess of FLA (e.g., 5 × FLA). At this
point, the Start Timer is initialized while the motor current is simultaneously monitored. When the transition from
reduced to full voltage is initiated, the Reduced Volt Ctrl operand will be asserted for 1 second. The intention is to
link this operand to the auxiliary output relay that can control reduced voltage start contactors. The feature can also
assert a trip signal if the current or timer transitions do not occur as expected. This element is functional only if the
external motor Start/Stop command is used. An example of the control wiring related to this element is depicted in
the diagram below.


$%&'$% (!)#*$
!" # '!+#'!

  --.

   /012 34
 #56



,&)) (!)#*$
'!+#'!

''7 $#) +



Figure 258: Reduced Voltage Start Contactor Control Circuit

654 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

The following figure provides a typical current – time diagram of a reduced voltage start sequence.

     !""# $"%&

   !#''% (" !) *% 

  '+ ,-'#.  ,'"'!/

"!/ !'(!# % 0 #%)

4 , 

!#''%
("



!#''% '+ 1 2


#'3' '#
- !#''%

Note:
If this feature is used, the Starter Status Switch input must be either from a common control contact or a parallel combination
of Auxiliary 52a contacts or a combination of Auxiliary 52b contacts from the reduced voltage contactor and the full voltage
contactor as shown in the following diagram.

Figure 259: Reduced Voltage Start Current Characteristic

1601-0450 655
Chapter 10 - Control

~€ 9:;<=:; >?@ABC: DAB9A

BEE@F=BAF?G

Ya |
-./0 1 2 34/56
HIJK Yc
lmnopqr qstoroqum d YZ
pvwxqpxy pvwwzpxovw Y[
LMNOPQ RST Y\
ii „kj
h d Y]
 }
‚ ii jk j g Y^ OHNK LLc{a
 !"#"$%& "'()$ f LLc
ƒ   OHRIH JUVJWJH Y_
!"#"$%& "'()$  
ii „kj ii jkj  Y`
 !"#"$%& "'()$   
e Yab
 !"#"$%& "'()$  
   RSTJMJRIX Yaa
!"#"$%& "'()$ 
 !"#"$%& "'()$   Yac
 OHRIH
 !"#"$%& "'()$   Ycc LLa
LIJHJLRM
 *+,,+' YRJMSIP YcZ
 7 8 IPMRX Yc[ ** 



Figure 260: Reduced Voltage Starting wiring example

Path: Setpoints > Control > Motor Starting > Reduced Voltage Start

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled

CONTROL OUTPUT RELAY X

Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

TRANSITION MODE
Range: Current Only, Current or Timer, Current and Timer
Default: Current Only
Current Only:
When the motor load falls below the START CURRENT LEVEL setting prior to the expiration of the START
TIMER, a transition will be initiated by asserting the Reduced Volt Ctrl operand for a period of one second. Any
contact output assigned to this operand will operate for this period of time. If the reduced voltage START TIMER
expires prior to the motor load dropping below the START CURRENT LEVEL setting, the Reduced Volt Ctrl
operand does not change state and the Reduced Volt Fail operand is asserted.
Current Or Timer:

656 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

When the motor load falls below the START CURRENT LEVEL setting, or if the reduced voltage START TIMER
expires, a transition will be initiated by asserting the Reduced Volt Ctrl operand for one second. Any contact
output assigned to this control signal will operate for this period of time.
Current And Timer:
A transition will be initiated by asserting the Reduced Volt Ctrl operand for one second when the reduced voltage
START TIMER expires and the motor load has dropped below the START CURRENT LEVEL setting prior to the
expiration of the reduced voltage timer. If the reduced voltage timer expires prior to the motor load dropping
below the START CURRENT LEVEL setting, the Reduced Volt Ctrl operand does not change state and the
Reduced Volt Fail operand is asserted.

START CURRENT LEVEL

Range: 0.25 to 3.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.25 x FLA
Motor current has to drop below the value selected here to initialize the transition. This applies if “Current Only”
or “Current or Timer” was selected.

START TIMER
Range: 1.0 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
Default: 10.0 s

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

TRIP OUTPUT RELAY X

Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-Reset, Latched
Default: Latched

1601-0450 657
Chapter 10 - Control

@

 
Y4
5  K K 
> > 

.


X
R 8:  J
I9
J
I9 8:
@



.[
. =>
@ ;  ; 
*  [. 
<;
  <  < => 
 
 =H  =H  ;<:
45 :9  G G   

8  . <E  <E  98
V

  F9

F9
 . .
WZ . ?   ! 
?
+   DE  DE   
 W   * W

 
! ) ! 
 #
"  ,-! "!  ,-!
!    ( 
# 
ABC
  ) 
  )

 (
" "
"

!
 !
!  "

#

  
#
"
"
"  
 " '  "  "
" " " !  " 
$ R !  $ !  
OS 
     $
  $
O   ! .  
 
 --
O  $
 !, * / 1,
 &
 "  ! !
"  " "
  '  
PQ  +  0+
 % % 
   !   
 $ 
*  $ 
$
ABC

ABC ABC PQ ABC

4
76 O
 5*4
: '
>= 3 : 
+
<;
!  PQ => $
:9 <; 
8 + :9
  )
* ? 
8
) 7 2 UT
T

ABC

TU
PQ T
: 
>= $
<; 
:9
8 )

K
>
JI
: :  : 9;
>= 
=>   $ => < ,!
<; <;  <; H=
O ( 2 @! $ 
:9 V 9:8 ! ! :9 G
8 ? N
   .  8 E<F )
5. !
( ,& !" ! !  M O 9E
* N D 
?
7 "  !      &&
W  * * * * L . 2

Figure 261: Reduced Start logic diagram

658 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

10.4.4 SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR POWER FACTOR REGULATION (90F)

Power Factor (PF) regulation is useful in applications where motors are subjected to high-level transient impact
loads (such as chipper drives). The PF regulator senses the power factor dip occurring when the motor is loaded
and signals the silicon-controlled rectifier (SCR) Exciter to respond with a boosted output. As a result, the pull-out
torque of the synchronous motor is increased for the duration of the transient load. After the load subsides, the
regulator senses an excessive leading power factor and signals the SCR to reduce its output. This automatic
boosting of field current to avoid pull-out is called field forcing. The Power Factor regulator thus provides automatic
boosting when field forcing is required and economical low field operation when the motor is idling. Another
application of the power factor regulator is to control power factor swings resulting from various levels of loading so
as not to cause fluctuations in the plant system voltage.
The relay provides the control signal to the variable SCR exciter when PF regulation is required. The following
figure provides a functional overview of this feature.

6,7+ -
8%9,7:7+ ;797 9 +7%+ 67,7:
7+ 
"# ' % ./$"0 & 2345
!"#$%& 1 #<7+  
O1 F $EF E7+&P 
 QRS E7+ 7,





"# ' () (* 

$#+,  ) - *&

=>?  %7+ @ 7+A IJKH  %7+ @9 L 79A

BCD  %7+ @EF   ;797A "GH  %7+ @,% A
GH  %7+ @E7+   ;797A "# #+, M+ )%, + N+

Figure 262: PF regulation and SCR exciter control layout

The design of the PF regulation function generates control outputs of type VDC or DCmA, as defined by the
maximum and minimum limits in setpoints Max Output Limit'and Min Output Limit, respectively. The control
output range is configurable as a unipolar range type (0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 10 V) or a bipolar range type
(-10 to +10V). The following figures illustrates the Output generated by the PF Regulation control transfer function
as a function of phase angle error (Target - Feedback).

1601-0450 659
Chapter 10 - Control

Figure 263: PF Regulator output as a function of PF and Angle (angle I w.r.t angle V) for all configurable
output ranges when setpoints Regulator Target and Gain are set to 1

Path: Setpoints > Control > SM PF Regulation

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled
Default: Disabled

OUTPUT RANGE
Range: 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V
Default: 0 to 10 V
This setting selects the PF Regulator Control output range.

660 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

REGULATOR TARGET
Range: -0.90 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01
(Lagging range -0.90,-0.91,…,-0.99,1.00 and Leading range 0.00,0.01, …,0.99,1.00)
Default: 0.0
The relay can provide a closed-loop PF Regulator with a very fast response. The regulator may be configured to
regulate the motor power factor in a range from -0.9 (lagging) to 1.0 (unity) to 0.0 (leading) power factors. This
setpoint determines the power factor at which the regulator operates. The regulator may be disabled in order to
output the minimum value (see the Min Output Limit setpoint) by entering OFF (enter 1.11 numerically for an
OFF setting). The OFF setting allows the operator to disable the regulator while setting up base-field amperes,
and then return the regulator power factor to its normal setting for full functionality.

GAIN
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00
Properly adjusting this setpoint helps to achieve optimum regulator performance.

MAX OUTPUT LIMIT

Range: Populates based on OUTPUT RANGE selection
Default: 0.00 (e.g. 10.00 V when Output Range selected is 0 to 10 V)
This setpoint is the upper limit of the range of the control signal output. This value must match the input range of
the separate variable excitation equipment.

Note:
The MAX OUTPUT LIMIT value must be greater than or equal to the Min Output Limit setpoint.

MIN OUTPUT LIMIT

Range: Populates based on OUTPUT RANGE selection
Default: 0.00 (e.g. 0.00V when Output Range selected is 0 to 10V)
This value is the minimum limit for output control signal that is connected to the field-rectifier equipment. The
value programmed here is the exact output from the 869. For example, if the minimum is programmed at 1.50V
the 869 will output 1.50 volts minimum.
Certain conditions of operation require a floor so that the motor power factor will not become unstable if the field
current is drastically reduced. When the floor overrides the regulator, the power factor moves in a more leading
condition than the regulator setpoint. As the load and/or system force the motor power factor toward the lagging
condition such that the power factor falls below the regulator setpoint, the regulator will once again take control
and boost the field above the floor so that the power factor will not dip below the setpoint. The power factor
regulator must be tuned during initial start-up.

Note:
The MIN OUTPUT LIMIT value must be less than or equal to the Max Output Limit setpoint.

1601-0450 661
Chapter 10 - Control

RAMP UP TIME
Range: 0 to 600 sec in steps of 1 sec
Default: 10 sec
This setting specifies the time taken to ramp up the control output from the set value for Min Output Limit to the
set value for Max Output Limit.

STABILITY FILTER LENGTH

Range: 0 to 60 cycles in steps of 1 cycle
Default: 1 cycle
This value averages output for the programmed number of cycles using a running average technique in order to
help compensate for instability. The unit 'cycle' represents the power cycle of nominal frequency specified under
Setpoints > System > Power System.

MINIMUM VOLTAGE
Range: 0.00 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Default: 0.30 x VT
This setting specifies the minimum voltage for Power Factor Regulation element operation specified per times
VT.

MINIMUM CURRENT
Default: 0.20 x CT
Range: 0.00 to 10.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
This setting specifies the minimum current for Power Factor Regulation element operation specified per times
CT.

REGULATOR TROUBLE
Default: OFF
Range: OFF, ON
When set to ON, this function checks for correct operation of the PF Regulator by monitoring the PA quantity,
which is the difference between actual phase angle (feedback) and desired phase angle (target). This function
assert s the output operand PF Reg Trouble when the PA quantity exceeds 1 degree for longer than the sum of
the time delays set for Ramp Up Time and Stability Filter Length, plus 1 sec.

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

662 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-Reset, Latched
Default: Self-Reset



 
 


( J $ @ N 2 ?@A

 )
* >HI
" #
$%&' $ @ & J
$ @ N 2 ?@A

$ @ - >
$ @ 302  ?OQ R O=A


JE $ @ N 2 ?O@A
st
utvw 
xyz ( J $ @ N 2 ?@A

W )

LJ >  X * >2@ H@ 3 2?3{|}~A
( ˆ‰ Š ‹ˆŒŽ ‘ ‹’“” •–“” — –“” L   M   0 N  .
$K0  ) 3{|}~
*
LJ   @@  DC $ @
@ J K  K0    0
O@

J K  K0 1   !

-.  /00 ?A  ˜ JIJHJ M  @0 022  LJ - > 0 $ @
( C
PL   M   0 N  .:
)
*
-.  ,   ?,A , ˜ JIJHJ
W
,    @ 5 V   X
-.  ,   ?,"/A ,"/ JIJHJ
,    @ 5 B  


 6 > 
> 0 30 ?-@A -@ &  TU?-@A >HI
58' 9 8' 9

6. -@ S ' 6. -@ 7 8' 9 F
-@ &  TU ?-@AG8' 9 -@: -@;<=' 9 -@:
 ! ? 0 A D
4  -@ &  TU ?-@A  -@: -@ B-?00 0A D & ?B- E F AG-@:
    B- & -@:C 5 -:
-.  /00   10 2
 /3 " #
 6 >  -:
- & 4, 5 4

 58' 9 8' 9 ?1 #A
-. ,3 /  Y 6. - 7 8' 9

3 L   -: - ; <=' 9 >HI L   M   0 N  .?3€‚A
 ! 6.  -: - >2@ H@ 3 2?3{|}~A
,3 /  & ZM ?B-A ˜   st
utvw 
xyz
+ ,   (
4, & ,   ) M &  G 3{|}~G 3€‚ƒ1„ - > 30 
?-: 5 -: M AA *
 ! S  
6. 4, Y 1 & I 2  0  M
+ ,   ,3 /  &   @0 022  0
4, & ,   G [' \]^_`a b jd†`‡ \]^_`a
,     10 2 + ,3
" #
Y -0 022  0  !
\]^_`a b cde_fg` \`h^ihg b jk cl mhnopqr 5 ?B-A LJ - 00 0


> 0 30 
$
™š›œ›žœŸ ¡¢
$I

Figure 264: Power Factor (PF) regulation logic diagram

10.4.5 CONTACTOR CONTROL

The selection for the Breaker or Contactor is available under the Motor Setup menu. The settings and logic for the
Contactor Control described below only apply when the Contactor is selected, and the Control mode is set to
Remote (LOCAL MODE set to OFF, or the selected Local Mode operand de-asserted).

Note:
The Remote Block Open, Remote Block Close, Bypass Rem Blk Open and Bypass Rem Blk Close flags are inhibited,
when the setpoint SELECT BEFORE OPERATE under the Local Control Mode menu is disabled. The breaker remote open
and close commands are still operational.

1601-0450 663
Chapter 10 - Control

Figure 265: Switching Device Pushbuttons and Monitor LEDs

Path:Setpoints > Control > Contactor Control > Cnct1 Control

REMOTE OPEN
Range: Off, On, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setpoint is active, when the Local Mode is inactive. The setting specifies the input that when asserted,
initiates a STOP command. When the selected input is asserted, output relay #1 is energized and stays
energized until the input drops off, the breaker (or contactor) opens, and the selected Seal-in time expires. This
setpoint provides flexibility to operate output relay #1 by selecting an operand from the list of FlexLogic

664 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

operands, contact inputs, virtual inputs, or remote inputs. For example, the operand Phase OV 1 OP can be
selected to activate output relay #1 according to the operate conditions configured under the Phase OV 1 menu.

REMOTE CLOSE
Range: Off, On, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setpoint is active, when the Local Mode is inactive. This setting specifies the input that when asserted,
initiates a START command. This setpoint provides flexibility to operate the designated output relay by selecting
an operand from the list of FlexLogic operands, contact inputs, virtual inputs, or remote inputs.

Note:
The START command operates Output relay 2 if Setpoint > System > Contactor > Contactor 1 > Close Relay Select is set
to Relay 2.

REMOTE BLOCK OPEN

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The assertion of the operand assigned to this setpoint prevents the contactor from opening (stopping the motor).

REMOTE BLOCK CLOSE

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The assertion of the operand assigned to this setpoint prevents the breaker from closing (starting the motor).

BYPASS REM BLK OPEN

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setting specifies selection of an input which when asserted bypasses the asserted remote block open (stop
motor) signal. The Open (Stop motor) command is permitted for the contactor.

BYPASS REM BLK CLOSE

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setting specifies selection of an input which when asserted bypasses the asserted remote block open (stop
motor) signal. The Open (Stop motor) command is permitted for the contactor.

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched

1601-0450 665
Chapter 10 - Control

Default: Self-reset
f$%& 6%/*$%2 J%-. 2%3)+
F    !"
L H# I
K
M
F    !"
Ta I

f$%& 6%/*$%2 J%-. 2%3)+ F    !"

F    !" C1 R 
< de#

f$%& 7%+c2 6%/*$%2 J%-. 2%3)+

F    !"
C1 L   S 
AN C1 R 
F    !" D OO = 0 AN
D Tr45 RB1
C1 L   B 9g:h
+%&&c/-
F    !"
C1 #

AN
D

F    !"
C1 R  ir
S 
C1 R   AN
D
OO = 0
AN
S  D
C1 B R   AN
D
OO = 0
F    !"
C1 R   B
F    !"
C1 R  

f$%& 7%+c2 6%/*$%2 J%-. 2%3)+ F    !"

F    !" C1 R C
C1 L  C
AN
F    !" D
S 
C1 L  C B SPQUVWXQYZS[YQP\Z >% '.2.+*.-
C1 R C
VXQ]^QV_ZVXQ]^QV_`b 6%/*c+*%$?
OO = 0 AN 62%@. 9E*GE*
f$%& '()*+, -.*.+*)%/ 2%3)+
D C1; C RB <
F    !" 679':
C1 C# +%&&c/-

A
N
D
F    !"
C1 R C ir
S 
C1 R  C AN
D
OO = 0 AN
S  D
AN
C1 B R  C D
OO = 0

F    !"
C1 R  C B
F    !"
C1 R  C

8



Figure 266: Contactor Control logic diagram

666 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

10.4.6 FIELD SWITCHING DEVICE CONTROL

When a synchronous motor relay is ordered, it provides control and monitoring of the DC Field switching devices
types: breaker and contactor. The field switching device type is selected under Setpoints > System > Motor >
Setup > Switching Device Type, and must match the actual switching device type used to control the DC Field in
the specific synchronous motor application. The Switching Device Type selection affects execution of the field open
and close commands, and monitoring of the device state targets and events.
The DC field is controlled (i.e. opened/closed) from any assigned and asserted FlexLogic operand; contact input,
virtual input, virtual output, remote input, or via communications.
Path: Setpoints > Control > FLD SW Device Control

OPEN
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setting specifies the input that, when asserted, initiates an OPEN command.
When the selected input is asserted, the selected trip output relay (configured under Setpoints > System >
Breaker (or Contactor)) is energized and stays energized until the input drops off, the breaker/contactor opens,
and the configured seal-in time expires.

CLOSE
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
When the selected input is asserted, the selected close output relay (configured under Setpoints > System >
Breaker (or Contactor)) is energized and stays energized until the input drops off, the breaker/contactor closes,
and the selected seal-in time (set by Open Seal-in) expires.
In order to keep the close output relay energized, it is important to set Type to Latched in the auxiliary relay
setup.

ANY TRIP INITIATE

Range: Off, On
Default: Off
When this setpoint is set to ON, the DC Field open command is initiated by any operated element Function
selected as Trip.

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset

1601-0450 667
Chapter 10 - Control

Field Contactor Application Examples

The following application examples include relay configuration and suggested wiring in order to achieve correct
Open/Close operation of the Contactor-type field switching device.
Example 1: Two auxiliary relays are selected under setpoints Trip Relay Select and Close Relay Select (Setpoints
> System > Contactors > SM Field Contactor).



 
   
 

  
 

 !"#$%&
In order to keep the close relay energized, it is important to set Type as Latched in auxiliary relay setup.
To open/trip the field contactor, the normally closed (NC) field trip output relay must be operated to de-energize the
contactor coil. If the NC type (Form-C) output relay is not available then the selected field trip output relay must be
configured for Failsafe operation mode (Setpoints > Outputs > Output Relays).
It is important to note that latched Close Aux Relay also requires a command to reset. The latched relay can be
reset either from the front Reset pushbutton or an operand programmable under Reset Input 1(3) (see Device >
Resetting).
Example 2: An auxiliary relay is selected as the field Close relay while Trip Relay Select = off.



  
  !"#$ 




In this case, to open/trip the field contactor, the latched Close Aux Relay must be reset either from the front Reset
pushbutton or the programmable operand Reset Input 1(3) (see Device > Resetting).

668 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

 !"#$

%&' IJ: (;AD*

@
%&' (M8 (;AD* K
L 89, :;<= >;?-
./01 2344567 8A >;?-*
%&' IJ: def >-<- 'AB- 9<-C 9<-
H-H- :;<=

%&' (M8 def >-<-

}~€~‚‚ƒ„ †„ƒ~
‡ˆ‰Šƒ‚‹‡Œ Žƒ„ ~ƒ‘ƒ~ ’~ “†Š”Š~•
%9A)N

OPQRS TUQVWQU XYZ[\V]\ZU

^\V\_` aQ\Q]\PZ[ bZcP]



  !"#$

   %&'  ()* +,-


K
g= 89, +,-,<- L

  

 !"#$

g= 89,

hijk lUZm n[o pRQmQ[\ `Q\

\Z qhUPrs

@
 !"#$

(;AD :;<= >;?-

%&' IJ:  K EF.G0 2344567 8A >;?-*
L 'AB- 9<-C 9<-
H-H- :;<=
%&' (M8 

}~€~‚‚ƒ„ †„ƒ~

%9A)N ‡ˆ‰Šƒ‚‹‡Œ Žƒ„ ~ƒ‘ƒ~ ’~ “†Š”Š~•

OPQRS TUQVWQU XYZ[\V]\ZU

^\V\_` aQ\Q]\PZ[ bZcP]

  !"#$

(;AD %&' (;AD ()* +,-

 
tuvwvtxwyz{|

  

Figure 267: Synchronous motor field breaker/contactor Control logic diagram

1601-0450 669
Chapter 10 - Control

10.5 LOCAL CONTROL MODE (BREAKER AND SWITCHES)

When the setpoint LOCAL MODE is enabled, Open and Close control of breakers and switches is performed using
relay pushbuttons (PBs), or contact inputs from PBs installed in close proximity to the relay (such as on the relay
panel, or in the relay cubicle).
The addition of contact inputs an other FlexLogic operands for closing and opening the breaker, or switch while in
local mode provides the flexibility to use PBs mounted near the relay.

Note:
Note that one pair of PBs is used for breaker control, and another pair of PBs is used for switch control.

If contact inputs or other FlexLogic operands are used while the Select Before Operate (SBO) mechanism is
enabled, the breaker or the switch shall first be selected using the relay PBs, and then opened or closed using the
designated relay panel or cubicle PBs. (The SELECT BEFORE OPERATE setpoint is only available for relays
supporting a single breaker.) If the SBO mechanism is disabled while the relay supports configurable single line
diagrams (SLDs), only the breaker PBs either on the relay front panel or mounted nearby will work. The menu
setpoints for local switch Open and Close are hidden and deactivated.
If the relay does not support configurable SLD, the setpoints for local switch Open and Close are omitted from the
menu.
While in Local Mode, the letters LM are displayed on the relay display banner. In addition, an LED can be
programmed to turn ON when the relay is set to Local Mode. By default the relay comes with one LED programmed
to show Local Mode.
In Local Mode, control for the breakers and disconnect switches can be accessed from the relay front panel (PBs
programmed for Open and Close) or by contact inputs for Open and Close from PBs installed near the relay. Hard
coded SLD PBs are designated for Tag, Block and Bypass Block for each component upon selection. In this mode,
the LOCAL OPEN and LOCAL CLOSE setpoints for Breaker Control or Switch Control (see the respective logic)
are active.

Remote Mode
When Remote Mode is enabled, the switches are controlled (open/close) from any assigned FlexLogic operand,
contact input, virtual input, virtual output, remote input, or via communication. The Control Mode menu is designed
to switch the control for both breakers and switches to either Remote Mode (LOCAL MODE setpoint set to Off, or
the selected Local Mode input de-asserted), or Local Mode (LOCAL MODE setpoint asserted).

Breaker Mode defaults

The default value is Local.

Navigation
The 8 Series front panel provides navigation pushbuttons (PBs) which highlight the component (breaker or
disconnect switch) from the single line diagram. The navigation PBs (Up/Down or Up/Down/Left/Right depending on
relay front panel model), are used to browse through the Single Line Drawing (SLD) components. These PBs are
used for SLD navigation only. The navigation starts with highlighting the first breaker, and then goes through all
other components in sequence, until the last one (breaker or switch). Only the breakers and switches included in
the SLD from the display will be browsed (navigated).

670 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

Select Before Operate

Once the breaker or the switch is highlighted in the SLD using the navigation PBs, the component must be selected
before open or close action is performed. The selection of the component is performed by pressing “ENTER” key
from the front panel. A flash message BKR # Selected, or Sw # Selected appears on the screen to denote the
selection. Once selected, the text from the first three tabs from the display corresponding to the PBs 1, 2, and 3
changes to Tag, Block, and Bypass. At this stage, the selected breaker or switch can be Opened or Closed using
the programmed PBs, and Tagged/Blocked/Bypassed using the SLD PBs.
For PBs supporting one breaker only, the Local Control Mode menu includes the setpoint SELECT BEFORE
OPERATE, which can be set to either Enabled or Disabled. When it is set to Disabled, tagging, blocking and block
bypassing commands are disabled from both Local and Remote control. In this mode the breaker can be controlled
directly by the programmed Open and Close PBs. The local control for the disconnect switches is suspended. In
this mode they can only be controlled remotely, i.e. using pre-programmed contact inputs, virtual inputs, comms, or
any selected FlexLogic operand for closing and opening commands. The remote block and block bypass flags are
also suspended. With SELECT BEFORE OPERATE set to Disabled the relay behaves similar to some other legacy
relays, where when in Local mode the breaker is directly controlled by pressing the Open and Close PBs without
additional confirmation, and when in Remote mode the breaker is directly controlled by executing the remote open
and close commands from the configured setpoints.
When the SELECT BEFORE OPERATE setpoint is set to Enabled, the navigation, the breaker or switch selection,
as well as the blocking, bypassing and tagging are operational when in Local mode. When switched to Remote
mode, the remote blocking and bypassing will also be operational.

Note:
The selected component from SLD will be deselected if either the time programmed in setpoint Bkr/Sw Select Timeout
expires, or the ESCAPE pushbutton is pressed. The HOME button will not de-select the selected object. To navigate to home
page, the component must be first de-selected on the SLD page.

The programmed PBs for breaker or switch Open and Close can be used only in local mode when an active object
is selected in the SLD. The selected device can be opened or closed provided it is not blocked or tagged. If no
operation is detected, the selection is removed, and the selected PB must be pressed again to enable the selection.
The local mode breaker selection and operation is only active if the user has proper level security access.

1601-0450 671
Chapter 10 - Control

G HI&JGIK
ˆ‰Š‹‰ŒŽ ŒŠ‘’“”
}~€}
•–Y —˜T™UXW
&' ( '
@
?

}‚ƒ}„
G HIoqIMK † )*+,-./+
‡
012345 467689 :;<6=>9

!"#$%

 
[\]^\_`ab _c]defg)
  

LM N h

LM O h

LM P h

[\]^\_`ab _c]defg LM N

†
‡
QRSTU VRWX YZ

† LM O
‡

LM P
†
‡ opqIr q( ' s ' h F(' '
tu v  (' s (w sxyh h yhh 
† i N
‡ ( z o y'h u' h 'F('  '{{h
sw ( '|y hyx txz

† i O
 ‡

A D
B † i P E
C ‡

† i j
‡

otx Gy'(uy' i k
†
‡

† i l
‡

i m
†
‡

i n
†
‡
[\]^\_`ab _c]defg)
 F( 
i N h

i O h

i P h

i j h

i k h

i l h

i m h

i n h




Figure 268: Navigation and SLD component selection

PB Block (Hard coded SLD Pushbutton)

Blocking of a breaker or switch can be used for inhibiting the close or open operation while in Local Mode. The
selected breaker or disconnect switch can be blocked. If block was not applied to the selected component, pressing
the Block PB will block either the Open or Close command depending on the existing state. When the block is
active, the letter B appears in the SLD next to the controlled component
IJKLJMNOP MQKRSTU
 
  

 IJKLJMNOP MQKRSTU

"#$%&#'( )'* #D EFF
+%,#-($'$

<= >=?@ABC 
./012134 IJKLJMNOP MQKRSTU
789:;
/54 06/2  #D E"


G
H

IJKLJMNOP MQKRSTU

 E V$'W



Figure 269: SLD Pushbutton Block logic diagram

672 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

PB Bypass (Hard coded SLD Pushbutton)

Blocking of the command can be bypassed using the SLD pushbutton Bypass. When pressed, the previously
applied block is bypassed. For example if the block was applied when the Breaker/Switch was opened, pressing the
PB Bypass will allow closing command. If the bypass is active for the selected breaker or switch, the letters By
appear next to the symbol in the SLD.

LMNOMPQRS PTNUVWX

 
[  

LMNOMPQRS PTNUVWX

EF%)) !G HII
!" #$!%& '%(
) # *!+&"%"

:; <;=:>??

;@ABCD
,-./0/12 LMNOMPQRS PTNUVWX

567 589 -32 .4-0 EF%)) !G H




J
K

LMNOMPQRS PTNUVWX

 H Y"%Z



Figure 270: SLD Pushbutton Bypass Block logic diagram

PB Tag (Hard coded SLD pushbutton)

Lockout/Tagout is a practice and procedure to safeguard employees from unexpected energization or startup of
machinery and equipment, or hazardous energy during service or maintenance activities. If a breaker or disconnect
switch is tagged, the open and close controls are inhibited.
Both remote and local control commands are blocked if the tagged operand BKR# Tag ON, or SW# Tag ON is
active for the selected particular breaker or switch respectively. The breaker or switch is tagged by pressing the
SLD pushbutton Tag. If the selected switching device is tagged, a letter T appears under its symbol. Tagging can be
achieved in local mode using the front panel control from the configurable SLD screens. The Pushbutton Tag logic
diagram shows the tagging logic diagram for a switch. The logic applies to one breaker or switch at the time in the
single line diagram.

1601-0450 673
Chapter 10 - Control

U2V846;V
MWXXY X
@ AB Z [
012314567 4829:;<
   012314567 4829:;<
>P QRS =B  MN ?OO
=T QRS =B 
   

012314567 4829:;<
'( )*+,-  MN ?
$%&  !
"! #

 ./

012314567 4829:;<
=>? @ AB CDEFDDGHIJKL

Figure 271: Pushbutton Tag logic diagram

Note:
The pushbuttons, Tag, Block and Bypass Block are used for both breakers and switches when selected in the SLD. Only one
component at the time can be selected in the SLD.

Note:
Tagging, blocking, or bypassing block can be performed in Local Mode, and only when the component (breaker or switch) is
selected in the SLD. The applied action of tagging, blocking or bypassing block is retained for this component after it’s been
deselected. To change the status of the applied action, the component need be reselected.

Note:
The Local Mode control allows programming of separate pair of PBs for Open and Close commands to breakers and for Open
and Close commands to switches. If desired, one pair of pushbuttons can be programmed for Open and Close commands to
both breakers and switches.

674 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

Shows on display banner

SETPOINT LM

Local Mode FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

Off = 0 Local Mode ON

SETTING Local Mode OFF

AND
Select Before Operate
Disabled = 0, Enabled = 1
from Bkr/Sw selection logic FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SBO Enabled
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR1 Selected

AND

AND
SETPOINT
Breaker Local Open

Off=0, Pushbutton # ON =1

869
PB “Local Stop”
PB “BKR Local Open” FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND

BKR1 Local Open

from Breaker Control logic

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR1 Rem Blk Open
AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN command
To Selected BKR1 Trip
BKR1 Rem Blk Open By Setpoints/System/Breakers/
BKR1:
Output
Relay ( Ready = 1)
from Breaker status detection logic

OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BKR 1: Trip Relay Select

AND
BKR1 Opened

from Tagging logic

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Tag ON

from Local Block logic

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Block ON

From Local Bypass Block logic

AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Bypass Block ON
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND

BKR1 Loc Blk Open

SETPOINT
Breaker Local Close FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND

Off=0, Pushbutton # ON =1 BKR1 Loc Blk Open By

PB “BKR Local Close”

AND

AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR1 Local Close

PB “Local Start” To Selected BKR 1 Close

869 Setpoints/System/Breakers/ Output
BKR1:
from Breaker Control logic
OR

BKR 1: Close Relay Select

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND

BKR1 Rem Blk Close

AND
AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR1 Rem Blk Cls By

from Breaker status detection logic

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND

BKR1 Closed

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND

BKR1 Loc Blk Close

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND

BKR1 Loc Blk Cls By

850, 845, 889

* The logic shows the local breaker
From “BKR1 Control” menu
control for Breaker 1 with the setpoint
“Select Before Operate” present in the
SETPOINT/CONTROL/BKR 1 CONTROL/CLOSE
SYNC SUPVN BKR1 menu only when the relay is ordered to
support more than one breaker.
From Close Synchrocheck Supervision for
Breaker 1 selected in BKR1 Control menu

The programmed value “Bypass”, “Sync 1 Cls Perm”, or “Sync 2 Cls Perm” for the setpoint “Close
Sync Spvn BKR1” from BKR1 Control menu applies
894200C1

Figure 272: Local Control for breakers

1601-0450 675
Chapter 10 - Control

™š›œ ›ž Ÿ ¡¢£¤ ¥£žž¦§

J ‹‹ —
 —o"    
  4  —o" –

 —o" ˜˜
   
$ Ç#”"o

¬_\­ ´µ_¶h² d`a`e[°\g a\¯°e

¨
    ©
ª
 ""I"o

J ‹‹
ŒIŽ  !"#
4‘ ’“(Ž”“II# • – 

¾ƒ ¿ÀÁÂà Äux|t „ s}Æ ¨    

©
ª   !"#

¬_\­ h²°[e³ ¹\g[_\a a\¯°e

   
 H"n $% !"#    
¨
©  !"# 'no
ª
   
º»¼½
 H"n $% !"# $&
e\­­bgf
¬_\­ h²°[e³ d[b[]d f`[`e[°\g a\¯°e ¨ [\ \][^][
© _`abc
    ª
JKLMNOPLQRJSQLKTR d`a`e[`f [\
I !"#"o JKLMNOPLQRNPLkNlR JUOLVWKQRJXYZ
=>?@A B =>@CA D EF \^`g hij
JUOLVW NPLkNlR
¬_\­ ®b¯¯°g¯ a\¯°e JXYZ ;<  G !"# H"& ""I
    )* + ,-./ ).0123/

5« – 5 676
4 89:
¬_\­ ·\eba ´a\eµ a\¯°e
   
$% –

¸_\­ ·\eba ´c^bdd ´a\eµ a\¯°e ¨

©
ª
   
$&!(( $% –
   
¨
©
ª   $% !"#

   
¨
©
ª   $% !"# $&

J ‹‹
ŒIŽ  '("    
4‘ ’“(Ž”“II# • –    '("

¨
¾ƒ ¿ÀÁÂà Äux|t ÅtuysÆ ©
ª
   
 '(" 'no
¬_\­ h²°[e³ ¹\g[_\a a\¯°e

    ¨ [\ \][^][

©
ª _`abc
 H"n $% '(" JKLMNOPLQRJSQLKTR d`a`e[`f [\
¨ JKLMNOPLQRNPLkNlR JUOLVWKQRJXYZ
© =>?@A B =>@CA D EF ea\d` hij
    ª JUOLVW NPLkNlR
JXYZ ;<  G '(" H"&
 H"n $% '( $& ""I
)* + m1,). ).01 23/
5 676
4 89:
¬_\­ ±°de\gg`e[ h²°[e³ d[b[]d f`[`e[°\g a\¯°e

    ¨
©
 '("o ª

   
¨
©
ª   $% '("

   
¨
©
ª   $% '( $&



p qrs tuvwx yruzy {rs tux|t xu}{~ut u~ €wyxu}}sx{ zw{xr ‚

zrs} stsx{ ƒsu~s „ s~|{s ys{ uw}{ wy ys{ {u †}|‡tsˆ‰
qrs tux|t yzw{xr xu}{~ut wy }u{ |Š|wt|‡ts zrs} ƒ„ wy ys{ {u
€wy|‡tsˆ‰

Figure 273: Local Control for Switches

Path: Setpoints > Control > Local Control Mode

For this path the HMI menus vary depending on the order code and the number of breakers selected.

676 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

Note:
For relays supporting single breaker control, the SW Local Open and SW Local Close setpoints appear in the menu only if the
relay is ordered with Advanced SLD; and the SELECT BEFORE OPERATE setpoint is enabled. In all other cases, these
setpoints are hidden and inactive.

SELECT BEFORE OPERATE

Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled (in most cases, but dependent on order code)
This setpoint is included in the Local Control Mode menu only if the 8 Series relay supports one breaker. This
setpoint is omitted for relays supporting more than one breaker.
When the Select Before Operate (SBO) is disabled, and Local Mode is set, the breaker control can be performed
directly by pressing the corresponding front panel pushbuttons (or those mounted in close proximity to the relay).
No component selection or additional confirmation is needed. The same applies when the breaker control is in
Remote mode.

Note:
When SBO is disabled, all local and remote flags such as blocking, bypassing, and tagging are reset.

Setting the SBO to Enabled enables the navigation and the selection of a component from the SLD, so that the
pushbuttons Open or Close from the front panel (or those mounted in close proximity to the relay) can be used in
Local Mode only after the component is selected. All flags such as blocking, bypassing and tagging can be
initiated during this mode. Blocking and bypassing can also be initiated remotely, when in Remote Mode.

LOCAL MODE
Range: Off, On, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Pushbutton 5 Off
The LOCAL MODE setting places the relay in Local Mode. The relay is in Remote mode, if not forced into Local
mode by this setpoint (i.e. LOCAL MODE is disabled, or the selected input de-asserted). When in Local Mode,
both Breakers and Disconnect switches can be controlled using the faceplate pushbuttons and SLD
pushbuttons.

BKR /SW SELECT TIMEOUT

Range: 1 to 10 min in steps of 1 min
Default: 5 min
This setting specifies the available time for open/close commands, after a breaker or a disconnect switch has
been selected in the single line diagram.

BKR (CONTACTOR) LOCAL OPEN

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Pushbutton 1
This setpoint is active, when Local Mode is activated. The breaker (contactor) open command can be initiated by
the configured pushbutton.

1601-0450 677
Chapter 10 - Control

MANUAL CONTROL
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
Manual Control mode allows flexibility to use the open and close operation of the switch via front panel
pushbutton even during the Remote mode of operation.

BKR LOCAL OPEN

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setpoint is active, when Local Mode is activated. The breaker open command can be initiated by the
configured pushbutton.

BKR (CONTACTOR) LOCAL CLOSE

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Pushbutton 1 ON
This setpoint is active, when Local Mode is activated. The breaker (contactor) close command can be initiated by
the selected faceplate pushbutton.

BKR LOCAL CLOSE

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Pushbutton 1 ON (845, 850, 889)
Default: Pushbutton 2 ON (859, 869)
This setpoint is active, when Local Mode is activated. The breaker close command can be initiated by the
configured pushbutton.

Note:
hen you close a selected breaker locally using a relay pushbutton, Synchrocheck supervision is used, as defined by the
setting value configured for the setpoint Close Sync Spvn BKR[X] from the BKR[X] Control menu. For example, if you
select the value Sync 1 Cls Perm in the Close Sync Spvn BKR1 setpoint, initiation of the BKR Local Close command will
not close BKR1 unless the Synchrocheck 1 permits closing by producing a Sync 1 Cls Perm signal

SW LOCAL OPEN
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Pushbutton 1 ON
This setpoint is active, when Local Mode is activated. The switch open command can be initiated by the
configured pushbutton. The setpoint appears in the Local Control Mode menu only when advanced SLD is
selected when ordering the relay.

SW LOCAL CLOSE
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Dependent on order code

678 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

This setpoint is active, when Local Mode is activated. The switch close command can be initiated by the
programmed faceplate pushbutton. The setpoint appears in the Local Control Mode menu only when advanced
SLD is selected when ordering the relay.

TAGGING
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
When enabled, tagging control is enabled and the TAG key is displayed on the front panel interface. When a
breaker or a switch is tagged both the local and remote control of the device is inhibited.

Note:
Tagging is applied only from the TAG key and is mostly used for maintenance purposes, and in general when either the open
or close control must be inhibited. The tagging cannot be bypassed and can only be disabled (untagged) by pressing the TAG
key again.

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset

1601-0450 679
Chapter 10 - Control

10.6 BREAKER CONTROL

While the Local breaker control is generic as the same front panel pushbuttons are used for control of each selected
breaker from the SLD, the remote breaker control requires programming of setpoints for each individual breaker.
When the relay is in Remote mode (Local Mode set to Off, or the assigned operand de-asserted), the setpoint
REMOTE BLOCK OPEN and REMOTE BLOCK CLOSE from the breaker menu can be used. These setpoints can
be used to provide Interlocking to the breaker control by assigning appropriate operands. The control for each
breaker can be programmed to have Bypass Remote Block Open and Bypass Remote Block Close inputs. These
inputs can be programmed if temporary permission for open or close is required.
The remote breaker open and close controls, as well as the blocking and bypassing the block commands are
executed as per the programmed setpoints form the Breaker Control menu.

Note:
The breaker flags Remote Block Open, Remote Block Close, Bypass Rem Blk Open and Bypass Rem Blk Close are
inhibited, when the setpoint SELECT BEFORE OPERATE residing under Local Control Mode menu is disabled. The breaker
remote open and close commands are operational.

Note:
The relay provides control of up to three breakers, depending on the order code. An additional remote breaker status is
available for HMI status only.

Path: Setpoints > Control > Breaker Control > BKR1(X)

REMOTE OPEN
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The setting specifies the input which, when asserted, initiates a Trip command to output relay selected to open
the recloser. When the selected input is asserted, the Trip contact is energized and stays energized until the
input drops off, the breaker opens, and the selected Trip seal-in time expires. This setpoint provides the flexibility
to operate the Trip output relay by selecting an operand from the list of FlexLogic operands, contact inputs,
virtual inputs, or remote inputs. For example the operand Trip Bus 1 Op can be selected to activate this output
according to the Trip conditions configured under the Trip Bus 1 menu.

REMOTE CLOSE
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The setting specifies the input which, when asserted, initiates a Close command to the output relay selected to
close the breaker. This setpoint provides flexibility to operate the output relay by selecting an operand from the
list of FlexLogic operands.

REMOTE BLOCK OPEN

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The assertion of the operand assigned to this setpoint prevents the breaker from opening/tripping.

680 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

REMOTE BLOCK CLOSE

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The assertion of the operand assigned to this setpoint prevents the breaker from closing.

BYPASS REM BLK OPEN

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setting specifies selection of an input which when asserted bypasses the asserted remote block open
signal. Open command is permitted for the breaker.

BYPASS REM BLK CLOSE

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setting specifies selection of an input which when asserted bypasses the asserted remote block close
signal. Close command is permitted for the breaker.

CLOSE SYNC SPVN BKR

Range: Bypass, Sync 1 Cls Perm
Default: order code dependent (e.g. Bypass or Sync 1Cls Perm)
This setpoint selects whether or not the closing of the breaker is supervised by the synchrocheck function. For
this purpose the Synchrocheck element must be enabled.

Note:
If the supervision is not bypassed and Close is applied for an application where the breaker is located on radial feeders, or the
line is powered by one source only, the DEAD SOURCE PERM setpoint from the Synchrocheck menu shall not be disabled.

BAY LEVEL 61850 AUTHORITY

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This selects an operand that indicates the Bay level authority status. The operand status is modeled in the IEC
61850 server using the respective breaker's CSWI Loc data object and the operand status is applied to the
control authority table to determine the control authority for different levels. It is an Edge driven function.

STATION LEVEL 61850 AUTHORITY

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This selects an operand that indicates the Station level authority status. The operand status is modeled in the
IEC 61850 server using the respective breaker's CSWI Loc data object and the operand status is applied to the
control authority table to determine the control authority for different levels. It is an Edge driven function.

1601-0450 681
Chapter 10 - Control


 
  
012
 
   !"
 
012
012
 
&'   ()*+, -."' 012
# $% 34

 
&56) &-7 -89:6;97 

 
/   ()*+, 012

 
-."' # $% &56) /9-9 -89:6;97 
34
012

012


 
012 34
&56) 6 -89:6;97 

*<==)>-)?"
Figure 274: IEC 61850 Control Authority Settings Logic Diagram

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset

682 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

()*+ d*4/)*5 ‡*23 5*6.0

 !" #$ %
„ ' †
t
u
 !" #$ %
Hˆ †

 !" #$ %

K  '
 !" #$ %
()*+ e*0<5 d*4/)*5 ‡*23 5*6.0
¡I ¢&£ ¤¥¦ I7 7 
§J7¨ IIJ7 I&7
 !" #$ % ‘’“”•–‘—”˜™š›˜œžŸ ž  š
„  

 
 !" #$ %  LMNOPQMRSTRMLUS ]* ,3530/32
7  t VWLXYLWRSVZ#[\ ^_` a ]).b
u =>?@A B =>@CA D EF
„    8c/bc/
  

 G HIJ  K7
 !" #$ % 89:;
0*++<42
'

 !" #$ %

¡I ¢&£ ¤¥¦ I7
§J7¨ IIJ7 I&7
7  sI

I ©& ª ª7« ¬  t
u
 
  


  


  
   


    !" #$ %
   
 !" #$ %
  
()*+ e*0<5 d*4/)*5 ‡*23 5*6.0 ¡I ¢&£ ¤¥¦ I7
§J7¨ IIJ7 I&7
 !" #$ %
I ©& ªsª7« ¬   !" #$ %
„  &
  7 &


 !" #$ % 
7 & t
()*+ ,-./01 u
„ 23/30/.*4
&  5*6.0 LMNOPQMRSTRMLUS
  
VWLXYLWRSVZ#[\
 !" #$ % 
G &  ]* ,3530/32
&' ^_` a d5*f3
de8,: K7
¡I ¢&£ ¤¥¦ I7 0*++<42 8c/bc/
§J7¨ IIJ7 I&7

 !" #$ % 
I ©& ª ª7« ¬ 

t  7 & sI
u

 
  &


  


  
   &


  

 !" #$ %

  & 
 !" #$ %
    &
vwxyz y{|v}~xv}zv
y€| ‚~ ƒ ‰Š‹Œ ‰ŠŒ ‰‰Ž
 t
g u
K & sI h
i

¤­®¯¦°±®ª'I
K & sI
Bjklm nAopqklpq>pr EF

Figure 275: Breaker Control logic diagram

1601-0450 683
Chapter 10 - Control

10.7 SWITCH CONTROL (89)

The disconnect switch control provides local and remote opening and closing of the switches. The local control
(Open, Close, Tag, Block, Bypass Block) is performed from the relay front panel pushbuttons when Local Mode is
active, and the switch is selected from the displayed single line diagram. The remote switch open and close
controls, as well as the blocking and bypassing the block commands are executed as per the programmed setpoints
form the Switch Control menu. While the Local switch control is generic and the same front panel pushbuttons are
used for every selected component from the SLD, the remote switch control requires programming of setpoints per
each individual switch. These settings are defined in the menu of each individual switch control. When the relay is in
Remote mode (Local Mode set to Off, or the assigned operand de-asserted), the setpoint Remote Block Open and
Remote Block Close from the Switch Control menus can be used. These setpoints can be used to provide
Interlocking to the switch control by assigning appropriate operands. The control for each disconnect switch can be
programmed to have Bypass Remote Block Open and Bypass Remote Block Close inputs. These inputs can be
programmed if temporary permission for open or close is required.

Note:
The switch Remote Block Open, Remote Block Close, Bypass Remote Block Open and Bypass Remote Block Close
flags are inhibited, when the setpoint Select Before Operate residing under Local Control Mode menu is disabled. The
remote open and close commands are still operational.

Path: Setpoints > Control > Switch Control > SW 1(X) Control

REMOTE OPEN
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setting specifies an input which when asserted initiates the open command to the switch. This setpoint is
active only when the operand assigned for Local Mode is de-asserted, or Local Mode is set to “Off”.

REMOTE CLOSE
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setting specifies an input which when asserted initiates the close command to the switch. This setpoint is
active only when the operand assigned for Local Mode is de-asserted, or Local Mode is set to “Off”.

OPEN SEAL-IN
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000 s
This setting specifies the seal-in time of the open commands due to an operator initiated manual or remote open
command to the disconnect switch.

CLOSE SEAL-IN
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000 s

684 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

This setting specifies the seal-in time of the open commands due to an operator initiated manual or remote close
command to the disconnect switch.

Note:
To maintain the close/open command for a certain time, do so by either using the seal-in timers Open Seal-In and Close Seal-
In, or the setpoint "Seal-in" from the output relays, or FlexLogic.

REMOTE BLOCK OPEN

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The assertion of the operand assigned to this setpoint prevents the disconnect switch from opening.

REMOTE BLOCK CLOSE

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The assertion of the operand assigned to this setpoint prevents the disconnect switch from closing.

BYPASS REM BLK OPEN

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setting specifies the selection of an input which when asserted bypasses the block to the disconnect open
control. The Open command is permitted.

BYPASS REM BLK CLOSE

Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
This setting specifies the selection of an input which when asserted bypasses the block to the disconnect close
control. The Close command is permitted.

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset

1601-0450 685
Chapter 10 - Control

 RS T 
 U 

*+,+-. /01

736 89 !:

w
x
*+,+-. /01

L6y !:

 RS T 
 U 

*+,+-. /01

2! ™)6š9

*+,+-. /01

 73 24 !()

%
&
*+,+-. /01 '
*+,+-. /01

 73 24 !() 25

  !()

*+,+-. /01

    
 !() 9

*+,+-. /01

 !()9
 qrq
•—–˜

Ss
S
% abcdefbghigbajh t  
&
  !() ' keblmaghnop
VWXYZ [ VWY\Z ] ^_ r u v

!"" # $ ;<==>?@
 ` !() 65 3
AB C DEFG AFHIJKG DP

L MNM

 $ HGO

%
  234 !() &
'
!"" # $
%
&
 '
%
 25(6  24 !() &
'

!"" # $

*+,+-. /01

  24 !()

*+,+-. /01

 T 
 U    24 !() 25

*+,+-. /01

 73 24  

%
&
'
*+,+-. /01 *+,+-. /01

 73 24  25    

    

*+,+-. /01
*+,+-. /01
   9
  9

 qrq
TR•–

Ss
% S
& abcdefbghigbajh
t  
    ' keblmaghnop
VWXYZ [ VWY\Z ] ^_  t uv
!"" # $ ;<==>?@
 `   65 3
AB C QIDAF AFHIJKG DP

 L MNM
%
  234   & $ HGO
'

!"" # $
%
&
 '
%
 25(6  24   &
'

!"" # $

*+,+-. /01

  24  

*+,+-. /01

  24  25

›œžœŸ ž¡¢£¤

z {|} ~€‚ ƒ|„ƒ |} †}‡ } ‚ˆ †~ ~€‚ ‰† Š‹ Œ {|}

ƒŽ‡} ~€‚ Ž~}ƒ  }Ž‚| ƒ„ ‚| ‘ †€†Ž‡‡ˆ€  ƒ

ˆ’“’”Ž~ ƒ} ˆ ƒ ‰† †}‡ } ‚ˆ †~

Figure 276: Switch Control logic diagram

686 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

10.8 VIRTUAL INPUT CONTROL

Path: Setpoints > Control > Virtual Input Control

FORCE VIRTUAL INPUT 1 (64)

Range: Off, On
Default: Off
The states of up to 64 Virtual Inputs are changed here. The current or selected status of the Virtual Input is also
shown here. The status is a state OFF (logic 0) or ON (logic 1). If the corresponding Virtual Input selected under
Setpoints/Inputs/Virtual Inputs is set to Latched, the ON command initiated from this menu stays on and the
status of this Virtual Input is also on until the OFF command is received. If the Virtual Input type is Self-Reset,
the command and status of this Virtual Input reverts to OFF after one evaluation of the FlexLogic equations.

1601-0450 687
Chapter 10 - Control

10.9 TRIP BUS

Note:
Output Relays configured for Recloser operation are under the Trip Close Logic. Setpoints under Trip Bus are not applicable
to the output relays set under Trip Close Logic.

The relay provides six identical Trip Bus elements. The Trip Bus element allows aggregating outputs of protection,
control elements, inputs without using FlexLogic and assigning them in a simple and effective manner. Each Trip
Bus can be assigned to trip, alarm or the other logic actions. Simple trip conditioning such as latch, delay, and seal-
in delay are available.
Path: Setpoints > Control > Trip Bus 1(X)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled

INPUT 1 to 16
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
These settings select a FlexLogic operand to be assigned as an input to the Trip Bus.

LATCHING
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
The setting enables or disables latching of the Trip Bus output. This is typically used when lockout is required or
user acknowledgement of the relay response is required.

RESET
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The trip bus output is reset when the operand assigned to this setting is asserted.

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000 s

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000 s

688 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Self-reset

Note:
The Any Trip operand must not be programmed as an input for the Trip Bus function.

1601-0450 689
690
Chapter 10 - Control

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip
SETPOINT
LED: TRIP 8S: To operate Output Relay
FUNCTION:

AND
1(TRIP)
Disabled Configurable in 845 & 859
OR

Trip

Figure 277: Trip Bus logic diagram

S
Latched Trip AND
LATCH
Alarm

OR
R
Latched Alarm
LED: ALARM
Configurable
AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR

Any Alarm
SETPOINTS
S
AND

TRIP BUS 1
BLOCK : LATCH SETPOINT
Off = 0 R Output Relay X

AND
Command
SETPOINTS RESET Do Not Operate, Operate
SETPOINTS TRIP BUS 1
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP DELAY:
NON VOLATILE Trip Bus 1 OP
OR

INPUT 1: S TRIP BUS 1

Off = 0 DROPOUT DELAY:
LATCH tPKP
SETPOINTS tDPO
TRIP BUS 1 SET-
DOMINANT
INPUT 2: R
LED:
Off = 0
PICKUP

OR
...
FlexLogic Operands
... Trip Bus 1 PKP
SETPOINTS
TRIP BUS 1
INPUT 16:
Off = 0

SETPOINTS
TRIP BUS 1
LATCHING:
Disabled = 0

SETPOINTS

OR
TRIP BUS 1
RESET:
Disabled = 0


1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

10.10 BREAKER FAILURE (50BF)

The Breaker Failure element determines that a breaker signaled to Trip has not cleared a fault within a definite time.
The Breaker Failure scheme must trip all breakers that can supply current to the faulted zone. Operation of a
breaker Failure element causes clearing of a larger section of the power system than the initial Trip. Because
Breaker Failure can result in tripping a large number of breakers and this can affect system safety and stability, a
very high level of security is required.
The Breaker Failure function monitors phase and neutral currents and/or status of the breaker while the protection
trip or external initiation command exists. If Breaker Failure is declared, the function operates the selected output
relays, forces the autoreclose scheme to lockout and raises FlexLogic operands.
The operation of a Breaker Failure element consists of three stages: initiation, determination of a Breaker Failure
condition, and outputs.

Initiation of a Breaker Failure

The protection signals initially sent to the breaker or external initiation (FlexLogic operand that initiates Breaker
Failure) initiates the Breaker Failure scheme. The initiating signal should be sealed-in if primary fault detection can
reset before the breaker failure timers have finished timing. The seal-in is supervised by current level, so it is reset
when the fault is cleared. If required, an incomplete sequence seal-in reset can be implemented by using the
initiating operand to initiate a FlexLogic timer, set longer than any breaker failure time, with the output operand
selected to block the breaker failure scheme.
When the scheme is initiated, it sends a Trip signal after a pick-up delay, to the breaker initially signaled to Trip (this
feature is usually described as re-trip). This reduces the possibility of widespread tripping that can result from a
declaration of a failed breaker.

Determination of a Breaker Failure condition

The schemes determine a Breaker Failure condition supervised by one of the following:
● Current supervision only
● Breaker status only
● Both (current and breaker status)
Each type of supervision is equipped with a time delay, after which a failed breaker is declared and Trip signals are
sent to all breakers required to clear the zone. The delays are associated with breaker failure timers 1, 2, and 3.
Timer 1 logic is supervised by current level only. If fault current is detected after the delay interval, an output is
issued. The continued presence of current indicates that the breaker has failed to interrupt the circuit. This logic
detects a breaker that opens mechanically but fails to interrupt fault current.
Timer 2 logic is supervised by both current supervision and breaker status. If the breaker is still closed (as indicated
by the auxiliary contact) and fault current is detected after the delay interval, an output is issued.
Timer 3 logic is supervised by a breaker auxiliary contact only. There is no current level check in this logic as it is
intended to detect low magnitude faults. External logic may be created to include control switch contact used to
indicate that the breaker is in out-of-service mode, disabling this logic when the breaker is out-of-service for
maintenance.
Timer 1 and 2 logic provide two levels of current supervision - high-set and low-set - that allow the supervision level
to change (for example: from a current which flows before a breaker inserts an opening resistor into the faulted
circuit to a lower level after resistor insertion). The high-set detector is enabled after the timeout of timer 1 or 2,
along with a timer low-set delay that enables the low-set detector after its delay interval. The delay interval between
high-set and low-set is the expected breaker opening time. Both current detectors provide a fast operating time for

1601-0450 691
Chapter 10 - Control

currents at small multiples of the Pickup value. The overcurrent detectors are required to operate after the Breaker
Failure delay interval to eliminate the need for very fast resetting overcurrent detectors.

Outputs
The outputs from the schemes are:
● Re-trip of the protected breaker
● FlexLogic operand that reports on the operation of the portion of the scheme where high-set or low-set
current supervision is used
● FlexLogic operand that reports on the operation of the portion of the scheme where 52b status supervision is
used only
● FlexLogic operand that initiates tripping required to clear the faulted zone. The Breaker Failure output can be
sealed-in for an adjustable period
● Target message indicating a failed breaker has been declared.

10.10.1 BREAKER FAILURE SETUP

Path: Setpoints > Control > Breaker Failure > BF1(X) > BF1(X) Setup

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Retrip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Range (from FW 4.10): Disabled, Retrip, Latched Retrip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Default: Disabled
When a Retrip function is selected and Breaker Failure is initiated (with re-trip current supervision), the output
relay Trip operates but the alarm LED does not turn on.

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: dependent upon the order code
Default: CT Bank 1-J1

USE SEAL-IN
Range: Yes, No
Default: Yes
If set to Yes, the element will only be initiated if current flowing through the breaker is above the supervision
pickup level.

PH RETRIP SUPERV PICKUP

Range: 0.050 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 1.000 x CT
The setpoint specifies the phase current Retrip level, which when exceeded after Breaker Failure initiation, will
re-trip its own breaker. The setting is set to detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected circuit.

NTRL RETRIP SUPERV PICKUP

Range: 0.050 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT

692 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

Default: 1.000 x CT
This setpoint specifies the neutral current Retrip level, which when exceeded after Breaker Failure initiation, will
Retrip its own breaker. The setting detects the lowest expected fault current on the protected circuit. Neutral
Retrip current supervision is used to provide increased sensitivity.

RETRIP PICKUP DELAY

Range: 00.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.033 s
This setting specifies a pickup delay for the re-trip command. This delay should be set longer than the possible
spurious contact input activation duration due to transients or temporary dc grounds by taking the contact input
de-bounce time into account. This will avoid re-trip operation for such transients.

SUPERVISION
Range: Current, 52b & Current, 52b
Default: Current
The setpoint specifies the type of supervision of the Breaker Failure element. There are three options: current
only, breaker status only, or both.

BREAKER CLOSED
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand (auxiliary switch contact) to indicate that the circuit breaker is closed.

T1 PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.120 s
The setting provides a delay for Timer 1 logic which is supervised with current supervision only. The timer is set
to the expected opening time of the circuit breaker, plus a safety margin intended to overcome the relay
measurement and timing errors as well as relay processing time and current supervision reset time. In a
microprocessor relay this time is not significant. The current magnitude ramps-down to zero in ¾ of a power
cycle after the current is interrupted.

Note:
In bulk oil circuit breakers, the interrupting time for currents less than 25% of the interrupting rating can be significantly longer
than the normal interrupting time.

T2 PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.120 s
The setting provides a delay for Timer 2 logic which is supervised with current supervision and breaker status
(52b indication). The timer is set to the expected opening time of the circuit breaker, plus a safety margin
intended to overcome the relay measurement and timing errors, relay processing time, current supervision reset
time, and the time required for the breaker auxiliary contact to open.

1601-0450 693
Chapter 10 - Control

T3 PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.120 s
The setting provides a delay for Timer 3 logic which is supervised with breaker status only (52b indication). The
timer is set to the expected opening time of the circuit breaker, plus a safety margin intended to overcome the
relay timing errors, and the time required for the breaker auxiliary contact to open.

PHASE HIGHSET PICKUP

Range: 0.050 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 1.000 x CT
The setpoint specifies the phase current output supervision level. The setting detects the lowest expected fault
current on the protected circuit.

NEUTRAL HIGHSET PICKUP

Range: 0.050 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 1.000 x CT
The setpoint specifies the neutral current output supervision level. The setting detects the lowest expected fault
current on the protected circuit. Neutral current supervision is used to provide increased sensitivity.

LOWSET DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000 s
The setting provides the lowest current supervision Pickup. The setting is used in applications where a change in
supervision current level is required (for example: breakers with opening resistors).
The lowest delay (interval between high-set and low-set) is the expected breaker opening time.

PHASE LOWSET PICKUP

Range: 0.050 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 1.000 x CT
The setpoint specifies the phase current output supervision level. The setting detects the lowest expected fault
current on the protected circuit where significant change in current level is expected (for example: breakers with
opening resistors).

NEUTRAL LOWSET PICKUP

Range: 0.050 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 1.000 x CT
The setpoint specifies the neutral current output supervision level. The setting detects the lowest expected fault
current on the protected circuit where significant change in current level is expected (for example: breakers with
opening resistors). Neutral current supervision is used to provide increased sensitivity.

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s

694 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

Default: 0.100 s
The setting is used to set the period of time for which the Breaker Fail output is sealed-in. This timer must be
coordinated with the automatic reclosing scheme of the failed breaker, to which the Breaker Failure element
sends a cancel reclosure signal. Reclosure of a remote breaker can also be prevented by holding a transfer Trip
signal on for longer than the reclaim time.

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset

10.10.2 INITIATE
Path: Setpoints > Control > Breaker Failure 1(X) > BF1(X) Initiate

EXTERNAL INITIATE
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand that initiates the Breaker Failure scheme; typically the trip signals
from external devices.

Note:
The trip signals from internal protection functions may be used with the help of FlexLogic, but for easier setting the Breaker
Failure function is provided with a BF1 INITIATE submenu.

INITIATE IN1(15)
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Ph TOC 1 OP
The setpoint selects the FlexLogic operand that initiates the Breaker Failure scheme; typically the trip signals
from internal protection functions.

1601-0450 695
Chapter 10 - Control

Note:
The default setting includes the following protection functions:

● Ph TOC 1 OP
● Ph TOC 2 OP
● Ph IOC 1 OP
● Ph IOC 2 OP
● Ntrl TOC 1 OP
● Ntrl TOC 2 OP
● Ntrl IOC 1 OP
● Ntrl IOC 2 OP
● GND TOC 1 OP
● GND IOC 1 OP

696 1601-0450
1601-0450
LED:

AND
ALARM
OR

S
SETPOINTS SETPOINTS
LATCH # 1
AND

BF 1 OUTPUT RELAYS
Command Set-
FUNCTION: Dominant Do Not Operate, Operate

Disabled RESET R
FlexLogic Operands
Alarm
OR

BF1 OP
Latched Alarm
Re-trip

OR
Latched Re-trip
Configurable

SETPOINTS
BF1

AND
BLOCK :

Figure 278: Breaker Failure logic diagram

Off = 0 LED: TRIP

SETPOINTS
AND

SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS BF1 PH RETRIP BF1 FlexLogic Operand

OR
SUPERV PICKUP: RETRIP PKP DELAY:

OR
AND
BF1 INITIATE: BF1 Retrip
tPKP
OR

BF1 NTRL RETRIP SUPERV

AND

EXTERNAL INITIATE 0 S
PICKUP:
LATCH # 1
AND

INITIATE IN1 RUN

OR Command Set-
IA > PICKUP Dominant
... RESET R
RUN
INITIATE IN15
IB > PICKUP
SETPOINTS

OR
RUN

AND
SETPOINTS
BF1 Setpoints/System/Breakers/
BF1 IC > PICKUP
PHASE HIGHSET PICKUP: BKR1: 845 & 889 &
USE SEAL-IN: RUN 859 only
IN > PICKUP BF1
YES = 1 BKR 1: Trip Relay Select
NTRL HIGHSET PICKUP:
NO = 0 RUN
IA > PICKUP
RUN
IB > PICKUP
OR

RUN
SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS IC > PICKUP
IA SIGNAL INPUT:
RUN
IB BF1 FlexLogic Operands
T1 PICKUP DELAY: IN > PICKUP
IC CT Bank 1 - J1 BF1 Highset OP
t1PKP SETPOINTS BF1
IN

AND
0 PHASE LOWSET PICKUP: BF1 Lowset OP
BF1
USED ONLY IN 845 & 889 LOWSET DELAY: BF1
SETPOINTS NTRL LOWSET PICKUP:
tLOW
SETPOINTS RUN
OR
BF1 0
BF1 SETPOINTS
T2 PICKUP DELAY: IA > PICKUP
SUPERVISION: BF1
t2PKP RUN
DROPOUT DELAY:

AND
Current 0
IB > PICKUP
52b& Current 0
OR
OR

RUN TDPO
52b
IC > PICKUP
RUN
SETPOINTS
IN > PICKUP
BF1
SETPOINT T3 PICKUP DELAY: FlexLogic Operands
BF1 t3PKP
BF1 52b Superv OP

AND
BREAKER CLOSED: 0
Off = 0

894067C1.vsdx

697
Chapter 10 - Control
Chapter 10 - Control

10.11 ARC FLASH PROTECTION

The Arc Flash Protection module supports fast and secure protection against an arc flash event for a safe working
environment.
Arc Flash protection uses four light detection fiber sensors and a dedicated high-speed instantaneous overcurrent
element with secure Finite Response Filtering. Light from the light sensor AND logic with high-speed overcurrent
ensures fast and secure operation. Further enhancement includes continuous monitoring of individual light sensors
with self-test trouble indication. Four Arc Flash elements with self-test from the individual light sensors can be used
to design flexible Arc Flash protection schemes for different configurations depending upon the physical locations of
the sensors. Each individual element can also provide a higher level of redundancy/reliability of the system.
In case any issues with the sensors are detected (i.e. failure of a self-test), the corresponding light sensor trouble
operand (Light Sensor # Trouble) is asserted. Very fast detection of the Arc flash light event is also possible using
Light as the only detection parameter for alarm purposes. In addition, customized logic can be designed using
individual AF1 Light # PKP and Arc Flash 1 S# OP operands from different light sensors in the FlexLogic engine.
Path:Setpoints > Control > Arc Flash > Arc Flash 1

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Note: Relays with firmware version 4 and later have a Latched Trip option
Default: Disabled
The selection of Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm or Configurable setting enables the HS Phase/Ground IOC function.

SIGNAL INPUT
Range: dependent upon the order code
Default: CT Bank 1 - J1
This setting provides the selections for the current input bank. The default bank names can be changed in:
Setpoints > System > Current Sensing > [Name] > CT Bank Name.

HS PHASE PKP
Range: 0.050 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 2.000 x CT

HS GROUND PKP
Range: 0.050 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 1.000 x CT

Note:
The value of HS Gnd PICKUP can be set to a very high value, when only the HS Phs element needs to be applied for Arc
Flash detection.

698 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

Note:
The HS Ground PKP setting is not available if the order code is selected to have just one sensitive ground current input on the
J1-Bank (4-0B in the order code).

LIGHT SENSOR 1(4)

Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
This setting enables or disables the events of the Arc Flash function.

TARGETS
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Default: Latched

1601-0450 699
Chapter 10 - Control

LED: TRIP

AND
Operate Output Relay 1 (TRIP)

OR
CONFIGURABLE IN 845

AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
LATCH Any Trip
R
Set Dominant LED: ALARM

AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR
Any Alarm

AND
SETPOINT S
FUNCTION: LATCH SETPOINT
Disabled Command R Output Relay X
Trip RESET Set Dominant Do Not Operate, Operate

Latched Trip FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR
Arc Flash 1 OP
OR

Alarm
Latched Alarm
Configurable FlexLogic Operands
AF 1 HS Ph IOC PKP A

SETPOINTS AF 1 HS Ph IOC PKP B

HS Phase PKP: AF 1 HS Ph IOC PKP C

AND

RUN AF 1 HS GND IOC PKP

Iahs > PICKUP

Ibhs > PICKUP

OR
SETPOINTS Ichs > PICKUP

BLOCK
Off = 0

SETPOINTS
FlexLogic Operands
HS Ground PKP
Arc Flash 1 S1 OP
SETPOINTS HS Phase Currents RUN
Arc Flash 1 S2 OP
SIGNAL INPUT: HS Phase A current (Iahs) Ighs > PICKUP
HS Phase B current (Ibhs) Arc Flash 1 S3 OP

CT Bank 1 - J1 HS Phase C current (Ichs) Arc Flash 1 S4 OP

HS Ground current (Ighs) RUN Reset Delay
Light Sensor 1 Input > Factory PKP 0 ms

AND
Level * Auto Calibration Level for
USED ONLY IN 845 & 889
Sensor 1 20 ms

RUN
Light Sensor 2 Input > Factory PKP 0 ms

AND
Level * Auto Calibration Level for
20 ms

OR
Sensor 2
Light Sensor Input
RUN
Light Sensor 1 Light Sensor 3 Input > Factory PKP 0 ms

AND
FlexLogic Operands
Level * Auto Calibration Level for 20 ms
Light Sensor 2
Sensor 3 AF 1 Light 1 PKP
Light Sensor 3
RUN 0 ms AF 1 Light 2 PKP

AND
Light Sensor 4
Light Sensor 4 Input > Factory PKP 20 ms
Level * Auto Calibration Level for AF 1 Light 3 PKP
Sensor 4
AF 1 Light 4 PKP

Input form Self Test

Logic
(If Self test Pulse received FlexAnalog
within specified interval = 1 AF 1 HS Phase Current A (Iahs)
(Yes))
AF 1 HS Phase Current B (Ibhs)

AF 1 HS Phase Current C (Ichs)

AF 1 HS Ground Current (Ighs)

SETPOINTS
AND

Light Sensor 1 Enabled = 1

FlexLogic Operands
Light Sensor 1 Trouble
SETPOINTS
AND

Light Sensor 2 Trouble

Light Sensor 2 Enabled =1
Light Sensor 3 Trouble

Light Sensor 4 Trouble

SETPOINTS
AND

Light Sensor 3 Enabled = 1

FlexLogic Operands
OR

SETPOINTS Light Sensor Trouble

AND

Light Sensor 4 Enabled = 1

Programmable LED:


TROUBLE

Figure 279: Arc Flash logic diagram

700 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

10.12 VT FUSE FAILURE (VTFF)

The VT Fuse Failure detector can be used to raise an alarm and/or block elements that may operate incorrectly for
a full or partial loss of AC potential caused by one or more blown fuses. Some elements that might be blocked (via
the BLOCK input) are voltage restrained overcurrent, directional current, power functions. This loss can be caused
by a blown primary voltage transformer fuse (or fuses), or by voltage transformer secondary circuit protection fuse
failure.
There are two classes of fuse failure that may occur:
1. Class A: loss of one or two phases
2. Class B: loss of all three phases.
Different means of detection are required for each class. An indication of a Class A failure is a significant level of
negative sequence voltage, whereas an indication of a Class B failure is the presence of positive sequence current
and an insignificant amount of positive sequence voltage. These noted indications of fuse failure could also be
present when faults are present on the system, so a means of detecting faults and inhibiting fuse failure
declarations during these events is provided.
Once the fuse failure condition is declared, it is sealed-in until the cause that generated it disappears. An additional
condition is introduced to inhibit a fuse failure declaration when the monitored circuit is de-energized: positive
sequence voltage and current are both below threshold levels.
The settings of this function are applied to three-phase voltage input (supervised with positive, negative and zero
sequence current components) to produce an Operate flag.
This function also provides detection of the VT neutral wire open condition using the third harmonic content in the
3V0 (i.e. Va+Vb+Vc) signal. Under neutral wire open condition, 3V0 contains small fundamental content under
balance load condition but contains significant 3rd harmonic contents regardless of the load condition (balance or
imbalance).

10.12.1 VT FUSE FAILURE SETTINGS

Path: Setpoints > Control > VT Fuse Failure 1 (2)

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Configurable
Default: Disabled

TIME DELAY
Range: 0 to 60000 s in steps of 1 s
Default: 0 s
This setting can be used to avoid fuse failure detection in the case of sudden loss of voltage when the current is
zero (breaker remains in open condition) and the transient negative sequence voltage appears. This setting
should be used where the VT is on the Bus side, in which case the relay may detect voltage loss when the
breaker is open.

Operate Delay:
Range: 1 to 10 sec in steps of 1 sec
Default: 5 Sec

1601-0450 701
Chapter 10 - Control

This setting determines the operate time-delay upon detection of a VTS condition.

VT Ntrl Wire Det

Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting enables and disables the VT neutral wire open detection function. When the VT is connected in
Delta, do not enable this function because there is no neutral wire for Delta connected VT.

VT Ntrl Wire PKP

Range: 0.0 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1 %
Default: 10.0 %
This setting specifies the pickup level of 3rd harmonic of 3V0 signal for the VT neutral wire open detection logic
to pick up. % is calculated based on the Phase VT Secondary

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

EVENTS
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset

702 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

#$ 4567 8489: ;
% 48<=>56 8489:

!"
#$
 
 % E
  GHIJKLM
 =@AABCD NOPQ
!" RSTUVWVP
 95?5< F
&'()  #$
XYZ[\ %
!"
E
#$ GHIJK Lz HŽGI
% {O|OP
RSTUVWVPQ
F

#$


 %
3  
  

 !"
*+, - ./0. 1/2/ œr r&s E 3r&st
! ŽN
3 "  #$ HGŽ{ GHIJK L}
l #$ o % X X' p'q p'
*+0 u ./.v 1/2/ {O|OPQ
% RSTUVWVP
3 F
w+0 - ./.xv 1/2/
3  
*+0 u ./y. 1/2/ #$
% (n(
3 o (n(
w+0 u ./.v 1/2/

#$
%
!
"
#$
% ]^_`abcde
f_ghijk
 \  l m

#$
%  \ l  &X

3
l ~w+0~  ~w+0€~ - ./. 1/2/ ‘’“”•–—–˜™š›
3 !
 "
~w+,~  ~w+,€~ - ./. 1/2/
3
o ~w+.~  ~w+.€~ - ./. 1/2/
‚ƒ„ „ w€ †‡ , ˆ‰ˆŠ„‡ ‹ŠŒ

Figure 280: VT Fuse Failure logic diagram

1601-0450 703
Chapter 10 - Control

10.13 DIGITAL ELEMENTS

The 8Series has 64 identical digital elements available. A digital element can monitor any FlexLogic operand and
present a target message and enable events recording depending on the output operand state. The digital element
settings include:
● a name to be referenced in any target message
● a blocking input from any selected FlexLogic operand
● a timer for pickup and reset delays for the output operand
Digital elements run once per power system cycle. As such they can easily fail to react to an input signal or a block
signal with a duration less than one power system cycle. This also means that digital element output can react up to
one power system cycle later than the pickup and reset delay settings indicate. Therefore, do no use digital
elements:
● with transient signals, such as communications commands.
● where random delays of up to one cycle cannot be tolerated, such as in high speed protection.

Example : Trip circuit integrity monitoring

In many applications it is desirable to monitor the breaker trip circuit integrity such that problems can be detected
before a trip operation is required. The circuit is considered to be healthy when the voltage monitor connected
across the trip output contact detects a low level of current (Contact output voltage is not zero), well below the
operating current of the breaker trip coil. If the circuit presents a high resistance, the trickle current falls below the
monitor threshold, and an alarm is declared.
In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact, which is open
when the breaker is open. To prevent unwanted alarms in this situation, the trip circuit monitoring logic must include
the breaker position.
Assume that output 1 is a trip contact. Using the output settings, this output is given an ID name; for example, Cont
Op 1. Assume a 52a breaker auxiliary contact is connected to contact input 1 to monitor breaker status (Block when
contact input 1 is OFF).
Using the contact input settings, this input is given a name, for example, CI 1, and is set On when the breaker is
closed. The function is blocked when breaker is open, i.e. CI 1 is Off. The settings to use digital element 1 to
monitor the breaker trip circuit are shown below:

SETTING PARAMETER
Function Enabled
Name Bkr Trip Cct Out
Input Cont Op 1
Pickup Delay 0.200 s
Dropout Delay 0.100 s
Relays Relay : Disabled
Block CI 1 Off
Target Self-Reset
Events Enabled

704 1601-0450
 Chapter 10 - Control

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Latched Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm or Configurable
Default: Disabled

NAME
Range : 13 alphanumeric characters
Default: Digital Elem1
Assign a user-defined name to the Digital Element. This Name is used In Flexlogic operands, Target messages,
a blocking input from any selected flexlogic operands, and a timer for pickup and reset delays for the output
operands.

INPUT
Range : Off, Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
Selects a FlexLogic operand to be monitored by the digital element.

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000
Sets the required time delay from element pickup to element operation. If a pickup
delay is not required, set to "0.000," To avoid nuisance alarms, set the delay greater than the operating time of
the breaker.

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000
Sets the dropout time delay to reset. If a reset delay is not required, set to “0.000.”

OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate

BLOCK
Range: FlexLogic operand
Default: Off

EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

1601-0450 705
Chapter 10 - Control

TARGETS
Range: Disabled, Self-reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset
SETPOINT
FUNCTION:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Disabled=0 Any Trip
Trip
LED: TRIP

AND
Latched Trip
To Trip Output Relay
OR

Alarm

OR
Latched Alarm
Configurable
S

AND
LATCH
SETPOINT
SETPOINT SETPOINT R
PICKUP DELAY
LED: ALARM
AND

AND
BLOCK NAME
DROPOUT DELAY
Off=0 RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
tPKP

OR
tRST Any Alarm
INPUT = 1

AND
SETPOINT S
INPUT LATCH SETPOINT
Any FlexLogic Operand
Command R Output Relay X
RESET Do Not Operate, Operate

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR
DIG ELEM 1 OP

892794C1 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

DIG ELEM 1 PKP

Figure 281: Digital Elements logic

706 1601-0450
CHAPTER 11

FLEXLOGIC
Chapter 11 - Flexlogic

708 1601-0450
 Chapter 11 - Flexlogic

11.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter describes the FlexLogic and Testing setpoints. FlexLogic setpoints provide access to the variable logic
used with the relay. Testing setpoints include simulated current and voltage inputs, and test operations for LEDs,
input contacts, and output relays.
This product manual does not contain a list of FlexLogic operands. A full list is available on the GE website.
This chapter contains the following sections:
Chapter Overview 709
FlexLogic 710

1601-0450 709
Chapter 11 - Flexlogic

11.2 FLEXLOGIC
To provide maximum flexibility, the arrangement of internal digital logic combines fixed and user-programmed
parameters. Logic upon which individual features are designed is fixed, and all other logic, from digital input signals
through elements or combinations of elements to digital outputs, is variable. The user has complete control of all
variable logic through FlexLogic. In general, the system receives analog and digital inputs, which then uses
FlexLogic to produce analog and digital outputs.
The major sub-systems of a generic 8 Series relay involved in this process are shown as follows.

Note:
For information on the Logic Designer and Logic Monitor menu items, refer to the Help menu.

 

 !

"#$% 

&% $% 

'()  )#
>?@<A=

*)# )(#+
1234526 789:;<=

MN
,)# ()-
 JKL 

 
.-/0)+
O  
P #+




BCDCE F BCDCE G BCDCE H BCDCE I

Figure 282: FlexLogic Display Hierarchy

710 1601-0450
 Chapter 11 - Flexlogic

The states of all digital signals are represented by flags (FlexLogic operands). A digital 1 is represented by a Set
flag. Any external contact change-of-state can be used to block an element from operating, as an input to a control
feature in a FlexLogic equation, or to operate an output relay. The state of the contact input can be displayed locally
or viewed remotely via the communications facilities provided. In a simple scheme where a contact input is used to
block an element is desired, this selection is made within the menu of the element. This applies to other features
that set flags: elements, virtual inputs, remote inputs, schemes, and human operators.
When more complex logic than the one presented above is required, the FlexLogic tool should be used. For
example, if it is desired to block the operation of a Phase Time Overcurrent element by the closed state of a contact
input, and the operated state of a Phase Undervoltage element, the two input states need be programmed in a
FlexLogic equation. This equation ANDs the two inputs to produce a virtual output which then must be programmed
within the menu of the Phase Time Overcurrent as a blocking input. Virtual outputs can be created only by
FlexLogic equations.
Traditionally, protective relay logic has been relatively limited. Any unusual applications involving interlocks,
blocking, or supervisory functions had to be hard-wired using contact inputs and outputs. FlexLogic minimizes the
requirement for auxiliary components and wiring while making more complex schemes possible.
The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs is field programmable through
the use of logic equations that are sequentially processed. The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to
hardware is available internally and on the communication ports for other relays to use (distributed FlexLogic).
FlexLogic allows customization of the relay through a series of equations that consist of operators and operands.
The operands are the states of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs. The operators are logic gates, timers and
latches (with set and reset inputs). A system of sequential operations allows any combination of specified operands
to be assigned, as inputs to specified operators, to create an output. The final output of an equation is a numbered
register called a ‘Virtual Output’. Virtual Outputs can be used as an input operand in any equation, including the
equation that generates the output, as a seal-in or other type of feedback.
A FlexLogic equation consists of parameters that are either operands or operators. Operands have a logic state of 1
or 0. Operators provide a defined function, such as an AND gate or a Timer. Each equation defines the
combinations of parameters to be used to set a Virtual Output flag. Evaluation of an equation results in either a 1
(=ON, i.e. flag set) or 0 (=OFF, i.e. flag not set). Each equation is evaluated at least 4 times during every power
system cycle.
Some types of operands are present in the relay in multiple instances; e.g. contact and remote inputs. These types
of operands are grouped together (for presentation purposes only) on the faceplate display. The characteristics of
the different types of operands are listed in the table below.

FlexLogic Operands
A complete list of FlexLogic operands are available on the GE website.
The following operands can be re-named if required
● Breakers in the breaker control feature
● ID (identification) of contact inputs
● ID of virtual inputs
● ID of virtual outputs.
● If the default name or ID of any of these operands are changed, the assigned name appears in the relay list
of operands.

1601-0450 711
Chapter 11 - Flexlogic

FlexLogic Operators
TYPE SYNTAX DESCRIPTION NOTES
Editor INSERT Insert a parameter in an
equation list.
DELETE Delete a parameter from an
equation list.
End END The first END encountered
signifies the last entry in the list
of processed FlexLogic™
parameters.
One-shot POSITIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a A ‘one shot’ refers to a single
positive going edge. input gate that generates a pulse
NEGATIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a response to an edge on the
negative going edge. input. The output from a ‘one
shot’ is True (positive) for only
DUAL ONE SHOT One shot that responds to both one pass through the FlexLogic
the positive and negative going equation. There is a maximum of
edges. 64 ‘one shots’.
Logic gate NOT Logical NOT Operates on the previous
parameter.
OR(2)↓ OR(16) 2 input OR gate↓ 16 input OR Operates on the 2 previous
gate parameters.↓Operates on the 16
previous parameters.
AND(2)↓ AND(16) 2 input AND gate↓ 16 input Operates on the 2 previous
AND gate parameters. ↓Operates on the
16 previous parameters.
NOR(2)↓ NOR(16) 2 input NOR gate↓ 16 input Operates on the 2 previous
NOR gate parameters. ↓Operates on the
16 previous parameters.
NAND(2)↓ NAND(16) 2 input NAND gate↓ 16 input Operates on the 2 previous
NAND gate parameters. ↓Operates on the
16 previous parameters.
XOR(2) 2 input Exclusive OR gate Operates on the 2 previous
parameters.
LATCH (S,R) Latch (set, reset): reset- The parameter preceding
dominant LATCH(S,R) is the reset input.
The parameter preceding the
reset input is the set input.
Timer TIMER 1↓ TIMER 32 Timer set with FlexLogic™ timer The timer is started by the
1 settings.↓ Timer set with preceding parameter. The output
FlexLogic™ timer 32 settings. of the timer is TIMER #.
Assign virtual output = Virt Op 1↓ = Virt Op 32 Assigns previous FlexLogic™ The virtual output is set by the
operand to virtual output 1.↓ preceding parameter
Assigns previous FlexLogic™
operand to virtual output 96.
The characteristics of the logic gates are tabulated below, and the operators available in FlexLogic are listed in the
FlexLogic operators table.

712 1601-0450
 Chapter 11 - Flexlogic

FlexLogic Gate Characteristics

GATES NUMBER OF INPUTS OUTPUT IS 1 (= ON) IF...
NOT 1 input is ‘0’
OR 2 to 16 any input is ‘1’
AND 2 to 16 all inputs are ‘1’
NOR 2 to 16 all inputs are ‘0’
NAND 2 to 16 any input is ‘0’

XOR 2 only one input is ‘1’

FLEXLOGIC RULES
When forming a FlexLogic equation, the sequence in the linear array of parameters must follow these general rules:
● Operands must precede the operator which uses the operands as inputs.
● Operators have only one output. The output of an operator must be used to create a Virtual Output if it is to
be used as an input to two or more operators.
● Assigning the output of an operator to a Virtual Output terminates the equation.
● A timer operator (for example, TIMER 1) or Virtual Output assignment may only be used once. If this rule is
broken, a syntax error will be declared.

FLEXLOGIC EVALUATION
● Each equation is evaluated in the order in which the parameters have been entered.
● FlexLogic provides latches which by definition have a memory action, remaining in the set state after the set
input has been asserted. However, they are volatile; that is, they reset on the re-application of control power.
● When making changes to settings, all FlexLogic equations are re-compiled whenever any new setting value
is entered, so all latches are automatically reset. If it is necessary to re-initialize FlexLogic during testing, for
example, it is suggested to power the unit down then back up.

11.2.1 TIMERS
Path: Setpoints > FlexLogic > Timers
There are 32 identical FlexLogic timers available. These timers can be used as operators for FlexLogic equations.

TIMER 1 TYPE
Range: Milliseconds, Seconds, Minutes
Default: Milliseconds
The setpoint is used to select the time measuring unit.

TIMER 1 MODE
Range: Pickup, Dropoff, Dwell, Pulse, Pickup/Dropoff,
Default: Pickup

TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY

Range: 0 to 60000 s in steps of 1 s

1601-0450 713
Chapter 11 - Flexlogic

Default: 0 s
The setpoint sets the time delay to Pickup. If a Pickup delay is not required, set this function to “0”.
This setting is used to set the time delay for Pickup, Dwell, Pulse and Pickup/Dropoff.

TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY

Range: 0 to 60000 s in steps of 1 s
Default: 0 s
The setpoint sets the time delay to Dropout. If a Dropout delay is not required, set this function to “0”.
This setting is used to set the drop-off time delay for Dropoff, Pickup/Dropoff.

11.2.2 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES

The purpose of a Non-volatile Latch is to provide a permanent logical flag that is stored safely and does not reset
when the relay reboots after being powered down. Typical applications include sustaining operator commands or
permanently blocking relay functions such as Autorecloser, until a deliberate HMI action resets the latch.
Operation of the element is summarized in the following table:
LATCH 1 TYPE LATCH 1 SET LATCH 1 RESET LATCH 1 ON LATCH 1 OFF
Reset Dominant On Off On Off
Off Off Previous State Previous State
On On Off On
Off
Set Dominant On Off On Off
On
Off Off Previous State Previous State
Off On Off On
Path: Settings > FlexLogic > Non-volatile Latches > Latch 1(16)

NV LATCH 1 FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
The setpoint enables or disables the Non-volatile Latch function.

NV LATCH 1 TYPE
Range: Reset-Dominant, Set-Dominant
Default: Reset-Dominant
The setting characterizes NV LATCH 1 to be set- or reset-dominant.

NV LATCH 1 SET
Range: Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
If asserted, this specified FlexLogic operand sets NV LATCH 1.

714 1601-0450
 Chapter 11 - Flexlogic

LATCH 1 RESET
Range: Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
If asserted, this specified FlexLogic operand resets NV LATCH 1.

11.2.3 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION

Path: Setpoints > FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation
The FlexLogic Equation screen is one of two options available to configure FlexLogic. The other option is Logic
Designer.
Three time stamp variables: Logic Design Last Saved, Logic Design Last Compiled and FlexLogic Editor Last
Saved, have been included in this screen.
Look at the time stamps to easily see which of the options: FlexLogic Editor or Logic Designer is currently being
used.
There are 1024 FlexLogic entries available, numbered from 1 to 1024 (i.e. FlexLogic Entry X – where X ranges from
1 to 1024) with default END entry settings. If a Disabled Element is selected as a FlexLogic entry, the associated
state flag is never set to 1.

Figure 283: FlexLogic Equation Editor Screen

The FlexLogic entries are defined as follows.

Graphical Viewer: Clicking on the View button enables the FlexLogic equation to be presented in graphical format
(Read-only). Refer to the Viewing FlexLogic Graphics section for more details.

1601-0450 715
Chapter 11 - Flexlogic

Logic Design Last Saved, Logic Design Last Compiled, and FlexLogic Editor Last Saved: Each of these three
read-only variables holds the time stamp that represents the time that the operation (of the respective variable) was
performed.
● When no Logic (New file creation) is present these timestamps are set to default text representations.
● Time stamps are displayed in the format ‘Mon DD YYYY HH:MM:SS’ [Jun 22 1981 14:20:00]
● Each time a ‘Save’ operation is performed in the ‘FlexLogic Equation Editor’ screen, the ‘FlexLogic Editor
Last Saved’ entry gets updated.
● Based on the values present at each launch of the ‘FlexLogic Equation Editor’ screen, internal validation
prompts the relevant messages. These prompts must be followed to ensure that the ‘FlexLogic’ configuration
is synchronized with the ‘Logic Designer’. These three variables are shown in color in the FlexLogic Equation
Editor based on timestamps. Color is used to indicate the change (non-synchronization if any) of FlexLogic
between the FlexLogic Editor and Logic Designer Screens.
File Conversion and Handling of Time Stamps: When File Conversion is applied the three time stamps are
processed (either carry forwarded, defaulted, updated with latest PC time) based on the Source and Destination
File versions and Order code supported.
The following cases depict the nature of the three time stamps after a file conversion.
Source Version Target Version Is FlexLogic Change Time Stamps [LDLs, LDLc, FELs]**
Detected?
>= 160 >= 160 YES [ 0^ , 0 , PCTime**]
>= 160 >=160 NO *Existing time stamps are copied to the
converted file
< 160 >= 160 YES [ 0 , 0 , PCTime]
< 160 (& > 120***) >= 160 NO [PCTime, PCTime, PCTime,]
** LDLs – Logic Designer Last Saved, LDLc– Logic Designer Last Compiled and FELs – FlexLogic
Editor Last Saved
** PCTime The time that the file conversion took place
^0 Indicates the time stamps are being defaulted
*** There is no support for Logic Designer [Graphical Editor] below version 130
* For each specific case, the source files for Logic Designer (Graphical) content will also get
copied “as is” to the destination folder. This enables the user to retain old content “as is”.

In a typical scenario where both the FlexLogic Designer and FlexLogic Editor are used for configuring FlexLogic, the
updated time stamps appear as shown in the following figure.

716 1601-0450
 Chapter 11 - Flexlogic

Logic Designer: This entry can be used to initiate the launch of the Logic Designer screen. Once chosen, the
existing FlexLogic Equation Editor screen is set to Read-only and then the Logic Designer screen launch is initiated.
If the user wants to re-visit the FlexLogic Editor Screen, any existing read-only screen has to be closed first. Then,
the screen has to be re-opened. The FlexLogic Editor screen is now editable, again.
In order to maintain synchronization of FlexLogic, the following update rules are defined.
For example, when a user tries to open the ‘FlexLogic Equation Editor’ of a particular device or file.
● If the Logic Designer screen is open and in Edit mode, a message prompts to save any changes. The
FlexLogic Equation Editor is not launched.
● If the Logic Designer is open and in saved mode (no edits to save or compile), the Logic Designer screen is
closed and then the FlexLogic Equation Editor launch is initiated.

11.2.4 VIEWING FLEXLOGIC GRAPHICS

To verify that the FlexLogic equation(s) and its selected parameters produce the desired logic, the expression can
be viewed by converting the derived equation into a graphic diagram. It is strongly recommended and helpful to
view an equation as a graphic diagram before it is saved to the relay in order to troubleshoot any possible error in
the equation.
To View the FlexLogic Graphic
Click on the View button at the top of the Type column in the FlexLogic Equation screen, see previous figure.
Provided the equation is entered correctly, this generates a graphical representation of the expression previously
entered. If any operator inputs are missing or any FlexLogic rules have been violated, the EnerVista D&I Setup
software displays a message box indicating any problems in the equation when the view feature is attempted.
The expression is also listed to the left of the diagram to demonstrate how the diagram was created. The End
statement is added as parameter 5 (End of list).

1601-0450 717
Chapter 11 - Flexlogic

Figure 284: FlexLogic Graphic Example

11.2.5 FLEXELEMENTS
There are 8 identical FlexElements. A FlexElement is a universal comparator, that can be used to monitor any
analog actual value measured or calculated by the relay, or a net difference of any two analog actual values of the
same type. Depending on how the FlexElement is programmed, the effective operating signal could be either a
signed signal or an absolute value.
You can configure the element to respond either to a signal level or to a rate-of-change (delta) over a pre-defined
period of time. The output operand is asserted when the operating signal is higher than a threshold or lower than a
threshold chosen.

718 1601-0450
 Chapter 11 - Flexlogic

When configuring a FlexElement, keep in mind the following limitations:

1. The analog inputs for any FlexElement must be from the same quantity.
○ current and current (in any combination, phase-symmetrical, phase-phase, kA-A, differential, restraint,
etc.)
○ voltage and voltage (as above)
○ active power and active power (Watts and Watts)
○ reactive power and reactive power (Vars and Vars)
○ apparent power and apparent power (VA and VA)
○ angle and angle (any, no matter what signal, for example angle of voltage and angle of current are a
valid pair)
○ % and % (any, for example THD and harmonic content is a valid pair)
○ V/Hz and V/Hz
○ °C and °C
○ I2t and I2t
○ FlexElement actual and FlexElement actual
2. For all the other combinations, the element displays 0.000 or N/A and will not assert any output operand.
3. The analog value associated with one FlexElement can be used as an input to another FlexElement
“Cascading”.



   "  #"$%&
#'
 !
"%$ ( #'
'@D E
'% 


") "
FG)
$ ' *N&%&&
HH E
%$  *$ ( # 
 +,-
 ") " 'G$N
%$  *$ ( #
 "  !+.-
% '%"  'G$N
$/,0 10 234356 5789:
= IJKJ
 "  ; +<-  ! "
> ILJM
$/,0 10

 ! ")"

96B93 C93B


 ! ? &@A

Figure 285: FlexElement logic diagram

11.2.5.1 FLEXELEMENT SETTINGS

Path:Setpoints > FlexLogic > FlexElements > FlexElement 1

FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Enabled

1601-0450 719
Chapter 11 - Flexlogic

Default: Disabled

NAME
Range: Up to 13 alphanumeric characters
Default: FlexEl 1

INPUT 1 (+)
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog signal
Default: Off
This setting specifies the first input (non-inverted) to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if this setting
is set to Off. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element
will not assert its output operands.

INPUT 2 (-)
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog signal
Default: Off
This setting specifies the second input (inverted) to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if this setting
is set to Off. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element
will not assert its output operands.
This input should be used to invert the signal if needed for convenience, or to make the element respond to a
differential signal such as for a top-bottom oil temperature differential alarm.
A warning message is displayed and the element does not operate if the two input signals are of different types,
for example if one tries to use active power and phase angle to build the effective operating signal.

OPERATING MODE
Range: Signed, Absolute
Default: Signed
The element responds directly to the differential signal if this setting is set to Signed. The element responds to
the absolute value of the differential signal if this setting is set to Absolute.
Sample applications for the Absolute setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors
with a symmetrical limit angle in both directions; monitoring power regardless of its direction, or monitoring a
trend regardless of whether the signal increases or decreases.

INPUT COMPARISON MODE

Range: Level, Delta
Default: Level
The element responds directly to the differential signal – as defined by the Input 1 (+), Input 2 (-) if the
OPERATING MODE setting is set to Level.
The element responds to the rate of change of its operating signal if this setting is set to Delta. The setpoints
RATE OF CHANGE TIME UNIT (dt), and RATE OF CHANGE TIME (dt) specify how the rate of change is
derived. Providing the conditions (Under or Over) for the actual rate-of-change are satisfied, in Delta mode the
FlexElement can operate in either direction, no matter if the operating signal is increased or decreased. The
operating signal is the difference between the two selected inputs.

720 1601-0450
 Chapter 11 - Flexlogic

DIRECTION
Range: Over, Under
Default: Over
This setting enables the relay to respond to either high or low values of the operating signal. The following figure
explains the application of the DIRECTION, PICKUP and HYSTERISIS settings.

Figure 286: Direction, Pickup, and Hysteresis setpoints

In conjunction with the OPERATING MODE setting, the element could be programmed to provide two extra
characteristics as shown in the figure following.

Figure 287: Operating Input setpoint

PICKUP
Range: -30.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 pu

1601-0450 721
Chapter 11 - Flexlogic

Default: 1.000
This setting specifies the operating threshold for the effective operating signal of the element.
If the Over direction is set, the element picks up when the operating signal exceeds the Pickup value.
If the Under direction is set, the element picks up when the operating signal falls below the Pickup value.
The HYSTERISIS setting controls the element drop out.
Notice that both the operating signal and the pickup threshold can be negative when facilitating applications
such as reverse power alarms.
The FlexElement can be programmed to work with all analog values measured or computed by the relay. The
PICKUP setting is entered in pu values using the following definitions of the base units:

Definitions of the Base Unit for the FLEXELEMENT

Measured or calculated analog value related Base Unit
to:
Voltage VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the Input 1(+) and input
2(-) inputs
Current IBASE= maximum nominal primary RMS value of the Input 1(+) and input 2(-)
inputs
Power PBASE= maximum value of VBASE * IBASE for the Input 1(+) and input 2(-)
inputs
Power Factor PFBASE= 1.00
Phase Angle DegBASE= 360 deg
Harmonic Content HBASE = 100% of nominal
THD THDBASE= 100%
Frequency fBASE= nominal frequency as entered under the SYSTEM SETUP menu
Volt/Hz BASE = 1.00
dcmA BASE = DCMA INPUT MAX (setting under the DCMA menu). If two DCMA
signals are used by the FlexElement, the maximum of the above setting
among the two elements is used as the base.
RTDs BASE = 100.00°C
I2t (arcing Amps) BASE = 2000 kA2*cycle
Current Unbalance BASE = 100%
Source Energy (Positive and Negative EBASE = 10000 MWh or MVAh, respectively
Watthours, Positive and Negative Varhours)
Differential and Restraint Currents (Percent IBASE = Primary of the CT with maximum primary current rating
Differential)
Thermal Capacity Used BASE = 100%
Thermal Lockout Time BASE = 10 minutes
Thermal Model Load and Biased Motor Load BASE = 1.00 pu of FLA
Trip Time on Overload BASE = 10 seconds
SM SC Spd-Dep TC Used BASE = 100%
SM SC Spd-Dep Trip Time on OL BASE = 10 seconds
SM Field VAC BASE = 1000 V

722 1601-0450
 Chapter 11 - Flexlogic

Measured or calculated analog value related Base Unit

to:
SM Field VDC BASE = 350 V
SM Field Amps BASE = Max FLD Amps Primary (set under System > Current Sensing > SM
FLD Amps -K2)
Rotor Slip BASE = 100%
K2 Field VAC Freq fBASE = nominal frequency as entered in the SYSTEM SETUP menu
SM PF Error BASE = 1.00
SM Field Resistance BASE = 100

HYSTERESIS
Range: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1%
Default: 3.0%
This setting defines the pickup – drop out relation of the element by specifying the width of the hysteresis loop as
a percentage of the pickup value as shown above in the Direction, Pickup, and Hysteresis setpoints figure.

RATE OF CHANGE TIME UNIT (dt)

Range: millisecond, second, minute
Default: milliseconds
This setting specifies the time base dt when programming the FlexElement as a rate of change element.
The setting is applicable only if the Input Comparison Mode is set to “Delta”.

RATE OF CHANGE TIME

Range: 40 to 65535 in steps of 1
Default: 40
This setting specifies the duration of the time interval for the rate of change mode of operation.
The setting is applicable only if the Input Comparison Mode is set to “Delta”.

PICKUP DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000
This setting specifies the pickup delay of the element.

DROPOUT DELAY
Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Default: 0.000
This setting specifies the reset delay of the element.

1601-0450 723
Chapter 11 - Flexlogic

11.2.5.2 FLEXELEMENTS - EXAMPLES

T13.8 kV power system:

● Phase VT Connection: Wye
● Phase VT Secondary: 66.4 V
● Phase VT Ratio: 120:1 (phase to neutral primary voltage = 120*66.4 = 7968 V)
● Aux VT Connection: Vab
● Aux VT Secondary: 115 V
● Aux VT Ratio: 120:1 (phase-phase primary voltage = 13800V)
● Phase CTs Primary: 2000 A
● Ground CT Primary: 500 A
● Frequency: 60Hz

Detecting voltage difference:

The voltage difference between calculated phase-phase voltage derived from Wye connected phase VTs, and the
directly measured phase-phase voltage from auxiliary VT can be monitored by programming a FlexElement.
FlexElement settings:
● Input 1(+): J2 Vab RMS
● Input 2 (-): J2 Vaux RMS (input from VT connected between phases A and B)
● Operating Mode: Absolute
● Input Comparison Mode: Level
● Direction: Over
The analog input J2 Vab is phase-phase voltage computed by the relay based on three-phase Wye voltages. As per
the Phase VT setup, the primary RMS nominal voltage for J2 Vab input is 66.4 V *120 = 7.968kV.
The analog input J2 Vaux is directly measured phase-phase voltage and its primary RMS nominal voltage is 115V
*120 = 13.8kV
VBASE = max (7.968kV, 13.8kV) = 13.8kV.
If we want to detect 2% voltage difference (2% @13.8kV = 276V) between the computed phase to phase Vab
voltage, and the measured Vaux voltage from a VT connected between phases A and B, the pickup per-unit setting
for the FlexElement can be set as follows:
Pickup = 276V/13800V = 0.02 pu
If the voltage difference between the selected inputs becomes bigger than 276 Volts, the FlexElement will pickup,
and operate, which can be used to energize contact, or initiate alarm, or trip.

Detecting current difference between Neutral and Ground currents:

In a balanced system, the computed neutral and the measured ground currents is 0 Amps. However, during ground
faults their values are not zero. More specifically if the phase and ground CTs are located on the same transformer
winding, such that the ground CT is installed on the grounded neutral of the winding, their values supposed to be
the same during external fault, and would be different during internal fault. The FlexElement can be used for
detecting the differential signal between these quantities. For example the following condition can be made:
IBASE = max (2000A, 500A) = 2000A

724 1601-0450
 Chapter 11 - Flexlogic

FlexElement settings:
● Input 1(+): J1
● Input 2 (-): J1 Ig
● Operating Mode: Absolute
● Input Comparison Mode: Level
● Direction: Over
● Pickup = 200A/2000A: 0.1 pu
When no CT saturation conditions exist, if the difference between the neutral current and the ground current
becomes more than 200 Amps primary, this can be treated as an indication of an internal ground fault, which should
be cleared. With IBASE = max (2000A, 500A) = 2000A, the pickup can be set as follows: Pickup = 200A/2000A = 0.1
pu

Detecting Low 3-ph Apparent Power:

VBASE = 7.968kV
IBASE = 1000 A
PBASE = VBASE *IBASE = 7968 V *2000A = 15.936MVA
The FlexElement can be set to detect under-power conditions and produce alarm, or trip if the apparent power is
less than 500kVA. In this case the pickup setting for the FlexElement can be computed as follows:
Pickup = 0.5MVA / 15.936 MVA = 0.0313 pu
FlexElement settings:
● Input 1(+): Pwr1 Apparent
● Input 2(-): Off
● Operating Mode: Absolute
● Input Comparison Mode: Level
● Direction: Under
● Pickup: 0.0313 pu

Power Factor Cap Bank Switch-In Example

PFBASE = 1.00
FlexElement can be programmed to switch-in cap bank, if for example the measured 3Ph Power Factor has
negative value(lag), and drops below the pickup of -0.7 pu. Programming the Hysteresis setpoint to the desired
percentage can define the PF value at which the cap bank can be switched off. For example, if the cap bank is
required to be switched off at PF value of -0.9, than the percent hysteresis is computed as:
% hysteresis = ((abs(-0.9)-abs(-0.7))/ PFBASE)*100 = 20%

Note:
The minimum pickup should not be less than 0.01 pu, as the measurement resolution for the Power Factor is 0.01.

● Input 1(+): Pwr1 PF

● Input 2(-): Off
● Operating Mode: Signed

1601-0450 725
Chapter 11 - Flexlogic

● Input Comparison Mode: Level

● Direction: Under
● Pickup: -0.700 pu
● Hysteresis: 20.0 %

Detecting high THD (Total Harmonic Distortion)

THDBASE = 100%
A FlexElement can be programmed to detect excessive amount of harmonics in the system, and Alarm, Trip, or
switch-in/out an equipment to suppress the high amount of harmonics. The Total Harmonic Distortion is an
estimation of how the AC signals are distorted and as shown above, it can be used as an input for the FlexElement.
For example if an operation from a FlexElement is desired when the THD for the phase A voltage exceeds 20%,
then having a base of 100%, the pickup setting should be set to 0.200 pu.
● Input 1(+): J2 Phase A THD
● Input 2(-): Off
● Operating Mode: Absolute
● Input Comparison Mode: Level
● Direction: Over
● Pickup: 0.200 pu

Note:
The harmonics and THD values are measured as percentage of the fundamental signal, and have resolution of 0.01%.
However for the minimum pickup setting of 0.001 pu, this would mean percentage step of 0.1%.

Simple V/Hz ratio detection for protected equipment

V/HzBASE = 1.00High V/Hz ratios in the power system are harmful for the insulation of the protected equipment –
transformer, generator, or elsewhere in the power system. If not detected, it can lead to excessive heat and
degradation of the insulation which will damage the equipment. A FlexElement can be used for simple detection of
V/Hz values, and to issue an Alarm, or Trip, if detected above Pickup setting. Since the base unit for V/Hz = 1.00,
programming of the pickup setpoint is straight forward for the desired FlexElement operation. For the example given
here, a value of 1.200 pu has been selected.
● Input 1(+): Volts Per Hertz 1Input 2(-): OffOperating Mode: AbsoluteInput Comparison Mode: LevelDirection:
OverPickup: 1.200 puHysteresis: 8.3%
Now, if the FlexElement is needed to drop down when the V/Hz ratio becomes equal to 1.1, the hysteresis can be
calculated as:1.2pu-1.1pu = 0.1 puHysteresis = (0.1*100)/1.2 = 8.3%

High Breaker Arcing current detection

High breaker arcing current can be detected by using a FlexElement during the opening of a breaker. One or more
FlexElements can be configured for detecting levels of maximum arcing current during the tripping of a particular
breaker, and give an indication for the health of the breaker.

The base unit for the breaker arcing current is programmed in the relay as: BASE = 2000 kA2*cycle
● Input 1(+): Total Arcing Current
● Input 2(-): Off
● Operating Mode: Absolute

726 1601-0450
 Chapter 11 - Flexlogic

● Input Comparison Mode: Level

● Direction: Over
● Pickup: 2.500 pu
● Hysteresis: 0.0%
To configure the pickup setpoint for a total arcing current of 5000kA2/cycle, the per-unit pickup value can be
calculated as follows:

Pickup = 5000kA2 *cycle/2000 kA2*cycle = 2.500 pu

1601-0450 727
Chapter 11 - Flexlogic

728 1601-0450
CHAPTER 12

TESTING
Chapter 12 - Testing

730 1601-0450
 Chapter 12 - Testing

12.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter contains the following sections:

Chapter Overview 731
Testing display hierarchy 732
Simulation 733
Test LEDs 737
Contact Inputs 738
Output Relays 739

1601-0450 731
Chapter 12 - Testing

12.2 TESTING DISPLAY HIERARCHY

  







!""

#""!$ 23
256578
%"!"&

9: ;<=:

'&()"$
>78? @83:
7:
4$
A3 BC:

*+,+- . *+,+- / *+,+- 0 *+,+- 1

Figure 288: Testing Display Hierarchy

Path:Setpoints > Testing

● General
● Simulation
● Test LEDs
● Contact Inputs
● Output Relays
The relay can simulate current and voltage inputs when the Simulation feature is enabled. Other test operations are
also possible such as LED lamp test of each color, contact input states and testing of output relays.

732 1601-0450
 Chapter 12 - Testing

12.3 SIMULATION
Path:Setpoints > Testing > Simulation
● Setup
● Pre-Fault
● Fault
● Post-Fault
The Simulation feature is provided for testing the functionality of the relay in response to programmed conditions,
without the need of external AC voltage and current inputs. First time users will find this to be a valuable training
tool. System parameters such as currents, voltages and phase angles are entered as setpoints. When placed in
simulation mode, the relay suspends reading actual AC inputs, generates samples to represent the programmed
phasors, and loads these samples into the memory to be processed by the relay. Normal (pre-fault), fault and post-
fault conditions can be simulated to exercise a variety of relay features. There are three sets of input parameters
used during simulation, each provides a particular state of the system as follows.

Note:
Simulation mode current input should be set at more than three times the CT rating. All Simulation setpoints revert to default
values at power-up.

Note:
Testing of Arc Flash functionality is not possible with the Simulation feature.

12.3.1 SIMULATION SETUP

Path:Setpoints > Testing > Simulation > Setup
● Simulation State
● Pre-Fault to Fault Trigger
● Post-Fault to Pre-Fault Trigger
● Force Relays
● Force LEDs

SIMULATION STATE
Range: Disabled, Prefault State, Fault State, Postfault State
Default: Disabled
Disable this setpoint if actual system inputs are to be monitored. If set to any other value, the relay is in test
mode and actual system parameters are not monitored, including Current, Voltage, and Contact Inputs. The
system parameters simulated by the relay will be those in the section below that correspond to the set value of
this setpoint. For example, if set to Fault, the system parameters will be set to those defined by the FAULT
setpoint values.

PRE-FAULT TO FAULT TRIGGER

Range: Off, On, Any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off

1601-0450 733
Chapter 12 - Testing

POST-FAULT TO PRE-FAULT TRIGGER

Range: Off, On, Any FlexLogic Operand
Default: Off

FORCE RELAYS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
When in test mode, and FORCE RELAYS is enabled, relay states can be forced from the Setpoints > Testing >
Output Relays menu, which overrides the normal operation of the output contacts. When in test mode, and
FORCE RELAYS is disabled, the relay states maintain their normal operation. Forcing of output relay states is
not performed when the Simulation State is disabled.

FORCE LEDS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
When in test mode, and FORCE LEDS is enabled, LED states and colors can be forced from the Setpoints >
Testing > Test LEDs menu, this will override the normal operation of the LEDs. When in test mode, and FORCE
LEDS is disabled, the LED states and colors will maintain their normal operation. Forcing of LEDs is not
performed when the SIMULATION STATE is disabled.

12.3.2 SIMULATION PRE-FAULT

This state is intended to simulate the normal operating condition of a system by replacing the normal input
parameters with programmed pre-fault values. For proper simulation, values entered here must be below the
minimum trip setting of any protection feature.
Voltage magnitudes and angles are entered as Wye values only. The voltage setpoints are not available if the
corresponding VT Bank PHASE VT CONNECTION setpoint is Delta. Voltages are set in secondary VT units.
The CT and VT Bank availability is dependent on the installed Order Code options.
Path:Setpoints > Testing > Simulation > Pre-Fault

J2 Prefault Van(Vbn,Vcn,Vx) Voltage:

Range: 0.00 to 300.00 V in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.00 V

J2 Prefault Van(Vbn,Vcn,Vaux) Angle:

Range: -359.9° to 0.0° in steps of 0.1
Default: 0.0°

J1(K1,K2) Prefault Phase la(lb,lc):

Range: 0.000 to 46.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 0.000 x CT
Phase current magnitudes are entered as a multiple of the corresponding CT Bank PHASE CT PRIMARY
setpoint.

734 1601-0450
 Chapter 12 - Testing

J1(K1,K2) Prefault Phase lg:

Range: For Ground CT: 0.000 to 46.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 0.000 x CT
The ground current magnitude setpoint range is dependent on the ground CT type as defined in the Order Code
options. For Ground CT, the magnitude is entered as a multiple of the corresponding CT Bank GROUND CT
PRIMARY setpoint.

J1(K1,K2) Prefault la(lb,lc,lg) Angle:

Range: -359.9° to 0.0° in steps of 0.1
Default: 0.0°

12.3.3 SIMULATION FAULT

The Fault state is intended to simulate the faulted operating condition of a system by replacing the normal input
parameters with programmed fault values.
Voltage magnitudes and angles are entered as Wye values only. The voltage setpoints are not available if the
corresponding VT Bank PHASE VT CONNECTION setpoint is Delta. Voltages are set in secondary VT units.
The CT and VT Bank availability is dependent on the installed Order Code options.
Path:Setpoints > Testing > Simulation > Fault

J2 Fault Van(Vbn,Vcn,Vx) Voltage:

Range: 0.00 to 300.00 V in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.00 V

J2 Fault Van(Vbn,Vcn,Vaux) Angle:

Range: -359.9° to 0.0° in steps of 0.1
Default: 0.0°

J1(K1,K2) Fault Phase la(lb,lc):

Range: 0.000 to 46.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 0.000 x CT

J1(K1,K2) Fault Phase lg:

Range: For Ground CT: 0.000 to 46.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 0.000 x CT

J1(K1,K2) Fault la(lb,lc,lg) Angle:

Range: -359.9° to 0.0° in steps of 0.1
Default: 0.0°

1601-0450 735
Chapter 12 - Testing

12.3.4 SIMULATION POST-FAULT

The Post-fault state is intended to simulate a system that has tripped by replacing the normal input parameters with
programmed post-fault values.
Voltage magnitudes and angles are entered as Wye values only. The voltage setpoints are not available if the
corresponding VT Bank PHASE VT CONNECTION setpoint is Delta. Voltages are set in secondary VT units.
The CT and VT Bank availability is dependent on the installed Order Code options.
Path:Setpoints > Testing > Simulation > Post-Fault

J2 Postfault Van(Vbn,Vcn,Vx) Voltage:

Range: 0.00 to 300.00 V in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.00 V

J2 Postfault Van(Vbn,Vcn,Vaux) Angle:

Range: -359.9° to 0.0° in steps of 0.1
Default: 0.0°

J1(K1,K2) Postfault Phase la(lb,lc):

Range: 0.000 to 46.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 0.000 x CT

J1(K1,K2) Postfault Phase lg:

Range: For Ground CT: 0.000 to 46.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT For Sensitive Ground CT: 0.000 to 4.600 x
CT in steps of 0.001 x CT For CBCT: 0.000 to 15.000 A in steps of 0.001
Default: 0.000 x CT

J1(K1,K2) Postfault la(lb,lc,lg) Angle:

Range: -359.9° to 0.0° in steps of 0.1
Default: 0.0°

736 1601-0450
 Chapter 12 - Testing

12.4 TEST LEDS

The Test LEDs setting is used to program the state and color of each LED when in test mode and FORCE LEDS is
enabled.

Note:
Test LEDs setpoints here will revert to default values at power-up.

Path:Setpoints > Testing > Test LEDs

LED 1 (17)
Range: Off, Red, Green, Orange
Default: Off

LED 1 (24)
Range for 1(14): Off, Red, Green, Orange
Range for 15(24): Off, Orange
Default: Off

1601-0450 737
Chapter 12 - Testing

12.5 CONTACT INPUTS

This section is used to program the state of each contact input when enabled in test mode. The number of Contact
Inputs available is dependent on the installed Order Code options.

Note:
Contact Inputs setpoints here will revert to default values at power-up.

Path:Setpoints > Testing > Contact Inputs

CI 1(X):
Range: Off, On
Default: Off
The item name displays the user configurable name for the contact input.

738 1601-0450
 Chapter 12 - Testing

12.6 OUTPUT RELAYS

This section is used to program the state of each output relay when FORCE RELAYS is enabled.
Select Off to force the output relay to the de-energized state, or select On to force the output relay to the
energized state.
The number of Output Relays available is dependent on the installed Order Code options.

Note:
Output Relays setpoints here will revert to default values at power-up.

Path:Setpoints > Testing > Output Relays

OUTPUT RELAY 1(X)

Range: Off, On
Default: Off

1601-0450 739
Chapter 12 - Testing

740 1601-0450
CHAPTER 13

STATUS
Chapter 13 - Status

742 1601-0450
 Chapter 13 - Status

13.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter contains the following sections:

Chapter Overview 743
Summary 744
Motor status 747
Breaker status 754
Information 755
Communications status 758
Other status settings 763

1601-0450 743
Chapter 13 - Status

13.2 SUMMARY
Configurable Single Line Diagram (SLD)
The status of each SLD screen is displayed under Status > Summary > Configurable SLDs > SLD1(X).

Figure 289: Sample SLD

Once in the SLD screen, by default no breaker/switch is highlighted or selected. Pressing the Up/Dn (or Up/Dn/Left/
Right) navigation keys highlights BKR1 and navigates through BKR1, 2, 3, etc. and then through Switch1, 2, 3, etc.
If the Up/Dn/Left/Right keys are used, the selection moves to the closest available breaker/switch from the currently
highlighted object. To select the breaker/switch, press the enter key. Upon pressing the Enter key, the tab labels
change to the programmable tab pushbutton labels and a flash message for the breaker selected appears (Flash
Message: BKR1 Selected). Pressing Escape de-selects the breaker/switch and the tab pushbutton labels.

Annunciator
The graphical annunciator panel emulates a physical annunciator panel. Indicators on the graphical panel are
backlit and have a description of the alarm condition that lights each indicator. The annunciator panel status window
shows the alarms that are active.
To reset an active alarm, first highlight the active alarm using the navigation keys, then press the reset button to
reset the highlighted alarm. If no indicator is selected, all alarms on the page are reset by pushing the reset button.

744 1601-0450
 Chapter 13 - Status

Ho e\HMI\Annuncia
or\Pae1
Sttg S
G C k
tv Fl
 Bk 
C l Fl
tv
.  . 2 . 3 . 4 >>

Figure 290: Physical and Graphical Annunciator Panels

Tab pushbuttons
Navigation
There are two ways to navigate to the Tab Pushbutton control pages:
● Relay Home Screens
● Path: Status > Summary > Tab Pushbuttons (from relay) Home Screens
By default, the Tab Pushbuttons summary page is programmed as one of the Home Screens. Press the home
button repeatedly to cycle through the programmed Home Screens.

Note:
Tab pushbuttons can only be controlled physically through the front panel of the relay. Their operation is not available from the
setup software.

Path: Status > Summary > Tab Pushbuttons

The initial view of the Tab Pushbutton controls is the Summary page, which shows the status of all 20 pushbuttons.
To operate the pushbuttons, navigate to the individual pages where the tab pushbuttons can be used to activate
them.

1601-0450 745
Chapter 13 - Status

Figure 291: Tab pushbutton summary (left) and detailed view (right)

Only the tab pushbuttons that are not set to Disabled are shown in color; labels for the tab pushbuttons are shown
for both active and disabled pushbuttons if labels have been configured. (Configure tab pushbuttons from Device >
Front Panel > Tab PBs > Tab PB1(X).)
When the actual button is pressed, the button on the screen is highlighted in blue and the PB [X] PRESS operand
becomes active. Although a disabled pushbutton can be pressed, no action is taken and its operands are not
activated. Pressing ESCAPE returns the screen to Tab Pushbutton summary page. The Short Text for each Tab
Pushbutton is used on the Summary Page.
Pressing >> shows the next set of tab pushbuttons. For example, when in the page with pushbuttons 1 to 4,
pressing >> will navigate to the screen with pushbuttons 5 to 8. Press >> to cycle through all five pushbutton
screens. To go from page 2 to page 1, press >> 4 times to cycle through and navigate to page 1 with pushbuttons 1
to 4. Alternatively, escape to the overall summary screen and navigate to any desired page of pushbuttons.

746 1601-0450
 Chapter 13 - Status

13.3 MOTOR STATUS

Path:Status > Motor

MOTOR STATUS
Range: Tripped, Stopped, Starting, Running, SM Stabilizing, SM Running, SM Resync, Overload
Default: Stopped
These messages describe the motor status at any given point in time. All motor status operands are mutually
exclusive.
SM Stabilizing, SM Running, and SM Resync are only applicable to synchronous motor (SM) applications and
require appropriate synchronous motor order code options.
For the sake of brevity, the term 'switching device' is used for Breaker and Contactor devices.
Motor Stopped and Tripped conditions are detected based on the current level and switching device status (52a or
52b). When a switching device is not configured* or a switching device is not connected then monitoring of
switching device status is no longer possible and the Stopped, Tripped, and Start MOTOR STATUS are based only
on current level monitoring.

Note:
*A switching device is not configured when setpoints Contact Input 52a and Contact Input 52b are both set to “Off” under
Setpoints > Control > Breaker > Contactor.

Note:
** A switching device is not connected when both FlexLogic operands BRK1 Connected and Contactor Connected are not
asserted under Setpoints > Control > Breaker (Contactor).

67898:
 3  45

(
  !"#$% ) P PQ 2?<<R
*
+,-. ;< SQ

 ;< & 5@ AB@C@D EC@FFGHI

'
JCKCG L@MNO
+,-. /01 2
&
'
 /01 2

  !"#$%
(
+,-. =>? )
*
&
+,-. 
'
(
 =>? )
*
 

(
)
*

  !"#$%
&
P PQ 2?<<R
'
+,-. 
U<<Q
&
 
' (
5@ AB@C@D ECKDCNTMI
)
+,-. /01 2
* JCKCG L@MNO

 /01 2

  

VWXYZ[\]^_`a

Figure 292: Motor main supply application logic

The Motor Tripped condition is detected when the Any Trip operand is asserted, the motor current (Imotor, defined
equation 13 in Thermal Model) is below 2% of CT, and the switching device is open. However, when the switching
device is not configured then the Motor Tripped condition is detected when Any Trip operand is asserted and the
current is below 2% of CT. Resetting of the Motor Tripped can be done by resetting the trip condition.

1601-0450 747
Chapter 13 - Status

The state machine initially sets the Motor Stopped operand, as the switching device is open and motor current is
less than 2% of CT. Also, to detect a Motor Stopped condition it is important to first reset any trip or the Any Trip
operand is deserted. When the switching device is not configured the Motor Stopped condition is detected based on
current only. Also, for the case when motor condition or status is solely based on the monitoring of currents, idling
condition (current becomes ideally zero) during Motor Running in synchronous motor application can result in the
Motor Stopped instead of Motor Running. To prevent this, the relay must always be programmed to monitor the
status of the switching device by means of contact input of the relay.
 )%' *+(
,%-. ''.  !  
"   
/012 341510 4678 9:;;<= #
>;;<7?65718@ <1A7?

!  
  "
#  $%
&'( $%



Figure 293: Motor Stopped and Trip state logic

The Motor Starting state is asserted if the previous motor status is Motor Stopped and a load current greater than
2% of FLA is detected, the Motor Starting operand becomes true. The Motor cannot start if the previous condition is
Motor Tripped unless Any Trip is reset.
For normal motor starting, the Motor Starting condition remains asserted until currents fall below FLA x OVERLOAD
FACTOR setting. As soon as motor current falls below FLA x the OVERLOAD FACTOR setting, the Motor Running
operand is set.
  @66AB
C66A78
.
4 9 
 : ;;5<
0;;5= :> 5?=

  


 6678

 !"#$ !%&'()*

 6678
 !"#$ !%&'()*
+
,  

  - ./0 1 2/

 3
4 5

Figure 294: Motor Starting state logic

In induction motor applications, the motor can only be in the Motor Running condition following a Motor Starting or
Motor Overload condition when neither Motor Starting nor Motor Overload are asserted.
In synchronous motor applications, the motor can either run in induction mode or in synchronous mode. The motor
runs in induction mode during the Motor Starting condition when no DC Field is applied. In some synchronous motor
applications such as light load applications, motors can also go from synchronous to induction mode when, during
the synchronizing mode, the DC Field is lost and the motor continues its operation in induction mode.
In synchronous motor applications, the Motor Running state remains asserted until a successful DC Field is applied
to synchronize the motor. Successful application of the DC field is monitored by the FlexLogic operand 'SM Field
Applied', as shown below. The motor state also becomes Motor Running when, during normal operation, the DC
field is lost and the motor continues running in induction mode. The Motor Running state indicates synchronous
motor operation in induction mode.

748 1601-0450
 Chapter 13 - Status

+,-.,/012 /3-45678
"#$#% &$'%$()* E IJ@K
F   GH
+MNO,PQRS /TNUVWXY
&" Z(@AB [\\A(@B

  

"#$#% &$'%$()* ; +,-.,/012 /3-45678
<
"#$#% 9:))()* = "#$#% 9:))()*
C
"#$#% >?@%A#'B D
&" 9:))()*
&" 9@JL)K

    !



Figure 295: Motor Running state logic

In induction motor applications, if the current rises above FLA x Overload Factor while in the Running state, the
Motor Overload operand is set. If the current then falls below FLA x Overload Factor, the Motor Overload operand is
reset and the Running operand is set.
In synchronous motor applications, during both the induction and synchronous modes, if the current rises above
FLA x Overload Factor, the motor state becomes Motor Overload.
Note that in synchronous motor applications, during the overload condition, (Imotor FLA x OL) if the Power Factor
Resync mode function (Monitoring > Functions > Power Factor) initiates a command to resynchronize the motor
and the DC field is removed, the motor state is set to SM Resync.
  
01213 =>??@?A
01213 45637189
B
D0 =>??@?A C
D0 =6EF?G
D0 D28H@7@I@?A : "#$%#&'() &*$+,-./
;
< 01213 45637189
"#$%#&'() &*$+,-./
D0 =6EF?G M?@2 NO9 :
;
<
D0 J@679 KLL7@69

    !


Figure 296: Motor Overload state logic

In 2-Speed Motor applications, when the motor is switched from speed 1 to speed 2, FLA and CT Primary switch to
Speed2 Motor FLA and Speed2 CT Primary (both set under System > Motor > Setup). In addition, during the
transition from speed 1 to speed 2 the current may drop below 2% and the Motor Stopped status may become true.
To prevent this, if the previous status is Running (or Starting or Overload), the 2-Speed Motor Protection is enabled,
and the Speed2 Motor Switch is true, then the motor status (Motor Running, Starting or Overload) is maintained for
1 second. After 1 second, if the motor current detected is less than the FLA x OL setting, the Motor Running
operand is maintained; otherwise either the Overload or Stopped condition is declared.
During a transition from speed 2 to speed 1, if the previous status is Running (Starting or Overload), the 2-Speed
Motor Protection is enabled, and the Speed2 Motor Switch is true, then the motor status (Motor Running, Starting or
Overload) is maintained for Speed2 Switch 2-1 Delay + 1 second.

Note:
In synchronous motors, an idling condition results in the current ideally equal to zero. During the motor running condition, this
can result in a Motor Stopped condition instead of an SM Running condition. To prevent this, it is strongly recommended that
the relay is always programmed to monitor the status of the switching device using a relay contact input.

1601-0450 749
Chapter 13 - Status

Description of Synchronous Motor Specific State Operands

SM Stabilizing: After successful application of the motor DC field excitation (as described under the SM Field
Applied Successfully setpoint below), the motor state machine asserts the SM Stabilizing state. The SM Stabilizing
state remains high until the Load Application Delay timer expires. For more details on the Load Application Delay,
see the SM Start Sequence Control function. The SM Stabilizing state indicates the successful application of motor
DC-field excitation, but without a load applied.
SM Running: As soon as the Load Application Delay timer expires, the SM Running state is asserted, indicating the
successful synchronization of the synchronous motor with a load applied. If the Load Application Delay is set to
zero, the SM Running state becomes high as soon as the motor DC-field excitation is applied. To set both the SM
Stabilizing and SM Running states to high, the motor currents (stator currents) must be below the overload level
(FLA x OL). Otherwise, Motor Overload is asserted by the state machine.
  
  >
? /01203456 37189:;<
 @ABCDE !
"
# = =DFCG

  

 
>
 @ABCDE ?
= =DFCG
= BHIJ /01203456 37189:;<
= 
/aKb0NcOd 3MKefPgh !
"
= [BCE RSSCBE #

$%&'&( ) *+, - .+


<KLMNOPL >
?
QDE RSSCJD TBCDI !
"
UVWXY #
Z
[\]
^C_= =D =B`BJB

Figure 297: Motor SM Stabilizing and SM Running state logic

SM Resync: The SM Resync state is set high when the synchronous motor goes into resynchronization mode i.e.
the motor DC-field excitation is removed by the relay Power Factor protection (in Resync Mode) while the motor
remains running without a field applied (induction mode operation). This state requires that the Power Factor
element be enabled and the PF Mode set to Resync.

  

  4
5
6768 9:08;6<=

"#$%#&'() &*$+,-./
">?@#ABCD &E?FGHIJ 
 0123
 N0;= STT;0= !

">?@#ABCD &E?FGHIJ

 0123 K7 LM=

N86MO


6768PN3761P
Q6R08 N<3768

Figure 298: Motor SM Resync state logic

THERMAL CAPACITY USED

Range: 0 to 100%
Default: 0%
The Thermal Capacity Used value is continuously calculated and displayed when the thermal model element is
enabled. When RTD Bias is enabled, this value shows the biased thermal capacity used.

750 1601-0450
 Chapter 13 - Status

ESTIMATED TRIP TIME ON OL

Range: 0 to 65000 s in steps of 1
Default: 0 s
The Estimated Time to Trip on OL is displayed when the motor is Starting, Running or in Overload condition.
This value represents the estimated time to trip (in seconds) from the thermal model assuming that the motor
current remains at its current level. It is obtained from the thermal model curve and takes into account that some
percent of the thermal capacity has already been used. When RTD Bias is enabled, Estimated Trip Time on OL
will take into account biased thermal capacity used.

SMFIELD APPLIED SUCCESSFULLY

Range: No, Yes
Default: No
Successful application of a DC Field to the synchronous motor is detected based on the field current level (IFLD
≥ 0.02 x MFA, where MFA equals 'Max FLD Amps Primary' set in System > Current Sensing > SM FLD Amps)
and the field switching device status (41a or 41b).
When a switching device is not configured* monitoring of the switching device status is not possible. In this case
the SM Stabilizing, SM Running and SM Resync states are based on the monitoring of field current level only.

'()*(+,-. +/)01234

   !"#$%&

8
9

  5  !"#$%&
^_`_abc^add`ef c gh_he

@B C%6& DEE6C%& @#[[%77\#66]

'()*(+,-. +/)01234
:
;
  67%& <
8 '()*(+,-. +/)01234
  5 67%& 8
9
9
  = >? @5A5% @B C%6& DEE6C%&
:
  5 = >? @5A5% ;
<

    

 F GH IJ KLM NOPKGOQ

MRS TUVRO WQMSRKXYTOORUS
WRUMPUZXW IJ KLM



Figure 299: Successful application of DC field

Note:
*A switching device is not configured when setpoints Contact Input 52a and Contact Input 52b are both set to Off under
Setpoints > Control > Breaker > Contactor.

Note:
We strongly recommend configuring a switching device (breaker or contactor) to monitor DC Field application in order to
prevent the relay from detecting false application of DC Field due to false field DC current detection

1601-0450 751
Chapter 13 - Status

Note:
The Start Inhibit lockout times (four values: Thermal Lockout, Max Start Rate, Time Btwn Starts, and Restart Delay) are
constantly displayed regardless of the motor status. The times continuously decrease and when any value reaches zero, the
respective lockout is removed.

Thermal Lockout Time

Range: 0 to 65000 s

Sig Shot Restart LO Time: 0 min

Range: 0 to 60 min

SM Field Applied Successfully

Range: Yes, No

Max Start Rate LO Time

Range: 0 to 65000 s

Max C/H Start Rate LO Time

Range: 0 to 65000 s

Time Btwn Starts LO Time

Range: 0 to 65000 s

Restart Delay LO Time

Range: 0 to 65000 s

Total Motor Lockout Time

Range: 0 to 65000 s
The Total Motor Lockout Time displays the highest value of all calculated Start Inhibit lockout times: Thermal,
Maximum Starting Rate, Time Between Starts and Restart Delay.

Autorestart Total Attempts

Range: 0 to 65000 s

Autorestart Total Delay

Range: 0 to 65000 s

Autorestart in Progress
Range: Yes, No

UVR Power Loss Time

Range: 0 to 65000 s

752 1601-0450
 Chapter 13 - Status

Motor Speed
Range: Low Speed, High Speed
Default: Low Speed
The motor is running at high speed when 2-Speed motor protection is employed and the Speed2 Motor Switch is
closed. Otherwise, the motor speed will be determined as Low Speed.

Motor Running Hours

Range: 0 to 100000 hrs
Motor Running Hours shows the total motor running time.

Backspin Detection State

Range: N/A, Motor Slowing Down, No Backspin, Motor Accelerating, Backspinning, Prediction, Soon to Restart,
Allow Restart, BSD Restart Inhibit

1601-0450 753
Chapter 13 - Status

13.4 BREAKER STATUS

The status of the breaker/breakers is displayed individually. If the selected trip output relay is Form A-type, the
status of the breaker Trip and Close circuitry is also displayed here. The screen also includes the total accumulated
arcing current information for the breaker.
Path:Status > Breaker > Breaker X Status

STATE
Range: Not Configured, Opened, Closed, Disconnected, State Unknown
The Unknown state is displayed upon discrepancy of the 52a and 52b contacts for more than 30 milliseconds.

BKR TROLLEY STATE

Range: Not Configured, Opened, Closed, State Unknown

TRIP COIL
Range: Not Set, Fail, OK
The Trip Coil state is displayed when Form -A output relays are used, and Trip Coil monitoring is enabled.

CLOSE COIL
Range: Not Set, Fail, OK
The Close coil state is displayed when Form -A output relays are used, and Close Coil monitoring is enabled.

TOTAL ARCING CURRENT

Range: 0.00 to 42949672.95 kA2-cyc in steps of 0.01
The measure of arcing current from all three phases during breaker trips. Refer to the Breaker Arcing Current
element description (under Setpoints > Monitoring > Breaker) for more details.

FIELD BREAKER STATUS

Path: Status > Field Breaker Status

STATE
Range: Not Configured, Opened, Closed, State Unknown

FIELD CONTACTOR STATUS

Path: Status > Contactor > Contactor X Status

STATE
Range: Not Configured, Opened, Closed, Disconnected, State Unknown
The Unknown state is displayed upon discrepancy of the 52a and 52b contacts for more than 30 milliseconds.

754 1601-0450
 Chapter 13 - Status

13.5 INFORMATION
Path: Status > Information > Relay Info
The Information pages display fixed device information. the pages are divided into three sections: Main CPU,
Comms CPU, and Hardware Versions.

Main CPU
The Information related to the Main CPU is displayed here.
Path: Status > Information > Relay Info > Main CPU
● Order Code: The installed Order Code
● Product Serial #: The relay serial number
● Hardware Revision: The hardware revision of the relay
● Firmware Version: The firmware version of the Main CPU
● Firmware Date: The Main CPU firmware build date in the format mm/dd/yyyy
● Firmware Time: The Main CPU firmware build time
● Boot 1/2 Version: The boot 1/2 code version of the Main CPU
● Boot 1/2 Date: The Main CPU boot 1/2 code build date in the format mm/dd/yyyy
● Boot 1/2 Time: The Main CPU boot 1/2 code build time
● MAC Address 1: The MAC address for copper Ethernet port 1
● Remote CANBUS RMIO: The commissioned value of the CANBUS IO is displayed here. If the relay has
never been commissioned then the value is None, i.e. default = None and Range = 6 alphanumeric
characters.
● NUM of RMIO RTDs: The number of remote RTDs detected

Comms CPU
The Information related to the Comms CPU is displayed here.
Path: Status > Information > Relay Info > Comms CPU
● Comms CPU FW Version: The firmware version of the Comms CPU
● Comms CPU Firmware Date:The Comms CPU firmware build date in the format mm/dd/yyyy
● Comms CPU Firmware Time: The Comms CPU firmware build time
● Boot Version: The boot code version of the Comms CPU
● Boot Date: The Comms CPU boot code build date in the format mm/dd/yyyy
● Boot Time: The Comms CPU boot code build time
● MAC Address 1: The MAC address for Ethernet port 4
● MAC Address 2: The MAC address for Ethernet port 5

Hardware versions
Path: Status > Information > Relay Info > Hardware Versions
The Information related to the relay hardware is displayed here.

1601-0450 755
Chapter 13 - Status

Figure 300: Information for Hordware Versions

● FPGA Firmware Version: The firmware version of the FPGA

● IO F CPLD: The version of the CPLD in IO slot F
● IO G CPLD: The version of the CPLD in IO slot G
● AN J CPLD: The version of the CPLD in analog slot J
● AN K CPLD: The version of the CPLD in analog slot K
● Display CPLD: The version of the CPLD of the display

Environment
The Information related to Environmental is displayed here.

Note:
The Temperature Display setpoint can be changed from Celsius to Fahrenheit under Setpoints > Device > Installation.

Path: Status > Information > Environment

● Instantaneous Temperature: The most recent temperature measurement taken by the EAM.
● Firmware Version: The software version of the EAM module found in the relay.
● Last Poll Date/ Time: The date and time on which the last measurements were recorded in the format
MM/DD/YY and HH/MM/SS.
● Average Humidity: The average of all the humidity measurements taken over time (last 1 hr) by the EAM.
● Maximum Humidity: The maximum humidity measurement taken by the EAM since it began recording data.
● Minimum Humidity: The minimum humidity measurement taken by the EAM since it began recording data.
● Average Ambient Temp: The average of all the instantaneous temperature measurements taken over time
(last 1 hr) by the EAM.
● Maximum Ambient Temp: The maximum temperature taken by the EAM since it began recording data.
● Minimum Ambient Temp: The minimum temperature taken by the EAM since it began recording data.
● Humidity (e.g. <30%): The accumulated amount of time (hrs) that the humidity measured by the EAM stayed
in the range specified.

756 1601-0450
 Chapter 13 - Status

● Temp (e.g. <=-20°C): The accumulated amount of time (hrs) that the temperature measured by the EAM
stayed in the range specified.
● Temp and Humidity (e.g. >40°C and <55%): The accumulated amount of time (hrs) that the temperature
and humidity measured by the EAM stayed in the ranges specified.
● Surge Count: The number of surge (>500 V/1.2/50 µS) events that have occurred since the EAM started
recording data.
The Information related to settings changes and settings file history is displayed here.

Settings Audit
Path: Status > Information > Settings Audit
● Last Setting Change: The date and time of the last setting change.
● File Modified:
● File Received:
● File Origin:
● File Name:

1601-0450 757
Chapter 13 - Status

13.6 COMMUNICATIONS STATUS

13.6.1 GOOSE
The relay supports 16 GOOSE transmissions and 64 GOOSE receptions each with 64 items per transmission or
reception. Non-structured GOOSE is supported. Each item within the GOOSE message can be a digital or analog
value. Messages are launched within one scan of a digital point status change or an analog exceeding its
deadband.
The server supports a subset of the server features described in part 7.2 of the IEC61850 standard.
Goose Messaging
The details are shown in the table below:
Service Launch Support for Programmable # of Tx # of Rx Test Bit Number of items in Number of remote
Speed* time to live Support each transmission inputs per relay
or reception
Configurabl Within 2 ms Time to live programmable 16 64 Y 64 Data Items per 32
e GOOSE (1 CPU from 1000 to 60000 ms Data Set
scan)*
* Launch speed is measured by comparing the time stamp in SOE of digital remote output status change to the time
stamp of message seen on the network by a computer who’s clock is synchronized by an IRIG-B card to the same
IRIG-B source as the relay.

13.6.2 COMMUNICATIONS STATUS SETTINGS

REMOTE INPUTS
Path:Status > Communications > Remote Inputs
The present state of the 32 remote inputs are shown here. The state displayed is the remote point unless the
remote device has been established to be Offline in which case the value shown is the programmed default state for
the remote input.

GGIO1 INDICATIONS
Path:Status > Communications > GGIO1 Indications
The present state of the 32 GGIO1 Indications are shown here. There are up to 32 GGIO indications that can be
used to map any FlexLogic operand into the IED 61850 information model. Default value is “Off”.

GOOSE STATUS
Path: Status > Communications > GOOSE Status
Range: OFF, ON
Default: OFF
This setting indicates GOOSE communications are being received. A GOOSE STATUS of “ON” indicates
successful receipt of the last GOOSE packet. A GOOSE STATUS of “OFF” indicates the communications link
has failed, with the speed this setting changes determined by the Update Time setting configured under GOOSE
Transmission.

758 1601-0450
 Chapter 13 - Status

GOOSE HEADER
Path:Status > Communications > GOOSE HDR Status
Range: OFF, ON
Default: OFF
This setting validates the GOOSE packet structure. A GOOSE HEADER STATUS of “ON” indicates that the
structure of the last GOOSE packet was valid.

GOOSE ANALOG
Path:Status > Communications > GOOSE Analog AV
FLOAT 1 to 24
Range:
Default: 0.0
SINT32 1 to 8
Range:
Default: 0

IEC 61850 STATUS

Path:Status > Communications > IEC 61850 Status
COMMS NOT VALIDATED OK
Range: NO, YES
Default: NO
COMMS NOT VALIDATED DONE
Range: YES, NO
Default: YES
COMMS VALIDATED OK
Range: YES, NO
Default: YES
COMMS VALIDATED DONE
Range: YES, NO
Default: YES
MAIN NOT VALIDATED OK
Range: NO, YES
Default: NO
MAIN NOT VALIDATED DONE
Range: YES, NO
Default: YES
MAIN VALIDATED OK

1601-0450 759
Chapter 13 - Status

Range: YES, NO
Default: YES
MAIN VALIDATED DONE
Range: YES, NO
Default: YES
NOT RUNNING.ERROR CID
Range: NO, YES
Default: NO
RUNNING.DEFAULT CID
Range: NO, YES
Default: NO
RUNNING.SAVING CID TO FLASH
Range: NO, YES
Default: NO
CID HANDLING DONE
Range: YES, NO
Default: YES
NUMBER OF CONNECTED CLIENTS
Default: 0
CLIENT 1(8) IP ADDRESS
Range: 0, 0XFFFFFFFF
Default: 0

ACTIVITY STATUS
The communication state for each enabled communication type is shown by its value. The main CPU and Comms
software sets/resets the active bits for all enabled communication types. The communication state bits are not
latched.
Path:Status > Communications > Activity Status
SERIAL MODBUS
Range: NONE, ACTIVE
Default: NONE
ETHERNET MODBUS
Range: NONE, ACTIVE
Default: NONE

760 1601-0450
 Chapter 13 - Status

Note:
The MODBUS ACTIVITY TIMEOUT specifies the minimum time without Modbus communication. This timeout is used to
declare the Modbus ‘Loss of Communication’ state. The MODBUS ACTIVITY TIMEOUT must be set to a value other than 0
for the Serial Modbus and Ethernet Modbus Activity Status to work properly.

Note:
MODBUS ACTIVITY TIMEOUT is set under:Setpoints > Device > Communications > Modbus Protocol

CONNECTIONS
Path:Status > Communications > Connections
MMS TCP - Maximum
Range: 0 to 99 in steps of 1
Default: 0
MMS TCP - Remaining
Range: 0 to 99 in steps of 1
Default: 0
Modbus TCP - Maximum
Range: 0 to 99 in steps of 1
Default: 0
Modbus TCP - Remaining
Range: 0 to 99 in steps of 1
Default: 0
DNP TCP - Maximum
Range: 0 to 99 in steps of 1
Default: 0
DNP TCP - Remaining
Range: 0 to 99 in steps of 1
Default: 0
IEC - 104 - Maximum
Range: 0 to 99 in steps of 1
Default: 0
IEC - 104 - Remaining
Range: 0 to 99 in steps of 1
Default: 0
OPC - UA - Maximum
Range: 0 to 99 in steps of 1

1601-0450 761
Chapter 13 - Status

Default: 0
OPC - UA - Remaining
Range: 0 to 99 in steps of 1
Default: 0
SFTP - Maximum
Range: 0 to 99 in steps of 1
Default: 0
SFTP - Remaining
Range: 0 to 99 in steps of 1
Default: 0

762 1601-0450
 Chapter 13 - Status

13.7 OTHER STATUS SETTINGS

Switches
Path: Status > Switches

SWITCH 1(X)
Range: Not Configured, Opened, Closed, Intermittent, Discrepancy
Default: Not Configured

Last Trip Data

There is no Enabling/Disabling of this feature. It is always ON.
Path: Status > Last Trip Data
CAUSE
Range: Off, Any FlexLogic Operand
Default: No trip to Date
EVENT
Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1
Default: 0
DATE
Range: MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM
Default: 01/01/08 00:00:00
PARAMETER 1 to 64
Range: -2147483648 to 2147483647 in steps of 1
Default: 0

Arc Flash
Path: Status > Arc Flash > Arc Flash 1
The status value shows the state of the given Flex operand related to Arc Flash protection.
Light 1(4) PKP
Range: ON, OFF
HS Phase IOC PKP A/B/C
Range: ON, OFF
HS Ground IOC PKP
Range: ON, OFF
Arc Flash OP
Range: ON, OFF

1601-0450 763
Chapter 13 - Status

Contact Inputs
Path: Status > Contact Inputs
The status of the Contact Inputs is shown here (see device menu via the menu path). The Off/On display indicates
the logic state of the Contact Input.

Output Relays
Path: Status > Output Relays
The status of all output relays is shown here, see above. In the Parameter column, the value indicates the label on
the output terminal. The Value column indicates the present ON or OFF state of the output relay.

Virtual Inputs
Path: Status > Virtual Inputs 1(X)
The state of all virtual inputs is shown here, see next figure. The value for each Virtual Input is shown on the control
panel graphically as a toggle switch in either the On (|) state or the Off (O) state.

Figure 301: Status of Virtual Inputs, HMI

Figure 302: Status of Virtual Inputs, EnerVista D&I Setup software

Virtual Outputs
Path: Status > Virtual Outputs

764 1601-0450
 Chapter 13 - Status

The state of all virtual outputs is shown here, see next figure. The value for each Virtual Output is shown on the
control panel graphically as a toggle switch in either the On (|) state or the Off (O) state.

Figure 303: Status of Virtual Outputs, HMI

Figure 304: Status of Virtual Outputs, EnerVista D&I Setup software

Flex State
Path: Status > Flex States
There are 256 Flex state bits available. The status value indicates the state of the given Flex state bit.

Device Status
The general status of system components is displayed here.
Path: Status > Device Status
RUNNING, SAVING CID to FLASH
Range: YES, NO
Default: NO
CID HANDLING DONE
Range: YES, NO
Default: YES
SELF-TEST FAULT

1601-0450 765
Chapter 13 - Status

Range: YES, NO
Default: NO
MAINTENANCE
Range: YES, NO
Default: NO
IN SERVICE
Range: YES, NO
Default: YES
PICKUP STATE
Range: YES, NO
Default: YES
BREAKER X CONNECTED
Range: YES, NO
Default: YES
BREAKER X CLOSED
Range: YES, NO
Default: NO
BREAKER X TRIPPED
Range: YES, NO
Default: NO
ALARM
Range: YES, NO
Default: NO
TRIP
Range: YES, NO
Default: NO
ACTIVE GROUP
Range: SP Group 1-6 Active
Default: SP Group 1 Active

Clock Status
Path: Status > Clock
SYSTEM CLOCK
Range: MMM DD YY HH:MM:SS
RTC SYNC SOURCE
Range: None, Port 4 PTP Clock, Port 5 PTP Clock, IRIG-B, SNTP Server 1, SNTP Server 2

766 1601-0450
 Chapter 13 - Status

The RTC SYNC SOURCE actual value is the time synchronizing source the relay is using at present.

PTP Status
The present values of the PTP protocol are displayed here.
Path:Status > PTP
Grandmaster ID is the grandmaster Identity code being received from the present PTP grandmaster, if any. When
the relay is not using any PTP grandmaster, this actual value is zero. The grandmaster Identity code is specified by
PTP to be globally unique, so one can always know which clock is grandmaster in a system with multiple
grandmaster-capable clocks.
RTC Accuracy is the estimated maximum time difference at present in the Real Time Clock (RTC), considering the
quality information imbedded in the received time signal, how long the relay has had to lock to the time source, and
in the case of time signal interruptions, the length of the interruption. The value 999,999,999 indicates that the
magnitude of the estimated difference is one second or more, or that the difference cannot be estimated.
Port 4 (5) PTP State is the present state of the port’s PTP clock. The PTP clock state is:
● DISABLED: If the port’s function setting is Disabled
● NO SIGNAL: If enabled but no signal from an active master has been found and selected
● CALIBRATING: If an active master has been selected but lock is not at present established
● SYNCH’D (NO PDELAY): If the port is synchronized, but the peer delay mechanism is non-operational
● SYNCHRONIZED: If the port is synchronized

HMI Display
The HMI Display menu option opens a virtual HMI Display window within the EnerVista D&I Setup software. The
virtual HMI display provides front panel access to the relay with clickable buttons and realtime display of the front
panel, including navigation and viewing relay settings, screens, and LEDs.
Path:Status > HMI Display

Note:
The HMI Display functionality is not available with the Advanced Cybersecurity option

1601-0450 767
Chapter 13 - Status

768 1601-0450
CHAPTER 14

METERING
Chapter 14 - Metering

770 1601-0450
 Chapter 14 - Metering

14.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter provides some information about the device maintenance.
This chapter contains the following sections:
Chapter Overview 771
Metering Overview 772
Metering Summary 776
Motor functions 778
Impedance/admittance 784
Currents 786
Neutral IOC 788
Voltages 789
Frequency 792
Harmonics 794
Power functions 795
Energy 799
Demand 802
Power Demand 803
Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure 805
Arc Flash 806
Resistance Temperature Detectors 807
Analog Inputs 808
FlexElements 809

1601-0450 771
Chapter 14 - Metering

14.2 METERING OVERVIEW

All phasors calculated by 8 Series relays and used for protection, control and metering functions are rotating
phasors, that maintain the correct phase angle relationships with each other at all times.
For display and oscillography purposes, all phasor angles in a given relay are referred to an AC input channel pre-
selected as the phase A voltage. If there is no voltage input, the phase A current is used for angle reference. The
phase angle of the reference signal always display zero degrees and all other phase angles are relative to this
signal. If the preselected reference signal is not measurable at a given time, the phase angles are not referenced.
The phase angles are always presented as negative values in the lagging direction as illustrated in the following.

Figure 305: Phase Angle Measurement 8 Series Convention

The relay measures all RMS (root mean square) currents and voltages, frequency, and all auxiliary analog inputs.
Other values like neutral current, phasor symmetrical components, power factor, power (real, reactive, apparent),
are derived. A majority of these quantities are recalculated every protection pass and perform protection and
monitoring functions. Displayed metered quantities are updated approximately three (3) times a second for
readability. All phasors and symmetrical components are referenced to the A-N voltage phasor for wye-connected
VTs; to the A-B voltage phasor for delta-connected VTs; or to the phase A current phasor when no voltage signals
are present.

772 1601-0450
 Chapter 14 - Metering

Figure 306: An example of the Metering menu (not representative of all models)

Figure 307: An example of the Metering Summary submenu

All the measured values can be viewed on the front panel display or monitored by remote devices through the
communication system. An example of the HMI display showing actual currents is shown here.

1601-0450 773
Chapter 14 - Metering

Figure 308: An example of HMI display showing actual currents

The measured values can also be displayed in the PC (EnerVista D&I Setup software). An example follows.

Figure 309: Current Metering Screen

774 1601-0450
 Chapter 14 - Metering

The complete list of actual values available in the Metering menu is covered in the following sections.

1601-0450 775
Chapter 14 - Metering

14.3 METERING SUMMARY

Path: Metering > Summary
The Metering Summary menu consists of three display screens, including a graphical presentation of key phasor
quantities as shown below:

776 1601-0450
 Chapter 14 - Metering

Figure 310: Metering summary screens

1601-0450 777
Chapter 14 - Metering

14.4 MOTOR FUNCTIONS

14.4.1 PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT

Path: Metering > Motor > Percent Differential

Phase A differential (Ia Diff)

Range: 0.000 to 120000.000 A

Phase B differential (Ib Diff)

Range: 0.000 to 120000.0000 A

Phase C differential (Ic Diff)

Range: 0.000 to 120000.000 A

Phase A restraint (Ia Restr)

Range: 0.000 to 120000.000 A

Phase B restraint (Ib Restr)

Range: 0.000 to 120000.000 A

Phase C restraint (Ic Restr)

Range: 0.000 to 120000.000 A
The phasors of differential and restraint currents are displayed in primary amperes.

14.4.2 MOTOR LOAD

Path: Metering > Motor > Motor Load

MOTOR LOAD
Range: 0.00 to 40.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01 x FLA
The value represents the average of the three RMS load currents.

MOTOR CURRENT UNBALANCE

Range: 0.0 to 6553.5% in steps of 0.1%
The Current Unbalance is defined as the ratio of negative-sequence to positive-sequence current, I2 / I1 when
the motor is operating at a load (Iavg) greater than FLA. If the motor Iavg is less than FLA, unbalance is defined
as I2 / I1 × Iavg / FLA. A full explanation of the calculation of this value is presented for the Current Unbalance
element.

MOTOR VOLTAGE UNBALANCE

Range: 0.0 to 6553.5% in steps of 0.1%

778 1601-0450
 Chapter 14 - Metering

Voltage unbalance is the ratio of negative-sequence to positive-sequence voltage, V2/V1.

THERM MODEL BIASED LOAD

Range: 0.00 to 40.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01 x FLA
This value represents the unbalance bias motor load that shows the equivalent motor heating current caused by
the Unbalance Bias K factor.

FLTD MODEL LOAD

Range: 0.00 to 40.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01 x FLA
The value represents the average of the three filtered RMS load currents. The filtered RMS load currents
represent the moving average of the RMS values obtained by using the motor load averaging filter of length
equal to setpoint MOTOR LOAD FILTER INTERVAL (set under System > Motor > Setup). Motor load
averaging filter is only applicable when MOTOR LOAD FILTER INTERVAL is set non-zero. Otherwise, this value
is equal to the Motor Load.

FLTD RMS Cur A/B/C

Range: 0.000 to 120000.000 A
This value represents the filtered value of the RMS phase current A/B/C. The filtered RMS phase current
represents the moving average of the RMS values obtained by using the motor load averaging filter of length
equal to the setpoint MOTOR LOAD FILTER INTERVAL (set under System > Motor > Setup). The Motor load
averaging filter is only applicable when MOTOR LOAD FILTER INTERVAL is set non-zero. Otherwise, this value
is equal to the platform RMS phase current.

FLTD MAG Cur A/B/C

Range: 0.000 to 120000.000 A
This value represents the filtered value of the phasor magnitude (Mag) phase current A/B/C. The filtered Mag
phase current represents the moving average of the Mag values obtained by using the motor load averaging
filter of length equal to the setpoint MOTOR LOAD FILTER INTERVAL (set under System > Motor > Setup).
The Motor load averaging filter is only applicable when MOTOR LOAD FILTER INTERVAL is set non-zero.
Otherwise, this value is equal to the platform RMS phase current.

14.4.3 SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR FIELD WINDING

Path: Metering > Motor > Sync Motor Field Winding

ROTOR SLIP
Range: 0.0 to 120.0 % in steps of 0.1 %
Default: 0.0
This value specifies the rotor slip in % of the nominal frequency for the brush-type synchronous motor. This
value is calculated from the field winding AC voltage during motor Starting or when motor is in Resyn mode.

SM PF REGULATOR OUTPUT
Range: Populates based on OUTPUT RANGE selection under the path Setpoints > Control > SM PF Regulation
Default: 0.00
This value represents the PF Regulation control output.

1601-0450 779
Chapter 14 - Metering

SM PF ERROR
Range: -1.00 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.00
This value represents the difference (error) between the PF setpoint (target level) and measured value
(feedback).

SM Field Resistance
Range: 0.00 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01 ohms
Default: 0.00 ohms
This value represents the field resistance calculate from the primary side values of the field current and field
voltage.

14.4.4 SPEED
Path: Metering > Motor > Speed

SPEED
Range: 0 to 8640 RPM in steps of 1
Default: 0

14.4.5 TORQUE
Path: Actual Values\Metering\Torque

Torque
Range: 0.0 to 999999.9 Nm. Seen only if torque metering is enabled
Default: 000.0 Nm

14.4.6 BROKEN ROTOR BAR

The effective operating quantities of the Broken Rotor Bar element are displayed here.
Path: Metering > Motor > Broken Rotor Bar

780 1601-0450
 Chapter 14 - Metering

Note:
The algorithm runs only for the “Motor Running” condition and is blocked on any other motor status. The sample gathering
and processing takes approximately 11 seconds in 60 Hz and 13 seconds in 50 Hz system, after all blocks are removed and
all supervising conditions are satisfied.

14.4.7 STATOR INTER-TURN FAULT

Path: Metering > Motor > Stator Inter-Turn Fault

OPERATING QUANTITY
Range: 0.000 to 20.000 in steps of 0.001
Default: 0.400
This value represents the operating quantity of the Stator Inter-Turn Fault element.

LEARNED UNBAL Z
Range: 0.000 to 10.000 in steps of 0.001
Default: 0.200
This value represents the inherent asymmetries in the machine at the time of commissioning and without stator
inter-turn fault. This value is defined as Unbalance Base Impedance (ZUBbase) and calculated during the learning
phase of the Stator Inter-Turn Fault algorithm.

TIME OF LEARNED UNBAL Z CALC

Range: Date/Time Format (MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS)
Default: 01/01/08 00:00:00
This value represents the time when the learning phase has finished the calculation of the last averaged
Unbalance Base Impedance (ZUBbase).

1601-0450 781
Chapter 14 - Metering

MAX OPERATING QUANTITY

Range: 0.000 to 20.000 in steps of 0.001
Default: 0.500
This value represents the maximum of the operating quantity.

MAX LEARNED UNBAL Z

Range: 0.000 to 10.000 in steps of 0.001
Default: 0.200
This value represents the maximum of the learned Unbalance Base Impedance (ZUBbase).

14.4.8 BEARING, MECHANICAL AND STATOR FAULT

Path: Metering > Motor > Bearing Fault Baseline
Path: Metering > Motor > Bearing Fault Monitoring
Path: Metering > Motor > Mech Fault Baseline
Path: Metering > Motor > Mech Fault Monitoring
Path: Metering > Motor > Stator Fault Baseline
Path: Metering > Motor > Stator Fault Monitoring

AVG NORM PEAK MAG at k = 1 (2 or 3)

Normalized peak magnitude in dB at each frequency is calculated as the ratio of FFT magnitudes at specific
frequency for the rated magnitude of the same quantity (rated current^2 in this case) for each k-factor. These
normalized peak magnitude values are computed and stored continuously during baseline mode for each load bin
and k-factor. All the dB values are averaged for each load bin and k-factor and stored as Avg. Norm Peak Mag @
k=1,2,3 in a file at the end of baseline period.

AVG ENERGY AT PEAK MAG at k=1 (2 or 3)

Energy magnitude in dB is extracted as the ratio of root mean square of three frequency components (for each k-
factor) around the highest normalized peak magnitude for the rated magnitude of the same quantity (rated current^2
in this case). These energy values are computed and stored continuously during baseline mode for each load bin.
All the dB values are averaged for each load bin value and stored as Avg. Energy at Peak Mag at k=1,2,3 in a file at
the end of the baseline period.

MAX STD DEV PEAK MAG [N]

Std Dev Peak Mag represents the recurring standard deviation of peak dB magnitudes computed from data
samples collected during baseline period for a specific load bin N (1 to 12). Std Dev is computed for peak dB data
corresponding to k=1,2 and 3 (fault frequencies) for bearing, mechanical and at fault frequencies for stator.

LOAD BIN
Load bin (1 to 12) represents at which loading condition the motor (or bearing, or mechanical fault, or stator fault) is
computed from the 1 to >110% range with each bin comprising 10% load interval and 100% representing rated load.

782 1601-0450
 Chapter 14 - Metering

TIME OF BASELINE COMPUTATION

Time of baseline computation is the time extracted when the Avg. highest normalized peak magnitude (base line)
and Avg. energy at peak magnitude (base line) values are computed at the end of the base line period.

NORMALIZED PEAK MAGNITUDE at k=1 (2 or 3)

Normalized Peak Magnitude in dB represents the peak magnitude observed in FFT computation at all
corresponding fault frequencies representing fault at k = 1,2,3 for a specific load bin.

ENERGY AT PEAK MAG at k=1 (2 or 3)

Energy at Peak Magnitude in dB represents the area observed within +/- 0.5 Hz region in FFT computation at the
fault frequency corresponding to NORMALIZED PEAK MAGNITUDE at k=1 (2 or 3) for a specific load bin.

MAX CHANGE IN MAG dB at k=1 (2 or 3)

Max Change in Mag in dB represents the highest after the difference between normalized dB magnitude calculated
with respect to baseline normalized peak magnitude dB (for all k-factors) for a specific load bin.

MAX CHANGE IN ENERGY at k=1 (2 or 3)

Max Change in Energy in dB, represents the highest difference between energy magnitude calculated with respect
to baseline energy dB (for all k-factors) for a specific load bin.

ESTIMATED SPEED
The relay estimates speed based on rated input power, rated speed and power input to the motor. This field
displays estimated speed.

TIME OF FAULT COMPUTATION

This time represents the local time at which the Highest normalized peak and energy magnitudes are computed
within each ESA cycle.

14.4.9 SHORT CIRCUIT

Path:Metering > Motor > Short Circuit

Note:
These values are only seen if Setpoints > Protection > Group1 > Motor > Short Circuit > Function = NOT Disabled.

SC RMS Ia
Range: 0.000 to 120000.000 A in steps of 0.001

SC RMS Ib
Range: 0.000 to 120000.000 A in steps of 0.001

SC RMS Ic
Range: 0.000 to 120000.000 A in steps of 0.001

1601-0450 783
Chapter 14 - Metering

14.5 IMPEDANCE/ADMITTANCE

14.5.1 NEUTRAL ADMITTANCE

Path: Metering > Admittance > Neutral Admittance 1[X]

Ntrl Admit Mag

Range: 0.00 to 230,000.00 mS in steps of 0.01 mS
Default: 0.00 mS
This value represents the magnitude of the neutral admittance seen by the relay.

Ntrl Admit Angle

Range: -359.9° to 359.9° in steps of 0.1°
Default: 0.0°
This value represents the angle of the neutral admittance.

Ntrl Conductance
Range: -230,000.00 to 230,000.00 mS in steps of 0.01 mS
Default: 0.00 mS
This value represents the magnitude of the neutral admittance seen by the relay.

Ntrl Susceptance
Range: -230,000.00 to 230,000.00 mS in steps of 0.01 mS
Default: 0.00 mS
This value represents the magnitude of the neutral susceptance seen by the relay.

14.5.2 POSITIVE SEQUENCE IMPEDANCE

The positive sequence impedance is shown here. The ohm values are presented in secondary ohms. Positive
sequence impedance 1 is calculated using 3-phase J1 Currents and 3-phase J2 Voltages. Positive sequence
impedance 2 is calculated using 3-phase K1 Currents and 3-phase J2 Voltages.
Path: Metering > Impedance > Positive Impedance x

Z1 Resistance
Range: 0.00 to 6553.50 ohms in steps of 0.01

Z1 Reactance
Range: 0.00 to 6553.50 ohms in steps of 0.01

Z1 Magnitude
Range: 0.00 to 6553.50 ohms in steps of 0.01

784 1601-0450
 Chapter 14 - Metering

Z1 Angle
Range: -359.9° to 359.9° in steps of 0.1

1601-0450 785
Chapter 14 - Metering

14.6 CURRENTS

Note:
The number of Currents supported is order code dependent.

The CT bank names shown are set in the CT Bank Name setpoints under Setpoints > System > Current Sensing
> CT Bank X.

Note:
Below is a complete list of quantities. The quantities visible to you will depend on the model and order code

Path: Metering > CT Bank 1-J1 (CT Bank 2-K1) (CT Bank 3-K2) (CT Bank 4-JK)

Phase A/B/C (Ia/Ib/Ic) 0.000 A

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A

Ground (Ig)
Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A

Sensitive Ground (Isg)

Range: 0.000 to 1200.000 A

Neutral (In)
Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A

Phase A/B/C (Ia/Ib/Ic RMS)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A

Ground (Ig RMS)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A

Sensitive Ground (Isg RMS)

Range: 0.000 to 1200.000 A

Neutral (In RMS)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A

Phase A/B/C Angle (Ia/Ib/Ic Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°

Ground Angle (Ig Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°

786 1601-0450
 Chapter 14 - Metering

Sensitive Ground Angle (Isg Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°

Neutral Angle (In Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°

Average (I AVG)
Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A

Zero Sequence (I_0)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A

Positive Sequence (I_1)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A

Negative Sequence (I_2)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A

Zero Sequence (I_0 Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°

Positive Sequence Angle (I_1 Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°

Negative Sequence Angle (I_2 Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°

Ground Differential (Igd)

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A

Ground Differential Angle (Igd Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°

Load (I%) (not applicable to all models)

Range: 0.0 to 100.0%

Note:
Percent of load-to-trip is calculated from the phase with the highest current reading. This metered value is the ratio between
the highest phase current injected for the current bank, and the lowest pickup setting among all Phase Timed and
Instantaneous overcurrent elements. If all these elements are disabled, the value displayed is 0.

Note:
For example, if the lowest pickup is 0.5 xCT, and the highest injected phase current is 1 xCT, the displayed value for load-to-
trip is 200%.

1601-0450 787
Chapter 14 - Metering

14.7 NEUTRAL IOC

Path: Metering > Neutral IOC

Neutral IOC1(X) Iop

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A
Default: 0 A
This value represents the operating quantity of the Neutral IOC element. For more details, see Neutral
Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection.

788 1601-0450
 Chapter 14 - Metering

14.8 VOLTAGES

Note:
The number of Voltages supported is order code dependent.

Note:
The VT bank names shown are set in the Phase VT Bank Name setpoints under Setpoints > System > Voltage Sensing >
VT.

Note:
Below is a complete list of quantities. The quantities visible to you will depend on the model and order code

Path: Metering > VT Bank > Ph VT Bnk1-J2 (Ph VT Bnk2-K2)

Phase A (Van)
Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V

Phase B (Vbn)
Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V

Phase C (Vcn)
Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V

Phase to Phase AB (Vab)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V

Phase to Phase BC (Vbc)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V

Phase to Phase CA (Vca)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V

Neutral (Vn)
Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V

Phase A (Van RMS)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V

Phase B (Vbn RMS)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V

Phase C (Vcn RMS)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V

1601-0450 789
Chapter 14 - Metering

Phase to Phase AB (Vab RMS)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V

Phase to Phase BC (Vbc RMS)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V

Phase to Phase CA (Vca RMS)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V

Neutral (Vn RMS)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V

Phase A Angle (Van Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°

Phase B Angle (Vbn Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°

Phase C Angle (Vcn Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°

Phase to Phase AB Angle (Vab Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°

Phase to Phase BC Angle (Vbc Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°

Phase to Phase CA Angle (Vca Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°

Neutral Angle (Vn Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°

Average Phase to Phase (V AVG L-L)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V

Average Phase (V AVG L-N)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V

Zero Sequence (V0)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V

Positive Sequence (V1)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V

790 1601-0450
 Chapter 14 - Metering

Negative Sequence (V2)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V

Zero Sequence Angle (V0 Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°

Positive Sequence Angle (V1 Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°

Negative Sequence Angle (V2 Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°
Path: Metering > Aux VT Bank > Ax VT Bnk1-J2 (Ax VT Bnk2-K2)

Auxilary Voltage (Vaux)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V

Auxilary Voltage RMS (Vaux RMS)

Range: 0.00 to 600000.00 V

Auxilary Voltage Angle (Vaux Angle)

Range: 0.0 to 359.9°

1601-0450 791
Chapter 14 - Metering

14.9 FREQUENCY

Note:
Below is a complete list of quantities. The quantities visible to you will depend on the model and order code

Path: Metering > Frequency 1 - J

Frequency (Current Input J1-CT)

Range: 2.000 to 90.000 Hz

CT Frequency
Range: 20 to 100 Hz

CT Frequency Rate of Change

Range: -20.00 to 20.00 Hz/s

Frequency Rate of Change (Current Input J1-CT)

Range: -20.00 to 20.00 Hz/s

Frequency (Phase Voltage Input J2-3VT)

Range: 2.000 to 90.000 Hz

3 VT Frequency
Range: 20 to 100 Hz

3 VT Frequency Rate of Change

Range: -20.00 to 20.00 Hz/s

Frequency Rate of Change (Phase Voltage Input J2-3VT)

Range: -20.00 to 20.00 Hz/s

Frequency (Auxiliary Voltage Input J2-Vx)

Range: 2.000 to 90.000 Hz

Frequency Rate of Change (Auxiliary Voltage Input J2-Vx)

Range: -20.00 to 20.00 Hz/s

Frequency (Phase Voltage Input LEA1)

Range: 2.000 to 90.000 Hz

Frequency Rate of Change (Phase Voltage Input LEA1)

Range: -20.00 to 20.00 Hz/s

792 1601-0450
 Chapter 14 - Metering

Frequency (Phase Voltage Input LEA2)

Range: 2.000 to 90.000 Hz

Frequency Rate of Change (Phase Voltage Input LEA2)

Range: -20.00 to 20.00 Hz/s

14.9.1 HIGH-SPEED FREQUENCY

Path: Metering > Hi-speed Freq
The high speed frequency and high speed rate of change monitored in the High-Speed Underfrequency element
are displayed here only if the High Speed Frequency is Enabled under the Common Setup section.
● High Speed Frequency
● High Speed ROCOF
Range: -120.00 to 120.00 Hz/s in steps of 0.01

HIGH-SPEED FREQ MAG

Range: 40.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps 0.01 Hz
Default: 60.00 Hz

HIGH-SPEED ROCOF
Range: -120.00 to 120.00 Hz/sec in steps 0.01 Hz/sec
Default: 0.00 Hz/sec

4TH HIGH-SPEED FREQ MAG

Range: 40.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps 0.01 Hz
Default: 60.00 Hz

4TH HIGH-SPEED ROCOF

Range: -120.00 to 120.00 Hz/sec in steps 0.01 Hz/sec
Default: 0.00 Hz/sec

14.9.2 FAST UNDERFREQUENCY

Path: Metering > Fast Underfrequency

FAST FREQUENCY
Range: 20.000 to 70.000 Hz in steps of 0.01

FAST RATE OF CHANGE

Range: -120.00 to 120.00 Hz/s in steps of 0.01

1601-0450 793
Chapter 14 - Metering

14.10 HARMONICS

Note:
The number of Harmonics supported is dependent on the model and the order code.

All values relate to phase currents measured on the input cards (J1, etc.).
Path: Metering > Harmonics 1 - J1

Phase A/B/C Total Harmonic Distortion (Phase A/B/C THD)

Range: 0.0 to 100.0%

Phase A/B/C Second Harmonic (Phase A/B/C 2)

Range: 0.0 to 100.0%

Phase A/B/C Third Harmonic (Phase A/B/C 3)

Range: 0.0 to 100.0%
...

Phase A/B/C Twenty Fifth Harmonic (Phase A/B/C 25)

Range: 0.0 to 100.0%

14.10.1 HARMONIC DETECTION

The second, third, fourth, and fifth harmonics per phase are shown here. The harmonics values are presented in
percent relative to the fundamental magnitude.
It should be noted that the similar harmonic ratios and THD values are also displayed under the general metering
menus, Harmonics 1 - J1 Current, Harmonics 3 - K1 Current, or Harmonics 4 – K2 Current, where all values
are calculated every three cycles. The THD values used in the Harmonic Detection element are the same to the
general metering, so they are not shown here again. The harmonic ratios in the Harmonic Detection element are
calculated and updated every protection pass.
Path: Metering > Harmonic Detection

HD Ph A/B/C 2nd Harm

Range: 0.00 to 100.0%

HD Ph A/B/C 3rd Harm

Range: 0.00 to 100.0%

HD Ph A/B/C 4th Harm

Range: 0.00 to 100.0%

HD Ph A/B/C 5th Harm

Range: 0.00 to 100.0%

794 1601-0450
 Chapter 14 - Metering

14.11 POWER FUNCTIONS

14.11.1 POWER
The following figure illustrates the convention used for measuring power and energy in the 8 Series devices.

Note:
Power 1 is calculated using 3-phase J1 Currents & 3-phase J2 Voltages.

1601-0450 795
Chapter 14 - Metering

 




!""
    
2     

 456 9:
_* ` a*''( 05 ;< = >?@A ;< = >@I
"* ` a*''(
ab ` c OP
476 K; 9;
d%""! 08 07
;< = >@I ;< = >?@A
+,-./0.- 0.1
486 K:
3 [\]^ efhg
#!$%&'( )*'*'( WXYZ
!""
2
456 9:

_* ` a*''( BC D EFGH BC D EGJ
"* ` i'( 05 07
ab ` c 476 K; 9;
QR
d%""! ;< = >@I ;< = >?@A
08
+,-./0.- 0.1 486 LM
[\]^ WXYZ
)*'*'( efjg

#!$%&'( )*'*'(
3 [\]^
456 9:
 ;< = >?@A ;< = >@I
07 08
_* ` a*''(
"* ` i'( 476 K; 9;
ab ` c ST
05 ;< = >@I ;< = >?@A
d%""! 486
+,-./0.- 0.1 K:
2 WXYZ
!"" efkg
)*'*'(
[\]^
9:
456
 08 ;< = >?@A ;< = >@I
_* ` a*''( UV
"* ` i'( 476 LB NB
ab ` c 05
07
d%""! BC D EGJ BC D EFGH
486
+,-./0.- 0.1 K:
2 WXYZ
eflg
!"" mnopqrsptuvw
Figure 311: Flow direction of signed values for watts and VARs

Path: Metering > Power 1(X)

796 1601-0450
 Chapter 14 - Metering

Real Total (Real)

Range: - 214748364.8 kW to 214748364.7 kW

Reactive Total (Reactive)

Range: - 214748364.8 kvar to 214748364.7 kvar

Apparent Total (Apparent)

Range: 0 kVA to 214748364.7 kVA

Phase A Real (Ph A Real)

Range: - 214748364.8 kW to 214748364.7 kW

Phase B Real (Ph B Real)

Range: - 214748364.8 kW to 214748364.7 kW

Phase C Real (Ph C Real)

Range: - 214748364.8 kW to 214748364.7 kW

Phase A Reactive (Ph A Reactive)

Range: - 214748364.8 kvar to 214748364.7 kvar

Phase B Reactive (Ph B Reactive)

Range: - 214748364.8 kvar to 214748364.7 kvar

Phase C Reactive (Ph C Reactive)

Range: - 214748364.8 kvar to 214748364.7 kvar

Phase A Apparent (Ph A Apparent)

Range: 0 kVA to 214748364.7 kVA

Phase B Apparent (Ph B Apparent)

Range: 0 kVA to 214748364.7 kVA

Phase C Apparent (Ph C Apparent)

Range: 0 kVA to 214748364.7 kVA

Power Factor Total (PF)

Range: 0.01 Lag to 1.00 to 0.01 Lead

Phase A Power Factor (Ph A PF)

Range: 0.01 Lag to 1.00 to 0.01 Lead

Phase B Power Factor (Ph B PF)

Range: 0.01 Lag to 1.00 to 0.01 Lead

1601-0450 797
Chapter 14 - Metering

Phase C Power Factor (Ph C PF)

Range: 0.01 Lag to 1.00 to 0.01 Lead

14.11.2 POWER FACTOR

Path: Metering > Power Factor
The power factor value input to the power factor element(s) is displayed here. Note that the value may not be equal
to the power factor value displayed under Metering > Power 1 since the supervision conditions are applied in the
element.

POWER FACTOR 1(X)

Range: -0.99 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.00

14.11.3 DIRECTIONAL POWER

Path: Metering > Directional Power
The effective operating quantities of the sensitive directional power elements are displayed here. The display may
be useful to calibrate the feature by compensating the angular errors of the CTs and VTs with the use of the RCA
and CALIBRATION settings.

Directional Power 1
Range: -214748364.8 kW to 214748364.7 kW
Default: 0.0 kW
...

Directional Power X
Range: -214748364.8 kW to 214748364.7 kW
Default: 0.0 kW

798 1601-0450
 Chapter 14 - Metering

14.12 ENERGY

14.12.1 ENERGY (X)

Note:
Below is a complete list of quantities. The quantities visible to you will depend on the model and order code.

Path: Metering > Energy > Energy 1(X)

Reset Energy D/T

Range: MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS

Positive Watt Hours (Pos WattHours)

Range: 0.000 MWh to 4294967.295 MWh

Pos WattHours Cost

Default: 0.00 $ to 42949672.95 $

Negative Watt Hours (Neg WattHours)

Range: 0.000 MWh to 4294967.295 MWh

Neg WattHours Cost

Default: 0.00 $ to 42949672.95 $

Positive Var Hours (Pos VarHours)

Range: 0.000 Mvarh to 4294967.295 Mvarh

Negative Var Hours (Neg VarHours)

Range: 0.000 Mvarh to 4294967.295 Mvarh

14.12.2 ENERGY LOG

Path: Metering > Energy 1 > Energy Log

Pwr1 Last Event Pos WattHours

Range: 0.000 to 4294967.295 MWh in steps of 0.001 MWh
Default: 0.000 MWh
This is the logged value of Pos WattHours energy accumulated during the last event or shift interval. The shift
interval refers to the time between the last two reset commands, where the reset command refers to the rising
edge of the FlexLogic operand set under setpoint Reset Event Energy (Power Systems > Power Sensing). An
application example is the monitoring of the total energy accumulated at the end of an event or a shift interval.
An event/shift interval can be defined by the breaker status operand (open or closed).

1601-0450 799
Chapter 14 - Metering

Pwr1 Last Event Neg WattHours

Range: 0.000 to 4294967.295 MWh in steps of 0.001 MWh
Default: 0.000 MWh
This value shows the logged value of Neg WattHours energy accumulated during the last event or shift interval.

Pwr1 Last Event Pos VarHours

Range: 0.000 to 4294967.295 Mvarh in steps of 0.001 Mvarh
Default: 0.000 Mvarh
This value shows the logged value of Pos VarHours energy accumulated during the last event or shift interval.

Pwr1 Last Event Neg VarHours

Range: 0.000 to 4294967.295 Mvarh in steps of 0.001 Mvarh
Default: 0.000 Mvarh
This value shows the logged value of Neg VarHours energy accumulated during the last event or shift interval.

Pwr1 Today Pos WattHours

Range: 0.000 to 4294967.295 MWh in steps of 0.001 MWh
Default: 0.000 MWh
This value shows the current value of Pos WattHours energy accumulated since the start of the day, that is time
00:00 (midnight). At the end of the day this value resets to zero and the total accumulated energy value is
logged as Yesterday Pos WattHours.

Pwr1 Today Neg WattHours

Range: 0.000 to 4294967.295 MWh in steps of 0.001 MWh
Default: 0.000 MWh
This value shows the current value of Neg WattHours energy accumulated since the start of the day.

Pwr1 Today Pos VarHours

Range: 0.000 to 4294967.295 Mvarh in steps of 0.001 Mvarh
Default: 0.000 Mvarh
This value shows the current value of Pos VarHours energy accumulated since the start of the day.

Pwr1 Today Neg VarHours

Range: 0.000 to 4294967.295 MWh in steps of 0.001 MWh
Default: 0.000 MWh
This value shows the current value of Neg VarHours energy accumulated since the start of the day.

Pwr1 Yesterday Pos WattHours

Range: 0.000 to 4294967.295 MWh in steps of 0.001 MWh
Default: 0.000 MWh

800 1601-0450
 Chapter 14 - Metering

This value shows the current value of Pos WattHours energy accumulated during the previous day. This value is
logged at the end of the day, midnight, or 23:59 hrs.

Pwr1 Yesterday Neg WattHours

Range: 0.000 to 4294967.295 MWh in steps of 0.001 MWh
Default: 0.000 MWh
This value shows the current value of Neg WattHours energy accumulated during the previous day.

Pwr1 Yesterday Pos VarHours

Range: 0.000 to 4294967.295 Mvarh in steps of 0.001 Mvarh
Default: 0.000 Mvarh
This value shows the current value of Pos VarHours energy accumulated during the previous day.

Pwr1 Yesterday Neg VarHours

Range: 0.000 to 4294967.295 MWh in steps of 0.001 MWh
Default: 0.000 MWh
This value shows the current value of Neg VarHours energy accumulated during the previous day.

Note:
All Energy Log values can be reset to zero using the command Energy Log Data under Records > Clear Records or by the
Flexlogic operand programmed by the setpoint ENERGY LOG DATA under Device > Clear Records. The Reset Energy Log
D/T in either case is recorded and displayed.

1601-0450 801
Chapter 14 - Metering

14.13 DEMAND

14.13.1 CURRENT DEMAND

Note:
The number of Current Demand supported is Order Code dependent.

The relay measures Current Demand on each phase, and three phase Demand for real, reactive, and apparent
power. These parameters can be monitored to reduce supplier Demand penalties or for statistical metering
purposes. Demand calculations are based on the measurement type selected under Monitoring > Functions >
Demand. For each quantity, the relay displays the Demand over the most recent Demand time interval, the
maximum Demand since the last maximum Demand reset, and the time and date stamp of this maximum Demand
value. Maximum Demand quantities can be reset to zero at Records > Clear Records > Max Current Demand.

14.13.1.1 CURRENT DEMAND 1(X)

Path: Metering > Current Demand 1(X)

Cur1 Ph A/B/C Demand

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A

Cur1 Max Ph A/B/C Demand

Range: 0.000 to 12000.000 A

Cur1 D/T Ph A/B/C Demand MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS

802 1601-0450
 Chapter 14 - Metering

14.14 POWER DEMAND

For real/reactive/apparent power quantities, the relay displays the Demand values over the most recent time
interval. The time interval refers to the time since the last reset.
Power demand quantities can be reset to zero by either of the following methods:
● Records > Clear Records command - resets the corresponding demand quantities.
● Using any operand programmed under the setpoint Reset Demand (Monitoring > Functions > Demand) -
resets the max and min demand values
● using any operand programmed under Device > Clear Records - resets the max and min demand values.

Note:
If average current drops below 0.02 x CT, calculation of the minimum real/reactive/apparent demand is blocked, and metering
remains at the level measured at the time of the block.

Path: Metering > Power Demand x

RESETR DMD DATE/TIME

Range: MM/DD/YY 00:00:00

REAL DEMAND (REAL DMD)

Range: 0.0 kW to 214748364.7 kW

MAX REAL DMD

Range: 0.0 kW to 214748364.7 kW

DATE/TIME REAL DMD

Range: MM/DD/YY 00:00:00

REACTIVE DEMAND (REACTIVE DMD)

Range: 0.0 kvar to 214748364.7 kvar

MAX REACTIVE DMD

Range: 0.0 kvar to 214748364.7 kvar

D/T REACTIVE DMD

Range: MM/DD/YY 00:00:00

APPARENT DEMAND (APPARENT DMD)

Range: 0.0 kVA to 214748364.7 kVA

MAX APPARENT DMD

Range: 0.0 kVA to 214748364.7 kVA

1601-0450 803
Chapter 14 - Metering

D/T APPARENT DMD

Range: MM/DD/YY 00:00:00

804 1601-0450
 Chapter 14 - Metering

14.15 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER FUSE FAILURE

Path: Metering\VT Fuse Failure

VTFF 1(2) 3V0 3rd Harm

Range: 0.0 to 100.0%
Default: 0.0 %
This value represents the percentage of third harmonic content in 3V0. This value is calculated based on the
Phase VT Secondary

1601-0450 805
Chapter 14 - Metering

14.16 ARC FLASH

Path: Metering > Arc Flash > Arc Flash 1

HS Phase Current A/B/C

Range: 0.00 to 120000.00 A in steps of 0.01

HS Ground Current
Range: 0.00 to 120000.00 A in steps of 0.01

806 1601-0450
 Chapter 14 - Metering

14.17 RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTORS

Temperature can be displayed in Celsius or Fahrenheit. The selection is made in Setpoints > Device > Installation
> Temperature Display.
Path: Metering > RTDs

RTDx
Range: -40 to 250°C (-40 to 482°F)
Temperatures < -40°C are displayed as Shorted and temperatures > 250°C are displayed as Open RTD.
Path: Metering > RRTDs

RRTDx
Range: -40 to 250°C
Temperatures < -40°C or temperatures >250°C are displayed as Trouble RRTD
Path: Metering > RTD Maximums

Reset RTD Date/Time

Range: DD/MM/YY hh/mm/ss
Maximum RTD values can be cleared (reset) by setting the value of Setpoints > Records > Clear Records >
RTD Maximums to ON. Executing this command loads -40°C (or -40°F) as the initial Maximum RTD value.

RTD x Max
Range: -40 to 250°C (-40 to 482°F)
Temperatures < -40°C are displayed as Shorted and temperatures > 250°C are displayed as Open RTD.

RTD x Max Date/Time

Range: DD/MM/YY hh/mm/ss
Path: Metering > RRTD Maximums

Reset RRTD Date/Time

Range: DD/MM/YY hh/mm/ss
Maximum RRTD values can be cleared (reset) by setting the value of Setpoints > Records > Clear Records >
RRTD Maximums to ON. Executing this command loads -40°C (or -40°F) as the initial Maximum RRTD value.

RRTD x Max
Range: -40 to 250°C (-40 to 482°F)
Temperatures < -40°C are displayed as Shorted and temperatures > 250°C are displayed as Open RRTD.

RRTD x Max Date/Time

Range: DD/MM/YY hh/mm/ss

1601-0450 807
Chapter 14 - Metering

14.18 ANALOG INPUTS

Path: Metering > Analog Inputs

Analog Ip x
Range: -500000 to 500000 units in steps of 1

808 1601-0450
 Chapter 14 - Metering

14.19 FLEXELEMENTS
Path: Metering > FlexElements
The operating signals for the FlexElements are displayed in pu values using the definitions of the base units in the
Definitions of the Base Unit for the FLEXELEMENT table. This table can be found in Setpoints > FlexLogic >
FlexElements.

FlexElement Operating Signals:

● FlexEI 1 Op Signal
● FlexEI 2 Op Signal
● FlexEI 3 Op Signal
● FlexEI 4 Op Signal
● FlexEI 5 Op Signal
● FlexEI 6 Op Signal
● FlexEI 7 Op Signal
● FlexEI 8 Op Signal

1601-0450 809
Chapter 14 - Metering

810 1601-0450
CHAPTER 15

RECORDS
Chapter 15 - Records

812 1601-0450
 Chapter 15 - Records

15.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter contains the following sections:

Chapter Overview 813
Motor records 814
Events 821
Transient Records 825
Fault Reports 826
Data Logger 828
Breakers 829
Power Quality 831
Digital Counters 833
Remote Modbus Device 834
Clear Records 837

1601-0450 813
Chapter 15 - Records

15.2 MOTOR RECORDS

15.2.1 MOTOR START RECORDS

When a motor start status is detected, a start data record is triggered and begins to sample and record the following
parameters at a rate of 1 sample every 100 ms:
Motor Start Record Values Type Asynchronous Motor Synchronous Motor
Applications* Applications**
True RMS values of the phase A current (Ia) FlexAnalog • •
True RMS values of the phase B current (Ib) • •
True RMS values of the phase C current (Ic) • •
Average of true RMS values of the three-phase • •
currents (Iavg)
True RMS value of the ground current (Ig) • •
Current unbalance (%) • •
True RMS values of the phase A-N, B-N, and C-N •
voltages (Van, Vbn, and Vcn) if VT is Wye connected
or phase A-B, B-C and C-A voltages (Vab, Vbc, and
Vca) if VT is delta connected.)
Average of the three-phase Voltage (V Avg L-N if VT is •
Wye Connected or V Avg L-L if VT is Delta Connected)
Three-phase real power • •
Three-phase reactive power •
Three-phase power factor • •
Thermal capacity used (%) • •
Frequency • •
Rotor Slip • (brush-type only)
SM Field VAC •
SM Field VDC •
SM Field Amps •
SM SC Spd-Dep TC Used • (brush-type only)
Motor Status (Stopped, Starting, Running, SM FlexLogic • •
Stabilizing, SM Running, SM Resync, Overload, Operand
Tripped)
Start Seq. Completed •
Start Seq INC •
Load Applied •
SM Field Applied •

Note:
* Requires Order Code selection 'NN/S1/S5' for Phase Currents - Slot K Bank 1/2

814 1601-0450
 Chapter 15 - Records

Note:
** Requires Order Code selection 'C5/D5' for Phase Currents - Slot K Bank 1/2

1-second pre-trigger data and 59-second post-trigger data are recorded. The data record ignores all subsequent
triggers and continues to record data until the active record is finished.
A total of 6 records are stored in the relay. Record # 1 is the baseline record; it is written to only by the first start that
occurs after the user clears the motor start records. Records #2 to 6 are a rolling buffer of the last 5 motor starts. A
new record automatically shifts the rolling buffer and overwrites the oldest record, #2.
The record files are formatted using the COMTRADE file format. The files can be downloaded and displayed via
EnerVista D&I Setup software. All the files are stored in non-volatile memory, so that information is retained when
power to the relay is lost.
The viewing, customizing and saving the Motor Start Records is the same as the Transient Records.
Clearing start records (Records > Clear Records > Motor Start Records) clears the stored files. The date and
time are recorded when clearing. An event ‘Clear Start Rec’ is sent to the Event Record. The records can also be
cleared using the EnerVista D&I Setup software.
Path: Records > Motor Start Records

15.2.2 MOTOR START STATISTICS

Path: Records > Motor Start Statistics 1(5)

START DATE/TIME
Range: mm/dd/yy and hh:mm:ss
Default: 01/01/08 and 00:00:00

START ACCELERATION TIME

Range: 0.000 to 250.000 s in steps of 0.001
Default: 0.000 s

START EFFECTIVE CURRENT

Range: 0.00 to 20.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.00 x FLA

START PEAK CURRENT

Range: 0.00 to 20.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.00 x FLA
Up to five starts are reported. When the buffer is full the newest record overwrites the oldest one.

15.2.3 LEARNED DATA

The relay measures and records individual data records, as indicated below, all from actual motor operation. The
latest individual data record can be viewed using the Learned Data feature on the relay. The data, when input
cumulatively to the Learned Data Recorder (see below) can be used to evaluate changes/trends over time. Note
that learned values are calculated even when features requiring them are disabled.

1601-0450 815
Chapter 15 - Records

The Learned Data recorder measures and records up to 250 data record “sets,” all from actual motor operation. The
data can be used to evaluate changes/trends over time. All available stored motor learned data records can only be
retrieved using the EnerVista D&I Setup software from the menu Records > Learned Data Records.
Clearing learned data (Records > Clear Records > Learned Data) resets all these values to their minimum values
and clears the stored file. The date and time is recorded when clearing. An event Clear Learned Rec is sent to the
Event Record. The next record is be captured after N successful starts.

Note:
Each of the learned features discussed below must not be used until at least N successful motor starts and stops have
occurred, where N is defined by the setting in Setpoints > System > Motor > Number Of Starts To Learn.

The last stored Motor Learned Data records can be viewed from the following menu.
Path: Records > Learned Data

RECORDS SINCE CLEAR

This value shows the number of records since the last clearance.

LAST CLEAR DATE/TIME

Range: MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS
This value is the date and time on which the record was cleared.

LEARNED ACCELERATION TIME

Range: 0.000 to 250.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
The learned acceleration time is the longest acceleration time measured over the last N successful starts, where
N is defined by the setting in Setpoints > System > Motor > Number Of Starts To Learn. Acceleration time is
the amount of time the motor takes to reach the running state from stopped. A successful motor start is one in
which the motor reaches the running state.
If acceleration time is relatively consistent, the learned acceleration time plus suitable margin can be used to
manually fine-tune the acceleration protection setting. The learned acceleration time must not be used until
several successful motor starts have been measured.

LEARNED STARTING CURRENT

Range: 0.00 to 20.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01 x FLA
The learned starting current is the average starting current measured over the last N successful starts, where N
is defined by the setting in Setpoints > System > Motor > Number Of Starts To Learn. The effective current is
used as starting current as defined in the element of Acceleration Time. A successful motor start is one in which
the motor reaches the running state.

LEARNED START TCU

Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1%
The Learned Start Thermal Capacity is the largest Start Thermal Capacity Used value calculated by the thermal
model over the last N successful, where N is defined by the setting in Setpoints > System > Motor > Number
Of Starts To Learn. The Start Thermal Capacity Used is the amount of thermal capacity used during starting. A
successful motor start is the one in which the motor reaches the running state. If the thermal capacity used
during starting is relatively consistent, the Learned Start Thermal Capacity Used value plus suitable margin can

816 1601-0450
 Chapter 15 - Records

be used to manually fine-tune the thermal start inhibit margin. The Learned Start Thermal Capacity Used value
must not be used until at least N successful motor starts have occurred. The relayuses a sliding window of
length N successful motor starts to calculate the learned start TCU, which is the largest TCU value from the N
most recent successful starts.

LAST ACCELERATION TIME

Range: 0.000 to 250.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
The last acceleration time is measured after a successful motor start.

LAST STARTING CURRENT

Range: 0.00 to 20.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01 x FLA
The last starting current is measured after a successful motor start.

LAST START DATE/TIME

Range: MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS
This value specifies the date and time of the last start.

LAST START TCU

Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1%
The last start thermal capacity used is measured after a successful motor start.

LEARNED AVERAGE LOAD

Range: 0.00 to 20.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01 x FLA
LEARNED AVERAGE LOAD is the average motor current, expressed as a multiple of FLA over a period of time,
when the motor status is Running or SM Running (in Synchronous Motor application). The period of data window
is tAVER, specified in Setpoints > System > Motor > Load Average Calc. Period. If the run time of a start/stop
sequence is less than tAVER, the LEARNED AVERAGE LOAD averages all available samples. The calculation
is ignored during motor starting. The data will be updated every tAVER minutes once the motor status is Running
or SM Running. In the case of two-speed motors with different FLA values for the two speeds, the FLA used for
each current sample is the one in effect at the time that sample was taken.

LEARNED AVERAGE kW
Range: 0.0 to 100000.0 kW in steps of 0.1 x kw
LEARNED AVERAGE kW is the average motor real power when the motor status is Running or SM Running.
The period of data window is tAVER, specified in Setpoints > System > Motor > Load Average Calc. Period. If
the run time of a start/stop sequence is less than tAVER, the LEARNED AVERAGE kW averages all available
samples. The calculation is ignored during motor starting. The data will be updated every tAVER minutes once
the motor status is Running or SM Running.

LEARNED AVERAGE kvar

Range: 0.0 to 100000.0 kvar in steps of 0.1 x kvar
LEARNED AVERAGE kvar is the average motor reactive power when the motor status is Running or SM
Running. The mechanism is the same as the LEARNED AVERAGE kW.

1601-0450 817
Chapter 15 - Records

LEARNED AVERAGE PF
Range: -0.99 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01
LEARNED AVERAGE PF is the average motor power factor when the motor status is Running. The mechanism
is the same as the LEARNED AVERAGE kW.

AVERAGE RUN TIME (DAYS/HR/MIN)

Range: 0 to 100000 Days; 0 to 23 Hours; 0 to 59 Minutes
The Average Run Time of the last N starts at the time the record was saved. If the amount of minutes exceeds
59, the Average Run Time (Hours) is increased by one, and this value rolls over to zero and continues. If the
amount of hours exceeds 23, the Average Run Time (Days) is increased by one, and this value rolls over to zero
and continues. N is defined by the setting in Setpoints > System > Motor > Number of Starts to Learn.

SPEED – MAX
Range: 0 to 8200 RPM
The maximum speed is recorded. If the measured speed is greater than the maximum value already stored, the
maximum value is set to this latest value. The maximum value is maintained in non-volatile memory to carry over
a relay power interruption. The Speed element is configured accordingly.

ANALOG INPUT 1(4) – MIN/MAX

Range: -500000 to 500000 units
The maximum/minimum analog input values are recorded. If the analog input value is greater than the maximum
value already stored, the maximum value is set to this latest value. The maximum value is maintained in non-
volatile memory to carry over a relay power interruption. Analog Inputs elements are configured accordingly.

RTD 1(12) MAX TEMPERATURE

Range: -40 to 250°C
The maximum temperature experienced by each of the RTDs. Once a second each of the RTD temperature
values is captured. For each RTD, if the captured RTD temperature value is greater than the RTD maximum
temperature already stored, the RTD maximum temperature is set to the latest captured RTD temperature value.
The RTD maximum temperature values are maintained in non-volatile memory to carry over a relay power
interruption. RTD elements are configured accordingly.

RTD 1(13) MAX TEMPERATURE

Range: -40 to 250°C
The maximum temperature experienced by each of the RTDs. Once a second each of the RTD temperature
values is captured. For each RTD, if the captured RTD temperature value is greater than the RTD maximum
temperature already stored, the RTD maximum temperature is set to the latest captured RTD temperature value.
The RTD maximum temperature values are maintained in non-volatile memory to carry over a relay power
interruption. RTD elements are configured accordingly.

Additional Learned value for Synchronous Motor Applications

When the order code is for synchronous motor (SM) applications, the following additional parameters are learned:

LEARNED START SM SC TCU

Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1%

818 1601-0450
 Chapter 15 - Records

This value specifies the learned speed-dependent thermal capacity of the squirrel-cage (SC) rotor windings of a
brush-type synchronous motor (SM). The learned start thermal capacity is the largest start thermal capacity used
value calculated by the SM Speed-dependent Thermal Protection over the last N successful starts, where N is
defined by the setting in Setpoints > System > Motor > Number of Starts to Learn. The 845 uses a sliding
window of length N successful motor starts to calculate the learned start SM TCU, which is the largest TCU
value from the N most recent successful starts.

LAST START SM SC TCU

Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1%
The last Start SM SC Thermal Capacity used is measured after a successful motor start.

1601-0450 819
Chapter 15 - Records

Idle

Motor Starting
(status)

Capture Last Start Update and store Last Start

Date/Time Date/Time to NVRAM

Capture Starting
Thermal Capacity
11 12 1
10 2
9
8 4
3
Accel. Time
7 6 5

No
Successful
Start? 10
9
11 12 1
2
3 1s
8 4
7 6 5
Yes

Motor Running Every 1s- Capture RTD, Update Maximum RTD, RRTD
(status) or SM Field RRTD Temperature every 1s
Applied

Update and store Maximum

Capture Speed
Speed to NVRAM

Update and store Max/Min

Capture Analog Input
Analog Input to NVRAM

Update and store Last

Acceleration Time to NVRAM
Capture Acceleration Update Learned Acceleration
tAccel=max(tnAccel,...,tn-NAccel)
time Time
Update and store Last Starting
Current to NVRAM
Capture Starting Update Learned Starting
IStrt=(InStrt,...,In-NStrt)/N
effective current InSTRT Current
Update and store Last TCU to
NVRAM
Capture Thermal Update Learned TCU every N
TCLrnd=max(TCnLrnd,...,TCn-NLrnd)
Capacity used starts
Update and store Last Start SM
SC TCU to NVRAM
SM SC TCLrnd=
Capture SM SC Spd- Update Learned Start SM SC
Dep TC Used max(SM SC TC UsednLrnd,...,SM TCU every N starts
11 12 1
SC TC Usedn-NLrnd)
10 2
9
8 4
3 1min
7 6 5

Every 1min- Capture

ILoad=sum(InL,...,In-tL)/tAVER Update Average Load every tAVER
Load Current

P=sum(Pn,...,Pn-t)/tAVER
Every 1min- Capture Update Average kW, kvar, PF
Q=sum(Qn,...,Qn-t)/tAVER
kW, kvar, PF every tAVER
PF=sum(PFn,...,PFn-t)/tAVER

Motor Stopped
(status)

Capture Run Time after

IRun=(In-1Run,...,In-NRun)/N Update Average Run Time
Start

Generate a Learned
Data Record

Figure 312: Motor learned Data Functionality

820 1601-0450
 Chapter 15 - Records

15.3 EVENTS
The relay has an event recorder, which runs continuously. All event records are stored in non-volatile memory such
that information is permanently retained. The events are displayed from newest to oldest event. Each event has a
header message containing a summary of the event that occurred, and is assigned an event number equal to the
number of events that have occurred since the recorder was cleared. The event number is incremented for each
new event.
The Event Recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 1024 events listed in chronological order from
most recent to oldest. Events for a particular element are captured, if the setpoint EVENTS is selected as
“Enabled”. By default, the EVENTS setpoint from all elements is enabled.
Path: Records > Event Records
The events are cleared by pressing the pushbutton corresponding to the tab CLEAR, or when issuing clear event
records command from the general clear records menu.

15.3.1 EVENT VIEWER

The Event Viewer provides a consolidated view of up to 1024 events from a single 8 Series device or up to as many
as ten connected 8 Series devices or event files (10 x 1024 events in total).

1601-0450 821
Chapter 15 - Records

To open the Event Viewer for a connected device, follow these steps in the EnerVista D&I Setup software:
1. Establish communications with the relay.
2. Select the Setpoints > Records > Events menu item.
3. A small Events window opens displaying the following:
○ Date/Time of Last Clear
○ Events Since Last Clear
○ Date/Time of Last Retrieval
4. In addition, the Event Viewer launches for a detailed view of up to 1024 of the most recent events.

The Event Viewer window runs as a separate application, and can be moved outside of the main window and
resized as needed.
If EnerVista D&I Setup software is closed, the Event Viewer remains open but offline (no further events are received
from running devices, however event data is still available).
The Event List includes all events in descending chronological order. For multiple sources, a Source column
showing the device name or file name is shown between the Date/Time and the Event columns.

822 1601-0450
 Chapter 15 - Records

To add an additional connected 8 Series relay to the open Event Viewer, follow these steps:
1. Establish communications with the relay.
2. Select the Setpoints > Records > Events menu item.
3. The Event Viewer adds up to 1024 of the most recent events to the open window, labeled with the new
device name in the Source column.
The Event column is only shown when Show Event Numbers is selected on the Data tab.

On the left side of the Event List a checkbox column with a toggle button at the top allows selection of specific
events. Only the selected events are saved or copied by the Save to File and Copy to Clipboard options in the
File tab.
Use the following keys to navigate quickly through the Event List:
● End scrolls to the bottom of the Event List
● Home scrolls to the top of the Event List
● Page Down scrolls one page down in the Event List
● Page Up scrolls one page up in the Event List
When the Event Viewer and the EnerVista D&I Setup software are both open, new events from connected devices
are added to the Event Viewer as they occur and oscillography and fault report records are gradually retrieved from
the device, in order of oldest to newest (assuming oscillography records and fault report records are saved in a
common location).

Oscillography record events (such as Trans. Rec Trigger shown above) have a symbol in the Data column that
includes a link to launch the oscillography record in the EnerVista D&I Setup software.
Fault report events (such as Fault Rpt Trig shown above) can be opened in the same manner by clicking the fault
report symbol in the Data column.

1601-0450 823
Chapter 15 - Records

FILE TAB
Use the File tab to open event files in the Event Viewer, save events to a file, or copy events to the clipboard.
● Open File: opens a window to browse to an events file (of type .eev, .txt. or .evt) and opens it in the existing
Event Viewer window, or in a new Event Viewer window.
○ Check In New Window to open the file in a new Event Viewer window.
● Save to File: saves the selected events to a file. Hidden (filtered) events are not saved.
○ Select the events to save using the checkboxes on the left of the events list.
○ Check Include Event Data to save full details of each event instead of just a summary.
● Copy to Clipboard: copies the selected events to the clipboard. Hidden (filtered) events are not copied.
○ Select the events to copy using the checkboxes on the left of the events list.
○ Check Include Event Data to copy full details of each event instead of just a summary.

HOME TAB
Use the Home tab to select the events shown in the detailed view, measure time between events, and view the
current Event Viewer statistics.
By default, the Event Viewer opens displaying the Home tab with the last three events selected. Details of these
three events are displayed in the lower pane of the Event Viewer window.
To select up to three events from the list displayed in the Event Viewer, follow these steps:
1. From the Home tab, choose which event to set by clicking button 1, 2, or 3 above the Event Selector label.
2. Click an event from the list of displayed events.
3. The event changes color to match the selected button (blue for 1, green for 2, or red for 3) and the event
details display in the lower pane, highlighted in the same color.
The absolute times between the three selected events are displayed above the Delta Times label.
The Statistics area in the Home tab includes the following information:
● Sources: the number of event sources (devices and files) currently available.
● Events: the number of events being managed by the Event Viewer.
● Filtered: the number of events shown after any active filters are applied. (Filters are applied in the Data tab).

DATA TAB
Use the Data tab to filter the events shown in the Event Viewer.
● Show Event Numbers: toggles on and off the event number column in the list of events. The event number
can be useful for reconciling events between the Eevnt Viewer and local HMI.
● Select Event Sources: provides a drop-down list of all available event sources (devices and files). Uncheck
a device or file to hide the associated events from the main list.
● By default events from all sources are shown.
● Cause of Event Filter: provides an alphabetized list of all event names, allowing different event types to be
shown or hidden.
● By default all events are shown.

824 1601-0450
 Chapter 15 - Records

15.4 TRANSIENT RECORDS

Path: Records > Transients > Transient Records
Using the EnerVista D&I Setup software, select a record and then click the Launch Viewer button to view the
waveform.

1601-0450 825
Chapter 15 - Records

15.5 FAULT REPORTS

The latest fault reports can be displayed.
Path: Records > Fault Reports

NUMBER OF REPORTS
This value shows the number of reports since the last clear.

LAST TRIP DATE/TIME

Range: MM/DD/YY/ HH:MM:SS
This value is the date and time on which the last report was generated.

LAST CLEAR DATE/TIME

Range: MM/DD/YY/ HH:MM:SS
This value is the date and time on which the record was cleared.

TYPE OF FAULT
Range: N/A, AG, BG, CG, AB, BC, CA, ABG, BCG, CAG, ABC
Default: N/A
This record displays the type of fault.

DISTANCE TO FAULT
Range: 0.00 to 99.99 km/Mile in steps of 0.01 km/Mile
Default: 0.00 km/Mile
This record displays the distance to fault, in kilometers or miles as selected by the UNITS OF LENGTH setpoint.

FAULT REPORT X TIME

Range: MM/DD/YY/ HH:MM:SS
This value is the date and time on which the specified fault report was generated.

826 1601-0450
 Chapter 15 - Records


  
"#$ % % & 
  
"#$ +) & 
  
"#! % % & 
  
"#! +) & 
  
+ %  +? 
  
+? 
  
 "#! %(% % % & 
     
    "#! %(% +) & 
 ! +

./00123 425/36

   

   

   
+ ,  - ! @A@B
  
7089:3:;28< =;<38>1 425/36 )
'( )   
& &  C
 ) %+   
& &  + (   
& &   
& * & ! ) %+  
GHI =;<38>1 425/36
 JKLMNNOPQRST
&
&
&
&!
DE * ,

 ,F *

Figure 313: Fault Locator Logic diagram

1601-0450 827
Chapter 15 - Records

15.6 DATA LOGGER

The Data Logger record can be retrieved and seen from this window. It displays the oldest and newest timestamps,
and the total number of samples captured for all channels programmed in Setpoints > Device > Data Logger
menu.
Path: Records > Data Logger

828 1601-0450
 Chapter 15 - Records

15.7 BREAKERS

15.7.1 BREAKER ARCING CURRENT

Path: Records > Breakers Records > Breaker x

ARCING CURRENT PHASE A

Range: 00.00 TO 42949672.95 kA2-cyc in steps of 0.01

ARCING CURRENT PHASE B

Range: 00.00 TO 42949672.95 kA2-cyc in steps of 0.01

ARCING CURRENT PHASE C

Range: 00.00 TO 42949672.95 Ka2-cyc in steps of 0.01

TOTAL ARCING CURRENT

Range: 00.00 TO 42949672.95 Ka2-cyc in steps of 0.01

15.7.2 BREAKER HEALTH

The menu displays the breaker monitoring values. The latest value, average of last five values and average of
values since last reset are recorded, calculated and displayed.
When the DETECTION mode is selected, the values displayed here can be used as the reference for user settings.
The values are saved into non-volatile memory to avoid the loss of data during the power down period.
Path: Records > Breakers Records > Breaker Health

TOTAL BREAKER TRIPS

Range: 0 to 10000 in steps of 1

TRIPS SINCE LAST RESET

Range: 0 to 10000 in steps of 1

ALARM COUNTER
Range: 0 to 100 in steps of 1

LAST TRIP TIME

Range: 0 TO 4294967295 ms in steps 1

AVG. OF 5 TRIP TIME

Range: 0 TO 4294967295 ms in steps 1

AVG. OF TRIP TIME

Range: 0 TO 4294967295 ms in steps 1

1601-0450 829
Chapter 15 - Records

LAST CLOSE TIME

Range: 0 TO 4294967295 ms in steps 1

AVG. OF 5 CLOSE TIME

Range: 0 TO 4294967295 ms in steps 1

AVG. OF CLOSE TIME

Range: 0 TO 4294967295 ms in steps 1

LAST PH A/B/C ARC TIME

Range: 00.00 TO 42949672.95 Ka2-cyc in steps of 0.01

AVG. OF 5 PH A/B/C ARC TIME

Range: 0 TO 4294967295 ms in steps 1

AVG. OF PH A/B/C ARC TIME

Range: 0 TO 4294967295 ms in steps 1

LAST SPRING CHARGE TIME

Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001

AVG. OF 5 CHARGE TIME

Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001

AVG. OF CHARGE TIME

Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001

LAST PH A/B/C ARC ENERGY

Range: 00.00 TO 42949672.95 Ka2-cyc in steps of 0.01

AVG. OF 5 PH A/B/C ARCENER

Range: 00.00 TO 42949672.95 Ka2-cyc in steps of 0.01

AVG. OF PH A/B/C ARC ENERGY

Range: 00.00 TO 42949672.95 Ka2-cyc in steps of 0.01

830 1601-0450
 Chapter 15 - Records

15.8 POWER QUALITY

From the EnerVista D&I Setup software click View Records from PQ Event File to open the file pqevt.txt and
displays all saved events (maximum 30).
Path: Records > PwrQuality Events > Event X

Element Instance
Default: VD1
Range: VD1, VD2, VD3

Source Phase
Default: None
Range: None, Va, Vb, Vc

Event Type
Default: None
Range: None, Volt Sag, Volt Swell

Min Voltage [A,B,C]

Range: 0.00 to 1000000.00 V in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.00 V
For Volt Sag/Swell event Min Voltage [A,B,C] is Minimum Voltage in Phase [A,B,C] recorded during the event
duration.

Max Voltage [A,B,C]

Range: 0.00 to 1000000.00 V in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.00 V
For Volt Sag/Swell event Max Voltage [A,B,C] is Maximum Voltage in Phase [A,B,C] recorded during the event
duration.

RMS Voltage
Default: 0.00 V
Range: 0.00 to 1000000.00 V in steps of 0.01 V
For Volt Sag events, RMS Voltage is the minimum voltage recorded during the event duration, while for Volt Sag
events the RMS Voltage is the maximum voltage recorded during the event duration.

Date/Time
Default: 01/01/70 00:00:00
Range: Date/Time Format (MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS)
Date/Time is recorded at the end of the Volt Sag or Volt Swell condition.

1601-0450 831
Chapter 15 - Records

Duration
Default: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 600.000 s in steps of 0.001
Volt Swell and Volt Sag event Duration is recorded in terms of seconds, and is the total length of time from the
rising edge of the pickup to dropout.

Cml. Sag Counter [ANSI]

Range: 0 to 999999 in steps of 1
Default: 0
This is the cumulative sag count value from the last reset.

Cml. Sag Time

Range: HH:MM:SS
Default: 00:00:00
Short Description:
This is the cumulative sag time value from the last reset.

Cml. Swell Counter [ANSI]

Range: 0 to 999999 in steps of 1
Default: 0
This is the cumulative swell count value from the last reset.

Cml. Swell Time

Range: HH:MM:SS
Default: 00:00:00
This is the cumulative swell time value from the last reset.

832 1601-0450
 Chapter 15 - Records

15.9 DIGITAL COUNTERS

The present status of the sixteen Digital Counters is shown here. The status of each Counter, with the user-defined
Counter name, includes the accumulated and frozen counts (the count units label also appears). Also included, is
the date and time stamp for the frozen count. The Counter microseconds frozen value refers to the microsecond
portion of the time stamp.
Path: Records > Digital Counter 1 (16)

COUNTER X ACCUMULATED
Range: -2147483648 to 2147483647 in steps of 1

COUNTER X FROZEN
Range: -2147483648 to 2147483647 in steps of 1

DATE/TIME FROZEN
Range: Date/Time Format (MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS)
Default: 01/01/70 00:00:00

COUNTER X us FROZEN
Range: 0 to 999999 µs in steps of 1

1601-0450 833
Chapter 15 - Records

15.10 REMOTE MODBUS DEVICE

Up to 64 FlexAnalog operands and 32 FlexLogic operands are supported in the configurable Remote Modbus
Device. Profiles are configured under Device > Communications > Remote Modbus Device > Device 1, with
details provided in Chapter 5. Up to 10 format codes enumerations (by default GMD_FC1 to GMD_FC10) can be
defined separately for each Modbus Device Profile. For the default BSG3 device profile, 27 analogs and 27 digital
operands are pre-configured in the default CID settings file.
All parameters are polled consecutively. Each FlexLogic value can be read from a different Modbus address and bit
mask which is then mapped into any of the available 64 bit locations.
Path: Records > Remote Modbus Device > Device 1 > Status

DEVICE STATUS
Range: Offline, Online
Default: Offline
The DEVICE STATUS operand is asserted when the last communication attempt has failed. The operand is
deasserted following a successful communication attempt.

LAST SUCCESSFUL POLL

Range: MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
Default: 01/01/2000 00:00
This is a timestamp value for the last successful read. The LAST SUCCESSFUL POLL is updated if the update
of all pooled data is successful.
Path: Records > Remote Modbus Device > Device 1 > Digital States

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS 1-32

Range: Defined by Remote Modbus Device Profile
Default: Off
Up to 32 FlexLogic operands can be shown here.
The displayed text is the FlexLogic name defined in the Remote Modbus Device Editor Label field for each
Digital Point in the current profile. See Device > Communications > Remote Modbus Device > Device 1.
The value displayed is based on the Enumeration field defined in the Remote Modbus Device Editor for each
specific digital point.

834 1601-0450
 Chapter 15 - Records

Figure 314: Example of Digital States for the default BSG3 RMD profile

Path: Records > Remote Modbus Device > Device 1 > Analog Values

1601-0450 835
Chapter 15 - Records

RMD-FLEXANALOG 1-64
Range: -2147483648 to 2147483647 in steps of 1
Default: 0
Up to 64 FlexAnalog operands can be shown here.
The value displayed is based on the Enumeration field defined in the Remote Modbus Device Editor for each
specific digital point.
The displayed text is the FlexAnalog name defined in the Remote Modbus Device Editor ‘Label’ field for each
Analog Point in the current profile. See Device > Communications > Remote Modbus Device > Device 1.
The value displayed is based on the Data Type, Multiplier, Decimals, and Units fields defined in the Remote
Modbus Device Setpoint for each specific analog point.

Figure 315: Example for Analog Values of the default BSG3 RMD profile

836 1601-0450
 Chapter 15 - Records

15.11 CLEAR RECORDS

The Clear Records command is accessible from the front panel and from the EnerVista D&I Setup software.
Path: Device > Clear Records
Records can be cleared either by assigning “On” or a FlexLogic operand to the appropriate setting.
With the optional 10 PB Membrane Front Panel all Clear Records commands related to Demand default to PB7 ON.
This includes Clear Records for Max Current Demand, Max Real Power Demand, Max Reactive Power Demand
and Max Apparent Power Demand.

Note:
The Clear Records command is also available from Records > Clear Records, however there the allowable settings are only
ON and OFF. (FlexLogic operands cannot be used.)

1601-0450 837
Chapter 15 - Records

838 1601-0450
 CHAPTER 16

MAINTENANCE
Chapter 16 - Maintenance

840 1601-0450
 Chapter 16 - Maintenance

16.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter provides some information about the device maintenance.
This chapter contains the following sections:
Chapter Overview 841
Environmental Health Report 842
General Maintenance 844

1601-0450 841
Chapter 16 - Maintenance

16.2 ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH REPORT

Prolonged exposure to harsh environments and transient conditions that exceed those stated in the device
specifications will reduce the life of the product. The relay has a patented Environmental Awareness Module (EAM)
to record environmental data over the life of the product. The module measures temperature, humidity, surge pulses
and accumulates the events every hour in pre-determined threshold buckets over a period of 15 years. Using
EnerVista D&I Setup software, you can retrieve this data in the form of a histogram. This will help you to quickly
identify any changes in the operating condition of installed products and arrange necessary remedial action. An
example of a report is provided below.

842 1601-0450
 Chapter 16 - Maintenance

Figure 316: Environmental Report

1601-0450 843
Chapter 16 - Maintenance

16.3 GENERAL MAINTENANCE

The relay requires minimal maintenance. As a microprocessor-based relay, its characteristics do not change over
time. The expected service life is 20 years when the environment and electrical conditions are within stated
specifications.
The relay performs continual self-tests, however we recommend scheduling regular maintenance activities. This
maintenance can involve in-service, out-of-service, or unscheduled maintenance.

16.3.1 IN-SERVICE MAINTENANCE

In-service maintenance consists of the following activities:
1. Visual verification of the analog values integrity, such as voltage and current (in comparison to other devices
on the corresponding system).
2. Visual verification of active alarms, relay display messages, and LED indications.
3. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, dust, or loose wires.
4. Event recorder file download with further events analysis.

16.3.2 OUT-OF-SERVICE MAINTENANCE

Out-of-service maintenance consists of the following activities:
1. Check wiring connections for firmness.
2. Analog values (currents, voltages, RTDs, analog inputs) injection test and metering accuracy verification.
Calibrated test equipment is required.
3. Protection elements setting verification (analog values injection or visual verification of setting file entries
against relay settings schedule).
4. Contact inputs and outputs verification. This test can be conducted by direct change of state forcing or as part
of the system functional testing.
5. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, or dust.
6. Event recorder file download with further events analysis.

16.3.3 UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE (SYSTEM INTERRUPTION)

Unscheduled maintenance consists of the following activities:
● Viewing the event recorder and oscillography for correct operation of inputs, outputs, and elements.

844 1601-0450
 CHAPTER 17

SPECIFICATIONS
Chapter 17 - Specifications

846 1601-0450
 Chapter 17 - Specifications

17.1 DEVICE

17.1.1 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL

ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
Number of Elements: 1 (36 indicators)
Layout: Grid of 2x2 or 3x3
Data Storage: Non-volatile memory
Mode: Self-reset, latched, acknowledgeable
Display Text: 3 lines of 15 characters maximum
Visual Indication: Flashing: 2Hz @ 50% duty cycle

17.1.2 CUSTOM CONFIGURATIONS

CUSTOM CONFIGURATIONS
Config Mode: Simplified, Regular

1601-0450 847
Chapter 17 - Specifications

17.2 PROTECTION ELEMENTS

To obtain the total operating time, i.e. from the presence of a trip condition to initiation of a trip, add 8 ms output
relay time to the operate times listed below.

17.2.1 SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR FIELD OVERCURRENT

SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR FIELD OVERRCURRENT (37)
Operating Parameter: Field Current Input
Trip/Alarm Pickup Level: 0.05 to 1.00 x MFA in steps of 0.01 x MFA (where MFA is Max
FLD Amps Primary)
Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of pickup
Trip/Alarm Time Delay: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Pickup Accuracy: < ±1% of full scale reading
Operate Time: < 2 cycles
Note: Exciter VDC Filter increases trip/alarm times by minimum
of 2 cycles and additional cycles if programmed greater than 2
cycles (default value).
Timer Accuracy: ± 0.5% of delay setting or ± 3/4 power cycles (whichever is
greater)
No. of Elements per Setting Group: 2

17.2.2 SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR FIELD UNDERCURRENT

SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR FIELD UNDERCURRENT
Operating Parameter: Field Current Input
Trip/Alarm Pickup Level: 0.05 to 1.00 x MFA in steps of 0.01 x MFA (where MFA is Max
FLD Amps Primary)
Dropout Level: 102 to 103% of Pickup
Trip/Alarm Time Delay: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Pickup Accuracy: < ±1% of full scale reading
Operate Time: < 2 cycles
Note: Exciter VDC Filter increases trip/alarm times by minimum
of 2 cycles and additional cycles if programmed greater than 2
cycles (default value).
Timer Accuracy: ± 0.5% of delay setting or ± 3/4 power cycles (whichever is
greater)
No. of Elements per Setting Group: 2

17.2.3 SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR FIELD OVERVOLTAGE

SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR FILED OVERVOLTAGE
Operating Parameter: SM Field VDC (Field DC Voltage)
Trip/Alarm Pickup Level: 0.0 to 350.0 V in steps of 0.1 V
Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of pickup

848 1601-0450
 Chapter 17 - Specifications

SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR FILED OVERVOLTAGE

Trip/Alarm Time Delay: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Pickup Accuracy: < ±1% of full scale reading
Operate Time: < 2 cycles.
Note: Exciter VDC Filter increases trip/alarm times by minimum
of 2 cycles and additional cycles if programmed greater than 2
cycles (default value).
Timer Accuracy: ± 0.5% of delay setting or ± 3/4 power cycles (whichever is
greater)
No. of Elements per Setting Group: 2

17.2.4 SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR FIELD UNDERVOLTAGE

SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR FIELD UNDERVOLTAGE
Operating Parameter: SM Field VDC (Field DC Voltage)
Trip/Alarm Pickup Level: 0.0 to 350.0 V in steps of 0.1 V
Dropout Level: 102 to 103% of Pickup
Trip/Alarm Time Delay: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Pickup Accuracy: < ±1% of full scale reading
Operate Time: < 2 cycles.
Note: Exciter VDC Filter increases trip/alarm times by minimum
of 2 cycles and additional cycles if programmed greater than 2
cycles (default value).
Timer Accuracy: ± 0.5% of delay setting or ± 3/4 power cycles (whichever is
greater)
No. of Elements per Setting Group: 2

17.2.5 SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR SPEED-DEPENDENT THERMAL PROTECTION

SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR SPEED-DEPENDENT THERMAL PROTECTION
Time-Speed Thermal Curves: SPM 1.05, SPM 1.46, SPM 2.05, SPM 3.00, FlexCurve ST
SC Thermal Capacity Used Update Rate: 2 power cycles
Speed Accuracy: 1% of rated speed
Timer Accuracy: ±100 ms or ±2%, whichever is greater
Timer Accuracy for Voltage Dependent Overload: ±100 ms or ±4%, whichever is great

17.2.6 PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL

PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL (87S)
Methods: Internal summation and Core balance
Pickup Level: 0.05 to 1.00 x CT in steps of 0.01
Slope 1 and 2: 1 to 100% in steps of 1
Break 1: 0.50 to 2.00 x CT in steps of 0.01
Break 2: 2.00 to 30.00 x CT in steps of 0.01

1601-0450 849
Chapter 17 - Specifications

PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL (87S)

Operate Time: <16 ms at >3 × Pickup at 60 Hz
<20 ms at >3 × Pickup at 50 Hz

17.2.7 THERMAL MODEL (49)

THERMAL MODEL (49)
Thermal Overload Curves: Motor curve, FlexCurves A/B/C/D/OL, Standard Motor curve
with voltage dependent function, FlexCurves A/B/C/D/OL with
voltage dependent function, IEC curve
Motor Curve Time Multiplier: 0.00 to 25.00 in steps of 0.01
FlexCurve Time Multiplier: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
IEC Curve Time Constant 1(2): 0 to 1000 in steps of 1
Thermal Overload Pickup: Overload factor x FLA
Overload Factor (OL): 1.00 to 1.50 in steps of 0.01
Motor Full Load Current (FLA): 1 to 5000 A in steps of 1
Standard Overload Curve, Cutoff Effect: TDM x 2.2116623
t trip =
2
I motor I motor
0.02530337 x -1 + 0.05054758 x -1
FLA FLA

Standard Overload Curve, Shift Effect: TDM x 2.2116623

t trip =
2
I motor I motor
0.02530337 x -1 + 0.05054758 x -1
OL x FLA OL x FLA

Motor Rated Voltage: 1 to 50000 V in steps of 1

Thermal Model Biasing: Current Unbalance, RTDs
Thermal Model Update Rate: 1 power cycle
Stopped/Running Cool Time Constants: 1 to 1000 min. in steps of 1
Stopped/Running Cool Time Constant Decay: Exponential
Hot/Cold Safe Stall Ratio: 0.01 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01
Current Accuracy: Per phase current inputs
Current Source: True RMS
Timer Accuracy: ±100 ms or ±2%, whichever is greater
Timer Accuracy for Voltage Dependent Overload: ±100 ms or ±4%, whichever is greater

17.2.8 ACCELERATION TIME

ACCELERATION TIME
Acceleration Current: 1.00 to 10.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01
Operating Mode: Definite Time, Adaptive
Timing Accuracy: ±100 ms or ±0.5% of total time (whichever is greater),
applicable to definite time mode only

850 1601-0450
 Chapter 17 - Specifications

17.2.9 CURRENT UNBALANCE (46)

CURRENT UNBALANCE (46)
Unbalance: Unbal = (I2 / I1) x Afactor x 100%Afactor = (Iavg / FLA) if lavg <
FLAAfactor = 1 if lavg >= FLA
Trip/Alarm Pickup Level: 4.0 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1%
Trip Operating Curves: Definite Time: T=TDM sec. Inverse Time: T= (TDM/[Unbal]2)
sec
Trip Pickup Delay: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s when Trip Curve = Definite
Time
Trip Time Dial Multiplier (TDM): 0.00 to 180.00 in steps of 0.01 when Trip Curve = Inverse Curve
Trip Maximum Time: 0.00 to 1000.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Trip Minimum Time: 0.00 to 1000.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Trip Reset Time: 0.00 to 1000.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Alarm Time Delay: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Single Phasing Pickup Level: unbalance level > 40% or when Iavg >=25%FLA and current in
any phase is less than the cutoff current
Single Phasing Time Delay: 2 seconds
Pickup Accuracy: ±2%
Operate Time: <2 cycles at 1.10 x pickup (NOTE 1)
Timing Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting time or ±20 ms, whichever is greater
Element: Trip and Alarm
Single Phasing Element: Trip

17.2.10 MECHANICAL JAM

MECHANICAL JAM
Operating Condition: Phase Overcurrent
Arming Condition: Motor not starting or stopped
Pickup Level or: 1.00 to 10.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01
Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup
For 0.1 to 2.0 x CT: ±0.5% of reading;
Level Accuracyl
at > 2.0 x CT rating: ±1.5% of reading
Pickup Delay: 0.10 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01
Dropout Delay: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting time or ±20 ms, whichever is greater

17.2.11 LOSS OF EXCITATION (40)

LOSS OF EXCITATION (40)
Operating Condition: Positive-sequence impedance
Characteristic: 2 independent negative mho circles (LOE circle 1, 2)
Circle 1(2) Diameter: 0.1 to 300.0 Ω (in secondary) in steps of 0.1Ω

1601-0450 851
Chapter 17 - Specifications

LOSS OF EXCITATION (40)

Circle 1(2) Offset: 0.1 to 300.0 Ω (in secondary) in steps of 0.1Ω
Reach (Impedance) Accuracy: ±5%
Under Voltage (UV) Supervision Level: 0.00 to 1.50 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
UV Pickup Accuracy: as per phase voltage inputs
Pickup Delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ±½ cycle (whichever is greater)
Operate Time: < 3 cycles

17.2.12 OUT-OF-STEP (78)

OUT-OF-STEP (78)
Characteristic: Single blinder with offset mho supervisory
Measured Impedance: Positive-sequence
Current Supervision Pickup Level: 0.05 to 10.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Fwd/Reverse Reach (sec.): 0.10 to 500.00 Ω in steps of 0.01 Ω
Left and Right Blinders (sec.): 0.10 to 500.00 Ω in steps of 0.01 Ω
Impedance Accuracy: ±5%
Blinder RCA: 40° to 90° in steps of 1°
Angle Accuracy: ±2°
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater)

17.2.13 OVERLOAD ALARM

OVERLOAD ALARM
Operating Parameter: Average phase current (RMS)
Pickup Level: 0.50 to 3.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01 x FLA
Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup
Level Accuracy: For 0.1 to 2.0 x CT: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated,
whichever is greater.
For > 2.0 × CT rating ±1.5% of reading
Pickup Delay: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Dropout Delay: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ±½ cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate

17.2.14 PHASE REVERSAL (47)

PHASE REVERSAL (47)
Phase Reversal Condition: V2/V1=100% when phase to phase voltages are greater than
50% of VT
Configuration: ABC or ACB phase rotation
Pickup/Dropout Time Delay: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s

852 1601-0450
 Chapter 17 - Specifications

PHASE REVERSAL (47)

Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ±1% cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate

17.2.15 GROUND FAULT

GROUND FAULT (50G)
Operating Parameter: Ig RMS
1A/5A Ground CT Type: 0.01 to 10.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x
CT.
Pickup Level: 50/0.025 Ground CT Type: 0.50 to 15.00 A in steps of 0.01A
1A Sensitive Ground CT Type: 0.005 to 3.000 x CT in steps of
0.001 x CT
Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup
Alarm Pickup Delay: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Trip Pickup Start Delay: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Trip Pickup Run Delay: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
50:0.025A CT: ±5% of reading or ±0.2A (in primary) whichever
is greater.
Magnitude Accuracy: 1A/5A CT: For 0.1 to 2.0 x CT: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of
rated, whichever is greater.
For > 2.0 x CT: ±1.5% of reading
<16 ms @ 60Hz (I > 2.0 x PKP), with 0 ms time delay<20 ms @
Operate Time:
50Hz (I > 2.0 x PKP), with 0 ms time delay
±3% of delay setting at ±1 cycle (whichever is greater) from
Timing Accuracy:
pickup to operate

17.2.16 SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION

SHORT CIRCUIT
Inputs: RMS Phase Currents
Pickup Level: 1.00 to 30.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup
Pickup Delay: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Level Accuracy: For 1.0 to 2.0 x CT: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated,
whichever is greater For > 2.0 x CT: ±1.5% of reading
Operate Time: <16 ms @ 60Hz (I > 2.0 x PKP), with 0 ms time delay
<20 ms @ 50Hz (I > 2.0 x PKP), with 0 ms time delay
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ±½ cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate
Elements: Trip or Alarm

17.2.17 NEUTRAL ADMITTANCE (21YN)

NEUTRAL ADMITTANCE (21YN)
Operating Characteristic (Modes): Admittance, Conductance and Susceptance
Directionality: Non-directional, Forward and Reverse

1601-0450 853
Chapter 17 - Specifications

NEUTRAL ADMITTANCE (21YN)

Reach Admittance (secondary Siemens): 0.00 to 500.00 mS in steps of 0.01
Reach Conductance\Susceptance (secondary Siemens): -500.00 to 500.00 mS in steps of 0.01
Level Accuracy: ±1% of Pickup or ±0.01 mS, whichever is greater
Pickup Delay: 0.000 to 600.000 s in steps of 0.001
Dropout Level: 0.000 to 600.000 s in steps of 0.001
Time Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting time or ±20 ms, whichever is greater
Operate Time: Up to max 4 cycles
Minimum Current Supervision
Pickup: 0.02 to 1.00 x CT in steps of 0.01
Dropout: 103% of pickup

Minimum Voltage Supervision

Pickup: 0.01 to 1.50 x VT in steps of 0.01

Dropout: 103% of pickup

17.2.18 PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50P)

PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50P)
Operating Parameter Ia, Ib, Ic (Fundamental Phasor Magnitude or RMS)
Pickup Level: 0.010 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup
Level Accuracy: For 0.1 to 2.0 x CT: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated,
whichever is greater, for > 2.0 x CT: ±1.5% of reading.
(For Neutral IOC, Iop = 3 * (|I_0| - K * |I_1|)where K = 1/16 and |
I_0| = 1/3 * |In|))
Operate Time: <12 ms typical at 3 × Pickup at 60 Hz
<15 ms typical at 3 × Pickup at 50 Hz (Phase/Ground IOC)
Timer Accuracy ±3% of delay setting or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate

17.2.19 NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50N)

NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50N)
Operating Parameter Fundamental Phasor Magnitude
Pickup Level: 0.010 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup
Level Accuracy: For 0.1 to 2.0 x CT: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated,
whichever is greater, for > 2.0 x CT: ±1.5% of reading.
(For Neutral IOC, Iop = 3 * (|I_0| - K * |I_1|)where K = 1/16 and |
I_0| = 1/3 * |In|))
Operate Time: <16 ms typical at 3 × Pickup at 60 Hz (Neutral IOC)
<20 ms typical at 3 × Pickup at 50 Hz
Timer Accuracy ±3% of delay setting or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate

854 1601-0450
 Chapter 17 - Specifications

17.2.20 GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50G)

GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50G)
Operating Parameter Ig Fundamental Phasor Magnitude
Pickup Level: 0.010 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup
Level Accuracy (for 0.1 to 2.0 x CT): ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated, whichever is greater
Level Accuracy (for > 2.0 x CT): ±1.5% of reading.
Operate Time: <12 ms typical at 3 × Pickup at 60 Hz
Timer Accuracy from pickup to operate ±3% of delay setting or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater)

17.2.21 PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT (51P/V)

PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT (51P/V)
Current: Phasor or RMS
Pickup Level: 0.010 to 30.000 in steps of 0.001 x CT
Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup
Level Accuracy: For 0.1 to 2.0 x CT: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated,
whichever is greater.
For > 2.0 x CT: ±1.5% of reading 50:0.025A CT:
For 0.5A to 4A: ±0.1A; For > 4A: ±0.2A (889 only)
Curve Shape: Definite Time, IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, IEC Curve C, IEC
Short Inverse, Long Time Inverse, Rectifier, SI(1.3s), BPN EDF,
IEEE Mod Inverse, IEEE Very Inverse, IEEE Extr. Inverse, US
Inverse, US ST Inverse, ANSI Extr. Inverse, ANSI Very Inverse,
ANSI Norm Inverse, ANSI Mod Inverse, IAC Extr. Inverse, IAC
Very Inverse, IAC Inverse, IAC Short Inverse, I2t, I4t, Rapid
Inverse, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B, FlexCurve C, FlexCurve D
Curve Multiplier
TDM: 0.01 to 28800.00 in steps of 0.01
TMS: 0.025 – 1.200 in steps of 0.005
K (RI): 0.10 – 10.00 in steps of 0.01
Time Delay: 0.01 to 28800.00 in steps of 0.01
Reset Char: DT, Inverse
Reset Time: 0.000 to 28800.000s in steps of 0.001 s
Reset Time: Instantaneous, Timed
Curve Timing Accuracy: Currents > 1.03 to 20 x pickup: ±3% of operate time or ±½ cycle
(whichever is greater) from pickup to operate
Voltage Dependent OC (51V): VCO (Voltage Controlled Overcurrent), VRO (Voltage Restraint
Overcurrent)

17.2.22 NEUTRAL/GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (51N/G)

NEUTRAL/GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (51N/G)
Operating Parameter: In/Ig (RMS or Fundamental)
Pickup Level: 0.010 to 30.000 in steps of 0.001 x CT
Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup

1601-0450 855
Chapter 17 - Specifications

NEUTRAL/GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (51N/G)

Level Accuracy for 0.1 to 2.0 x CT ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated, whichever is greater
Level Accuracy for > 2.0 x CT: ±1.5% of reading
Curve Shape: Definite Time, IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, IEC Curve C, IEC
Short Inverse, Long Time Inverse, Rectifier, SI(1.3s), BPN EDF,
IEEE Mod Inverse, IEEE Very Inverse, IEEE Extr. Inverse, US
Inverse, US ST Inverse, ANSI Extr. Inverse, ANSI Very Inverse,
ANSI Norm Inverse, ANSI Mod Inverse, IAC Extr. Inverse, IAC
Very Inverse, IAC Inverse, IAC Short Inverse, I2t, I4t, Rapid
Inverse, IDG, EPATR B, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B, FlexCurve
C, FlexCurve D
Time Delay: 0.000 – 200.000 in steps 0.001
Curve Multiplier
TDM: 0.01 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
TMS: 0.025 – 1.200 in steps of 0.005
K (RI): 0.10 – 10.00 in steps of 0.01
IDG Is: 1.0 -4.0 in steps of 0.1
IDG Time: 1.00-2.00 in steps of 0.01
Reset Char: DT, Inverse
Reset Time: 0.000 – 100.000 in steps of 0.001 s
Curve Timing Accuracy: Currents > 1.03 to 20 x pickup: ±3% of operate time or ±½ cycle
(whichever is greater) from pickup to operate

17.2.23 PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (67P)

PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (67P)
Relay Connection: 90°(Quadrature)
Quadrature Voltage: ABC phase seq.: phase A (Vbc), phase B (Vca), phase C (Vab)
ACB phase seq.: phase A (Vcb), phase B (Vac), phase C (Vba)
Polarizing Voltage Threshold (up to FW 3.xx): 0.050 to 3.000 x VT in steps of 0.001 x VT
Polarizing Voltage Threshold (from FW 4.10): 0.015 to 3.000 x VT in steps of 0.001 x VT
Current Sensitivity Threshold: 0.05 x CT
Characteristic Angle: 0° to 359° in steps of 1°
Angle Accuracy: ±3°
Operation Time (FlexLogic™ operands): Reverse to Forward transition: < 12 ms, typically.
Forward to Reverse transition: <8 ms, typically.

17.2.24 NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (67N)

NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (67N)
Directionality: Co-existing forward and reverse
Polarizing: Voltage, Current, Dual
Polarizing Current: Ig
Operating Current: I0
Level Sensing: 3 x (|I0| – K x |I1|), Ig
Restraint, K: 0.000 to 0.500 in steps of 0.001

856 1601-0450
 Chapter 17 - Specifications

NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (67N)

Characteristic Angle: -90° to 90° in steps of 1°
Limit Angle: 40° to 90° in steps of 1°, independent for forward and reverse
Angle Accuracy: ±3° (both voltage and current (1A/5A only) polarizing signals)
Pickup Level: 0.050 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup
Operate Time (no direction transition): < 16 ms at 3 x Pickup at 60 Hz
< 20 ms at 3 x Pickup at 50 Hz
SENSITIVE GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50SG)
Operating Parameter: Isg (Fundamental Phasor Magnitude)
Pickup Level: 0.005 to 3.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
0.50 to 15.00 A in steps of 0.01 A (For 50:0.025)
Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup
Level Accuracy: For 0.1 to 2.0 x CT: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated
(whichever is greater).
For > 2.0 x CT: ±1.5% of reading > 2.0 x CT rating
For 50:0.025: ±0.1 A for 0.5 A to 4 A; ±0.2 A for > 4 A
Operate Time: < 12 ms at 3 × Pickup at 60 Hz
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater)
SENSITIVE GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (51SG)
Operating Parameter: Isg (RMS or Fundamental)
Pickup Level: 0.005 to 3.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Pickup Level for 50:0.025 (850 only) 0.50 to 15.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup
Level Accuracy: ±1.5% of setting or ±0.6% of rated (whichever is greater)
Level Accuracy for 50:0.025 (850 only) ±0.1A for 0.5A to 4A; ±0.2A for > 4A
Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup
Curve Shape: Definite Time, IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, IEC Curve C, IEC
Short Inverse, Long Time Inverse, Rectifier, SI(1.3s), BPN EDF,
IEEE Mod Inverse, IEEE Very Inverse, IEEE Extr. Inverse, US
Inverse, US ST Inverse, ANSI Extr. Inverse, ANSI Very Inverse,
ANSI Norm Inverse, ANSI Mod Inverse, IAC Extr. Inverse, IAC
Very Inverse, IAC Inverse, IAC Short Inverse, I2t, I4t, Rapid
Inverse, IDG, EPATR B, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B, FlexCurve
C, FlexCurve D
Curve Multiplier: 0.05 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01

Reset Time: Instantaneous, Timed

Curve Timing Accuracy: Currents > 1.03 to 20 x pickup: ±%3 of operate time or ±½ cycle
(whichever is greater) from pickup to operate
Delay: 0.000 – 200.000 in steps 0.001

TDM 0.01 – 600.00 in steps of 0.01

TMS: 0.025 – 1.200 in steps of 0.005

1601-0450 857
Chapter 17 - Specifications

SENSITIVE GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (51SG)

K (RI) 0.10 – 10.00 in steps of 0.01
Time Dial: 0.01 – 600.00 in steps of 0.01
IDG Is: 1.0 - 4.0 in steps of 0.1
IDG Time 1.00 - 2.00 in steps of 0.01
Reset Char: DT, Inverse
tRESET: 0.000 – 100.000 in steps of 0.001 s

17.2.25 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50_2)
Current: I_2 Fundamental Phasor Magnitude
Pickup Level: 0.0020 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup
Level Accuracy for 0.1 to 2.0 x CT: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated, whichever is greater,
Level Accuracy for > 2.0 x CT: ±1.5% of reading. (For lop = |I_2| - K * |I_1|, where K = 1/8
Pickup Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Dropout Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Overreach: < 2%
Operate Time: < 12 ms typical at 3 x Pickup at 60 Hz
< 15 ms typical at 3 x Pickup at 50 Hz
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ±½ cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate

17.2.26 UNDERCURRENT
UNDERCURRENT (37)
Operating Parameter: Per-phase current Ia, Ib, Ic (Phasor)
Trip/Alarm Pickup Level: 0.10 to 0.95 x FLA in steps of 0.01 x FLA
Dropout Level: 102 to 103% of Pickup
Trip/Alarm Time Delay: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Pickup Accuracy: For 0.1 to 2.0 x CT: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated,
whichever is greater
Operate Time: <45 ms at 60 Hz,<50 ms at 50 Hz
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ±2 power cycles (whichever is greater)
from pickup to operate
Stages: Trip and Alarm

17.2.27 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE (59P)

PHASE OVERVOLTAGE (59P)
Voltage: Fundamental Phasor Magnitude
Pickup Level: 0.02 to 3.00 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT

858 1601-0450
 Chapter 17 - Specifications

PHASE OVERVOLTAGE (59P)

Dropout Level (up to 3.xx): 97 to 98% of Pickup
Dropout Level (from 4.10): Configurable: Either 97 to 98% of pickup or 95 to 97% of pickup
Level Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
Phases Required for Operation: Any one, Any two, All three
Pickup Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001s (Definite Time)
Dropout Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001s (Definite Time)
Pickup Accuracy: Per phase voltage input channel error
Operate Time: < 30 ms at 1.1 x pickup at 60Hz
< 35 ms at 1.1 x pickup at 50Hz
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate

17.2.28 NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE (59N)

NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE (59N)
Operating Parameter: 3V_0 calculated from phase to ground voltages
Pickup Level: 0.02 to 3.00 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Dropout Level: Configurable: Either 97 to 98% of Pickup, or 95 to 98% of
Pickup.
Level Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
Neutral Overvoltage Curves: Definite time, FlexCurve A/B/C/D, Inverse time (from FW 4.10)
Pickup Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s (Definite Time)
Dropout Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s (Definite Time)
Operate Time: < 30 ms at 1.1 x pickup at 60Hz
< 35 ms at 1.1 x pickup at 50Hz
Curve Timing Accuracy: at > 1.1 x Pickup: ±3% of curve delay or ±1 cycle (whichever is
greater) from pickup to operate

17.2.29 AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE (59X)

AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE (59X)
Operating Parameter: Vx (Phasor)
Pickup Level: 0.00 to 3.00 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Dropout Level (up to 3.xx): 97 to 98% of Pickup
Dropout Level (from 4.10): Configurable: Either 97 to 98% of pickup or 95 to 97% of pickup
Level Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 240 V
Overvoltage Curves: Definite Time, Inverse Time, FlexCurves A/B/C/D
Pickup Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001s
Dropout Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001s
Pickup Accuracy: Auxiliary voltage input channel error
Operate Time: < 30 ms at 1.1 x pickup at 60Hz

1601-0450 859
Chapter 17 - Specifications

AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE (59X)

Curve Timing Accuracy: at >1.1 x PKP: 3.5% of operate time ±½ cycle (whichever is
greater) from pickup to operate
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±½ cycle (whichever is greater)

17.2.30 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE (59_2)

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE (59_2)
Operating Parameter: V_2
Pickup Level: 0.00 to 3.00 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Dropout Level (up to 3.xx): 97 to 98% of Pickup
Dropout Level (from 4.10): Configurable: Either 97 to 98% of pickup or 95 to 97% of pickup
Level Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
Pickup Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Dropout Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Operate Time: < 25 ms at 1.1 x pickup at 60 Hz
< 30 ms at 1.1 x pickup at 50 Hz
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate

17.2.31 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE (27P)

PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE (27P)
Voltage: Fundamental Phasor Magnitude
Minimum Voltage: 0.00 to 1.50 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Pickup Level: 0.00 to 1.50 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Dropout Level: Selectable. Either 101 to 103% of pickup or 103 to 105% of
pickup
Level Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
Phases Required for Operation: Any one, Any two, All three
Undervoltage Curves: Definite Time, Inverse Time, FlexCurves A/B/C/D
Pickup Time Delay: 0.020 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001s
Pickup Accuracy: Per phase voltage input channel error
Reset Time Delay: 0.000 – 6000.00 s in steps of 0.001s
Reset Mode: Definite Time, Dependent Time
Operate Time: < 20 ms at 0.90 x pickup at 60 Hz
< 25 ms at 0.90 x pickup at 50 Hz
Curve Timing Accuracy: At < 0.90 x pickup: ±3.5% of curve delay or ±½ cycle (whichever
is greater) from pickup to operate

17.2.32 VOLTAGE INTERRUPTION

NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE (59N)
Operating Parameter: V1

860 1601-0450
 Chapter 17 - Specifications

NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE (59N)

Minimum Voltage 0.00 to 1.50 x VT in steps of 0.01 VT
Pickup Level: 0.02 to 3.00 x VT in steps of 0.01 VT
Dropout Level: 101 to 104% of Pickup

17.2.33 VOLTS PER HERZ (24)

VOLTS PER HERTZ (24)
Voltages: Phasor only
Pickup Level: 0.80 to 4.00 in steps of 0.01 pu
Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of pickup
Level Accuracy: ±0.02 pu
Timing Curves: Definite Time; IEC Inverse A/B/C; FlexCurves A, B, C, and D
TD Multiplier: 0.05 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Reset Delay: 0.00 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.01
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±15 cycles (whichever is greater) for
values greater than 1.1 x pickup
Operate Time:
< 2 cycles

Number of Elements:
6

17.2.34 OVERFREQUENCY (81O)

OVERFREQUENCY (81O)
Pickup Level Normal Frequency: 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Pickup Level High Frequency: 40.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Dropout Level: Pickup -0.03 Hz
Pickup Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Dropout Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Minimum Operating Voltage: 0.000 to 1.250 x VT in steps of 0.001 x VT
Level Accuracy Normal Frequency (40 to 70 Hz) ±0.01 Hz
Level Accuracy High Frequency (40 to 70 Hz) ±0.02 Hz
Timer accuracy
Operate Time: Typically 7.5 cycles at 0.1 Hz/s change.
Typically 7 cycles at 0.3 Hz/s change.
Typically 6.5 cycles at 0.5 Hz/s change.

Note:
Typical times are average Operate Times including variables such as frequency change instance, test method, etc., and may
vary by ±0.5 cycles.

1601-0450 861
Chapter 17 - Specifications

17.2.35 UNDERFREQUENCY (81U)

UNDERFREQUENCY (81U)
Pickup Level: 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
High-speed Frequency Input 40.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Dropout Level: Pickup +0.03 Hz
Pickup Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001s
Dropout Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001s
Minimum Operating Voltage: 0.000 to 1.250 x VT in steps of 0.001 x VT
Minimum Operating Current: 0.000 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Level Accuracy (Normal Frequency Input): ±0.01 Hz
Level Accuracy (High-speed Frequency Input): ±0.02 Hz
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate
Operate Time: Typically 7.5 cycles at 0.1 Hz/s change.
Typically 7 cycles at 0.3 Hz/s change.
Typically 6.5 cycles at 0.5 Hz/s change.

Note:
Typical times are average Operate Times including variables such as frequency change instance, test method, etc., and may
vary by ±0.5 cycles.

17.2.36 FAST UNDERFREQUENCY

FAST UNDERFREQUENCY
Operating Parameter: Frequency and rate of change of frequency
UF Pickup Level: 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
df/dt Pickup Level: -10.00 to -0.10 Hz/s in steps of 0.01 Hz/s
Pickup Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Dropout Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Frequency Accuracy: 250 mHz/s or 3.5%, whichever is greater
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater)

17.2.37 RATE OF CHANGE OF FREQUENCY (81R)

FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE (81R)
df/dt Trend: Increasing, Decreasing, Bi-directional
df/dt Pickup Level: 0.10 to 15.00 Hz/s in steps of 0.01 Hz/s
df/dt Dropout Level: 96% of Pickup Level
df/dt Level Accuracy: 80 mHz/s or 3.5%, whichever is greater
Frequency (normal): 20.00 to 80.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Frequency (high-speed): 40.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Minimum Voltage Threshold: 0.000 to 1.250 x VT in steps of 0.001 x VT

862 1601-0450
 Chapter 17 - Specifications

FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE (81R)

Minimum Current Threshold: 0.000 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Pickup Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate
95% Settling Time for df/dt: < 24 cycles
Typical Operate Time: 6.5 cycles at 2 × Pickup
5.5 cycles at 3 × Pickup
4.5 cycles at 5 × Pickup

17.2.38 DIRECTIONAL POWER

DIRECTIONAL POWER (32)
Measured Power 3-phase
Number of Stages 2
Characteristic Angle 0° to 359° in steps of 1°
Calibration Angle 0.00° to 0.95° in steps of 0.05°
Power Pickup Range –1.200 to 1.200 x Rated Power in steps of 0.001
Pickup Level Accuracy ±1% or ±0.001 x Rated Power, whichever is greater
Hysteresis 2% or 0.001 x Rated Power, whichever is greater
Pickup Time Delay 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
< 55 ms at 1.1 x pickup at 60 Hz
Operate Time
< 65 ms at 1.1 x pickup at 50 Hz
±3% of delay setting or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater) from
Timer Accuracy
pickup to operate

17.2.39 REACTIVE POWER (40Q)

REACTIVE POWER (40Q)
Operating Condition: Three-phase reactive power
Positive/Negative var Trip/Alarm Pickup Level: 1 to 25000 kvar in steps of 1 kvar
Pickup Level Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading
Positive/Negative var Trip/Alarm Pickup Delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Timer Accuracy: ±3.0% of delay time or ±10 ms, whichever is greater
Hysteresis: 2 to 3%
Operate Time: < 45 ms at 60 Hz
< 50 ms at 50 Hz
Elements: Trip and Alarm

17.2.40 UNDERPOWER (37P)

UNDERPOWER (37P)
Operating Condition: Three-phase real power
Number of Elements: 1, alarm and trip stages

1601-0450 863
Chapter 17 - Specifications

UNDERPOWER (37P)
Trip/Alarm Pickup Level: 1 to 25000 kW in steps of 1
Pickup Level Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading
Hysteresis: 3%
Trip/Alarm Pickup Delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay time or ±10 ms, whichever is greater, pick up to
operate
Operate Time: <45 ms at 60 Hz
<50 ms at 50 Hz

17.2.41 RTD PROTECTION

RTD PROTECTION
Pickup: 1°C to 250°C in steps of 1°C
Hysteresis: 2°C
Timer Accuracy: <2 s
Elements: Trip and Alarm

17.2.42 ARC FLASH HS PHASE/GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT

(50P/50G)
ARC FLASH HS PHASE/GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT HS 50P/50G
Current: Phasor Magnitude (special high speed algorithm)
Pickup Level: 0.050 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup
For 0.1 to 0.2 x CT: ±0.2% of reading or 1.5% of rated,
Level Accuracy: whichever is greater
For > 0.2 x CT: ±1.5% of reading
Operate Time: 2ms for light-only detection using FlexLogic operands
4 ms at > 6 x Pickup at 60 Hz
5 ms at > 6 x Pickup at 50 Hz
4-8 ms at > (3-6) x Pickup at 60 Hz
4-10 ms at > (3-6) x Pickup at 50 Hz

Note:
For the 859 and 869, when the setpoint Motor Load Filter Interval is programmed as non-zero, it might increase the trip/
alarm times by 16.7 ms (or 20 ms at 50 Hz) for each additional cycle in the filter interval for the following protection elements:
Acceleration Time, Current Unbalance, Mechanical Jam, Overload Alarm, Thermal Model, Undercurrent, Power Factor, and
Underpower

864 1601-0450
 Chapter 17 - Specifications

17.3 SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR DC FIELD CONTROL

17.3.1 POWER FACTOR REGULATION

SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR DC FIELD POWER FACTOR REGULATION
PF Regulator Target -0.90 to 1.00 power factor in steps of 0.01, which means:
Lagging range -0.90,-0.91,…,-0.99,1.00
Leading range 0.00,0.01, …,0.99,1.00
PF Regulator Feedback Angle between current and voltage signals
Control Output (Configurable) Voltage output ranges: 0/+10 V, +/-10 V
Current output ranges: 0/+20 mA, 4-20 mA
Minimum operating Voltage 0.00 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Minimum operating Current 0.00 to 10.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Output Control Voltage Accuracy ±0.5V
Output Control Current Accuracy ±1mA
Change in Output per 1-degree angle
+10V to -10V 0.11V when min/max output limit is set as -/+10V
0 to 10V 0.05V when min/max output limit is set as 0/10V
0 to 20mA 0.11mA when min/max output limit is set as 0/20mA
4 to 20ma 0.09mA when min/max output limit is set as 4/20mA
PF Regulator Response Time < 1 cycle

17.3.2 START SEQUENCE CONTROL

SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR DC FIELD START SEQUENCE CONTROL
Operating Parameter: Brush-type: slip frequency-based or start time-based
Brushless: start time-based
Modes of Operation (brush-type only): Time-based or slip frequency-based
Synchronous Slip (brush-type only): 1.0% to 10.0% in steps of 0.1%
FAR Delay: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Slip Frequency Accuracy: ±0.03% of Nominal Frequency (60Hz or 50Hz)
Stages: Close and configurable

17.3.3 INCOMPLETE SEQUENCE FUNCTION

SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR DC FIELD INCOMPLETE SEQUENCE FUNCTION
Operating Parameter: Incomplete Sequence Delay Timer
Timing Accuracy: ±0.5% of delay setting or ±¼ power cycles (whichever is
greater) from pickup to operate
Stages: Trip, Alarm, and Configurable

1601-0450 865
Chapter 17 - Specifications

17.4 CONTROL

17.4.1 THERMAL INHIBIT

THERMAL INHIBIT
Thermal Inhibit Margin: 0 to 25% in steps of 1%
Thermal Capacity Required to Restart: 0 to 85% in steps of 1%
Timer Accuracy: ±2s or ±1% of total time (whichever is greater)

17.4.2 MAXIMUM HOT OR COLD START RATE

MAXIMUM HOT OR COLD START RATE
Monitored Time Interval: 1 to 300 minutes in steps of 1
Maximum Number of Hot Starts: 1 to 16 starts in steps of 1
Maximum Number of Cold Starts: 1 to 16 starts in steps of 1
Timer Accuracy: ±2s or ±1% of total time (whichever is greater)

17.4.3 MAXIMUM STARTING RATE

MAXIMUM STARTING RATE
Monitored Time Interval: 1 to 300 minutes in steps of 1
Maximum Number of Starts: 1 to 16 starts in steps of 1
Timer Accuracy: ±2s or ±1% of total time (whichever is greater)

17.4.4 RESTART DELAY

RESTART DELAY
Restart Delay: 0 to 65000 seconds in steps of 1
Timer Accuracy: ±2s or ±1% of total time (whichever is greater)

17.4.5 REDUCED VOLTAGE START

REDUCED VOLTAGE START
Mode: Current Only, Current and Timer, Current or Timer
Start Current Level: 0.25 to 3.00 of FLA, in steps of 0.01
Start Timer: 1.0 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1

17.4.6 TIME BETWEEN STARTS

TIME BETWEEN STARTS
Time Between Starts: 0 to 300 minutes in steps of 1
Timer Accuracy: ±2s or ±1% of total time (whichever is greater)

866 1601-0450
 Chapter 17 - Specifications

17.4.7 BREAKER CONTROL

BREAKER CONTROL
Operation: Asserted FlexLogic Operands
Function: Opens/closes, blocks, bypasses blocks to the feeder breaker

17.4.8 LOCAL CONTROL MODE

LOCAL CONTROL MODE
Number of Elements: 1
Select Before Operate Mode: Disabled, Enabled
Mode: Local Mode ON, Local Mode OFF
Display Status: LM (local mode) displayed in banner
Tagging: Disabled, Enabled

17.4.9 SWITCH CONTROL

SWITCH CONTROL
Operation: Local (PB control and SLD) and Remote (asserted FlexLogic
operands)
Function: Opens/Closes the disconnect switch
Timers: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s

17.4.10 TRIP BUS

TRIP BUS
Number of Elements: 6
Number of Inputs: 16
Pickup Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Dropout Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Operate Time: < 2 ms at 60 Hz
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay time or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate

17.4.11 DIGITAL ELEMENTS

DIGITAL ELEMENTS
Number of elements: 64
Operating signal: Any FlexLogic operand
Operate time: Digital Elements are processed once per cycle(16 ms at 60 Hz,
20 ms at 50 Hz)
Pickup Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Dropout Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Timer accuracy ±3% of delay setting or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate 20 ms at 50 Hz)

1601-0450 867
Chapter 17 - Specifications

17.5 MONITORING

17.5.1 SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR FIELD OVERTEMPERATURE

SYNC. MOTOR FIELD OVERTEMPERATURE
Operating Parameter: FLD Resistance
Pickup Level: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01 ohms
Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup
Time Delay: 0.01 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Pickup Accuracy: <±1% of Full Scale Reading
Operate Time: <2.5 cycles
Note: Exciter VDC Filter increases trip/alarm times by minimum
of 2 cycles and additional cycles if programmed greater than 2
cycles (default value).
Timing Accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±3/2 cycle (whichever is greater)
Minimum Field Voltage: 0.00 to 50.00 VDC in steps of 0.01 VDC
Minimum Field Current: 0.02 to 0.30 x MFA in steps of 0.01 where MFA is Max FLD
Amps Primary
No. of Elements: 2

17.5.2 BROKEN ROTOR BAR

BROKEN ROTOR BAR
Operating Parameter: Fundamental Phasor Magnitude
Pickup Level: -60db to -12db in steps of -1dB
Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup

17.5.3 ELECTRICAL SIGNATURE ANALYSIS (ESA)

ESA (ELECTRICAL SIGNATURE ANALYSIS)
ESA (Bearing & Mechanical (Foundation looseness, Eccentricity & Mis-alignment)) Fault
Computing Parameter: Ia
Indicating Parameter: Peak Magnitude (dB), Energy (dB), Change in dB
Operating Parameter: Change in Peak and Energy magnitude (dB) or Peak and
Energy magnitude (dB)
Pickup level 1 & 2: Change in Peak and Energy magnitude > ‘X’ dB w.r.t base line
dB (configurable in setup SW) or Peak and Energy magnitude >
‘X’ dB w.r.t base line dB (configurable in setup SW)
Pickup delay 1 & 2: 5 to 60 min (multiples of 5 min) (Configurable in setup software)

868 1601-0450
 Chapter 17 - Specifications

17.5.4 POWER FACTOR (55)

POWER FACTOR (55)
Lead/Lag Trip/Alarm Pickup Level:: 0.05 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01, lead and lag
Lead/Lag Trip/Alarm Time Delay: 0.000 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Modes of Control: Resync Mode or Ride-Thru Mode
Start Block Delay: 0.000 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Minimum Operating Voltage: 0.00 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Minimum Operating Current: 0.00 to 10.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Level Accuracy: ±0.02
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ±1¼ cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate
Stages: Trip and Alarm
No. of Elements: 2

17.5.5 SPEED PROTECTION

SPEED PROTECTION
Configuration: Assign to any contact input
Operating Range: 20 to 120% of Rated RPM
Minimum Pulse Width: >8% of a revolution
Level Accuracy: ±1% of rated speed
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ±2 power cycles (whichever is greater)
from pickup to operate
Element: Trip and Alarm

17.5.6 BREAKER ARCING CURRENT

BREAKER ARCING CURRENT
Mode: 3-pole
Principle: accumulates breaker duty (I2t) during fault
Initiation: any operand
Alarm Threshold: 0 to 50000 kA2-cycle in steps of 1 kA2-cycle
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ±1 cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate

17.5.7 BREAKER FAILURE

BREAKER FAILURE
Mode: 3-pole
Current Supervision: phase and neutral current (fundamental phasor magnitude)
Current Supervision Pickup: 0.050 to 30.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Current Supervision Dropout: 97 to 98% of pickup

1601-0450 869
Chapter 17 - Specifications

BREAKER FAILURE
Current Supervision Accuracy: For 0.1 to 2.0 x CT: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated
(whichever is greater)
For > 2.0 x CT: ±1.5% of reading
Time Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate
Reset Time: 19 to 30 ms at 1.5 to 20 x Pickup

17.5.8 BREAKER HEALTH

BREAKER HEALTH
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ±1 cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate

17.5.9 TRIP CIRCUIT MONITORING

TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR (TCM)
Applicable Voltage: 20 to 250 VDC
Trickle Current: 1 to 2.5 mA
Timing Accuracy: ±3 % or ±4 ms, whichever is greater

17.5.10 CLOSE CIRCUIT MONITORING

CLOSE CIRCUIT MONITOR (CCM)
Applicable Voltage: 20 to 250 VDC
Trickle Current: 1 to 2.5 mA
Timing Accuracy: ±3 % or ±4 ms, whichever is greater

17.5.11 DEMAND
DEMAND
Measured Values: Phase A/B/C present and maximum current, three-phase
present, maximum real/reactive/apparent power, minimum real/
reactive/apparent power
Measurement Type: Thermal Exponential, 90% response time (programmed): 5 to
90 min in steps of 1 min.
Block Interval / Rolling Demand, time interval (programmed): 5
to 90 min in steps of 1 min.
Current Pickup Level (845, 850, 889): 10 to 10000 in steps of 1 A
Dropout Level: 96-98% of Pickup level
Level Accuracy: ±2%

870 1601-0450
 Chapter 17 - Specifications

17.5.12 HARMONIC DETECTION

HARMONIC DETECTION
Operating Parameter: Current 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th harmonic or THD per phase
Timer Accuracy: Harmonics: ±3% of delay setting or ±¼ cycle (whichever is
greater) from pickup to operate. THD: ±3% of delay setting or
±3 cycles (whichever is greater) from pickup to operate

17.5.13 VOLTAGE DISTURBANCE

VOLTAGE DISTURBANCE
Number of Elements: 3
Operating Parameter: Va, Vb, Vc, or Vab, Vbc,Vca (RMS)
Number of Events in Records: 30

17.5.14 VOLTAGE SWELL

VOLTAGE SWELL
Pickup Level: 0.02 to 3.00 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of pickup
Pickup Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001s (Definite Time)

Operate Time: < 25 ms at 1.1 x pickup at 60Hz

< 30 ms at 1.1 x pickup at 50Hz
Timing Accuracy: ±0.5% of delay setting or ±¼ power cycles (whichever is
greater) from pickup to operate

17.5.15 VOLTAGE SAG

VOLTAGE SAG
Pickup Level: 0.00 to 1.50 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Dropout Level: 102 to 103% of pickup
Level Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
Pickup Delay: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001s (Definite Time)
Operate Time: < 20 ms at 0.90 x pickup at 60 Hz
< 25 ms at 0.90 x pickup at 50 Hz

17.5.16 TIME OF DAY TIMER

TIME OF DAY TIMER
Number of Elements: 2
Setting Resolution: 1 minute
Accuracy: ±1 s

1601-0450 871
Chapter 17 - Specifications

17.5.17 OVERTORQUE
Overtorque
Pickup level 0.1 to 999999.9 Nm/ft·lb in steps of 0.1; torque unit is selectable under torque
setup
Pickup Delay: 0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
Dropout level: 97% of Pickup
Pickup Accuracy: ±2.0%
Operate Time: < 2 cycles
Timing Accuracy: ±100 ms or 0.5% of total time
Elements: Alarm (induction motors only)

872 1601-0450
 Chapter 17 - Specifications

17.6 RECORDING

17.6.1 EVENT DATA

EVENT DATA
Number of Records: 1024 (matches the existing Event Recorder)
Data Storage: Non-volatile memory
Time-tag Accuracy: One microsecond
Settings: 64 Configurable FlexAnalog parameters, Event Selector
Actuals: Selected Event Number, Timestamp of Selected Event, Cause
of Selected Event, 64 Configurable FlexAnalog values
Commands: None (using existing Clear Event Recorder)

17.6.2 MOTOR START STATISTICS

MOTOR START STATISTICS
Number of records: 5
Content: Start Date/Time, Start Acceleration Time, Start Effective
Current, Start Peak Current
Number of records: Non-volatile memory

17.6.3 MOTOR START RECORDS

MOTOR START RECORDS
Length: 6 records, each containing a total of 60 seconds of motor
starting data
Trigger: Motor starting status
Trigger Position: 1 second pre-trigger duration
Sample Rate: 1 sample/100 ms

17.6.4 MOTOR LEARNED DATA

MOTOR LEARNED DATA
Number of records: 250
Content: Learned/last acceleration time, learned/last starting current,
learned/last start TCU, learned average load, learned average
real power, learned average reactive power, learned average
power factor, average run time (days/hours/ minutes), maximum
speed, analog input minimum/maximum values, RTD maximum
temperature, Learned/Last Start SM SC TCU
Data Storage: .LDR File, CSV Format
Learned acceleration time accuracy: 3%
Learned starting current accuracy: 1%

1601-0450 873
Chapter 17 - Specifications

MOTOR LEARNED DATA

Learned average motor load accuracy: 1%
Learned average power accuracy: 1%

17.6.5 TRANSIENT RECORDER

TRANSIENT RECORDER
Default AC Channels: 8 currents + 4 voltages
Configurable Channels: 16 analog and 64 digital channels
Sampling Rate: 128/c, 64/c, 32/c, 16/c, 8/c
Trigger Source: Any element pickup, dropout or operate, digital input or output
change of state, FlexLogic operand
Trigger Position: 0 to 100%
Storage Capability: Non-volatile memory

17.6.6 DATA LOGGER

DATA LOGGER
Data Logger channels: 16
Data Logger Rate: 1 cycle, 1 sec., 30 sec., 1 min., 15 min., 30 min., 1 hour,
6 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours
Inputs: Any analog parameter from the list of available analog
parameters
Data Collection Mode: Continuous, Triggered
Trigger Source: Any digital flag from the list of digital flags
Trigger Position: 0 to 50% in steps of 1%
Channel 1(16) Mode: Sample, Min, Max, Mean

17.6.7 EVENT RECORDER

EVENT RECORDER
Number of events: 1024
Header: relay name, order code, firmware revision
Content: any element pickup, any element operate, digital input change
of state, digital output change of state, self-test events
Data Storage: non-volatile memory
Time-tag Accuracy: to one microsecond

17.6.8 LAST TRIP DATA

LAST TRIP DATA
Number of Records: 1
Data Storage: Non-volatile memory
Time-tag Accuracy: One microsecond

874 1601-0450
 Chapter 17 - Specifications

LAST TRIP DATA

Actuals: Event Number of Last Trip, Timestamp of Last Trip, Cause of
Last Trip, 64 Configurable FlexAnalog values
Commands: Clear Last Trip Data

17.6.9 FAULT REPORTS

FAULT REPORTS
Number of Reports: 15
Pre-fault and fault phasors for all CT and VT banks, pre-fault
Captured Data: and fault trigger operands, user-programmable analog channels
1 to 32

1601-0450 875
Chapter 17 - Specifications

17.7 USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS

17.7.1 FLEXLOGIC
FLEXLOGIC
Lines of code: 1024
Supported operations: NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 16 inputs), AND (2 to 16 inputs), NOR (2 to
16 inputs), NAND (2 to 16 inputs), latch (reset-dominant), edge
detectors, timers
Inputs: any logical variable, contact, or virtual input
Number of timers: 32
Pickup delay: 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
Dropout delay: 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
Timer accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate

17.7.2 FLEXELEMENTS
FLEXELEMENTS
Number of elements: 8
Operating signal: Any analog actual value, or two values in a differential mode
Operating signal mode: Signed, or Absolute value
Operating mode: Level, Delta
Comparison direction: Over, Under
Operate time: FlexElements are processed once per cycle (16 ms at 60 Hz, 20
ms at 50 Hz)
Pickup Level: -30.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 pu
Hysteresis: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1%
Delta dt: 40 msec to 45 days
Pickup and dropout delays: 0.000 to 6000.000 s in steps of 0.001 s

17.7.3 FLEXSTATES
FLEXSTATES
Number of States: 256 logical variables grouped under 16 Modbus addresses
Programmability: Any FlexLogic operand, any digital input, any virtual input, any
remote input

17.7.4 FLEXCURVES
FLEXCURVES
Number: 4 (A, B, C, D)

876 1601-0450
 Chapter 17 - Specifications

FLEXCURVES
Reset points: 40 (0.00 to 0.98 x pickup)
Operate points: 80 (1.03 to 20.0 x pickup)
Time delay: 0 to 200,000,000 ms in steps of 1 ms
Saturation level: 20 times the pickup level

17.7.5 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES

NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
Type: Set-dominant or Reset-dominant
Range: 16 individually programmed
Output: Stored in non-volatile memory
Execution sequence: As input prior to protection, control and FlexLogic

17.7.6 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS

USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
Number: 17 (14 + 3 PB LEDS)
Programmability: any logic variable, contact, or virtual input
Reset mode: self-reset or latched

17.7.7 TAB PUSHBUTTONS

TAB PUSHBUTTONS
Number of elements: 1 (20 Tab Pushbuttons)
Data Storage: Non-volatile memory
Mode: Self-reset, latched
Display Message: 2 lines; 15 characters per line
Dropout Timer: 0.000 to 60.000 s in steps of 0.005
Auto-reset Timer: 0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
Hold Timer: 0.1 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1
Timer Accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate

17.7.8 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS

USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
Number of pushbuttons: 3 (Membrane and Rugged Front Panels)
Mode: Self-reset, latched
Display message: 2 lines of 13 characters on each line
Dropout timer: 0.000 to 60.000 s in steps of 0.005
Auto-reset timer: 0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
Hold timer: 0.0 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1

1601-0450 877
Chapter 17 - Specifications

17.8 METERING

17.8.1 MOTOR METERING VALUES

MOTOR METERING VALUES
Parameters: Motor Load, Thermal Model Biased Load, Filtered Motor Load,
Filtered RMS Phase A, B, C Currents, Filtered Phasor
Magnitude Phase A, B, C Currents
RMS Accuracy: ±0.25% of reading or ±0.2% of rated (whichever is greater) from
0.1 to 2.0 x CT± 1% of reading > 2.0 x CT
Magnitude Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.2% of rated (whichever is greater) from
0.1 to 2.0 x CT

17.8.2 SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR METERED VALUES

SYNC. MOTOR METERED VALUES
AC Field Voltage (brush-type motors only)
Parameter: SM Field VAC
Range: 0.00 to 1000.00 VAC prior to VDN (primary voltage)
Accuracy: <±1% of full scale reading
DC Exciter Voltage
Parameter: SM Field VDC
Range: 0.00 to 350.00 VDC prior to VDN (primary voltage)
Accuracy: <±1% of full scale reading
DC Field Current IF
Parameter: SM Field Amps
Range: 0.00 to 3000.00 (primary)
Accuracy: <±1% of full scale reading
AC Field Voltage Frequency
Parameter: K2-FLD VAC Frequency
Range: 0.5–72 Hz (Field VAC >30 V primary)
1–72 Hz (Field VAC >15 V primary)
2-72 Hz (Field VAC >10 V primary)
Accuracy: ±3mHz (30V<Field VAC primary)
±15mHz (15V<Field VAC<30V primary)
±30mHz (10V<Field VAC<15V primary)
Rotor Slip
Source: AC Field Voltage VF ~
Range: 0.0 to 120.0% of nominal frequency (60Hz or 50Hz)
Accuracy at 2 to 85 V (secondary): ±0.03% of nominal frequency (60Hz or 50Hz)
SM PF Regulator Output
Range: Voltage output ranges: 0/+10V, ±10V
Current output ranges: 0/+20mA, 4-20mA

878 1601-0450
 Chapter 17 - Specifications

SYNC. MOTOR METERED VALUES

Magnitude Accuracy: Voltage mode: <±0.5% of full scale reading.
Current mode: <±0.5% of full scale reading
SM PF Error
Range: -1.00 to 1.00
Accuracy: ±0.02 for 50 Hz and 60 Hz
±0.05 for 25 Hz
SM Field Resistance
Range: 0.00 to 500.00
Accuracy: <±1% of full scale reading

17.8.3 RMS PARAMETERS

Currents
Parameters: Phase A, B, C, Neutral, Ground
Accuracy: ±0.25% of reading or ±0.2% of rated (whichever is greater) from
0.1 to 2.0 x CT±1% of reading > 2.0 x CT

Voltages
Parameters: Wye VTs: A-n, B-n, C-n, A-B, B-C, C-A, Average Phase, Neutral
and Residual. Delta VTs: A-B, B-C, C-A, Neutral and Residual
Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 15 to 208 V±2% for open Delta
connections

Sensitive Ground
Parameter: Isg
Accuracy (from 0.01 to 0.2 x CT): ±1.30% of rated
Accuracy (> 0.2 x CT): ±0.30% of reading or ±0.60% of rated (whichever is greater)

Real Power (Watts)

Range: -214748364.8 kW to 214748364.7 kW
Parameters: Wye VTs: 3-phase and per phase. Delta VTs: 3-phase only
Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading or 0.2 kW (whichever is greater) at -0.8 < PF ≤
-1.0 and 0.8 < PF < 1.0

Reactive Power (Vars)

Range: -214748364.8 kvar to 214748364.7 kvar
Parameters: Wye VTs: 3-phase and per phase. Delta VTs: 3-phase only
Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading or 0.2 kvar (whichever is greater) at -0.2 < PF
≤ 0.2

1601-0450 879
Chapter 17 - Specifications

Apparent Power (VA)

Range: 0 kVA to 214748364.7 kVA
Parameters: Wye VTs: 3-phase and per phase. Delta VTs: 3-phase only
Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading or 0.2 kVA (whichever is greater)

Power Factor
Parameters: 3-phase; per phase if VT is Wye
Range: 0.01 Lag to 1.00 to 0.01 Lead
Accuracy: ±0.02 for 50 Hz and 60 Hz; ±0.05 for 25 Hz

Watt-hours (positive and negative)

Range: 0.000 MWh to 4294967.295 MWh
Parameters: 3-phase only
Update Rate: 50 ms
Accuracy: ±2.0% of reading

Var-hours (positive and negative)

Range: 0.000 Mvarh to 4294967.295 Mvarh
Parameters: 3-phase only
Update Rate: 50 ms
Accuracy: ±2.0% of reading

17.8.4 PHASORS
PHASORS
Current
Parameters: Phase A, B, C, Neutral and Ground
Magnitude Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.2% of rated (whichever is greater) from
0.1 to 2.0 x CT
±1.0% of reading > 2.0 x CT
Angle Accuracy: 2° (3° for 25 Hz)
CBCT Angle Accuracy: ±25° (For 50:0.025 CT between 0.5A to 15A)
Voltages
Parameters: Wye VTs: A-n, B-n, C-n, A-B, B-C, C-A, Average Phase, Neutral
and Residual
Delta VTs: A-B, B-C, C-A, Neutral and Residual
Magnitude Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 15 to 208 V
±1% for open Delta connections
±10% for 25 Hz with 150 V <V < 208V
Angle Accuracy: 0.5° (15 V <V < 208 V)

880 1601-0450
 Chapter 17 - Specifications

17.8.5 FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY
Range: 2.000 to 90.000 Hz
Accuracy at: V = 15 to 208 V: ±0.01 Hz (input frequency 15 to 70 Hz);
I = 0.1 to 0.4 x CT: ±0.020 Hz (input frequency 15 to 70 Hz);
I > 0.4 x CT: ±0.01 Hz (input frequency 15 to 70 Hz)

17.8.6 CURRENT AND VOLTAGE HARMONICS

CURRENT AND VOLTAGE HARMONICS
Parameters: Magnitude of each harmonic and THD
Range: 2nd to 25th harmonic: per-phase displayed as % of f1
fundamental frequency THD: per-phase displayed as % of f1

1601-0450 881
Chapter 17 - Specifications

17.9 INPUTS

17.9.1 SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR AC FIELD VOLTAGE INPUT

SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR AC FIELD VOLTAGE INPUT
Input Primary (at VDN input terminals): 0 to 1000 VAC (1414 Vpk, 2828 Vp-p)
Input Voltage Divider (VDN) Ratio: 11.6:1
Operating Range (at VDN input): ) 0 to 1000 VAC (measured)
Operating Range (at Relay Terminals): 0 to 87 VAC (measured)
Rated Continuous Voltage (at VDN input): 1000 VAC
Rated Continuous Voltage (at Relay Terminals): 100 VAC
Voltage Accuracy (at VDN input): < ±3V
Cut-off level: 1 V (primary)
Burden (Input Impedance or VA): 11.3 KW at relay terminals; 131.3 KW at VDN and Relay
Terminal counts: 2 (Terminals K9 and K10, Bank: SM BNK1-K2)
Frequency Range: 0.5–72 Hz (Field VAC >30 V primary)1–72 Hz (Field VAC >15 V
primary)
2-72 Hz (Field VAC >10 V primary)
Sampling Frequency (samples per cycle): 64 samples per power cycle
128 samples per power cycle (available for transient recorder)

17.9.2 SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR DC EXCITER VOLTAGE INPUT

SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR DC EXCITER VOLTAGE INPUT
Input Primary (at VDN input terminals): 0 to 350 V DC
Input Voltage Divider (VDN) Ratio: 1.18:1
Operating Range (at VDN input): ) 0 to 350 V DC
Rated Continuous Voltage (at VDN input): 350 V
Rated Continuous Voltage (at Relay Terminals): 300 V
Accuracy <±1% Full scale Reading
Burden (Input Impedance or VA): 3.4 MW differential at VDN with Relay
Terminal counts: 2 (Terminals K11 and K12, Bank: SM BNK1-K2)
Sampling Frequency (samples per cycle): 64 samples per power cycle
128 samples per power cycle (available for transient recorder)

17.9.3 SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR DC FIELD CURRENT INPUT

SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR DC FIELD CURRENT INPUT
Input Range (Configurable): 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20 mA OR 0-10 VDC
Input impedance: 246.5 R (Current mode)
>10 KW (Voltage mode)

882 1601-0450
 Chapter 17 - Specifications

SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR DC FIELD CURRENT INPUT

Accuracy Current/Voltage mode; ±1% of Full-Scale Reading at 25°C
Common Mode Voltage: +/-10V
Withstand current: 50mA
Use shielded cable: Grounded at both ends
Terminal counts: 2 (Terminals K13 and K14, Bank: SM BNK1-K2)
Sampling Frequency (samples per cycle): 64 samples per power cycle
128 samples per power cycle (available for transient recorder)

17.9.4 AC CURRENTS
AC CURRENTS
CT Rated Primary: 1 to 12000 A
CT Rated Secondary: 1 A or 5 A based on relay ordering
Burden: < 0.2 VA at rated secondary
Conversion Range: Standard CT: 0.02 to 46 x CT rating RMS symmetrical.
CBCT (50:0.025): 0 to 15 A
Short Term CT Withstand: 1 second at 100 x rated current
2 seconds at 40 x rated current
Continuous 3 x rated current
CBCT (50:0.025) Withstand: Continuous 150 mA

17.9.5 AC VOLTAGES
AC VOLTAGE
VT Range: 10 to 260 V
Nominal Frequency: 20 to 65 Hz
Burden: <0.25 VA at 120 V
Conversion Range: 1 to 275 V
Voltage Withstand: continuous at 260 V to neutral. 1 min/hr at 420 V to neutral

17.9.6 ANALOG INPUTS

ANALOG INPUTS
Current Input (mA DC): 0 to 1mA, 0 to 5mA, 0 to 10mA, 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA
(configurable)
Input Impedance: 375 Ω ±10%
Conversion range: 0 to +21 mA DC
Accuracy: ±1% of full scale,
Type: Passive
Sampling Interval: Typically 500 ms
Cable: Twisted-pair shielded cable

1601-0450 883
Chapter 17 - Specifications

17.9.7 FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY
Nominal frequency setting: 50 Hz, 60 Hz
Sampling frequency: 64 samples per power cycle. 128 samples per power cycle
(available for transient recorder)
Tracking frequency range: 3 to 72 Hz

17.9.8 ARC FLASH SENSOR/FIBER

ARC FLASH SENSOR/FIBER
Number of Point Sensors: 4
Detection Radius: 180 degrees
Fiber Length (Point Sensor): 18 ft standard, 32 ft maximum
Fiber Size: 1000 um
Mode: Multi-mode
Connector: Small Media Interface (SMI)
Fiber Type: Plastic Optical Fiber
Bend Radius: >25 mm

17.9.9 CONTACT INPUTS

CONTACT INPUTS
Number of Inputs: Based on relay order code
Type: Wet or Dry
Wet Contacts: 300 VDC maximum
Selectable thresholds: Programmable: 17 VDC (For 24 VDC Operating Voltage) 33
VDC (For 48 VDC and 60 VDC Operating Voltage) 84 VDC (For
110 VDC and 125 VDC Operating Voltage) 166 VDC (For 220
VDC and 250 VDC Operating Voltage)
Tolerance: 17 VDC: Vlow (off) <10V, Vhigh (on) >19V. 33 VDC: Vlow (off)
<23V, Vhigh (on) >38V. 84 VDC: Vlow (off) <70V, Vhigh (on)
>88V. 166 VDC: Vlow (off) <140V, Vhigh (on) >176V.
Recognition time: 1 ms (typical)
Debounce time: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5 ms
Continuous current draw (burden): 2 mA
CLOCK
Setup: Date and Time, Daylight Saving Time, UTC (Coordinated
Universal Time)
Backup Retention: 31 days

Note:
For relays with Hardware Revision A, Clock Backup Retention is only 1 hour

884 1601-0450
 Chapter 17 - Specifications

17.9.10 IRIG-B INPUT

IRIG-B INPUT
Auto-detect: DC and AM
Amplitude Modulation: 1 V to 10 V pk-to-pk
DC Shift: TTL
Input Impedance: 40 kΩ
Isolation: 2 kV
IRIG-B Format: IEEE 1344-1995 (with control bits extension)

17.9.11 RTD INPUTS

RTD INPUTS
Types (3-wire): 100 Ω Platinum, 120 Ω Nickel, 100 Ω Nickel, 10 Ω Copper
(RMIO only supports 100Ω Platinum)
Sensing current: 5 mA
Range: –40 to +250°C (-40 to +482°F)
Accuracy (onboard): ±2°C (±4°F)
Accuracy (using RMIO): ±3°C (±5.4°F)
Isolation: 36 V pk-pk (a group of RTDs to ground) 2 kV from base unit
(RMIO only)
Lead Resistance: 25 Ω max. per lead for platinum or nickel and 3 Ω max. per lead
for copper RTDs
RTD Inputs Available: 6 RTD inputs with one module or 12 inputs with 2 modules (IO
cards R or S). 1 RTD input with IO card L.6 to 12 RTD inputs
with RMIO modules 1 through 4
Cable: Three-wire shielded cable

1601-0450 885
Chapter 17 - Specifications

17.10 OUTPUTS

17.10.1 VDC OUTPUT, VPF

SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR VDC OUTPUT, VPF
Output Range (Configurable): 0/+10 V, ±10 V, 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA
Max. load resistance: 600 R for Current OUT
1 KKW for Voltage OUT
Accuracy ±0.5% of Full scale (Typical 10 mV, maximum 50 mV) for
Voltage OUT
±0.5% of Full scale for Current OUT
Isolation: 500 VDC
Refresh Rate: 2 ms
Terminal counts: 2 (Terminals K15 and K16, Bank: SM BNK1-K2)

17.10.2 ANALOG OUTPUTS

ANALOG OUTPUTS
Range (configurable): 0 to 1 mA, 0 to 5 mA, 0 to 10 mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
Max. load resistance: 10 kΩ @ 1 mA, 600 Ω @ 20 mA
Accuracy: ±1% of full scale
Isolation: 500V DC for one minute (functional isolation between analog
inputs and output group; and each group of chassis)
Driving Signal: any Analog quantity
Sampling Interval: Typically 100 ms
Upper and lower limit (for the driving signal): -90 to 90 pu in steps of 0.001
Cable: Twisted-pair shielded cable

17.10.3 FORM C OUTPUT RELAYS

FORM C OUTPUT RELAYS
Maximum Working Voltage: 300VDC/300VAC
Make and short-time carry current: 30A/0.2s per IEEE C37.90
Maximum Continuous Current per contact: 10A
Total maximum current for contacts connected to common 10A
potential:
Breaking Capacity (DC inductive) with respect to source 24 V-1 A; 48 V-0.5 A; 125 V-0.3 A; 250 V-0.2 A
voltage, @L/R = 40 ms (10000 Operation, per IEC 60255-1
2009-08):
Breaking Capacity (DC resistive) with respect to source 24 V-10 A; 48 V-1.5 A; 125 V-0.4 A; 250 V-0.3 A
voltage:

886 1601-0450
 Chapter 17 - Specifications

FORM C OUTPUT RELAYS

Breaking Capacity (AC inductive) with respect to source A300, Pilot duty 720 VA
voltage, @PF= 0.4 or less:
Breaking Capacity (AC resistive) with respect to source 277V-10A
voltage:
Operating Time (coil energization to contact closure, resistive <8ms
load):
Contact Material: Silver alloy
Mechanical Endurance (no load): > 10,000
Maximum Frequency of operation: 360/h
Protection Device across contact: EMI Suppression Cap, 1nF

Note:
For order codes with a combined total of 2 or 3 type A and M I/O cards, the following ratings are applied to meet UL508
requirements: 1 second on / 10 seconds off, 9% duty cycle

17.10.4 FORM A VOLTAGE MONITOR

FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR
Applicable voltage: 20 to 250 VDC
Trickle current: 1 to 2.5 mA
Timer accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±¼ cycle (whichever is greater)

17.10.5 SOLID STATE RELAYS

SOLID STATE RELAYS ON I/O CARD M
Maximum Working Voltage: 300 VDC
Make and short-time carry current: 30A/0.2 s per IEEE C37.90
Maximum Continuous Current per contact: 10 A
Total maximum current for contacts connected to common 10 A
potential:
Breaking Capacity (DC inductive) with respect to source 250 VDC - 10 A (or 2.5 kW) (Maximum 10 A and 300 VDC)
voltage, @L/R = 40 ms (10000 Operation, per IEC 60255-1
2009-08):
Breaking Capacity (DC resistive) with respect to source 250 V - 30 A (or 7500 W)
voltage:
Breaking Capacity (AC inductive) with respect to source N/A
voltage, @PF= 0.35 or less:
Breaking Capacity (AC resistive) with respect to source N/A
voltage:
Operating Time (coil energization to contact closure, resistive <0.2 ms
load):
Contact Material: Hybrid
Mechanical Endurance (no load): > 10,000

1601-0450 887
Chapter 17 - Specifications

SOLID STATE RELAYS ON I/O CARD M

Maximum Frequency of operation: 360/h
Protection Device across contact: MO V, rated @ 250 VAC/320 VDC

17.10.6 PULSED OUTPUTS

PULSED OUTPUTS
Mode: 3-phase positive and negative active energy measurement,
3-phase positive and negative reactive energy measurements
Principle: Pulsed output is energized for one second and then de-
energized for one second after the programed energy
increment.

17.10.7 COIL ACTUATOR OUTPUTS

COIL ACTUATOR OUTPUTS
No. of Coil Actuators: 3 (1 per phase)
Open Maximum Current: 5 to 20 A
Close Maximum Current: 5 to 20 A
Open Pulse Time: 15 to 100 ms
Close Pulse Time: 15 to 100 ms
Operate Time: < 8 ms
Intervals between full sequence operation: Minimum 60 s between two consecutive full sequence
operations.
Minimum 30 mins after 6 consecutive full sequence operations
with minimum interval.

888 1601-0450
 Chapter 17 - Specifications

17.11 POWER SUPPLY

17.11.1 VOLTAGE SUPPLIES

(FOR H AND R OPTIONS ONLY)
Nominal DC Voltage: 125 to 250 V
Minimum DC Voltage: 88 V
Maximum DC Voltage: 300 V
Nominal AC Voltage: 100 to 240 V at 50/60 Hz
Minimum AC Voltage: 88 V at 50 to 60 Hz
Maximum AC Voltage: 265 V at 50 to 60 Hz

(FOR L DC OPTION ONLY) (not in 859)

Nominal DC Voltage: 24 V to 48 V
Minimum DC Voltage: 20 V
Maximum DC Voltage: 60 V

17.11.2 POWER CONSUMPTION

POWER CONSUMPTION
Typical: 20 W / 40 VA
Maximum: 34 W / 70 VA

17.11.3 VOLTAGE LOSS RIDE-THROUGH

VOLTAGE LOSS RIDE THROUGH
Typical (at typical power consumption): 50 ms
For R order code: 200 ms

1601-0450 889
Chapter 17 - Specifications

17.12 COMMUNICATIONS

17.12.1 ETHERNET
ETHERNET – BASE OFFERING (“SE” OPTION)
Modes: 10/100 Mbps
One Port: RJ45
Protocol: Modbus TCP, DNP

ETHERNET – CARD OPTION “C” - 2X COPPER (RJ45) PORTS

Modes: 10/100 MB
Two Ports: RJ45 (with this option both enabled ports are on the
communications card; the Ethernet port located on the base
CPU is disabled)
Protocols: Modbus TCP, DNP3.0, IEC60870-5-104, IEC 61850 Ed.2,
IEC 61850 Ed.2 GOOSE, IEEE 1588 (PTP version 2), SNTP,
IEC 62439-3 clause 4 (PRP)

ETHERNET – CARD OPTION “S” - 2X ST FIBER PORTS

Fiber type: 100 MB Multi-mode
Two Ports: ST (with this option both enabled ports are on the
communications card; the Ethernet port located on the base
CPU is disabled)
Protocols: Modbus TCP, DNP3.0, IEC60870-5-104, IEC 61850 Ed.2,
IEC 61850 Ed.2 GOOSE, IEEE 1588 (PTP version 2), SNTP,
IEC 62439-3 clause 4 (PRP), OPC-UA
Wavelength: 1310nm
Typical link distance: 4 km

17.12.2 USB
USB
Standard specification: Compliant with USB 2.0
Protocols: Modbus TCP, TFTP

17.12.3 SERIAL
SERIAL
RS485 port: Isolated
Baud rates: Supports 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 kbps
Response time: 10 ms typical
Parity: None, Odd, Even
Protocol: Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0, IEC 60870-5-103

890 1601-0450
 Chapter 17 - Specifications

SERIAL
Maximum distance: 1200 m (4000 feet)
Isolation: 2 kV
Cable: Belden 9841 or similar 24 AWG stranded, shielded twisted-pair

17.12.4 WIFI
WIFI
Standard specification: IEEE802.11bgn
Range: 30 ft (direct line of sight)

17.12.5 REMOTE MODBUS

REMOTE MODBUS DEVICE PROFILE
Device Name: BSG3 (13 alphanumeric characters maximum)
IP Address: 0.0.0.0 – standard Ethernet address
Slave Address: 254 (1 to 254)
Modbus Port: 502 (0 to 10000, default 502)
Poll Rate: 1 minute (OFF, 1 to 120 minutes), the continuous mode poll
interval is defined as the poll rate interval
Trigger: Off (any FlexLogic Operand), the trigger mode is based on the
FlexLogic operand designed to trigger the poll

17.12.6 CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK

CAN (RMIO)
Maximum Distance: 250 m (820 ft)
Cable Type: Shielded or unshielded twisted pair
Cable Gauge: Belden 9841 or similar 24 AWG for distances up to 100m; 22
AWG for distances up to 250 m.

1601-0450 891
Chapter 17 - Specifications

17.13 CERTIFICATIONS AND APPROVALS

17.13.1 APPROVALS
APPLICABLE COUNCIL DIRECTIVE ACCORDING TO
CE compliance Low voltage directive EN60255-27
EMC Directive EN60255-26
R&TTE Directive ETSI EN300 328, ETSI EN301 489-1,
ETSI EN301-489-17,
RoHS Directive RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU, 2015/863
North America cULus UL508, e57838 NKCR, NRGU
CSA C22.2.No 14, e57838 NKCR7,
NRGU7
ISO Manufactured under a registered quality ISO9001
program

17.13.2 TESTING AND CERTIFICATION

Testing and Certification

TEST REFERENCE STANDARD TEST LEVEL
Dielectric voltage withstand EN60255-5/IEC60255-27 2.3 kV
Impulse voltage withstand EN60255-5/IEC60255-27 5 kV
Insulation resistance IEC60255-27 500 VDC
Damped Oscillatory IEC61000-4-18 2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM, 1 MHz
Electrostatic Discharge EN61000-4-2 Level 4
RF immunity EN61000-4-3 Level 3
Fast Transient Disturbance EN61000-4-4 Class A and B
Surge Immunity EN61000-4-5 Level 3
Conducted RF Immunity EN61000-4-6 Level 3
Power Frequency Immunity IEC60255-26 Class A & B
Voltage variation, interruption and Ripple IEC60255-26 PQT levels based on IEC61000-4-29,
DC IEC61000-4-11 and IEC61000-4-17
Radiated & Conducted Emissions CISPR11 /CISPR22 Class A
Sinusoidal Vibration IEC60255-21-1 Class 1
Shock & Bump IEC60255-21-2 Class 1
Seismic IEC60255-21-3 Class 2
Power magnetic Immunity IEC61000-4-8 Level 5
Pulse Magnetic Immunity IEC61000-4-9 Level 4
Damped Magnetic Immunity IEC61000-4-10 Level 4

892 1601-0450
 Chapter 17 - Specifications

TEST REFERENCE STANDARD TEST LEVEL

Voltage Dip & interruption IEC61000-4-11 0, 40, 70, 80% dips, 250/300 cycle
interrupts
Harmonic Immunity IEC61000-4-13 Class 3
Conducted RF Immunity 0-150kHz IEC61000-4-16 Level 4
Ingress Protection IEC60529 IP54 front
Environmental (Cold) IEC60068-2-1 -40C 16 hrs
Environmental (Dry heat) IEC60068-2-2 85C 16hrs
Relative Humidity Cyclic IEC60068-2-30 6 day humidity variant 2
EFT IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1 4kV, 5 kHz
Damped Oscillatory IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1 2.5 kV, 1 MHz
Dielectric Between contacts IEEE C37.90 1500Vrms
Make and Carry IEEE C37.90 30A /200 ops
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEEE/ANSI C37.90.3 8kV DC/ 15 kV AD
Product Safety IEC60255-27 As per standard
Rated Burden, IEC60255-1 Sec 6.10
Contact Performance IEC60255-1 Sec 6.11

Note:
May contain components with FCC ID: XF6-RS9110N1122 and IC ID: 8407A-RS9110N1122

1601-0450 893
Chapter 17 - Specifications

17.14 ENVIRONMENTAL

AMBIENT TEMPERATURES
Storage/Shipping: -40°C to 85°C
Operating: -40°C to 60°C
Humidity Operating up to 95% (non condensing) @ 55°C (As per
IEC60068-2-30 Variant 2, 6 days)
Altitude: 2000m (standard base reference evaluated altitude)
5000m (maximum achievable altitude)
Pollution Degree: II
Overvoltage Category: II
Ingress Protection: IP54 Front (845,850, 869, 889)
IP 50 Front (859)
Insulation Class: 1
Noise: 0 dB

894 1601-0450
 Chapter 17 - Specifications

17.15 LONG-TERM STORAGE

The device should be stored in an environment that is dry, corrosive-free, and not in direct sunlight.
Correct storage will prevent premature component failures caused by environmental factors such as moisture or
corrosive gases. Exposure to high humidity or corrosive environments will prematurely degrade the electronic
components in any electronic device regardless of its use or manufacturer, unless specific precautions, such as
those mentioned in the Environmental section, are taken.
We recommend that you power up all stored relays once per year, for one hour continuously, to avoid deterioration
of electrolytic capacitors and subsequent relay failure.

1601-0450 895
Chapter 17 - Specifications

896 1601-0450
APPENDIX A

APPENDIX A
Appendix A - Appendix A

898 1601-0450
 Appendix A - Appendix A

1 WARRANTY
For products shipped as of 1 October 2013, GE Digital Energy warrants most of its GE manufactured products for
10 years. For warranty details including any limitations and disclaimers, see the GE Digital Energy Terms and
Conditions on the GE website.
For products shipped before 1 October 2013, the standard 24-month warranty applies.

1601-0450 899
Appendix A - Appendix A

900 1601-0450
Imagination at work

GE Vernova
650 Markland Street
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6C 0M1
+44 (0) 1785 250 070
[email protected]

© 2023 General Electric. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is
given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and
commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third
parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

1601-0450